Manual Tractor New Hollan NT75D PDF

TN55D, TN55S, TN65D, TN65S,
TN70D, TN70S, TN75D, TN75S

REPAIR MANUAL
COMPLETE CONTENTS
SECTION 00 - GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
SECTION 10 - ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
SECTION 18 - CLUTCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SECTION 21 - TRANSMISSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
SECTION 23 - FWD TRANSFER BOX AND AUTO FWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
SECTION 25 - FRONT AXLE (FWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
SECTION 27 - REAR MECHANICAL DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
SECTION 31 - MECHANICAL POWER TAKE-OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
SECTION 33 - BRAKING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
SECTION 35 - HYDRAULIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
SECTION 41 - STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
SECTION 44 - AXLES AND WHEELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
SECTION 50 - CAB AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
SECTION 55 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
SECTION 90 - CAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
The following pages are the collation of the contents pages from each section and
chapter of the TND and TNS Series Repair manual. Complete Repair part # 87059380.
The sections used through out all New Holland product Repair manuals may not be
used for each product. Each Repair manual will be made up of one or several books.
Each book will be labeled as to which sections are in the overall Repair manual and
which sections are in each book.
The sections listed above are the sections utilized for the TND and TNS Series Tractors.
© 2005 CNH America LLC 87059388 3/05

Printed In U.S.A.
SECTION 00 -- GENERAL
BOOK 1 - 87059381
Chapter 1 -- General
CONTENTS
Section Description Page

General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Safety Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
SECTION 10 -- ENGINE
BOOK 1 - 87059381
Chapter 1 -- Engine
CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Speedometer/Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Timing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Fuel Supply Pump Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Crankcase/Cylinder Block Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Crankcase and Bearings Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connecting Rod Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Piston Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Valve Timing Gear Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Tappet Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Rocker Arm -- Valve Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Cylinder Head Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Lubrication System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Cooling System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Torque Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2
BOOK 1 - 87059381
Chapter 1 -- Engine (Continued)

CONTENTS

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
10 001 10 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
10 001 30 Compression Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
10 001 54 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Checks, Dimensions and Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Cylinder Block and Cylinder Liners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Crankshaft, Main Bearings and Flywheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Connecting Rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Pistons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Camshaft, Tappets and Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Valve Seats In Cylinder Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Lubrication System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
10 101 53 Valve Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
10 101 60 Injector Sleeves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
10 102 70 Crankshaft Front Oil Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
10 106 12 Valve/Rocker Arm Clearance Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
10 216 10 Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
10 218 30 Fuel Injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
10 246 14 Bosch Injection Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Fuel Circuit Air Bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
3
SECTION 18 -- CLUTCH
BOOK 1 - 87059381
Chapter 1 -- Clutch
CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Luk 11”/11” Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Luk 11” Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Tightening Torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Description and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
18 110 10 Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
18 110 30 Dual Disk Clutch 11”/11” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
18 110 30 11” Single Clutch (fitted with the power-shuttle gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Checks, Measurements and Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Dual Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Coplanarity Adjustment of 11”/11” Dual Clutch Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Coplanarity Adjustment of 11” Single Plate Clutch Release Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
18 100 40 Main Clutch Control Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
PTO Clutch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4
SECTION 21 -- TRANSMISSIONS
BOOK 2 - 87059382
Chapter 1 -- Mechanical Transmission (8 x 8) and (16 x 16)

Synchro-Command
CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Shuttle Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Gearbox and Range Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Description and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Rear Transmission -- Gearbox Casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
21 118 10 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
21 118 12 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
21 118 85 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
21 130 10 Gearbox Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
21 130 11 Range Gear Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
5
BOOK 2 - 87059382
Chapter 2 -- Power Shuttle Transmission (8 x 8 and 16 x 16 versions)

CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Shuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Power Shuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Clutches Control Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
21 118 85 Transmission -- Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
21 134 46 Power Shuttle Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
21 134 70 A + B Clutch Valve Solenoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
21 154 60 Dump Valve Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
21 154 34 Clutch Casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
6
BOOK 2 - 87059382
Chapter 3 -- Power Shuttle Transmission Calibration,

Faults and Diagnostics
CONTENTS

Fault Codes Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Description of Systems (ECM and Calibration and Diagnostic Unit -- CDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Automatic Self-Diagnosis (ECM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
ECM First Start Up (Self Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Transmission Disabled Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Diagnosis During Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Calibration and Diagnostics Unit (CDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Power Shuttle Fault Code Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Calibration and Diagnostic Unit Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
HH Menu Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
H1 -- Clutches A and B Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
H2 -- Clutches A and B Calibration Values Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
H3 -- System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
H4 -- Power Shuttle Hardware and Software
Revision Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
H5 -- Control Switch Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
H6 -- Clutch A Fill Time Modification and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
H7 -- Clutch B Fill Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
H8 -- Erasure of Data Stored in the Non-Volatile
Memory (NVM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
H9 -- Voltmeter Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
HA -- Clutch Pedal Potentiometer and Status Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Clutch Pedal Potentiometer Replacement and Clutch
Pedal Switch Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
HC -- Transmission Oil Temperature Sender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
HD -- HI/LO Synchronizer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
HE -- Gear Change Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
HF -- Stored Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Troubleshooting Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Description of Systems (ECM and Electronic Service Tool -- EST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Automatic Self-Diagnosis (ECM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
ECM First Start Up (Self Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Transmission Disabled Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Diagnosis During Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Power Shuttle Fault Code Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
7
BOOK 2 - 87059382

Faults and Diagnostics (Continued)
CONTENTS

Electronic Service Tool (EST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Downloading the Latest Software into
TN Series Tractor Power Shuttle Control
Module with the Electronic Service Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Connecting the Electronic Service Tool
(EST) to the Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Revision Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Memory (NVM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
HF -- Stored Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Troubleshooting Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Power Shuttle (8 x 8 and 16 x 16) Electronic Control Unit
Input/Output Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
8
SECTION 23 -- FWD TRANSFER BOX AND AUTO FWD
BOOK 3 - 87059383
Chapter 1 -- FWD Transfer Box

CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
FWD Electrohydraulic Engagement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Transmission Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
FWD Drive Gear With Electrohydraulic Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
23 101 26 Transmission Shafts and Guard (TN55S, TN65S and TN75S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
23 101 26 Transmission Shafts and Guard (TN55D, TN65D and TN75D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
23 101 40 Drive Gear Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
23 141 42 Disassembly (Mechanical Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Assembly (Mechanical Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Disassembly (Electrohydraulic Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Assembly (Electrohydraulic Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
9
BOOK 3 - 87059383
Chapter 2 -- Auto FWD, Calibration and Diagnostics

CONTENTS

Automatic FWD Fault Codes Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Faults Code Decoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
HH Menu Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
H3 -- System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
H4 -- Software Revision Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
H5 -- Control Switches Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
H8 -- Deleting Data From the Non--Volatile Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
H9 -- Voltmeter Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
HD -- FWD Engagement Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
HF -- Errors Stored in the Non--Volatile Storage of the ECU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
First Start--Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
ECU Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
PTO and FWD Electronic Control Unit Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
10
SECTION 25 -- FRONT AXLE (FWD)
BOOK 3 - 87059383
Chapter 1 -- Front Axle (Super Steer Axle)

CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
25 100 30 Front Axle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
25 102 15 Bevel Drive and Front Axle Differential Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
25 102 20 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
25 102 24 Front Axle Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
25 104 34 Front Differential Lock Clutch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
25 108 30 Front Epicyclic Final Drive with Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Wheel Hub Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
25 108 30 Front Epicyclic Final Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
11
BOOK 3 - 87059383
Chapter 1 -- Front Axle (Super Steer Axle) (Continued)

CONTENTS

Planetary Gears (TN55S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Planetary Gears (TN65S, TN70S, TN75S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Wheel Hub Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
25 108 38 Wheel Hub and Steering Knuckle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
25 108 46 Steering Knuckle Pins and Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
44 511 80 Front Drive Wheels Toe--In Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
12
BOOK 3 - 87059383
Chapter 2 -- Front Axle (FWD)

CONTENT

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Front Axle Hydraulic Differential Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
25 104 34 Front Differential Lock Clutch Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Stub Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Bevel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Bevel Drive Shaft Bearing Preload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Drive Pinion Position Adjustment Shim Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Differential Bearings and Backlash Between Pinion and Ring Gear . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Limited Slip Self--Locking Differential Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
25 102 27 Front Axle Differential with Limited Slip Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
13
BOOK 3 - 87059383
Chapter 2 -- Front Axle (FWD) (Continued)

CONTENT

Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Planetary Gears (TN55D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Planetary Gears (TN65D, TN70D, TN75D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Planetary Gears TN55D (with brake) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Planetary Gears TN65D, TN70D, TN75D (with brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
14
SECTION 27 -- REAR MECHANICAL DRIVE
BOOK 3 - 87059383
Chapter 1 -- Rear Mechanical Transmission

CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Bevel Gear Pair and Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Lateral Final Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Bevel Gear Pair and Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Lateral Final Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Hydraulically Controlled Differential Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
27 106 16 Rear Transmission Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
27 110 10 Adjusting the Position of Differential Lock Engagement Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Bevel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
27 120 10 RH or LH Lateral Final Drive Box Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
27 120 34 Drive Wheel Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
27 120 32 Epicyclic Final Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
15
SECTION 31 -- MECHANICAL POWER TAKE-OFF
BOOK 3 - 87059383
Chapter 1 -- Mechanical Power Take-off

CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Mechanically Engaged PTO Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Servo Assist PTO Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
31 112 20 Mechanical PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
PTO Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
PTO Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

BOOK 3 - 87059383
Chapter 2 -- PTO Servo-Assist Valve

CONTENTS

Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
PTO Clutch Servo Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Hydraulic PTO Servo Assist Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
PTO Engaged Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
16
SECTION 33 -- BRAKING SYSTEM
BOOK 3 - 87059383
Chapter 1 -- Braking System

CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
33 202 60 Right or Left Hand Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
33 202 46 Brake Hydraulic Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Service Brakes Control Pedals Stroke (tractors with cabs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
33 202 04 Brake Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Air Bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
33 110 40 Parking Brake Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
33 110 08 Hand Brake Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Stroke Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
17
SECTION 35 -- HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
BOOK 4 - 87059384
Chapter 1 -- High Pressure System Description and Operation

CONTENTS
Operation Description Page

Precautionary Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
35 104 High-Pressure System Hydraulic Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
35 110 Mechanically Controlled Hydraulic Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Principles of Draft Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Principles of Position Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Principles of Float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Principles of Draft and Position Control Combined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Lift-O-Matic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Hydraulic Power Lift (HPL) Control Valve Oil Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Lift Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Neutral Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Lower Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Remote Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Simple Self-Centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Simple Self-Centering with Float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Detent with Auto-Release and Float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Rear Remote Valve Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Rear Remote Valve Stacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Rear Remote Valve Control Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Quick-Fit Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Zero Pressure Return Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Mid-Mount Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Mid-Mount Coupler Relocation Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Joystick Control for Mid-Mount Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Switching Between Single and Double-Acting Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Double-Acting Valve with Automatic Detent Release and Float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Float Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Lift Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Lower Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
18
BOOK 4 - 87059384

(Continued)
CONTENTS

Double-Acting Valve less Automatic Detent Release and Float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Lift Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Lower Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Single-Acting Valve less Automatic Detent Release and Float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Lift Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Lower Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Hydraulic System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
19
BOOK 4 - 87059384
Chapter 2 -- High Pressure System Overhaul and Adjustment
CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
35 110 40 Mechanically Controlled Lift Internal Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Mechanically Controlled Lift Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Position Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Upper Stroke Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Draft Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Position Control Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Draft Control Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Lift-O-Matic Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Lift Arm Descent Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Lift-O-Matic Device Upper Stroke Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
35 110 42 Arm Shaft and Lift Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
35 114 14 Mechanically Controlled Lift Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
35 114 30 Lift Pressure Relief Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
35 114 32 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
35 104 30 Hydraulic Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
35 204 46 Auxiliary Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Disassembly -- Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
20
BOOK 4 - 87059384
Chapter 3 -- Low-Pressure System Description and Operation
CONTENTS

35 260 Description and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Low-Pressure, Steering and Lubrication System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Low-Pressure Oil Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Transmission Lubrication System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Steering System Oil Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Electro-Hydraulic Rear Differential Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Electro-Hydraulic Front Differential Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Electro-Hydraulic Four-Wheel Drive (FWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
PTO Servo-Assist Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

BOOK 4 - 87059384
Chapter 4 -- Low-Pressure System Test Fitting Locations
CONTENTS

System Test Fitting Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
21
BOOK 4 - 87059384
Chapter 5 -- Electronically Controlled Hydraulic Lift

CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Electronic Lift Controls Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Control Valve and Sensors Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Electronically Controlled Lift General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Electronically Controlled Hydraulic Lift General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Neutral Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Lifting Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Lowering Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
35 110 30 Electronically Controlled Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
35 110 53 Draft Sensor Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
35 130 30 Electronic Control Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
35 130 36 Lift Arm Potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
35 130 56 Draft Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
35 134 42 Hydraulic Lift Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
22
BOOK 4 - 87059384
Chapter 5 -- Electronically Controlled Hydraulic Lift (Continued)

CONTENTS

Cylinder Safety Valve Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
35 138 20 Lift Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
35 138 24 Disassembly -- Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Lift Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Calibration and Diagnostic Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Connecting the Calibration and Diagnostic Unit to the Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Electronically Controlled Lift Fault Code Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Calibrating the Electronic Lift with the CDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
HH Menu Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
H1 -- Rear Lift Raising and Lowering Solenoid Valves Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
H2 -- Rear Lift Current Calibration Values Display (EDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
H3 -- ECU Configuration and Modification Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
H4 -- Software Revision Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
H5 -- Control Switches Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
H6 -- Draft Sensors Values Display (LVDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
H8 -- Cancellation of Data Stored in the Non-Volatile Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
HA -- Rear Hydraulic Lift Arms Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
HF -- Faults Stored in the Non-Volatile Storage of the ECU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
First Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Fault Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
ECU Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
23
BOOK 4 - 87059384
Chapter 6 -- Trailer Brake Control Valves

CONTENTS

Functional Testing and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
33 220 40 Trailer Brake Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
24
BOOK 4 - 87059384
Chapter 7 -- Electronic Lift and Front Power Take-Off
CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Front Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Front Power Take-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Front Lift Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
31 140 30 Front PTO Transmission Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
31 140 34 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
31 140 43 Front Power Take-Off Electromagnetic Coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
31 140 46 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
31 162 52 Front Lift Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Front Power Take-Off Fault Codes and Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Calibrating the Front PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
HH Menu Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
H8 -- Deleting Data From the Non-Volatile Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
HD -- FWD Engagement Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
HF -- Errors Stored in the Non-Volatile Storage of the ECU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
25
BOOK 4 - 87059384
Chapter 7 -- Electronic Lift and Front Power Take-Off (Continued)
CONTENTS

First Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Fault Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
ECU Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Calibrating the Front Electronic Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Connecting the Calibration and Diagnostic Unit (CDU) to the Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Electronically Controlled Front Lift Fault Code Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
HH Menu Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
H8 -- Cancellation of the Data Stored in the Non-Volatile Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
H9 -- Voltmeter Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
HA -- Rear Lift Arms Position Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
HB -- Front Lift Arms Position Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
First Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Fault Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
ECU Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Front PTO and FWD Electronic Control Unit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Front/Rear Electronic Lift ECU Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
26
SECTION 41 -- STEERING
BOOK 5 - 87059385
Chapter 1 -- Steering
CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
41 204 10 Hydrostatic Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
41 204 30 Hydrostatic Steering Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
41 204 34 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
41 204 38 Bench Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
27
BOOK 5 - 87059385
Chapter 2 -- Open Center Flow Gear Pump

CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Hydraulic Pump -- Mechanical Shuttle Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Hydraulic Pump -- A 31 XRP 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
41 206 20 Hydrostatic Steering Oil Pump (A 31 XRP 2 pump model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
28
SECTION 44 -- AXLES AND WHEELS
BOOK 5 - 87059385
Chapter 1 -- Axles and Wheels

CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
44 101 22 Front Axle Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
44 101 30 Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
44 101 46 Stub Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
44 511 80 Checking the Alignment of the Leading Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
29
SECTION 50 -- CAB AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
BOOK 5 - 87059385
Chapter 1 -- Cab Air Conditioning System

CONTENTS

Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Main Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Sanden SD 5H11 Model Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Filter/Dryer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Thermostatic Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Evaporator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Cab Heating and Ventilation Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Electric Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Temperature Control Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Cab Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Air Conditioning and Temperature Control Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Heating Control Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3-Speed Electric Fan Control Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
50 200 03 Function and Cooling Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Pressure Variations at Different Altitudes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Cab Vents Temperature Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Refrigerant Recovery -- Recycling and Evacuation -- Charging Stations . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Dehydration, Recharging and Refrigeration Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
System Charging Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
30
BOOK 5 - 87059385
Chapter 1 -- Cab Air Conditioning System (Continued)

CONTENTS

Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Checks and Eventual Elimination of Gas Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Checking for Refrigerant Leaks Using an Electronic Leak Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Compressor Drive Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Cab Air infeed Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Cab Heating/Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Cab Heating Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Evaporator Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Electric Fan Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
31
SECTION 55 -- ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
BOOK 5 - 87059385
Chapter 1 -- All Tractor Serial Numbers

CONTENTS

How to Use this Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
32
BOOK 5 - 87059385
Chapter 2 -- Starting System (All Serial Numbers)

CONTENTS

Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
System Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Starting System Test on Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Current Intake in Starter Motor Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Ignition System Circuit Resistance (voltage drop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Battery Positive Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Starter Motor Ground Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Battery Ground Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
55 201 50 Starter Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Removal and Re-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Starter Motor Removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
55 201 54 Disassembly and Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Armature Shaft End Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Starter Motor Test Without Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Bench Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Bench Test Armature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Field Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Bearing Bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Drive Pinion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
33
BOOK 5 - 87059385
Chapter 3 -- Charging System (All Serial Numbers)

CONTENTS

Alternator Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Alternator Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
System Testing and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Checking the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Checking the Driving Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Checking the Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Preliminary Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Alternator Wire Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Charging Current and Regulated Voltage Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Charging Circuit Voltage Drop Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Insulated Side Voltage Drop Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Ground Side Voltage Drop Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Maximum Alternator Output Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Alternator Component Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
55 301 10 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Rotor and Regulator Field Circuit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Checking The Continuity of Three Stator Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Checking The Diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Excitation Diodes Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Positive Power Diodes Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Negative Power Diodes Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Check on Rotor Winding Resistance Measured Between Pins
Connected to Brushes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
55 301 12 Alternator Removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Electronic Voltage Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Inductor Winding Insulation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Check On Inductor (Rotor) Resistance on Slip Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Re-installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
34
BOOK 5 - 87059385
Chapter 4 -- Battery (All Serial Numbers)

CONTENTS

55 301 40 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Re-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Battery Checking and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Relative Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Battery Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Dry Charged Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Charging the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Normal Charging (Top-Up) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Charging Very Flat Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Relative Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Test Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Battery Problems -- Frequent Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
35
BOOK 5 - 87059385
Chapter 5 -- Cab Electrical Components (All Serial Numbers)

CONTENTS

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
55 404 14 Direction Indicator Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
55 418 10 Multi-Function Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
55 440 06 Services Electronic Control Centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
55 440 08 Powershuttle Electronic Control Centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
55 510 20 Fuse Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
55 510 22 Fuses -- Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
55 512 34 Loudspeakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
55 514 22 Cab Lamp Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
55 518 52 Windscreen Wiper Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
55 518 82 Rear Windscreen Wiper Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
36
BOOK 6 - 87059386
Chapter 6 -- All Tractors Before Serial Number 1269072

CONTENTS


BOOK 6 - 87059386
Chapter 7 -- Instruments (Before Serial Number 1269072)

CONTENTS

Analog Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Fuel Level Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Proofmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Transmitters, Sensors and Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Electronic Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Electronic Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Sector 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Sector 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Sector 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Speed Display Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Multiple Indication Instrument Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
37
BOOK 6 - 87059386
Chapter 8 -- Switches and Controls

(Before Serial Number 1269072)
CONTENTS

Component Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Dashboard Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Analog Instrument Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Digital Instrument Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Hazard Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Powershuttle Transmission Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Stalk Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Direction Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Flashing the Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Side/Tail Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Dipped Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Main-Beam Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Clock Setting Button (digital instrument only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Function Selection Button (digital instrument only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Dual Drive Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Automatic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Permanent Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Cab Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Cab Controls on Cab Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Cab Internal Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Cab Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Air Conditioner Operation and Adjustment Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Heater Control Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Fan Control Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Controls on Right Riser Inside the Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Rotating Light Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Work Lights Control Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Front Windshield Wiper Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Front Windscreen Washer Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Rear Windscreen Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
38
BOOK 6 - 87059386

(Before Serial Number 1269072) (Continued)
CONTENTS

Right-Hand Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Right-Hand Mudguard (lift without electronic control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Electro-Hydraulic Differential Lock Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
External Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Central Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Thermostart Control Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Electronic Lift Control Warning Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
55 404 02 Front Headlight Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
55 404 04 Front, Side/Tail Light and Direction Indicator Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Cab Front and Rear Work Light Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
55 404 02 Tractor Work Light Lamps with Safety Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
55 404 04 Tail Light and Direction Indicator Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
55 404 Courtesy and Spot Light Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Courtesy Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Spot Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
39
BOOK 6 - 87059386
Chapter 9 -- Connectors (Before Serial Number 1269072)

CONTENTS

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Electrical Circuit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Main Wiring (version with cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Dashboard – Component Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Main Wiring (version without cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Main Front Wiring (engine and light circuits) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Main Cab Wiring (version with cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Main Platform Wiring (version without cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Rear Main Wiring (transmission circuit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Alarm Circuit Wiring (N.A.S.O. version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Electric Wire Color Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Electrical Wire and Connector Identification Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
40
BOOK 6 - 87059386
Chapter 10 -- Wiring Diagrams for Tractors Before SN 1232544

CONTENTS

How to Use Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Harness Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Configuration Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Individual System Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Auto 4WD / Mechanical Lift / Hydraulic Diff Lock / Less Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Individual System Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Fuse and Relay Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2WD (Mechanical 4WD) / Mechanical Lift / Mechanical Diff Lock / With Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Electro-Hydraulic 4WD / Mechanical Lift / With Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Harness Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Configuration Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Fuse and Relay Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Auto 4WD / Mechanical Lift / Hydraulic Diff Lock / With Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Configuration Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Individual System Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Symbols Used in Electrical Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Wire Color Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Wiring and Connections Identification Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
41
BOOK 6 - 87059386
Chapter 11 -- Wiring Diagrams for Tractors with a Serial Number

Between 1232545 and 1269071
CONTENTS

Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
42
BOOK 7 - 87059387
Chapter 12 -- Tractor After Serial Number 1269071

CONTENTS


BOOK 7 - 87059387
Chapter 13 -- Instruments (After Serial Number 1269071)

CONTENTS

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Fuel Level Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Proofmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Electronic Module Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Electronic Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Sector 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Sector 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Sector 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Adjusting the Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
43
BOOK 7 - 87059387

(After Serial Number 1269071)
CONTENTS

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Description of Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Central Console Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Control Panel with Analog Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Hazard Light Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Lights/Horn Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Direction Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Flashing the Front Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Side Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Dipped Beam Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Full Beam Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Clock Adjustment Pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Function Selection Pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4WD Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Permanent Engagement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Front Lift Raise/Lower Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Front Lift Function Selection Potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Travel Adjustment Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Working Position Adjustment Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Anti-Swing Arms Adjustment Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Front PTO Control Pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Controls on Right-hand Upright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Controls on Left-hand Cab Upright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
44
BOOK 7 - 87059387

(After Serial Number 1269071) (Continued)
CONTENTS

Controls on Right-hand Cab Upright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Rotating Beacon Light On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Work Light Control Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Front Windscreen Washer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Front Windscreen Washer Control Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Rear Screen Washer/Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Controls On Left-hand Cab Upright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Electro-hydraulic Differential Lock Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Right-hand Side Operating Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Controls on Right-hand Mudguard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Electro-hydraulic Differential Lock Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

BOOK 7 - 87059387
Chapter 15 -- Connectors (After Serial Number 1269071)

CONTENTS

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Electrical Circuit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Ground Location Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Ground Points Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Component / Connector Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Electric Wire Color Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Electrical Wire and Connector Identification Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
45
BOOK 7 - 87059387
Chapter 16 -- Wiring Diagrams for Tractors with a Serial Number

Between 1269072 and 1297484
CONTENTS

How To Use The Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Harness Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Configuration Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Individual System Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Fuse and Relay Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Electro-hydraulic 4WD / Mechanical Lift / With Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Harness Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Configuration Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Individual System Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Fuse and Relay Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Harness Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Symbols Used In Electrical Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
46
BOOK 7 - 87059387
Chapter 17 -- Wiring Diagrams for Tractors After Serial Number 1297485

CONTENTS

Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
47
SECTION 90 -- CAB
BOOK 7 - 87059387
Chapter 1 -- Cab
CONTENTS

Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
90 100 22 Hood Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
90 100 80 Protective Grill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
90 100 84 Hood Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
90 110 14 Instrument Panel Lower Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
90 110 36 Platform Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
90 114 10 Safety Frame Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
90 150 10 Cab Assembly with Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
90 150 10 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
90 156 14 Cab Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
90 160 16 Right or Left-Hand Upright Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
90 160 60 Cab Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
90 160 60 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Sun Shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
88 120 10 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
48
SECTION 00 -- GENERAL -- CHAPTER 1 1
SECTION 00 -- GENERAL
Chapter 1 -- General
CONTENTS

General Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Safety Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Consumables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2 SECTION 00 -- GENERAL -- CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
IMPORTANT NOTICE
All maintenance and repair work described in this manual must be performed exclusively by NEW HOLLAND
service technicians, in strict accordance with the instructions given and using any specific tools necessary.
Anyone performing the operations described herein without strictly following the instructions is personally re-
sponsible for any eventual injury or damage to property.
BATTERY
Before carrying out any kind of service operation disconnect and isolate the battery negative lead, unless other-
wise requested for specific operations (e.g.: operations that require the engine running). Once the specific oper-
ation has been completed, disconnect the lead in order to complete the operation.
SHIMMING
For each adjustment operation, select adjusting shims and measure individually using a micrometer, then add
up the recorder values. Do not rely on measuring the entire shimming set, which may be incorrect, or the rated
value indicated for each on shim.
ROTATING SHAFT SEALS

For correct rotating shaft seal installation, proceed as follows:
-- before assembly, allow the seal to soak in the oil it will be sealing for at least thirty minutes;
-- thoroughly clean the shaft and check that the working surface on the shaft is not damaged;
-- position the sealing lip facing the fluid; with hydrodynamic lips, take into consideration the shaft rotation direc-
tion and position the grooves so that they will deviate the fluid towards the inner side of the seal;
-- coat the sealing lip with a thin layer of lubricant (use oil rather than grease) and fill the gap between the sealing
lip and the dust lip on double lip seals with grease;
-- insert the seal in its seat and press down using a flat punch, do not tap the seal with a hammer or mallet;
-- while inserting the seal, check that the it is perpendicular to the seat; once settled, make sure that it makes
contact with the thrust element, if required;
-- to prevent damaging the seal lip on the shaft, position a protective guard during installation operations.
O--RING SEALS
Lubricate the O--RING seals before inserting them in the seats, this will prevent them from overturning and twist-
ing, which would jeopardise sealing efficiency.
SEALING COMPOUNDS
Apply one of the following sealing compounds on the mating surfaces marked with an X: RTV SILMATE, RHO-
DORSIL CAF 1 or LOCTITE PLASTIC GASKET.
Before applying the sealing compound, prepare the surfaces as follows:
-- remove any incrustations using a metal brush;
-- thoroughly de--grease the surfaces using one of the following cleaning agents: trichlorethylene, petrol or a
water and soda solution.
BEARINGS
When installing bearings it is advised to:
-- heat the bearings to 80 to ÷ 90°C (176 to 194°F) before fitting on the shafts;
-- allow the bearings to cool before installing them from the outside.
SPRING PINS
When fitting split socket spring pins, ensure that the pin notch is positioned in the direction of the force required
to stress the pin.
Spiral spring pins do not require special positioning.
SPARE PARTS
Only use original NEW HOLLAND spare parts bearing the logo shown below.
1
Only original spare parts guarantee the same quality, duration and safety as they are the same parts that are
assembled during production.
Only original NEW HOLLAND parts can offer this guarantee.
When ordering spare parts, always provide the following information:
-- tractor model (commercial name) and frame number;
-- engine type and number;
-- part number of the ordered part, which can be found in the “Microfiches” or the “Spare Parts Catalog”, used
for order processing.
TOOLS
The tools that NEW HOLLAND propose and illustrate in this manual are:
-- specifically researched and designed for use with NEW HOLLAND tractors;
-- essential for reliable repair operations;
-- accurately built and rigorously tested so as to offer efficient and long--lasting operation.
By using these tools, Repair Personnel will benefit from:
-- operating in optimal technical conditions;
-- obtaining the best results;
-- saving time and effort;
-- working in safe conditions.
NOTE
Wear limit values indicated for certain parts should be considered to be recommended, but not binding. The terms
“front”, “rear”, “right--hand” and “left--hand” (when referred to different parts) are intended as seen from the driv-
ing position with the tractor in the normal direction of movement.
MOVING THE TRACTOR WITH THE BATTERY REMOVED

External power supply cables should only be connected to the respective positive and negative cable terminals,
using efficient clamps that guarantee adequate and secure contact.
Disconnect all services (lights, windshield wipers, etc.) before starting the tractor.
If the tractor electrical system requires checking, carry out operations with the power supply connected. Once
checking is completed, disconnect all services and switch off the power supply before disconnecting the cables.
SAFETY REGULATIONS
WARNING AND DANGER SYMBOL
This warning symbol points out important messages
concerning your safety.
Carefully read the following safety regulations and
observe advised precautions in order to avoid
potential hazards and safeguard your health and
safety.
In this manual the symbol is accompanied by the
following key--words:
WARNING -- Warnings concerning unsuitable repair
operations that may jeopardise the safety of Repair
personnel.
DANGER -- Specific warnings concerning potential
2
hazards for operator safety or for other persons
directly or indirectly involved. -- Do not carry out repair operations with someone
sitting in the driver’s seat, unless the person is a
trained technician who is assisting with the oper-
ation in question.
ACCIDENT PREVENTION -- Do not operate the machine or use any of the im-
plements from different positions, other than the
Most accidents or injuries that occur in workshops driver’s seat.
are the result of non--observance of simple and -- Do not carry out operations on the machine with
fundamental safety regulations. For this reason, IN the engine running, unless specifically indicated.
MOST CASES THESE ACCIDENTS CAN BE -- Stop the engine and check that the hydraulic cir-
AVOIDED by foreseeing possible causes and cuits are pressure--free before removing caps,
consequently acting with the necessary caution and covers, valves, etc.
care.
-- All repair and maintenance operations must be
Accidents may occur with all types of machine, carried out using extreme care and attention.
regardless of how well the machine in question was -- Service steps and platforms used in the work-
designed and built. shop or elsewhere should be built according to
standard accident prevention regulations.
A careful and judicious service technician is the best
guarantee against accidents. -- Disconnect the batteries and label all controls to
indicate that the tractor is being serviced. Any
Precise observance of the most basic safety rule is parts that are to be raises must be locked in posi-
normally sufficient to avoid many serious accidents. tion.
-- Do not check or fill fuel tanks, accumulator bat-
DANGER. Never carry out any cleaning, lubrication teries, or use starting liquid when smoking or
or maintenance operations when the engine is near naked flames, as these fluids are inflam-
running. mable.
-- Brakes are inoperative when manually released
for repair or maintenance purposes. Use blocks
SAFETY REGULATIONS or similar devices to control the machine in these
conditions.
GENERAL GUIDELINES -- The fuel nozzle should always be in contact with
the filling aperture. Maintain this position until fill-
-- Carefully follow specified repair and mainten- ing operations are completed in order to avoid
ance procedures. possible sparks caused by the accumulation of
-- Do not wear rings, wristwatches, jewelry, unbut- static electricity.
toned or loose articles of clothing such as: ties, -- Only use specified towing points for towing the
torn clothing, scarves, open jackets or shirts with tractor. Connect parts carefully. Make sure that
open zips that may remain entangled in moving all pins and/or locks are secured in position be-
parts. It is advised to wear approved safety cloth- fore applying traction. Never remain near the
ing, e.g.: non--slip footwear, gloves, safety towing bars, cables or chains that are operating
goggles, helmets, etc. under load.
-- Transport tractors that cannot be driven using a -- Maintenance and repair operations must be car-
trailer or a low--loading platform trolley, if avail- ried out in a CLEAN and DRY area. Eliminate any
able. water or oil spillage immediately.
-- When loading or unloading the tractor from the -- Do not create piles of oil or grease--soaked rags
trailer (or other means of transport), select a flat as they represent a serious fire hazard. Always
area capable of sustaining the trailer or truck store rags in a closed metal container.
wheels. Firmly secure the tractor to the truck or Before starting the tractor or implements, make
trailer and lock the wheels in the position used by sure that the driver’s seat is locked in position.
the carrier. Also check that there are no persons within the
-- Electric heaters, battery--chargers and similar tractor or implement range of action.
equipment must only be powered by auxiliary po- -- Empty pockets of all objects that may fall unob-
wer supplies with efficient ground insulation to served into the tractor parts.
avoid electrical shock hazards. -- In the presence of protruding metal parts, use
-- Always use suitable hoisting or lifting devices protective goggles or goggles with side guards,
when raising or moving heavy parts. helmets, special footwear and gloves.
-- Take extra care if bystanders are present. -- When welding, use protective safety devices:
-- Never pour gasoline or diesel oil into open, wide tinted safety goggles, helmets, special overalls,
or low containers. gloves and footwear. All persons present in the
area where welding is taking place must wear
-- Never use gasoline, diesel oil or other inflam-
tinted goggles. NEVER LOOK DIRECTLY AT
mable liquids as cleaning agents. Use non--in-
THE WELDING ARC WITHOUT SUITABLE EYE
flammable, non toxic commercially available sol-
PROTECTION.
vents.
-- Metal cables tend to fray with repeated use. Al-
-- Wear safety goggles with side guards when
ways use suitable protective devices (gloves,
cleaning parts with compressed air.
goggles, etc.) when handling cables.
-- Limit the air pressure to a maximum of 2.1 bar (30
-- Handle all parts carefully. Do not put your hands-
psi), according to local regulations.
or fingers between moving parts. Wear suitable
-- Do not run the engine in confined spaces without safety clothing -- safety goggles, gloves and
suitable ventilation. shoes.
-- Do not smoke, use naked flames, or cause
sparks in the area when fuel filling or handling START UP
highly inflammable liquids.
-- Never run the engine in confined spaces that are
-- Never use naked flames for lighting when work- not equipped with adequate ventilation for ex-
ing on the machine or checking for leaks. haust gas extraction.
-- All movements must be carried out carefully -- Never place the head, body, limbs, feet, hands or
when working under, on or near the tractor. Wear fingers near fans or rotating belts.
protective equipment: helmets, goggles and
special footwear.
ENGINE
-- When carrying out checks with the engine run-
ning, request the assistance of an operator in the -- Always loosen the radiator cap slowly before re-
driver’s seat. The operator must maintain visual moving it to allow any remaining pressure in the
contact with the service technician at all times. system to be discharged. Filling up with coolant
should only be carried out with the engine
-- If operating outside the workshop, position the
stopped or idling (if hot).
tractor on a flat surface and lock in position. If
working on a slope, lock the tractor in position. -- Never fill up with fuel when the engine is running,
Move to a flat area as soon as is safely possible. especially if hot, in order to prevent the outbreak
of fire as a result of fuel spillage.
-- Damaged or bent chains or cables are unreliable.
Do not use them for lifting or towing. Always use -- Never check or adjust fan belt tension when the
suitable protective gloves when handling chains engine is running.
or cables. Never adjust the fuel injection pump when the
tractor is moving.
-- Chains should always be safely secured. Make
sure that the hitch--up point is capable of sustain- -- Never lubricate the tractor when the engine is
ing the load in question. Keep the area near the running.
hitch--up point, chains or cables free of all by-
standers.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS WHEELS AND TIRES

-- If it is necessary to use auxiliary batteries, re- -- Make sure that the tires are correctly inflated at
member that both ends of the cables must be the pressure specified by the manufacturer.
connected as follows: (+) with (+) and (--) with (--). Periodically check the rims and tires for damage.
Avoid short--circuiting the terminals. GAS RE-
-- Stand away from (at the side of) the tire when
LEASED FROM BATTERIES IS HIGHLY IN-
checking inflation pressure.
FLAMMABLE. During charging, leave the bat-
tery compartment uncovered to improve -- Only check pressure when the tractor is un-
ventilation. Never check the battery charge using loaded and the tires are cold, to avoid incorrect
“jumpers” (metal objects placed on the ter- readings as a result of over--pressure. Do not use
minals). Avoid sparks or flames near the battery parts of recovered wheels as incorrect welding
zone. Do not smoke to prevent explosion haz- brazing or heating may weaken and eventually
ards. cause damage to the wheel.
-- Before servicing operations, check for fuel or cur- -- Never cut or weld a rim mounted with an inflated
rent leaks. Eliminate any eventual leaks before tire.
proceeding with work. -- To remove the wheels, lock both the front and
-- Never charge batteries in confined spaces. Make rear vehicle wheels. After having raised the ve-
sure that there is adequate ventilation in order to hicle, position supports underneath, according to
prevent accidental explosion hazards as a result regulations in force.
of the accumulation of gases released during -- Deflate the tire before removing any objects that
charging operations. may be jammed in the tire tread.
-- Always disconnect the batteries before perform- -- Never inflate tires using inflammable gases; as
ing any kind of servicing on the electrical system. this may result in explosions and injury to by-
standers.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS
-- A liquid leaking from a tiny hole may be almost in-
visible but, at the same time, be powerful enough REMOVAL AND RE--FITTING
to penetrate the skin; Therefore, NEVER USE -- Lift and handle all heavy parts using suitable ho-
HANDS TO CHECK FOR LEAKS. Use a piece of isting equipment. Make sure that parts are sus-
cardboard or wood for this purpose. If any liquid tained by appropriate hooks and slings. Use the
penetrates skin tissue, call for medical aid im- hoisting eyebolts for lifting operations. Extra care
mediately. Failure to treat this condition with cor- should be taken if persons are present near the
rect medical procedure may result in serious in- load to be lifted.
fection or dermatosis.
-- Handle all parts carefully. Do not put your hands
-- In order to check the pressure in the system use or fingers between parts. Wear suitable safety
suitable instruments. clothing -- safety goggles, gloves and shoes.
-- Avoid twisting chains or metal cables. Always
wear safety gloves when handling cables or
chains.
CONSUMABLES
QUANTITY RECOMMENDED
COMPONENT TO BE NEW HOLLAND INTERNATIONAL
gals. NEW HOLLAND
FILLED OR TOPPED UP SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS
(litres) PRODUCTS
Cooling system: 2.64 Water and
50% antifreeze
without cab (10.0) AMBRA
ethylene glycol
3.17 AGRIFLU --
concentrate plus 50%
with cab (12.0) liquid 50% + 50%
clean soft water
(NH 900A)
Water and
Water and
Windscreen washer bottle . 0.52 (2.0) AREXONS DP1* --
windscreener wash
liquid*
Decanted and Decanted and filtered
Fuel tank: 19.81 (75) --
filtered diesel fuel diesel fuel
Engine sump: 1.77 AMBRA SUPER API CF--4/SG
without filter: . . . . . . . . . . . . . (6.7) GOLD CCMC D4
MIL--L--2104E
Premium multi--grade
NH 330G
15W--50
with filter: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.98 (7.5) (SAE 15W--40) API
CCMC D4
MIL--L--2104C
0.18 (0.7) AMBRA BRAKE N.H. mineral based
Brake circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LHM oil brake oil ISO 7308
With front brakes . . . . . . . . .
0.13 (0.5) (NH 610A) 86541699 DS)
Front axle: 1.18
axle casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (4.5)
final drives without brakes 0.21
TN55D/S (each) . . . . . . . . . . (0.8)
final drives with brakes 0.34
TN55D/S (each) . . . . . . . . . . (1.3)
final drives without brakes
TN65, TN70D/S TN75D/S Multigrade
AMBRA MULTI G
(each) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.26 (1.0) transmission rear
oil
final drives with brakes axle 134--D
(NH 410B)
TN65, TN70D/S TN75D/S 0.40 hydraulic oil
(each) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1.5)
Rear transmission (bevel

drive, final drives and
brakes), gearbox, hydraulic
lift, PTO and hydraulic
steering: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.09 (42)
AMBRA GR9 Multipurpose grease
Grease fittings . . . . . . . . . . . -- grease extreme pressure NLGI 2
(NH 710A) (EP)
Air conditioning system --
-- coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.21 (0.80) -- -- R--134a
-- oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.04 (0.15) SPA
(*) Detergent and anti--freeze to --10°C (14°F) with 50% of AREXONS DP1 liquid. For temperatures below --10°C
(14°F) fill only with AREXONS DP1 liquid.
SECTION 10 -- ENGINE -- CHAPTER 1 1
Chapter 1 -- Engine
CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Speedometer/Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Timing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Fuel Supply Pump Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Crankcase/Cylinder Block Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Crankcase and Bearings Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connecting Rod Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Piston Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Valve Timing Gear Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Tappet Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Rocker Arm -- Valve Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Cylinder Head Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Lubrication System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Cooling System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Torque Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
10 001 10 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
10 001 30 Compression Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
10 001 54 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Checks, Dimensions and Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Cylinder Block and Cylinder Liners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Crankshaft, Main Bearings and Flywheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Connecting Rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2 SECTION 10 -- ENGINE -- CHAPTER 1

Pistons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Camshaft, Tappets and Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Valve Seats In Cylinder Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Lubrication System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
10 101 53 Valve Guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
10 101 60 Injector Sleeves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
10 102 70 Crankshaft Front Oil Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
10 106 12 Valve/Rocker Arm Clearance Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
10 216 10 Fuel Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
10 218 30 Fuel Injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
10 246 14 Bosch Injection Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Fuel Circuit Air Bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine, technical type:
-- Models TN 55D and TN 55S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8035.05B.529
-- Models TN 65D and TN 65S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8035.05R.539
-- Models TN 70D and TN 70S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8035.25R.519
-- Models TN 75D and TN 75S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8035.25.529
Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . diesel, 4--stroke
Injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . direct
Number of on--line cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Cylinder liners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dry force--fitted in cylinder
block
Piston diameter
-- Models TN 55D and TN 55S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.09 in. (104 mm)
Piston stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.53 in. (115 mm)
Total displacement:
-- Models TN 55D and TN 55S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2931 cm3 (0.77 gallons)
Compression ratio for Models TN 55D, TN 55S, TN 65D and TN 65S . . . . . . . . 17:1 normally aspirated
Compression ratio for Models TN 70D, TN 70S, TN 75D and TN 75S . . . . . . . . 16.5:1 turbocharged
Maximum power:
-- Models TN 55D and TN 55S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 kW (50 Hp)
Maximum power speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2300 rpm
Maximum torque speed for Models TN 55D and TN 55S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1400 rpm
Number of main bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Sump pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . structural, cast iron
(continued)
(cont)
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . forced, with gear pump
Pump drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . camshaft
1st 50 hr oil (Break-in Engine Oil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10W--40--API SE/CC
After 50 hr. oil (Amora Super Gold HSP Engine Oil) . . . . . . . . . 15W--40--API CH--4/SD
Engine speed/oil pump speed ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Oil cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mesh filter on oil intake and filtering

cartridge on delivery line
Normal oil pressure with motor warmed--up and running at

maximum speed 203° to 221 °F (95° to 105 °C):
For Models TN 55D/S and TN 65D/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.06 to 56.56 psi (2.9 to 3.9 bar)
For Models TN 70D/S and TN 75D/S (start operation) . . . . . . . ≥ 29 psi (≥ 2 bar)
Pressure relief valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . incorporated in oil pump housing
Valve initial opening pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50.76 psi (3.5 bar)
COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . coolant circulation
Radiator on Models TN 55D/S and TN 65D/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 lines of vertical pipes with copper fins
Radiator on model. TN 70D/S and TN 75D/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 lines of vertical copper pipes
Fan, attached to coolant pump pulley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . intake, 6--blade in sheet--metal
Coolant pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . centrifugal vane--type
Engine speed/coolant pump speed ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1.25
Temperature control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . thermostat
Coolant thermometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . colored scale divided into 3 sections
Temperature ranges corresponding to each section:
-- initial white section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30° to 65 °C (86° to 149 °F)
-- middle green section (normal working conditions) . . . . . . . . 65° to 105 °C (149° to 221 °F)
-- final red section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105° to 115 °C (221° to 239 °F)
SPEEDOMETER/TACHOMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . incorporated in control panel
Operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . from gear on camshaft
Hour counter calibrated for engine speed of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1800 rpm

(continued)
(cont)
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
TIMING SYSTEM overhead valves operated by tappets, rods

and rocker arms via the camshaft located
in the engine block; the camshaft is driven
by the crankshaft using helical gears
Intake:
-- start: before TDC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12°
-- end: after BDC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31°
Drain:
-- start: before BDC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50°
-- end: after TDC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16°
Valve--rocker arm clearance for timing check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.45 mm (0.0177 in.)
Valve--rocker arm clearance (with engine cold):
-- intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.30 ± 0.05 mm (0.011 ± 0.0019 mm)
-- exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.30 ± 0.05 mm (0.011 ± 0.0019 mm)

FUEL SYSTEM
Air cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
dual cartridge dry air filter, with clogged
filter indicator with centrifugal pre--filter and
automatic dust ejector
Fuel supply pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . double diaphragm
Fuel filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . through wire filter in fuel supply pump, and
replaceable cartridge on delivery line to
injection pump
Minimum fuel flow rate with pump shaft rotating at 1600 rpm . . 100 liters/hour
(26.4 gallons/hour)
Cam operated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . engine timing
BOSCH injection pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rotating distributor type
All--speed governor, incorporated in pump:
BOSCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . centrifugal counterweights
Automatic advance regulator, incorporated in pump:
BOSCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hydraulic
For further fuel system technical data:
Fixed advance (pump setting for start of delivery before TDC)
-- Pressure setting -- Injection order, and other information
regarding the BOSCH pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
refer to the data for the relevant engine
type in the table on page 3
FUEL SYSTEM DATA (CONT.)
Turbocharger (Models TN 70D/S and TN 75D/S):
-- GARRETT type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T 25
Injection pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rotating distributor with speed governor

and advance variator incorporated
BOSCH pump:
-- Models TN 55D/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VE 3/11 F 1150 L 767

(see data -- pages 7--8)
-- Models TN 65D/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VE 3/11 F 1150 L 766

-- Models TN 70D/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VE 3/11 F 1150 L 764--2

-- Models TN 75D/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VE 3/11 F 1150 L 764

Direction of rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . counter--clockwise
Injection order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--2--3
Fuel injectors:
BOSCH type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500307714
-- Nozzle holder type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4791124
-- Nozzle type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DLLA 132S 1320 -- 99469341
Number of nozzle holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Nozzle hole diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.23 mm (0.01 in.)
Pressure setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 to 272 bar (3771.18 to 3945.23 psi )
Delivery lines for BOSCH pump
-- type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99441952
-- Pipe dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 x 1.75 x 540 mm

(0.24 x 0.07 x 21.26 in.)
MODELS TN 55D AND TN 55S -- CALIBRATION DATA FOR BOSCH INJECTION PUMP
TYPE VE 3/11 F 1150 L 767 -- VE 3/11 F 1150 L 767--1 -- 99441584 -- 500324953
ASSEMBLY DATA CALIBRATION TEST CONDITIONS
Pump timing on engine: delivery start 9° ± 0.5° before Test bench conforming to ISO 4008/1 .../2
TDC. of cylinder 1 compression stroke. Injectors conforming to ISO 7440--A61 --
Plunger pre--lift for timing on engine: 1 mm (0.0393 (1.688.901.027 with pad 0.5 mm [∅ 0.0196 in.]).
in.) from BDC. (with tools 291754 -- 291755). Injector pressure setting 250 to 353 bar
Cylinder No. 1 delivery line union on pump: marked (3626.13 to 5120.10 psi).
with letter A. Fuel supply pressure:
. . . . . . . . 0.35 ± 0.05 bar (5.076 ± 0.0725 psi).
ASSEMBLY DIMENSIONS Delivery pipes (conforming to ISO 4093.2):
. . . . . . . . 6 x 2 x 450 mm (0.236 x 0.078 x 17.71 in.).
SYMBOL K MS ya yb Graduate drain time . . . . . . . . . : 30”.
mm -- -- 38.5 to 40.5 42.8 to 48.0
Test liquid: ISO 4113 at a temperature of 45° ± 1 °C
(in.) (1.515 to 1.594) (1.685 to 1.889) (113° ± 33.8 °F).
1. START OF DELIVERY
Plunger pre--lift from TDC.: Pump rotation (viewed from drive side): Injection order: 1--2--3
mm -- counter--clockwise
2. ADVANCE REGULATOR STROKE

rpm: 1200 Advance stroke: mm 0.7 to 1.1 (0.0275 to 0.0433 in.)
3. FUEL SUPPLY PUMP PRESSURE
rpm: 1200 Internal pressure: bar 8.1 to 8.7 (117.41 to 126.18 psi)
4. FULL LOAD DELIVERY
rpm: 700 Delivery per 1000 shots: Spread: cm3 -- 3.5 (gal. 0.000925)
cm3 59.5 to 60.5 (gal. 0.0157 to 0.0159)
5. SPREAD GOVERNOR AT IDLE SPEED

rpm: 325 Delivery per 1000 shots: Spread: cm3
cm3 8.4 to 12.4 (gal. 0.0022 to 0.0032)
6. SPREAD GOVERNOR AT MAXIMUM SPEED
rpm: 1220 Delivery per 1000 shots: Spread: --
cm3 27 to 33 (gal. 0.007 to 0.008)
7. DELIVERY AT STARTING SPEED
rpm: 100 Delivery per 1000 shots:
cm3 60 to 100 (gal. 0.016 to 0.026)
8. INJECTION ADVANCE PROGRESSION
rpm 1200 1250
Advance stroke mm (in.) 0.7 to 1.1 (0.0275 to 0.0433) 1.4 to 1.8 (0.055 to 0.0708)
9. TRANSFER PRESSURE PROGRESSION
rpm 1200 400 700
Internal pressure bar (psi) 8.1 to 8.7 3.2 to 3.8 4.7 to 6.1
(117.41 to 126.18) (46.414 to 55.117) (68.171 to 88.477)
10. BACKFLOW
rpm 400 1150
Backflow l/h (gal./h) 13 to 33 (3.43 to 8.72) 25 to 37 (6.60 to 9.77)
(continued)
Note: The values shown above in brackets must be used for checking purposes only.
(continued)
11. DELIVERY PROGRESSION

Rpm Delivery per 1000 shots: cm3 (gallons)
1280 0 to 3.0 (0 to 0.0008)
1220 27 to 33 (0.007 to 0.008)
1150 50.5 to 53.5 (0.013 to 0.014)
700 59.5 to 60.5 (0.0157 to 0.0159)
400 52.8 to 60.8 (0.0139 to 0.016)
12. ZERO CAPACITY (STOP)

Rpm Voltage (volts) Delivery per 1000 shots:
cm3 (gallons)
325 0 0 to 3 (0 to 0.0008)
13. DELIVERY CHECK AT IDLE SPEED

Rpm 325 400 250
Delivery per 1000 shots: cm3 (gal.) 8.4 to 12.4 0 to 3.0 31.2 to 39.2
(0.002 to 0.003) (0 to 0.0008) (0.108 to 0.010)
15. AUTOMATIC START SUPPLEMENT

100 60 to 100 (0.0158 to 0.0264)
250 49 to 57 (0.0129 to 0.0151)
150 75 to 105 (0.0198 to 0.0277)
BENCH TEST PERFORMANCE DATA

Test conditions
Fixed advance before TDC cylinder No.1 in compression stroke: Relative humidity 70o/o ± 5.
(see previous page)
Engine without fan, air filter and exhaust silencer. Ambient temperature
25 ± 3o C (77 ± 37.4o F).
Atmospheric pressure 990 ± 10 mbar (14.36 ± 0.15 psi) Specific gravity of diesel fuel
840 g/l (7 lb./gal.)
Power output with engine run--in
Throttle
Engine speed Fuel consumption
for a total of:
l
lever B ki lload
Braking d applied
li d
2 hours 50 hours
position
rpm kW (hp) kW (hp) kg/h (lb/h)
For maximum power 35.7 to 37.9 8.0 to 8.5
Maximum 2300 ≥ 34.9 (47.4)
output (48.5 to 51.5) (17.64 to 18.74)
27.9 to 29.6 6.0 to 6.4
Maximum For maximum torque 1400 ≥ 27.3 (37.1)
(37.9 to 40.3) (13.23 to 14.11)
2470 to
Maximum None (no--load) -- -- --
2500
Minimum None (no--load) 625 to 675 -- -- --
MODELS TN 65D AND TN 65S -- CALIBRATION DATA FOR BOSCH INJECTION PUMP
TYPE VE 3/11 F 1150 L 766 -- VE 3/11 F 1150 L 766--1 -- 99441586 -- 500324955
Pump timing on engine: delivery start 9o ± 0.5o Test bench conforming to ISO 4008/1 .../2
before TDC of cylinder 1 compression stroke. Injectors conforming to ISO 7440--A61 --
Plunger pre--lift for timing on engine: 1 mm from BDC (1.688.901.027 with pad 0.5 mm [∅ 0.0196 in.]).
(with tools 291754 -- 291755). Injector pressure setting 250 to 353 bar
Cylinder No.1 delivery line union on pump: marked (3626.1 to 5120.1 psi).
with letter A. Supply pressure:
0.35 ± 0.05 bar (5.1 ± 0.7 psi).
SYMBOL K MS ya yb
6 x 2 x 450 mm (0.24 x 0.08 x 17.72 in.).
Graduate drain time . . . . . . . . . : 30”.
mm -- -- 36.5 to 38.5 42.8 to 48.0 Test liquid: ISO 4113 at a temperature of 45° ± 1 °C
(in.) (1.44 to 1.52) (1.63 to 1.83)
(113° ± 33.8 °F).
Plunger pre--lift from TDC: Pump rotation (viewed from drive side): Injection order: 1--2--3
mm -- counter--clockwise

Rpm: 1240 Advance stroke: mm 0.4 to 1.4 (0.016 to 0.055 in.)

Rpm: 1200 Internal pressure: bar 7.7 to 8.9 (11.7 to 129.1 psi)
4. FULL LOAD DELIVERY

Rpm: 700 Delivery per 1000 shots: Spread: cm3 ≤ 3.5 (gal. ≤ 0.000925)
cm3 64.1 to 69.1 (gal. 0.017 to 0.018)

Rpm: 325 Delivery per 1000 shots: Spread: cm3 ≤ 4.0 (gal. ≤ 0.00106)
cm3 15.9 to 23.9 (gal. 0.004 to 0.006)

Rpm: 1200 Delivery per 1000 shots: Spread:--
cm3 43.5 to 54.5 (gal. 0.011 to 0.014)
7. DELIVERY AT STARTING
Rpm: 100 Delivery per 1000 shots:
cm3 55 to 95 (gal. 0.015 to 0.025)

Rpm 1240 1280

Rpm 1200 400
Internal pressure supply bar (psi) 7.7 to 8.9 (111.7 to 129.1) 3.5 to 4.7 (50.8 to 68.17)
10. BACKFLOW
Rpm 400 1100
Backflow l/h (gal./h) 14 to 22 (3.70 to 5.81) 22 to 42 (5.81 to 11.10)
(continued overleaf)
(continued)

1270 0 to 3 (0 to 0.0008)
1200 43.5 to 54.5 (0.0114 to 0.0144)
700 64.1 to 69.1 (0.0169 to 0.01825)
1100 63.5 to 69.5 (0.0167 to 0.01836)
400 55.8 to 63.8 (0.0147 to 0.01685)
1150 61.5 to 69.5 (0.1625 to 0.01836)

Rpm Voltage (volts) Delivery per 1000 shots: cm3
(gallons)
325 0 0 to 3 (0 to 0.0008)

Rpm 325 360 275
Delivery per 1000 shots: cm3 (gallons) 15.9 to 23.9 0 to 3.0 37.6 to 51.6
(0.004 to 0.006) (0 to 0.0008) (0.010 to 0.014)
15. AUTOMATIC START SUPPLEMENT

100 55 to 95 (0.0145 to 0.0251)
270 52.5 to 62.5 (0.0139 to 0.0165)
180 73 to 103 (0.0193 to 0.0272)

Test conditions
(see previous page)
25 ± 3o C (77 ± 37.4o F).
840 g/l (7 lb./gal.)
Power output with engine run--in
Throttle Engine speed Fuel consumption
for a total of:
l
lever B ki lload
Braking d applied
li d
2 hours 50 hours
position
For maximum power 43 to 45.6 9.9 to 10.5
Maximum 2300 ≥ 42 (57.1)
output (58.5 to 62) (21.83 to 23.15)
30.0 to 31.8 6.4 to 6.8
Maximum For maximum torque 1400 ≥ 29.4 (40)
(40.8 to 43.2) (14.11 to 14.99)
2450 to
2500
MODELS TN 70 -- CALIBRATION DATA FOR BOSCH INJECTION PUMP
TYPE -- VE 4/11 F 1150 L 764--2
Pump timing on engine: delivery start 6o ± 0.5o be- Test bench conforming to ISO 4008/1 .../2
fore TDC of cylinder 1 compression stroke. Injectors conforming to ISO 7440--A61 --
Plunger pre--lift for timing on engine: mm 1 from (1.688.901.027 and pad with calibrated hole
P.M.I. (with tools 291754 -- 291755). ∅ 0.5 mm; 0.02 in.).
Cylinder No.1 delivery line union on pump: marked Injector pressure setting 250 to 253 bar (3626.1 to
with letter A. 5120.1 psi).
Supply pressure: 0.35 to± 0.05 bar (5.1 ± 0.7 psi).
SYMBOL K VHA ya yb mm 6 x 2 x 450 (0.24 x 0.08 x 17.72 in.)
Graduate drain time: . . . . . 30”.
mm -- 30,1 38.6 to 40.6 40.4 to 45.6 Test liquid: ISO 4113 at a temperature of 45o ±to 1oC
(1.45 to 1.60) (1.59 to 1.79)
(113o ± 33.8o F).
Plunger pre--lift from TDC: mm -- Pump rotation (viewed from drive side): Injection order:1--2--3--4--2
counter--clockwise
Rpm: 900 Advance stroke: mm 1.2 to 1.4
(inches 0.047 to 0.055)
Rpm: 900 Internal pressure:bar 6.8 to 7.4
(psi 98.6 to 107.3)
4. FULL-LOAD DELIVERY WITH BOOSTER PRESSURE
Rpm: 700 LDA pressure: kPa 100 Delivery per 1000 shots: cm3 80.5 to 81.5 Spread: cm3 ≤ 3.5
(gal. 0.0213 to 0.0215) (gal. ≤ 0.000925)
5. FULL-LOAD DELIVERY WITHOUT BOOSTER PRESSURE
Rpm: 600 Portata per 1000 mandate: cm3 73,5 ÷ 74,5
Rpm: 325 Delivery per 1000 shots: cm3 10.5 to 12.5 Spread: cm3 ≤ 4.5
(gal. 0.0027 to 0.0033) (gal. ≤ 0.0012)
Rpm: 1200 LDA pressure: kPa 100 Delivery per 1000 shots: cm3 53 to 54
(gal. 0.0140 to 0.0142)
Rpm: 100 Delivery per 1000 shots: cm3 80 to 110
(gal. 0.0211 to 0.0290)
LDA pressure kPa 100
Rpm 400 900
Internal supply pressure bar (psi) 3.4 to 4.4 (49.3 to 63.8) 6.8 to 7.4 (98.6 to 107.3)
Rpm 900 1000
11. BACKFLOW
Rpm 600 1150
LDA pressure kPa 0 100
Backflow cm3 (gal.) 19 to 29 (0.005 to 0.007) 24 to 38 (0.006 to 0.010)
(segue)

Rpm LDA pressure kPa Delivery per 1000 shots: cm3 (gal.)
600 35 78,9 to 79,9 (0.0208 to 0.0211)
1270 100 0 to 3.0 (0 to 0.0008)
1200 100 53 to 54 (0.0140 to 0.0142)
1150 100 67,5 to 71,5 (0.0178 to 0.0188)
700 100 80,5 to 81,5 (0.0212 to 0.0215)
600 0 73,5 to 74,5 (0.0194 to 0.0197)

Rpm 325 410
Delivery per 1000 shots: cm3 (gal.) 10.5 to 12.5 (0.0027 to 0.0033) 0 to 3.0 (0 to 0.0008)

Rpm Voltage (volts) Delivery per 1000 shots: cm3 (gal.)
325 0 0 to 3.0 (0 to 0.0008)
15. AUTOMATIC START CAPACITY SUPPLEMENT

Rpm LDA pressure kPa Delivery per 1000 shots: cm3 (gal.)
100 -- 80 to 110 (0.0211 to 0.0290)
250 -- 74 to 86 (0.0195 to 0.0227)

Test conditions
(see previous page)
Engine without fan, air filter and exhaust silencer. Ambient temperature 25o C (77o F).
Atmospheric pressure 740 ± 5 mbar (14.31 ± 0.096 psi). Specific gravity of diesel fuel
840 g/l. (7 lb./gal.) at a temperature of
15 oC (59o F).
Throttle Engine speed Power output with engine run--in for a total of: Fuel consumption
lever Braking load applied 2 hours 50 hours
position rpm kW (hp) kW (hp) kg/h (lbs./h)
For maximum 46,5 to 49,5 10,2 to 10,8
Maximum 2300 ≥ 45,6 (62)
power output (63 to 67) (22.5 to 23.8)
For maximum 36,5 to 39,4 7,95 to 8,45
Maximum 1400 ≥ 35,8 (48,7)
torque (49,6 to 53,6) (17.5 to 18.6)
Maximum None (no--load) 2475 to 2525 -- -- --
MODELS TN 75D and TN 75S -- CALIBRATION DATA FOR BOSCH INJECTION PUMP
TYPE VE 3/11 F 1150 L 764 -- VE 3/11 F 1150 L 764--1 -- 99441587 -- 500324965
Pump timing on engine: delivery start 6o ± 0.5o Test bench conforming to ISO 4008/1 .../2
before TDC of cylinder 1 compression stroke. Injectors conforming to ISO 7440--A61 --
Plunger pre--lift for timing on engine: 1 mm from BDC (1.688.901.027 with pad 0.5 mm [∅ 0.0196 in.]).
(with tools 291754 -- 291755). Injector pressure setting 250 to 353 bar
Cylinder No.1 delivery line union on pump: marked (3626.1 to 5120.1 psi).
with letter A. Supply pressure:
0.35 ± 0.05 bar (5.1 ± 0.7 psi).
ASSEMBLY DIMENSIONS
Delivery pipes (conforming to ISO 4093.2):
SYMBOL K MS ya yb 6 x 2 x 450 mm (0.24 x 0.08 x 17.72 in.).
Graduate drain time . . . . . . . . . : 30”.
mm -- -- 38.6 to 40.6 42.9 to 48.1
(in.) (1.45 to 1.60) (1.69 to 1.89) Test liquid: ISO 4113 at a temperature of 45° ± 1 °C
(113° ± 33.8 °F).
Plunger pre--lift from TDC: mm -- Pump rotation (viewed from drive side): Injection order: 1--2--3
counter--clockwise
Rpm: 1240 LDA pressure: kPa 100 Advance stroke:
mm 1.3 to 1.9 (0.051 to 0.075 in.)
Rpm: 1220 LDA pressure: kPa 100 Internal pressure: bar 8.3 to 9.5 (120.4 to 137.8
psi)
4. FULL-LOAD DELIVERY WITH BOOSTER PRESSURE
Rpm: 700 LDA pressure:kPa 100 Delivery per 1000 shots: Spread:
cm3 88 to 93 (0.021 to 0.022 gal.) cm3 ≤ 3.5 (gal. ≤ 0.000925)
5. FULL-LOAD DELIVERY WITHOUT BOOSTER PRESSURE
Rpm: 500 LDA pressure:kPa 0 Delivery per 1000 shots: Spread: cm3 -- (gal. --)
cm3 78.2 to 83.2 (0.021 to 0.022 gal.)
Rpm: 325 LDA pressure: kPa 0 Delivery per 1000 shots: Spread:
cm3 3.5 to 14.5 (gal. 0.0009 to 0.0038) cm3 ≤ 4.5 (gal. ≤ 0.001189)
Rpm: 1200 LDA pressure: kPa 100 Delivery per 1000 shots: Spread: cm3 -- (gal. --)
cm3 47.5 to 63.5 (gal. 0.0125 to 0.01677)
Rpm: 100 Delivery per 1000 shots:
cm3 85 to 125 (gal. 0.0224 to 0.033)
Rpm 1180 1240
Advance stroke mm (in.) 0.5 to 1.5 1.3 to 1.9
(0.02 to 0.06) (0.05 to 0.07)
Rpm 500 1220 1180
Internal supply pressure bar 3.8 to 5.0 8.3 to 9.5 7.9 to 9.1
(psi) (55.1 to 72.5) (120.4 to 137.8) (114.6 to 132)
11. BACKFLOW
Rpm 500 1150
LDA pressure kPa 0 100
Backflow for 10 s l/h (gal./h) 15 to 31 (3.96 to 8.19) 15 to 45 (8.19 to 12.68)
(continued)
Rpm LDA pressure kPa Delivery per 1000 shots: cm3 (gallons)
1300 100 0 to 3.0 (0 to 0.0008)
1200 100 47.5 to 63.5 (0.01254 to 0.0168)
700 100 88 to 93 (0.0232 to 0.0246)
600 42.5 82.8 to 90.8 (0.0219 to 0.0240)
500 0 78.2 to 83.2 (0.0207 to 0.0220)
1150 100 74.6 to 80.6 (0.0197 to 0.0213)
500 100 89.5 to 96.5 (0.0236 to 0.0255)

Rpm: 325 Voltage (volts): 0 Delivery per 1000 shots:
cm3: 0 to 3 (gal. 0 to 0.0008)
Rpm 325 410
Delivery per 1000 shots: cm3 3.5 to 14.5 0 to 3.0
(gallons) (0.0009 to 0.0038) (0 to 0.0008)
14. AUTOMATIC START CAPACITY SUPPLEMENT
100 85 to 125 (0.0225 to 0.0330)
250 71 to 91 (0.0188 to 0.0240)
160 100 to 130 (0.0264 to 0.0343)

Test conditions
(see previous page)
25 ± 3o C (77 ± 37.4o F).
840 g/l (7 lb./gal.)
Engine Power output with engine run--in
Throttle Fuel consumption
speed for a total of:
l
lever B ki lload
Braking d applied
li d
2 hours 50 hours
position
For maximum power 51.4 to 54.5 (1) 11.9 to 12.6
Maximum 2300 ≥ 50.4 (68.5)
output (69.9 to 74.1) (26.24 to 27.78)
For maximum 41.6 to 44.2 (2) 9.1 to 9.6
Maximum 1400 ≥ 40.8 (55.4)
torque (56.6 to 60.1) (20.06 to 21.16)
2475 to
2525
Note: Air delivery pressure (1) bar 0.95 to 1.1 (13.8 to 16 psi) -- (2) bar 0.55 to 0.65 (8 to 9.4 psi).
FUEL SUPPLY PUMP DATA mm (inches)
Eccentricity of drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
(0.1181)
Diameter of drive shaft at bushings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.975 to 32.000
(1.2588 to 1.2598)
Internal diameter of installed and reamed bushings . . . . . . . . . . . 32.050 to 32.075
(1.2618 to 1.2628)
Interference between bushings and seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.063 to 0.140
(0.0025 to 0.0055)
Assembly clearance between shaft and bushings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.050 to 0.100
(0.0020 to 0.0039)
Thickness of internal washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.45 to 1.50
(0.0571 to 0.0496)
Thickness of external washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.93 to 3.00
(0.1154 to 0.1181)
CRANKCASE/CYLINDER BLOCK DATA mm (inches)

Cylinder block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cast--iron monobloc with replaceable
dry--fitted cylinder liners, incorporating
seatings for crankshaft bearings,
camshaft and pushrod/tappet
assemblies
Internal diameter of cylinder liners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104.000 to 104.024 (1)
(4.0945 to 4.0954)
External diameter of cylinder liners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107.020 to 107.050
(4.2134 to 4.2146)
Diameter of cylinder bores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106.850 to 106.900
(4.2067 to 4.2087)
Interference fit between cylinder liners and bores . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.120 to 0.200
(0.0047 to 0.0079)
Liner internal diameter oversizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.4 to 0.8
(0.0157 to 0.0315)
Liner external diameter oversizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2
(0.0079)
Maximum permissible liner ovality or taper due to wear (2) . . . . . . 0.12
(0.0047)
Diameter of main shell bearing seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84.200 to 84.230
Diameter of camshaft bearing seats: (3.3150 to 3.3161)
-- front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54.780 to 54.805
(2.1567 to 2.1577)
-- centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54.280 to 54.305
(2.1370 to 2.1380)
-- rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53.780 to 53.805
(2.1173 to 2.1183)
Diameter of standard tappet bores in crankcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.000 to 15.018
(0.5906 to 0.5913)
Tappet oversizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.1 -- 0.2 -- 0.3
(0.0039, 0.0079, 0.0118)
(1) Measured after press--fitting and reaming.
(2) Measure in the area swept by piston rings, both parallel and perpendicular to the crankshaft axis.
CRANKSHAFT AND BEARINGS DATA mm (inches)
Crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . balanced with integral counterweights
Standard journal diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79.791 to 79.810 (1)
(3.144 to 3.1421)
Journal undersizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.254 -- 0.508 -- 0.762 -- 1.016
(0.01 -- 0.02 -- 0.03 -- 0.04)
Standard main bearing shell thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.168 to 2.178
(0.0854 to 0.0857)
Main bearing shell undersizes (internal diameter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.254 -- 0.508 -- 0.762 -- 1.016
(0.01 -- 0.02 -- 0.03 -- 0.04)
Bearing shell to journal clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.034 to 0.103
Maximum permitted wear clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.180

(0.0071)
Standard crankpin diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63.725 to 63.744 (1)
(2.5089 to 2.5096)
Crankpin undersizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.254 -- 0.508 -- 0.762 -- 1.016
(0.01 -- 0.02 -- 0.03 -- 0.04)
Standard big--end bearing shell thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.805 to 1.815
(0.0711 to 0.0715)
Big--end bearing shell undersizes (internal diameter) . . . . . . . . . . 0.254 -- 0.508 -- 0.762 -- 1.016
(0.01 -- 0.02 -- 0.03 -- 0.04)
Big--end bearing shell to crankpin clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.033 to 0.087
(0.0013 to 0.0034)
Wear limit endfloat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.180
(0.0071)
Standard crankshaft thrust washer thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.378 to 3.429
(0.1330 to 0.1350)
Thrust washer oversizes (thickness) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.127 -- 0.254 -- 0.381 -- 0.508
(0.005 -- 0.01 -- 0.015 -- 0.02)
Width of main bearing including thrust washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.766 to 31.918
(1.2506 to 1.2566)
Width of corresponding crankshaft journal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.000 to 32.100
(1.2598 to 1.2638)
Crankshaft assembly endfloat ............................. 0.082 to 0.334
(0.0032 to 0.0131)
Maximum permitted wear endfloat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.40
(0.0157)
Maximum ovality or taper of journals and crankpin after 0.01
regrinding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (0.0004)
Maximum ovality or taper of journals and crankpin . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.05
(0.0020)
Maximum tolerance for alignment of crankshaft journals with 0.10
crankshaft supported on the two outer journals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (0.0039)
Maximum tolerance for alignment, in both directions, of each pair 0.25
of crankpins relative to crankshaft journals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (0.0098)
Maximum tolerance for run--out between the outer surfaces of the ± 0.10
crankshaft journals and the crankshaft centreline . . . . . . . . . . . . . (0.0039)
(1) Crankshafts with 0.1 mm undersize journals, crankpins and, consequently, undersize bearing shells may be fitted in
factory production.
(continued)
CRANKSHAFT AND BEARINGS DATA mm (inches)
Maximum permitted tolerance on run--out of flywheel mounting

flange surface relative to the crankshaft centreline, measured with
1/100 mm scale dial gauge resting on front flange surface (A, page 0.025
64) at a diameter of 108 mm (4.25 in.) (total gauge reading) . . . . . . (0.0010)
Maximum permitted tolerance on co--axial alignment of flywheel

centering (B, page 64) relative to the crankshaft journals (total 0.04
gauge reading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (0.0002)
CONNECTING ROD DATA mm (inches)
Connecting rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cast--iron with oil way
Diameter of small end bushing seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.846 to 41.884

(1.6475 to 1.6490)
Outside diameter of small end bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.979 to 42.017

(1.6527 to 1.6542)
Interference between small end bushing and seat . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.095 to 0.171

(0.0037 to 0.0067)
Inside diameter of small end bushing (measured after fitting) . . . . 38.004 to 38.014
(1.4962 to 1.4966)
Diameter of big end bearing seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67.407 to 67.422

(2.6538 to 2.6544)
Max. tolerance for parallelism between the small end and the big ± 0.07
end axes measured at 125 mm (4.92 in.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (0.0028)
Maximum weight difference between con rods in same engine . . 25 grams

(0.055 lb.)
PISTON DATA mm (inches)
Pistons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . light alloy with three compression rings,

including two seal rings and one
scraper ring
Standard piston diameter, measured at 2.244 in. (57 mm) from 103.812 to 103.826
skirt base and perpendicularly to the gudgeon pin axis . . . . . . . . . (4.0870 to 4.0876)
Piston clearance in cylinder liner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.174 to 0.212 (0.0068 to 0.0083)
Maximum permitted wear clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.30 (0.0118)
Piston oversizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.4 -- 0.8 (0.0157 -- 0.0314)
Piston protrusion at TDC. from cylinder block face . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.355 to 0.761 (0.0139 to 0.0299)
Gudgeon pin diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37.983 to 37.990 (1.4953 to 1.4956)
Diameter of gudgeon pin seat in piston . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37.993 to 38.000 (1.4957 to 1.4960)
Gudgeon pin to seat clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.003 to 0.017 (0.0001 to 0.0006)
Gudgeon pin to small end bearing clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.014 to 0.031 (0.0005 to 0.0012)
Maximum weight difference between pistons in same engine . . . 20 grams
Piston ring groove clearance (measured vertically): . . . . . . . . . . . .
-- 1st ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.090 to 0.122 (0.0035 to 0.0048)

-- 2nd ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.060 to 0.092 (0.0023 to 0.0036)
-- 3rd ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.040 to 0.075 (0.0015 to 0.0029)

Maximum permitted wear clearance:
-- 1st ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.50 (0.0019)
-- 2nd and 3rd ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.20 (0.0007)
Assembly clearance between piston ring ends in cylinder

sleeves:
-- 1st ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.40 to 0.65 (0.0015 to 0.0025)
-- 2nd ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.30 to 0.55 (0.0011 to 0.0021)
-- 3rd ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.30 to 0.60 (0.0011 to 0.0023)
Maximum permissible gap (wear limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20 (0.0472)

VALVE TIMING GEAR DATA mm (inches)
Timing gear tooth backlash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.160 (0.0062)
Inside diameter of intermediate gear bushings

(fitted and reamed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37.050 to 37.075 (1.4586 to 1.4596)
Diameter of intermediate gear journal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36.975 to 37.000 (1.4557 to 1.4566)
Clearance between pin and relative bushings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.050 to 0.100 (0.0019 to 0.0039)
Bushing interference fit in seat in intermediate gear . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.063 to 0.140 (0.0024 to 0.0055)
Outside diameter of camshaft bearings:
-- front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54.875 to 54.930 (2.1604 to 2.1625)
-- intermediate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54.375 to 54.430 (2.1407 to 2.1429)
-- drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53.875 to 53.930 (2.1210 to 2.1232)
Interference between bearings and seats in cylinder block . . . . . . 0.070 to 0.150 (0.0027 to 0.0059)
Inside diameter of camshaft bearings (fitted and reamed):
-- front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51.080 to 51.130 (2.0110 to 2.0129)
-- drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50.080 to 50.130 (1.9716 to 1.9736)
Diameter of camshaft journals:
-- front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50.970 to 51.000 (2.0066 to 2.0078)
-- drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49.970 to 50.000 (1.9673 to 1.9685)
Clearance between camshaft journals and bushings . . . . . . . . . . . 0.080 to 0.160 (0.0031 to 0.0062)
Camshaft endfloat between thrust plate and seat on camshaft . . 0.070 to 0.220 (0.0027 to 0.0086)
For further timing system technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see page 5
TAPPET DATA mm (inches)
Tappet bore in crankcase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.000 to 15.018 (0.5905 to 0.5912)
Outside diameter of standard tappet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.950 to 14.970 (0.5885 to 0.5893)
Tappet running clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.030 to 0.068 (0.0011 to 0.0026)
Tappet oversizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.1 -- 0.2 -- 0.3

(0.0039 -- 0.0078 -- 0.118 )
ROCKER ARM -- VALVE DATA mm (inches)
Diameter of shaft bores in rocker arms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.016 to 18.034

(0.7093 to 0.7100)
Diameter of rocker arm shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.982 to 18.000

(0.7080 to 0.7087)
Rocker shaft to rocker arm bore clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.016 to 0.052
(0.0006 to 0.0020)

(0.0059)
Rocker arm spacing springs:
-- free length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59.5

(2.3425)
-- length under load of 46 to 52 N (4.7 to 5.3 kg) . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

(1.7323)
Valve clearance for timing check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.45

(0.0177)
Valve clearance for normal running (engine cold):
-- inlet valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.30 ± 0.05

(0.0118 ± 0.0020)
-- exhaust valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.30 ± 0.05

(0.0118 ± 0.0020)
Cam lift:
-- inlet valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.67

(0.2232)
-- exhaust valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.95

(0.2343)
CYLINDER HEAD DATA mm (inches)
Cylinder head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . with valve seats cut directly in the
casting and press--fitted steel valve
guides.
Original height of cylinder head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
(3.6220)
Maximum face re--grinding depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5
(0.0197)
Diameter of standard valve guide bores in head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.950 to 13.983
(0.5492 to 0.5505)
Outside diameter of standard valve guides .................. 13.993 to 14.016
0.5509 to 0.5518)
Guide interference fit in bores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.010 to 0.066
0.0004 to 0.0026)
Inside diameter of valve guide (fitted in head) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.023 to 8.043
(0.3159 to 0.3167)
Valve stem diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. 985 to 8.000
(0.3144 to 0.3150)
Assembly clearance between valve stem and guide . . . . . . . . . . . 0.023 to 0.058
(0.0009 to 0.0023)
Maximum run--out of valve guided on its stem measured through (0.0051)
360_ with dial gauge contact point resting on valve head contact 0.03
band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (0.0012)
Valve guide oversizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2
(0.0079)
Valve seat angle in head:
-- inlet valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60o ± 5’
-- exhaust valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45o ± 5’
Valve face angle:

-- inlet valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60o 30’ ± 7’
-- exhaust valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45o 30’ ± 7’
Valve head diameter:

-- inlet valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45.300 to 45.500
(1.7835 to 1.7913)
-- exhaust valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37.500 to 37.750
(1.4764 to 1.4862)
Valve stand--in relative to cylinder head face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7 to 1.0
(0.0276 to 0.0394)
Maximum permissible valve stand--in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
(0.0512)
Inlet and exhaust valve springs:
-- free length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44.6
(1.7559)
-- length with valve closed, under load of 256 to 284 N 34
(26.1 to 28.9 kg) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1.3386)
-- length with valve open, under load of 502 to 554 N 23.8
(51.2 to 56.5 kg) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (0.9370)
Injector protrusion relative to head face:
• BOSCH injector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.3 to 1.1
(0.0118 to 0.0433)
mm (inches)
LUBRICATION SYSTEM DATA TN 55D/S TN 70D/S
TN 65D/S TN 75D/S
Assembly clearance between oil pump drive shaft and bushing . 0.016 to 0.055 --
(0.0006 to 0.0021)
Clearance between shaft and driven gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.033 to 0.066 --
0.0012 to 0.0025)
Tooth backlash between drive and driven gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.100 (0.0039) --
Radial clearance between drive and driven gears and housing . . 0.060 to 0.170 --
(0.0023 to 0.0066)
Thickness of drive and driven gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40.961 to 41.000 --
(1.6126 to 1.6141)
Height of gear seat in pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41.025 to 41.087 --
(1.6151 to 1.6175)
Endfloat between gears and gear housing in pump . . . . . . . . . . . 0.025 to 0.126 --
(0.0009 to 0.0049)
Pressure relief valve spring --
-- spring free length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 (1.7716) 35.9 (1.4133)
-- length under load of 45 to 49 N (10.14 to 11.02 lbs.) . . . . . . . 37.5 (1.4763) --
-- length under load of 88 to 94 N (19.84 to 21.16 lbs.) . . . . . . . 30.5 (1.2007) --
-- spring length (2. fig. 149) under load of 127.8 to 141.2 N
(286.60 to 317.46 lbs.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 29 (1.1417)
-- spring length (2. fig. 149) under load of 233.4 to 258 N
(524.70 to 579.81 lbs.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 23.2 (0.9133)
For further lubrication technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see page 4 --
COOLING SYSTEM DATA in (mm)

in.
Interference fit between pump impeller and shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.017 to 0.059 (0.0006 to 0.0023)
Interference fit between fan hub and shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.024 to 0.058 (0.0009 to 0.0022)
Interference fit between front seal bushing and impeller . . . . . . . . 0.012 to 0.058 (0.0004 to 0.0022)
For further cooling system technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see page 4
TORQUE SETTINGS
Tightening torque
PARTS TO TIGHTEN Thread Angle
Nm ft. lbs.
Cylinder head bolts (2, page 24) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 12 x 1.25 70 52 90° + 90°
Main bearing cap bolts (4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 14 x 1.5 80 59 90°
Big--end cap bolts (5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 11 x 1.5 40 30 60°
Flywheel mounting bolts (3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 12 x 1.25 40 30 60°
Tightening torque
PARTS TO TIGHTEN Thread
Nm ft. lbs.
Rocker shaft pedestal bolts (1, page 24) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M8 25 18
Crankshaft hub retaining nut (7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 30 x 1.5 294 217
Fan and alternator pulley bolts (6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 10 x 1.25 55 41
Additional counterweight retaining bolts (1, page 25) . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 12 x 1.25 110 81
Inlet manifold retaining bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M8 25 18
Alternator and belt tension adjustment nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 10 x 1.25 55 41
Coolant pump retaining bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 10 x 1.25 55 41
Tappet cover nuts (1. fig. 48) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M8 15 11
Rocker shaft pedestal bolts (2. fig. 49) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M8 25 18
Oil pump and pump cover retaining bolts (1. fig. 57) . . . . . . . . . . . M8 25 18
Timing gear case and cover bolts (1, fig. 61) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M8 25 18
Intermediate flanged journal bolts (1, fig. 64) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 10 x 1.25 55 41
Camshaft thrust plate retaining bolts (2, fig. 65) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M8 35 26
Rear crankcase cover bolts (2, fig. 85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M8 25 18
Tappet adjuster locknuts (1, fig. 104) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M8 22 16
Nuts for injector mounting studs (1, fig. 105) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M8 25 (*) 18(*)
Exhaust manifold retaining bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M8 25 18
Injection pump mounting bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M8 25 18
Injection pump drive gear nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 14 x 1.5 105 75
Sump pan retaining bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 10 x 1.25 69 51
-- Timing gear rear seal, cover and casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 10 x 1.25 39 to 49 29 to 36
-- flywheel housing crankcase and casing:
models. TN 55D/S and TN 65D/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 10 x 1.25 49 to 59 36 to 44
models TN 70D/S and TN 75D/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 10 x 1.25 49 to 69 36 to 51
(*) Tighten the nuts in two stages -- see operations described in fig. 105.
SPECIAL TOOLS
X 293231 Bush for valve guide installation (with
Warning -- The operations described in this section 291046).
can only be carried out with ESSENTIAL tools indi-
cated by an (X). X 291177 Engine valve guide reamer.
To work safely and efficiently and obtain the best re- X 291050 Engine valve spring compressor.
sults, it is also necessary to use the recommended
specific tools listed below and certain other tools, X 293270 Set of grinding tools for regrinding in-
which are to be made according to the drawings injector seat.
cluded in this manual.
X 291182 Puller for coolant pump impeller.
X 293280 Drift for installation of coolant pump

List of specific tools required for the various
impeller seal.
operations described in this section.
293814 Charger impeller reaction block (for
290740 Engine lifting hook. models TN 70D/S and TN 75D/S).
290090 Revolving engine service stand. 293786 Wrench for injection pump delivery
line unions.
293860 Engine mounting brackets for rotating
stand 290090. 293671 Injector cleaning kit.
X 291309 Compression test kit. X 293761 Wrench set for injector dismantling
(with 295008).
292870 Engine oil pressure test kit.
290284 Hand pump for injector calibration
293240 Check set, turbo charger, for models test.
TN 70D/S and TN 75D/S).
Injection pump bench test
X 291160 Piston ring pliers.
291754 Dial gauge (0.0393/3.937 in.)
X 291048 Clamp for fitting pistons in cylinders. (1/100 mm, stroke (5 mm), ∅ (40 mm)
with 291755).
X 292248 Protractor for angular torque mea-
surement. 291755 Device for BOSCH injection pump tim-
ing on engine (with 291754).
X 291504 Puller for crankshaft pulley hub.
X 295042 Puller for injection pump drive gear.
X 291883 Wrench for valve clearance adjust-
ment. X Cylinder compression test (dummy in-
jector). Order a complete injector as-
X 291046 Drift for valve guide extraction / instal-
sembly (500307714) from parts. Re-
lation.
move the internal guts. Use the
X 294027 Twist bit for enlarging valve guide hallowed injector to screw into engine
bore. and the other end for the gage.
X 294028 Tapered grinder 8° for swaging ex-

haust valve guides.
Splining tool to be manufactured for assembling
the crankshaft front seal (print No. 50138 on the (1.36)
tool -- Values in mm [inches]).
Make in UNI C40 material. (0.40)
(0.06 x 0.60)
(3.27)
(1.81)
(2.33 -- 2.35)
26102
(0.95 -- 0.96)
Splining tool to be manufactured for assembling

the crankshaft rear seal (print No. 50139 on the
tool -- Values in mm).
(1.18) (0.18 -- 0.22)
Make in UNI C40 material.
(5.08)
(5.71)
(4.53)
(5.33 -- 5.35)
26103
2
SECTIONAL VIEWS
5 4 3
25355
3
Longitudinal section of engine (models TN 55D, TN 55S, TN 65D and TN 65S)
25356
4
Cross--section of engine (models TN 55D, TN 55S, TN 65D and TN 65S)
28
SECTION 10 -- ENGINE -- CHAPTER 1
Engine lubrication system 5

1. Oil filler cap -- 2. Filter safety valve (opens when oil pressure at filter inlet exceeds the pressure at the outlet by 1.5--1.7 bar/cm2) --
3. Filter -- 4. Switch for low engine oil pressure warning (on dashboard) --
5. Dipstick -- 6. Pump -- 7. Oil pressure limiting valve -- 8. Screen filter on pick--up pipe.
a b
1 2
3
4
25363
6 5
Engine cooling system

A. Coolant circulation with thermostat valve 3. Electric thermometer for engine coolant tem-
closed perature
B. Coolant circulation with thermostat valve open 4. Temperature sender
1. Thermostat 5. Fan
2. Pump 6. Radiator
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problems Possible causes Remedies
Engine does not start. 1. Battery partially discharged. Check and recharge battery. Replace
if necessary.
2. Battery terminal connections cor- Clean, inspect and tighten terminal

roded or loose. nuts. Replace terminals and nuts if
excessively corroded.
3. Injection pump timing incorrect. Adjust injection pump timing.
4. Impurities or water in fuel lines. Disconnect fuel lines from injection

pump and clean thoroughly. If
necessary clean and dry the fuel tank.
5. No fuel in tank. Fill tank.
6. Fuel supply pump malfunction. Check and replace pump if

necessary.
7. Air in fuel system. Check fuel lines, unions, supply

pump, filters and injection pump for
air, then bleed system.
8. Starter motor faulty. Repair or replace starter motor.
9. Thermostarter faulty. Check and replace thermostarter if

necessary.
Engine stalls. 1. Idle speed too low. Adjust idle speed.
2. Irregular delivery from injection Check injection pump delivery on test

pump. bench.

4. Fuel filters clogged. Renew filter cartridges.
5. Incorrect valve clearances. Adjust valve clearances.
6. Burnt or cracked valves. Replace valves.
7. Air in fuel system. Check fuel lines, unions, supply
pump, filters and injection pump for
air, then bleed system.
8. Injection pump drive mechanism Replace damaged parts.
damaged.
ENGINE TROUBLESHOOTING
(continued)

Engine overheating. 1. Coolant pump malfunction. Overhaul pump or replace.
2. Thermostat faulty. Replace thermostat.
3. Radiator inefficient. Remove internal deposits by flushing.
Check for leaks and repair.
4. Deposits in cylinder head and Flush out coolant system.
crankcase coolant passages.
5. Coolant pump and fan drive belt Check and adjust belt tension.
slack.
6. Coolant level low. Top up expansion tank with specified
coolant mixture.
7. Incorrect timing. Check and adjust.
8. Injection pump calibration incor- Calibrate pump on test bench to
rect -- delivering too much or too values specified in calibration tables.
little fuel.
9. Air filter clogged. Clean filter unit and replace filter
element if necessary.
Engine lacks power and 1. Injection pump timing incorrect. Adjust injection pump timing.
runs unevenly.
2. Auto advance regulator in injec- Overhaul injection pump and adjust
tion pump damaged. on test bench to values specified in
calibration table.
3. Distributor journal worn. Overhaul injection pump and adjust
on test bench to values specified in
calibration table.
4. Injection pump delivery irregular. Overhaul injection pump and adjust
calibration table.
5. All--speed governor damaged. Overhaul injection pump and adjust
calibration table.
6. Injectors partially obstructed or Clean, overhaul and calibrate
damaged. injectors.
(continued)

8. Fuel supply pump damaged. Replace fuel supply pump.
9. Incorrect valve clearances. Adjust valve clearances.
10. Cylinder compression low. Test compression and overhaul
engine if necessary.
12. Tie--rod in linkage between accel- Adjust to correct length.
erator and injection pump incor-
rectly adjusted.
13. Maximum speed screw on injec- Adjust max. speed screw.
tion pump incorrectly adjusted.
Engine produces abnormal 1. Injectors partially obstructed or Clean, overhaul and calibrate
knocking noises. damaged. injectors.
2. Impurities accumulating in fuel Clean fuel lines and replace severely
lines. dented pipes. Clean injection pump if
necessary.
3. Incorrect injection pump timing. Adjust injection pump timing.
4. Crankshaft knocking due to ex- Re--grind crankshaft journals and
cessive play in one or more main crankpins. Fit oversize shell bearings
or big--end bearings or excessive and thrust washers.
endfloat.
5. Crankshaft unbalanced. Check crankshaft alignment and
balance; replace if necessary.
6. Flywheel bolts loose. Replace any bolts that have worked
loose and tighten all bolts to the
specified preliminary and angular
torque values.
7. Connecting rod axes not parallel. Straighten connecting rods, check
axes parallelism; replace con rods if
necessary.
8. Piston knock due to excessive Rebore cylinder liners and fit oversize
wear. pistons.
9. Noise caused by excessive play Fit oversize gudgeon pin, rebore
of gudgeon pins in small--end and piston seats and small--end bushings.
piston bushings. or loose fit of Replace bushings.
small--end bushing.
10. Excessive tappet / valve noise. Check for broken springs or
excessive play between valve stems
and guides, cam followers and bores.
Adjust valve clearances.
(continued)
Engine produces excessive 1. Maximum delivery of injection Calibrate pump on test bench to
black or dark grey smoke. pump too high. values specified in calibration tables.
2. Injection pump delivery excess- Adjust injection pump / engine timing
ively retarded or automatic ad- or check automatic advance
vance regulator damaged. regulator.
3. Injection pump delivery excess- Adjust injection pump timing.
ively advanced.
4. Injectors partially or totally ob- Clean and overhaul injectors and
structed or incorrectly adjusted. adjust pressure setting; replace if
necessary.
6. Loss of engine compression due Replace damaged parts or, if

to: necessary, recondition engine.
-- piston rings sticking;
-- cylinder liner wear;
-- worn or incorrectly adjusted
valves.
7. Damaged high--pressure fuel Inspect and replace if necessary.

lines.
Blue, grey--blue or 1. Injection pump delivery excess- Adjust injection pump / engine timing
grey--white smoke. ively retarded or automatic ad- or check automatic advance
vance regulator damaged. regulator.
2. Injectors obstructed or damaged. Clean and overhaul injectors and

adjust pressure setting; replace if
necessary.
3. Oil leaking past piston rings due Replace damaged parts or, if
to sticking rings or cylinder liner necessary, recondition engine.
wear.
4. Oil leaking through the inlet valve Recondition cylinder head.
guides due to guide or valve stem
wear.
5. Engine does not reach correct op- Replace thermostat.

erating temperature (thermostat
faulty).
Engine runs on after 1. Engine stop solenoid damaged. Replace solenoid.

switching off.
2. All--speed governor damaged. Overhaul injection pump and adjust

calibration table.
OVERHAUL
Op. 10 001 10
ENGINE
Removal
DANGER
Lift and handle all heavy parts using suitable lifting
equipment
Make sure that assemblies or parts are supported by
means of suitable slings and hooks. Make sure that
no--one is standing in the vicinity of the load to be
lifted.
WARNING
Always use appropriate tools to align fixing holes.
NEVER USE YOUR FINGERS OR HANDS.
Proceed as follows. 27764

1. Carry out Clutch operation 18 110 10, only re-
moval (see sect. 18). 7
2. Remove the clogged air filter sensor connection
(1).
3. Disconnect the horn connection (1).
27765
8
4. Loosen the clamps (1, 2 and 3) and remove the
inlet manifold.
27180
9
5. Unscrew the band clamps and detach the upper
(2) and lower radiator hoses, detach the radiator
bracket (1).
27807
10
6. Position two fixed stands under the front axle
support and under the engine. Attach the chains
so that the engine is balanced during hoisting
and position two wood blocks between the sup-
port and the front axle, to prevent oscillation.
7. Loosen the front axle support retaining bolts (1).
8. Remove the engine from the axle--support unit.
27808
11
Installation
To re--install the engine, proceed as follows.
WARNING
-- Apply torque settings where required.
-- Re--install the front axle--support unit on the en-

gine.
-- Connect and secure the upper and lower radiator

hoses and the connecting bracket.
-- Fit and secure the inlet manifold.
-- Connect the horn and clogged air filter connec-

tions.
-- Carry out Clutch operation 18 110 10, only re--

installation (see sect. 18).
Op. 10 001 30 Compression Test 6) Fit the dummy injector, made from “Special Tools”
In case of poor engine performance, in addition to on page 24, in place of the injector removed
checking the fuel injection system (injection nozzles previously, interposing the copper sealing washer;
and injection pump), also test the compression on 7) connect the compression test instrument 291309
each cylinder. and take readings while turning the engine over with
DANGER the starter motor.
On engines in perfect working order, with the sump
Do not use matches, lighters, blow torches or any
oil at approx. 40 oC (104 oF) at sea level (760 mm
form of naked flame as a source of light when in-
[29.92 in.] of mercury) and at an engine speed of 200
specting the engine due to the presence of inflam-
to 280 rpm, the compression should be 25.5 to 27.5
mable fluids and vapour.
bar (369.9 to 398.9 psi).
8) Test the compression on the other cylinders,
Compression ratio repeating steps 4--5--6--7, bearing in mind that:
The compression ratio is a measure of the quantity The minimum permissible compression on a used
of air drawn into the cylinder, and provides an engine is 21.6 bar (313.3 psi).
indication of the efficiency of the sealing elements in The maximum permissible compression difference
the cylinder (piston rings and valves). between cylinders is 3 bar (43.5 psi).
Uniform compression in all the cylinders ensures that Every 100 meters (109.36 yards) above sea level
they all perform an equal amount of work, provided corresponds to a reduction in compression by
that each cylinder is injected with the same quantity approx. 1%.
of fuel at the right time.
Low compression not only reduces engine
performance, it also causes incomplete fuel
combustion due to the lack of available combustion
CONSIDERATIONS:
air.
The engine therefore gives poor performance with
Uniform compression
excessive fuel consumption and, consequently,
exhaust smoke and restriction of the exhaust Although high compression is important, it is more
passages. important for smooth engine running that
compression is uniform in all cylinders.
As the compression ratio also varies with the
temperature of the engine (cold engines produce Low compression readings
lower compression values than hot engines), the If extremely low pressure readings are obtained on
compression should only be tested when the engine one cylinder it is advisable to repeat the test.
is at normal operating temperature. Before testing this time, pour approx. one spoonful of
Compression should be tested using the engine oil into the cylinder through the injector bore.
compression test kit 291309, as follows: Turn over the engine a few times to distribute the oil
1) run the engine until it reaches normal operating evenly over the cylinder walls, and then repeat the
temperature; test.
2) switch off the engine; If the second test readings are significantly higher,
3) disconnect the lead from the engine stop suspect worn piston rings, out--of--round or damaged
electromagnet on the injection pump in order to close pistons or liners.
the valve and block the flow of fuel to the injectors; If the second test readings are not higher, the
4) remove the injector from the cylinder to be tested; problem will be the valves.
5) turn the engine over a few times with the starter On the other hand, if the second test reading shows
motor in order to expel any carbon residue; only a slight improvement, the problem will be due to
both the valves and the rings.
Op. 10 001 54
Disassembly
WARNING
Handle all parts carefully. Do not put your hands or
fingers between parts. Wear suitable safety clothing
-- safety goggles, gloves and shoes.
Proceed as follows.
1. Unscrew: the thermostarter union (2), the inlet
line retaining unions (1) from the pump and the
injectors, and detach the piping (1). 27770
12
2. Unscrew: the connecting lines (2) to the injection
pump and the support retaining bolts (1), remove
the pump and the fuel filter.
27771
13
3. Unscrew: the hydraulic pumps piping retaining
bolts (2), the oil filter (1) retaining bolts, complete
with the support, from the engine and remove.
27772
14
4. Unscrew the retaining bolts and remove the hy-
draulic pumps from the lift (2) and services (1),
which completes the piping (3).
27773
15
5. Unscrew the retaining bolts and remove the start-
er motor (1).
27774
16
6. Unscrew the retaining bolts and remove the cov-
er (3), loosen the retaining nut (2) on the injection
pump (1) and remove from the opposite side.
27775
17
7. Unscrew the retaining nuts and remove the fuel
pump (1).
27776
18
8. Unscrew the retaining bolts and remove the ex-
haust silencer (1) complete with the vertical pipe.
On models with horizontal exhaust pipes, re-
move when disassembling the engine.
27777
19
9. Unscrew the retaining bolts, remove the alterna-
tor (1) and recover the drive belt.
10. Remove the engine oil filter (2).
27778
20
11. Unscrew the retaining bolts and remove the ex-
haust manifold (1).
27779
21
12. Unscrew the retaining bolts and detach the cool-
ant pump hose(1).
27780
22
ant pump (1) complete with fan (2).
27781
23
ant pump support (1).
27782
24
15. Unscrew the retaining bolts and disconnect the
thermostatic valve unit (2) complete with bracket
(1).
27783
25
16. Unscrew the retaining bolts and remove the inlet
manifold (1).
27784
26
17. Remove the injector mounting nuts, the underly-
ing spherical washers, then the supports and the 1
injectors themselves.
18. Remove the rocker cover bolts (1), washers and
seals, and then the rocker cover (2) and its gas-
ket.
25098
27
19. Remove the rocker shaft retaining bolts (2), then
remove the entire rocker shaft assembly (1).
1 2
25099
28
20. Remove the valve collets (1) and extract the
pushrods (2). 1 2
25100
29
21. Unscrew the cylinder head bolts (1) and remove
the head using a hoist and lifting hook 290740.
22. Remove the cylinder head gasket.
25101 1
30
23. Unscrew the sump pan retaining bolts (4) and re-
move the sump pan using a hoist, lifting hook 1 2
290740 and lifting chain with eyeholes.
24. Remove the half--gaskets (1) and (3) between
the crankcase and sump pan and the gasket (2)
between the timing gear carrier and sump pan.
3
25104
31
25. Remove the gasket (1) between the flywheel car-
rier and the sump pan.
NOTE: When relocating gaskets (1) and (2, fig. 31),

apply RHODORSIL CAF1 silicone sealing com-
pound to the mating surfaces.
25105
32
26. Remove the rotating counterweight oil seal O--
ring (1) installed on the crankcase mating sur-
face.
25106
33
27. Unscrew retaining bolts (1) and remove the com-
plete oil pump.
1
25107
34
28. Unscrew the retaining bolts (2) and remove the
crankshaft pulley (1). 1
25108
35
29. Straighten the lock tab, securing the crankshaft
against rotation and unscrew nut.
25109
36
30. Pull the pulley hub off the crankshaft using tool
291504 (1) and recover the woodruff key.
25110
37
31. Unscrew the retaining bolt (1) and remove the
timing cover and gasket.
25111
38
32. Unscrew the retaining bolts and remove the lift
pump drive gear carrier (1).
1
25112
39
33. Remove the circlip (1) and recover the thrust
washer and the intermediate gear (2):
1 2
NOTE: When refitting the intermediate gear see en-
gine timing instructions on page 53.
25113
40
intermediate gear journal.
1
25114
41
35. Unscrew the retaining bolts (2) and withdraw the
camshaft (3) complete with the camshaft gear (1)
and the end plate (4). 1
4
25115
42
36. Remove the circlip (1) and the thrust washer, and
withdraw the gear with fuel supply pump cam-
shaft (2) from the opposite side.
NOTE: This gear transmits drive to the injection

pump gear. On re--assembly see timing instructions 1
on page 53.
25108
43
timing gear case.
25109
44
38. Renew the O--ring seal (1) installed in the lift
pump drive shaft lubrication line.
39. Remove the crankcase -- timing gear case gas-
ket.
25118
45
40. Rotate the engine through 90_on the stand. Un-
screw the big--end cap bolts (2) and recover the
big--end caps (1) with their half shell bearings. 1
25119
46
41. Slide the pistons (1), complete with rings, gud-
geon pins and connecting rods, out of the cylin-
der linings.
25108
47
42. Rotate the engine on the stand through 90_ back
to the horizontal position. Unscrew the flywheel
bolts and remove the flywheel with the aid of a 1
hoist and hook 290740.
43. Unscrew the retaining bolts and remove the rear
oil seal carrier (1) complete with gasket.
25109
48
44. Unscrew the main bearing cap bolts (1), and re-
move the main bearing caps with relative bearing
shells, and recover the thrust washers located on
the penultimate main bearing, as shown in the
figure.
45. Lift the crankshaft clear of the crankcase using a
hoist and nylon sling. Recover the bearing shells,
thrust washers and tappets. 1
25122
49
46. Turn the engine through 180_ on the stand
290090 (2). Attach the lifting chain with eye holes
to the crankcase, as shown in the figure. Raise 1
the hook 290740, unscrew the bolts securing the
crankcase to the stand (2) and mounting bracket
(3) from set 293860.
47. Lift the engine clear of the stand.
48. Unscrew the retaining bolts and remove the rear 3 2
crankcase housing (1) and its gasket.
25123
50
GENERAL NOTES AND INFORMATION
-- After dismantling the engine, clean all parts care-

fully.
-- To re--assemble the engine, carry out the dis-

mantling operations described on pages 37 to 46
in reverse order.
IN ADDITION, REMEMBER TO:
-- Replace all seals and gaskets at each complete

or partial engine rebuild.
-- Lubricate all rotating parts and oil seals with en-

gine oil prior to installation.
-- Lubricate the oil filter mounting seal prior to fitting

the filter.
WARNING
fingers between parts. Always use suitable tools to
align holes in parts.
Wear suitable safety clothing -- safety goggles,
gloves and shoes.
Assembly
MOUNTING THE TAPPETS AND CRANK

SHAFT WITH MAIN BEARING CAPS,
BEARINGS AND THRUST RINGS:
CHECKING AXIAL PLAY OF DRIVE SHAFT
(Disassembly operations 44 to 45)
Proceed as follows:
-- Install the tappets in their crankcase bores.
-- Lubricate the main bearing seats with engine oil

and install the half--shell bearings (3).
-- Stick the semi--circular thrust washers (1) to both

sides of the penultimate main bearing with
1
grease.
25109 3 2
51
-- Lubricate the upper surfaces of the main bearing
shells with engine oil and lower the crankshaft (1)
into position, taking care not to dislodge the 1
semi--circular thrust washers installed previous-
ly.
24718
52
-- Lubricate the crankshaft journals with engine oil
and fit the main bearing caps (3) with the half--
shells (4), fitting the top semi--circular thrust 1 2 3
washers (2) to the penultimate bearing cap.
-- Rotate the crankshaft (1) a few times to allow the
parts to settle into position.
-- Insert the main bearing cap bolts and screw in
until the head of the bolt is up against the cap.
4
25108
53
-- Tighten all cap bolts (1) to a torque of 80 Nm (8.2
kgm). 1
24720
54
-- Using tool 292248 (2), tighten each cap bolt (1)
through a further 90o. 1 2
24744
55
-- Check that the crankshaft endfloat does not ex-
ceed the value specified on page 14.
24760
56
MOUNTING THE REAR COVER WITH SEAL
AND ENGINE FLYWHEEL 1
(Disassembly operation 43)

Proceed as follows:
-- Fit the rear oil seal carrier (3) with the outer seal.
Tighten the retaining bolts (2) to the torque speci-
3
fied on page 21. Using a feeler gauge (1), check 2
that the crankshaft flange is coaxial with the car-
rier.
24752
57
Oil leakage from the crankshaft rear oil seal (part
number 98461686) will result if the seal is not
handled or installed correctly. The correct handling
and installation procedures are as follows:
1. The seal that was originally installed had a 6mm
(0.236″) gap, 1, between the seal housing, 2, and 2
the molded plastic insert, 3.
20026008
58
IMPORTANT: The seal is preassembled with a
protective molded plastic insert.
Carefully handle the seal by the molded plastic insert

only.
The insert is to protect the seal from any damage

during parts stock and during installation.
The protective molded plastic insert MUST NOT be

removed or rotated in the seal prior to installation.
The insert should only be removed after the new seal

has been completely installed as detailed in these
instructions.
2. The machined sealing surface area of the

crankshaft MUST NOT be cleaned using any
type of abrasive paper.
3. The new seal lip should never be positioned in
the exact same location on the crankshaft as the
previous seal that was removed. This is to
prevent the new seal lip from riding in the wear
groove made by the previous seal lip.
4. The first replacement seal should be installed
with a gap, 1, of 3.8 to 4 mm (0.150 to 0.157″)
between the seal housing, 2, and the molded 2
plastic insert, 3.
20026009
59
5. The seal, complete with the insert, must only be
installed using the special made tools described
below.
NOTE: The spacer is used for the correct clearance
gap of 3.8 to 4 mm (0.150 to 0.157”). The installer
bushing is used to install the seal into the housing.
It is recommended to manufacture the special tools

prior to requirement. (See dimensions for the spacer
and installer bushing as shown)
1. Spacer ID: 135.5 to 136 mm (5.335 to 5.354″)

2. Spacer Width: 3.8 to 4 mm (0.150 to 0.157″) 20026010
3. Spacer OD: 145 mm (5.709″)
60
4. Installer Bushing: 115 mm (4.527″)
5. Installer Bushing Width: 30 mm (1.181″)
6. Installer Bushing OD: 129 mm (5.079″)
Seal Installation
6. Lightly oil the crankshaft seal area with new
engine oil.
7. Install the spacer onto the molded plastic insert.
Use the installed bushing to push the seal into
position in the seal housing.
8. Ensure that the seal is installed evenly around
the full circumference (the spacer should be
against the molded plastic insert and the housing
all the way around).
NOTE: The molded plastic insert should not be
removed until the seal is correctly positioned.
IMPORTANT: The engine MUST NOT be started

within 24 HOURS of the seal installation and plastic
insert removal. This is required to allow the seal to
expand and settle onto the crankshaft after the
molded plastic insert is removed.
-- Fit the flywheel and tighten the retaining bolts (1)
to a torque of 40 Nm (30 lfb.lb).
24762
61
-- Using tool 292248 (1), tighten each flywheel bolt
(2) through a further 60o.
1
24763
62
MOUNTING THE PISTONS COMPLETE

WITH RINGS, PINS, CONNECTING RODS,
BIG END CAPS AND BEARINGS --
CHECKING PROTRUSION IN RELATION TO
CYLINDER BLOCK FACE
(Disassembly operations 40 and 41)
Proceed as follows:
-- Lubricate pistons, rings and cylinder liners with en-
gine oil prior to fitting.
-- Using the piston ring pliers 291160 fit the piston
rings. Make sure that the piston ring gaps are offset
at 180o. 25163
63
-- Fit piston ring clamp 291048 (1) to compress the
rings (2), making sure that the piston ring gaps re-
main in the positions specified in the previous
point.
-- Insert the piston / connecting rod into the cylinder 1 2
liner, checking that the connecting rod number
corresponds with the cylinder number and that
the number stamped on the connecting rod is
facing away from the camshaft.
-- Fit the big--end caps (1), complete with shells, to
the crankpins and tighten the cap bolts (2) to a
torque of 40 Nm (30 ft. lbs.).
25164
64
-- Using tool 292248 (1), tighten each big--end cap
bolt (2) through a further 60o. 1 2
25165
65
-- Rotate the engine on the stand through 180o and

clean the upper face of the cylinder block.
Bring the pistons (2), up to TDC and, using a dial 1 2
gauge with a magnetic base (1), check that the
piston protrusion from the cylinder block face is
within the tolerance limits specified on page 14.
25166
66
SYNCHRONISING THE TIMING GEARS
(Disassembly operations 32 to 36)

Proceed as follows:
-- Remove the cover of the flywheel housing in-
spection window and its gasket.
25167
67
-- Turn the drive shaft so as to bring cylinder No. 1
to TDC (compression stroke).
Look through the inspection window to check that
the notch in degrees aligns with the index mark,
according to the type of BOSCH pump installed
on the tractor (see pages 7--9--11).
26107
68
-- Fit the timing gears, making sure that the various
reference marks indicated by the arrows in the
figures are aligned.
25169
69
REFITTING THE BOSCH INJECTION PUMP
(Disassembly operations 6)
-- Fit the BOSCH injection pump and proceed with
the injection pump timing, as described on page
87.
1
25181
70
FITTING THE CYLINDER HEAD GASKET
1
Proceed as follows:
-- Before fitting the cylinder head, carefully clean
and degrease the mating surface of the cylinder
block. Locate the cylinder head gasket (1) with
the word ALTO uppermost.
25173
71
FITTING AND TIGHTENING THE CYLINDER
HEAD

Proceed as follows:
-- Lower the cylinder head onto the block and screw
in the cylinder head bolts (1, fig. 71) so that the
heads are brought into contact with the cylinder
head.
-- Tightening sequence for cylinder head bolts (1,
fig. 102) on 4--cylinder engines to be followed for 25174
tightening stages (A = fan end).
72
-- Tighten the bolts (1) to a torque of 70 Nm (51 ft.
lbs.) in the sequence indicated above (1st stage).
-- Check the torque of all the bolts in the sequence
indicated above (2nd stage).
25176
73
-- Using the angular tightening tool 292248 (1)
tighten each bolt (2) in sequence through 90o (3rd 1
stage) and then through a further 90o (4th stage)
in the sequence indicated above.
2
25177
74
ADJUSTING VALVE / ROCKER ARM
CLEARANCE 1
-- Before refitting the rocker cover, adjust the valve
clearances as described on pages 77 and 78.
-- Tighten the rocker arm adjuster screw locknuts
(1) to the torque specified on page 21.
25178
75
FITTING THE INJECTORS

Proceed as follows:
-- Insert the injectors (2) in their respective bores.
-- Position the injector support brackets and fit the
spherical washers.
-- Screw the bracket retaining nuts (1) up to the 1
spherical washers then, using a torque wrench,
tighten to the torque specified on page 21 in two
stages: 2
1st stage, tighten nuts to 10 Nm (7 ft. lbs.), 25179
2nd stage, tighten nuts to 25 Nm (19 ft. lbs.).
76
-- Tighten the leak--off pipe unions.
-- Tighten the high--pressure fuel line unions.
ADJUSTING BELT TENSION ON THE

COOLING SYSTEM
(Disassembly operations 9)
NOTE: Tension the belt correctly, as shown on page

69.
CHECKS, DIMENSIONS AND REPAIRS
Cylinder Block and Cylinder Liners
WARNING
Clean all parts carefully before proceeding with the

operations described below.
NOTE: Cylinder liner dimensions must only be mea-

sured when the liner is installed in the cylinder bore,
as they are subject to deformation when not fitted.
Check line wear as follows:

-- measure the inside diameter in the area swept by
the piston rings (X, fig. 77);
-- measure the inside diameter at the upper and
lower ends of this area both parallel to the crank-
shaft centre line (a) and perpendicular to the
crankshaft centre line (b);
-- compare these measurements to determine liner
ovality and taper.
To check piston running clearance, measure the I.D.
of each liner in the area Z (fig. 77) only along the axis
(b) perpendicular to the crankshaft centre line.
If ovality or taper exceed 0.12 mm (0.0047 in.) or
piston coupling play exceeds 0.3 mm (0.0118 in.),
rebore and grind (or change) the liners, to bring them
up to one of the sizes shown in the table on page 13.
Then pair up the cylinder liners with the pistons of the
same dimensions (see page 13).
NOTE: If one of the liners is rebored, all of the liners

in the engine must also be rebored to the same over-
size.
After boring, the 0.5 mm (0.0197 in.) a 30o champfer

must be restored on the liner (1).
In case of replacement, remove and install the liners
in cylinder block cold using a press as follows:
1
25307
77
-- Press the worn liner out of the block operating
from the bottom of the crankcase using the ap-
propriate plate.
-- Check the ovality of the bore in the block and re-
bore if necessary to 0.2 mm (0.0078 in.) oversize.
-- Press--fit the new liner (0.2 mm oversize if neces-
sary) from the top of the block, using the ap-
propriate plate.
-- Rebore and ream the liner to the specified I.D.
(see page 13).
25308
78
25310
79
Standard dimensions (mm) of cylinder liners and bores in the cylinder block and positions for checking liner
wear
A. Positions of dial gauge to measure liner I.D. E. Area for measurement of inside diameter of worn
B. Positions of dial gauge to measure liner I.D. liner (area swept by piston rings) to determine oval-
C. Dimension to obtain after press--fitting and reaming ity and taper (measure along axes a and b, respec-
of liner. tively parallel and perpendicular to the crankshaft).
D. Area for measurement of inside diameter of used 1. Planes of measurement of the internal diameter of
liner to determine piston running clearance (mea- new and ground liners, along the two perpendicular
sured along axis b perpendicular to crankshaft). axes (A, B).
Crankshaft, Main Bearings and Flywheel
WARNING
Crankshaft
Carefully inspect the crankshaft. Any cracks, even
slight, will necessitate replacement of the crankshaft.
Inspect the crankshaft journals and crankpins; slight
scoring or seizure marks can be removed with very
fine grade emery cloth.
If scoring, ovality or taper exceeds 0.05 mm (0.0020
in.), the crankshaft will have to be reground.
Measure journal diameter to determine the nearest
undersize (see page 14).
After regrinding, restore the journal and crankpin
rounds and fillets as shown in the details below, and
check that:
-- main bearing journal and crankpin ovality does
not exceed 0.008 mm (0.0003 in.);
-- main bearing journal and crankpin taper does not
exceed 0.01 mm (0.0004 in.);
25311
80
81
Standard dimensions (mm) of main bearing journals and crankpins, main bearings and semi--circular thrust
washers
A. Crankpin rounds and fillets. -- with the crankshaft resting on parallel gauge
B. Normal crankshaft journal rounds and fillets. blocks, the maximum misalignment of the main
C. Rounds and fillets of crankshaft journal with thrust
washers.
bearing journals does not exceed 0.10 mm -- the run--out measured with the dial gauge con-
(0.0039 in.) (C) fig. 80; tact point resting on surface (A) or (B) does not
-- the centrelines of each pair of crankpins lie in the exceed the value specified in the table on page
same plane as the main journal centrelines, with 15;
a maximum deviation of ± 0.25 mm (0.0098 in.) -- the oil plugs seal against an oil pressure of 14.7
as measured perpendicularly to the same plane; bar (213.2 psi);
-- the distances between the outer surfaces of the -- if new plugs are fitted, punch--lock in position and
crankpins and the crankshaft centreline are re--check oil tightness with the system pressur-
equal to a tolerance of ± 0.10 mm (0.0039 in.); ised.
25314
82
Maximum tolerance for alignment of main bearing journals and crankpin relative to crankshaft centreline and
alignment of crankpins relative to main bearing journals
A. Dial gauge contact point positions for checking per- C. Maximum permissible main bearing journal align-
pendicular run--out of flywheel mounting flange. ment deviation.
B. Dial gauge contact point positions for checking cen-
tering of flywheel mounting flange.
Bearings
Check the clearance between the crankshaft
journals and the bearing shells using a calibrated 1 2
wire gauge as follows:
-- make sure that all parts are perfectly clean and
remove all traces of oil; 3
-- locate the half--shells in their respective seats
(5);
-- install the crankshaft;
-- position lengths of calibrated wire (6) on the
crankshaft journals (4) in correspondence with
the crankshaft centreline (6); 25316
6 5 4
-- fit the caps (1) complete with half--shells (2) to the 83
respective journals;
-- lubricate the screws (4, fig. 3) fixing the main
bearing caps with engine oil and tighten them to
the prescribed torque using a torque wrench (see
page 21);
Main bearing cap bolts (4, fig. 3)

If the bolts are to be re--used, check that diameter d
(measured in area a shown in the figure) is greater
than 13.5 mm (0.5315 in.); if not, replace the bolts.
25318
84
-- remove the caps and determine the bearing
clearance by comparing the width of the cali-
brated wire at the widest point against the scale
printed on the packet (3) containing the wire (fig.
81);
-- after refitting the crankshaft and the bearing caps
and bolts, check crankshaft endfloat, using a dial
gauge (1), at the penultimate bearing;
-- if the endfloat exceeds the specified value (see
page 14), replace the existing thrust washers
with oversize washers.
25317
1
85
Flywheel
The flywheel is fixed to the crankshaft flange by

means of self--locking bolts. The starter ring gear is
force--fitted after pre--heating to the register on the
engine side of the flywheel.
If the ring gear is to be replaced, heat in oil to 80o to

90o C (176 to 194o F) before fitting, and position with
∅ 327
the bevel on the teeth facing inward towards the
starter motor. ∅ 285
The flywheel mounting holes are offset so that the

flywheel can only be mounted in one position.
78,5 ± 0,2 (*)

If the flywheel is overhauled, the friction surfaces can
be reground, refacing by 1 mm (0.0394 in.) in relation
to the nominal thickness of 78.5 ± 0.2 mm (1.5157 ±
0.0079 in.).
Once terminated, the external refacing will need to
be re--set to 0.5 mm (0.0197 in.), as shown in the
figure.
86
-- lubricate the engine flywheel fixing screws (3, fig.
3) with engine oil, and tighten them to the pre-
scribed torque using a torque wrench (see page
21);
Flywheel bolts (3, fig. 3)

than 11.5 mm (0.4528 in.); if not, replace the bolts.
25319
87
Connecting Rods
WARNING

Check that the bushings in the connecting rod small

ends are tight in their bores and are flush with the
sides of the rods.
If necessary, replace the bushings and ream after

fitting to the specified diameter (A) described in the
figure.
Dimensions (mm) of standard connecting rods,

bearing shells, bushings and gudgeon pins 25320
A. Dimensions to obtain by reaming after fitting bushings

-- L, M. Oil ports.
88
Check parallelism of small end and big end axes.

Maximum permitted tolerance is ± 0.07 mm (0.0028
in.) measured at 125 mm (4.9213 in.) from the
longitudinal axis of the connecting rod.
Slightly twisted con rods can be straightened using

a press. Severely deformed rods should be replaced.
New con rods must be marked with the number of the

cylinder in which they are to be fitted. Check that the
difference in weight of the connecting rods in the
same engine does not exceed 25 grams.
Also check that the oil ways (L and M, fig. 86) are not 25321
obstructed by scale or impurities.
89
Pistons
WARNING
Handle all parts carefully.
Do not put your hands or fingers between parts.
gloves and shoes.

Determine the degree of piston and liner wear in the

manner described on pages 13 and 16 and the
figures below.
If the piston running clearance exceeds 0.30 mm,

rebore and ream the liners and fit oversize pistons
and rings (see pages 13 and 16).
In case of piston replacement, Check that the

difference in weight between pistons in the same
engine does not exceed 20 grams.
Check that the piston ring groove clearance (b) fig.

88 and the end gap (c) are within the tolerances
specified on page 16. If the end gap is less than that
specified, correct by grinding the ends of the piston
ring.
A B
C
25322
90
Checking pistons and rings
A. Checking piston diameter at a distance (L) from the C. Checking the end gap with ring in cylinder bore.
base of the skirt. D. Distance from the base of the piston skirt: 57 mm
B. Checking piston ring groove clearance. (2.2441 in.).
25323
91
Dimensions (mm) of standard pistons, gudgeon pins and rings
A. Measurement to be obtained with ring inserted in B. Piston diameter measured at 57 mm (2.2441 in.)
cylinder bore. from the base of the skirt.
To remove or fit piston rings (1) use pliers 291160 (2).
Fit rings in grooves in the order indicated in fig. 89.

1
When fitting pistons on connecting rods, check that
the clearance between the gudgeon pin and its bore
in the piston is within the tolerance specified on page
16.
2
25324
92
Check that the piston / connecting rod assembly is
perfectly square.
If not, replace parts causing the problem.
25108
93
Note:
1
-- Oil the pistons, rings and liners before inserting
the pistons in their bores.
-- Before fitting the ring clamp 291048 (1) to com-

press the rings for insertion in the liner, check that
the ring end gaps are offset by an angle of 180o.
2
25326
94
Big end cap bolts (5, fig. 3)

(measured in the area a shown in the figure) is
greater than 10.5 mm (0.4134 in.); if not, replace the
bolts.
NOTE: It is advisable to replace the big end cap bolts

each time the connecting rods are dismantled.
25327
95
Camshaft, Tappets and Valves
WARNING

Valves
Use tool 291050 for valve removal and installation.
In the case of minor sealing faults, the valves and
their seats in the cylinder head may be re--faced
using a pneumatic grinder or universal grinder. In
case of more serious defects, re--face the seats and
grind the valves as shown in the relative chapter.
After grinding, check that the step below the valve
contact band is no less than 0.5 mm (0.0197 in.).
Dimensions (mm) of valves and valve guides.

A. Inlet.
B. Distance to be obtained by reaming fitted valve guide.
S. Return.
96
Tappets
Check that the tappets slide freely in their bores

without excessive play.
In the case of excessive tappet--to--bore clearance,
rebore the seats and fit oversize tappets (see page
17).
Pushrods must be perfectly straight, and the
concave surface with the rocker arm adjuster screw
must not show signs of seizure or excessive wear,
otherwise the rod must be replaced.
In case of refacing of the contact surfaces, remove as 25329
little material as possible.
97
Camshaft
Position the camshaft on two parallel V blocks and,

using a dial gauge with 1/100 mm scale, check that
journal run--out relative to the axis of rotation does
not exceed 0.02 mm (0.0079 in.).
If run--out does not exceed 0.2 mm (0.0079 in.), the

camshaft may be straightened using a press;
otherwise replace the camshaft.
Check cam lift using a dial gauge, which should be as

follows:
25328
-- 5.97 mm (0.2350 in.) = inlet valve; 98
-- 6.25 mm (0.2461 in.) = exhaust valve.
Replace worn bushings using suitable extractors and

drifts, and ream to obtain the inside diameter
indicated in figure 96.
25331
99
Dimensions (mm) of camshaft journals and relative seats in cylinder block
NOTE -- The value indicated for the bushing inside diameter refers to the fitted part.
Valve timing check
To check the valve timing after dismantling/assembly

or overhaul of the valve timing gear, proceed as
follows:
Check that the timing reference marks on the timing

gears are aligned as indicated on page 50.
Provisionally set valve clearances to 0.45 mm

(0.0177 in.).
Turn the crankshaft and, using a graduated timing

disk, check that valves open and close and the
angles indicated in the timing diagram.
On completion of the timing check, set the valve

clearances for normal running, as specified on pages
77 and 78.
Valve timing diagram.
A. Fixed advance (*)
1. TDC
2. BDC
3. Inlet.
4. Return.
25333
5. Injection.
(*) According to pump type a nd engine model, see page
3.
100
CYLINDER BLOCK AND CYLINDER LINERS
WARNING

NOTE: Cylinder liner dimensions must only be mea-

sured when the liner is installed in the cylinder bore,
as they are subject to deformation when not fitted.
Check line wear as follows:

-- measure the inside diameter in the area swept by
the piston rings (E, fig. 79);
-- measure the inside diameter at the upper and
lower ends of this area both parallel to the crank-
shaft centre line (a) and perpendicular to the
crankshaft centre line (b);
-- compare these measurements to determine liner
ovality and taper.
To check piston running clearance, measure the I.D.
of each liner in area (D fig. 79) only along the axis (b)
perpendicular to the crankshaft centre line.
If ovality or taper exceed 0.12 mm (0.0047 in.) or pis-
ton coupling play exceeds 0.3 mm (0.0118 in.), re--
bore and grind (or change) the liners, to bring them
up to one of the sizes shown in the table on page 13.
Then pair up the cylinder liners with the pistons of the
same dimensions (see page 13).
NOTE: If one of the liners is re--bored, all of the liners

in the engine must also be re--bored to the same
oversize.
After boring, the 0.5 mm (0.0197 in.) a 30o champfer

must be restored on the liner (1).
In case of replacement, remove and install the liners
in cylinder block cold using a press as follows:
1
25307
101
Valve Seats In Cylinder Head
ATTENTION
Handle all parts carefully. 1
gloves and shoes.
1. If the valve seats need refacing to improve valve

sealing, use the universal valve grinder (1) and
remove as little material as possible.
25343
102
Dimensions (mm) of valve seats and valve guides.

A. Intake.
B. Depth of taper.
S. Drain.
(B)
25344
103
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
ATTENTION
gloves and shoes.
Clean all parts carefully before proceeding with the 1

OIL PUMP -- Overhaul

2
To access the oil pump, remove the sump pan.
When servicing the pump, check component wear 3
against the dimensions specified in the table on
page 20.
In case of replacement, note that the drive shaft (3)
and drive gear are supplied ready assembled, with 4
the gear hot force--filled on the shaft.
Cross--sectional view of engine lubricating oil pump 5

-- Models. TN 55D,TN 55S, TN 65D and TN 65S
1. External drive gear.
2. Bush.
3. Drive shaft and gear.
4. Driven shaft and gear. 25354
5. Pressure relief valve.
104
Cross--sectional view of engine lubricating oil pump

-- Turbo Models. TN 70D, TN 70S, TN 75D and TN 75S 1
1. Pressure relief valve.
2. Spring.
3. Pump body. 2
4. Internal gears.
4 3
26109
105
OIL FILTER -- Replacement COOLING SYSTEM
The oil filter (3, fig. 5) is of the full--flow, integral paper Clean all parts carefully before proceeding with the
cartridge type, and is installed on the pump delivery operations described below.
line.
The cooling system is fitted with a permanent coolant
Should the line become clogged, the safety valve (2) mixture consisting of water and ”AMBRA
will open to allow the oil to by--pass the filter, thus AGRIFLU” antifreeze (up to 50% in volume). This
ensuring that the engine continues to be lubricated, mixture prevents freezing down to the following
although with unfiltered oil. temperatures:
Replace the cartridge periodically (every 400
operating hours), remembering to: Degrees oC --8 --15 --25 --35
% in volume of
-- oil the outer part of the seal in contact with the ”AMBRA 20 30 40 50
mounting on the crankcase; AGRIFLU”
-- screw on the new cartridge until the seal is up
against the mounting; This mixture also has anti--oxidant, anti--corrosion,
anti--foaming and anti--scaling properties to ensure
-- tighten the cartridge, by hand only, through a long--term protection of the cooling system.
further 3/4 turn.
The same mixture can be kept in the cooling system
for a maximum of 2 years or 1600 operating hours,
whichever comes sooner, after which it must be
changed.
LOW OIL INDICATOR -- Functional checks
RADIATOR -- Flushing and checks
The indicator consists of a control switch (4, fig. 5) Two valves are built into the radiator cap, one
and a red warning lamp on the dashboard, which compression valve and one depression valve. Check
illuminates in the following conditions: the correct operation of the valves periodically.
When overhauling, remove deposits of lime scale in
-- low oil pressure (the warning lamp also illumi- the radiator by means of a solution of water and
nates in normal conditions, without signifying a descaling agent in the proportions shown on the
fault, when the engine is hot and idling at low container.
speed); It is never advisable to limit flushing to the radiator
only -- always extend this operation to the entire
-- control switch malfunction. cooling circuit. Top up the engine with the solution
referred to above.
If the red lamp fails to illuminate when the engine is Run the engine for about an hour (with the engine off)
stopped and the ignition switch is turned to the power in order to drain the solution through the drain plug.
ON position, the possible causes are:
If the system is leaking, check the radiator seal by
immersing it in a tank of water at a temperature of 20
-- blown fuse; to 40 °C (68 to 104 °F), blowing air into the radiator
at a pressure of 0.98 bar (14.2 psi) for approx. two
-- blown lamp;
minutes (repeat the test at least three times).
-- interruption in wire to the control switch.
COOLANT THERMOMETER -- Testing
If malfunction is suspected, immerse the bulb of the

thermometer in water and check the readings
against a test thermometer (repeat the test a number
of times with different water temperature to be sure).
THERMOSTAT -- Replacement
The thermostat (1, fig. 6) is fitted in the cylinder head

coolant outlet union.
The thermostat cannot be adjusted and therefore
must be replaced if it does not meet the temperature
specifications in the table on page 4.
COOLANT PUMP
AND ALTERNATOR DRIVE BELT
Tension adjustment Op. 10 414 10
The fan/coolant pump/alternator drive belt is

tensioned correctly when it deflects 10 to 11 mm
(0.3937 to 0.4331 in.) when a force of 78 to 98 N
(17.64 to 22.05 lb.) is applied at the mid--point of the
run between the alternator and coolant pump
pulleys.
1. Check the tension using the belt tension tester

296118. Adjust tension if necessary as follows: 1
2. slacken the nut (1) securing the alternator to the
tensioner bracket;
3. move the alternator to achieve correct belt ten-

sion, then tighten nut (1).
NOTE -- when fitting a new belt, check the tension 22631
again after one hour of running. 106

Op. 10 101 53
Valve Guides
DANGER
equipment
Make sure that assemblies or parts are supported by 1
means of suitable slings and hooks.
Make sure that no--one is standing in the vicinity of
the load to be lifted.
WARNING
With the cylinder head on the test bench, proceed as 25334
follows: 107
1. Enlarge the bore of the valve guide to be fitted,
using twist drill 294027.
2. Place the cylinder head on a suitable support and
remove the valve guide to be replaced, using drift
291046 (1).
3. Turn the head upside down, and force fit the new
valve guide with the enlarged bore, using drift
291046 (2) and bush 293231 (1).
25335
108
4. Ream out the valve guide bore (1) using reamer
291177 (2).
25336
109
NOTE: when replacing exhaust valve guides, pro-
ceed with the following operations.
5. Measure the distance (L) between the cylinder

head face and the base of the valve guide, using
a calliper gauge and the special plate (1) on tool
294028. 1
The depth of taper milling is given by:
B -- L = C
where:
25337
B = depth of taper relative to cylinder head face (see 110

fig. 142).
L = distance measured between cylinder head face

and valve guide base.
C = depth of taper milling.
Example
B = 43.1 to 43.6 mm (1.6968 to 1.7165 in.).
L = 34 mm (1.3386 in.). Distance measured.
C = (43.1 to 43.6) -- 34 = 9.1 to 9.6 mm

[(1.6968 to 1.7165) -- 1.3386 = 0.3583 to 0.3780 in.].
Depth of taper milling.
6. From the upper side of the cylinder head, fit guide

bush (1) of tool 294028 on the guide valve to be
milled (2).
1 2
25109
111
7. Slide the cutter (1) of tool 294028, complete with
depth stop (2), into the previously located guide
bush until the cutting head is in contact with the
valve guide.
1
2
25339
112
8. Position the plate (3) of tool 294028 flush against
the cylinder head face and slide the depth stop
(2) up to the plate. Measure the distance (A) be-
tween the depth stop and the end of the cutter 1 2 3
shank (1).
25340
113
9. Position the depth stop (1) at a distance of (D) =
35.9 to 36.4 mm (1.4134 to 1.4331 in.) from the
end of the cutter shank and fix in place with its set
screw.
Distance (D) is given by:
D = A -- C 1
where:
D = the distance determining the end of the taper

milling.
25341
A = the distance between the end of the cutter shank
and the depth stop, with the plate flush against the 114
cylinder head.
C = the depth of taper milling.
Example
A = 45.5 mm (1.7913 in.)
C = 9.1 to 9.6 mm (0.3583 to 0.3780)
D = 45.5 -- (9.1 to 9.6) = 35.9 to 36.4 mm [1.7913 --

(0.3583 to 0.3780 in.) = 1.4134 to 1.4333 in.].
10. Turn the cutting tool (2) until the plate (3), is
brought up to the cylinder head face by the depth
stop (1). 1 2
NOTE: before fitting the cylinder head, clean thor-
oughly to remove all residue from the milling opera-
tion.
25342
3
115
Op. 10 101 60
Injector Sleeves
WARNING
gloves and shoes.
1. If the cylinder head face has been reground,

check the injector stand--out is within the toler-
ance limits specified on page 19.
Checking injector and valve height relative to the

cylinder head face.
a. Checking injector stand--out (see page 19). 25345
b. Checking valve stand--in: 0.7 to 1.0 mm (0.0276 to
0.0393 in.) (max. permissible stand in = 1.3 mm 116
[0.0511 in.]).
If injector stand--out exceeds the specified limit,

replace the injector sleeve using tool kit 293270,
proceeding as follows:
2. Set distance (A) on tap (3) 292240 to 9 mm

(0.3543 in.) by means of ring nut (5) and fix the
ring nut in position by tightening the set screw (4).
3. Cut an internal thread in the sleeve to be re- 1 2

moved using tap 292240 (3) M 12 x 1.75, making
sure that the thread is cut only in the sleeve. 3
4. Fit tool 293784 (2, fig. 118) to the injector mount- 4
ing studs on the cylinder head by means of nuts
(3) M8x1.25.
5
5. Screw part (11, fig. 118) fully into the previously
cut thread and turn nut (1) to withdraw the injector 25346
sleeve (12) from the head.

117
6. Remove any copper residue from inside the head
using tool 292243 (4, fig. 118).
7. Fit seals (6, fig. 118) onto the new injector sleeve
and fit the sleeve into its bore, making sure that
the sleeve butts up against the bottom of the
seating in the cylinder head, and dress with
dressing tool 293861 (5).
8. Fit guide bush 293746 (9), in the new sleeve (12,

fig. 118), securing it in position by turning the ring
nut (8) clockwise. Insert reamer 293747 (7) in
guide bush (9) and then ream the lower part of
the sleeve.
9. Remove the reamer (7, fig. 118) and unscrew the
ring nut (8) by approx. 10 mm (0.3936 in.).
10. Press by hand on the ring nut (8, fig. 118), or tap
gently with a rubber mallet, to release the inside
of the guide bush (9) 293746.
11. Remove the guide bush, and fit the milling cutter
293790 (10, fig. 118) in the bush. Install the bush
in the sleeve (12) and fix in position by turning the
ring nut (8) clockwise.
12. Work with the cutter (10, fig. 118) to remove ma- 1
terial until the seating is perfectly smooth and
free from all marks.
13. Once completed, remove the cutter, fit the injec-
tor in the sleeve (12, fig. 118) and check that
stand--out is as specified on page 19.
Cylinder head bolts (2, fig. 3)

than 11.5 mm (0.4527 in.); if not, use new bolts. 25343
118
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
12 11
25348
119
Disassembly, removal of residue, installation and reaming of injector sleeve in cylinder head using tool kit
293270
1. Injector sleeve extractor 293784. 7. Reamer 293747.

2. Injector sleeve extractor 293784. 8. Guide bush 293746.
3. M 8x1.25 injector retaining nuts. 9. Guide bush 293746.
4. Waste removal tool 292243. 10. Cutter 293790.
5. Injector sleeve dressing tool 293861. 11. Injector sleeve extractor 293784.
6. O--ring seals. 12. Injector sleeve.
Op. 10 102 70
CRANKSHAFT FRONT OIL SEAL
Removal
DANGER
equipment
Make sure that no--one is standing in the vicinity of 1
Proceed as follows:
1. Carry out operation 90 100 22: Bonnet opening,
only removal (see sect. 90).
2. Carry out operation 90 100 80: Safety guard, only
removal (see sect. 90).
3. Carry out operation 10 406 10: Radiator, only re-
25690
moval (see sect. 90).
4. Loosen the retaining bolts and remove the fan (1) 120
recovering the spacer.
5. Loosen the alternator locknuts (3), and recover
the pulley (1) and belt (2). 1 2
25691
121
6. Loosen the pulley hub locknut (2), remove the
bolts (1) and extract the pulley (2).
1 2
25693
122
7. Extract the crankshaft pulley hub (2), using tool
291504 (1) recovering the woodruff key. 1 2
25694
123
8. Remove the seal (1) from the seat.
1
25695
124
Installation
To install the front oil seal, proceed as follows. 1
WARNING
-- Respect the tightening torques where required.

-- Install the oil seal using the tool (50138, see page
23 and a striker (1).
-- Fit the hub, locknut and pulley.
-- Assemble the pulley and the fan drive belt. 25696
-- Fit the fan and spacer. 125

-- Carry out operation 10 406 10: Radiator, only
-- Carry out operation 90 100 80: Safety guard, only
-- Carry out operation 90 100 22: Bonnet opening,
only installation (see sect. 90).
Op. 10 106 12
VALVE/ROCKER ARM CLEARANCE
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Proceed as follows:
2. Unscrew the band clamps (1, 2 and 3) and re- 27180
move the inlet hose.
126
3. Carry out operation 10 254 44: Exhaust pipe,
only removal (see page 87).
4. Carry out operation 90 100 84: Bonnet guard,
5. Loosen the retaining bolts and remove the cover
(1).
27752
127
6. Remove the flywheel inspection window cover
(1).
25704
128
7. Adjust the clearance between the valves and the
rocker arms using a feeler gauge (1), wrench (3)
and special tool 291883 (2) bearing in mind the
following recommendations.
-- Rotate the crankshaft so that the inlet and ex-
haust valves of cylinder No. 1 are balanced (start
of induction stroke). In this position the pointer
will be aligned with the reference mark TDC 1 on
the flywheel.
-- Rotate the crankshaft through 360_, returning
the TDC 1 to the previous position, check that the
clearances between valves and rocker arms cor-
respond with the values specified in the table on 27753
page 18. 129

-- Repeat this operation for the other valve pairs,
bearing in mind that the TDC 2 and TDC 3 refer-
ence marks for pistons 2 and 3 are not present on
the flywheel.
8. Refit the parts that were removed, proceeding as
follows.
WARNING
-- Refit the flywheel inspection window cover.
-- Refit the rocker cover.
-- Carry out operation 90 100 84: Bonnet guard,

-- Carry out operation 10 254 44: Exhaust pipe,

only installation (see page 87).
-- Refit the inlet hose.

Op. 10 216 10
FUEL TANK
Removal
WARNING
Proceed as follows.
1. Lock the front wheels using chocks.
2. Using a hoist, slightly raise the rear part of the

tractor, position a support stand under the left--
hand lateral gear casing, then remove the rear
left hand wheel.
3. Unscrew the plug (1) and drain the fuel from the
tank into a suitable container (capacity 65
27792
litres--17.17 gal.).
130
4. Loosen the clamp and detach the fuel intake pipe

(1).
27946
131
5. Disconnect the two unions (1) and the fuel return
line (2) from the fuel gauge.
132
6. Unscrew the clamp (1) and remove the fuel inlet
nozzle (2).
133
7. Position a hydraulic jack under the tank, loosen
the retaining screw and remove the front clamp
(1).
134
8. Loosen the retaining screw and remove the rear
clamp (1), lower the jack and remove the fuel
tank.
Installation
To refit the fuel tank, proceed as follows.
WARNING
-- Position and secure the tank.

-- Position and secure the fuel inlet nozzle. 135
-- Connect the fuel return pipe.
-- Connect the fuel gauge connections.
-- Connect the fuel intake pipe.
-- Fit the left--hand wheel and remove the support
stand.
-- Fill up with fuel (capacity 65 litres).
Op. 10 218 30
FUEL INJECTORS
Removal
WARNING
Proceed as follows:
27180
2. Loosen the clamps (1, 2 and 3) and remove the 136
inlet manifold.
3. Unscrew the return lines connecting union (1)
and the injector fuel supply lines (2).
27181
137
4. Loosen the injector retaining bolts (1).
27182
138
5. Extract the injector (2) using a suitable extracting
tool (1).
Installation
To install the fuel injector, proceed as follows.
WARNING

27183
-- Insert and secure the injector in the seat.
139
-- Tighten the union on the fuel supply lines and the
return lines.
-- Re--fit and secure the inlet hose.

Op. 10 246 14
BOSCH INJECTION PUMP
Removal
WARNING
WARNING
Proceed as follows:
1. Raise the engine hood.
removal of right--hand guard (see sect. 90).
3. Unscrew the retaining bolts and remove the
housing (2) on the injection pump drive gear box.
If the conditioning system compressor is fitted,
detach the compressor support bracket (1).
27754
140
4. Make two reference marks (1) on the two gears
to facilitate the subsequent injection pump instal-
lation and timing operations.
27755
141
5. Detach the throttle lead (1) from the injection
pump lever and the electrical lead from the en-
gine stop electromagnet.
27756
142
6. Unscrew the unions: (1) on the injection pump
delivery lines, (2) the fuel return lines and (3) the
pump fuel supply line.
7. Disconnect the L.D.A. device connecting pipe. to
the inlet manifold (only model TN 70D/S and TN
75D/S).
27757
143
8. Check that reference marks have been made (2)
for timing the injection pump (1).
1 2
27761
144
9. Unscrew the bolts (1) securing the injection
pump.
27758
145
10. Unscrew the injection pump retaining nut from
the control gear (1).
27759
146
11. Using tool 295042 (1) detach the injection pump
from the relative gear and remove the pump and
control key.
Installation
To refit the injection pump, proceed as follows.
ATTENTION
-- Respect the tightening torques prescribed on 27760

page 21.
147
-- Assemble the injection pump complete with key,
making sure that the reference marks (made pre-
viously) for timing operations coincide; then fix in
position by means of the bolts.
-- Lock the injection pump drive gear in position, us-

ing the nut. Torque nut to 105 N⋅m (75 ft. lbs.).
-- Refit the injection pump drive gear box access

cover.
-- Assemble the LDA device connection pipe to the

inlet manifold (for models TN 70D/S and TN
75D/S).
-- Connect the fuel supply and return lines to the in-

jection pump.
-- Connect the engine stop electromagnet cable.
-- Connect the fuel supply lines to the injection

pump.
-- Connect the throttle lead to the injection pump.
-- Close the bonnet.

Timing
If the engine does not run evenly, if the timing marks
(1) are not visible, or doubts arise concerning their
accuracy, time the injection pump as follows:
25709
148
12. Unscrew the unions of the fuel supply lines (1),
detaching them from the injection pump.
If necessary, disconnect the injection pump sup-
ply and return lines (2 and 3) and, for models TN
70D/S and TN 75D/S, the L.D.A. device connect-
ing pipe to the inlet manifold.
27757
149
13. Remove the flywheel inspection window cover
(1).
14. Rotate the crankshaft to bring cylinder no. 1 to
TDC (of the compression stroke).
25704
150
15. Remove the front cover.
16. Check that 4 timing marks on gears (1) and (2)
are aligned).
25710
151
17. Check through the inspection window that the
pointer is aligned with reference marks 9_ for
models TN 55D/S and TN 65D/S or 6_ for models
TN 70D/S and TN 75D/S.
26107
152
18. With the injection pump in position but with the
mounting bolts loose, remove the plug (1) on the
pump housing.
19. Fit dial gauge 291754 (1) fig. 147 and relative tool 1
291755 (2), pre--loading the shaft by approxi-
mately 2.5 mm (0.0984 in.).
20. Turn the flywheel slowly backwards, so as to
bring the plunger to BDC. at the start of the deliv-
ery stroke (the point at which the dial gauge
needle stops falling).
25711
153
21. Zero--set the dial gauge and slowly turn the fly-
wheel clockwise (as viewed from the fan end of
the engine) until the pointer lines up with refer-
ence marks 9_ for models TN 55D/S and TN
65D/S or 6_ for models TN 70D/S and TN 75D/S.
22. Check on the dial gauge that the plunger has
completed a stroke of 1 mm (0.0394 in.) up to this
point, if not, slacken off the pump mounting bolts.
23. Turn the pump counter--clockwise if the plunger
has completed a stroke of less than 1 mm 1 2
(0.0394 in.), and clockwise if the stroke is greater
than 1 mm (0.0394 in.), repeating the test until
the correct stroke is obtained. 25712
24. Having obtained the correct plunger stroke, fix 154

the pump in position by tightening the mounting
nuts to the torque specified on page 21.
25. Stamp pump timing marks (1, as indicated in fig-
ure 148 on the guard, pump and interface
spacer.
26. Remove the dial gauge 291754 (1) and relative
tool 291755 (2), and replace the plug and tighten
to a torque of 8 to 10 Nm (6 to 7 ft. lbs.).
27. Refit other parts in the reverse of the dismantling
order.
FUEL CIRCUIT AIR BLEEDING
1. Unscrew the bleeder plug (1) by approx. 2 turns.
2. Operate the priming lever (1, fig. 150) until the
fuel coming out of the hole in the plug is free of
air bubbles.
3. Tighten the plug (1).
27508
155
4. Loosen the fuel supply lines unions on the three
injectors.
27561
156
5. Operate the priming lever (1) again, until the fuel
coming out of the injectors is free of air bubbles,
then tighten the injector unions.
6. Start the engine and check that it runs evenly.
27509
157
Op. 10 254 44
EXHAUST PIPE
Removal
WARNING
Handle all parts carefully. Do not put your hands or fin-
gers between parts. Wear suitable safety clothing --
safety goggles, gloves and shoes.
27645
158
Proceed as follows.
1. Remove the two retaining bolts (2), and the ex-

haust pipe bracket (1).
2. Remove the retaining bolt (2), washer and ex-
haust pipe (1).
Installation
To refit the exhaust pipe, proceed as follows.
WARNING
Always use suitable tools to align holes in parts. NEV-
ER USE YOUR FINGERS OR HANDS.
-- Fit the exhaust pipe, washer and retaining bolt.
-- Fit the exhaust pipe bracket and the two retaining 27646
bolts. 159
Op. 10 402 11
COOLANT PUMP
Removal
DANGER
equipment
the load to be lifted. 1
Proceed as follows:
removal (see sect. 90).
moval (see sect. 90).
4. Loosen the retaining bolts and remove the fan (1)
25690
recovering the spacer.
160
5. Loosen the alternator locknuts (3), and recover
the pulley (1) and belt (2). 1 2
25691
161
pump lines (1), remove the bolts and the pump. 1
Installation
To install the coolant pump, proceed as follows.
WARNING

-- Fit the coolant pump and connect the lower lines
to the pump. 25692
-- Assemble the pulley and the fan drive belt. 162

-- Fit the fan and spacer. -- Carry out operation 90 100 80: Safety guard, only
-- Carry out operation 10 406 10: Radiator, only installation (see sect. 90).
installation (see sect. 90). -- Carry out operation 90 100 22: Bonnet opening,
Disassembly
WARNING 1 2
Always use appropriate tools to align fixing holes. 3
4
Note -- The bearing (9, fig. 156) forms a single piece
with the control shaft (10); it is a sealed unit and re- 5
quires no lubrication during running.
6
10 9 8 7
14262
163
Overhaul the pump as follows:
-- Remove the cover (4, fig. 156) and the screw (2)
retaining the shaft(10) and bearing (9).
-- Gently tap the end of the shaft (10, fig. 156) on
the rotor side (5) to break the film of oxide be-
tween the shaft and the rotor; fit extractor 291182 1
(1) and remove the rotor.
-- Remove the front seal bushing (7, fig. 156).
-- Use a punch to extract the shaft (10), complete
with bearing (9) and fan hub (1), from the pump
housing (6, fig. 156).
5976
164
Note -- Only remove the seal (8, fig. 156) when it

needs to be replaced.
1
Check components for wear, replacing parts that are

in poor condition.
Installation
Refit the parts, proceeding as follows:
-- Fit the shaft (10, fig. 156) complete with bearing
(9) and hub (1) on the pump housing (6) and se-
21662
cure with the retaining screw (2), after having
spread a film of LOCTITE 242. 165
-- In case of replacement, fit the seal (8) into the
seat, using tool 293280 (1, fig. 158).
-- Heat the rotor (1) in an air oven, to reach a tem- 1
perature difference of 130 to 150 °C (266 -- 302
°F) in relation to the shaft (2).
-- Place the rotor (1) on the shaft (2), easing it onto
the end so as not to damage the bearing, until ob-
taining an operating clearance of G = 0.5 to 0.7
mm (0.0197 to 0.0276 in.) (see fig. 156).
-- Fit the seal (3, fig. 156) and the cover (4) securing
in position with the relevant screws.
2
21663
166
Op. 10 402 30
COOLING SYSTEM THERMOSTAT
Removal
WARNING
Proceed as follows:
27180
2. Loosen the band clamps (1, 2 and 3) and remove 167
the inlet hose.
removal of the left--hand guard (see sect. 90).
4. Remove the plug (1) and drain off a few liters of
coolant, then tighten the plug.
27749
168
bracket (1).
27750
169
6. Loosen the band clamp (2) and remove the hose
(1).
27751
170
7. Loosen the retaining bolts and detach the hous-
ing--seat (1) of the thermostat valve. 1
25699
171
8. Extract the thermostat valve (1) from the seat.
1
Installation
To refit the thermostat valve, proceed as follows.
WARNING
-- Position the thermostat valve in the seat. 25700
-- Assemble the valve housing--seat. 172

-- Connect and secure the hose to the housing
seat.
-- Fit and secure the bracket to the radiator.
-- Fit and secure the inlet hose.
-- Make sure that the drainage plug is tightened,

then fill up the engine cooling system with coolant
(see page 7, section 00 for prescribed products
and quantities).

installation of the left--hand guard (see sect. 90).

Op. 10 406 10
RADIATOR
Removal
DANGER
equipment
Proceed as follows:
2. Carry out operation 90 100 80: Safety guard, only 27749
removal (see sect. 90). 173

3. Unscrew the plug (1), drain off the coolant, then
tighten the plug.
4. Unscrew the retaining bolts and extract the
POWER SHUTTLE heat exchanger (1), if fitted,
and remove the relevant support bracket, if nec-
essary.
27762
174
5. Loosen the retaining bolts (1 and 2) that connect
the power steering piping to the radiator.
27763
175
6. Remove the clogged air filter sensor connection
(1).
27764
176
7. Disconnect the horn connection (1).
27765
177
8. Unscrew the clamp (1) and remove the oil vapour
recovery hose (2).
27766
178
9. Unscrew the clamp and disconnect the inlet hose
(1).
10. Unscrew the band clamp and remove the pipe (3)
that connects the radiator to the expansion tank.
11. Unscrew the retaining clamp and disconnect the

upper (4) and lower hoses.
12. Unscrew the radiator retaining bracket (2).
27767
179
13. Unscrew the retaining bolts and remove the ra-
diator (1), complete with air filter (2) and inlet
hose.
14. Unscrew the retaining bolts and detach the air fil-
ter from the radiator.
Installation
To refit the radiator, proceed as follows.
WARNING
27768
180
-- Position the radiator and secure with the relevant

bolts.
-- Fit the air filter and inlet hose.
-- Connect and secure the upper and lower hoses

and the expansion tank -- radiator connecting
pipe.
-- Fit the tank retaining bracket.
-- Fit the inlet hose and vapour recovery hose.
-- Connect the air filter and horn connectors.
-- Fit the power steering piping to the radiator.
-- Assemble the POWER SHUTTLE heat exchang-

er.
-- Tighten the coolant drainage plug and fill up the

system (for quantities and products, see 00,
page 7).


SECTION 18 -- CLUTCH -- CHAPTER 1 1
SECTION 18 -- CLUTCH
Chapter 1 -- Clutch
CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Luk 11”/11” Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Luk 11” Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
18 110 10 Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
18 110 30 Dual Disk Clutch 11”/11” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
18 110 30 11” Single Clutch (fitted with the power-shuttle gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Checks, Measurements and Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Dual Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Coplanarity Adjustment of 11”/11” Dual Clutch Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Coplanarity Adjustment of 11” Single Plate Clutch Release Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
18 100 40 Main Clutch Control Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
PTO Clutch Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2 SECTION 18 -- CLUTCH -- CHAPTER 1
SPECIFICATIONS
LUK 11″/11″ CLUTCH
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . single disk, dry plate dual clutch
unit
Operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mechanical: pedal operated
main clutch; hand lever
operated PTO clutch
Engagement and release mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . single Belleville spring disk
Driven plate lining material for main clutch: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-- All models Before S.N. 1227654 and TN 55S/D, TN 65S/D
After S.N. 1227654 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . organic agglomerate
-- models TN 70D/S and TN 75D/S After S.N. 1227654 . . . . . . . cerametallic
Driven plate lining material for PTO clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cerametallic
Driven plate thickness:
-- main clutch (9, fig. 1):
All models Before S.N. 1227654 and TN 55S/D, TN 65S/D mm 9.7 to 10.3
After S.N. 1227654 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (in.) (0.3818 to 0.4055)
models TN 70D/S e TN 75D/S After S.N. 1227654 . . . . . . . . ” 9.6 to 10.4 (0.3779 to 0.4094)
-- PTO clutch (11, fig. 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ” 7.3 to 7.9 (0.2874 to 0.311)
-- wear limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ” see pages 22 and 23
Clearance between main clutch release sleeve and housing . . . . mm 0.050 to 0.151
(in.) (0.0019 to 0.0059 )
Clearance between PTO clutch release sleeve and housing . . . . mm 0.060 to 0.136
(in.) (0.0023 to 0.0053 )
Release lever coplanarity adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see pages 23 and 24
Clutch control adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see page 25
LUK 11″ CLUTCH
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . single dry plate clutch
Operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mechanical: pedal operated
Engagement and release mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Belleville spring disk
Driven plate lining material for PTO clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cerametallic pads
Driven plate thickness for PTO clutch (1, fig. 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 7.3 to 7.9
(in.) (0.2874 to 0.311)
-- Driven plate wear limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ” see page 22
Clearance between clutch release sliding sleeve and support . . . mm 0.050 to 0.151
(in.) (0.0019 to 0.0059)
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Tightening torque
Nm ft. lbs.
11″/11″ clutch/flywheel retaining bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 8 x 1.25 20 to 25 15 to 18
Release command fork securing bolt (7, fig. 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 16 x 1.5 136 to 165 100 to 122
Clutch housing/engine retaining nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 12 x 1.25 117 to 129 86 to 95
Nut for sleeve cover fixing stud (6, fig. 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 8 x 1.25 20 to 25 15 to 18
SPECIAL TOOLS
Warning -- The operations described in this section

cated by an (X).
To work safely and efficiently and obtain the best re-
specific tools listed below and certain other tools,
which are to be made according to the drawings in-

X 294097 Pin for centering and adjustment of

11″/11″ clutches.
X 295023 Clutch adjustment gauge (with
294097).
293763 Set of wrenches for adjustment of
levers in 11″/11″ LUK clutches.
X 294078 Axle--engine support bracket (with
50162) for models TN 55S, TN 65S,
TN 70S and TN 75S.
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
SECTIONAL VIEWS
50169 Guide pin for fitting the engine to the
(0.7283 in.)
(0.8070 in.)
clutch housing.(see section 21).
Spacer to be made for securing axle--engine assembly,
for models TN 55S, TN 65S, TN 70S and TN 75S (stamp
number 50162 -- Measurement in mm [in.])
Make in Fe 42C material.
(1.3779 in.)
Make 4 spacers.
27821
1
Longitudinal section of 11”/11” LUK clutch
1. PTO clutch release lever adjuster.

2. Belleville spring disk.
4. PTO clutch release levers.
5. Release sleeves for main
and PTO clutch, complete with thrust bearings.
6. Nuts for sleeve cover fixing
studs.
7. Fork lever retaining bolts.
8. Main clutch release lever.
9. Main clutch disk.
10. Main clutch release lever adjuster.
11. PTO clutch disk.
12. Bearing on flywheel.
a Clutch (up to frame no. 1127768).
b Clutch (from frame no. 1127769).
D = 97.5 mm (3.8385 in.). Nominal distance of release
levers (8) from clutch contact surface on flywheel. a
D1 = 139.5 mm (5.4921 in.). Nominal distance of release
levers (4) from clutch contact surface on flywheel.
NOTE: During assembly apply sealing compound on

surfaces marked with an X as shown in Section 21,
Chapter 1, page 31.
b
2
Longitudinal section of 11” LUK clutch”
1. Main clutch disk.

2. PTO clutch release levers.
3. Release sleeves, complete with
thrust bearing.
4. Nuts for sleeve cover studs.
5. Fork lever retaining bolt.
a Clutch (up to frame no. 1127768).
b Clutch (from frame no. 1127769).
D1 = 139.5 mm (5.4921 in.). Nominal distance of release
levers (2) from clutch contact surface on flywheel.
NOTE: When refitting the clutch, check that the

clutch disks are positioned as in the drawing.
a
NOTE: During assembly apply sealing compound on
surfaces marked with an X as shown in Section 21,
Chapter 1, page 31.
3
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problems Possible Causes Solutions
The clutch slips 1. Worn disks 11 and 9, fig. 2, Check and compare the data given on
disk 1, fig. 3. Pressure plates the pages indicated, replace any
and flywheel worn. parts which are worn up to or over the
limit and adjust levers and clutch
control linkage.
2. Belleville spring disk (2, fig. 2) Replace the Belleville spring disk.
distorted or damaged.
3. Oil or grease contaminating Replace the disks, identify and
the friction lining of disks eliminate the source of the lubricant
11 and 9, fig. 2) and disk inside the clutch housing and
(1, fig. 3). thoroughly clean the friction surfaces.
The clutch jerks 1. Partial seizure of the external Check rod pivots and lubricate.
control linkage.
2. Clutch disk (9, fig. 2) de- Replace the disk and adjust the clutch
formed. control lever.
3. Clutch disk (9, fig. 2) with Replace disc.
damaged hub springs or loose
hub rivets.
4. Oil or grease contaminating Replace the disks, identify and
the friction lining of disks eliminate the source of the lubricant
(11 and 9, fig. 2) and disk inside the clutch housing and
(1, fig. 3). thoroughly clean the friction surfaces.
Clutch sticks and drags 1. Clutch disks (11 and 9, fig. 2) Replace and adjust disks.
and disk (1, fig. 3) deformed.
2. Seizure of external control Check, replace faulty parts and
linkage. lubricate.
3. Controls incorrectly adjusted. Adjust the controls (see page 20).
Clutch noisy when engaged 1. Thrust bearing worn. Replace Bearing.

and/or disengaged
2. Clutch disk (9, fig. 2) with hub Replace disc.
springs damaged.
Clutch pedal too stiff 1. Partial seizure of the external Check rod pivots and lubricate.
control linkage.
2. Partial seizure of pedal pivot. Check pivot and lubricate.
OVERHAUL
Op. 18 110 10
CLUTCH
Removal
DANGER
equipment.
means of suitable slings and hooks. Ensure that no--
one is in the vicinity of the load to be lifted.
CAUTION
Proceed as follows.
1. Carry out operation 90 100 22 Bonnet, only re-

moval (see section 90).
2. Detach the front ballast (3), if fitted, using a hoist

and two steel cables (1), extract the pin (2) and
remove the ballast. 27786
4
3. Unscrew the plug and drain the oil from the rear
transmission casing (the prescribed quantity is
42 liters; 11.095 gallons).
25628
5
4. Disconnect the engine oil pressure sensor con-
nection (1).
6
5. Unscrew the speedometer/tachometer (2) con-
trol cable and relative retaining clamp (1).
6. Unscrew the screw that holds the exhaust pipe to

the left--hand steps.
7
7. Remove the two flexible hoses (1) on the power
steering control.
8
8. Loosen the relative retaining clamps and remove
the thermostarter and fuel pump pipes (1 and 2).
9
9. Unscrew the brake oil reservoir (2) retaining
screws, remove the reservoir and attach to the
right--hand handrail (1).
10
10. Disconnect the electric motor connectors (1).
11
11. Disconnect the thermostarter connection (1).
12
12. Disconnect the power steering oil delivery pipes
(1).
13
13. Disconnect the filter pipe (1), loosen the relative
clamp and detach the pipe (2).
14
14. Drain off the brake fluid and disconnect the brake
control piping (2) from the block (1).
15. Disconnect the control piping that connect the
block (1) with the rear transmission, on the
brakes.
27125
15
16. Disconnect the brake feed pump pipes (2) from
the relative tank (1).
27126
16
17. Remove the four retaining bolts, then the rear
hood support (1).
17
18. Disconnect all cab electrical connections (1).
27124
18
19. Disconnect: the connections (1) on the brake
control circuit, the thermostarter (2) connection,
the steering sensor connection, the engine stop
connection on the injection pump and the starter
motor connection.
27789
19
20. Disconnect the ground connection (1), the cool-
ant temperature connection (2), the engine oil
pressure connection and the alternator connec-
tions.
27790
20
21. Unscrew the clamps and detach the thermo-
starter return lines (1) and the fuel supply pump
inlet lines (2).
27791
21
22. Unscrew the plug (1) and empty the oil from the
rear transmission housing (quantity: 42 liters
[11.09 gal.]).
27792
22
23. Loosen the clamps, detach the hoses (1) from
the rigid piping (2) and attach to the air filter sup-
port to facilitate access.
27793
23
24. Unscrew the retaining bolt and detach the
bracket (2) clamping the piping (1).
27794
24
25. Unscrew and disconnect the filter (2) piping (1).
Disconnect the union (3) on the front differential
lock control pipes and loosen the clamp (4).
27795
25
26. Unscrew the clamp (1) and detach the sleeve on
the oil intake pipes, unscrew the union (2) and re-
move the lift oil feed pipes.
27796
26
27. Unscrew: the union (1), bolt (2) and remove the
front differential lock piping (3).
27797
27
28. TN/S Models -- Unscrew the screws and remove
the guard (1).
27798
28
29. TN/S Models -- Extract the snap ring (2) and slide
back sleeve (1).
27799
29
30. TN/S Models -- Unscrew: the pin (1) and 4 screws
(2) and remove the pin and lower bracket.
27800
30
31. TN/D Models -- Unscrew the front, central and
rear retaining bolts and remove the guard on the
transmission shafts (1).
27801
31
32. TN/D Models -- Extract the snap ring and slide
back sleeve (1) on the grooved shaft.
27802
32
33. Fit an additional hitching bracket (1) if the engine
is only provided with one bracket.
Position a fixed stand under the clutch casing
and attach a chain to the hoist and the brackets
(1), put the chain under tension.
27803
33
34. Unscrew the screws and remove the cab floor
covering (1).
27804
34
35. Raise the cab floor covering, remove the foam
rubber and, using a wrench (1) placed through
the two holes on the cab platform, unscrew the 4
upper screws securing the clutch casing to the
engine.
Unscrew the remaining screws securing the
clutch casing to the engine.
27805
35
36. Make sure that the hoisting slings (1) are ten-
sioned and, working on the front wheels, detach
the engine--front axle assembly from the clutch
casing.
27806
36
37. Using tool 294097 (1), unscrew the retaining
bolts and remove the clutch (2).
Installation
To refit the engine to the clutch casing, proceed
as follows.
CAUTION
Always use appropriate tools to align fixing ho-
les.NEVER USE YOUR FINGERS OR HANDS.
-- Apply the torque settings listed on page 3. 27785
37
-- Before refitting the engine to the clutch box care-
fully clean the mating surfaces and apply sealing
compound (2 mm [0.787 in.] diameter), accord-
ing to the diagram shown Section 21, Chapter 1,
page 31.
-- Refit the clutch on the engine flywheel using tool
294097.
-- Using a hoist, position the engine--front axle as-
sembly and secure in position.
Screw the upper bolts through the holes on the
cab platform.
-- Position the foam rubber covering, the mat and -- Correctly position the compressor, the radiator
guard. and conditioning system dehydrator filter, then
secure.
-- If the tractor in question is a TN 55D or TN 65D,
TN70D or TN 75D, position the sleeve correctly, -- Connect the hydrostatic steering piping.
securing with the snap ring, then assemble and
secure the transmission shafts guard. -- Carry out operation 90 100 84 Bonnet guard, only
installation (see Section 90).
-- If the tractor in question is a TN 55S or TN 65S,
TN70S or TN 75S, assemble and secure the -- Connect the accelerator cable to the injection
lower bracket and pin. pump.
-- If the tractor in question is a TN 55S or TN 65S, -- Connect the rev counter cable (if fitted).
TN70S or TN 75S, position the sleeve correctly
and secure with the snap ring. -- Connect the PTO cable to the relative lever.
-- If the tractor in question is a TN 55S or TN 65S, -- Connect the clutch cable (if fitted).
TN70S or TN 75S, assemble and secure the
transmission shafts guard. -- Carry out operation 90 110 14 Instrument panel
lower guard, only installation (see Section 90).
-- Connect and secure the front differential lock pip-
ing. -- Connect the heating system piping.
-- Connect the lift intake and delivery piping. -- Carry out operation 10 254 44 Exhaust pipe, only
assembly (see Section 10).
-- Connect the Power Shuttle filter and front differ-
ential lock piping, then secure together with the -- Carry out operation 90 100 80 Protective grille,
clamp. only LH grille installation (see Section 90).
-- Connect the heat exchanger hose to the rigid pip- -- If the tractor in question is a TN 55S or TN 65S,
ing. TN70S or TN 75S remove bracket 294078 and
spacers 50162.
-- Connect the thermostarter and fuel pump piping.
-- Assemble the front ballast, if fitted.
-- Connect the following connections: alternator,
engine oil pressure, engine coolant temperature -- Carry out operation 90 100 22 Bonnet, only in-
and intake manifold ground. stallation (see Section 90).
-- Connect the following connections: starter -- Fill up the engine cooling system (see page 7,
motor, injection pump, steering sensor, thermo- Section 00 for prescribed products and quan-
starter, on the brakes priority terminal and all cab tities).
connections.
-- Screw the plug on the rear transmission casing
-- Assemble the bonnet rear support. and fill up with oil (see page 7, Section 00 for pre-
scribed products and quantities).
-- Connect all brake priority terminal piping (see
page 7, Section 00 for prescribed products and
quantities).
Op. 18 110 30
DUAL DISK CLUTCH 11”/11” 1
Disassembly
CAUTION
Proceed as follows.
1. Unscrew the three PTO clutch lever adjustment 24791
nuts (1).
38
2. Take off the pressure plate (1) with the three coil
springs (2) and the three washers. 1
24792
39
3. Position three clamps (1) at intervals of 120° on
the clutch body and gradually and carefully
squeeze the Belleville spring disk.
1
24793
40
4. Extract the six spring retaining pins (1) from their
seats. 1
24794
41
5. Remove the three clamps and extract the Belle-
ville spring disk (1). 1
24975
42
6. Loosen the three locknuts (1) of the main clutch
lever adjustment screws.
1
24976
43
7. Remove the three the main clutch lever adjust-
ment screws (1).
1
24977
44
8. Extract the main clutch pressure plate (1).
1
24978
45
9. Extract the main clutch disk (1).
1
24979
46
10. Remove the springs (1) of the PTO clutch control
levers.
1
24980
47
11. Extract the pivot pins (1) of the PTO clutch control
levers. 1
24981
48
12. Remove the springs (1) of the main clutch control
levers. 1
24982
49
Assembly
13. Extract the pivot pins (1) of the main clutch con- 1
trol levers.
To refit the clutch, proceed as follows.
WARNING
-- Refit the lever pivot pins and the relative springs.
-- Refit the main clutch disk in the housing. 24983
-- Install the main clutch pressure plate , securing 50

to the pins with the bolts.
-- Install the Belleville spring disk, carefully position

the three clamps and evenly and progressively
compress the spring. Insert the six pins, making
sure that they are securely inserted in their re-
spective seats, then remove the clamps.
-- Install the PTO clutch disk; fit the three washers

and the coil springs on the pins and secure with
the three nuts.
Op. 18 110 30
11” SINGLE CLUTCH (FITTED WITH THE
POWER-SHUTTLE GEARBOX)
Disassembly
WARNING
Proceed as follows.
1. Unscrew the three clutch lever adjustment nuts 25963
(1).
51
2. Remove the pressure plate (1) with the coil
springs (2) on the levers.
25964
52
3. Unscrew the six retaining bolts (1) of the Power
Shuttle gear control disk and remove (2).
Assembly
To refit the clutch, proceed as follows.
WARNING
-- Refit the Power Shuttle gear control disk in the

clutch housing. 25965
53
-- Install the pressure plates and secure to the
spring coils.
-- Tighten the lever adjustment nuts.

CHECKS, MEASUREMENTS AND REPAIRS
DUAL CLUTCH
WARNING
Minimum permissible dimensions after refacing of

parts subject to wear in the 11”/11” dual clutch
A ≥ 15.5 mm (0.6102 in.); B ≥ 22.7 mm (0.8937 in.); D ≥
15.8 mm (0.6220 in.).
25966
1. Flywheel.
2. PTO clutch pressure plate. 54
3. Main clutch pressure plate.
4. Clutch cover.
Minimum permissible dimensions after refacing of

parts subject to wear in the 11” single clutch
A ≥ 15.5 mm (0.6102 in.); C ≥ 15.8 mm (0.6220 in.).
3
1. Flywheel.
2. PTO clutch pressure plate.
3. Clutch cover.
-- Check the degree of wear on the PTO disks (11,

fig. 2 and 1, fig. 3) and gear (9), replacing them
if the linings have worn down (or are nearly worn
down) to the rivet heads.
25967
-- Replace the disk when the oil has soaked into the
organic agglomerate surfaces. 55
Minimum permissible dimensions after refacing

of parts subject to wear in the 11”/11” dual clutch
and 11” single clutch.
-- Check the friction surface conditions of the pres-

sure plates and the clutch cover.
Generally, by means of turning, up to 1 mm of
material can be removed from the cast iron fric-
tion surfaces of the clutch cover (3), the pressure
plate ring (2) and the flywheel (see Section 10,
Chap. 1, page 62).
When parts (1), (2), (3) and (4 figs. 54 and 55) are to
be repaired by removing material, proceed as
follows:
-- If it is necessary to reface the friction surfaces on
the PTO clutch pressure plate (2, fig. 54 and 55),
remember that the amount removed in relation to
the nominal thickness (A), must also be removed
from the base of the clutch cover (4, fig. 54 and
3, fig. 55), in order to regain the original position
of the pressure plate (2) in relation to the fly-
wheel.
The position indicated by (C) of the clutch cover

(4, see fig. 54 and 55) must be calculated using
the following formula:
C = 71.4 + A
Where:
A = Thickness of the pressure plate after refac-

ing.
C = Height of the clutch cover after refacing.
-- When the friction surfaces of the main clutch

pressure plate ring (3, fig. 54) or the clutch cover
(4), need refacing, remember that the removal of
material cannot be compensated by turning the
clutch cover (4) on the flywheel side.
-- Therefore the least possible material should be

removed from parts (3 and 4), for longer clutch
life.
NOTE: If, after having refaced parts (3 and 4, fig. 54)

several times, the main clutch disk starts to slip, the
entire clutch assembly must be replaced.
-- Refit the clutch assembly as shown on page 7.
COPLANARITY ADJUSTMENT OF 11”/11”

DUAL CLUTCH RELEASE
1. After overhauling the clutch, fit the centering pin

294097 (1) and fit the entire clutch assembly to
the flywheel, then tighten the bolts (2).
25968
56
2. Fit the gauge 295023 (1) on the centering pin
and, using a feeler gauge, adjust the clutch re-
lease levers (2) to obtain a clearance of 0.1 mm
(0.0039 in.) on all levers.
25969
57
3. Rotate the gauge 295023 (1) and, using a feeler
gauge, adjust the PTO clutch release levers (2)
to obtain a clearance of 0.1 mm (0.0039 in.).
25970
58
COPLANARITY ADJUSTMENT OF 11”
SINGLE PLATE CLUTCH RELEASE
LEVERS
4. After overhauling the clutch, fit the centering pin
294097 (1), the gauge 295023 (2), and fit the en-
tire clutch assembly to the flywheel, then tighten
the bolts (3).
25971
59
5. Using a feeler gauge, adjust the coplanarity of
the clutch release lever to obtain a clearance of
0.1 mm (0.0039 in.).
25972
60
Op. 18 100 40
MAIN CLUTCH CONTROL LINKAGE
1. If the position of the clutch pedal (1) requires ad-
justment, or after a clutch overhaul, check that
the height of the main clutch pedal from the floor
(A), is 140 ± 2 mm (5.5118 ± 0.0787 in.). If not,
adjust as follows:
25973
61
-- Loosen the locknut (1) and turn the nut (2)
counter--clockwise.
-- Check that the pedal height is 150 ± 2 mm.
-- Tighten the locknut (1).
25974
62
-- Operate the unit four or five times.
-- Check that the clutch pedal (1) height is as pre-
scribed.
-- If necessary, reset to the correct height (A), as
previously described.
-- After having correctly adjusted the pedal height,
check that the entire distance is travelled with a
maximum load of 19 daN (42.5 lbs.).
25975
63
PTO CLUTCH CONTROL
WARNING
1. Remove the left--hand guard under the control

panel.
2. Loosen the locknut (2) and unscrew nut (1) to ob-

tain lever (4) clearance of 30 to 40 mm (1.1811
to 1.5748 in.).
64
3. Fully raise the lever (1), hold in position and

tighten nut (1, fig. 64) until the lever (4, fig. 64)
makes contact with the rubber stop (3, fig. 64).
4. Carry out 2 or 3 engage/disengage manoeuvers

to set the PTO clutch.
5. Check that the lever (4, fig. 64) makes contact

with the stop (3, fig. 64), if not repeat point 3.
6. Unscrew nut (1) on face No. 8 of the hexagon,

and secure with the locknut (2, fig. 64).
7. Check that the lever (4, fig. 64) has the correct 65
clearance when idle.
8. Assemble the LH side guard.
NOTE: If further information is needed on PTO

adjustments, see Section 31, Chapter 2.
SECTION 21 -- TRANSMISSIONS -- CHAPTER 1 1
Chapter 1 -- Mechanical Transmission (8 x 8) and (16 x 16)

Synchro-Command
CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Shuttle Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Gearbox and Range Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Rear Transmission -- Gearbox Casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
21 118 10 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
21 118 12 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
21 118 85 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
21 130 10 Gearbox Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
21 130 11 Range Gear Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
2 SECTION 21 -- TRANSMISSIONS -- CHAPTER 1
SPECIFICATIONS
SHUTTLE UNIT
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mechanical type with spur
gearing, located between the
main clutch and the gearbox.
Operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hand lever located on left--hand
side of operator
GEARBOX AND RANGE GEAR
Gearbox (Synchro-Command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--speed constant mesh,
synchronized on all gears with
synchronized F/R shuttle shift.
Gearing type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . helical
Range gear (16 x 16 version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ordinary gear train with 4 ranges
for a total of 16 speeds.
Range gear (8 x 8 version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ordinary gear train with 2 ranges
-- Gearing type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . spur gears
Gearbox and range gear controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . independent, by means of lever
located on right--hand side of
operator
Thickness of gearbox driving shaft adjustment ring
(4, page 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 0.5 -- 0.75 -- 1.0 -- 1.25 -- 1.5 --
1.75 -- 2.0 -- 2.25
(in.) (0.19 -- 0.29 -- 0.39 -- 0.49 --
0.59 -- 0.68 -- 0.78 -- 0.88)
Thickness of gearbox driven shaft adjustment ring
(12, page 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 0.5 -- 0.75 -- 1.0 -- 1.25 -- 1.5 --
1.75 -- 2.0 -- 2.25
(in.) (0.19 -- 0.29 -- 0.39 -- 0.49 --
0.59 -- 0.68 -- 0.78 -- 0.88)
Springs for detent balls on gearbox and range gear control rods:
-- spring free length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 42
(in.) (1.65)
-- length of springs under load of 75.5 to 83.3 N
(16.97 to 18.72 ft. lbs.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 35
(in.) (1.37)
Springs (2, page 10) for gearbox and range gear control levers:
-- spring free length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 44
(in.) (1.73)
-- length of springs under load of 31.4 to 35.3 N
(7.05 to 7.943 ft. lbs.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 35
(in.) (1.37)
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Tightening torque
PART Thread
Nm ft. lbs.
Sleeve cover retaining nuts (C1, fig. 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 8 x 1.25 20 to 25 15 to 19
Gearbox driving and driven shafts bearing cover screws (C2) . . . M 10 x 1.25 84 to 93 62 to 69
Retaining bolts securing creeper clutch casing to rear
transmission/gearbox casing (C3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 12 x 1.25 117 to 129 87 to 96
Driven gear shaft locknut (C4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 32 x 1.5 280 to 309 207 to 228
Drive gear housing cover retaining screws (C5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 43 to 51 32 to 38
Pressure switches (C6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 51 to 72 38 to 54
Parking brake inspection cover, gearbox and range control relay
levers support cover retaining screws (C7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 10 x 1.25 43 to 51 32 to 38
Bolts or nuts securing creeper clutch casing to the engine (C8) . . M 12 x 1.25 117 to 129 87 to 96
C1 -- 20 to 25 Nm C3 -- 117 to 129 Nm C4 -- 280 to 309 Nm C5 -- 43 to 51 Nm

(15 to 19 ft. lbs.) (87 to 96 ft. lbs.) (206 to 228 ft. lbs.) (32 to 38 ft. lbs.)
25612 C2 -- 84 to 93 Nm
(62 to 69 ft. lbs.)
C6 -- 51 to 72 Nm
(38 to 54 ft. lbs.)
25614 C8 -- 117 to 129 Nm C7 -- 43 to 51 Nm

(87 to 96 ft. lbs.) 27928
(32 to 38 ft. lbs.)
1
SPECIAL TOOLS
X 294090 Driving shaft fitting guides.

Warning -- The operations described in this section X 294091 Driven shaft fitting guides.
can only be carried out with ESSENTIAL tools X 294099 Adjuster handle (with 294100 and
indicated by an (X). 294145).
To work safely and efficiently and obtain the best
results, it is also necessary to use the recommended X 294100 Power take--off drive shaft seal
specific tools listed below and certain other tools splining tool (with 294099).
which are to be made according to the drawings X 294145 Power take--off drive shaft roller
included in this manual. bearings splining tool (with
294099).
List of specific tools required for the various X 38006006 Electronic Service Tool (use the
operations described in this section. Calibration and Diagnostic Unit as
291517 Clutch casing lift hook. a substitute).
290090 Rotating stand for overhaul opera- X 38006007 Electronic Service Tool less lap
tions. top.
X 294074 Tool for gearbox driving and driven X 380000282 Calibration and diagnostic unit
shafts adjustment. (use the Electronic Service Tool as
a substitute).
X 294087 Driving shaft rod for lifting unit.
50091 Tool for removal--refitting side
X 294075 Driven shaft retaining tool.
gears (see Section 27).
X 294076 Pliers for gearbox shafts circlips.
150 (5.905)
20 15
(.787) (.590)
M12x1.25
7 (.275)
25618
Guide pin for refitting the gearbox in the housing

(Mark tool No. 50158 -- measurement in mm [ins.])
Make in C 40 material.
(1.57)
(11.81)
(9.84)
(7.87)
(1.96)
(1.57)
(3.54)
(.787) (.787)
26258
Tool to be made for lateral gear removal--installation, use with a part of 50091.
(Mark tool No. 50114 -- Measurement in mm [ins.])
Make in Fe 42 C material -- (*) Measurement according to hoist seat.

615 (24.21)
(1)
27940
Bracket to be made for gearbox overhaul on rotating stand

1. Rotating stand axis.
27941
5

SECTIONAL VIEWS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X
X
25619 13 12 11 10 9
6
Longitudinal cross--sectional view of gearbox and gear range (16 + 16 Synchro-Command)
1. Seal. 8. Bevel pinion shaft.

2. Power take--off shaft support roller bearings. 9. Selector sleeve for low or medium--high speeds.
3. Shuttle control synchronizer. 10. Synchronizer for 1st and 2nd speed.
4. Gearbox driving gear clearance adjusting thickness. 11. Synchronizer for 3rd and 4th speed.
5. Power take--off shaft. 12. Gearbox driven shaft gear clearance adjusting
6. Gearbox driving gear. thickness.
7. Selector sleeve for high or medium--low speeds. 13. Gearbox driven shaft.
NOTE: When fitting apply sealing compound to surfaces X as shown on 31.

7
Longitudinal cross--sectional view of gearbox and gear range (8 x 8 Synchro-Command)
1. Low speed intermediate gears. 3. Selector sleeve for low speeds.

2. Selector sleeve for high speeds. 4. Bevel pinion.
Cross--sectional view of gearbox and range gear
1. Shuttle control external rod. 4. Gear selector internal rod.

2. Gear control external rod spring. 5. Shuttle selector internal rod.
3. Gear control external rod.
NOTE: On assembly apply sealant to surfaces X as shown on page 31.

25622
25623
9
Cross--sectional view of gearbox and range gear
1. Range gear control external rod spring. 5. Shuttle relay gear (reverse gear)
2. Range gear control external rod. 6. Detent ball and spring.
3. Shuttle control fork. 7. Lubricating oil external pipes.
4. Shuttle selector synchronizer. 8. Lubricating oil internal pipes.
NOTE: On assembly apply sealant to surfaces X as shown on page 31.

10
View of safety pin control
1. Gearbox clutch control pedal. 3. Gearbox clutch control external lever.

2. Gearbox clutch control cable. 4. Safety pin control cable.
Gearbox and Shuttle (Synchro-Command) The shuttle is a mechanical device making it possible
to obtain 8 forward gears and 8 reverse gears (8 x 8
4--speed gearbox with constant--mesh helical gears version) or 16 forward gears and 16 reverse gears
controlled by two synchronizers. (16 x 16 version). It is controlled by a lever located on
the cab platform to the left of the operator.
The range gear has cascade--type constant--mesh
spur gears. The shuttle is composed of a group of three spur
gears: reverser driving gear, reverser driven gear
The range gear provides 2 gears (8 x 8 version) or 4
and intermediate gear, engagement is by means of
gears (16 x 16 version).
a synchronizer located in the gear unit.
The gearbox and the range gears are controlled by
The shuttle is installed inside the clutch casing,
two independent levers located on the right--hand
between the clutch and the gearbox.
side of the operator.
Lubrication is by means of the oil in the rear
transmission/gearbox.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Spontaneous disengagement of 1. Levers and relay rods Adjust correctly.

gearbox. incorrectly adjusted.
2. Control levers retaining Replace springs.

springs damaged.
3. Synchronizer teeth or Remove the transmission--gearbox

selection sleeves damaged. casing and replace the synchronizers
or the sleeves.
4. Engagement stroke Eliminate the cause and reset the

incomplete. complete stroke.
(continued)
Difficulty in engaging the gearbox. 1. External levers and relay rods Adjust correctly.
incorrectly adjusted.
2. Stiffness and/or partial seizure Check rod pivots and lubricate.

of external levers and relay
rods.
3. Main clutch drag. See Section 18.
4. Synchronizers or selection Remove the transmission--gearbox

sleeves damaged. casing and replace the synchronizers
or the sleeves.
5. Internal control elements do Overhaul the controls.

not slide freely: rods, forks and
sleeves.
Excessive noise in gearbox or 1. Internal components worn or Remove the transmission--gearbox

shuttle. defective. casing and replace the damaged
parts.
OVERHAUL
Op. 21 118 10 -- 21 118 12
REAR TRANSMISSION--GEARBOX CASING
Removal
DANGER
equipment
Make sure that the units or parts are supported by
lifted.
Proceed as follows.
1. Carry out operation 90 150 10 Cab with platform,
only removal (see Section 90, Chapter 1).
2. Carry out operation 23 101 26 Transmission
shafts and guard, only removal (see Section 23,
Chapter 1).
3. Carry out operation 10 216 10 Fuel tank, only re-
moval (see Section 10, Chapter 1).
5. Remove the top link of the third point.
6. Using a hoist and sling (1) raise the rear part of
27837
the tractor, position a fixed support stand under
the towing hook, then remove the right--hand (2) 11
and left hand wheels.
7. Unscrew the plug and drain the oil from the rear
transmission casing (the prescribed quantity is
42 litres).
25628
12
8. Unscrew the stabiliser strut bracket retaining
bolts (1).
27840
13
9. Attach tool 50091 (1) and adapter 50114 (2) to
the lateral gear unit body.
27841
14
10. Position a hydraulic jack (2) under the gear unit,
unscrew the retaining bolts and, using the jack
(2), remove the right--hand gear unit (1) and the
spacer.
11. Detach and remove the vertical rods, complete
with the lower arms.
27842
15
12. Remove the pick--up bar, connect the pick--up
hitch hook (2), using a chain (1), to the hoist, loos-
1 2
en the retaining bolts and detach the hook.
25627
16
13. Disconnect and remove the lift auxiliary control
valve control pipes (1) and trailer brake control
1 2
(2).
25449
17
14. Unscrew the retaining bolts and extract the Lift--
O--Matic control lever (1).
1
25450
18
15. Unscrew the retaining bolts on the lift (1) and re-
cover the trailer brake control pipes support
bracket.
Disconnect the power take--off speed sensor
connections, if necessary.
1
25451
19
16. Attach the lifting hook 291517 (1) to the lift (2)
and, by means of the hoist, raise and remove the
1 2
lift.
25452
20
17. Unscrew and remove the filter pipes (2) and the
transmission--gearbox casing pipes.
18. Disconnect the union (3) on the front differential
lock control pipes and loosen the clamp.
27795
21
19. Unscrew the clamp (1) and detach the sleeve on
the oil intake pipes, unscrew the union (2) and re-
move the lift oil feed pipes, detach and remove
the two transmission gearbox casing pipes.
27796
22
20. Disconnect the brake control pipes (1) from the
brake block and the rear transmission casing and
remove.
21. Unscrew the union and the retaining bolt, then re-
move the pipes (2).
23
22. Disconnect the unions on the heat exchanger
pipes (1).
1
25640
24
23. Disconnect the unions (2) and remove the pipes
(1 and 3). 1 2 3
24. Unscrew the retaining bolts and remove the cab
support bracket (on both sides).
25642
25
25. Position a fixed stand (1) under the engine.
1
27943
26
26. Screw on the four hooks (1) and, using a chain,
connect them to a hoist, unscrew the retaining 1
bolts that secure the clutch casing to the engine
and detach the engine, together with the rear
transmission.
27944
27
27. Position the rear transmission--clutch unit on a
workbench. Unscrew the retaining bolts and re-
1
cover the services control valve (1).
25654
28
28. Extract the pin (3), detach the external lever (1),
unscrew the retaining bolts and remove the sup- 1 2
port (2), complete with control lever.
3
25655
29
29. Remove: the parking brake control lever (5), the
drive gear control oil union (4) and the electric 3
1 2
sensors (1, 2 and 3).
5
25656
30
30. Position two nylon slings (1) under the clutch cas-
ing (2) and attach to the hoist. Unscrew the re-
1 2
taining bolts that secure the clutch casing to the
transmission casing and remove.
Installation
To refit the rear transmission--gearbox case, proceed
as follows.
WARNING
25657
31
-- For the correct orientation of the various parts,
refer to the illustrations on pages 8, 9, 10 and 11.
-- Before refitting boxes, supports and covers, thor-
oughly clean and degrease the mating surfaces
and apply a strip of sealing compound of about
2 mm (0.0787 ins.) diameter as shown in the dia-
gram on page 31.
-- Respect the tightening torques prescribed on
page 2.
-- Re--fit the clutch casing on the rear transmis-
sion--gearbox case.
-- Fit the electric sensors, the drive gear oil union
and the parking brake control external lever.
-- Fit the support complete with creeper--reverser
control lever, remembering to attach the lever (2)
1
to the bracket (1) and to insert the unit positioned
in a counter--clockwise direction, then straight-
en--up the unit when it comes into contact with 2
the casing to facilitate the insertion of the lever (2)
in the relative teeth.
-- Assemble the creeper--reverser external control
lever.
-- Fit the services control valve.
27945
32
-- Refit the rear transmission--gearbox case and -- Fit the hitch--hook and pick--up bar.
clutch casing to the engine.
-- Re--connect the vertical rods to the lift arms.
-- Attach the cab mounting.
-- Connect all of the services control valve pipes. -- Fit the brake disks, the differential axle shafts and
side gears.
-- Connect the brake and services control pipes.
-- Connect the heat exchanger pipes. -- Fit the rear wheels and remove the support
stands.
-- Fit the rear transmission--gearbox case oil intake
pipes. -- Carry out operation 90 150 10 Cab with platform,
only installation (see Section 90, Chapter 1).
-- Connect the trailer brake and lift control pipes.
-- Connect all of the lateral filter and front differen- -- Carry out operation 23 101 26 Transmission
tial lock control pipes. shafts and guard, only installation (see Section
23, Chapter 1).
-- Tighten the rear transmission--gearbox oil drain-
age plug. -- Carry out operation 10 216 10 Fuel tank, only
-- Assemble the hydraulic lift. installation (see Section 10, Chapter 1).
-- Fit the Lift--O--Matic control lever. -- Fill up the rear transmission--gearbox casing
-- Assemble and connect the auxiliary control valve (see Section 00 for prescribed products and
support and trailer brake valve pipes. quantities).
Op. 21 118 85
Disassembly
WARNING
Proceed as follows.
1. Fix the gearbox--transmission casing to the rotat-

ing stand 290090 using brackets 50160 (see
pages 6 and 7).
2. Remove the drive gear casing, following the in-

structions in section 23.
3. Unscrew the retaining bolts and remove the cov-

er (1) with the gearbox lever and gear unit.
4. Detach the power take--off control shaft following

the instructions in section 31.
25717
33
5. Remove the parking brake casing cover and ex-

tract the circlip (1) that secures the parking brake
control lever.
25718
34
6. Extract the parking brake control lever (2) and re-
cover the sleeve--cam (1).
25721
35
7. Loosen the retaining bolt and remove the cover
(1).
25734
36
8. Remove the circlip (2) and recover the unit (1)
composed of the brake disk and the relative fric-
tion sectors.
25735
37
9. Fit tool 294087 (1) on the driving shaft and lock
in position, insert tool 294075 (2) on the gearbox
driven shaft and tighten.
NOTE: If the gearbox in question is a standard fitting,

fit a M 12 x 1.25 x 40 screw together with a ∅ 12 x ∅
45 washer and 3 mm (.118 ins.) shim, instead of tool
294075 (2).
25736
38
10. Remove the circlip from the front side of the cas-
ing and, using an extracting tool, extract the final
drive driven shaft and recover the driven gears
(1).
25737
39
11. Extract the lubrication pipe (1) from the gearbox.
25738
40
12. Remove the circlip (1) and the union (2), com-
plete with the lubrication pressure adjustment
valve.
25739
41
13. Unscrew the lubrication union (1) from the left--
hand side of the casing.
25740
42
14. Remove the union (2) and the lubrication sleeve
(1).
25741
43
15. Enlarge the circlip (1) that secures the gearbox
driving shaft.
25742
44
16. From the drive gear case, enlarge the circlip (1)
that secures the gearbox driven shaft.
25744
45
17. Unscrew the gearbox retaining bolts (1) and re-
move, using a hoist.
25743
46
18. Fit tool 294074 (2) in a vice and remove the mo-
bile part (1) of the tool.
25774
47
19. Fit the gearbox unit to the tool 294074 (1) and re--
fit the mobile part (2) of the tool.
25775
48
20. Remove the pins (1) to free the gearbox control
forks (on one side).
25776
49
21. Extract the pins (1) on the other side of the gear-
box and remove: the upper part (1) of the tool
294074, tool 294087 (2) from the driving shaft
and the retaining tool 294075 from the driven
shaft.
25777
50
22. Remove the driving (1) and driven (2) shafts.
25778
51
23. From the opposite side, remove the rod stop ring
(2), extract and recover the reverser control fork
(1).
25779
52
24. Extract the circlip (1) and recover the synchroniz-
er (2).
25780
53
25. Unscrew the retaining bolt (2) and recover the pin
(3), relay gear (1) and relative bearings and
thrust washers.
25781
54
26. Enlarge the circlip (3) that secures the driven
gear (1) to the gearbox support (2) and remove
the gear (1).
25782
55
27. Enlarge the circlip (1) and extract the gearbox
driven shaft (2).
Assembly
To re--fit the transmission--gearbox casing, proceed
as follows.
WARNING
25783
56
refer to the illustrations on pages 8, 9, 10 and 11.
-- Before refitting boxes, supports and covers, thor-

oughly clean and degrease the mating surfaces
and apply a strip of sealing compound of about
2 mm (0.0787 ins.) diameter as shown in the dia-
gram on page 31.

page 2.
-- Carry out the gearbox driven and driving shaft

adjustments noted on page 30.
-- Fit the gearbox driving shaft on the relative sup-

port.
-- Fit the gearbox driven gear on the relative sup-

port.
-- Fit the reverse drive gear complete with thrust

washer, bearing and retaining bolt.
-- Assemble the synchronizer and circlip.
-- Fit the reverser control rod, fork and stop circlip.
-- Assemble the driven and driving shafts, the con-

trol forks and lock in position by means of tools
294075 and 294087, fit the mobile part of tool
294074.
-- Fit the control forks to the rods using the pins.
-- Detach the mobile part of the tool 294074 and re-

move the gearbox unit from the tool.
-- Fit tools 294090 and 294091 (1) on the driving

shaft lock circlip and the driven shaft lock circlip
(respectively).
25784
57
-- Using a hoist, fit the gearbox unit in the casing
and recover the tools 294090 (1) and 294091
(the latter must be recovered from the drive gear
casing). Secure in position with the bolts.
-- Fit the lubrication union and sleeve.
-- Fit the lubrication pressure adjustment valve,

complete with the union and circlip.
-- Assemble the lubrication pipes.

25785
-- Fit the driven shaft and gears.
58
-- Remove tools 294087 and 294075 from the driv-
ing and driven shafts.
-- Fit the parking brake unit, comprising brake disks

and friction sectors.
-- Fit the cover (1) by means of the bolt (2).
NOTE: Apply Loctite 242 thread locker to the thread

on bolt (2) and tighten to a torque setting of 19.6 Nm
(14 ft. lbs.).
-- Assemble the parking brake control lever, com-

plete with cam sleeve and circlip.
-- Fit the parking brake cover.

25786
-- Assemble the power take--off control shaft, fol- 59

lowing the instructions in Section 31.
-- Fit the cover with the gearbox control lever and

final drive.
-- Fit the drive gear, following the instructions in

Section 23.
-- Detach the transmission--gearbox casing from

the rotating stand.
Adjustment
WARNING
Proceed as follows.
NOTE: When fitted, the driving and driven shaft

gears must provide an axial clearance of 0.314 inch
(0.8 mm) in order to guarantee correct synchronizer
operation.
25787
60
1. Using tool 294074 (1) clamped in the vice, attach
the gearbox support complete with the driving
and driven shafts without the respective adjust-
ment shims (4 and 12, page 8), fit the mobile part
(2) on the tool.
2. Using a depth gauge, measure the distance (L)
between the top of the tool 294074 (1) and the cir-
clip (3) on the driving shaft bearing.
3. Measure the distance (L1) between the top of the
tool 294074 (1) and the circlip (2) on the driven
shaft bearing.
4. The adjustment shim (4, page 8) to fit on the driv-
ing shaft is given by:
S = L -- 46.5 -- 1.0
where
L = measurement read
46.5 = theoretical measurement of tool 294074
1.0 = synchronizer operating clearance.
Round down the value.
5. The adjustment shim (12, page 8) to fit on the
25788
driven shaft is given by:
S1 = L1 -- 36 -- 1.0 61
L1 = measurement read
36 = theoretical measurement of tool 294074
Round down the value
Example:
L = 1.92 inch (48.8 mm) measurement read
L1 = 14.88 inch (37.8 mm) measurement read
46.5 = theoretical measurement of tool 294074
36 = theoretical measurement of tool 294074
S = 48.8 -- 46.5 -- 1.0 = 0.51 inch (1.3 mm) (adjust-
ment shim 4, page 8).
S1 = 37.8 -- 36 -- 1.0 = 0.314 inch (0.8 mm) (ad-
justment shim 12, page 8).
The adjustment shims are listed on page 2.
Round down the value.
27152
62
Sealing compound application diagram for transmission--gear box casing
The types of sealing compound are listed in Section 00.

Op. 21 130 10
GEARBOX CONTROL LEVER
Removal
WARNING
Proceed as follows.
1. Unscrew the four retaining bolts and the guard

retaining flange.
2. Raise the guard (2), remove the gearbox control

lever retaining bolt and the gearbox control lever
(1).
NOTE: If a POWER SHUTTLE gearbox is fitted, dis-

connect the electrical contact located on the gear le-
ver.
27654
63
Installation
To refit the gearbox control lever, proceed as follows.
WARNING
Always use appropriate tools to align fixing holes. NEV-
NOTE: If a POWER SHUTTLE gearbox is fitted, con-

nect the electrical contact located on the gear lever.
-- Fit the gearbox control lever (1, fig 63), complete

with guard (2) on the control sleeve.
-- Fit the lever retaining bolt to the control sleeve,

lower the guard, fit the four guard retaining flange
retaining bolts.
Op. 21 130 11
RANGE GEAR CONTROL LEVER
Removal
WARNING
Proceed as follows.
1. Unscrew the four retaining bolts and the guard

retaining flange.
2. Raise the guard (2), remove the range control le-

ver retaining bolt and the range control lever (1).
27653
Installation
64
To refit the range control lever, proceed as follows.
WARNING
-- Fit the range control lever (1, fig 64), complete

with guard (2) on the control sleeve.
-- Fit the lever retaining bolt to the control sleeve,

lower the guard, fit the four guard retaining flange
retaining bolts.
Chapter 2 -- Power Shuttle Transmission (8 x 8 and 16 x 16 versions)
CONTENT

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Shuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Power Shuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Clutches Control Pressure Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
21 118 85 Transmission -- Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
21 134 46 Power Shuttle Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
21 134 70 A + B Clutch Valve Solenoids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
21 154 60 Dump Valve Solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
21 154 34 Clutch Casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
SPECIFICATIONS
SHUTTLE
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mechanical type with spur
gearing, located between the
main clutch and the gearbox.
Operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hand lever
located on the left--hand side of
the steering wheel
GEARBOX
Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--speed constant mesh,
synchronised on all gears
Gearing type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . helical
Reduction unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ordinary gear train with 4 ranges
-- gearing type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . spur gears
Gearbox and range gear operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . independent, by means of lever
located on right--hand side of
operator
For missing data see Chapter 1, page 2.
POWER SHUTTLE
Number of driven plates in each clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . no. 6
Thickness of driven plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 7.87 to 8.18 (2.00 to 2.08)
Driven plates material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sintered
Number of driving plates in each clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . no. 6
Thickness of driving plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 7.87 to 8.66 (2.00 -- 2.20)
Driving plates material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . steel
Thickness of clutch assembly under a load of 1600 N (359.57 lbs.) in. (mm) 9.80 to 9.88 (24.9 to 25.1) (1)
Clutch piston return spring:
-- number of springs for each clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . no. 7
-- spring free height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 12.99 (3.30)
-- spring height under a load of 1255 N (282.19 lbs.) . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 10.31 (2.62)
Hydraulic control valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mounted on the outer

left--hand side of the
transmission--rear--gearbox
casing, comprising. 3 control
solenoid valves.
Power Shuttle and services transmission working pressure . . . . . psi (bar) 227 (15.7)
By--pass valve spring (6, page 11) by--pass valve:
-- spring free length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 13.97 (35.5)
-- length of spring under load of 37.2 to 41.2 N (8.37 to 9.25 lbs) in. (mm) 10.03 (25.5)
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . paper cartridge
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fixed to the pump housing
on suction side
Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . the same as used for the
hydrostatic steering system
(see Section 41, Chapter 2)
(1) Value to obtain by varying the thickness of the driving plates.
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Tightening torque
PART Thread
Nm ft.-lbs.
For missing data see Chapter 1, page 2.
Solenoid valve retaining nut (C1) (•) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 1.7 to 2.8 1.2 to 2
Solenoid valve spool retaining bolt (C2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 14.9 to 20.3 10 to 15
Solenoid valve spool retaining bolts (C3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 47 to 54 35 to 40
Solenoid valve retaining nut (C4) (•) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 5.4 to 8.1 4 to 6

(•) Apply 1 or 2 drops of LOCTITE 542 before tightening
C1 --14.9 to 20.3 Nm
(10 to 15 ft.-lbs.)
C2 --1.7 to 2.8 Nm
(1.2 to 2 ft.-lbs.)
LO
HI
REV
DUMP
C3 --47 to 54 Nm
FWD
(35 to 40 ft.-lbs.)
C4 --5.4 to 8.1 Nm
(4 to 6 ft.-lbs.)
25791
C3 --47 to 54 Nm
(35 to 40 ft.-lbs.)
C4 --5.4 to 8.1 Nm
(4 to 6 ft.-lbs.)
25792
1
SPECIAL TOOLS
X 294075 Driven shaft retaining tool.

Warning -- The operations described in this section X 294099 Adjuster handle (with 294100 and
can only be carried out with ESSENTIAL tools 294145).
indicated by an (X). X 294100 Power take--off drive shaft seal splin-
To work safely and efficiently and obtain the best ing tool (with 294099).
results, it is also necessary to use the recommended
specific tools listed below and certain other tools X 294145 Power take--off drive shaft roller bear-
which are to be made according to the drawings ings splining tool (with 294099).
included in this manual. X 294076 Pliers for gearbox shafts circlips.
X 294090 Driving shaft assembly guide.
X 294091 Driven shaft fitting guides.
50091 Tool for removal--refitting side gears
(see Section 27).
X 294077 Adapter (with 295021).
291517 Clutch casing lift hook.
X 295021 Tool for hydraulic clutch piston springs
290090 Rotating stand for overhaul oper-
(with 294077).
ations.
X 292870 Hydraulic pressure testing kit.
X 294074 Tool for gearbox driving and driven
shafts adjustment. X 294035 Hydraulic pressure testing kit.
X 294086 Driving shaft rod for lifting unit.
150 (5.905)
20 15
(.787) (.590)
M12x1.25
7 (.275)
25618
2
Guide pin for re--fitting the gearbox in the casing.
(Mark part with no. 50158 -- Measurement in mm [ins])
Make in C 40 material.
27941
3

615 (24.21)
(1)
27940

(Mark part No. 50157 -- Measurement in mm [ins.])
1. Rotating stand axis.
SECTIONAL VIEWS
5
Longitudinal cross--sectional view of Power Shuttle gearbox (16 + 16 version)
1. Forward gear control clutch piston. 7. Reverse drive shaft.

2. Forward gear control clutch. 8. Reverse driven shaft.
3. Piston return Belleville washer. 9. Reverse gear clutch control piping.
4. Reverse gear control clutch. 10. Forward gear clutch control piping.
5. Reverse gear control clutch piston. 11. Lubrication control pipes.
6. Forward gear drive shaft.
NOTE: For missing data see Chapter 1.

7 6 5
Cross--sectional views of Power Shuttle gearbox
1. Power Shuttle control valve. 6. Reverse return gear.

2. Gear control internal rod. 7. Roller bearing.
3. Gear control external lever. 8. Dump solenoid valve.
4. Pin. 9. Operating pressure testing plugs.
5. Pin retaining bolt (4).
Longitudinal cross--sectional view of Power Shuttle gearbox (8 + 8 version)
1. Low gear intermediate gears. 3. Selector sleeve for low gears.

2. Selector sleeve for high gears. 4. Bevel pinion.
NOTE: For missing data see Chapter 1.

5
4
MDE0067A
Power Shuttle control valve.
1. Reverse clutch control solenoid valve. 4. Reverse gears clutch working pressure control plug.
2. Forward clutch control solenoid valve. 5. Forward gears clutch working pressure control plug.
3. Dump solenoid valve.
CLUTCHES CONTROL PRESSURE TEST Start the engine and check the pressure (see page 2).
Unscrew plug (4) or (5) on the clutch to be tested and If the pressure is incorrect adjust the shims (3,
connect a pressure gauge from kit 292870 to the fig. 11), increase if the pressure is low and decrease
relative hole. if too high.
1 2 3
27804A
6 5
Cross--sectional view of services control valve
1. Four wheel drive release solenoid valve. 4. Cooler by-pass valve spring.
2. Spring for services control oil pressure adjustment 5. Cooler by-pass valve.
valve. 6. Services control pressure adjustment valve.
3. Services control oil pressure adjustment shims.
Gears
4--speed gearbox with constant--mesh helical gears

controlled by two synchronizers.
The range gear has cascade--type constant--mesh

spur gears.
The range gear provides 2 gear ranges (8 + 8 ver-

sion) or 4 gear ranges (16 + 16 version).
The gearbox and the range gears are controlled by

two independent levers located on the right--hand
side of the operator.
Gear reversal is obtained by means of the lever (1)

located on the left--hand side of the steering wheel.
It is not necessary to press the clutch pedal, but the
engine rpm and tractor speed must be reduced.
Lubrication is by means of the oil in the rear trans-

mission/gearbox.
Power Shuttle unit
The Power Shuttle gearbox is controlled by two

multi--disk clutches in an oil bath. 10
This provides hydraulic control of 4 gears for each
range, both forward and in reverse.
Gear and range selection is performed by pressing

the clutch pedal and operating the control levers lo-
cated on the right--hand side of the operator.
The front clutch controls the forward gears, the rear

clutch controls the reverse gears.
TROUBLESHOOTING
See Chapter 1, pages 13 and 14.

OVERHAUL
Op. 21 118 85
TRANSMISSION--GEARBOX
Disassembly
WARNING
Proceed as follows:
1. Carry out operation 21 118 10: Rear transmis-
sion--gearbox casing, only removal (see Chapter
1).
2. Unscrew the retaining bolts and recover the ser-

vices control valve (1).
1
25654
11
3. Unscrew the retaining bolts and detach the Pow-
er Shuttle (1) control valve.
4. Attach the transmission--gearbox casing on the

rotating stand 290090 using brackets 50160 (see
pages 5 and 6).
27087
12
5. Unscrew the retaining bolts (1) on the clutch con-
trol pipes (2).
27088
13
6. Remove the clutch control pipes (1) by means of
rotation.
27089
14
7. Unscrew the unions (1 and 2) on the clutch con-
trol pipes and recover the internal unions.
27090
15
8. Loosen the shuttle control pin (1).
9. Complete the gearbox removal operations by fol-

lowing the instructions in Chapter 1.
Assembly
To refit the unit, carry out the disassembly operations
in reverse order, following the instructions in Chapter
1.
27091
16
Op. 21 134 46
POWER SHUTTLE CONTROL VALVE
Disassembly
WARNING
Handle all parts with extreme care. Do not put your
hands or fingers between parts. Wear suitable safety
clothing -- safety goggles, gloves and shoes.
With the Power Shuttle control valve on the work-

bench, proceed as follows.
1. Extract the pin (1) that retains the creeper unit

control lever (2). 27109
17
2. Extract the creeper unit control lever (1) and re-

cover the internal lever (2).
27110
18
3. Unscrew the nut (1) and extract the solenoid
valve (2).
27111
19
4. Unscrew the solenoid valve pin (1).
5. Repeat operations 3 and 4 with solenoid valve
(2).
27112
20
6. Unscrew the nut (2) and extract the solenoid
valve (1).
27113
21
8. Repeat operations 6 and 7 with solenoid valves
(2 and 3).
27114
22
9. Remove the circlip (1).
27115
23
10. Remove the plug (1) and recover the shuttle con-
trol pin (2).
27116
24
11. Remove the switch (1).
Assembly
To refit the Power Shuttle control valve, proceed as
follows.
WARNING

refer to the illustrations on page 10. 27117
25
-- Respect the tightening torque values prescribed
on page 3.
-- Fit the switch.
-- Assemble the control pin, plug and circlip.
-- Fit the pins and relative solenoid valves then, af-

ter having applied 1 or 2 drops of Loctite 542,
tighten the nuts.
-- Assemble the internal lever, the creeper unit con-

trol lever and the pin.
Op. 21 134 70
A + B CLUTCH VALVE SOLENOIDS
Removal
WARNING
In order to remove a control solenoid valve from the

two clutches, the working area must be kept clean.
Proceed as follows.

2. Disconnect the solenoid valve connection (1).
26
3. Loosen the nut and remove the solenoid valve

(1).
27
Installation
To refit the control valve solenoid, proceed as
follows.
WARNING
-- Screw the pin on the solenoid valve.
-- Fit and secure the solenoid valve.

28
-- Connect the electrical connection.
-- Carry out operation 10 216 10 Fuel tank, only

installation (see Section 10, Chapter 1).
Op. 21 154 60
DUMP VALVE SOLENOID
Removal
WARNING
In order to remove a control solenoid valve from the

gearbox, the working area must be kept clean. Pro-
ceed as follows.

2. Disconnect the solenoid valve connection (1)

and unscrew the retaining nut.
29
3. Remove the solenoid valve (1).
30
Installation
To refit the control valve solenoid, proceed as
follows.
WARNING
-- Screw the pin on the solenoid valve.
-- Fit and secure the solenoid valve.

31
-- Connect the electrical connection.
-- Carry out operation 10 216 10 Fuel tank, only

installation (see Section 10, Chapter 1).
Op. 21 154 34
CLUTCH CASING
Disassembly
WARNING
Proceed as follows.
1. Carry out operation 21 118 12 : Rear transmis-

sion--gearbox casing, only removal (see Chapter
1).
2. Attach the clutch casing to the rotating stand

290090 using brackets 50157.
27092
clutch control pipes (1). 32
4. Unscrew the retaining bolt and recover the

sleeve (1), fork (2) lever (3) and spring (4).
27093
33
5. Unscrew the rear bearing support retaining bolts
(1).
27094
34
6. Unscrew the front bearing support retaining bolts
(1).
27095
35
7. Insert tool 294086 (1) on the clutch unit (2), se-
cure in position and remove, using a hoist.
27096
36
8. Position the clutch unit (1) on a workbench, re-
move tool 294086 (2) and separate the unit into
two parts.
27097
37
sleeve (1) for the power take--off clutch engage-
ment sleeve.
27098
38
10. Remove the circlip (1) and remove the front bear-
ing support (2).
27100
39
11. Remove the circlip (1) and remove the shaft (2).
27101
40
12. Remove the circlip (1) that secures the clutch
disk assembly.
27102
41
13. Extract the gear (1) and recover the clutch disk
assembly (2) and the relative springs (3).
27103
42
14. Using an extractor (1) and tool 295021 (2) com-
press the Belleville washer (3), remove the sto
ring (4) and recover the washer and piston.
27104
43
15. Remove the sto ring (1) and extract the clutch
body (2).
27105
44
16. Remove the front bearing support (1).
271106
45
17. Remove the circlip (1) and remove the bearing
(2).
Assembly
To refit the clutch casing, proceed as follows.
WARNING
-- For the correct orientation of the various parts.

-- Respect the tightening torque values prescribed 27107
earlier in this Chapter.
46
-- Assemble the front bearing and circlip on the -- Unite the two clutch units and lock in position by
shaft. means of tool 294086.
-- Fit the front bearing support. -- Insert the clutch unit in the casing.
-- Insert the clutch body and stop ring. -- Fit the front bearing support by means of the
bolts.
-- Insert the piston and fit the Belleville washer and
circlip. -- Fit the rear bearing support by means of the
bolts.
-- Assemble the clutch disk assembly complete
with springs and gear. -- Assemble the lever, spring, fork and the power
take--off clutch engagement sleeve.
-- Assemble the other clutch, as described previ-
ously. -- fit the clutch control pipes.
-- Fit the shaft and stop ring. -- Detach the casing from the rotating stand.
-- Assemble the front bearing support and circlip. -- Carry out operation 21 118 12: Rear trans-
mission--gearbox casing, only installation (see
-- Fit the sleeve for the power take--off clutch en- Chapter 1).
gagement sleeve.

Faults and Diagnostics
CONTENT

Fault Codes Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Description of Systems (ECM and Calibration and Diagnostic Unit -- CDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Automatic Self-Diagnosis (ECM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
ECM First Start Up (Self Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Transmission Disabled Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Diagnosis During Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Calibration and Diagnostics Unit (CDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Power Shuttle Fault Code Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Calibration and Diagnostic Unit Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
HH Menu Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Revision Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Memory (NVM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
HF -- Stored Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Troubleshooting Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Description of Systems (ECM and Electronic Service Tool -- EST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Automatic Self-Diagnosis (ECM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
ECM First Start Up (Self Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Transmission Disabled Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Diagnosis During Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Power Shuttle Fault Code Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Electronic Service Tool (EST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Downloading the Latest Software into
TN Series Tractor Power Shuttle Control
Module with the Electronic Service Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Connecting the Electronic Service Tool
(EST) to the Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Revision Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Memory (NVM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
HF -- Stored Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Troubleshooting Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Power Shuttle (8 x 8 and 16 x 16) Electronic Control Unit
Input/Output Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
FAULT CODES INDICATION
In the event of an electrical or electronic fault, any
eventual anomalous conditions are indicated by the
illumination of an indicator lamp (1).
FAULTS CODE DECODING

The indicator (1) identifies the error code in six
phases:
1. 5 flashes in rapid succession to indicate immi-
nent transmission of the error code;
2. 2 second pause; 26304
3. n... flashes to indicate the first figure of the fault 1

code;
4. 1 second pause;
5. n... flashes to indicate the second figure of the
fault code;
6. 3 second pause.
The control unit only indicates one code at a time, giv-
ing priority to the most serious faults.
If a higher priority fault occurs whilst a lower priority
fault is being displayed, the display sequence of
higher priorities will wait until the sequence in prog-
ress ends, before becoming active.
To check for the presence of other codes the fault
must be eliminated, allowing the control unit to pro-
ceed to the following fault.
IMPORTANT: If a fault disables the lift control func-

tion, the corresponding code will take precedence
over other codes that were previously indicated;
these codes will be saved by the system.
-- Example of the interpretation of fault code number 21 --
1st phase 2nd phase 3rd phase 4th phase 5th phase 6th phase
FFFFF pause FF pause F pause
code
second digit
transmission 2s first digit 2 1s 3s
1
warning
fault code composition
p
21
DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS
(ECM and CDU)
The TNS and TND series tractors have various elec-
tro-hydraulic components for controlling various sys-
tems. One of these systems includes the Power
Shuttle transmission. Each of these systems has an
Electronic Control Module (ECM) for commanding, A B
operating, and troubleshooting certain input and out-
put sensors. Because of this, an operating software
program is required to monitor and control the sys-
tem. A diagnostic software program is used to indi-
cate when and where a system fault occurs. The soft- C
ware program is in a tool called the
Calibration/Diagnostic Unit (CDU, tool 380000282). 2
The CDU has three operating buttons. The “H Menu”
button (A) is used to scroll through different menus
and for initial access to the calibration and diagnostic
systems. The “up arrow” (B) and “down arrow” (C)
are used to scroll through list in each menu, start cal-
ibrations, and saving/erasing.
The ECM has two modes of “Auto Self-Diagnostic”
functions to detect abnormal operating conditions in
the ECM itself or in any circuits the ECM controls or
monitors. The ECM will detect failures or abnormal
conditions and once detected will switch to error logic
and failure management logic circuitry in the ECM.
The first mode is when the key switch (1) is turned
from the “OFF” (A) position to the “RUN” position (B)
when starting the tractor. This self-diagnosis could
continue up to 30 seconds if abnormal conditions are
detected.
The second mode is real-time self-diagnosis while
the tractor is running, “RUN” position (B).
3
If the ECM detects a system error or abnormal condi-
tion in either mode, the ECM error logic will signal an
error code, causing the alarm lamp (1) on the instru-
ment panel to flash a code. The failure management
logic will signal error codes according to priority.
26304
4
AUTOMATIC SELF-DIAGNOSIS (ECM)
The ECM automatically does a self-diagnosis of the

different system parts when the key switch (1) is
turned from the “OFF” position to the “RUN” position
(B) when starting the tractor. The configuration of
these parts is already stored in the non-volatile
memory.
During the self-diagnosis period the transmission
status light (1, fig. 6) will remain on. The self-diagno-
sis process could continue for up to 30 seconds if ab-
normal conditions are detected.
NOTE: If an attempt is made to move the tractor prior 1

to the completion of self diagnosis the self diagnosis
will be terminated, the transmission status light will be
turned off and error codes may not be displayed.
Once the self-diagnosis is completed and if there is

an abnormal condition or failure in one or more of the
ECM controlled systems, the ECM will cause the
alarm lamp (1, fig. 7) on the instrument panel to flash
a code, or the transmission status light (1, fig. 6) will
begin flashing alerting the operator that there is a
problem.
6
The ECM also performs real-time self diagnosis of
system components while the tractor is running,
“RUN” position (B). The ECM will perform this at reg-
ular intervals to check for possible system failures or
abnormal conditions.
tion while the tractor is running, the ECM error logic
will signal an error code, causing the alarm lamp on
the instrument panel to flash a code, alerting the op-
erator that there is a problem. The failure manage-
ment logic will signal error codes according to their 1
priority.
If an error with lower priority occurs while an error of
higher priority is already being signaled, the lower 7
priority error will be stored until the error of higher
priority has been removed.
If an error of higher priority occurs while an error of
lower priority is being signaled, the higher priority er-
ror will be displayed after the lower priority error se-
quence has been displayed.
ECM -- FIRST START--UP
(Self Configuration)
The ECM will require configuration when any one of

the following circumstances has occurred.
-- At the end of the production line.
-- Following ECM replacement.
-- Following erasure of the Non--Volatile memory

(NVM) (see H8 MENU).
-- Following manual configuration NONE (see H3

MENU). 8
Turn switch (1) to B (ON) without switching on the en-

gine.
Indicator (1) (fig. 9) will be illuminated (non--flash-
ing), after a while the indicator will flash to repeat the
recognised configuration code -- i.e.: rapid flashing,
followed by 1 flash.
-- Turn the key (1, fig. 8) to OFF for a few seconds:

the configuration is now saved in the Non--Vola-
tile memory (NVM).
9
TRANSMISSION DISABLED INDICATOR

LIGHT 1
The ECM is programmed with a fail-safe mode,
which will disable and cause the transmission to go
into neutral in the unlikely event that a malfunction
should occur. When the transmission is disabled the
transmission status light (1) (fig. 10) example in the
instrument panel will begin flashing or may be
illuminated.
There are basically three situations in which the

transmission can be disabled: 1) during start up, 2)
during operation with fault codes stored in the ECM,
3) disabled with no stored error codes.
10
Disabled during start-up
During the start up self-diagnosis period the
transmission status light (1) (fig. 10) will remain on
for a few (2-5) seconds (the self diagnosis period
could continue for up to 30 seconds if abnormal
conditions are detected).
If a fault is detected during start up, the ECM will

signal an error code causing the alarm lamp (1)
(fig. 11) to flash a code alerting the operator there is
a problem. The transmission status light (1) (fig. 10) 1
will begin flashing, and the transmission will be
disabled.
Depending on the type of fault, the Power Shuttle 11

may not function until the clutch pedal is cycled, the
Power Shuttle FNR lever is cycled, or until after the
problem is corrected.
NOTE: If the start up diagnostics is interrupted, the

Power Shuttle may not function until the clutch pedal
or the Power Shuttle FNR lever is cycled after start
up.
Disabled with error codes stored
During normal operation if a critical error occurs the
transmission will be disabled and the error code will
be signaled through the alarm lamp (1) (fig. 11) on
the instrument panel. The transmission status light
(1) (fig. 10) may or may not begin flashing.
Disabled with no error codes stored
If during normal operation, when the FNR lever is
placed in either the forward or reverse position, or
while moving, the tractor transmission becomes dis-
abled, the status light (1) (fig. 10) begins flashing,
and no error codes are signaled on the alarm lamp (1)
(fig. 12).
12
The tractor will not move until either the FNR lever (1)
or the clutch pedal is cycled.
This condition can be caused by either operator fault F
(not seated, gear/range levers not properly engaged, R
incorrect starting sequence) or system fault (seat
switch faulty, gear/range lever position switches mis- 1
adjusted/faulty, and alternator W+ wire).
NOTE: See electrical section of this manual for
proper operation of operator’s presence circuit for
seat switch.
13
DIAGNOSIS DURING OPERATION 2 -- Priority Numerical value.
Diagnosis during operation is in real time and checks 3 -- Detection Group of conditions creating
for the eventual presence of anomalous conditions at the fault.
regular intervals, whilst the functional software is 4 -- Effects The eventual effect of the
working. fault on the system.
The diagnosis should check all conditions shown un- 5 -- Correction The condition that corrects
der the DIAGNOSIS MINIMUM CONDITIONS head- the fault, if possible, and the
ings. functional change of the sys-
tem after this correction.
FAULT DETECTION AND ANOMALOUS 6 -- Not displayed during calibration.
CONDITIONS MANAGEMENT LOGIC 7 -- Not displayed in Cab Test mode: this mode is ac-
cessed by sending a series of “commands” to the
The start--up and functional code also includes the
ECM, through the serial connection.
faults detection and anomalous conditions manage-
ment logic. The TROUBLESHOOTING FAULT CODES head-
This logic processes the faults information provided ing contains the definitions of the system errors, sub-
by the diagnostics (start--up diagnosis and diagnosis divided into the aforementioned fields.
during operation) and functional bodies, indicating
the condition of the system, in order to detect “system
faults” and “anomalous conditions”. MULTIPLE ANOMALOUS CONDITIONS --
The faults detection and anomalous conditions man- PRIORITY
agement logic also diagnoses ECM and external cir-
In the event of multiple anomalous conditions, as ex-
cuit anomalies, where the hardware can not be diag-
plained in the following heading, the display logic
nosed directly; i.e. it checks the coherence of the
uses the “Priority” field to establish the code to dis-
functional bodies and their configuration.
play. Unless otherwise specified, the resulting multi-
Each time the faults logic detects a “system error” or ple anomalous condition effect/condition is provided
an “anomalous condition”, the fault code will be dis- by superimposing each individual effect/correction;
played, it creates a fault which is processed by the in the event of incompatibility between the different
faults buffer logic in the non--volatile memory, the corrections, the correction linked with the highest
faults display logic and the anomalous conditions priority fault is used.
management logic.
The anomalous conditions management logic con-
siders the effect of the faults that effect tractor opera- FAULT DISPLAY LOGIC
tion.
The logic also manages the correction procedure for Introduction
a fault condition. As soon as a problem is detected, it must be dis-
Each fault is described using the following fields: played by the indicator lamp (1, fig. 12).
1 -- Fault code Numerical value.
CALIBRATION AND DIAGNOSTICS UNIT a) short to +12.
(CDU) b) short to ground or open circuit.
The Calibration and Diagnostics Unit (CDU) indi- c) nominal range deviation.
cates fault conditions relative to the HH menu, e.g.: 12VF KEY SUPPLY.
calibration Uxx codes.
12VD CLUTCH DRIVERS SUPPLY.
Other fault conditions, unless masked by the “cab
a) short to ground or open circuit.
tester mode” or “calibration mode”, are flashed on the
illuminated signal lamp (1, fig. 12). b) nominal range deviation.
DIAGNOSIS MINIMUM CONDITIONS INPUT DIAGNOSTICS
ECM and relative circuits fault. Anomalous condition description and reset
The unit must be provided with a watchdog for ECM For each of the following inputs, apart from when
anomalous conditions). there is an ECM fault, the following anomalous condi-
The length of the software cycle should be 10 ms, tions must be diagnosed (independently of the ECM
whereas the watchdog pause should be 16.5 ms status).
(longer pauses are not recommended). This check must be carried out at least every 10 ms
(longer pauses are not recommended).
Reaction to fault. AN1 Clutch pedal potentiometer.
At start--up, and in the event of microprocessor AN2 Forward gear lever switch.
anomalous conditions, none of the solenoid valves
AN8 Not used.
are enabled.
AN9 Not used.
Follow--up reaction. AN10 Not used.
In the event of an anomalous condition, the watch- AN11 Not used.
dog and reset circuit must guarantee that the ECM AN12 Not used.
does not excite the solenoid valves.
-- short to 5V or 12V.
-- short to ground or circuit open.
POWER SUPPLY DIAGNOSTICS
AN3 Not used.
For each ulterior current supply, apart from when
there is an ECM fault, the following anomalous condi- AN5 Not used.
tions must be diagnosed, independently of the ECM AN6 Not used.
status). AN4 Oil temperature sensor.
This check must be carried out at least every 10 ms -- short to ground.
(longer pauses are not recommended).
-- short to 5V or 12V or circuit open.
AN7 Fuse 20.
Anomalous condition description and reset
5V SENSORS SUPPLY. -- short to ground or circuit open.
8V SENSORS SUPPLY.
POWER SHUTTLE FAULT CODE PRIORITY
CODES FAULT PRIORITY CORRECTION EFFECT
11 CPDL_POT_LO_DISABLING_ERR 14 SL Dis
11 CPDL_POT_LO_ERR 75′ Fixed Lim
12 CPDL_POT_HI_DISABLING_ERR 15 SL Dis
12 CPDL_POT_HI_ERR 74′ Fixed Lim
13 UD_SW_ON_ERR 67 Auto None
14 C1_SW_HI_DIS_ERR 22 CP/SL Dis
14 C1_SW_HI_ERR 83′ Fixed Mod
15 C1_SW_LO_DIS_ERR 23 CP/SL Dis
15 C1_SW_LO_ERR 84′ Fixed Mod
16 G1_SW_HI_DIS_ERR 24 CP/SL Dis
16 G1_SW_HI_ERR 85′ Fixed Mod
17 G1_SW_LO_DIS_ERR 25 CP/SL Dis
17 G1_SW_LO_ERR 86′ Fixed Mod
18 CREEPER_ENG_SW_HI_ERR 47 Fixed Mod
19 CREEPER_ENG_SW_LO_ERR 48 Fixed Mod
21 CH_HARN_ERR 1 Fixed Crit.Dis
22 SOL_A_SHORT_DIS_ERR 39 CP/SL Dis
22 SOL_A_SHORT_ERR 97′ Fixed Lim
23 SOL_B_SHORT_DIS_ERR 37 CP/SL Dis
23 SOL_B_SHORT_ERR 95′ Fixed Lim
24 CL_UNCAL_ERR 100 Fixed Mod
26 ERPM_HI_ERR 65 Fixed Mod
27 ERPM_LO_ERR 66 Fixed Mod
28 B_CL_UNCAL_ERR 101 Fixed Mod
29 A_CL_UNCAL_ERR 102 Fixed Mod
31 SOL_SHTL_SHORT_DIS_ERR 31 CP/SL Dis
31 SOL_SHTL_SHORT_ERR 90′ Fixed Lim
32 SOL_HL_SHORT_DIS_ERR 33 CP/SL Dis
32 SOL_HL_SHORT_ERR 92′ Fixed Lim
33 SOL_DUMP_SHORT_DIS_ERR 35 CP/SL Dis
33 SOL_DUMP_SHORT_ERR 98′ Fixed Lim
35 SOL_DUMP_SHORT_12V_ERR 8 Fixed Crit.Dis
36 SOL_DUMP_OPEN_OR_GND_DIS_ERR 34 CP/SL Dis
36 SOL_DUMP_OPEN_OR_GND_ERR 99′ Fixed Lim
37 CL_SW_OC_ERR 13 CP/SL Dis
38 SOL_B_SHORT_12V_ERR 9 Fixed Crit.Dis
39 SOL_B_OPEN_OR_GND_DIS_ERR 36 CP/SL Dis
39 SOL_B_OPEN_OR_GND_ERR 94′ Fixed Lim
41 SOL_A_OPEN_OR_GND_DIS_ERR 38 CP/SL Dis
41 SOL_A_OPEN_OR_GND_ERR 96′ Fixed Lim
42 SOL_A_SHORT_12V_ERR 11 Fixed Crit.Dis
43 SHTL_SYNCRO_SW_HI_DIS_ERR 18 CP/SL Dis
43 SHTL_SYNCRO_SW_HI_ERR 81′ Fixed Lim
44 SHTL_SYNCRO_SW_LO_DIS_ERR 21 CP/SL Dis
44 SHTL_SYNCRO_SW_LO_ERR 82′ Fixed Lim
46 FUSE_20_ERR 51 Auto Lim
47 CL_SW_HI_ERR 55 Fixed Mod
48 CL_SW_LO_ERR 56 Fixed None
49 WHLSPD_SNR_HI_ERR 63 Fixed Mod
51 TEMP_SNDR_OC_ERR 53 Auto Mod
52 TEMP_SNDR_SC_ERR 54 Auto Mod
53 V5_VREF_FAILED_HIGH 6 Fixed Crit.Dis
54 V5_VREF_FAILED_LOW 7 Fixed Crit.Dis
55 FORWARD_SW_HI_ERR 57 Auto None
56 FORWARD_SW_LO_ERR 58 Auto None
57 REVERSE_SW_HI_ERR 61 Auto None
58 REVERSE_SW_LO_ERR 62 Auto None
59 FNR_SW_DISAGREE_ERR 43 Auto Dis
61 HI_LO_SYNCRO_SW_HI_DIS_ERR 16 CP/SL Dis
61 HI_LO_SYNCRO_SW_HI_ERR 76′ Fixed Lim
62 HI_LO_SYNCRO_SW_LO_DIS_ERR 17 CP/SL Dis
62 HI_LO_SYNCRO_SW_LO_ERR 77′ Fixed Lim
63 SYNCRO_HL_ENG_ERR 40 SL/HI Dis
64 SYNCRO_SHTL_ENG_ERR 41 SL Dis
65 SOL_HL_OPEN_OR_GND_DIS_ERR 32 CP/SL Dis
65 SOL_HL_OPEN_OR_GND_ERR 91′ Fixed Lim
66 SOL_SHTL_OPEN_OR_GND_DIS_ERR 28 CP/SL Dis
66 SOL_SHTL_OPEN_OR_GND_ERR 89′ Fixed Lim
67 SOL_HL_SHORT_12V_DIS_ERR 27 CP/SL Dis
67 SOL_HL_SHORT_12V_ERR 87′ Fixed Lim
68 SOL_SHTL_SHORT_12V_DIS_ERR 26 CP/SL Dis
68 SOL_SHTL_SHORT_12V_ERR 88′ Fixed Lim
69 WHLSPD_SNRLO_ERR 64 Fixed Mod
71 SYNC_START_UP_INIT_ERROR 93 Auto Dis
72 SYNC_POPPED_OUT_ERR 42 CP/SL Dis
73 V_12VF_FAILED_HI 2 Fixed Crit.Dis
74 V_12VF_FAILED_LOW 3 Fixed Crit.Dis
76 NVM_RD_ERR 68 Fixed Mod
81 PRESS_SW_OC_ERR 49 Fixed Mod
82 PRESS_SW_SC_ERR 50 Fixed Mod
SYMBOLS USED
CORRECTION column
Fixed the fault continues to be displayed (NO RESET).

Auto the fault is no longer displayed when the conditions that generated the fault are no longer present
(RESET).
SL the fault is no longer displayed by using the Shuttle (SL) and/or the clutch pedal (CP).
CP the fault is no longer displayed using the clutch pedal (CP).
Hi the fault is no longer displayed pressing the pushbutton (Hi).
Combinations of the aforementioned symbols are possible.
EFFECT column
Dis. Crit. the gears are critically disabled by this fault.

This fault can only be deleted by switching off the ECM.
Dis. the gears are disabled, the “correction” column explains how the gears
can be enabled.
LIM the fault condition limits tractor operation.
e.g.: there are faults that disable certain functions.
Mod. the fault condition effects tractor operation.
e.g.: there are faults that make the tractor move slowly or abruptly.
CODE column
Contains the numerical code to display.
PRIORITY column
The apostrophe indicates that the CODE has already been used by a previously listed fault condition.
CALIBRATION AND DIAGNOSTIC UNIT USE
Specific remote diagnosis operations can be carried
out with the Calibration and Diagnosis Unit (CDU).
Errors code
If the Faults Detection Logic reads a fault condition,
the code will flash on the indicator. In this manner, the
fault condition can be displayed whilst in HH mode.
During calibration, certain faults may be masked.
The CDU 380000282 gives access to the following

menus:
H1 -- CLUTCHES A and B CALIBRATION

H2 -- CLUTCHES A and B CALIBRATION VALUES
DISPLAY
H3 -- SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
H4 -- SOFTWARE REVISION LEVEL
H5 -- CONTROL SWITCHES DIAGNOSTICS
H6 -- CLUTCH A FILL TIME MODIFICATION AND
DISPLAY
H7 -- CLUTCH B FILL TIME MODIFICATION AND
DISPLAY
H8 -- DELETE DATA SAVED IN THE NON--VOL-
ATILE MEMORY (EEPROM)
H9 -- VOLTMETER FUNCTIONS
HA -- CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION AND SWITCH
DISPLAY
HC -- TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE DIS-
PLAY
HD -- SHUTTLE SYNCHRONISER POSITION
NOT ACCESSIBLE ON TN S/D MODELS
HE -- GEAR CHANGE ADJUSTMENT
HF -- FAULTS SAVED IN THE ECU NON--VOL-
ATILE MEMORY
NOTE: The tractor can only be used in the H6, H7,

H9, HA, HC and HE menus.
Whilst other menus are being used the transmission
is disabled.
If tractor movement is detected whilst these menus
are in use, the menu will be interrupted and transmis-
sion will be enabled; to re--enter the HH MENU, stop
the tractor and press key (1, fig. 17).
To exit from an active MENU, press key (1, fig. 17) to
return to the HH MENU.
If the menu allows tractor movement, stop the tractor
(speed = 0).
HH MENU ACCESS
WARNING
Put all gearshift levers in their neutral positions.
This is required because some H Menus allow
operation of the transmission.
1. Release the retainer screws, 1, and pull the left

instrument panel guard, 2, off.
14
2. Identify the diagnostic unit connector(s), 1, under
the instrument panel. The connectors are color
coded for identification purposes. Use the follow-
ing list to determine the correct connector:
• Black: Power Shuttle Transmission
• Red: FWD Engagement
15
3. Turn the switch (1) to A (OFF) and connect the

CDU device 380000282 to the black diagnosis
connector.
NOTE: Align the outer left and right pins between the
male and female connector. They have a flat side to
orient the connector.
4. Turn the key switch to the “ON” position (B) (see
fig. 16) while pressing down the “H Menu” button
(1), (see fig. 17). If the instrument panel is not on,
consult Section 55, electrical diagrams as to
which fuse provides power to the instrument pan-
el.
If the warning lights display an error code, but the
CDU does not light up and the H Menus can not 16
be accessed again, consult the electrical dia-
grams as to which fuse provides power to the
diagnostic tool.
5. After a few seconds, the CDU display (2) shows
“H MENU”. Now the H Menu button can be re-
leased. If the button was not held long enough
the CDU may display “NO COMM”. This also oc-
curs if the “H Menu” button is not held while turn-
ing the key switch to the “ON” position.
6. Select the required H menu by pressing the H
MENU key (1) the correct number of times to dis-
play the relative code on the display (2), e.g.:
once to access H1, five times to access H5, etc.
Each time key (1) is pressed, the display (2) H5
shows the H code obtained, i.e.: H1, H2 etc.
Remember that after the HF MENU, the count re-
starts from HH.
H
After a brief pause (2 seconds) the ECU enters MENU
the procedure of the selected menu. 1 2 3 4
Explanations of the relative menus are noted on
the following pages. MDB0751A
If the operator presses key (1) while an H menu

is in use, the menu is abandoned and the display 17
(2) returns to the HH selection phase.
If the H code does not correspond with an active
H menu, the display (2) returns to HH and waits
for an ulterior selection.
7. Turn the key switch (1) to the “off” position (A) and
wait approximately 5 seconds to store the re-
vised data. The CDU can be re-entered by re-
peating step #4.
NOTE: The functional software is always disabled

when the CDU is connected to the diagnosis connec-
tion, unless otherwise specifically noted. Consult the
description of the individual HH menus in order to un-
derstand why the functional software is disabled.
18
WARNING
Park the tractor on level ground in an unob-
structed area (in case of sudden movement).
Engage the handbrake, switch off all electrical

switches and the air conditioning system, if on.
Set the Shuttle control lever in neutral, the hy-

draulic lift lower arms down, the remote control
valve levers in neutral and switch off the engine.
Put safety wedges under the front and rear

wheels.
Check that the transmission oil temperature is

between 20 to 50 °C (68 to 122 °C).
Unless otherwise specified, the levers:

- Shuttle;
- Gear shift;
- Range gear;
- Creeper;
are in the NEUTRAL position.

H1 -- CLUTCHES A and B
CALIBRATION
The H1menu provides access to Power Shuttle clutches
(A) and (B) calibration, reducing the engine speed when
the clutches start engaging. The ECM reads engine
RPM from the alternator to accomplish this.
The calibration of the clutches is necessary when the
following has occurred:
• Poor transmission performance
• Solenoid valve has been replaced
• Erasure of non--volatile memory in the ECM (us-
ing the H8 menu)
• ECM has been replaced
• After initial break-in period -- first 50 hrs.
Use the following procedure to calibrate the clutches.
1. Make sure the key switch (1) is in the “OFF” posi-
tion (A) and connect the CDU to the Power
Shuttle ECM as described previously in this
manual.
19
2. While holding the “HMENU” button (1) on the
CDU display (2), turn the key to the “START”
position (C).
3. After the tractor has gone through self diagnosis
and has started, release the “HMENU” button (1). H1
“HMENU” should appear on the CDU display (2).
4. Press the “HMENU” button (1) once. “H1” should
appear on the CDU display (2). After a few sec- H
onds, “CALIBR” will appear momentarily on the MENU
CDU display (2) and then change to the transmis- 1 2 3 4
sion fluid temperature.
5. Make sure the parking brake is firmly set and in- MDB0751A
crease the engine speed to 1300 + 100 RPM.
20
6. Fully depress the clutch pedal (1).
21
7. Place the range lever (2) into the highest range.
8. Place the gear selection lever into first gear (1).
22
9. Position the Power Shuttle FNR lever (1)to the
forward position.
10. Slowly release the clutch pedal, making sure the F
tractor does not move. R
1
23
CLUTCH A CALIBRATION
NOTE: If the diagnostic instrument displays an “U”
error code during the calibration procedure, refer to
the table at the end of this procedure in this section
to identify and remedy the problem. An example of an
error code would be U21 (engine speed lower than
1200 RPM).
1. Press and hold the down arrow (1) on the CDU.
Initially the CDU will display “STAB.RPM” (2),
then the initial value of the setting in milli--amps
(mA) (3).
2. Continue holding the down arrow (1) until the en-
gine speed reduces about 50 RPM and the final STAB. RPM
calibration setting flashes continuously (3). An
example would be: A=286mA
NOTE: The tractor may lurch, but not move. This val-
ue and lurch represent the point the energized PWM 1
solenoid has provided enough hydraulic fluid to en- 2
gage the clutch pack. Hydraulic pressure at this point
is not full but approximately 40 -- 50 psi. 10006107
24
3. Release the down arrow (1) and the CDU display
should display the transmission oil temperature.
A = 286 mA
10006107
25
CLUTCH B CALIBRATION
NOTE: If the diagnostic instrument displays an “U”
error code during the calibration procedure, refer to
the table at the end of this procedure in this section
to identify and remedy the problem. An example of an
error code would be U21 (engine speed lower than
1200 RPM).
4. Press and hold the up arrow (1) on the CDU. Ini-
tially the CDU will display “STAB.RPM” (2), then
the initial value of the setting in milli--amps (mA) 1
(3).
5. Continue holding the up arrow (1) until the engine
speed reduces about 50 RPM and the final cal- STAB. RPM
ibration setting flashes continuously (3). An ex-
ample would be: A=286mA
ue and lurch represent the point the energized PWM 2
solenoid has provided enough hydraulic fluid to en-
is not full but approximately 45 -- 50 psi. 10006107
26
6. Release the up arrow (1) and the CDU display
should display the transmission oil temperature.
7. Turn the key switch to the “OFF” position (A) to
store the clutch values.
NOTE: If the tractor operation is abrupt after calibrat-
ing the clutches, refer to the H6 and H7 menus to ad- A = 286 mA
just the fill times for the clutches.
NOTE: As clutch components wear, the clutch cal-
ibration and fill times will need adjusted accordingly.
3
NOTE: Transmission output speed, engine RPM,
clutch pedal position, gear and range lever positions
are constantly monitored. Calibration can go on only 10006107
if the tractor is stationary, the Power Shuttle FNR le-
ver is not in neutral, the main (C1) and range (G1) 27
shift levers are not in neutral, and the clutch pedal is
released. If calibration conditions have not been met,
this will be displayed and the associated error code
will be flashed on the instrument panel. If the fault
condition is relevant to calibration, an “U” code will be
displayed on the CDU.
Calibration Error Codes

Code Cause Remedy
U19 Transmission oil temperature lower Drive tractor to increase transmission oil temperature
than 10_ C (50_ F) ∗
U20 Incorrect starting procedure Press and release clutch pedal
U21 Engine speed lower than 1200 RPM Increase engine speed
U22 Engine speed over 1400 RPM Decrease engine speed
U23 Power Shuttle control lever in neutral Place Power Shuttle control lever into the forward or
reverse position as required.
U24 Range selector in neutral Place range lever into highest range
U25 Gear selector in neutral Place gear lever into first gear
U26 Clutch pedal not fully raised Release clutch pedal fully
U27 Clutch pack (B) value lower than 230 Check solenoid value circuit and solenoid valve, replace
mA as necessary
U28 Clutch pack (B) value higher than 480 Check solenoid value circuit and solenoid valve, replace
mA as necessary. Test reverse solenoid hydraulic pressure
circuit.
U29 Clutch pack (A) value lower than 230 Check solenoid value circuit and solenoid valve, replace
mA as necessary
U30 Clutch pack (A) value higher than 480 Check solenoid value circuit and solenoid valve, replace
circuit.
U31 Tractor is moving Engage parking brake
U32 Hi/Lo synchronizer not engaged Check synchronizer using the HD menu
(*) Between 10_ C (50_ F) and 20_ C (68_ F) the

CDU display will show “COLD OIL”. However, when
continuing to hold the up arrow or the down arrow
key, the calibration will continue.
VALUES DISPLAY
The H2 menu displays the calibration values
expressed in milli-amps (mA), for the “A” and “B”
hydraulic clutch solenoid valves. These values were
obtained by the ECM during the clutch calibration in
the H1 menu.
Use the following procedure to obtain the values:
1. Make sure the key switch (1) is in the “OFF” (A)
position and connect the CDU to the Power
Shuttle ECM, as described previously in this
manual.
2. While holding the “HMENU” button on the CDU,
turn the key switch to the “ON” (B) position.
3. Once the tractor has gone through diagnostics,
“HHMENU” should appear on the display.
Release the “HMENU” button.
26083
28
4. Press the “HMENU” button (2) twice. “H2” should
appear on the CDU.
NOTE: The display automatically shows the “A” 3
clutch value.
2 H2
10006107
29
5. Press the up arrow (3) on the CDU to obtain the
value for the “B” clutch. The current stored value,
in mA, will be displayed. An example would be
B=290 mA. 3
6. Press the down arrow (4) on the CDU to obtain
a value for the “A” clutch. The current stored 2 B = 290 mA
value, expressed in mA, will be displayed. An
example would be: A=286 mA.
7. The mA range for each clutch must be between 4
230 mA and 480 mA (for either clutch).
8. Turn the key switch (1) to the “OFF” (A) position
or enter another menu by pressing the “HMENU”
button on the diagnostic instrument. 10006107
30
The H3 menu displays the tractor’s system
configuration, stored in the non-volatile memory
(NVM) menu after a tractor with a new ECM has been
initially started up. H3 also allows the transmission to
be configured manually.
1. Put the key switch (1) into the “OFF” position (A)
and connect the CDU to the Power Shuttle ECM
connector, as described previously in this
manual.
2. Hold the “HMENU” button (2) on the CDU and
turn the key switch (1) to the “ON” position (B).
26083
31
3. After the tractor has gone through the
diagnostics, “HMENU” will appear on the display.
Release the “HMENU” button (2).
4. Press the “HMENU” button (2) three times. “H3”
will appear on the CDU display (3). After several
seconds the configuration stored will be 2 H3
displayed. One of the following configurations
will be shown:
10006107
32
• Pshuttle - Power Shuttle Transmission (8X8
or 16X16)
• Hi/Lo (does not apply to TN S/D) - Power
Shuttle Transmission with Hi/Lo (32X16)
• Hi/Lo CR (does not apply to TN S/D) - Pow-
er Shuttle Transmission with Hi/Lo and 2 PSHUTTLE
Creeper (44X16)
• None - No configuration stored in memory,
occurs with the ECM replacement or erasure
of non-volatile memory (H8). Only detected 3
at first power on of ECM.
10006107
33
NOTE: It is possible to select any configuration
available. Selection of the wrong configuration can
cause Error Codes to be displayed through the PS
Alarm lamp or causes tractor malfunctions. Selection
of the “NONE” will cause the ECM to conduct a
self-configuration at the next start-up. The self-con-
figuration check always gets performed when a
different ECM is installed, after H8 is cleared, and
whenever H3 configuration is set to “NONE”. The
ECM performs the self test by sending a signal out
through the harness and receives acknowledgement
of signs in from various sensors, switches, and
solenoids.
5. To quit the menu without modifying the
configuration, press the “HMENU” button (2) on
the CDU.
4
6. If the configuration displayed does not match the
configuration the tractor is equipped with, the
configuration can be modified manually by 2 PSHUTTLE
pressing the up arrow (4) until the correct
configuration is shown on the CDU.
7. When the correct configuration is shown, press 5
3
and hold the down arrow (5). The display (3) on
the CDU will start this sequence: “STORE 5s,
STORE 4s, STORE 3s, STORE 2s, STORE 1s, 10006107
STORED”. This shows the new configuration is
stored in the ECM. After the configuration has 34
been stored, release the down arrow (5) on the
CDU.
NOTE: If the down arrow (5) is released during the
store countdown, the latest changes to configuration
will not be stored and the CDU displays the previous
setting.
8. Turn the key switch (1) to the “OFF” position (A)

and wait for at least two seconds to save the
configuration into the non-volatile memory.
H4 - POWER SHUTTLE HARDWARE AND

SOFTWARE REVISION LEVELS
The H4 menu will display the revision level of the
software that is installed in the ECM. Use the
following procedure to display the revision levels:
1. Make sure the key switch is in the “OFF” (A)

Shuttle ECM connector, as described previously
in this manual.
26083
35
4. Press the “HMENU” button four times. “H4”
should appear on the instrument display.
H4
5. The instrument will display the following
information in a 8 second interval. Each
parameter will be displayed for 2 seconds and
then revert back to “HH MENU”.
• Product Identity (MA)
• Software Revision Level: (Release [00.01]))
10006107
• Hardware Level: (02.00)
• Manufacturer -- set valves (40) 36
NOTE: It is also a good practice to remove the instru-
ment panel in order to record the ECM part number,
module serial number and batch number.
6. When finished viewing, press the “HMENU”
button to enter another menu or turn the key
switch to the “OFF” (A) position.
H5 -- CONTROL SWITCH DIAGNOSIS

The H5 menu is for checking the status of the circuits
and control switches that are connected to the ECM.
The H5 menu allows inspection of each one of these
circuits for continuity and to check for transitions on
ECM inputs, either switch or analogue type, for
diagnostic purposes.
With reference to analogue inputs, “transition”

means that a certain threshold was exceeded. The
letter “d” and a number are displayed each time a
transition occurs.
The number displayed indicates in which circuit the
transition occurred. If same circuit has two subse-
quent transitions, the message displayed changes to
“d0” when the second transition takes place.
This routine also checks for Forward, Neutral and
Reverse button inconsistencies. The neutral button
is not tested separately through its own “d” number,
as the operator cannot induce neutral safety switch
transition in any manner without inducing it at the
same time on the Forward or Reverse buttons.
If the shuttle lever is moved with the clutch pedal re-
leased, the neutral safety switch will originate a tran-
sition also on the 12VD line, which is used to test the
clutch pedal button.
Following interaction among these buttons:
• The Forward and Reverse buttons should be
tested with the clutch pedal applied (down).
• The clutch pedal button should be tested with the
shuttle lever engaged (not in neutral).
• If the keystart switch is turned to the engine-on
position with the shuttle lever in neutral and the
clutch pedal down (normal start-up procedure),
a button inconsistency error may occur (exclu-
sively in this diagnostic mode).
When a clutch pedal button transition occurs (pedal
is released), clutch pedal potentiometer calibration
values are checked and also button adjustment is
checked. Proceed as follows to guarantee adequate
checking.
NOTE: It is important to follow each of the
procedures as described, otherwise the display on
the diagnostic instrument will not show the correct
reading.

manual.
26083
37
NOTE: The clutch pedal should be up (released).
4. Place the Power Shuttle FNR lever (1) in the F

forward position.
R
38
5. Press the “HMENU” button five times. “H5”
should appear on the CDU display.
NOTE: d0 is always displayed first when H5 menu is
entered. To obtain the readings in the following
procedures the clutch pedal must be released and
the FNR lever must be in forward before entering H5 d0
menu.
6. Observe the display on the CDU while slowly

depressing the clutch pedal (at least two
seconds). The status of the potentiometer and
clutch switch is displayed. The display should
10006107
appear like this as the clutch pedal is being
depressed: d0 > d20 > d21 . d21 is displayed 39
when the clutch pedal “clicks” on the depressed
movement. If the clutch pedal is completely
released, the display will return to d20.
7. With the clutch pedal depressed, take the Power
Shuttle lever (1) from forward and return the lever
to neutral. The display will change from d21 > F
d22. Leave the tractor in neutral for a few R
seconds while observing the display. The display
should continue to show d22 ; this helps to verify
Error Code 59.
8. While the clutch pedal is depressed, place the
Power Shuttle lever into reverse. The display
should change from d22 to d23.
9. Slowly release the clutch pedal while observing
the display on the CDU. The display should
change from reverse, d23, to the clutch switch,
d21, and then to the potentiometer, d20. This 40
verifies conditions related to Error Codes 11, 12,
47, and 48.
10. Place the gear selector lever (1) from neutral into
any gear. The CDU display should show d33.
Removing the gear selector lever from a gear
should cause a second transition in that circuit
and the display should show d0.
NOTE: If the gear lever is in gear when H5 menu is
entered, or another control or switch is moved while
the gear lever is engaged the readings may be
opposite from step 10.
41
11. Place the range control lever (1) from the neutral
position to any range. The CDU should display
1
d34.
NOTE: If any other control or switch is moved during
the shift, the “d” values may occur opposite as listed
above.
12. Stand up from the operator’s seat. This should

cause the CDU display to change to d36. Sitting
down on the seat will cause a second transition
and the display to change back to d0.
42
13. For d29 (Transmission Oil Temperature Sensor),
d30 (Transmission Oil Pressure Sensor), and
d35 (Transmission Wheel Speed Sensor) to be
displayed on the CDU, a transition must be
manually induced. This can be accomplished by
viewing the CDU as the sensor is unplugged and
plugged back together.
SUMMARY OF SWITCH AND ANALOGUE INPUTS
d. code Switch and Analogue Inputs

d.0 When H5 menu is first entered; and when a second transition occurs on the same switch
d.20 Clutch pedal potentiometer
d.21 Clutch pedal switch (Power Shuttle FNR lever must be in forward or reverse)
d.22 Power Shuttle FNR lever in forward position (Clutch must be depressed)
d.23 Power Shuttle FNR lever in reverse position (Clutch must be depressed)
d.29 Hydraulic oil temperature circuit (unplugged versus plugged in)
d.30 Hydraulic oil pressure circuit (engine off versus engine started)
d.32 Fuse supply to CDU (tool will not work if fuse is removed)
d.33 Main (C1) gear shift lever (in gear versus neutral)
d.34 Range (G1) gear shift lever (in gear versus neutral)
d.35 Wheel speed detection circuit (tractor moving)
d.36 Operator’s seat presence switch (stand-up)
H5 - MENU QUICK REFERENCE TEST PROCEDURE
Action Description Display
1 Enter the H5 menu with the clutch pedal released and the Shuttle lever in Forward. d0
Slowly press the clutch pedal (time > 2 seconds). The potentiometer status d20
2
change should be read first, followed by the pushbutton. d21
With the clutch pedal lowered, move the Shuttle lever from the Forward position
3
to neutral, to check the Forward selection pushbutton. d22
Leave the Shuttle lever in the neutral position for at least 1 second to check for
4
disagreement between the Forward/Neutral/Reverse pushbuttons (E59). (d22)
Holding down the clutch pedal, move the Shuttle lever from the neutral position to
5
Reverse, to check the relative pushbutton. d23
Release the clutch pedal slowly (time > 2 seconds).

The pushbutton status change should be read first. d21
6 Clutch pedal calibration is checked (E10, E11 and E12).
Clutch pedal pushbutton adjustment is checked (E47 and E48).
Finally, the potentiometer status change is read. d20
13 Carry out a status change on the oil temperature sensor. d29
15 Carry out a status change on the gear lever pushbutton. d33
16 Carry out a status change on the Range lever pushbutton. d34
17 Carry out a status change on the pressure switch. d30
18 Carry out a status change on the operator seat switch. d36

H6 - CLUTCH (A) FILL TIME

MODIFICATION AND DISPLAY
IMPORTANT: The transmission is functional during
this menu.
The H6 menu displays the (A) clutch filling time and
allows change of the clutch filling time, if necessary.
(Full open solenoid valve for maximum flow of oil to
fill up clutch pack. The solenoid coil will receive full
voltage.)
If adjusting the clutch filling time due to poor or abrupt
tractor take off when the clutch is released, use the
following guidelines.
• Increase the clutch filling time if the tractor “jerks”
abruptly and then takes off.
• Decrease the clutch filling time if the tractor
“jerks”, then hesitates, and then takes off.
IMPORTANT: For best results, tractor should be
properly ballasted or configured according to what
tractor will be used for. Vehicle mass will affect shift
characteristics.
NOTE: As clutch components wear, the clutch
calibration and clutch fill time will need to be adjusted
accordingly.
manual.
turn the key switch (1) to the “ON” (B) position.
26083
43
4. Press the “HMENU” button six times. “H6” should
appear on the CDU display.
A = 80ms
5. After a few seconds, the CDU will display a value
in milli-seconds (1/1000 second). For example,
the display may read: A=80ms. The clutch filling
time must be between 30 - 150 milli-seconds.
6. To change the filling time, be sure the Power
Shuttle control lever is in neutral and use the up
and down buttons to change the clutch filling time 10006107
by multiples of 10 ms. the factory default setting 44
is 70 ms.
IMPORTANT: The clutch must be fully released to
properly store the clutch filling time in the tractor
ECM.
7. With the clutch released, place the Power Shuttle
control lever in the forward position to store the
new value.
8. Return the Power Shuttle control lever to the
neutral position.
9. Turn the key switch to the “OFF” (A) position to
save the clutch fill time in the ECM.
NOTE: Fill time can also be adjusted by operating the
CDU while the tractor is running. The value is
changed and saved in the same manner as stated,
but the tractor is running, so ensure the gears are
neutral and parking brake set.
10. Disconnect the CDU from the tractor and test the
new clutch filling time by test driving the tractor in
a variety of situations. Adjust the clutch fill time
again, if necessary.
NOTE: The first fill time after adjustment may not be
reliable. Fill time should be tried several times to
accurately evaluate performance.
H7 - CLUTCH (B) FILL TIME

this menu.
The H7 menu displays the (B) clutch filling time and
characteristics.
accordingly.
1. Make sure the key switch is in the “OFF” position

and connect the CDU to the Power Shuttle ECM,
as described previously in this manual.
turn the key switch, 1, to the “ON” (B) position.
26083
45
4. Press the “HMENU” button seven times. “H7”
should appear on the CDU.
5. After a few seconds, the CDU will display a value
the display may read: B=80ms. The clutch filling
time must be between 30 - 150 milli-seconds. B = 80ms

Shuttle control lever is in neutral and use the up
and down buttons to change the clutch filling time
by multiples of 10 ms. the factory default setting
is 70 ms.
IMPORTANT: The clutch must be fully released to 10006107
properly store the clutch filling time into the tractor 46
ECM.

clutch fill time.
neutral position.
CDU while the tractor is running. The value is
10. Disconnect the CDU from the tractor and test the
H8 - ERASURE OF DATA STORED IN THE

NON-VOLATILE MEMORY (NVM)
The H8 menu allows erasure of the data stored in the
non-volatile memory. This is useful in the case of
replacing the ECM from another tractor. The ECM’s
data from the previous tractor can be erased for the
tractor the ECM is going into. Use the following
procedure to erase the data stored in the ECM’s
non-volatile memory.

26083
manual. 47
4. Press the “HMENU” button eight times. “H8”
ERASE?
5. After a few seconds “ERASE?” will be displayed
on the on the CDU display.
6. To erase the non-volatile memory, press and hold
the down button on the CDU. The display will
show the following countdown sequence:
ERASE 5s, ERASE 4s, ERASE 3s, ERASE 2s,
ERASE 1s, ERASED. Releasing the down 10006107
button at anytime during this countdown will 48
abort the erasure of the non-volatile memory and
revert back to beginning of H8 mode.
7. Allow the ECM to self-configure by disconnecting
the CDU and turning the key switch to the “OFF”
(A) position. Then turn the key switch to the “ON”
(B) position and leave the switch on for at least
5 seconds. The ECM will find the tractor
configuration.
store the tractor configuration in the ECM.
9. (A) and (B) clutches must be calibrated (H1).
Error code(s) should have been erased, HF, and
if necessary, clutch fill times should be adjusted,
H6 and H7. Also double check configuration in
H3 menu.
H9 -- VOLTMETER FUNCTIONS would display this is: 1 > 538. The values are not
The H9 menu allows inspection of individual circuits, actual voltage, amperage, or ohm measurements.
sensors, senders, switches, and solenoids showing The values are analogue/digital counts. When a
a channel number that corresponds to a particular channel measures frequency, the value is measured
circuit and a value which corresponds into a in “Hertz” (Hz).
measurement. An example of how the diagnostic tool
H9 Power Shuttle Channel Description

Channel/Description Circuit/Connector--Pin Information
1 Clutch Pedal Potentiometer Voltage CN2-20, Signal CN2-24, Ground CN2-29
2 Transmission Oil Temperature Sensor Signal CN2-25, Ground CN2-29
3 ECM 12V Key On Supply Voltage CN2-10 and CN2-34, Ground CN2-13
and CN2-14
4 ECM 12V Key START Supply Voltage CN1-15, Ground CN2-13 and CN2-14
5 Synchronizer Forward (Hi/Lo) Position Switch NOT USED TN S/D
6 Synchronizer Reverse (Shuttle) Position Switch NOT USED TN S/D
7 Clutch “B” PWM Solenoid Voltage CN1-11, Signal CN1-5
8 Clutch “A” PWM Solenoid Voltage CN1-10, Signal CN1-6
9 Power Shuttle FNR Lever Forward Switch Voltage CN2-20, Signal CN2-26
10 Power Shuttle FNR Lever Reverse Switch Voltage CN2-20, Signal CN2-27
11 Wheel Speed sensor Signal CN2-36, Ground CN2-29
12 Synchronizer Reverse (Shuttle) Solenoid NOT USED TN S/D
13 Synchronizer Forward (Hi/Lo) Solenoid NOT USED TN S/D
14 ECM 5V Input Sensor Supply Voltage CN2-20, Ground CN2-13 and CN2-14
15 ECM 12V Fuse Supply Voltage CN2-1, Ground CN2-13 and CN2-14
16 Main (C1) Gear Shift Lever Position Switch Voltage CN2-20, Signal CN2-4
17 Range (G1) Gear Shift Lever Position Switch Voltage CN2-20, Signal CN2-28
18 Creeper Engagement Switch NOT USED TN S/D
19 Wheel Speed Sensor Frequency Signal CN2-36, Ground CN2-29
20 Engine Speed Sensor Frequency (Alternator + W) Signal CN2-15
Use the following procedures to access the voltmeter
functions:

(A) and connect the CDU to the Power Shuttle
ECM, as described previously in this manual.
Ensure the parking brake is set.
26083
49
“HMENU” should appear on the display. Release
the “HMENU” button.
4. Press the “HMENU” button nine times. “H9”
H9
5. After a few seconds the first channel will be
indicated on the CDU display.
6. The channels, up to 24, may be displayed by
using the up and down buttons on the CDU.
Listed below are the channels and their values.
10006107
IMPORTANT: Transmission operation is enabled in
this menu. 50
NOTE: The status of the tractor (with key switch in

the “OFF”, “ON” (engine off), or “START” (engine
running) position) is listed behind the channel title in
parenthesis.
NOTE: Sometimes the clutch pedal position is not

stated. This is because the Power Shuttle FNR lever
may be stated in a certain position. The clutch pedal
depressed is the same as the Power Shuttle FNR
lever in neutral.
1. Clutch Pedal Potentiometer, (ON)
• released, (pedal up), 542 (maximum)
• depressed, (pedal down), 38 (minimum)
2. Transmission Oil Temperature Sensor, (ON)
NOTE: “HC Menu” will display transmission oil 1 → 538
temperature in degrees Celsius.
• At 0_ C (32_ F) 463 + 69
• At 30_ C (86_ F) 225 + 33
• At 60_ C (140_ F) 136 + 20
10006107
• At 90_ C (194_ F) 53 + 8
51
3. ECM +12 VF Keyed Battery Supply Voltage,
(ON)
• Battery charge at 9V (low charge,

prolonged cranking) 428
• Battery charge at 12V (normal) 595
• Battery charge at 16V (overcharge) 762
4. ECM +12VD Keyed Battery Voltage, (START)
a) Clutch pedal released and Power Shuttle

FNR lever in the forward or reverse position.
• Battery charge at 9V (low charge) 428

b) Power Shuttle FNR lever in the neutral posi-

tion or clutch pedal depressed 0-95
5. Synchronizer Forward (Hi/Lo) Position

Switch, (NOT USED TN S/D)
6. Synchronizer Reverse (Shuttle) Position

WARNING
The tractor will move when checking channels 7
and 8. Be sure the area around the tractor is clear
of people and objects before performing the
following test, otherwise bodily injury, death or
damage may occur.
NOTE: For channels 7 and 8, reading will vary

depending upon clutch calibration values.
NOTE: Allow at least six seconds for the CDU to

indicate an actual reading as solenoids ramp up to
proper amperage. Ramp up time is dependent upon
operating temperature of hydraulic fluid.
7. Clutch (B) PWM Solenoid Driver Versus 15. 12V Fuse Sensed Voltage, (ON)
Status Sensed, (START)
• Release the parking brake • Battery charge at 12V (normal) 595
• Place range control lever into “A” • Battery charge at 16 V (overcharge) 762
• Place the gear selector lever into first
• Place the Power Shuttle FNR lever into 16. Main (C1) Gear Shift Lever Position Switch,
reverse for all transmissions (ON)
• Display will read (200 min-400 max) 350 • In neutral (516 min – 900 max) 680
• In gear (21 min – 514 max) 340
8. Clutch (A) PWM Solenoid Driver Versus
17. Range (G1) Gear Shift Lever Position Switch,
(ON)
• Release the parking brake
• In neutral (516 min – 900 max) 680
• Place range control lever into “A”
• In gear (21 min – 514 max) 340
• Place the Power Shuttle FNR lever into 18. Creeper Control Lever (NOT USED TN S/D)
forward position for all transmissions
19. Wheel Speed Sensor Frequency, (ON)
• Display will read (200 min-400 max) 350
WARNING
9. Power Shuttle FNR Lever Forward Switch, The tractor will move when checking channel 19.
(ON) Be sure the area around the tractor is clear of
• Neutral (21 min – 323 max) 170 people and objects before performing the
• Forward (326 min – 900 max) 480 following test, otherwise bodily injury, death, or
damage may occur.
10. Power Shuttle FNR Lever Reverse Switch,
(ON) NOTE: The reading displayed when the Power
Shuttle FNR lever is placed in the forward position is
• Neutral (21 min – 323 max) 170 dependent upon tires and the differential gear ratio
• Forward (326 min – 900 max) 480 the tractor is equipped with.
11. Wheel Speed Sensor Voltage, (START) • Place range control lever into the highest
NOTE: The tractor will not be moved during this test. range
• Place the gear selector lever into first 0-60
• Place range control lever into highest range
• Place the Power Shuttle FNR lever into the
• Place gear selector lever into first “forward” position 0-3000
forward position. 20. Engine Speed Sensor Frequency (Alterna-
• Display with wheels not moving tor+W), (START)
(536 min – 831 max) 600 • 2500 RPM for software prior to 4.0 515
While Driving (tractor moving) • 2000 RPM for software 4.0 to 5.0 33
• 2000 RPM for software 5.01 430
• 4 kph (2.4 mph) 3
• 8 kph (4.9 mph) 6
• 20 kph(12.4 mph) 16 NOTE: There is no channel set aside in “H9” to check
12. Synchronizer in Reverse (Shuttle) Solenoid, the dump solenoid, driver versus status sensed,
(NOT USED TN S/D) circuit CN1-18 and CN1-2. A true test to this solenoid
is with an actual voltmeter with the red lead (+) to
13. Synchronizer in Forward (Hi/Lo) Position CN1-18 and the black lead (-) to ground.
Solenoid, (NOT USED TN S/D)
14. 5V input Sensor Supply Voltage, (ON) • With FNR lever in neutral or with clutch pedal
depressed -- solenoid energized 12V
• (521 min. – 849 max.) 670
• With FNR lever NOT in neutral and with
clutch pedal released -- solenoid not
energized 0V
HA-CLUTCH PEDAL POTENTIOMETER

AND STATUS SWITCH
The HA menu displays input values of both the clutch
pedal potentiometer and status switch. The clutch
pedal potentiometer position is expressed as a
percentage of the entire travel range while the clutch
pedal switch status is indicated by ON and OFF
during the travel of the pedal.
The transmission operation is enabled in this menu.

It is possible to drive the tractor and at the same time
record the clutch pedal potentiometer travel and
clutch pedal switch status from the CDU display. This
menu can also be viewed with the tractor stationary.
(A) and connect the CDU to the Power Shuttle
26083
52
the “HMENU” button.
4. Press the “HMENU” button until the “HA”
appears on the CDU display.
HA
10006107
53
5. Place the Power Shuttle FNR lever (1) into the
forward position.
F
NOTE: To run stationary test (if engine is running), R
disengage the range lever and engage the parking
brake.
54
6. When the clutch pedal is released the
percentage should be 100% or 99 % ON.
When the clutch is fully depressed, the percent-

age should be 0% or 1% OFF.
As the clutch pedal is being depressed, the dis- 100% ON

play should change from “ON” to “OFF” before
5%.
As the clutch pedal is being released, the display

should change from “OFF” to “ON” before 15%.
“OFF” means the clutch pedal switch is open so 10006107

the dump solenoid is de-energized, oil is dumped
to sump from the clutch packs. 55
“ON” means the clutch pedal switch is closed so

the dump solenoid is energized, oil is supplied to
the clutch packs.
0% OFF
10006107
56
7. Turn the key switch to the “OFF” position to
disconnect the CDU or press the “HMENU”
button on the instrument to access another
menu.
CLUTCH PEDAL POTENTIOMETER RE-

PLACEMENT AND CLUTCH PEDAL
SWITCH ADJUSTMENT
If the clutch pedal potentiometer has been replaced,
the previous data for the clutch must be erased using
the H8 menu. Once the data has been erased, use
the following procedure to calibrate the new
potentiometer and adjust the switch.
1. Turn the key switch (1) to the “ON” (B) position to
allow the ECM to perform the self configuration
(first start-up). Turn the key switch to the “OFF”
(A) position to save the configuration.
2. Turn the key switch back to the “ON” (B) position.
After a few moments the service transmission
light will begin to flash the error code for
“non-calibrated clutches”. Ignore this error for
now.
3. To calibrate the clutch pedal potentiometer limits,
fully depress the clutch pedal. Hold the clutch
pedal for a few seconds at the bottom travel limit. 1
4. Release the clutch pedal and allow the clutch to
remain at the top travel limit for a few seconds.
Turn the key switch to the “OFF” (A) position to 57
save the potentiometer limit calibration.
5. The clutch pedal potentiometer limit has been
calibrated. Now the clutch packs will need
calibrated. as described previously in the H1
menu description. The clutch pedal switch will
also need adjustment (see step 6--8).
NOTE: The clutch pedal switch is located under the
left lower dash cover on the inside of the clutch pedal 1
pivot.
6. To adjust the clutch pedal switch (1) access the
HA menu using the CDU.
When the clutch pedal is released (raised), the
percentage should be 100% or 99% ON.
When the clutch is fully depressed, the 2
percentage should be O% or 1% OFF.
As the clutch pedal is being depressed, the
display should change from “ON” to “OFF” before
5%.
50025110
should change from “OFF” to “ON” before 15%. 58
7. If the readings are not as specified, adjust the
clutch pedal switch by loosening the switch
mounting screws (2) and moving the switch as
needed. The CDU display should change from
“ON” to “OFF” before 5% as the clutch is being
depressed and the display should change from
“OFF” to “ON” before 15% as the clutch pedal is
being released.
8. Make sure the mounting screws are tightened
once the clutch pedal switch is adjusted properly.
disconnect the CDU or press the “HMENU”
button to access another menu.
HC -- TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE

SENDER
NOTE: The transmission can be operated in this
mode.
The HC menu displays the temperature transmission
oil in degrees Celsius. To display the transmission oil
temperature, use the following procedure:

manual.
26083
59
4. Press the “HMENU” button until “HC” appears on
the CDU.
T = 21°C
5. After a few seconds the display on the CDU will
indicate the temperature of the transmission oil,
in degrees Celsius. An example is: T = 21° C. The
temperature range is --40°C to +120°C (--40°F) to
+248°F).
disconnect the CDU or press the “HMENU” 10006107
button on the CDU to access another menu. 60
HD--HI/LO SYNCHRONIZER OPERATION

(NOT USED TN S/D)
NOTE: The transmission should be disabled, but en-
sure the range lever is in neutral and the parking
brake is engaged.
The HD menu is used to inspect the operation of the
Forward/Reverse (Hi/Lo--Shuttle) Synchronizer and
will indicate the status of the synchronizer on the
CDU display. Use the following procedure to inspect
the F/R synchronizer operation.
2. Hold the “HMENU” button on the CDU and turn
the key switch (1) to the “START” position (C) and
start the engine.
26083
61
3. After the tractor has gone through the diagnos-
tics, “HMENU” will appear on the CDU display.
4. Press the “HMENU” button until “HD” appears on
the CDU display.
5. After a few seconds the CDU display will indicate HD
the status of the synchronizers position.
An example is: Pos = Hi/Lo, means the synchro-
nizer in the rear position ready for forward travel,
forward (Hi/Lo) position sensor pressed, reverse
(Shuttle) position sensor not pressed.
If the display indicates Pos = SHTL (or SHUT), 10006107
the synchronizer is in the front position for re-
62
verse travel, reverse (Shuttle) position sensor
pressed, forward (Hi/Lo) position sensor not
pressed.
If the display indicates Pos = UNKN, the ECM is
unsure of what position the synchronizer is in, be-
cause the synchronizer did not engage properly
or is malfunctioning in some way, normally Error
Code 72.
NOTE: In case of failure of one or both synchronizer
position sensor, the message Pos = UNKN could be
displayed even if the synchronizer moves and en-
gages correctly. In this case, however, the Error
Code selected for the particular position sensor
should appear flashing on the instrument panel.
In normal conditions, the F/R synchronizer should

never be in the mechanical neutral position. If not fol-
lowing a mechanical or electro-hydraulic problem,
the F/R synchronizer is always meshed with forward
or reverse gear even if the Power Shuttle FNR lever
or clutch pedal are in neutral. Mechanically there is
not a neutral synchronizer position. The Power
Shuttle FNR lever or clutch pedal are causing the
clutch packs to neutralize.
In normal conditions at engine start-up and during

ECM self-diagnosis, the F/R synchronizer is moved
automatically by the ECM to the opposite position
from tractor shut down. For example, if the synchro-
nizer is in the forward position, then it would be
moved to the reverse position during self-diagnosis.
6. Increase the engine to 1200 – 1400 RPM and use

the up arrow and down arrow buttons on the CDU
to change the position of the synchronizer. The
CDU display will indicate the position of the syn-
chronizer.
7. Change the synchronizer position several times

to be sure the synchronizer is functioning proper-
ly.

disconnect the CDU or press the “HMENU” but-
ton on the CDU to access another menu.
HE -- GEAR CHANGE ADJUSTMENTS

The HE menu displays the speed threshold setting.
The ECM uses two shifting tables; one that is used
when the transmission is shifted above the speed
threshold setting; the other is used when the tractor
is shifted below the speed threshold setting. There
are three settings, as listed below.
• Low -- approximately 3 mph
• Med -- approximately 4 mph
• High -- approximately 8 mph
IMPORTANT: This value should not be changed as

it was set at the factory.

manual.
26083
63
4. Press the “HMENU” button until “HE” appears on
the CDU display.
WST = MID
5. The display on the CDU will indicate one of the
following settings:
• High WST=HI (approx. 8 mph)
• Medium WST=MID (approx. 4 mph)
• Low WST=LOW (approx. 3 mph)
6. To change the engagement speed, use the up 10006107
and down buttons on the CDU until the desired 64
speed is indicated on the CDU display.
store the setting in the ECM.
HF-STORED ERROR CODES

When a fault is detected it is stored in the ECM
non-volatile memory and signalled by the indicator
lamp, (1). The HF menu allows access to Error
Codes that are stored in the non-volatile memory of
the ECM. Stored errors can be read and erased by
using the CDU. As soon as a fault condition is
detected by the ECM, the associated Error Code is
saved into the HF memory. Use the following
procedure to access the HF menu:
26304
65
2. Hold the “HMENU” button on the CDU and turn
the key switch (1) to the “ON” position (B).
26083
66
diagnostics, “HMENU” will appear on the CDU
display. Release the “HMENU” button.
4. Press the “HMENU” button until “HF” appears on
the CDU display.
HF
5. The CDU display will indicate the last stored
Error Code. An example would be: E (9) =11.
6. The following key is used for Error Codes:
• E Error
• (9) Progressive storage channel of the
Error 10006107
• 11 Error Code number 67
7. The following will be displayed when there are no
Error Codes stored: E (1)=00 There is a
maximum of ten stored Error Codes. E(10) will be
the most recent Error Code.
NOTE: Do not hold the buttons that change the Error
Code displayed, otherwise the Error Codes may be E (1) = 00
erased.
8. If multiple Error Codes are present, use the up

arrow and down arrow buttons to view Error
Codes from other channels. Press them
momentarily when changing the Error Code
10006107
viewed.
9. Stored errors can be erased from the non-volatile 68
memory by pressing and holding the down arrow
button on the CDU until the following sequence
is displayed: ERASE 5s, ERASE4s, ERASE 3s,
ERASE 2s, ERASE 1s, ERASED.
NOTE: If the down arrow is released or the “HMENU”
is pushed during the erasure countdown, the
sequence is cancelled and the Error Codes are not
erased.
10. Release the down button once the errors have

been erased and turn the key switch to the “OFF”
position (A) for at least two seconds.
TROUBLESHOOTING FAULT CODES
WARNING other requested calibration operations.
Notes to help the operator make diagnosis and prob- 6. There are two types of faults:
lem--solving easier.
FAULT RESET: the fault will no longer be dis-
played if the cause has been eliminated or re-
1. The measurements taken to read: paired, even without switching off the tractor, but
voltage; the relative code will be saved in the non--volatile
resistance; memory (see HF MENU);
frequency. NO FAULT RESET: the fault remains on the
alarm lamp when the cause is eliminated or
must be carried out with a digital tester.
solved. To remove the fault display, stop then re-
start the tractor. The fault will be saved (as a “no
NOTE: the resistance values shown are valid for a fault reset”) in the non volatile memory (see HF
temperature of 20 o C (68 oF) (ambient temperature). MENU.
With higher or lower tractor temperatures, the rela- 7. The connection references indicate: the wire di-
tive resistance values shown in the manual should mension and colour, and the connection pin num-
vary accordingly. ber.
Example: 0.5 AB (2)
0.5 = wire dimension;
2. The “short to ground” message refers to a resist- AB = wire colour;
ance value of less than 5 ohm (Ω). (2) = connection pin number.
3. When a fault occurs, before carrying out any kind
of service operations, check that the specific con- Electric Wire Color Coding
nections (ECU, sensors, switches, etc.) are cor- A -- Light Blue M -- Brown
rectly connected. B -- White N -- Black
A faulty connection could be the cause of incor- C -- Orange R -- Red
rect tractor operation. G -- Yellow S -- Pink
4. To facilitate problem solving, consult the ECU H -- Grey V -- Green
electrical wiring diagram, shown on page 306. L -- Blue Z -- Purple
5. If the ECU needs to be replaced, the following op- 8. CN1--4 or CN2--25 on the ECU connections (85)
erations must be carried out: refer to the smaller connection (18 pin) or the big-
the H8 MENU function (cancellation of the resi- ger connection (36 pin) and the relative pin num-
dent non--volatile memory); also check that the ber.
self--configuration operation at the first start--up 9. The faults are listed in progressive order starting
(after ECU replacement) is correct; on page 104.
calibration of the hydraulic clutches MENU H1
page 18.
ECU LOCATION
The ECU (1) controls the POWER SHUTTLE.
DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS
(ECM and EST)
On tractors with Power Shuttle transmissions, an 1
Electronic Control Module (ECM) commands the
operation and troubleshooting of input and output
sensors, and an operating software program
monitors and controls the system. A diagnostic
program downloaded in the Electronic Service Tool
(EST), (1) identifies where and when faults occur in
the system. Refer to the Special Tools chart at the
front of Chapter 3 for EST part numbers.
NOTE: For detailed information on handling and op- 10036171
erating the EST, refer to the operator’s manual that
accompanies the tool. For procedures on connecting 69
and operating the EST on the tractor, refer to “Con-
necting The Electronic Service Tool to the Tractor” in
this chapter.
The ECM has two modes of “Auto Self-Diagnostic”
functions to detect abnormal operating conditions in
the ECM itself or in any circuits the ECM controls or
monitors. The ECM will detect failures or abnormal
conditions and once detected will switch to error logic
and failure management logic circuitry in the ECM.
The first mode is when the key switch (1) is turned
from the “OFF” (A) position to the “RUN” position (B)
when starting the tractor. This self-diagnosis could
continue up to 30 seconds if abnormal conditions are
detected.
The second mode is real-time self-diagnosis while
the tractor is running, “RUN” position (B).
70
tion in either mode, the ECM error logic will signal an
error code, causing the alarm lamp (1) on the instru-
ment panel to flash a code. The failure management
logic will signal error codes according to priority.
26304
71
AUTOMATIC SELF-DIAGNOSIS (ECM)
The ECM automatically does a self-diagnosis of the

different system parts when the key switch (1) is
turned from the “OFF” position to the “RUN” position
(B) when starting the tractor. The configuration of
these parts is already stored in the non-volatile
memory.
72
During the self-diagnosis period the transmission
status light (1, fig. 73) will remain on. The self-diag- 1
nosis process could continue for up to 30 seconds if
abnormal conditions are detected.
NOTE: If an attempt is made to move the tractor prior

to the completion of self diagnosis the self diagnosis
will be terminated, the transmission status light will be
turned off and error codes may not be displayed.
73
Once the self-diagnosis is completed and if there is
an abnormal condition or failure in one or more of the
ECM controlled systems, the ECM will cause the
alarm lamp (1, fig. 74) on the instrument panel to
flash a code, or the transmission status light (1, fig. 6)
will begin flashing alerting the operator that there is
a problem.
The ECM also performs real-time self diagnosis of
system components while the tractor is running,
“RUN” position (B). The ECM will perform this at reg-
ular intervals to check for possible system failures or 1
abnormal conditions.
tion while the tractor is running, the ECM error logic 74
will signal an error code, causing the alarm lamp on
the instrument panel to flash a code, alerting the op-
erator that there is a problem. The failure manage-
ment logic will signal error codes according to their
priority.
If an error with lower priority occurs while an error of
higher priority is already being signaled, the lower
priority error will be stored until the error of higher
priority has been removed.
If an error of higher priority occurs while an error of
lower priority is being signaled, the higher priority er-
ror will be displayed after the lower priority error se-
quence has been displayed.
ECM -- FIRST START--UP
(Self Configuration)
The ECM will require configuration when any one of

the following circumstances has occurred.
-- Following ECM replacement.

-- Following manual configuration NONE (see H3

MENU). 75
Turn switch (1) to B (ON) without switching on the en-

gine.
Indicator (1) (fig. 76) will be illuminated (non--flash-
ing), after a while the indicator will flash to repeat the
recognised configuration code -- i.e.: rapid flashing,
followed by 1 flash.
-- Turn the key (1, fig. 75) to OFF for a few seconds:
the configuration is now saved in the Non--Vola-
tile memory (NVM).
76
TRANSMISSION DISABLED INDICATOR

LIGHT 1
The ECM is programmed with a fail-safe mode,
which will disable and cause the transmission to go
into neutral in the unlikely event that a malfunction
should occur. When the transmission is disabled the
transmission status light (1) (fig. 77) example in the
instrument panel will begin flashing or may be
illuminated.
There are basically three situations in which the

transmission can be disabled: 1) during start up, 2)
during operation with fault codes stored in the ECM,
3) disabled with no stored error codes.
77
Disabled during start-up
During the start up self-diagnosis period the
transmission status light (1) (fig. 77) will remain on
for a few (2 - 5) seconds (the self diagnosis period
could continue for up to 30 seconds if abnormal
conditions are detected).
If a fault is detected during start up, the ECM will

signal an error code causing the alarm lamp (1)
(fig. 78) to flash a code alerting the operator there is
a problem. The transmission status light (1) (fig. 77) 1
will begin flashing, and the transmission will be
disabled.
Depending on the type of fault, the Power Shuttle 78

may not function until the clutch pedal is cycled, the
Power Shuttle FNR lever is cycled, or until after the
problem is corrected.
NOTE: If the start up diagnostics is interrupted, the

Power Shuttle may not function until the clutch pedal
or the Power Shuttle FNR lever is cycled after start
up.
Disabled with error codes stored
During normal operation if a critical error occurs the
transmission will be disabled and the error code will
be signaled through the alarm lamp (1) (fig. 78) on
the instrument panel. The transmission status light
(1) (fig. 77) may or may not begin flashing.
Disabled with no error codes stored
If during normal operation, when the FNR lever is
placed in either the forward or reverse position, or
while moving, the tractor transmission becomes dis-
abled, the status light (1) (fig. 77) begins flashing,
and no error codes are signaled on the alarm lamp (1)
(fig. 79).
79
The tractor will not move until either the FNR lever (1)
or the clutch pedal is cycled.
This condition can be caused by either operator fault F
(not seated, gear/range levers not properly engaged, R
incorrect starting sequence) or system fault (seat
switch faulty, gear/range lever position switches mis- 1
adjusted/faulty, and alternator W+ wire).
NOTE: See electrical section of this manual for
proper operation of operator’s presence circuit for
seat switch.
80
DIAGNOSIS DURING OPERATION 2 -- Priority Numerical value.
Diagnosis during operation is in real time and checks 3 -- Detection Group of conditions creating
for the eventual presence of anomalous conditions at the fault.
regular intervals, whilst the functional software is 4 -- Effects The eventual effect of the
working. fault on the system.
The diagnosis should check all conditions shown un- 5 -- Correction The condition that corrects
der the DIAGNOSIS MINIMUM CONDITIONS head- the fault, if possible, and the
ings. functional change of the sys-
tem after this correction.
FAULT DETECTION AND ANOMALOUS 6 -- Not displayed during calibration.
CONDITIONS MANAGEMENT LOGIC 7 -- Not displayed in Cab Test mode: this mode is ac-
cessed by sending a series of “commands” to the
The start--up and functional code also includes the
ECM, through the serial connection.
faults detection and anomalous conditions manage-
ment logic. The TROUBLESHOOTING FAULT CODES head-
This logic processes the faults information provided ing contains the definitions of the system errors, sub-
by the diagnostics (start--up diagnosis and diagnosis divided into the aforementioned fields.
during operation) and functional bodies, indicating
the condition of the system, in order to detect “system
faults” and “anomalous conditions”. MULTIPLE ANOMALOUS CONDITIONS --
The faults detection and anomalous conditions man- PRIORITY
agement logic also diagnoses ECM and external cir-
In the event of multiple anomalous conditions, as ex-
cuit anomalies, where the hardware can not be diag-
plained in the following heading, the display logic
nosed directly; i.e. it checks the coherence of the
uses the “Priority” field to establish the code to dis-
functional bodies and their configuration.
play. Unless otherwise specified, the resulting multi-
Each time the faults logic detects a “system error” or ple anomalous condition effect/condition is provided
an “anomalous condition”, the fault code will be dis- by superimposing each individual effect/correction;
played, it creates a fault which is processed by the in the event of incompatibility between the different
faults buffer logic in the non--volatile memory, the corrections, the correction linked with the highest
faults display logic and the anomalous conditions priority fault is used.
management logic.
The anomalous conditions management logic con-
siders the effect of the faults that effect tractor opera- FAULT DISPLAY LOGIC
tion.
The logic also manages the correction procedure for Introduction
a fault condition. As soon as a problem is detected, it must be dis-
Each fault is described using the following fields: played by the indicator lamp (1, fig. 79).
1 -- Fault code Numerical value.
ELECTRONIC SERVICE TOOL (EST) a) short to +12.
The Electronic Service Tool (EST) indicates fault b) short to ground or open circuit.
conditions relative to the HH menu, e.g.: calibration c) nominal range deviation.
Uxx codes. 12VF KEY SUPPLY.
Other fault conditions, unless masked by the “cab 12VD CLUTCH DRIVERS SUPPLY.
tester mode” or “calibration mode”, are flashed on the
illuminated signal lamp (1, fig. 79). a) short to ground or open circuit.
b) nominal range deviation.
DIAGNOSIS MINIMUM CONDITIONS
INPUT DIAGNOSTICS
ECM and relative circuits fault.
The unit must be provided with a watchdog for ECM Anomalous condition description and reset
anomalous conditions). For each of the following inputs, apart from when
The length of the software cycle should be 10 ms, there is an ECM fault, the following anomalous condi-
whereas the watchdog pause should be 16.5 ms tions must be diagnosed (independently of the ECM
(longer pauses are not recommended). status).
This check must be carried out at least every 10 ms
Reaction to fault. (longer pauses are not recommended).
At start--up, and in the event of microprocessor AN1 Clutch pedal potentiometer.
anomalous conditions, none of the solenoid valves AN2 Forward gear lever switch.
are enabled.
AN8 Not used.
Follow--up reaction. AN9 Not used.
In the event of an anomalous condition, the watch- AN10 Not used.
dog and reset circuit must guarantee that the ECM AN11 Not used.
does not excite the solenoid valves. AN12 Not used.
-- short to 5V or 12V.
POWER SUPPLY DIAGNOSTICS
For each ulterior current supply, apart from when
AN3 Not used.
there is an ECM fault, the following anomalous condi-
tions must be diagnosed, independently of the ECM AN5 Not used.
status). AN6 Not used.
This check must be carried out at least every 10 ms AN4 Oil temperature sensor.
(longer pauses are not recommended). -- short to ground.
-- short to 5V or 12V or circuit open.
Anomalous condition description and reset
AN7 Fuse 20.
5V SENSORS SUPPLY.
8V SENSORS SUPPLY.
POWER SHUTTLE FAULT CODE PRIORITY
11 CPDL_POT_LO_DISABLING_ERR 14 SL Dis
11 CPDL_POT_LO_ERR 75′ Fixed Lim
12 CPDL_POT_HI_DISABLING_ERR 15 SL Dis
12 CPDL_POT_HI_ERR 74′ Fixed Lim
13 UD_SW_ON_ERR 67 Auto None
14 C1_SW_HI_DIS_ERR 22 CP/SL Dis
14 C1_SW_HI_ERR 83′ Fixed Mod
15 C1_SW_LO_DIS_ERR 23 CP/SL Dis
15 C1_SW_LO_ERR 84′ Fixed Mod
16 G1_SW_HI_DIS_ERR 24 CP/SL Dis
16 G1_SW_HI_ERR 85′ Fixed Mod
17 G1_SW_LO_DIS_ERR 25 CP/SL Dis
17 G1_SW_LO_ERR 86′ Fixed Mod
18 CREEPER_ENG_SW_HI_ERR 47 Fixed Mod
19 CREEPER_ENG_SW_LO_ERR 48 Fixed Mod
21 CH_HARN_ERR 1 Fixed Crit.Dis
22 SOL_A_SHORT_DIS_ERR 39 CP/SL Dis
22 SOL_A_SHORT_ERR 97′ Fixed Lim
23 SOL_B_SHORT_DIS_ERR 37 CP/SL Dis
23 SOL_B_SHORT_ERR 95′ Fixed Lim
24 CL_UNCAL_ERR 100 Fixed Mod
26 ERPM_HI_ERR 65 Fixed Mod
27 ERPM_LO_ERR 66 Fixed Mod
28 B_CL_UNCAL_ERR 101 Fixed Mod
29 A_CL_UNCAL_ERR 102 Fixed Mod
31 SOL_SHTL_SHORT_DIS_ERR 31 CP/SL Dis
31 SOL_SHTL_SHORT_ERR 90′ Fixed Lim
32 SOL_HL_SHORT_DIS_ERR 33 CP/SL Dis
32 SOL_HL_SHORT_ERR 92′ Fixed Lim
33 SOL_DUMP_SHORT_DIS_ERR 35 CP/SL Dis
33 SOL_DUMP_SHORT_ERR 98′ Fixed Lim
35 SOL_DUMP_SHORT_12V_ERR 8 Fixed Crit.Dis
36 SOL_DUMP_OPEN_OR_GND_DIS_ERR 34 CP/SL Dis
36 SOL_DUMP_OPEN_OR_GND_ERR 99′ Fixed Lim
37 CL_SW_OC_ERR 13 CP/SL Dis
38 SOL_B_SHORT_12V_ERR 9 Fixed Crit.Dis
39 SOL_B_OPEN_OR_GND_DIS_ERR 36 CP/SL Dis
39 SOL_B_OPEN_OR_GND_ERR 94′ Fixed Lim
41 SOL_A_OPEN_OR_GND_DIS_ERR 38 CP/SL Dis
41 SOL_A_OPEN_OR_GND_ERR 96′ Fixed Lim
42 SOL_A_SHORT_12V_ERR 11 Fixed Crit.Dis
43 SHTL_SYNCRO_SW_HI_DIS_ERR 18 CP/SL Dis
43 SHTL_SYNCRO_SW_HI_ERR 81′ Fixed Lim
44 SHTL_SYNCRO_SW_LO_DIS_ERR 21 CP/SL Dis
44 SHTL_SYNCRO_SW_LO_ERR 82′ Fixed Lim
46 FUSE_20_ERR 51 Auto Lim
47 CL_SW_HI_ERR 55 Fixed Mod
48 CL_SW_LO_ERR 56 Fixed None
49 WHLSPD_SNR_HI_ERR 63 Fixed Mod
51 TEMP_SNDR_OC_ERR 53 Auto Mod
52 TEMP_SNDR_SC_ERR 54 Auto Mod
55 FORWARD_SW_HI_ERR 57 Auto None
56 FORWARD_SW_LO_ERR 58 Auto None
57 REVERSE_SW_HI_ERR 61 Auto None
58 REVERSE_SW_LO_ERR 62 Auto None
59 FNR_SW_DISAGREE_ERR 43 Auto Dis
61 HI_LO_SYNCRO_SW_HI_DIS_ERR 16 CP/SL Dis
61 HI_LO_SYNCRO_SW_HI_ERR 76′ Fixed Lim
62 HI_LO_SYNCRO_SW_LO_DIS_ERR 17 CP/SL Dis
62 HI_LO_SYNCRO_SW_LO_ERR 77′ Fixed Lim
63 SYNCRO_HL_ENG_ERR 40 SL/HI Dis
64 SYNCRO_SHTL_ENG_ERR 41 SL Dis
65 SOL_HL_OPEN_OR_GND_DIS_ERR 32 CP/SL Dis
65 SOL_HL_OPEN_OR_GND_ERR 91′ Fixed Lim
66 SOL_SHTL_OPEN_OR_GND_DIS_ERR 28 CP/SL Dis
66 SOL_SHTL_OPEN_OR_GND_ERR 89′ Fixed Lim
67 SOL_HL_SHORT_12V_DIS_ERR 27 CP/SL Dis
67 SOL_HL_SHORT_12V_ERR 87′ Fixed Lim
68 SOL_SHTL_SHORT_12V_DIS_ERR 26 CP/SL Dis
68 SOL_SHTL_SHORT_12V_ERR 88′ Fixed Lim
69 WHLSPD_SNRLO_ERR 64 Fixed Mod
71 SYNC_START_UP_INIT_ERROR 93 Auto Dis
72 SYNC_POPPED_OUT_ERR 42 CP/SL Dis
73 V_12VF_FAILED_HI 2 Fixed Crit.Dis
74 V_12VF_FAILED_LOW 3 Fixed Crit.Dis
76 NVM_RD_ERR 68 Fixed Mod
81 PRESS_SW_OC_ERR 49 Fixed Mod
82 PRESS_SW_SC_ERR 50 Fixed Mod
SYMBOLS USED
CORRECTION column
Fixed the fault continues to be displayed (NO RESET).

Auto the fault is no longer displayed when the conditions that generated the fault are no longer present
(RESET).
SL the fault is no longer displayed by using the Shuttle (SL) and/or the clutch pedal (CP).
CP the fault is no longer displayed using the clutch pedal (CP).
Hi the fault is no longer displayed pressing the pushbutton (Hi).
Combinations of the aforementioned symbols are possible.
EFFECT column
Dis. Crit. the gears are critically disabled by this fault.

This fault can only be deleted by switching off the ECM.
Dis. the gears are disabled, the “correction” column explains how the gears
can be enabled.
LIM the fault condition limits tractor operation.
e.g.: there are faults that disable certain functions.
Mod. the fault condition effects tractor operation.
e.g.: there are faults that make the tractor move slowly or abruptly.
CODE column
Contains the numerical code to display.
PRIORITY column
The apostrophe indicates that the CODE has already been used by a previously listed fault condition.
Electronic Service Tool (EST)
out with the Electronic Service Tool.
Errors code
fault condition can be displayed while in HH mode.
During calibration, certain faults may be masked.
The EST gives access to the following menus:

H2 -- CLUTCHES A and B CALIBRATION VALUES
DISPLAY
H5 -- CONTROL SWITCHES DIAGNOSTICS
H6 -- CLUTCH A FILL TIME MODIFICATION AND
DISPLAY
H7 -- CLUTCH B FILL TIME MODIFICATION AND
DISPLAY
H8 -- DELETE DATA SAVED IN THE NON--VOL-
HA -- CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION AND SWITCH
DISPLAY
HC -- TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE DIS-
PLAY
HD -- SHUTTLE SYNCHRONISER POSITION
NOT ACCESSIBLE ON TN S/D MODELS
HE -- GEAR CHANGE ADJUSTMENT
ATILE MEMORY

H9, HA, HC and HE menus.
While other menus are being used the transmission
is disabled.
If tractor movement is detected while these menus
are in use, the menu will be interrupted and transmis-
sion will be enabled; to re--enter the HH MENU, stop
the tractor and press the button on the EST cable.
To exit from an active MENU, press the button on the
EST cable.
If the menu allows tractor movement, stop the tractor
(speed = 0).
DOWNLOADING THE LATEST SOFTWARE

INTO TN SERIES TRACTOR POWER
SHUTTLE CONTROL MODULE WITH THE
ELECTRONIC SERVICE TOOL.
1. Stage the Electronic Service Tool (EST) near the
tractor.
2. Turn ON the Electronic Service Tool.
NOTE: For more detailed information on operating
the EST refer to the operator’s manual that
accompanies the EST.
3. Click the EST icon on the left side of the start--up

screen. The EST program will load.
IMPORTANT: When first opened, the Vehicle
Connection Selection screen displays the cable and
software information for the vehicle selected during
the last operation of the EST.
4. The Vehicle Connection Selection screen opens
and displays the part number of the cable, 1
required for connecting the EST to the vehicle.
The title bar, 2, at the top of the screen lists the
2 3
current vehicle selected. In addition, the Vehicle
Connection Selection screen displays the
Programming and Diagnostic Components
Supported, 3. Verify that the TN Series Tractor is
the selected vehicle in the title bar. If the title bar 1
displays the TN Series Tractor, then skip to Step
11. If not, proceed to Step 5 for instructions on
selecting the desired vehicle. 4
5. To change the vehicle selected to the TN Series
Tractor, click the OK button, 4, at the bottom of 81
the Vehicle Connection Selection screen to close
the window.
6. Once the Vehicle Connection Selection screen
closes, click the TOOL button on the top menu
bar.
7. Click the EQUIPMENT SELECTION command
from the drop down menu.
8. Click the NEW HOLLAND logo. The Equipment
Selection screen opens. Scroll down to the TN
Series tractor, 1, and click to highlight it. Click the
OK button, 2, to close the window.
1
2
82
9. A pop-up window opens to confirm the
reconfigure, 1. Click the OK button, 2, to close the
1
window. The TN Series Tractor software loads.
10. The Vehicle Connection Selection, screen
reopens and displays the part number of the
required cable for connection of the EST to the
TN Tractor.
83
11. After verifying the correct cable part number,
click the OK button at the bottom of the Vehicle
Connection Selection screen, Figure 81, to close
the window. The Programming screen, opens.
12. Connect cable end, 1, to the black TN Tractor 1
Diagnostic Harness for the Power Shuttle 2
Electronic Control Module (ECM) and connect
cable end, 2, to the EST interface cable.
50035626
84
13. At the tractor, turn the ignition key-switch to the
ON (RUN) position.
14. Click the VIEW CONTROLLER INFORMATION 1
button, 1, on the Programming screen. A pop-up
window opens and displays the current software
loaded in the TN Tractor Power Shuttle Control
Module. Record this information on a piece of
paper. Click the OK button to close the window.
15. Click the BROWSE button, 2.
85
16. The Program File Selection screen opens, 1.
17. Click to highlight the file, 2, for TN Series
Tractors. After highlighting the desired file, click 1
on the OPEN button, 3. A pop-up window will ask
for confirmation of this selection. Click the OK
2
button to close the window. Turn the key switch
OFF.
3
18. Verify that installation of the latest software is
necessary by comparing the software level on
the EST to the software level currently loaded in
the tractor Power Shuttle ECM.
If the latest software download is required, continue
with Step 19.
86
19. At the tractor, turn the ignition key-switch to the
ON (RUN) position.
NOTE: A pop-up window, 1, opens after clicking on
the PROGRAM DOWNLOAD button when the
tractor ignition key-switch is not in the ON (RUN)
position. The window displays the message “The
Service Tool was unable to properly set up the
Communication Port Interface hardware.”
87
20. When the PROGRAM DOWNLOAD button, 1, is
clicked a pop up window will appear to confirm
replacing the existing software. Click the OK
button to close the window. The software
download process begins.
NOTE: To monitor the software download process,
view the window, 2, in the bottom right-hand corner
of the EST screen.
When the download ends, a pop-up window 2

opens to confirm a successful download. Click 1
the OK button to close the window. Another pop
up window will appear providing instruction to
turn the ignition key-switch to the OFF Position. 88
21. Turn the ignition key-switch to the OFF position.
Click the OK button to close the window. This
completes the latest software download.
CONNECTING THE ELECTRONIC SERVICE

TOOL (EST) TO THE TRACTOR
WARNING
To prevent inadvertent movement of the tractor,
it is necessary to place the gear levers in the neu-
tral position before connecting and using the
Electronic Service Tool (EST).
1. Ensure the ignition Key-switch is in the OFF posi-

tion.
2. Set the parking brake, and place the gearshift
levers in the neutral position.
3. Release the retainer screws, 1, and pull the left
instrument panel guard, 2, off.
89
4. Identify the diagnostic unit connector(s), 1, under
the instrument panel. The connectors are color
coded for identification purposes. Use the follow-
ing list to determine the correct connector:
• Black: Power Shuttle Transmission
• Red: FWD Engagement
90
The following is a brief description of the EST screen:

H MENU BUTTON (1) Non-functional.
TEXT BOX (2) To identify the current
menu or routine selected. 3
UP ARROW (3) To scroll through lists, 4
save data, and calibrate
2
within menus. Select by
clicking the button on the 1
screen.
DOWN ARROW (4) To scroll through lists,
save data, and calibrate
within menus. Select by
clicking the button on the
screen. 91
NOTE: Press the pushbutton on the EST cable re-
peatedly to scroll through the different H menus. The
H menu button on the lower left-hand corner of the
display window is non-functional.
5. Connect the EST cable (1) to the ECM connector.

The opposite end (2) should be connected to the
EST computer.
NOTE: Avoid damaging the connectors by observing
the correct relationship between the flat sides of the 1
pins. 2
50035626
92
6. Press and hold the pushbutton (1) on the eST
cable and turn the key-switch to the ON position. 1
50035626
93
When the text HH menu appears in the display,
release the pushbutton.
NOTE: If the H menu pushbutton on the EST cable
is not held long enough, then the text NO COM (1) will
be displayed on the EST screen. This is also true if
the key-switch is turned ON without the H menu
pushbutton pressed, or if there is a loose wire or pin 1
within one of the connectors.
NOTE: Repeatedly pressing the pushbutton on the
EST cable will scroll through the different menus
starting with the H1 menu and so on. After reaching
the last menu, HF, the sequence begins again with
the HH menu. After app. 2 seconds, the EST enters
the selected menu routine. To abort a procedure 94
while in an H menu, press the pushbutton on the EST
cable, and the display returns to the HH menu for a
new selection.
When performing the procedures described on the

following pages of this chapter, scroll through the
different H menus by using the pushbutton on the
EST cable. Select or change data within each loaded
menu by using the UP and DOWN arrow keys. To
complete the storing process after changing data,
turn the key-switch (1) to the OFF (A) position for a
minimum of 5 seconds.
NOTE: Transmission operation is enabled during
use of the H6, H7, H9, HA HC and HF menus. During
execution of the remaining menus, the transmission
is not operated (it is disabled). If tractor wheel move-
ment (ground speed) is detected while the transmis-
sion non-enabled menus are run, that particular H
95
menu execution is interrupted and the ECM enables
the transmission. To re-start the calibration, depress
the clutch pedal or move the shuttle lever to neutral,
stop tractor movement, and press the pushbutton on
the EST cable until obtaining the desired menu.

and wait approximately 5 seconds to store the re-
vised data.

when the EST is connected to the diagnosis connec-
96
WARNING
Park the tractor on level ground in an unob-
structed area (in case of sudden movement).
Engage the handbrake, switch off all electrical

switches and the air conditioning system, if on.
Set the Shuttle control lever in neutral, the hy-

draulic lift lower arms down, the remote control
valve levers in neutral and switch off the engine.
Put safety wedges under the front and rear

wheels.
Check that the transmission oil temperature is

between 20 to 50 °C (68 to 122 °C).
Unless otherwise specified, the levers:

- Shuttle;
- Gear shift;
- Range gear;
- Creeper;
are in the NEUTRAL position.

H1 -- CLUTCHES A and B
CALIBRATION
The H1 menu provides access to Power Shuttle
clutches (A) and (B) calibration, reducing the engine
speed when the clutches start engaging. The ECM
reads engine RPM from the alternator to accomplish
this.
The calibration of the clutches is necessary when the
following has occurred:
• Poor transmission performance
• Solenoid valve has been replaced
• Erasure of non--volatile memory in the ECM (us-
ing the H8 menu)
• ECM has been replaced
• After initial break-in period -- first 50 hrs.
Use the following procedure to calibrate the clutches.
1. Make sure the key switch (1) is in the “OFF” posi-
tion (A) and connect the EST to the Power
Shuttle ECM as described previously in this
manual.
2. While pressing the button on the EST cable, turn
the key to the “START” position (C).
97
3. After the tractor has gone through self diagnosis
and has started, release the button on the EST
cable. The “HMENU” should appear on the EST
display.
H1
4. Press the button on the EST cable once. “H1”
should appear on the EST display. After a few
seconds, “CALIBR” will appear momentarily on
the EST display and then change to the transmis-
sion fluid temperature.
5. Make sure the parking brake is firmly set and in-
crease the engine speed to 1300 + 100 RPM.
98
6. Fully depress the clutch pedal (1).
99
7. Place the range lever (2) into the highest range.
8. Place the gear selection lever into first gear (1).
100
9. Position the Power Shuttle FNR lever (1) to the
forward position.
10. Slowly release the clutch pedal, making sure the F
tractor does not move. R
1
101
CLUTCH A CALIBRATION
NOTE: If the EST displays a “U” error code during the
calibration procedure, refer to the table at the end of
this procedure in this section to identify and remedy
the problem. An example of an error code would be
U21 (engine speed lower than 1200 RPM).
1. Click and hold the down arrow (1) on the EST. Ini-
tially the EST will display “STAB.RPM”, then the
initial value of the setting in milli--amps (mA).
2. Continue holding the down arrow (1) until the en- STAB.RPM
gine speed reduces about 50 RPM and the final
calibration setting flashes continuously. An ex- 1
ample would be: A=286mA
ue and lurch represent the point the energized PWM
is not full but approximately 40 -- 50 psi.
3. Release the down arrow (1) and the EST dis-
plays the transmission oil temperature. 102
CLUTCH B CALIBRATION
NOTE: If the EST displays a “U” error code during the
calibration procedure, refer to the table at the end of
this procedure in this section to identify and remedy
the problem. An example of an error code would be
U21 (engine speed lower than 1200 RPM).
4. Click and hold the up arrow (1) on the EST. Initial-
ly the EST will display “STAB.RPM”, then the ini-
tial value of the setting in milli--amps (mA).
5. Continue holding the up arrow (1) until the engine STAB.RPM 1
speed reduces about 50 RPM and the final cal-
ibration setting flashes continuously. An example
would be: A=286mA
ue and lurch represent the point the energized PWM
is not full but approximately 45 -- 50 psi.
103
6. Release the up arrow and the EST displays the
transmission oil temperature.
store the clutch values. A = 286 mA
NOTE: If the tractor operation is abrupt after calibrat-
ing the clutches, refer to the H6 and H7 menus to ad-
just the fill times for the clutches.
NOTE: As clutch components wear, the clutch cal-
ibration and fill times will need adjusted accordingly.
NOTE: Transmission output speed, engine RPM,
clutch pedal position, gear and range lever positions
are constantly monitored. Calibration can go on only
if the tractor is stationary, the Power Shuttle FNR le-
ver is not in neutral, the main (C1) and range (G1) 104
shift levers are not in neutral, and the clutch pedal is
released. If calibration conditions have not been met,
this will be displayed and the associated error code
will be flashed on the instrument panel. If the fault
condition is relevant to calibration, a “U” code will be
displayed on the EST.
Calibration Error Codes

Code Cause Remedy
U19 Transmission oil temperature lower Drive tractor to increase transmission oil temperature
than 10_ C (50_ F) ∗
U20 Incorrect starting procedure Press and release clutch pedal
U21 Engine speed lower than 1200 RPM Increase engine speed
U22 Engine speed over 1400 RPM Decrease engine speed
U23 Power Shuttle control lever in neutral Place Power Shuttle control lever into the forward or
reverse position as required.
U24 Range selector in neutral Place range lever into highest range
U25 Gear selector in neutral Place gear lever into first gear
U26 Clutch pedal not fully raised Release clutch pedal fully
U27 Clutch pack (B) value lower than 230 Check solenoid value circuit and solenoid valve, replace
mA as necessary
U28 Clutch pack (B) value higher than 480 Check solenoid value circuit and solenoid valve, replace
circuit.
U29 Clutch pack (A) value lower than 230 Check solenoid value circuit and solenoid valve, replace
mA as necessary
U30 Clutch pack (A) value higher than 480 Check solenoid value circuit and solenoid valve, replace
circuit.
U31 Tractor is moving Engage parking brake
U32 Hi/Lo synchronizer not engaged Check synchronizer using the HD menu
(*) Between 10_ C (50_ F) and 20_ C (68_ F) the

EST display will show “COLD OIL”. However, when
continuing to hold the up arrow or the down arrow
button, the calibration will continue.
VALUES DISPLAY
The H2 menu displays the calibration values
expressed in milli-amps (mA), for the “A” and “B”
hydraulic clutch solenoid valves. These values were
obtained by the ECM during the clutch calibration in
the H1 menu.
Use the following procedure to obtain the values:
1. Make sure the key switch (1) is in the “OFF” (A)
position and connect the EST to the Power
manual.
2. While holding the button on the EST cable, turn
the key switch to the “ON” (B) position.
Release the button on the EST cable.
26083
105
4. Press the button on the EST cable twice. “H2”
should appear on the EST display.
NOTE: The display automatically shows the “A”
clutch value. H2
106
5. Click the up arrow on the EST to obtain the value
for the “B” clutch. The current stored value, in
mA, will be displayed. An example would be
B=290 mA.
A = 286 mA
6. Click the down arrow (1) on the EST to obtain a
value for the “A” clutch. The current stored value, 1
expressed in mA, will be displayed. An example
would be: A=286 mA (2). 2
7. The mA range for each clutch must be between
230 mA and 480 mA (for either clutch).
8. Turn the key switch (1) fig. 105 to the “OFF” (A)
position or enter another menu by pressing the
button on the EST cable.
107
The H3 menu displays the system configuration
stored in the non-volatile memory (NVM) menu after
a tractor with a new ECM has been initially started up.
H3 also allows the transmission to be configured
manually.
and connect the EST to the Power Shuttle ECM
connector, as described previously in this
manual.
2. Hold the button on the EST cable and turn the key
switch (1) to the “ON” position (B).
26083
108
diagnostics, “HMENU” will appear on the display.
4. Press the button on the EST cable three times. H3
“H3” will appear on the EST display. After several
seconds the configuration stored will be
displayed. One of the following configurations
will be shown:
• Pshuttle - Power Shuttle Transmission (8X8
or 16X16)
• Hi/Lo (does not apply to TN S/D) - Power
Shuttle Transmission with Hi/Lo (32X16)
• Hi/Lo CR (does not apply to TN S/D) - Pow- 109
er Shuttle Transmission with Hi/Lo and
Creeper (44X16)
• None - No configuration stored in memory,

occurs with the ECM replacement or erasure
of non-volatile memory (H8). Only detected
when the ECM first powers up.
None
110
NOTE: It is possible to select any configuration
available. Selection of the wrong configuration can
cause Error Codes to be displayed through the PS
Alarm lamp or causes tractor malfunctions. Selection
of the “NONE” will cause the ECM to conduct a
self-configuration at the next start-up. The self-con-
figuration check always gets performed when a
different ECM is installed, after H8 is cleared, and
whenever H3 configuration is set to “NONE”. The
ECM performs the self test by sending a signal out
through the harness and receives acknowledgement
of signs in from various sensors, switches, and
solenoids.
5. To quit the menu without modifying the
configuration, press the button on the EST cable.
6. If the configuration displayed does not match the
configuration the tractor is equipped with, the 1
configuration can be modified manually by
clicking the up arrow (1) until the correct
2
configuration is shown on the EST display.
7. When the correct configuration is shown, click
and hold the down arrow (2). The display on the
EST will start this sequence: “STORE 5s,
STORE 4s, STORE 3s, STORE 2s, STORE 1s,
STORED”. This shows the new configuration is
stored in the ECM. After the configuration has
been stored, release the down arrow on the EST. 111
NOTE: If the down arrow is released during the store
countdown, the latest changes to configuration will
not be stored and the EST displays the previous
setting.

fig. 108 and wait for at least two seconds to save
the configuration into the non-volatile memory.
H4 - POWER SHUTTLE HARDWARE AND

SOFTWARE REVISION LEVELS
The H4 menu will display the revision level of the
software that is installed in the ECM. Use the
following procedure to display the revision levels:

Shuttle ECM connector, as described previously
in this manual.
26083
112
4. Press the button on the EST cable four times. H4
“H4” should appear on the instrument display.
5. The instrument will display the following
information in a 8 second interval. Each
parameter will be displayed for 2 seconds and
then revert back to “HH MENU”.
• Product Identity (MA)
• Software Revision Level: (Release [00.01])
• Hardware Level: (02.00)
• Manufacturer -- set valves (40) 113
NOTE: It is also a good practice to remove the instru-

ment panel in order to record the ECM part number,
module serial number and batch number.
6. When finished viewing, press the button on the

EST cable to enter another menu or turn the key
switch to the “OFF” (A) position fig. 112.
H5 -- CONTROL SWITCH DIAGNOSIS

The H5 menu is for checking the status of the circuits
and control switches that are connected to the ECM.
The H5 menu allows inspection of each one of these
circuits for continuity and to check for transitions on
ECM inputs, either switch or analogue type, for
diagnostic purposes.
With reference to analogue inputs, “transition”

means that a certain threshold was exceeded. The
letter “d” and a number are displayed each time a
transition occurs.
The number displayed indicates in which circuit the
transition occurred. If same circuit has two
subsequent transitions, the message displayed
changes to “d0” when the second transition takes
place.
This routine also checks for Forward, Neutral and
Reverse button inconsistencies. The neutral button
is not tested separately through its own “d” number,
as the operator cannot induce neutral safety switch
transition in any manner without inducing it at the
same time on the Forward or Reverse buttons.
If the shuttle lever is moved with the clutch pedal
released, the neutral safety switch will originate a
transition also on the 12VD line, which is used to test
the clutch pedal button.
Following interaction among these buttons:
• The Forward and Reverse buttons should be
tested with the clutch pedal applied (down).
• The clutch pedal button should be tested with the
shuttle lever engaged (not in neutral).
• If the keystart switch is turned to the engine-on
position with the shuttle lever in neutral and the
clutch pedal down (normal start-up procedure),
a button inconsistency error may occur (exclu-
sively in this diagnostic mode).
When a clutch pedal button transition occurs (pedal
is released), clutch pedal potentiometer calibration
values are checked and also button adjustment is
checked. Proceed as follows to guarantee adequate
checking.
NOTE: It is important to follow each of the
procedures as described, otherwise the display on
the diagnostic instrument will not show the correct
reading.
manual.
26083
114
NOTE: The clutch pedal should be up (released).
4. Place the Power Shuttle FNR lever, 1, in the F

forward position.
R
115
5. Press the button on the EST cable five times.
“H5” should appear on the EST display.
NOTE: d0 is always displayed first when H5 menu is
entered. To obtain the readings in the following H5
procedures the clutch pedal must be released and
the FNR lever must be in forward before entering H5
menu.
6. Observe the display on the EST while slowly

depressing the clutch pedal (at least two
seconds). The status of the potentiometer and
clutch switch is displayed. The display should
appear like this as the clutch pedal is being
depressed: d0 > d20 > d21 . d21 is displayed 116
when the clutch pedal “clicks” on the depressed
movement. If the clutch pedal is completely
released, the display will return to d20.
7. With the clutch pedal depressed, take the Power
Shuttle lever (1) from forward and return the lever
to neutral. The display will change from d21 > F
d22. Leave the tractor in neutral for a few R
seconds while observing the display. The display
should continue to show d22 ; this helps to verify
Error Code 59.
8. While the clutch pedal is depressed, place the
Power Shuttle lever into reverse. The display
should change from d22 to d23.
9. Slowly release the clutch pedal while observing
the display on the EST. The display should
change from reverse, d23, to the clutch switch,
d21, and then to the potentiometer, d20. This 117
verifies conditions related to Error Codes 11, 12,
47, and 48.
10. Place the gear selector lever (1) from neutral into
any gear. The EST display should show d33.
Removing the gear selector lever from a gear
should cause a second transition in that circuit
and the display should show d0.
NOTE: If the gear lever is in gear when H5 menu is
entered, or another control or switch is moved while
the gear lever is engaged the readings may be
opposite from step 10.
118
11. Place the range control lever (1) from the neutral
position to any range. The EST should display
1
d34.
NOTE: If any other control or switch is moved during
the shift, the “d” values may occur opposite as listed
above.
12. Stand up from the operator’s seat. This should

cause the EST display to change to d36. Sitting
down on the seat will cause a second transition
and the display to change back to d0.
119
13. For d29 (Transmission Oil Temperature Sensor),
d30 (Transmission Oil Pressure Sensor), and
d35 (Transmission Wheel Speed Sensor) to be
displayed on the EST, a transition must be
manually induced. This can be accomplished by
viewing the EST as the sensor is unplugged and
plugged back together.
SUMMARY OF SWITCH AND ANALOGUE INPUTS
d. code Switch and Analogue Inputs

d.0 When H5 menu is first entered; and when a second transition occurs on the same switch
d.20 Clutch pedal potentiometer
d.21 Clutch pedal switch (Power Shuttle FNR lever must be in forward or reverse)
d.22 Power Shuttle FNR lever in forward position (Clutch must be depressed)
d.23 Power Shuttle FNR lever in reverse position (Clutch must be depressed)
d.29 Hydraulic oil temperature circuit (unplugged versus plugged in)
d.30 Hydraulic oil pressure circuit (engine off versus engine started)
d.32 Fuse supply to CDU (tool will not work if fuse is removed)
d.33 Main (C1) gear shift lever (in gear versus neutral)
d.34 Range (G1) gear shift lever (in gear versus neutral)
d.35 Wheel speed detection circuit (tractor moving)
d.36 Operator’s seat presence switch (stand-up)
H5 - MENU QUICK REFERENCE TEST PROCEDURE
Action Description Display
1 Enter the H5 menu with the clutch pedal released and the Shuttle lever in Forward. d0
Slowly press the clutch pedal (time > 2 seconds). The potentiometer status d20
2
change should be read first, followed by the pushbutton. d21
With the clutch pedal lowered, move the Shuttle lever from the Forward position
3
to neutral, to check the Forward selection pushbutton. d22
Leave the Shuttle lever in the neutral position for at least 1 second to check for
4
disagreement between the Forward/Neutral/Reverse pushbuttons (E59). (d22)
Holding down the clutch pedal, move the Shuttle lever from the neutral position to
5
Reverse, to check the relative pushbutton. d23
Release the clutch pedal slowly (time > 2 seconds).

The pushbutton status change should be read first. d21
6 Clutch pedal calibration is checked (E10, E11 and E12).
Clutch pedal pushbutton adjustment is checked (E47 and E48).
Finally, the potentiometer status change is read. d20
13 Carry out a status change on the oil temperature sensor. d29
15 Carry out a status change on the gear lever pushbutton. d33
16 Carry out a status change on the Range lever pushbutton. d34
17 Carry out a status change on the pressure switch. d30
18 Carry out a status change on the operator seat switch. d36

H6 - CLUTCH (A) FILL TIME

MODIFICATION AND DISPLAY
this menu.
The H6 menu displays the (A) clutch filling time and
(Full open solenoid valve for maximum flow of oil to
fill up clutch pack. The solenoid coil will receive full
voltage.)
characteristics.
accordingly.
manual.
the key switch, 1, to the “ON” (B) position.
26083
120
4. Press the button on the EST cable six times. “H6” H6 1
5. After a few seconds, the EST will display a value
the display may read: A=80ms. The clutch filling
Shuttle control lever is in neutral and click the up
and down buttons (1) to change the clutch filling
time by multiples of 10 ms. the factory default 121
setting is 70 ms.
properly store the clutch filling time in the tractor
ECM.
new value.
neutral position.
EST while the tractor is running. The value is
10. Disconnect the EST from the tractor and test the
H7 - CLUTCH (B) FILL TIME

this menu.
The H7 menu displays the (B) clutch filling time and
characteristics.
accordingly.

and connect the EST to the Power Shuttle ECM,
26083
122
4. Press the button seven times. “H7” should
appear on the EST display.
5. After a few seconds, the EST will display a value
in milli-seconds (1/1000 second). For example, H7 1
the display may read: B=80ms. The clutch filling
Shuttle control lever is in neutral and click the up
and down buttons (1) to change the clutch filling
time by multiples of 10 ms. the factory default
setting is 70 ms.
properly store the clutch filling time into the tractor 123
ECM.

clutch fill time.
neutral position.
EST while the tractor is running. The value is
10. Disconnect the EST from the tractor and test the
H8 - ERASURE OF DATA STORED IN THE

NON-VOLATILE MEMORY (NVM)
The H8 menu allows erasure of the data stored in the
non-volatile memory. This is useful in the case of
replacing the ECM from another tractor. The ECM’s
data from the previous tractor can be erased for the
tractor the ECM is going into. Use the following
procedure to erase the data stored in the ECM’s
non-volatile memory.

26083
manual. 124
4. Press the “HMENU” button eight times. “H8” H8 1
5. After a few seconds “ERASE?” will be displayed
on the on the EST display.
6. To erase the non-volatile memory, click and hold
the down button (1) on the EST. The display will
show the following countdown sequence:
ERASE 5s, ERASE 4s, ERASE 3s, ERASE 2s,
ERASE 1s, ERASED. Releasing the down
button at anytime during this countdown will 125
abort the erasure of the non-volatile memory and
revert back to beginning of H8 mode.
7. Allow the ECM to self-configure by disconnecting
the EST and turning the key switch to the “OFF”
(A) position. Then turn the key switch to the “ON”
(B) position and leave the switch on for at least
5 seconds. The ECM will find the tractor
configuration.
store the tractor configuration in the ECM.
9. (A) and (B) clutches must be calibrated (H1).
Error code(s) should have been erased, HF, and
if necessary, clutch fill times should be adjusted,
H6 and H7. Also double check configuration in
H3 menu.
H9 -- VOLTMETER FUNCTIONS would display this is: 1 > 538. The values are not
The H9 menu allows inspection of individual circuits, actual voltage, amperage, or ohm measurements.
sensors, senders, switches, and solenoids showing The values are analogue/digital counts. When a
a channel number that corresponds to a particular channel measures frequency, the value is measured
circuit and a value which corresponds into a in “Hertz” (Hz).
measurement. An example of how the diagnostic tool
H9 Power Shuttle Channel Description

Channel/Description Circuit/Connector--Pin Information
1 Clutch Pedal Potentiometer Voltage CN2-20, Signal CN2-24, Ground CN2-29
2 Transmission Oil Temperature Sensor Signal CN2-25, Ground CN2-29
3 ECM 12V Key On Supply Voltage CN2-10 and CN2-34, Ground CN2-13
and CN2-14
4 ECM 12V Key START Supply Voltage CN1-15, Ground CN2-13 and CN2-14
5 Synchronizer Forward (Hi/Lo) Position Switch NOT USED TN S/D
6 Synchronizer Reverse (Shuttle) Position Switch NOT USED TN S/D
7 Clutch “B” PWM Solenoid Voltage CN1-11, Signal CN1-5
8 Clutch “A” PWM Solenoid Voltage CN1-10, Signal CN1-6
9 Power Shuttle FNR Lever Forward Switch Voltage CN2-20, Signal CN2-26
10 Power Shuttle FNR Lever Reverse Switch Voltage CN2-20, Signal CN2-27
11 Wheel Speed sensor Signal CN2-36, Ground CN2-29
12 Synchronizer Reverse (Shuttle) Solenoid NOT USED TN S/D
13 Synchronizer Forward (Hi/Lo) Solenoid NOT USED TN S/D
14 ECM 5V Input Sensor Supply Voltage CN2-20, Ground CN2-13 and CN2-14
15 ECM 12V Fuse Supply Voltage CN2-1, Ground CN2-13 and CN2-14
16 Main (C1) Gear Shift Lever Position Switch Voltage CN2-20, Signal CN2-4
17 Range (G1) Gear Shift Lever Position Switch Voltage CN2-20, Signal CN2-28
18 Creeper Engagement Switch NOT USED TN S/D
19 Wheel Speed Sensor Frequency Signal CN2-36, Ground CN2-29
20 Engine Speed Sensor Frequency (Alternator + W) Signal CN2-15
Use the following procedures to access the voltmeter
functions:

(A) and connect the EST to the Power Shuttle
26083
126
the button on the EST cable.
4. Press the “HMENU” button nine times. “H9” H9 1
5. After a few seconds the first channel will be
indicated on the EST display.
6. The channels, up to 24, may be displayed by
clicking the up and down buttons (1) on the EST.
Listed below are the channels and their values.
IMPORTANT: Transmission operation is enabled in

this menu. 127
NOTE: The status of the tractor (with key switch in

the “OFF”, “ON” (engine off), or “START” (engine
running) position) is listed behind the channel title in
parenthesis.
NOTE: Sometimes the clutch pedal position is not

stated. This is because the Power Shuttle FNR lever
may be stated in a certain position. The clutch pedal
depressed is the same as the Power Shuttle FNR
lever in neutral.
1. Clutch Pedal Potentiometer, (ON)
• released, (pedal up), 542 (maximum)
• depressed, (pedal down), 38 (minimum)
I--542
2. Transmission Oil Temperature Sensor, (ON)
NOTE: “HC Menu” will display transmission oil
temperature in degrees Celsius.
• At 0_ C (32_ F) 463 + 69
• At 30_ C (86_ F) 225 + 33
• At 60_ C (140_ F) 136 + 20
• At 90_ C (194_ F) 53 + 8
128
3. ECM +12 VF Keyed Battery Supply Voltage,
(ON)
• Battery charge at 9V (low charge,

prolonged cranking) 428
4. ECM +12VD Keyed Battery Voltage, (START)
a) Clutch pedal released and Power Shuttle

FNR lever in the forward or reverse position.

b) Power Shuttle FNR lever in the neutral posi-

tion or clutch pedal depressed 0-95
5. Synchronizer Forward (Hi/Lo) Position

6. Synchronizer Reverse (Shuttle) Position

WARNING
The tractor will move when checking channels 7
and 8. Be sure the area around the tractor is clear
of people and objects before performing the
following test, otherwise bodily injury, death or
damage may occur.
NOTE: For channels 7 and 8, reading will vary

depending upon clutch calibration values.
NOTE: Allow at least six seconds for the EST to

indicate an actual reading as solenoids ramp up to
proper amperage. Ramp up time is dependent upon
operating temperature of hydraulic fluid.
7. Clutch (B) PWM Solenoid Driver Versus 15. 12V Fuse Sensed Voltage, (ON)
• Release the parking brake • Battery charge at 12V (normal) 595
• Place range control lever into “A” • Battery charge at 16 V (overcharge) 762
• Place the Power Shuttle FNR lever into 16. Main (C1) Gear Shift Lever Position Switch,
reverse for all transmissions (ON)
• Display will read (200 min-400 max) 350 • In neutral (516 min – 900 max) 680
• In gear (21 min – 514 max) 340
8. Clutch (A) PWM Solenoid Driver Versus
17. Range (G1) Gear Shift Lever Position Switch,
(ON)
• Release the parking brake
• In neutral (516 min – 900 max) 680
• Place range control lever into “A”
• In gear (21 min – 514 max) 340
• Place the Power Shuttle FNR lever into 18. Creeper Control Lever (NOT USED TN S/D)
forward position for all transmissions
19. Wheel Speed Sensor Frequency, (ON)
• Display will read (200 min-400 max) 350
WARNING
9. Power Shuttle FNR Lever Forward Switch, The tractor will move when checking channel 19.
(ON) Be sure the area around the tractor is clear of
• Neutral (21 min – 323 max) 170 people and objects before performing the
• Forward (326 min – 900 max) 480 following test, otherwise bodily injury, death, or
damage may occur.
10. Power Shuttle FNR Lever Reverse Switch,
(ON) NOTE: The reading displayed when the Power
Shuttle FNR lever is placed in the forward position is
• Neutral (21 min – 323 max) 170 dependent upon tires and the differential gear ratio
• Forward (326 min – 900 max) 480 the tractor is equipped with.
11. Wheel Speed Sensor Voltage, (START) • Place range control lever into the highest
NOTE: The tractor will not be moved during this test. range
• Place the gear selector lever into first 0-60
• Place range control lever into highest range
• Place gear selector lever into first “forward” position 0-3000
forward position. 20. Engine Speed Sensor Frequency
• Display with wheels not moving (Alternator+W), (START)
(536 min – 831 max) 600 • 2500 RPM for software prior to 4.0 515
While Driving (tractor moving) • 2000 RPM for software 4.0 to 5.0 33
• 4 kph (2.4 mph) 3
• 8 kph (4.9 mph) 6
• 20 kph(12.4 mph) 16 NOTE: There is no channel set aside in “H9” to check
12. Synchronizer in Reverse (Shuttle) Solenoid, the dump solenoid, driver versus status sensed,
(NOT USED TN S/D) circuit CN1-18 and CN1-2. A true test to this solenoid
is with an actual voltmeter with the red lead (+) to
13. Synchronizer in Forward (Hi/Lo) Position CN1-18 and the black lead (-) to ground.
Solenoid, (NOT USED TN S/D)
14. 5V input Sensor Supply Voltage, (ON) • With FNR lever in neutral or with clutch pedal
depressed -- solenoid energized 12V
• (521 min. – 849 max.) 670
• With FNR lever NOT in neutral and with
clutch pedal released -- solenoid not
energized 0V
HA-CLUTCH PEDAL POTENTIOMETER

AND STATUS SWITCH
The HA menu displays input values of both the clutch
pedal potentiometer and status switch. The clutch
pedal potentiometer position is expressed as a
percentage of the entire travel range while the clutch
pedal switch status is indicated by ON and OFF
during the travel of the pedal.
The transmission operation is enabled in this menu.

It is possible to drive the tractor and at the same time
record the clutch pedal potentiometer travel and
clutch pedal switch status from the EST display. This
menu can also be viewed with the tractor stationary.
(A) and connect the EST to the Power Shuttle
26083
129
the button on the EST cable.
4. Press the button until the “HA” appears on the HA
EST display.
130
5. Place the Power Shuttle FNR lever (1) into the
forward position.
F
NOTE: To run stationary test (if engine is running), R
disengage the range lever and engage the parking
brake.
131
6. When the clutch pedal is released the
percentage should be 100% or 99 % ON.
When the clutch is fully depressed, the

percentage should be 0% or 1% OFF. 100% ON

5%.

should change from “OFF” to “ON” before 15%.
“OFF” means the clutch pedal switch is open so

the dump solenoid is de-energized, oil is dumped
to sump from the clutch packs. 132
“ON” means the clutch pedal switch is closed so

the dump solenoid is energized, oil is supplied to
the clutch packs.
0% OFF
133
7. Turn the key switch to the “OFF” position to
disconnect the EST or press the button on the
EST cable to access another menu.
CLUTCH PEDAL POTENTIOMETER

REPLACEMENT AND CLUTCH PEDAL
SWITCH ADJUSTMENT
If the clutch pedal potentiometer has been replaced,
the previous data for the clutch must be erased using
the H8 menu. Once the data has been erased, use
the following procedure to calibrate the new
potentiometer and adjust the switch.
1. Turn the key switch, 1, to the “ON” (B) position to
allow the ECM to perform the self configuration
(first start-up). Turn the key switch to the “OFF”
(A) position to save the configuration.
2. Turn the key switch back to the “ON” (B) position.
After a few moments the service transmission
light will begin to flash the error code for
“non-calibrated clutches”. Ignore this error for
now.
3. To calibrate the clutch pedal potentiometer limits,
fully depress the clutch pedal. Hold the clutch
pedal for a few seconds at the bottom travel limit. 1
4. Release the clutch pedal and allow the clutch to
remain at the top travel limit for a few seconds.
Turn the key switch to the “OFF” (A) position to 134
save the potentiometer limit calibration.
5. The clutch pedal potentiometer limit has been
calibrated. Now the clutch packs will need
calibrated. as described previously in the H1
menu description. The clutch pedal switch will
also need adjustment (see step 6--8).
NOTE: The clutch pedal switch is located under the
left lower dash cover on the inside of the clutch pedal 1
pivot.
6. To adjust the clutch pedal switch, 1, access the
HA menu using the EST cable button.
When the clutch pedal is released (raised), the
percentage should be 100% or 99% ON.
When the clutch is fully depressed, the 2
percentage should be O% or 1% OFF.
5%.
50025110
should change from “OFF” to “ON” before 15%. 135
7. If the readings are not as specified, adjust the
clutch pedal switch by loosening the switch
mounting screws, 2, and moving the switch as
needed. The EST display should change from
“ON” to “OFF” before 5% as the clutch is being
depressed and the display should change from
“OFF” to “ON” before 15% as the clutch pedal is
being released.
8. Make sure the mounting screws are tightened
once the clutch pedal switch is adjusted properly.
HC -- TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE

SENDER
NOTE: The transmission can be operated in this
mode.
The HC menu displays the temperature transmission
oil in degrees Celsius. To display the transmission oil
temperature, use the following procedure:
manual.

26083
136
4. Press the button on the EST cable until “HC” HC
appears on the EST display.
5. After a few seconds the display on the EST will
indicate the temperature of the transmission oil,
in degrees Celsius. An example is: T = 21° C. The
temperature range is --40°C to +120°C (--40°F) to
+248°F).
EST cable to access another menu. 137
HD--HI/LO SYNCHRONIZER OPERATION

(NOT USED TN S/D)
NOTE: The transmission should be disabled, but
ensure the range lever is in neutral and the parking
brake is engaged.
The HD menu is used to inspect the operation of the
Forward/Reverse (Hi/Lo--Shuttle) Synchronizer and
will indicate the status of the synchronizer on the EST
display. Use the following procedure to inspect the
F/R synchronizer operation.
switch (1) to the “START” position (C) and start
the engine.
26083
138
diagnostics, “HMENU” will appear on the EST
display. Release the button on the EST cable.
4. Press the button on the EST cable until “HD” HD
5. After a few seconds the EST display will indicate
the status of the synchronizers position.
An example is: Pos = Hi/Lo, means the
synchronizer in the rear position ready for
forward travel, forward (Hi/Lo) position sensor
pressed, reverse (Shuttle) position sensor not
pressed.
If the display indicates Pos = SHTL (or SHUT),
the synchronizer is in the front position for 139
reverse travel, reverse (Shuttle) position sensor
pressed, forward (Hi/Lo) position sensor not
pressed.
If the display indicates Pos = UNKN, the ECM is
unsure of what position the synchronizer is in,
because the synchronizer did not engage
properly or is malfunctioning in some way,
normally Error Code 72.
NOTE: In case of failure of one or both synchronizer
position sensor, the message Pos = UNKN could be
displayed even if the synchronizer moves and
engages correctly. In this case, however, the Error
Code selected for the particular position sensor
should appear flashing on the instrument panel.
In normal conditions, the F/R synchronizer should

never be in the mechanical neutral position. If not
following a mechanical or electro-hydraulic problem,
the F/R synchronizer is always meshed with forward
or reverse gear even if the Power Shuttle FNR lever
or clutch pedal are in neutral. Mechanically there is
not a neutral synchronizer position. The Power
Shuttle FNR lever or clutch pedal are causing the
clutch packs to neutralize.
In normal conditions at engine start-up and during

ECM self-diagnosis, the F/R synchronizer is moved
automatically by the ECM to the opposite position
from tractor shut down. For example, if the
synchronizer is in the forward position, then it would
be moved to the reverse position during
self-diagnosis.
6. Increase the engine to 1200 – 1400 RPM and

click the up arrow and down arrow buttons on the
EST to change the position of the synchronizer.
The EST display will indicate the position of the
synchronizer.
7. Change the synchronizer position several times

to be sure the synchronizer is functioning
properly.

HE -- GEAR CHANGE ADJUSTMENTS

The HE menu displays the speed threshold setting.
The ECM uses two shifting tables; one that is used
when the transmission is shifted above the speed
threshold setting; the other is used when the tractor
is shifted below the speed threshold setting. There
are three settings, as listed below.
• Low -- approximately 3 mph
• Med -- approximately 4 mph
• High -- approximately 8 mph
IMPORTANT: This value should not be changed as

it was set at the factory.

manual.
26083
140
4. Press the button on the EST cable until “HE” HE 1
5. The display on the EST will indicate one of the
following settings:
• High WST=HI (approx. 8 mph)
• Medium WST=MID (approx. 4 mph)
• Low WST=LOW (approx. 3 mph)
6. To change the engagement speed, click the up
and down buttons (1) on the EST until the desired 141
speed is indicated on the EST display.
store the setting in the ECM.
HF-STORED ERROR CODES

When a fault is detected it is stored in the ECM
non-volatile memory and signalled by the indicator
lamp, (1). The HF menu allows access to Error
Codes that are stored in the non-volatile memory of
the ECM. Stored errors can be read and erased by
using the EST. As soon as a fault condition is
detected by the ECM, the associated Error Code is
saved into the HF memory. Use the following
procedure to access the HF menu:
26304
142
switch (1) to the “ON” position (B).
26083
143
diagnostics, “HMENU” will appear on the EST
display. Release the button on the EST cable.
4. Press the button on the EST cable until “HF” HF
5. The EST display will indicate the last stored Error
Code. An example would be: E (9) =11.
6. The following key is used for Error Codes:
• E Error
• (9) Progressive storage channel of the
Error
• 11 Error Code number 144
7. The following will be displayed when there are no
Error Codes stored: E (1)=00 There is a
maximum of ten stored Error Codes. E(10) will be
the most recent Error Code.
E (1) = 00 1
NOTE: Do not hold the buttons that change the Error
Code displayed, otherwise the Error Codes may be
erased.
8. If multiple Error Codes are present, use the up

arrow and down arrow buttons (1) to view Error
Codes from other channels. Press them
momentarily when changing the Error Code
viewed.
9. Stored errors can be erased from the non-volatile 145
memory by pressing and holding the down arrow
button on the CDU until the following sequence
is displayed: ERASE 5s, ERASE4s, ERASE 3s,
ERASE 2s, ERASE 1s, ERASED.
NOTE: If the down arrow is released or the button on
the EST cable is pushed during the erasure
countdown, the sequence is cancelled and the Error
Codes are not erased.
10. Release the down button once the errors have

been erased and turn the key switch to the “OFF”
position (A) for at least two seconds.
TROUBLESHOOTING FAULT CODES
WARNING other requested calibration operations.
Notes to help the operator make diagnosis and 6. There are two types of faults:
problem--solving easier.
FAULT RESET: the fault will no longer be
displayed if the cause has been eliminated or
1. The measurements taken to read: repaired, even without switching off the tractor,
voltage; but the relative code will be saved in the
resistance; non--volatile memory (see HF MENU);
must be carried out with a digital tester.
solved. To remove the fault display, stop then
restart the tractor. The fault will be saved (as a
NOTE: the resistance values shown are valid for a “no fault reset”) in the non volatile memory (see
temperature of 20 o C (68 oF) (ambient temperature). HF MENU.
With higher or lower tractor temperatures, the 7. The connection references indicate: the wire
relative resistance values shown in the manual dimension and colour, and the connection pin
should vary accordingly. number.
Example: 0.5 AB (2)
0.5 = wire dimension;
2. The “short to ground” message refers to a AB = wire colour;
resistance value of less than 5 ohm (Ω). (2) = connection pin number.
of service operations, check that the specific Electric Wire Color Coding
connections (ECU, sensors, switches, etc.) are A -- Light Blue M -- Brown
correctly connected. B -- White N -- Black
A faulty connection could be the cause of C -- Orange R -- Red
incorrect tractor operation. G -- Yellow S -- Pink
4. To facilitate problem solving, consult the ECU H -- Grey V -- Green
electrical wiring diagram, shown on page 306. L -- Blue Z -- Purple
5. If the ECU needs to be replaced, the following 8. CN1--4 or CN2--25 on the ECU connections (85)
operations must be carried out: refer to the smaller connection (18 pin) or the
the H8 MENU function (cancellation of the bigger connection (36 pin) and the relative pin
resident non--volatile memory); also check that number.
the self--configuration operation at the first 9. The faults are listed in progressive order starting
start--up (after ECU replacement) is correct; on page 104.
calibration of the hydraulic clutches MENU H1
page 70.
ECU LOCATION
The ECU (1) controls the POWER SHUTTLE.
FAULT CODES
NOTE: In this manual, the Power Shuttle ECM error codes are divided into two main pages, which face each
other. One page describes the error code and the conditions, causes, test, effects, recovery, and other pertinent
information of the error code, while the second page displays a flow chart for troubleshooting. Becoming familiar
with both the error code description page and the flow chart page, as well as using them together when
performing diagnostic testing on the Power Shuttle, will improve repair capability, and reduce the time spent on
troubleshooting. In addition, a third page identifies the connectors involved with that error code.
FAULT CODE 11 – CLUTCH PEDAL POTENTIOMETER (1) SIGNAL VOLTAGE SHORT TO

GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT.
NOTE: On all Transmissions the Status Lamp (Gear with a Slash) will flash in a alternating manner.
Conditions:
1. While tractor is being driven, signal voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 24 drops below 0.053 volts.
2. While tractor is in neutral, signal voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 24 drops below 0.053 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted to ground or open between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and Clutch Pedal
Potentiometer, or between potentiometer terminals, or between Clutch Pedal Potentiometer and ECM
connector 2, pin 24. Or common 5 volt sensor supply wire from ECM connector 2, pin 20 is shorted to ground
or open between potentiometer and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty Clutch Pedal Potentiometer (1).
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H9, Channel 1 value is below 30 counts.
• H5, doesn’t display transition between d0 and d20.
• HA, doesn’t read the correct percentage.
Effects of Condition 1:
• The Transmission Status Lamp is flashing.
• The clutch pedal doesn’t work.
• Transmission is disabled, but can be re-enabled by cycling the Power Shuttle FNR Lever.
• An intermittent error is the same as the operator abruptly popping the Clutch Pedal.
• Transmission is limited; inching the tractor with the Clutch Pedal is not possible. Tractor can only be moved
using the Power Shuttle FNR Lever. Depressing the Clutch Pedal will stop the tractor and the error will revert
back to the first Condition.
Recovery:
• Cause must be resolved and error must be cleared using the CDU or EST, HF Menu.
NOTE: This error may also cause Error Code 37 and Error Code 48 to activate.
NOTE: The proper operation of the Power Shuttle FNR Lever and/or Clutch Pedal Switch guarantee activation
of the Dump Solenoid in order to safely control the transmission.
FAULT CODE 11
Replace the potentiometer.
Turn the starter key to the OFF position. Disconnect the potentiometer connection
Remove the left--hand panel under the (123).
dashboard. NO Using a digital tester, is the value between NO
Is connection (123) or the clutch pedal po- wires (V) and (N) (potentiometer side with
tentiometer wiring disconnected? the pedal released) ∼ 3.8 kΩ?
YES YES
Connect the connection and/or wiring. Is wire (S) (wiring side) in short to ground? NO
YES
Disconnect the control panel and the con-

nections (137) on the ECU.
Check the wiring between pin CN2--24 (S)
on connections (137) and connection (123)
on the potentiometer.
Eliminate the cause of the short to ground.
Is there electrical continuity between pin

CN2--24 (S) on connections (137) and con- NO
nection (123) (S) on the potentiometer?
YES
Replace the ECU.
Check the wiring and eliminate the cause of

the open circuit.
50025110
FAULT CODE 11
ECM PIN REFERENCE
20007089 CONNECTOR 1 (137A) CONNECTOR 2 (137B)
146
FAULT CODE 11
Tractor Side of Connector Potentiometer Side of Connector

123
0.5 AB (2) 1 C (2)

0.5 S (1) 1 V (1)
0.5 VN (3) 1 N (3)
1 ZB (18)
1 SN (17)
1 GN (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5)
1 GR (4) Empty (11) 137A
1 SG (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)
FAULT CODE 12 – CLUTCH PEDAL POTENTIOMETER (1) SIGNAL VOLTAGE SHORT

TO 5 OR 12 VOLTS.
Conditions:
1. While tractor is being driven, voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 24 goes above 0.96 volts.
2. While tractor is in neutral, voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 24 goes above 0.96 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted to 12 volts between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and Clutch Pedal Potentiometer,
or short to 5v across potentiometer terminals, or short to 5 or 12v between Clutch Pedal Potentiometer and
ECM connector 2, pin 24. Or common 5 volt sensor supply wire from ECM connector 2, pin 20 is shorted to
12v between potentiometer and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty Clutch Pedal Potentiometer (1).
• Faulty ECM
Tests:
• H9, Channel 1 value is above 545 counts.
• HA, doesn’t read the correct percentage.
• The clutch pedal doesn’t work.
• Transmission is disabled, but can be re-enabled by cycling the Power Shuttle FNR Lever.
• An intermittent error is the same as the operator abruptly popping the Clutch Pedal.
• Transmission is limited; inching the tractor with the Clutch Pedal is not possible. Tractor can only be moved
using the Power Shuttle FNR Lever. Depressing the Clutch Pedal will stop the tractor and the error will revert
back to the first Condition.
Recovery:
NOTE: This error may also cause Error Code 38 and Error Code 47 to activate.
NOTE: The proper operation of the Power Shuttle FNR Lever and/or Clutch Pedal Switch guarantee activation
of the Dump Solenoid in order to safely control the transmission.
FAULT CODE 12
Turn the starter key to the OFF position. Disconnect connection (123) on the poten-
Remove the left--hand panel under the tiometer.
dashboard. NO Using a digital tester, is the value between NO
Is connection (123), or the clutch pedal wires (V) and (N) (potentiometer side with
potentiometer wiring, disconnected? the pedal released) ∼ 3.8 kΩ?
YES YES
Connect the connection and/or wiring. Disconnect the control panel and the con-
Is there electrical continuity between pin NO
CN2--29 (VN) on connections (137) and
connection (123) (VN) on the potentiome-
ter?
YES
Turn the starter key to the OFF position.

Is there a reading of +5V or +12V between NO
CN2--24 (S) on connections (137) and
ground?
YES

the short to +5V or +12V.
Replace the ECU.

the open circuit.
50025110
FAULT CODE 12
ECM PIN REFERENCE
147
FAULT CODE 12
Tractor Side of Connector Potentiometer Side of Connector

123
0.5 AB (2) 1 C (2)

0.5 S (1) 1 V (1)
0.5 VN (3) 1 N (3)
1 ZB (18)
1 SN (17)
1 GN (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5)
1 GR (4) Empty (11) 137A
1 SG (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)
FAULT CODE 13 – HI AND LO BUTTONS PRESSED SIMULTANEOUSLY.
(NOT USED TN S/D)

NOTE: Error Code is not triggered during clutch pack calibration, H1. Error is only shown on 32x16 transmissions.
NOTE: On a 32x16 the Transmission Status Lamp is the Hi(Rabbit) and Lo(Turtle) lamps. They will flash in a
alternating manner.
Conditions:
• While driving or stationary, both Hi and Lo buttons pressed simultaneously longer than 0.5 seconds.
Causes:
• Operator pressed Hi and Lo Buttons at the same time.
• Hi or Lo Button Switch is stuck closed while the other button is pressed, (broken switch).
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted to 12 volts between Hi or Lo Button Switch and ECM connector 2, pin 3 or
22, when the opposition button is pressed.
Tests:
• H5, doesn’t display transition between d0 and d24 for Lo(Turtle) or d25 for Hi(Rabbit).
Effects:
• Speed shift will not take place.
• Transmission operates normally but not when Hi or Lo speed shift is conducted.
Recovery:
• Error will self-clear when Condition or Causes stop, but will be stored in HF.
• Cause must be resolved and cleared using the CDU or EST, HF Menu.
FAULT CODE 13

Disassemble the HI and LO pushbuttons Remove the rear right--hand wheel.
knob. Disconnect the HI and LO pushbuttons con-
NO NO
Using a digital tester check the operation nection (87).
of the two pushbuttons. Is there a short circuit between the wires?
Is one of the two buttons in short? YES
YES
Replace the faulty pushbutton. the short circuit.
Replace the ECU.
87
0,5 AV (1)
1 C (2)
0,5 MB (3)
FAULT CODE 14 – MAIN (C1) GEAR SHIFT SWITCH SIGNAL VOLTAGE SHORT TO 5 OR 12
VOLTS.
Conditions:
2. While tractor is in neutral, voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 4 goes above 4.2 volts. Clutch Packs are at
maximum pressure but no movement seen while Main (C1) Gear Shift Switch reports to be engaged, (Wheel
Speed Sensor signal not reliable or tractor is not moving).
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted to 12 volts between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and Main (C1) Gear Shift Switch,
or short to 5v volts between switch terminals, or short 5 or 12v between switch and ECM connector 2, pin
4. Or common 5 volt sensor supply wire from ECM connector 2, pin 20 is shorted to 12v between switch and
any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty Main (C1) Gear Shift Switch.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• Main (C1) Gear Shift Switch neutral position can not be detected.
• Transmission is disabled, but can be re-enabled by cycling the Power Shuttle FNR Lever or Clutch Pedal,
and Main (C1) Gear Shift Lever.
• Transmission is modified; Main (C1) Gear Shift Switch neutral position can not be detected, so ECM assumes
position is in gear. If Wheel Speed Sensor signal is not reliable, (Error Code 49), then transmission is critically
disabled, (no increase in wheel rotation when the Clutch Pack is at maximum pressure causes the Dump
Solenoid to be energized which returns oil to sump). If Wheel Speed Sensor signal is reliable, (no error), then
transmission attempt to move is conducted, (when the Clutch Pedal released and Power Shuttle FNR Lever
engaged into a direction).
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 14
(Gear position sensor X) If in short circuit, replace the pushbutton.
Turn the starter key to the OFF position. Disconnect connection (71) on pushbutton
Remove the rear right--hand wheel and (C1).
check connection (71) on pushbutton NO Position the gear lever in neutral and, using NO
(C1). a digital tester, measure the electrical resist-
Is there a short circuit between the wires? ance on the pushbutton.
Is the resistance ∼ 550 Ω?
YES
YES
Check the wiring and eliminate the cause
of the short circuit. Are wires (GL) and (AB) (wiring side) in
NO
short?
YES

the short circuit between connection (71) on
the pushbutton and pins (C6) and (A7) on
the connection (177).
Does the fault persist?
YES

Check the wiring between pins CN2--4 (GL)
and CN2--20 (AB) on connections (137) with
pins (A7) (GL) and (C6) (AB) on connection
(177).
Eliminate the cause of the short circuit.
Replace the ECU.
71
1 AB (1)
1 GL (2)
FAULT CODE 14
ECM PIN REFERENCE
148
FAULT CODE 14
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)
Empty (C5) Empty (C4)

1 AB (C6) Empty (C3)
1 AR (C8) Empty (C1)
177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 AN (B7) Empty (B2)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 15 – MAIN (C1) GEAR SHIFT SWITCH SIGNAL VOLTAGE SHORT TO GROUND
OR OPEN CIRCUIT.
Conditions:
1. While tractor is being driven, voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 4 goes below 0.7 volts.
2. While tractor is in neutral, voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 4 goes below 0.7 volts. Clutch Packs are at
maximum pressure but no movement seen while Main (C1) Gear Shift Switch reports to be engaged, (Wheel
Speed Sensor signal not reliable or tractor is not moving).
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is short to ground or open between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and Main (C1) Gear Shift
Switch, or across switch terminals, or between Main (C1) Gear Shift Switch and ECM connector 2, pin 4. Or
common 5 volt supply wire from ECM connector 2, pin 20 is shorted to ground or open between Main (C1)
Gear Shift Switch and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty Main (C1) Gear Shift Switch.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H5, doesn’t display a transition between d0 and d33.
• Main (C1) Gear Shift Switch neutral position can not be detected.
and Main (C1) Gear Shift Lever.
• Transmission is modified; Main (C1) Gear Shift Switch neutral position can not be detected, so ECM assumes
position is in gear. If Wheel Speed Sensor signal is not reliable, (Error Code 49), then transmission is critically
disabled, (no increase in wheel rotation when the Clutch Pack is at maximum pressure causes the Dump
Solenoid to be energized which returns oil to sump). If Wheel Speed Sensor signal is reliable, (no error), then
transmission attempt to move is conducted, (when the Clutch Pedal released and Power Shuttle FNR Lever
engaged into a direction).
Recovery:
• Cause must be resolved and error must be cleared using the CDU or EST, HF Menu 1.
FAULT CODE 15
(Range position sensor X)

Remove the rear right--hand wheel and
check connection (71) on pushbutton NO Connect the wires.
(C1).
Are the relative wires connected?
YES
Position the gear lever in neutral.

Using a digital tester, measure the electri- NO Replace the pushbutton if interrupted.
cal resistance on the pushbutton.
YES Disconnect the control panel and the con-
Wire (GL) (wiring side) in short to ground? NO Is there electrical continuity between pin NO
YES CN2--4 (GL) on connections (137), pin (A7)
(GL) on connection (177) and connection
Check the wiring and eliminate the cause (71) on the pushbutton?
of the short to ground.
YES

CN2--20 (AB) on connections (137), pin NO
(C6) (AB) on connection (177) and connec-
tion (71) on the pushbutton?
YES
Replace the ECU.

the open circuit.
71
1 AB (1)
1 GL (2)
FAULT CODE 15
ECM PIN REFERENCE
149
FAULT CODE 15
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 16 – RANGE (G1) GEAR SHIFT SWITCH SIGNAL VOLTAGE SHORT TO 5 OR 12
VOLTS.
Conditions:
2. While tractor is in neutral, voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 28 goes above 4.2 volts. Clutch Packs are at
maximum pressure but no movement seen while Range (G1) Gear Shift Switch reports to be engaged,
(Wheel Speed Sensor signal not reliable or tractor is not moving).
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted to 12 volts between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and Range (G1) Gear Shift
Switch, or short to 5 volts between switch terminals, or short 5 or 12v between switch and ECM connector
2, pin 28. Or common 5 volt sensor supply wire from ECM connector 2, pin 20 is shorted to 12v between
switch and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty Range (G1) Gear Shift Switch.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• Range (G1) Gear Shift neutral position can not be detected.
and Range (G1) Gear Shift Lever.
• Transmission is modified; Range (G1) Gear Shift Switch neutral position can not be detected, so ECM
assumes position is in gear. If Wheel Speed Sensor signal is not reliable, (Error Code 49), then transmission
is critically disabled, (no increase in wheel rotation when the Clutch Pack is at maximum pressure causes
the Dump Solenoid to be energized which returns oil to sump). If Wheel Speed Sensor signal is reliable, (no
error), then transmission attempt to move is conducted, (when the Clutch Pedal released and Power Shuttle
FNR Lever engaged into a direction).
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 16
(Range position sensor Y) If in short circuit, replace the pushbutton.
Turn the starter key to the OFF position. Disconnect connection (70) on pushbutton
Remove the rear right--hand wheel and (G1).
check connection (70) on pushbutton NO Position the range lever in neutral and, us-
NO
(G1). ing a digital tester, measure the electrical re-
Is there a short circuit between the wires? sistance on the pushbutton.
YES Is the resistance ∼ 550 Ω?
YES
of the short circuit. Use a digital tester.
Are wires (BG) and (AB) (wiring side) in NO
short?
YES

the short circuit between connection (70) on
pushbutton and pins (B5) (GB) and (C6)
(AB) on connection (177).
YES

Check the wiring between pins CN2--28
(BG) and CN2--20 (AB) on connections
(137) with pins (B5) (GB) and (C6) (AB) on
connection (177).
Replace the ECU.
70
1 BG (2)
1 AB (1)
FAULT CODE 16
ECM PIN REFERENCE
150
FAULT CODE 16
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 17 - RANGE (G1) GEAR SHIFT SWITCH SIGNAL VOLTAGE SHORT TO
Conditions:
1. While tractor is being driven, voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 28 goes below 0.7 volts.
2. While tractor is in neutral, voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 28 goes below 0.7 volts. Clutch Packs are at
maximum pressure but no movement seen while Range (G1) Gear Shift Switch reports to be engaged,
(Wheel Speed Sensor signal not reliable or tractor is not moving).
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is short to ground or open between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and Range (G1) Gear Shift
Switch, or across switch terminals, or between Range (G1) Gear Shift Switch and ECM connector 2, pin 28.
Or common 5 volt supply wire from ECM connector 2, pin 20 is shorted to ground or open between Range
(G1) Gear Shift Switch and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty Range (G1) Gear Shift Switch.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• Range (G1) Gear Shift neutral position can not be detected.
and Range (G1) Gear Shift Lever.
• Transmission is modified; Range (G1) Gear Shift Switch neutral position can not be detected, so ECM
assumes position is in gear. If Wheel Speed Sensor signal is not reliable, (Error Code 49), then transmission
is critically disabled, (no increase in wheel rotation when the Clutch Pack is at maximum pressure causes
the Dump Solenoid to be energized which returns oil to sump). If Wheel Speed Sensor signal is reliable, (no
error), then transmission attempt to move is conducted, (when the Clutch Pedal released and Power Shuttle
FNR Lever engaged into a direction).
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 17
(Range position sensor Y)

Remove the rear right--hand wheel and
check connection (70) on pushbutton NO Connect the wires.
(G1).
Are the relative wires connected?
YES
Position the gear lever in neutral.

YES Disconnect the control panel and the con-
Is wire (BG) (wiring side) in short to Is there electrical continuity between pin
NO NO
ground? CN2--28 (BG) on connections (137), pin
YES (B5) (BG) on connection (177) and connec-
YES
YES
Replace the ECU.

the open circuit.
70
1 BG (2)
1 AB (1)
FAULT CODE 17
ECM PIN REFERENCE
151
FAULT CODE 17
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 18 -- VOLTAGE FROM CREEPER (N) SWITCH (CREEPER LEVER) TOO HIGH.
(NOT USED TN S/D)
Conditions/Detection:
• Voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 21 goes above 4.2 volts.
Causes:
• Short circuit to +5 or +12 volts between creeper switch and ECM connector 2, pin 21.
• Short circuit at switch terminals or switch failure.
• ECM failure
Effects:
• Creeper lever neutral position cannot be detected
• The ECM will assume the creeper is engaged and the tractor will attempt to move when the shuttle lever is
in the forward or reverse position and the clutch pedal is raised.
Recovery:
• Cause must be resolved and the error must be cleared using the CDU or EST, HF Menu.
FAULT CODE 18
If in short circuit, replace the pushbutton.
Disconnect connection (227) on the push-

button.
Remove the rear left--hand wheel and the
Move the creeper lever to the engaged posi-
solenoid valves unit guard. NO NO
tion.
Check connection (227) on the creeper
Using a digital tester, measure the electrical
pushbutton.
resistance on the pushbutton.
Is there a short circuit between the wires?
YES
YES
of the short circuit. Are wires (HG) and (AB) (wiring side) in
NO
short circuit?
YES
Check the wiring between connection (227)

on pushbutton and pins (C7) (HG) and (C6)
(AB) on connection (177).
YES

Check the wiring between pins CN2--21
(HG) and CN2--20 (AB) on connections
(137) with pins (C7) (HG) and (C6) (AB) on
connection (177).
Replace the ECU.
227
0,5 AB
0,5 HG
FAULT CODE 18
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
PAGE LEFT BLANK

FAULT CODE 19 -- VOLTAGE FROM CREEPER (N) SWITCH (CREEPER LEVER) TOO LOW.
(NOT USED TN S/D)
Conditions/Detection:
• Voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 21, goes below 0.7 volts.
Causes:
• Open circuit or short to ground between creeper switch and ECM connector 2, pin 21.
• Open circuit or short to ground between switch terminals or faulty switch.
• ECM failure
Effects:
• Creeper lever neutral position cannot be detected
• The ECM will assume the tractor is in gear and the tractor will attempt to move when the shuttle lever is in
the forward or reverse position and the clutch pedal is raised.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 19
Replace the pushbutton if interrupted.
Disconnect connection (227) on the creeper

Turn the starter key to the OFF position. pushbutton.
Remove the rear left--hand wheel and the Move the creeper lever to the engaged posi-
solenoid valves unit guard. NO tion. NO
Check connection (227) and the creeper Using a digital tester, measure the electrical
pushbutton wiring. resistance on the pushbutton.
Is the wiring disconnected? Is the resistance ∼ 550 Ω?
YES
YES
Connect the wiring.
Is wire (HG) (wiring side) in short to ground? NO
YES

the short to ground.

CN2--21 (HG) on connections (137), pin NO
(C7) (HG) on connection (177) and connec-
YES

YES
Replace the ECU.

the open circuit.
227
0,5 AB
0,5 HG
FAULT CODE 19
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
PAGE LEFT BLANK

FAULT CODE 21 – CHASSIS HARNESS

(NOT USED TN S/D)
NOTE: The 32x16 transmission will use this FAULT CODE for F/R Synchronizer circuit and dump circuit. The
16x16 & 8x8 transmissions will use this FAULT CODE for just the dump circuit.
NOTE: Power Shuttle ECM to PS ECM Harness connected at CN1 and CN2, located under the instrument panel.
PS ECM Harness to PS Transmission Side Harness connected at CN 9 A-D or CN 9 (24 pins), located under
the hood on engine side of firewall. PS Transmission Side Harness to Dump Solenoid and F/R Synchronizer
Position Sensors located on left side of transmission by the Power Shuttle Control Valve.
Conditions:
• While tractor is being driven or in neutral, open circuit between Power Shuttle ECM Harness and Power
Shuttle Transmission Side Harness hinders communication.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; connector between PS ECM Harness and PS Transmission Side Harness disconnected, (at
firewall). Connector between Dump Solenoid and Transmission Side Harness is disconnected. Connector
between F/R Synchronizer Position Sensors and Transmission Side Harness is disconnected. Connector
between F/R Synchronizer Solenoids and Transmission Side Harness is disconnected. Connectors and pins
are pinched, loose, or corroded.
Tests:
• H9, channels related to the dump solenoid, F/R Synchronizer Position Sensors, and F/R Synchronizer
Solenoids will not display the correct count.
• H5, related to the dump solenoid, F/R Synchronizer Position Sensors, and F/R Synchronizer Solenoids
doesn’t display the correct transition between d0 and the corresponding d value.
• HF, would display open circuit FAULT CODEs related to the dump solenoid, F/R Synchronizer Position
Sensors, and F/R Synchronizer Solenoids.
Effects:
• Transmission is critically disabled; but can be re-enabled by cycling the Ignition Switch, (shutting off the
tractor).
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 21

Raise the engine hood. NO Connect connection (177).
Is connection (177) connected?
YES
Remove the rear left--hand wheel and the solenoid

valves unit guard. NO Connect the wiring.
Is the wiring on the solenoid valve connected?
YES
Disconnect the control panel. Connect the connections correctly

Are connections (137) on the ECU correctly con- NO
(137).
nected?
YES
Replace the ECU.

FAULT CODE 21
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A 137B
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
PAGE LEFT BLANK

FAULT CODE 22 – CLUTCH PACK (A) PULSE WIDTH MODULATED SOLENOID COIL SHORT
CIRCUIT.
NOTE: On all transmissions Clutch Pack (A) is the front pack, used for forward movement, controlled by the
bottom, horizontal solenoid on the Power Shuttle Control Valve Assembly. Clutch Pack (B) is the rear pack, used
for reverse movement, controlled by the top, horizontal solenoid on the Power Shuttle Control Valve Assembly.
Conditions:
1. While tractor is being driven in Forward, the Clutch Pack (A) PWM Solenoid has a short circuit.
2. While tractor is being driven in Reverse, the Clutch Pack (A) PWM Solenoid has a short circuit.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted between the ECM connector 1, pin 10 and ECM connector 1, pin 6 wires, or
across the two solenoid coil terminals.
• Faulty Clutch Pack (A) PWM Solenoid Coil.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• Clutch Pack (A) becomes inoperable.
• Transmission is disabled, but can be re-enabled by cycling the Power Shuttle FNR Lever or Clutch Pedal.
• Transmission is limited; Clutch Pack (A) becomes inoperable; meaning the output signal from ECM, CN1-10
sends voltage to the input signal ECM, CN1-6 without going through the solenoid coil. PWM Solenoid can
not be electrically controlled to pressurize and de-pressurize the Clutch Pack. Transmission will only operate
in Reverse.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 22

valves unit guard.
Disconnect connection (106) on the clutch sole- NO Replace the solenoid valve coil if in
noid valve (A). short.
Is the electrical resistance on the solenoid valve
coil, measured with a digital tester, ∼ 10 Ω?
YES
Wires (AR) and (AN) (wiring side) are in short. NO Replace the ECU.
YES
Check the wiring between connection (106) on the

solenoid valve and pins (C8) (AR) and (B7) (AN) on
connection (177).
YES
Disconnect the control panel and the connections

(137) on the ECU.
Check the wiring between pins CN1--10 (AR) and
CN1--6 (AN) on connections (137) with pins (C8)
(AR) and (B7) (AN) on connection (177).
106
FAULT CODE 22
ECM PIN REFERENCE
152
FAULT CODE 22
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 23 – CLUTCH PACK (B) PULSE WIDTH MODULATED SOLENOID COIL SHORT
CIRCUIT.
NOTE: Two Conditions/Detection will trigger this error code.
Conditions:
1. While tractor is being driven in Reverse, the Clutch Pack (B) PWM Solenoid has a short circuit.
2. While tractor is being driven in Forward, the Clutch Pack (B) PWM Solenoid has a short circuit.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted between ECM connector 1, pin 11 and ECM connector 1, pin 5 wires, or across
the two solenoid coil terminals.
• Faulty Clutch Pack (B) PWM Solenoid Coil.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• Effects of Condition 1:
• Clutch Pack (B) becomes inoperable.
• Transmission is limited; Clutch Pack (B) becomes inoperable; meaning the output signal from ECM, CN1-11
sends voltage to the input signal ECM, CN1-5 without going through the solenoid coil. PWM Solenoid can
not be electrically controlled to pressurize and de-pressurize the Clutch Pack. Transmission will only operate
in Forward.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 23

valves unit guard.
Disconnect connection (66) on the clutch solenoid NO Replace the solenoid valve coil if in
valve (B). short.
Is the electrical resistance on the solenoid valve
YES
Wires (BN) and (BR) (wiring side) are in short. NO Replace the ECU.
YES

solenoid valve and pins (A5) (BN) and (A8) (BR) on
connection (177).
YES

(137) on the ECU.
Check the wiring between pins CN1--11 (BN) and
CN1--5 (BR) on connections (137) with pins (A5)
(BN) and (A8) (BR) on connection (177).
66
FAULT CODE 23
ECM PIN REFERENCE
153
FAULT CODE 23
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 24 – CLUTCH PACK (A) AND (B) PULSE WIDTH MODULATED SOLENOIDS
ARE NOT CALIBRATED.
Conditions:
• Clutch Pack Solenoid Calibration Values are out of acceptable range or are not registered.
Causes:
• Clutch Pack Calibration procedure, (H1) has not been performed after replacing a Power Shuttle ECM.
• Clutch Pack Calibration procedure, (H1) has not been performed after conducting a Non-Volatile Memory
Erasure, (H8), using the CDU or EST.
• Clutch Pack Calibration procedure, (H1) has not been performed after replacing the Clutch Pack (A and B)
PWM Solenoids.
• During Clutch Pack Calibration procedure, (H1) a Calibration “U” Error occurs preventing the completion of
a Calibration procedure.
• Faulty ECM; Clutch Pack Calibration values are corrupt in the Electrically Erased Programmable Read Only
Memory, (EEPROM) and Non-Volatile Memory, (NVM), [H8].
Tests:
• H2, doesn’t display calibration values within range 230 to 480 mA.
Effects:
• Transmission is modified; feathering with the Clutch Pedal will be poor, jerky, or impossible. Directional
modulation between forward and reverse using the Power Shuttle FNR Lever will be poor, jerky, or
impossible.
• Error code will remain active until a Clutch Pack Calibration procedure, (H1), is completed.
Recovery:
NOTE: This error code will mask Errors Code 28 and Error Code 29 to prevent ECM memory saturation.
FAULT CODE 24
H1
H
MENU
1 2 3 4
MDB0751A
FAULT CODE 26 – ENGINE RPM FREQUENCY SIGNAL TOO HIGH.
Conditions:
• For 3 consecutive seconds, the Engine RPM is greater than 3500, with Wheel Speed Sensor indicating
movement, while a Clutch Pack receives full pressure.
Causes:
• Faulty alternator drive belt. Faulty alternator.
• Faulty Engine high idle setting.
• Frequency between alternator W+ terminal and ECM connector 2, pin 15 is too high.
Tests:
• H9, channel 20 is higher than given value.
Effects:
• Unable to conduct Calibration of Clutch Packs (H1).
• Transmission is modified; ECM assumes 2300 Engine RPM, so engine performance may be reduced at other
RPM levels.
Recovery:
• Cause must be resolved and error must be cleared using the CDU or EST, HF menu.
NOTE: This error will NOT self-clear even if the engine RPM is returned to correct speed.
FAULT CODE 26

Is wire (R) on alternator socket (W) correctly con- NO Connect the wire correctly.
nected?
YES
Start the engine and accelerate to 1000 rpm (make

sure that the recharging lamp is off).
Replace the alternator if the frequen-
Using a digital tester measure the frequency at the NO
cy value is much higher.
alternator output between la socket (W) and
ground.
Is the frequency ∼ 200 Hz?
YES
Replace the ECU (1).

FAULT CODE 27 – ENGINE RPM FREQUENCY SIGNAL TOO LOW.
Conditions:
• For 3 consecutive seconds, the Engine RPM is less than 500, with Wheel Speed Sensor indicating
movement, while a Clutch Pack receives full pressure.
Causes:
• Faulty Alternator Drive Belt.
• Faulty Alternator.
• Faulty Engine low idle setting.
• Faulty wiring; circuit open between Alternator W+ terminal and ECM connector 2, pin 15, or short to ground
between ECM connector 2, pin 15 and alternator (W+) terminal, or short to 12 volts between ECM connector
2, pin 15 and alternator {W+) terminal.
Tests:
• H9, channel 20 is lower than given value.
Effects:
• Unable to conduct Calibration of Clutch Packs (H1)
• Transmission is modified; ECM assumes 2300 Engine RPM, so engine performance may be reduced at other
RPM levels.
Recovery:
• Cause must be resolved and error must be cleared using the CDU or EST, HF menu.
NOTE: This error will NOT clear even if the engine RPM is throttle down to correct speed.
FAULT CODE 27
Turn the starter key to the ON position. Replace the lamp bulb.
NO
Is the alternator recharge lamp ON?
YES
Start the engine and accelerate to 1200 Check the recharge system.
rpm. NO
Is the recharge lamp OFF?
YES
YES
Is wire (R) on the alternator socket (W) Connect the wire correctly
NO
correctly connected?
YES
Is the alternator socket (W) wire (R) in

NO
short to ground?
YES

YES
Bring engine speed to 1000 rpm.

Using a digital tester, measure the fre-
quency at the alternator output between
the socket (W) and ground. NO Replace the alternator.
Is the frequency ∼ 200 Hz?
YES

the open circuit.
CN2--15 (R) (wiring side) and the alterna-
tor socket (W)?
YES
Replace the ECU.

FAULT CODE 27
ECM PIN REFERENCE
154
FAULT CODE 27
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
85A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
137B
85B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 0.5 S (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)
FAULT CODE 28 – CLUTCH PACK (B) NOT CALIBRATED.

NOTE: This error code will not be displayed during clutch calibration procedure, (H1). “U” codes are used during
H1 procedure for notification of incorrect calibration values. Use tool 294084 to access the H1 menu.
Conditions:
• While key switch is in the “ON” position the ECM detects that the Clutch Pack (B) is not calibrated.
Causes:
• Clutch Pack (B) Calibration procedure, (H1) has not been performed after replacing a Power Shuttle ECM.
• Clutch Pack (B) Calibration procedure, (H1) has not been performed after conducting a Non-Volatile Memory
• Clutch Pack (B) Calibration procedure, (H1) has not been performed after replacing the Clutch Pack (A and
B) PWM Solenoids.
• During Clutch Pack (B) Calibration procedure, (H1) a Calibration “U” Error occurs preventing the completion
of a Calibration procedure.
• Faulty ECM; Clutch Pack (B) Calibration values are corrupt in the Electrically Erased Programmable Read
Only Memory, (EEPROM) and Non-Volatile Memory, (NVM), [H8].
Tests:
Effects:
• Transmission is modified; Reverse will be affected by the poor performance of Clutch Pack (B).
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 28
H1
H
MENU
1 2 3 4
MDB0751A
FAULT CODE 29 – CLUTCH PACK (A) NOT CALIBRATED.

NOTE: This error code will not be displayed during clutch calibration procedure, (H1). “U” codes are used during
H1 procedure for notification of incorrect calibration values. Use tool 294084 to access the H1 menu.
Conditions:
• While key switch is in the “ON” position the ECM detects that the Clutch Pack (A) is not calibrated.
Causes:
• Clutch Pack (A) Calibration procedure, (H1) has not been performed after replacing a Power Shuttle ECM.
• Clutch Pack (A) Calibration procedure, (H1) has not been performed after conducting a Non-Volatile Memory
• Clutch Pack (A) Calibration procedure, (H1) has not been performed after replacing the Clutch Pack (A and
B) PWM Solenoids.
• During Clutch Pack (A) Calibration procedure, (H1) a Calibration “U” Error occurs preventing the completion
of a Calibration procedure.
• Faulty ECM; Clutch Pack (A) Calibration values are corrupt in the Electrically Erased Programmable Read
Only Memory, (EEPROM) and Non-Volatile Memory, (NVM), [H8].
Tests:
Effects:
• Transmission is modified; Forward will be affected by the poor performance of Clutch Pack (A).
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 29
H1
H
MENU
1 2 3 4
MDB0751A
FAULT CODE 31 – REVERSE (SHUTTLE) SYNCHRONIZER SOLENOID COIL SHORT

CIRCUIT.
(NOT USED TN S/D)
NOTE: Error is only for 32x16. The Transmission Status Lamp is the Hi(Rabbit) and Lo(Turtle) lamps. They will
flash in a alternating manner.
Conditions:
1. While the tractor is being driven in reverse the Reverse (Shuttle) Synchronizer Solenoid has a short circuit.
2. While the tractor is in neutral the Reverse (Shuttle) Synchronizer Solenoid has a short circuit.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted between ECM connector 1, pin 17 and ECM connector 1, pin 3 wires, or across
the two coil terminals.
• Faulty Reverse (Shuttle) Synchronizer Solenoid Coil.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H9, channel 13 value is below 0 counts.
• Transmission is limited; Reverse Side of the F/R Synchronizer Piston becomes inoperable; meaning the
solenoid can not hydraulically pressurize and de-pressurize the piston. If the Synchronizer was already in
the reverse position then the tractor will move in reverse. But once the Synchronizer is moved into the forward
position it will not be able to shift it back into reverse.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 31

valves unit guard.
Disconnect connection (65) on the Shuttle syn- Replace the solenoid valve coil if in
NO
chroniser solenoid valve. short.
Is the solenoid valve coil electrical resistance,
measured with a digital tester, ∼ 7 Ω?
YES
Are wires (SN) and (SG) (wiring side) in short cir-

NO Replace the ECU.
cuit?
YES

solenoid valve and pins (B4) (SN) and (C4) (SG) on
connection (177).
YES

(137) on the ECU.
Check the wiring between pins CN1--17 (SN) and
CN1--3 (SG) on connections (137) with pins (B4)
(SN) and (C4) (SG) on connection (177).
FAULT CODE 31
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
137B
0.5 G (33)
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
PAGE LEFT BLANK

FAULT CODE 32 – FORWARD (HI-LO) SYNCHRONIZER SOLENOID COIL SHORT CIRCUIT.

(NOT USED TN S/D)
NOTE: Error is only for 32x16. The Transmission Status Lamp is the Hi(Rabbit) and Lo(Turtle) lamps. They will
flash in a alternating manner.
Conditions:
1. While the tractor is being driven in forward the Forward (Hi-Lo) Synchronizer Solenoid has a short circuit.
2. While the tractor is in neutral the Forward (Hi-Lo) Synchronizer Solenoid has a short circuit.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted between ECM connector 1, pin 16 and ECM connector 1, pin 4 wires, or across
• Faulty Forward (Hi-Lo) Synchronizer Solenoid Coil.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H9, channel 12 value is below 0 counts.
• Transmission is limited; Forward Side of the F/R Synchronizer Piston becomes inoperable; meaning the
solenoid can not hydraulically pressurize and de-pressurize the piston. If the Synchronizer was already in
the Forward position then the tractor will move in forward. But once the Synchronizer is moved into the
Reverse position it will not be able to shift it back into forward.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 32

valves unit guard.
Disconnect connection (68) on the Shuttle syn- Replace the solenoid valve coil if in
NO
chroniser solenoid valve. short.
Is the electrical resistance of the solenoid valve
YES
Are wires (GN) and (GR) (wiring side) in short

NO Replace the ECU.
circuit?
YES

solenoid valve and pins (B2) (GN) and (C1) (GR)
on connection (177).
YES

(137) on the ECU.
Check the wiring between pins CN1--16 (GN) and
CN1--4 (GR) on connections (137) with pins (B2)
(GN) and (C1) (GR) on connection (177).
68
FAULT CODE 32
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
137B
0.5 G (33)
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
PAGE LEFT BLANK

FAULT CODE 33 – DUMP SOLENOID COIL SHORT CIRCUIT.

Conditions:
1. While the tractor is being driven in forward or reverse the Dump Solenoid has a short circuit.
2. While the tractor is in neutral the Dump Solenoid has a short circuit.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted between ECM connector 1, pin 18 and ECM connector 1, pin 2 wires, or across
• Faulty Dump Solenoid Coil.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• No H Menu for diagnostic check.
• Transmission is limited; Dump Solenoid stays energized, meaning the output signal from ECM, CN1-18
sends voltage to the input signal ECM, CN1-2 without going through the solenoid coil. The Clutch Packs (A
or B) can not be hydraulically de-pressurised. Transmission will still operate by using other Clutch Pack
solenoids to bleed off hydraulic pressure when shuttle or speed shift is conducted.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 33

valves unit guard.
Disconnect connection (67) on the dump solenoid Replace the solenoid valve coil if in
NO
valve. short.
Is the electrical resistance of the solenoid valve
YES
Are wires (ZB) and (ZN) (wiring side) in short cir-

NO Replace the ECU.
cuit?
YES

solenoid valve and pins (B8) (ZB) and (B3) (ZN) on
connection (177).
YES

(137) on the ECU.
Check the wiring between pins CN1--18 (ZB) and
CN1--2 (ZN) on connections (137) with pins (B8)
(ZB) and (B3) (ZN) on connection (177).
67
FAULT CODE 33
ECM PIN REFERENCE
155
FAULT CODE 33
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 35 – DUMP SOLENOID OR ECM DRIVER SHORT CIRCUIT TO 12 VOLTS.
Conditions:
• While the tractor is being driven in forward or reverse, the Dump Solenoid becomes energized by a short to
12 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit short to 12 volts between ECM connector 1, pin 18 and the solenoid coil terminal, or
across solenoid coil terminals, or between ECM connector 1, pin 2 and solenoid coil terminal.
• Faulty ECM; internal ECM driver is shorted to 12 volts.
Tests:
Effects:
• Dump Solenoid short circuit to 12 volts instead of being 0 volts; therefore keeping the Dump Solenoid
energized which causes Clutch Pack (A or B) to be de-pressurized.
tractor).
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 35

nections (137) on the ECU. Is there a reading of +12V between pin
Turn the starter key to the ON position. NO CN1--2 (ZN) on connections (137) (wiring NO
Is there a reading of +12V between pin side) and ground?
CN1--18 (ZB) on connections (137) (wir- YES
ing side) and ground?
YES Check the wiring between CN1--2 (ZN) on
connections (137), pin (B3) (ZN) on connec-
Check the wiring between pin CN1--18 tion (177) and connection (67) on the sole-
(ZB) on connections (137), pin (B8) (ZB) noid valve.
on connection (177) and connection (67)
on the solenoid valve.
Eliminate the cause of the short circuit to
+12V. Replace the ECU.
67
FAULT CODE 35
ECM PIN REFERENCE
156
FAULT CODE 35
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 36 – DUMP SOLENOID SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT OR

ECM DRIVER OPEN.
Conditions:
1. While the tractor is being driven in forward or reverse, the Dump Solenoid has a short to ground or open
circuit.
2. While the tractor is in neutral the Dump Solenoid has a short to ground or open circuit.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit short to ground or open between ECM connector 1, pin 18 and the solenoid coil terminal,
or across the two coil terminals, or between ECM connector 1, pin 2 and the solenoid coil terminal.
• Faulty ECM; internal ECM driver is open or short to ground.
Tests:
• Transmission is limited; Dump Solenoid stays de-energized. The Clutch Packs (A or B) can not be
hydraulically de-pressurized. Transmission will still operate by using other Clutch Pack solenoids to bleed
off hydraulic pressure when shuttle or speed shift is conducted.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 36

Turn the starter key to the OFF position. the open circuit.
solenoid valves unit guard.
Disconnect connection (67) on the dump Replace the solenoid valve coil if inter-
NO
solenoid valve. rupted.
Using a digital tester, measure the electri-
cal resistance of the solenoid valve coil.
Is the resistance ∼ 7.5 Ω?
YES
Is wire (ZB) on the solenoid valve wiring in NO nections (137) on the ECU.
NO
short to ground? Is wire (ZN) on the solenoid valve wiring in
YES short to ground?
YES
of the short to ground?
Lift the engine bonnet and disconnect con-

nection (177).
(B8) (ZB) and connection (67) on the sole-
noid valve?
YES

NO
(B3) (ZN) and connection (67) on the sole-
67 noid valve?
YES

CN1--18 (ZB) on connections (137) and pin
(B8) (ZB) on connection (177)? NO
YES

CN1--2 (ZN) on connections (137) and pin NO
(B3) (ZN) on connection (177)?
YES
Replace the ECU.

FAULT CODE 36
ECM PIN REFERENCE
157
FAULT CODE 36
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 37 – CLUTCH PEDAL SWITCH (1) OPEN CIRCUIT.

NOTE: This error may be triggered by Error Code 11.
Conditions:
• For 1 second, when Clutch Pedal is released, (switch closed), the Clutch Pedal Potentiometer is above 30%,
while Power Shuttle FNR Lever is not in neutral, (Voltage is being supplied to ECM connector 2, pin 18), and
with 12 volts not present at ECM connector 1, pin 15.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit open between ECM connector 1, pin 15 and Clutch Pedal Switch.
• Faulty Clutch Pedal Switch (1).
• Clutch Pedal Switch (1) is sticking, (cold weather condition).
• Clutch Pedal Switch (1) is miss adjusted.
Tests:
• H9, channel 4 is too low.
• H5, does not change from “d0” to “d21”.
• HA, doesn’t display correct values.
Effects:
• Transmission is disabled, but can be re-enabled by cycling the Clutch Pedal.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 37
(Clutch pedal double switch 1)

Remove the left--hand panel under the dashboard. Connect the connection and/or wiring.
Is connection (121) and/or the switch wiring con- NO
nected?
YES
Disconnect connection (121) on the switch.

Using a digital tester, check the double switch. NO Replace the switch.
Does it work?
YES

(137) on the ECU.
Check the wiring and eliminate the
Is there electrical continuity between pin CN1--15 NO
cause of the open circuit.
(RN) on connections (137) and connection (121)
on the switch?
YES
Replace the ECU.
50025110
FAULT CODE 37
ECM PIN REFERENCE
158
FAULT CODE 37
121
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
85A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
137B
85B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)
FAULT CODE 38 – CLUTCH PACK (B) PULSE WIDTH MODULATED SOLENOID OR ECM
DRIVER SHORT CIRCUIT TO 12 VOLTS.
Conditions:
• While tractor is being operated the Clutch Pack (B) Pulse Width Modulated Solenoid becomes energized by
a short circuit to 12 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted to 12 volts between ECM connector 1, pin 11 and the solenoid coil terminal or
Tests:
• H9, Channel 7 value stays constant and is above 480 counts.
Effects:
• The Clutch Pack (B) PWM Solenoid Coil remains energized, keeping clutch engaged. Non authorized 12 volt
can only be stopped by activating the Dump Solenoid, (neutral PS FNR Lever or depressed Clutch Pedal).
The transmission is disabled to ensure the operator is not placed in a dangerous situation where the tractor
can not be stopped.
• Transmission is critically disabled, but can be re-enabled by cycling the Ignition Switch, (shutting off tractor).
Recovery:
Cause must be resolved and error must be cleared using the CDU or EST, HF Menu.
FAULT CODE 38

Turn the starter key to the ON position. NO CN1--5 (BR) on connections (137) (wiring NO
CN1--11 (11) (BN) on connections (137) YES
(wiring side) and ground?
YES Check the wiring between CN1--5 (BR) on
connections (137), pin (A8) (BR) on connec-
(BN) on connections (137), pin (A5) (BN) noid valve.
66
FAULT CODE 38
ECM PIN REFERENCE
159
FAULT CODE 38
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 39 – CLUTCH PACK (B) PULSE WIDTH MODULATED SOLENOID SHORT
CIRCUIT TO GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT OR ECM DRIVER OPEN.
Conditions:
1. While tractor is being driven Reverse, the Clutch Pack (B) PWM Solenoid has a short to ground or open
circuit.
2. While tractor is being driven Forward, the Clutch Pack (B) PWM Solenoid has a short to ground or open
circuit.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is short to ground or open between ECM connector 1, pin 11 and the solenoid coil
terminal, or across the two solenoid coil terminals, or between ECM connector 1, pin 5 and the solenoid coil
terminal.
• Faulty ECM; internal ECM driver is open or short to ground.
Tests:
• H9, Channel 7 value is below 200 counts
• Transmission is limited; Clutch Pack (B) becomes inoperable; meaning the PWM Solenoid can not
hydraulically pressurize and de-pressurize the Clutch Pack. Transmission will only operate in Forward.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 39
Turn the starter key to the OFF position. Check the wiring and eliminate the cause of
Remove the rear left--hand wheel and the the open circuit.
Disconnect connection (66) on the clutch
solenoid valve (B). Replace the solenoid valve coil if inter-
NO
Using a digital tester, measure the electri- rupted.
YES
Is wire (BN) on the solenoid valve wiring in nections (137) on the ECU.
NO NO
short to ground? Is wire (BR) on the solenoid valve wiring in
YES
nection (177).
(A5) (BN) and connection (66) on the sole- NO
noid valve?
YES

(A8) (BR) and connection (66) on the sole- NO
noid valve?
YES

CN1--11 (BN) on connections (137) and pin NO
(A5) (BN) on connection (177)?
66 YES

CN1--5 (BR) on connections (137) and pin NO
(A8) (BR) on connection (177)?
YES
Replace the ECU.

FAULT CODE 39
ECM PIN REFERENCE
160
FAULT CODE 39
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 41 – CLUTCH PACK (A) PULSE WIDTH MODULATED SOLENOID SHORT
CIRCUIT TO GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT OR ECM DRIVE OPEN.
Conditions:
1. While tractor is being driven Lo-Forward, the Clutch Pack (A, Lo-Forward) PWM Solenoid has a short to
ground or open circuit.
2. While tractor is being driven Hi-Forward or Reverse, the Clutch Pack (A, Lo-Forward) PWM Solenoid has
a short to ground or open circuit.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit short to ground or open between ECM connector 1, pin 10 and the solenoid coil terminal,
or across the two solenoid coil terminals, or between ECM connector 1, pin 6 and the solenoid coil terminal.
• Faulty Clutch Pack (A, Lo-Forward) PWM Solenoid Coil.
• Faulty ECM; internal ECM Driver is open or short to ground.
Tests:
• H9, Channel 8 value is below 200 counts
• Clutch Pack (A) becomes inoperable; meaning the PWM Solenoid can not hydraulically pressurize and
de-pressurize the Clutch Pack.
• Transmission is limited; Clutch Pack (A) becomes inoperable; meaning the PWM Solenoid can not
hydraulically pressurize and de-pressurize the Clutch Pack. Transmission will only operate in Hi-Forward or
Reverse.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 41
Turn the starter key to the OFF position. Check the wiring and eliminate the cause of
Remove the rear left--hand wheel and the the open circuit.
Disconnect connection (106) on the Replace the solenoid valve coil if inter-
NO
clutch solenoid valve (A). rupted.
Using a digital tester, measure the electri-
YES
Is wire (AR) on the solenoid valve wiring in nections (137) on the ECU.
NO NO
short to ground? Is wire (AN) on the solenoid valve wiring in
YES

nection (177).
(C8) (AR) and connection (106) on the sole-
noid valve?
YES

(B7) (AN) and connection (106) on the sole- NO
noid valve?
YES

CN1--10 (AR) on connections (137) and pin
(C8) (AR) on connection (177)? NO
106 YES

CN1--6 (AN) on connections (137) and pin NO
(B7) (AN) on connection (177)?
YES
Replace the ECU.

FAULT CODE 41
ECM PIN REFERENCE
161
FAULT CODE 41
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 42 – CLUTCH PACK (A) PULSE WIDTH MODULATED SOLENOID OR ECM
DRIVER SHORT CIRCUIT TO 12 VOLTS.
Conditions:
• While tractor is being operated the Clutch Pack (A) Pulse Width Modulated Solenoid becomes energized by
a short circuit to 12 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted to 12 volts between ECM connector 1, pin 10 and the solenoid coil terminal or
• Faulty Clutch Pack (A) PWM Solenoid Coil.
Tests:
• H9, Channel 8 value stays constant and is above 480 counts.
Effects:
• The Clutch Pack (A) PWM Solenoid Coil remains energized, keeping clutch engaged. Non authorized 12 volt
can only be stopped by activating the Dump Solenoid, (neutral PS FNR Lever or depressed Clutch Pedal).
The transmission is disabled to ensure the operator is not placed in a dangerous situation where the tractor
can not be stopped.
• Transmission is critically disabled, but can be re-enabled by cycling the Ignition Switch, (shutting off tractor).
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 42

Turn the starter key to the ON position. NO CN1--6 (AN) on connections (137) (wiring NO
CN1--10 (AR) on connections (137) (wir- YES
ing side) and ground?
YES Check the wiring between CN1--6 (AN) on
connections (137), pin (B7) (AN) on connec-
(AR) on connections (137), pin (C8) (AR) noid valve.
106
FAULT CODE 42
ECM PIN REFERENCE
162
FAULT CODE 42
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 43 – SYNCHRONIZER SHUTTLE (REVERSE) POSITION SWITCH (T) SIGNAL

VOLTAGE SHORT TO 5 OR 12 VOLTS.
(NOT USED TN S/D)

alternating manner. On 16x16 & 8x8 the Transmission Status Lamp is the Gear with a Slash lamp. It will flash.
NOTE: On the 32x16 transmission, the Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) and Hi-Lo (Forward) Position Switches
are located on the left side of the transmission between the Power Shuttle Control Valve and the Service Control
Valve. The Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Position Switch is toward the rear of the tractor. The Synchronizer
Hi-Lo (Forward) Position Switch is toward the front of the tractor.
Conditions:
1. While the Power Shuttle FNR Lever is in the reverse position, voltage at the ECM connector 2, pin 23 is above
4.2 volts.
2. While the Power Shuttle FNR Lever is in the neutral position, voltage at the ECM connector 2, pin 23 is above
4.2 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; short to 12 volts between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse)
Position Switch, or short to 5 v across switch terminals, or short to 5 or 12 v between Synchronizer Shuttle
(Reverse) Position Switch and ECM connector 2, pin 23. Or common 5 volt sensor supply wire from ECM
connector 2, pin 20 is shorted to 12v between switch and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Position Switch (T).
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H9, channel 6 is above 860 counts.
• H5 doesn’t display “d27”.
• HD displays “unkn”.
• Transmission is limited; only Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) Position Switch is available (forward movement).
Any shuttle into reverse will not work. Transmission is neutralized whenever Power Shuttle FNR is put into
reverse position. Then ECM will look for detection of Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) Position Switch and move
synchronizer to forward position.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 43

valves unit guard.
Disconnect connection (60) on pushbutton. NO If in short, replace the pushbutton.
Using a digital tester, measure the electrical resist-
ance on the pushbutton.
Is the resistance 500 to 3000 Ω?
YES
Are wires (AB) and (HL) (wiring side) in short

NO Replace the ECU.
circuit?
YES
Check the wiring between connection (60) on

pushbutton, pin (C3) (HL) and pin (C6) (AB) on
connection (177).
YES

(137) on the ECU.
Check the wiring between pin CN2--23 (HL) on
connections (137) and pin (C3) (HL) on connection
(177) or between pin CN2--20 (AB) and pin (C6)
(AB).
60
0,5 AB
0,5 HL
FAULT CODE 43
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12) 137B
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
PAGE LEFT BLANK

FAULT CODE 44 – SYNCHRONIZER SHUTTLE (REVERSE) POSITION SWITCH (T) SIGNAL

VOLTAGE IS SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT.
(NOT USED TN S/D)

alternating manner. On 16x16 & 8x8 the Transmission Status Lamp is the Gear with a Slash lamp. It will flash.
Conditions:
1. While the Power Shuttle FNR Lever is in the reverse position, voltage at the ECM connector 2, pin 23 is below
0.7 volts.
2. While the Power Shuttle FNR Lever is in the neutral position, voltage at the ECM connector 2, pin 23 is below
0.7 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted to ground or open between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and Synchronizer Shuttle
(Reverse) Position Switch, or between switch terminals, or between Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Position
Switch and ECM connector 2, pin 23. Or common 5 volt sensor supply wire from ECM connector 2, pin 20
is shorted to ground or open between switch and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Position Switch (T).
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H9, channel 6 is below 143 counts.
• Transmission is disabled, but can be re-enable by cycling the Power Shuttle FNR Lever or Clutch Pedal.
• Transmission is limited; only Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) Position Switch is available (forward movement).
Any shuttle into reverse will not work. Transmission is neutralized whenever Power Shuttle FNR is put into
reverse position. Then ECM will look for detection of Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) Position Switch and move
synchronizer to forward position.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 44

the open circuit.
solenoid valves unit guard. NO Connect the connection and/or wiring.
Is the wiring and connection (60) on the
pushbutton connected?
YES
Disconnect connection (60) on the push-

button.
YES Raise the engine hood.
Disconnect connection (177).
Is wire (HL) (wiring side) in short to
NO Is there electrical continuity between con- NO
ground?
nection (60) on pushbutton (HL) and pin
YES
(C3) (HL) on connection (177)?
Disconnect the control panel and connec- YES
tions (137) on the ECU.
Check the wiring between connection Is there electrical continuity between con-
(60), pin (C3) (HL) on connection (177) nection (60) on pushbutton (AB) and pin NO
and pin CN2--23 (HL) on connections (C6) (AB) on connection (177)?
(137). YES
Disconnect the control panel and connec-
CN2--23 (HL) on connections (137) and pin
(C3) (HL) on connection (177)?
YES

CN2--20 (AB) on connections (137) and pin NO
(C6) (AB) on connection (177)?
YES
Replace the ECU.

60
0,5 AB
0,5 HL
FAULT CODE 44
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12) 137B
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
PAGE LEFT BLANK

FAULT CODE 46 – FUSE ERROR

NOTE: This fuse protects the ECM connector 2, pin 1 circuit. The actual fuse number is 15. The circuit is keyed
12 volts. The fuse is a 5 amp.
Conditions:
• When tractor on, ECM detects voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 1 is low while voltage at ECM connector 2,
pin 10 is high.
Cause:
• Faulty wiring; circuit open between battery and key switch or between key switch and fuse, or across fuse,
or between fuse and ECM connector 2, pin 1.
• Faulty Fuse.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H9, channel 15 is below 428.
• H5, won’t show “d20”.
Effects:
• Transmission will be limited; ECM Calibration/Diagnostic Unit (CDU) or Electronic Service Tool (EST) will not
work.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 46

Turn the starter key to the OFF position. nections (137) on the ECU.
Remove the left--hand guard located un- Turn the starter key to the ON position.
der the control panel. NO
Is there a reading of +12V between pin NO
Is fuse F15 (Section 55, Chapter 5, page CN2--21 (HG) on connections (137) and
2 blown)? ground?
YES YES
Replace the fuse. Replace the ECU.

and the fusebox.
Eliminate the cause of the open circuit.
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)
FAULT CODE 47 – CLUTCH PEDAL SWITCH (1) SET TOO HIGH.
Conditions:
• For 1 second, when Clutch Pedal Potentiometer is above 15%, while the Power Shuttle FNR lever not in
neutral, (ECM connector 2, pin 18 should have 12 volts), with the clutch pedal released and the clutch pedal
switch isn’t open, (ECM connector 1, pin 15 should have 12 volts).
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; open circuit between Power Shuttle FNR Lever, (neutral switch) and ECM connector 1, pin 15,
(Error Code 37, when pedal is released).
• Faulty Clutch Pedal Switch (1). (Error Code 37, when pedal is released).
• Improperly adjusted switch (1).
Tests:
• H9, channel 1 is higher than 542 during release.
• HA, during clutch pedal release, the Clutch Pedal Switch (1) changes from off to on after 15%.
Effects:
• Transmission is modified; clutch pedal inching maneuver may be jerky and occur at a higher clutch pedal
position.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 47

Connect the connection and/or wiring.
Connect the CDU or EST to the diagnosis
socket (black), press the H MENU button
on the CDU or the EST cable, and turn the Remove the left--hand panel under the
starter switch to the ON position, then se- dashboard. NO
NO
lect the HA MENU. Is the wiring and connection (121) con-
Move the Shuttle lever to forward gear nected?
and fully press down the clutch pedal. YES
When the clutch pedal is released, the
message switches from “OFF” to “ON”? Disconnect connection (121) on the switch
YES and check. NO
Does it work?
YES

CN1--15 (RN) on connections (137) and
connection (121) on the switch?
YES
Remove the left--hand panel under the

Press the clutch pedal fully down and re- dashboard.
lease slowly. Position the double switch on the relative
The message switches from “OFF” a “ON” NO slots, so that the message switches be-
in correspondence to a percentage value tween “OFF” and “ON” in correspondence to
of 10 to 15? a set value (10 to 15 %).
YES
Replace the ECU.

the open circuit.
Replace the switch.
50025110
FAULT CODE 47
ECM PIN REFERENCE
163
FAULT CODE 47
121
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)
FAULT CODE 48 – CLUTCH PEDAL SWITCH (1) SET TOO LOW.
Conditions:
• For 1 second, when Clutch Pedal Potentiometer is below 5%, while the Power Shuttle FNR lever in neutral,
(ECM connector 2, pin 18 shouldn’t have 12 volts), with the clutch pedal depressed and the clutch pedal
switch is open, (ECM connector 1, pin 15 shouldn’t have 12 volts).
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit short to 12 volts between Power Shuttle FNR Lever, (neutral switch) and ECM connector
1, pin 15.
• Faulty Clutch Pedal Switch (1).
• Improperly adjusted / sticky switch (1).
Tests:
• H9, channel 1 is lower than 38 during depression.
• HA, during clutch pedal depression, the Clutch Pedal Switch (1) changes from on to off after 5%.
Effects:
• No effect to normal operation except using the clutch pedal will not neutralize the transmission, (de-energize
the clutch pack solenoids). The Power Shuttle FNR Lever will have to be used to make tractor move.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 48
Connect the CDU or EST to the diagnosis socket

(black), press the H MENU button on the CDU or
Remove the left--hand panel under
the EST cable, and turn the starter switch to the ON
the dashboard.
position, then select the HA MENU.
Position the double switch on the rel-
Move the Shuttle lever to forward gear. NO ative slots, so that the message
Press and release the clutch pedal, the percentage
switches between “ON” and “OFF” in
value displayed is∼ 100 with the “ON” message.
correspondence to a set value (5 to
By slowly pressing the clutch pedal, the message
8%).
switches from “ON” to “OFF” in correspondence to
a percentage value of 5 to 8?
YES
Replace the ECU.
50025110
FAULT CODE 49 – WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (Aa) VOLTAGE SHORT TO 5 OR 12 VOLTS.
Conditions:
• The ECM detects voltage is above 4.25 volts at ECM connector 2, pin 36.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted to 12 volts between ECM connector 2, pin 36 and Wheel Speed Sensor (Aa)
terminal, or short to 5v across sensor terminals, or short to 5 or 12v between Wheel Speed Sensor (Aa) and
ECM connector 2, pin 29.
• Faulty Wheel Speed Sensor.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H5, doesn’t display “d35”.
Effects:
• Transmission is modified; Power Shuttle FNR lever may not shuttle directions correctly. Acceleration or
tractor movement may not be sensed by ECM during Automatic Take Off (ATO).
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 49

Remove the rear left--hand wheel. NO Connect the connection and/or
Is connection (61) and the sensor wiring con- wiring.
nected?
YES
Disconnect sensor connection (61).

Using a digital tester, measure the sensor electrical
NO Replace the sensor if interrupted.
resistance.
YES
Raise the engine hood.

Is there electrical continuity between connection Check the wiring and eliminate the
NO
(61) (HB) on the sensor and pin (B3) (HB) on con- cause of the open circuit.
nection (177)?
YES
Is there electrical continuity between connection

(61) (VN) on the sensor and pin (A4) (VN) on con- NO
nection (177)?
YES

(137) on the ECU.
Is there electrical continuity between pin (B3) (HB) NO
on connection (177) and pin CN2--36 (HB) on con-
nections (137)?
YES
Is there electrical continuity between pin (A4) (VN)

on connection (177) and pin CN2--29 (VN) on con- NO
nections (137)?
YES
Turn the starter key to the ON position.

Is there a reading of +12V between pin CN2--29 NO Replace the ECU.
(VN) (wiring side) on connections (137) and
ground?
YES (Speed sensor Aa)
Check the wiring and eliminate the cause of the
short to +12V.
61
FAULT CODE 49
ECM PIN REFERENCE
164
FAULT CODE 49
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 51 – TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENDER (Bb) OPEN CIRCUIT.
Conditions:
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted to 12 volts between ECM connector 2, pin 25 and Transmission Temperature
Sender terminal, or short to 5v across sender terminals, or short to 5 or 12v between Transmission
Temperature Sender and ECM connector 2, pin 29, or open circuit between Transmission Temperature
Sender and ECM connector 2, pin 25.
• Faulty Transmission Oil Temperature Sender (Bb).
• Faulty ECM.
• Temperature is below --40_C (--40_F).
Tests:
• H5, won’t show “d29” if Transmission Temperature Sender (Bb) is disconnected.
• HC, won’t show an accurate temperature.
Effects:
• Transmission is modified; extreme low temperature is assumed so clutch pack pressures will be low, resulting
in sluggish operation and clutch pedal inching occurs at a higher level. Error may be self-resolved as voltage
reaches normal range, [once the transmission oil temperature warms up, above --30_C (--22_F)].
Recovery:
• If temperature increases but error remains, then cause must be resolved and error must be cleared using
the CDU or EST, HF Menu.
FAULT CODE 51

NO Connect the connection and/or
valves unit guard.
wiring.
Is connection (107) and the sensor wiring con-
nected?
YES
Disconnect sensor connection (107).

Using a digital tester, measure the sensor electrical
resistance. NO Replace the sensor if interrupted.
With the oil temperature at 20°C (68°F), is the re-
sistance ∼ 500 Ω?
YES
Lift the engine bonnet and disconnect connection

(177). Check the wiring and eliminate the
NO
Is there electrical continuity between connection cause of the open circuit.
(107) (HM) on the sensor and pin (A2) (HM) (trans-
mission side) on connection (177)?
YES
Is there electrical continuity between connection

NO
(107) (VN) on the sensor and pin (B6) (VN) on con-
nection (177)?
YES

(137) on the ECU.
Is there electrical continuity between pin (A2) (HM) NO
on connection (177) and pin CN2--25 (HM) on con-
nections (137)?
YES
Is there electrical continuity between pin (B6) (VN)

on connection (177) and pin CN2--29 (VN) on con- NO
nections (137)?
YES

Is there a reading of +12V between pin CN2--25 NO Replace the ECU.
(HM) (wiring side) on connections (137) and
ground? (Transmission oil temperature sensor Bb)
YES

short to +12V.
107
FAULT CODE 51
ECM PIN REFERENCE
165
FAULT CODE 51
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 52 – TRANSMISSION TEMPERATURE SENDER (Bb) SHORT CIRCUIT.
Conditions:
• The ECM detects voltage is below 0.34 volts at ECM connector 2, pin 25.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted to ground between ECM connector 2, pin 25 and Transmission Temperature
Sender, or across sender terminals, or between Transmission Temperature Sender and ECM connector 2,
pin 29.
• Faulty Transmission Temperature Sender (Bb).
• Faulty ECM.
• Transmission oil temperature is above 130_C (266_F).
Tests:
• H5, won’t show “d29” if Transmission Temperature Sender (Bb) is disconnected.
• HC, won’t show an accurate temperature.
Effects:
• Transmission is modified; extreme high temperature is assumed so clutch pack pressures will be low
resulting in sluggish operation and clutch pedal inching occurs at a higher level. Error may be self-resolved
as voltage reaches normal range, [once the transmission oil temperature cools down, below 130_C (266_F)].
Recovery:
• If temperature decreases but error remains, then cause must be resolved and error must be cleared using
the CDU or EST, HF Menu.
FAULT CODE 52
Replace the sensor if in short.
Turn the starter key to the OFF position. Disconnect sensor connection (107).
Remove the rear left--hand wheel. Using a digital tester, measure the sensor
NO electrical resistance. NO
Is connection (107) and the temperature
sensor wiring in short? With the oil temperature at 20° C (68° F), is
the resistance ∼ 500 Ω?
YES
YES
of the short circuit. Disconnect the control panel and the con-
NO
Is wire (HM) on sensor connection (107) in
short to ground?
YES
Check the wiring between sensor connec-

tion (107), pin (A2) (HM) on connection
(177) and pin CN2--25 (HM) on connections
(137).
YES
Replace the ECU.
(Transmission oil temperature sensor Bb)
107
FAULT CODE 52
ECM PIN REFERENCE
166
FAULT CODE 52
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 53 – 5 VOLTS SENSOR SUPPLY SHORT TO 12 VOLTS.
Conditions:
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted to 12 volts between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and any other 5 volt sensor, [Clutch
Pedal Potentiometer, Power Shuttle FNR lever, Main (C1) Gear and Range (G1) Gear Position Switches.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
Effects:
tractor).
• This error may be displayed instead of showing errors for the different individual circuits.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 53

(137) on the ECU. NO Replace the ECU.
Is there a reading of +12V between pin CN2--20
(AB) (wiring side) and ground?
YES

short on pin CN2--20 (AB) to +12V.
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)
FAULT CODE 54 – 5 VOLTS SENSOR SUPPLY SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN.
Conditions:
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted to ground between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and any other 5 volt sensor, [Clutch
Pedal Potentiometer, Power Shuttle FNR lever, Main (C1) Gear and Range (G1) Gear Position Switches.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
Effects:
tractor).
• This error may be displayed instead of showing errors for the different circuits.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 54

Is pin CN2--20 (AB) (wiring side) in short to ground?
YES
Check the sensors voltage wire (AB) on the wiring:

Shuttle lever, clutch pedal potentiometer, forward
and reverse gear synchroniser position pushbut-
ton, range and gear neutral position sensor push-
buttons and the creeper position sensor pushbut-
ton.
To facilitate this search, use the diagram shown in
Section 55, Chapter 5, page 141.
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)
FAULT CODE 55 – POWER SHUTTLE FNR LEVER (1) FORWARD POSITION SWITCH SHORT
TO 5 OR 12 VOLTS.
Conditions:
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted to 12 volts between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and PS FNR Lever Forward
Position Switch, or short to 5v across switch terminals, or short to 5 or 12v between PS FNR Lever Forward
Position Switch and ECM connector 2, pin 26. Or common 5 volt sensor supply wire from ECM connector
2, pin 20 is shorted to 12v between switch and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty PS FNR Lever Forward Position Switch (1).
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H5, won’t display “d22”.
Effects:
• Transmission will operate normally, except there will be a slight delay whenever the forward position is
selected.
• ECM will determine shuttle position by using the PS FNR Lever Neutral and Reverse Position Switches.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 55

(137) on the ECU. Replace the Shuttle lever if a short
When the Shuttle lever (1) is positioned in forward NO circuit is found.
gear, between pin CN2--20 (AB) and pin CN2--26
(AN) (wiring side), is the reading ∼ 600 Ω?
YES
Replace the ECU.
(Shuttle lever 1)
FAULT CODE 55
ECM PIN REFERENCE
167
FAULT CODE 55
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)
FAULT CODE 56 – POWER SHUTTLE FNR LEVER (1) FORWARD POSITION SWITCH SHORT
TO GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT.
Conditions:
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted to ground or open between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and PS FNR Lever
Forward Position Switch, or across switch terminals, or between PS FNR Lever (1) Forward Position Switch
and ECM connector 2, pin 26. Or common 5 volt sensor supply wire from ECM connector 2, pin 20 is shorted
to ground or open between switch and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty PS FNR Lever Forward Position Switch (1).
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
Effects:
• Transmission will operate normally, except there will be a slight delay whenever the forward position is
selected.
• ECM will determine shuttle position by using the PS FNR Lever (1) Neutral and Reverse Position Switches.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 56

Disconnect the control panel and the con- Is there electrical continuity between
nections (137) on the ECU. NO CN2--20 (AB) on connections (137) and NO
Is wire (AN) on pin CN2--26 in short to connection (151) (AB) on the Shuttle lever?
ground? YES
YES
Is there electrical continuity between
Check the wiring between pin CN2--26 CN2--26 (AN) on connections (137) and NO
(AN) on connections (137) and connec- connection (151) (AN) on the Shuttle lever?
tion (151) on the Shuttle lever. YES
Replace the Shuttle lever.
YES
Replace the ECU.

the open circuit.
(Shuttle lever 1)
FAULT CODE 56
ECM PIN REFERENCE
168
FAULT CODE 56
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)
151
0,5 A (4)
0,5 AN (5)
0,5 AB (6)
0,5 MN (3)
0,5 HV (2)
0,5 B (1)
FAULT CODE 57 – POWER SHUTTLE FNR LEVER (1) REVERSE POSITION SWITCH SHORT
TO 5 OR 12 VOLTS.
Conditions:
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted to 12 volts between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and PS FNR Lever Reverse
Position Switch, or short to 5v across switch terminals, or short to 5 or 12v between PS FNR Lever Reverse
Position Switch and ECM connector 2, pin 27. Or common 5 volt sensor supply wire from ECM connector
2, pin 20 is shorted to 12v between switch and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty and PS FNR Lever Reverse Position Switch (1).
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
Effects:
• Transmission will operate normally, except there will be a slight delay whenever the reverse position is
selected.
• ECM will determine shuttle position by using the PS FNR Lever Neutral and Forward Position Switches.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 57

(137) on the ECU.
Replace the Shuttle lever if a short
Move the Shuttle lever to the reverse gear position, NO
circuit is found.
between pin CN2--20 (AB) and pin CN2--27 (A) on
connections (137) (wiring side), is the reading
∼ 600 Ω?
YES
Replace the ECU.
(Shuttle lever 1)
FAULT CODE 57
ECM PIN REFERENCE
169
FAULT CODE 57
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)
FAULT CODE 58 – POWER SHUTTLE FNR LEVER (1) REVERSE POSITION SWITCH SHORT
TO GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT.
Conditions:
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted to ground or open between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and PS FNR Lever Reverse
Position Switch, or between switch terminals, or between PS FNR Lever Reverse Position Switch and ECM
connector 2, pin 27. Or common 5 volt sensor supply wire from ECM connector 2, pin 20 is shorted to ground
or open between switch and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty PS FNR Lever Reverse Position Switch (1).
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
Effects:
• Transmission will operate normally, except there will be a slight delay whenever the reverse position is
selected.
• ECM will determine shuttle position by using the PS FNR Lever Neutral and Forward Position Switches.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 58

Disconnect the control panel and the con- Is there electrical continuity between
nections (137) on the ECU. NO CN2--20 (AB) on connections (137) and NO
Is wire (A) on pin CN2--27 in short to connection (151) (AB) on the Shuttle lever?
ground? YES
YES
Check the wiring between pin CN2--27 (A) CN2--27 (A) on connections (137) and con- NO
on connections (137) and connection nection (151) (AN) on the Shuttle lever?
(151) on the Shuttle lever. YES
Replace the Shuttle lever.
YES
Replace the ECU.

the open circuit.
(Shuttle lever 1)
FAULT CODE 58
ECM PIN REFERENCE
170
FAULT CODE 58
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)
151
0,5 A (4)
0,5 AN (5)
0,5 AB (6)
0,5 MN (3)
0,5 HV (2)
0,5 B (1)
FAULT CODE 59 – POWER SHUTTLE FNR LEVER (1) NEUTRAL, FORWARD, & REVERSE
POSITION SWITCHES DISAGREE.
Conditions:
• The ECM detects that two or none of the Power Shuttle FNR Lever Position Switches, (Neutral, Forward,
or Reverse) are activated at the same time.
Causes:
• A particular position switch could be sticking, for example inputs could be indicated for two switches
simultaneously, (both neutral and forward, both neutral and reverse, both forward and reverse, and nothing
from neutral, forward, or reverse).
• Faulty wiring; open circuit between ECM connector 2, pin 18 and Power Shuttle FNR Lever Neutral Position
Switch.
• Faulty Power Shuttle FNR Lever Neutral Switch (1).
• Faulty Power Shuttle FNR Lever Forward Switch (1).
• Faulty Power Shuttle FNR Lever Reverse Switch (1).
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H9, channel 9 and 10 are out of range.
• H5, won’t show “d22” or “d23”.
Effects:
• Transmission is disabled, but can be re-enabled by cycling the Power Shuttle FNR Lever. Any voltages
recorded out of range will result in displaying separate error codes.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 59
(Shuttle lever 1)
FAULT CODE 61 – VOLTAGE FROM SYNCHRONIZER HI-LO (FORWARD) POSITION SWITCH

(S) SHORT TO 5 OR 12 VOLTS.
(NOT USED TN S/D)

NOTE: The Transmission Status Lamp is the Hi(Rabbit) and Lo(Turtle) lamps. They will flash in a alternating
manner.
Conditions:
1. While the Power Shuttle FNR Lever is in the forward position, voltage at the ECM connector 2, pin 2 is above
4.2 volts.
2. While the Power Shuttle FNR Lever is in the neutral position, voltage at the ECM connector 2, pin 23 is above
4.2 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted to 12 volts between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward)
Position switch, or short to 5v across switch terminals, or short to 5 or 12v between Synchronizer Hi-Lo
(Forward) Position Switch and ECM connector 2, pin 2. Or common 5 volt sensor supply wire from ECM
connector 2, pin 20 is short to 12v between switch and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) Position Switch (S).
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• Transmission is limited; only Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Position Switch is available (reverse
movement). Any shuttle into forward will not work. Transmission is neutralized whenever Power Shuttle FNR
is put into forward position. Then ECM will look for detection of Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Position
Switch and move synchronizer to reverse position.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 61

valves unit guard.
Disconnect connection (105) on pushbutton (HI If in short circuit, replace the pushbut-
NO
and LO) (grey connection). ton.
Using a digital tester, measure the electrical resist-
ance on the pushbutton.
YES
Are wires (AB) and (HV) (wiring side) in short cir- Replace the ECU.
NO
cuit?
YES YES
Lift the engine bonnet and disconnect connection Check the wiring between pins (A3)
(177). (HV) and (C6) (AB) on connection
NO (177) with pins CN2--2 (HV) and
Are wires (AB) and (HV) still in short?
CN2--20 (AB) on connections (137)
YES
on the ECU.
Check the wiring between pin (A3) (HV) on connec- Does the fault persist?
tion (177) or between pin (C6) (AB) on connection
(177) and connection (105) on pushbutton.
105
0,5 AB
0,5 HV
FAULT CODE 61
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
137B
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
PAGE LEFT BLANK

FAULT CODE 62 – VOLTAGE FROM SYNCHRONIZER HI-LO (FORWARD) POSITION SWITCH

(S) SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT.
(NOT USED TN S/D)

manner.
Conditions:
1. While the Power Shuttle FNR Lever is in the forward position, voltage at the ECM connector 2, pin 2 is below
0.7 volts.
2. While the Power Shuttle FNR Lever is in the neutral position, voltage at the ECM connector 2, pin 2 is below
0.7 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit short to ground or open between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and Synchronizer Hi-Lo
(Forward) Position Switch, or across switch terminals, or between Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) Position
Switch and ECM connector 2, pin 2. Or common 5 volt sensor supply wire from ECM connector 2, pin 20 is
short to ground or open between switch and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• Transmission is limited; only Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Position Switch is available (reverse
movement). Any shuttle into forward will not work. Transmission is neutralized whenever Power Shuttle FNR
is put into forward position. Then ECM will look for detection of Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Position
Switch and move synchronizer to reverse position.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 62

the open circuit.
solenoid valves unit guard. NO Connect the connection and/or wiring.
Is the wiring and connection (105) on the
pushbutton connected?
YES
Disconnect connection (97*) on the push-

button.
YES
Is wire (HV) on connection (105) in short Disconnect connection (177).
NO Is there electrical continuity between con- NO
to ground?
YES
nection (105) on pushbutton (HV) and pin
(A3) (HV) on connection (177)?
Check the wiring and eliminate the cause YES
Is there electrical continuity between con-
nection (105) on pushbutton (AB) and pin NO
(C6) (AB) on connection (177)?
YES
Disconnect the control panel and connec-

CN2--2 (HV) on connections (137) and pin
(A3) (HV) on connection (171)?
YES
Replace the ECU.
105
0,5 AB (1)
0,5 HV (2)
FAULT CODE 62
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
137B
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
PAGE LEFT BLANK

FAULT CODE 63 – F/R SYNCHRONIZER DID NOT MOVE INTO THE HI-LO (FORWARD)
POSITION.
(NOT USED TN S/D)

NOTE: This is the same as the synchronizer not disengaging from reverse.
manner.
NOTE: On the 32x16 transmission, the Shuttle (Reverse) and Hi-Lo (Forward) Synchronizer is located on the
left side of the transmission behind the Power Shuttle Control Valve. The Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) position
is toward the front of the tractor. The Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) position is toward the rear of the tractor.
Conditions:
• During directional change (a shuttle), moving the PS FNR Lever to forward position, the F/R Synchronizer
did not engage the forward position within the time allowed.
Causes:
• Faulty F/R Synchronizer.
• Faulty F/R Synchronizer linkage.
Tests:
• H9, channel 5 is not within allowable range.
Effects:
• Once the error has been cleared, the ECM will attempt to put the F/R Synchronizer into the Hi-Lo (Forward)
position again. This error will be triggered until an attempt to shift the F/R Synchronizer into forward position
has been successful.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 63

valves unit guard.
Replace the HI and LO forward gears synchroniser
position sensor pushbutton.
YES
Replace the HI and LO forward gears synchroniser

solenoid valve.
YES
Check the hydraulic system, the synchroniser unit

and eliminate the fault.
FAULT CODE 64 – F/R SYNCHRONIZER DID NOT MOVE INTO THE SHUTTLE (REVERSE)
POSITION.
(NOT USED TN S/D)

NOTE: This is the same as the synchronizer not disengaging from forward.
manner.
NOTE: On the 32x16 transmission, the Shuttle (Reverse) and Hi-Lo (Forward) Synchronizer is located on the
left side of the transmission behind the Power Shuttle Control Valve. The Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) position
is toward the front of the tractor. The Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) position is toward the rear of the tractor.
Conditions:
• During directional change (a shuttle), moving the PS FNR Lever to reverse position, the F/R Synchronizer
did not engage the reverse position within the time allowed.
Causes:
• Faulty Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Position Switch.
• Faulty F/R Synchronizer linkage.
• Tests:
• H9, channel 6 is not within allowable range.
Effects:
• Transmission is disabled but can be re-enabled by cycling the Power Shuttle FNR Lever or Clutch Pedal.
• Once the error has been cleared, the ECM will attempt to put the F/R Synchronizer into the Shuttle (Reverse)
position again. This error will be triggered until an attempt to shift the F/R Synchronizer into reverse position
has been successful.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 64

valves unit guard.
Replace the Shuttle reverse synchroniser position
sensor pushbutton.
YES
Replace the Shuttle synchroniser position solenoid

valve.
YES
Check the hydraulic system, the synchroniser unit

and eliminate the fault.
FAULT CODE 65 – SYNCHRONIZER HI-LO (FORWARD) SOLENOID CIRCUIT SHORT TO

GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT OR ECM DRIVER IS OPEN.
(NOT USED TN S/D)

manner.
NOTE: On the 32x16 transmission, the Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) and Hi-Lo (Forward) Solenoids are
located on the bottom of the Power Shuttle Control Valve. The Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Solenoid is toward
the rear of the tractor. The Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) Solenoid is toward the front of the tractor. Both solenoids
are 12v, on/off.
Conditions:
1. While the tractor is started and the Power Shuttle FNR Lever is in forward or reverse position, the
Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) Solenoid has a short to ground or open circuit.
2. While the tractor is started and the Power Shuttle FNR Lever is in the neutral position, the Synchronizer Hi-Lo
(Forward) Solenoid has a short to ground or open circuit.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is short to ground or open between the ECM connector 1, pin 16 and solenoid coil
terminal, or across the solenoid coil terminals or between solenoid coil terminal and ECM connector 1, pin
4.
• Faulty Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) Solenoid Coil.
• Faulty ECM; internal ECM Driver is open or short to ground.
Tests:
• H9, channel 12 is not within range.
• Transmission is limited; only Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Solenoid is available (reverse movement). Any
shuttle into forward will not work. Transmission is neutralized whenever Power Shuttle FNR is put into forward
position. Then ECM will look for detection of Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Solenoid and move
synchronizer to reverse position.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 65

the open circuit.
solenoid valves unit guard. NO Connect connection.
Is connection (68) on the HI and LO for-
ward gear synchroniser position control
solenoid valve connected?
YES
Disconnect connection (68) on the sole-

noid valve.
Using a digital tester, measure the electri- NO Replace the solenoid valve if interrupted.
YES

Is wire (GN) on pin CN1--16 on connec- Is there electrical continuity between pin
NO CN1--16 (GN) on connections (137) and NO
tions (137) or wire (GR) on pin CN1--4 in
short to ground? connection (68) on the solenoid valve?
YES YES
Check the wiring between connection (68) Is there electrical continuity between pin
CN1--4 (GR) on connections (137) and con- NO
on the solenoid valve, pins (B2) (GN) and
(C1) (GR) on connection (177) and pins nection (68) on the solenoid valve?
CN1--16 (GN) and CN1--4 (GR) on con- YES
nections (137).
Eliminate the cause of the short to ground. Replace the ECU.
68
FAULT CODE 65
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
137B
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
PAGE LEFT BLANK

FAULT CODE 66 – SYNCHRONIZER SHUTTLE (REVERSE) SOLENOID CIRCUIT SHORT TO

GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT OR ECM DRIVER IS OPEN.
(NOT USED TN S/D)

manner.
are 12v, on/off.
Conditions:
1. While the tractor is started and the Power Shuttle FNR Lever is in forward or reverse position, the
Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Solenoid has a short to ground or open circuit.
2. While the tractor is started and the Power Shuttle FNR Lever is in the neutral position, the Synchronizer
Shuttle (Reverse) Solenoid has a short to ground or open circuit.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is short to ground or open between the ECM connector 1, pin 17 and the Synchronizer
Shuttle (Reverse) Solenoid Coil terminal, or across the solenoid coil terminals, or between the Synchronizer
Shuttle (Reverse) Solenoid Coil terminal and ECM connector 1, pin 3.
• Faulty ECM, internal ECM driver is open or short to ground.
Tests:
• Transmission is limited; only Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) Solenoid is available (forward movement). Any
shuttle into reverse will not work. Transmission is neutralized whenever Power Shuttle FNR is put into reverse
position. Then ECM will look for detection of Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) Solenoid and move synchronizer
to forward position.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 66

the open circuit.
Is connection (65) on the solenoid valve of NO Connect connection.
the Shuttle reverse synchroniser position
control connected?
YES
Disconnect connection (65) on the sole-

noid valve.
Using a digital tester, measure the electri- NO Replace the solenoid valve if interrupted.
YES

nections (137) on the ECU. Is there electrical continuity between pin
Is wire (SN) on pin CN1--17 on connec- NO CN1--17 (SN) on connections (137) and NO
tions (137) or Wire (SG) on pin CN1--3 in connection (65) on the solenoid valve?
short to ground? YES
YES
Check the wiring between connection (65) CN1--3 (GS) on connections (137) and con- NO
on the solenoid valve, pins (B4) (SN) and nection (65) on the solenoid valve?
(C4) (GS) on connection (177) and pins YES
CN1--17 (SN) and CN1--3 (GS) on con-
nections (137). Replace the ECU.
FAULT CODE 66
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
137B
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
PAGE LEFT BLANK

FAULT CODE 67 – SYNCHRONIZER HI-LO (FORWARD) SOLENOID OR ECM DRIVER IS

SHORT TO 12 VOLTS.
(NOT USED TN S/D)

manner.
are 12v, on/off.
Conditions:
• While the tractor is started and the Power Shuttle FNR Lever is in forward or reverse position, the
Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) Solenoid becomes energized by a short circuit to 12 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted to 12 volts between the ECM connector 1, pin 16 and the Synchronizer Hi-Lo
(Forward) Solenoid Coil terminal, or across the solenoid coil terminals, or between the Synchronizer Hi-Lo
(Forward) Solenoid Coil terminal and ECM connector 1, pin 4.
• Faulty ECM, internal ECM Driver is shorted to
Tests:
Effects:
• Transmission is limited; Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) Solenoid remains energized, therefore keeping F/R
Synchronizer Piston in forward position. Only forward engagement is operational. Hi-Lo speed engagement
is operational. Any shuttle into reverse will not work.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 67

(GN) on connections (137) and ground?
YES
Check the wiring between pin CN1--16 (GN) on

connections (137), pin (B2) (GN) on connection
(177) and connection (68) on the solenoid valve.
Eliminate the cause of the short circuit to +12V.
68
FAULT CODE 67
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
137B
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
PAGE LEFT BLANK

FAULT CODE 68 – SYNCHRONIZER SHUTTLE (REVERSE) SOLENOID OR ECM DRIVER IS

SHORT TO 12 VOLTS.
(NOT USED TN S/D)

manner.
are 12v, on/off.
Conditions:
• While the tractor is started and the Power Shuttle FNR Lever is in forward or reverse position, the
Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Solenoid become energized by a short circuit to 12 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted to 12 volts between the ECM connector 1, pin 17 and the Synchronizer Shuttle
(Reverse) Solenoid Coil terminal, or across the solenoid coil terminal, or between the Synchronizer Shuttle
(Reverse) Solenoid Coil terminal and ECM connector 1, pin 3.
• Faulty Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Solenoid Coil.
• Faulty ECM; internal ECM Driver is short to 12 volts.
Tests:
Effects:
• Transmission is limited; Synchronizer Shuttle (Reverse) Solenoid remains energized, therefore keeping F/R
Synchronizer Piston in reverse position. Only reverse engagement is operational. Hi-Lo speed engagement
is applicable with reverse. Any shuttle into forward will not work.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 68

(SN) on connections (137) and ground?
YES
Check the wiring between pin CN1--17 (SN) on

connections (137), pin (B4) (SN) on connection
(177) and connection (65) on the solenoid valve.
FAULT CODE 68
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
137B
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33)
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
PAGE LEFT BLANK

FAULT CODE 69 – WHEEL SPEED SENSOR (Aa) SHORT TO GROUND OR OPEN.
Conditions:
• The ECM detects voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 36 is below 1.8 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted to ground or open between ECM connector 2, pin 36 and Wheel Speed Sensor
(Aa), or across sensor terminals.
• Faulty Wheel Speed Sensor (Aa).
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H9, channel 19, is not within range.
Effects:
• Transmission is modified; Power Shuttle FNR Lever may not work properly. No acceleration feedback
monitored during automatic take-off (ATO).
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 69

Lift the engine bonnet and disconnect
connection (171). NO NO
Is pin CN2--36 (HR) on connections (137)
Is pin (B3) (HB) (wiring side) in short to
(wiring side) in short to ground?
ground?
YES
YES
Check the wiring between pin CN2--36 (HB)
Remove the rear left--hand wheel.
on connections (137) and pin (B3) (HB) on
connection (171).
on the sensor and pin (B3) (HB) on con-
nection (171).
Replace the ECU.
(Speed sensor wiring Aa)
61
0,5 HB
0,5 VN
FAULT CODE 69
ECM PIN REFERENCE
171
FAULT CODE 69
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)

177
1 ZB (B8) 1 N (B1)
1 BR (A8) 1 MB (A1)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
Empty (A3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 71 – F/R SYNCHRONIZER UNABLE TO CHANGE POSITION

DURING START UP.
(NOT USED TN S/D)

manner.
NOTE: On the 32x16 transmission, the ECM will attempt to change position of the F/R Synchronizer each time
the key switch is turned to the “ON” or to the “START” position. The F/R Synchronizer is in the Hi-Lo (forward)
position when it is shifted toward rear of tractor. The F/R Synchronizer is in the Shuttle (reverse position when
it is shifted toward front of tractor.
Conditions:
• The ECM is unable to change the position of the F/R Synchronizer within 30 seconds after the tractor has
been started.
Causes:
• Faulty F/R Synchronizer Shift Piston in Power Shuttle Control Valve.
• Faulty F/R Synchronizer shift rail or fork.
• Faulty Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) or Shuttle (Reverse) Position Switches (T and S).
• Faulty Temperature Sensor, (Transmission oil temperature too cold.)
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H9, channel 5 or 6 are not within range.
• H5 doesn’t display “d27” or “d28”.
Effects:
• Transmission is disabled; if oil temperature is OK, (above 0_C/32_F), this error could correct itself after the
F/R Synchronizer has been successfully shifted into a different position.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 71

Replace the two synchroniser position sensor
pushbuttons (HI -- LO and Shuttle).
YES
Start the engine and accelerate to 1000 rpm.

Disconnect the synchroniser solenoid valves
(Shuttle/HI--LO) and the two relative synchroniser
position sensor pushbuttons.
Using an external battery, alternately power--up
the two Shuttle and HI -- LO solenoid valves.
Using a digital tester, check that the synchroniser
position sensor pushbuttons are pressed alter-
nately.
(560 Ω pushbutton pressed, 2.7 kΩ pushbutton re-
leased).
YES
Check the synchroniser unit and the relative hy-

draulic system to eliminate the cause of the fault.
FAULT CODE 72 – F/R SYNCHRONIZER DISENGAGED FROM POSITION.
(NOT USED TN S/D)

manner.
NOTE: On the 32x16 transmission, the ECM will attempt to change position of the F/R Synchronizer each time
the key switch is turned to the “ON” or to the “START” position. The F/R Synchronizer is in the Hi-Lo (forward)
position when it is shifted toward rear of tractor. The F/R Synchronizer is in the Shuttle (reverse position when
it is shifted toward front of tractor.
Conditions:
• The ECM detects a change in the position of the F/R Synchronizer without a command from the PS FNR
Lever.
Causes:
• Faulty F/R Synchronizer Shift Piston in Power Shuttle Control Valve.
• Faulty F/R Synchronizer shift rail or fork.
• Faulty Synchronizer Hi-Lo (Forward) or Shuttle (Reverse) Position Switches (T and S).
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H9, channel 5 or 6 are not within range.
• H5 doesn’t display “d27” or “d28”.
Effects:
Transmission will only operate in the previous shuttle direction.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 72

Replace the two synchroniser position sensor
pushbuttons (HI -- LO and Shuttle).
YES

Disconnect the synchroniser solenoid valves
(Shuttle/HI--LO) and the two relative synchroniser
position sensor pushbuttons.
Using an external battery, alternately power--up
the two Shuttle and HI -- LO solenoid valves.
Using a digital tester, check that the two synchro-
niser position sensor pushbuttons are pressed al-
ternately.
(560 Ω pushbutton pressed, 2.7 kΩ pushbutton re-
leased).
YES
Check the synchroniser unit and the relative hy-

draulic system to eliminate the cause of the fault.
FAULT CODE 73 – ECM (2) SUPPLY VOLTAGE (12VF) IS TOO HIGH.
Conditions:
• When tractor is on, ECM detects that the voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 34 or ECM connector 2, pin 10
is above 18 volts for longer that 0.3 seconds.
Causes:
• Faulty Battery.
• Overcharged Battery.
Tests:
• H9, channel 3, is above 762.
Effects:
• Transmission is critically disabled, but can be re-enabled by cycling the Ignition Switch, (shutting off the
tractor). Dump solenoid stays energized. Indicator lights will not illuminate when key switch is in the “ON” or
“Start” position. ECM stops sending diagnostic pulses to the sensors, switches, or solenoids. This error will
automatically clear when voltage dropped below 16 volts
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 73

Start the engine and accelerate to 1200 rpm. Check the recharging system and re-
NO place the alternator if the voltage is
Using a digital tester, measure the battery voltage.
Is the voltage ∼ 14V? much higher than +14 V.
YES
(ECM 1)
FAULT CODE 74 – ECM SUPPLY VOLTAGE (12VF) IS TOO LOW.
Conditions:
• When tractor is on, ECM detects that the voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 34 or ECM connector 2, pin 10
is below 9 volts for longer that 0.3 seconds.
Causes:
• Faulty Battery.
• Undercharged Battery.
Tests:
• H9, channel 3, is below 428.
Effects:
tractor). Dump solenoid stays energized. Indicator lights will not illuminate when key switch is in the “ON” or
“Start” position. ECM stops sending diagnostic pulses to the sensors, switches, or solenoids. This error will
automatically clear when voltage raises above 9 volts.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 74

Remove the left--hand panel located under the
dashboard. NO Replace the fuse.
Fuse F16 (5A) (Section 55, Chapter 5, page 2)
Does it work?
YES

(137) on the ECU. Check the wiring between connec-
Turn the starter key to the ON position. NO tions (137) and the fusebox and elim-
Between pin CN2--10 (MN) and pin CN2--34 (MN) inate the cause of the open circuit.
on connections (137) and ground, is the reading
+12V?
YES
Replace the ECU.
1 ZB (18)
Empty (17)
Empty (16)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 BN (8) 1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11)
Empty (4) 137A
Empty (3) 0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10) 1 N (21)
0.5 LR (9) 0.5 R (22)
1 N (23)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
1 C (3)
1 HV (2)
0.5 MB (1)
FAULT CODE 76 – ECM TRIPLICATE READ ERROR IN THE NON-VOLATILE MEMORY (NVM).
Conditions:
• It is impossible to recall any data from the NVM because all three stored copies are different.
Causes:
• Damaged Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (EEPROM) micro-chip.
• Faulty ECM (2).
Tests:
Effects:
• Transmission is modified; ECM will re-set to default settings. The tractor performance may be affected in the
area where setting have been changed to improve characteristics, (H2, H3, H6, H7, & HE). The ECM will try
to store any self learned or collected data when tractor is shut down.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 76
(ECM 1)
FAULT CODE 77 – INTERNAL ECM SUPPLY VOLTAGE (8V) IS TOO HIGH.

NOTE: This pin is not used externally as an actual output. This is a internal print board circuit error.
Conditions:
• The ECM detects that the voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 35 is above 8 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty ECM (2).
• ECM connector 2, pin 35 is/was shorted by an external 12 volt source.
• Internal circuit short to 12 volts.
Tests:
Effects:
tractor).
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 77
(ECM 1)
FAULT CODE 78 – INTERNAL ECM SUPPLY VOLTAGE (8V) IS TOO LOW.

NOTE: This pin is not used externally as an actual output. This is a internal print board circuit error.
Conditions:
• The ECM detects that the voltage at ECM connector 2, pin 35 is below 8 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty ECM (2).
• ECM connector 2, pin 35 is/was shorted to an external ground or 5 volt source.
• Internal circuit short to ground.
Tests:
Effects:
tractor).
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 78
(ECM 1)
FAULT CODE 81 – TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC OIL PRESSURE SWITCH SHORT TO

GROUND OR OPEN.
Conditions:
• The ECM detects a short to ground or open between Transmission Pressure Switch and ECM connector2,
pin 31.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit shorted to ground or open between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and Transmission Pressure
Switch, or between the switch terminals, or between the Transmission Pressure Switch and ECM
connector2, pin 31. Or common 5 volt sensor supply wire from ECM connector 2, pin 20 is shorted to ground
or open between switch and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty Transmission Pressure Switch.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
Effects:
• Transmission is modified; transmission oil pressure information is not available. During the first 30 seconds
of start up, the pressure switch reaches a pressure above 11 bar (160 psi), a signal is sent from the ECM
to the dump solenoid, allowing the clutch packs to engage. If this doesn’t happen within 30 seconds the error
is registered. If the error is present and oil temperature is above 0_(32_F) the transmission is still operational.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 81

NO Connect the connections.
valves unit guard.
Are the pressure switch connections connected?
YES
Disconnect the pressure switch and the dump so-

lenoid valve connections.
NO Replace the pressure switch.
Using a digital tester, check: is the pressure switch
normally closed?
YES
YES
Start the engine.
Check the hydraulic system.
Using a digital tester, check: does the pressure NO NO
Is the oil pressure ∼ 16 bar (232 psi)?
switch open?
YES
Check the hydraulic system.

Is there electrical continuity between wire (AB) on Check the wiring and eliminate the
NO
the pressure switch connection and pin (C6) (AB) cause of the open circuit.
on connection (177)?
YES
Is there electrical continuity between wire (SN) on

the pressure switch connection and pin (B4) (SN) NO
on connection (177)?
YES

(137) on the ECU.
(SN) on connections (137) and pin (B4) (SN) on
connection (177)?
YES
Is there electrical continuity between pin CN2--20

(AB) on connections (137) and pin (C6) (AB) on NO
connection (177)?
YES
Replace the ECU.

FAULT CODE 81
ECM PIN REFERENCE
172
FAULT CODE 81
1 ZB (18)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11) 137A
0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36) 1 SN (31)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10)
0.5 LR (9)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
0.5 MB (1)
1 AB (C6)
1 AR (C8)
69
177
1 ZB (B8)
1 BR (A8)
1 AN (B7)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
FAULT CODE 82 – TRANSMISSION HYDRAULIC OIL PRESSURE SWITCH SHORT

TO 5 OR 12 VOLTS.
Conditions:
• The ECM detects a short to 5 or 12 volts between Transmission Pressure Switch and ECM connector2, pin
31.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit short to 12 volts between ECM connector 2, pin 20 and Transmission Pressure Switch,
or short to 5v across switch terminals, or short to 5 or 12v between the Transmission Pressure switch and
ECM connector2, pin 31. Or common 5 volt sensor supply wire from ECM connector 2, pin 20 is shorted to
12v between switch and any other 5 volt sensor.
• Faulty Transmission Pressure Switch.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
Effects:
• Transmission is modified; transmission oil pressure information is not available. During the first 30 seconds
of start up, the pressure switch reaches a pressure above 11 bar (160 psi), a signal is sent from the ECM
to the dump solenoid, allowing the clutch packs to engage. If this doesn’t happen within 30 seconds the error
is registered. If the error is present and oil temperature is above 0_(32_F) the transmission is still operational.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 82

valves unit guard. NO Replace pressure switch.
Disconnect the pressure switch connections.
Are wires (AB) and (SN) in short circuit?
YES
Check the wiring between the pressure switch con-

nections, pin (C6) (AB) and (B4) (SN) on connec-
tion (177) and pins CN2--20 (AB) and CN2--31 (SN)
on connections (137) on the ECU.
FAULT CODE 82
ECM PIN REFERENCE
173
FAULT CODE 82
1 ZB (18)
0.5 RN (15)
0.5 BC (13)
0.5 M (7)
1 AR (9)
1 AN (6) 0.5 AG (10)
1 BR (5) Empty (11) 137A
0.5 BG (12)
1 ZN (2)
0.5 G (33) 137B
1 MN (34)
0.5 HB (36) 1 SN (31)
1 BV (30)
0.5 S (13) 0.5 VN (29)
Empty (14) 1 BG (28)
Empty (15) 0.5 A (27)
Empty (16) 0.5 AN (26)
1 HM (25)
0.5 LB (12)
0.5 HR (11)
1 MN (10)
0.5 LR (9)
0.5 L (8) 1 N (24)
Empty (20)
0.5 B (19)
0.5 V (18)
1 GL (4)
0.5 MB (1)
1 AB (C6)
1 AR (C8)
69
177
1 ZB (B8)
1 BR (A8)
1 AN (B7)
1 GL (A7) 1 HM (A2)
1 VN (B6) 1 ZN (B3)
1 BG (B5) 1 SN (B4)
1 BN (A5)
POWER SHUTTLE (8 + 8 and 16 + 16) ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT INPUT/OUTPUT

WIRING DIAGRAM
1 Starter switch. 1a: starter function -- 1b: gear function.

2 Starter relay.
3 Shuttle control lever. 3a: on engine starting circuit -- 3b: on power supply control unit circuit.
4 Clutch pedal switch for engine starting circuit.
5 Clutch pedal switch for power supply control unit circuit.
6 Transmission oil pressure sensor indicator light.
8 Transmission alarm indicator light.
9 Clutch A (forward gears) solenoid valve.
10 Clutch B (forward gears) solenoid valve (reverse gears).
13 Dump solenoid valve (hydraulic neutral safety).
14 Parking brake ON output signal, for acoustic alarm.
15 Shuttle lever output signal (to FWD control unit) if reverse gear is selected.
16 Speed sensor amplified signal to instrument panel.
17 Bodywork ground.
18 Sensors ground.
19 Power ground.
20 Connection for Diagnostic Testers.
21 Pushbutton Y.
22 Pushbutton B.
23 HMENU selection pushbutton.
24 Calibration and Diagnostic Unit or Electrical Service Tool.
25 Speed sensor.
26 Engine revs sensor (from alternator).
27 Parking brake ON switch.
28 Range position sensor switch (G1).
29 Transmission oil pressure for control unit activation.
30 Speed shift position sensor switch (C1).
33 To fuse 15.
34 Driving seat safety switch.
35 Transmission oil temperature sensor.
38 Shuttle lever in reverse gears selection position.
39 Shuttle lever in forward gears selection position.
40 Clutch pedal potentiometer signal.
41 Sensors power supply (+5V).
42 Emergency cable for “limp home” after electrics breakdown.
43 Battery.
POWER SHUTTLE ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT INPUT/OUTPUT WIRING DIAGRAM (8 + 8 and 16 + 16)
2 FUSE 16 (5A)
1a
3a 4 5
3b
FUSE 14 (5A)
6
41
FUSE 7 (10A)
FUSE 9 (10A)
40
FUSE 15 (5A)
8
FUSE 7 (10A)
1b 39
38 9
43
10
NTC 1140 a 0o -- 330 a 40o

35
34
42
33
9
13
30
14
10
29
SW--3
CN2--31
15
28 SW--3 CN2--31
27
16
24
26
680
23
25
22 21 19 18 17
20
MPD2821A
SECTION 23 -- FWD TRANSFER BOX AND AUTO FWD -- CHAPTER 1 1
Chapter 1 -- FWD Transfer Box
CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
FWD Electrohydraulic Engagement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Transmission Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
FWD Drive Gear With Electrohydraulic Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
23 101 26 Transmission Shafts and Guard (TN55S, TN65S and TN75S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
23 101 26 Transmission Shafts and Guard (TN55D, TN65D and TN75D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
23 101 40 Drive Gear Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
23 141 42 Disassembly (Mechanical Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Assembly (Mechanical Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Disassembly (Electrohydraulic Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Assembly (Electrohydraulic Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2 SECTION 23 -- FWD TRANSFER BOX AND AUTO FWD -- CHAPTER 1
SPECIFICATIONS
FWD ELECTROHYDRAULIC
ENGAGEMENT
Reduction ratio of drive gear device (on all models) . . . . . . . . . . . 43/28X28/39 = 1:1.1
Internal diameter of sliding sleeve (16, fig. 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 1.3811 to 1.3826
(35.080 to 35.119)
Diameter of coupled shaft (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 1.3769 to 1.3779
(34.975 to 35.000)
Internal diameter of sliding sleeve (16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 1.9716 to 1.9731
(50.080 to 50.119)
(48.975 to 49.900)
Internal diameter of fixed sleeve (15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.8687 to 0.87
(22.065 to 22.098)
(21.979 to 22.000)
Length of spring (20, with spring free) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 3.22 (82)
Length of spring (20) under a load of 133.37 to 144.40 lbs.
(60.5 to 65.5 kg) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 1.57 (40)
TRANSMISSION SHAFT
Thickness of rings (2, fig. 4) that adjust the position of the front 0.059 -- 0.074 -- 0.086 -- 0.098 --
sleeve (3) on the FWD transmission shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.0110 -- 0.0118 -- 0.0129 --
0.0145 -- 0.0157 -- 0.0169
(1.5 -- 1.9 -- 2.2 -- 2.5 -- 2.8 -- 3
-- 3.3 -- 3.7 -- 4 -- 4.3)
Axial clearance (L) of the front sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.039 to 0.059 (1.0 to 1.5)
TIGHTENING TORQUES
C1 -- 88 Nm
(65 ft. lbs.)
27836
C2 -- 98 Nm
(72 ft. lbs.)
C3 -- 49 Nm
(36 ft. lbs.)
25976
1
Tightening torque
Nm ft. lbs.
Transmission shaft central support retaining bolt (C1) . . . . . . . . . . M 12 x 1.5 88 65
Drive gear housing retaining bolt (C2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 12 x 1.25 98 72
Control cylinder oil delivery union (C3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 18 x 1.50 49 36
SPECIAL TOOLS

cated by an (X).
List of specific tools required for the various op-

erations described in this section.
X 294078 Axle--engine support bracket (with

50162) for models TN 55S, TN 65S,
TN 70S and TN 75S.
X 294098 Drive shaft seal key.
X 294049 Key for Ø 1.97 in. (50 mm) piston.
X 294050 Key for Ø 1.37 in. (35 mm) piston.
X 292870 Hydraulic pressure control kit (use tool

295024).

for models TN 55S, TN 65S and TN 75S [Mark tool with
No. 50162 -- Measurement in mm (ins.)] (.807)
(.728)

Make 4 spacers.
(1.377)
27821
2
(1.96) (.590) (1.96)
(2.55) (.807)
(2.95)
(2.95)
(1.57)
27827
3
Tool to make for drive gear unit removal [stamp no. 50161 on the tool -- Measurement in mm (ins.)]
(.196)
(1.377)
(.590)
(.551)
(1.06)
(.118)
(.590)
27828
4
Tool to make for drive gear shaft removal [stamp no. 50141 on the tool -- Measurement in mm (ins.)]
Construct in C40 material.
SECTIONAL VIEWS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18
19
27 20
26 25 24
27829
22
23
27831 27830 21
Sectional view of drive gear electrohydraulic coupling

1. Driven shaft. 15. Seals.
2. Dust ring. 16. Mobile coupling.
3. Seal. 17. Circlip.
4. Circlip. 18. Pin.
5. Bearing. 19. Washer.
6. Circlip. 20. F.W.D engage spring
7. Metal seal segment. 21. Rear axle speed sensor.
8. Metal seal segment. 22. Transmission oil drainage plug.
9. Circlip. 23. Front axle speed sensor.
10. Bearing. 24. Thrust washer.
11. Driving gear. 25. Manifold ring.
12. Gear sleeve. 26. Circlip.
14. Metal seal segments.
NOTE: On installation, apply sealing compound to the surfaces X (see Section 27, Chapter 1).
20
4 3 2 1
25978
6
Control cylinder oil delivery union and front grooved sleeve
L. Axial clearance of sleeve (3). 11. Union.

1. Circlip. 12. Seal.
2. Adjustment shim. 13. O--ring seal.
3. Sleeve. 14. Rigid pipe.
4. Circlip. 15. O--ring seal.
5. Flat washer. 16. Manifold ring.
6. Bolt. 17. O--ring seal.
7. Plug. 18. Rigid pipe.
8. Flat seal. 19. O--ring seal.
9. Union. 20. Drive gear housing.
10. Flat seal.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
27832
14
10 13
15
16
17
18
27833
7
Sectional view of drive gear with mechanical coupling.
1. Driven shaft. 10. Driving gear.

2. Dust ring. 11. Thrust washer.
4. Circlip. 13. Coupling sleeve.
5. Bearing. 14. Transmission oil drainage plug.
6. Circlip. 15. Control pad.
7. Circlip. 16. Seal.
8. Thrust washer. 17. External control lever.
9. Bearing. 18. Lever return spring (17).
NOTE: On installation, apply sealing compound to the surfaces X (see Section 27, Chapter 1).
OVERHAUL
Op. 23 101 26
TRANSMISSION SHAFTS AND GUARD
(TN55S, TN65S AND TN75S)
Removal
WARNING
To remove, proceed as follows.
1. Remove the front ballast (3), if fitted, using a hoist

and two steel cables (1), extract the pin (2) and
remove the ballast.
27786
9
2. Attach the bracket 294078 (1) to the spacers
50162 (see page 4).
27787
10
3. Unscrew the retaining bolts and remove the right
and left--hand (1) guards.
27798
11
4. Extract the circlip (2) and slide back on the sleeve
(1).
27799
12
5. Unscrew: the pin (1) and the 4 bolts (2), recover-
ing the pin and lower bracket.
27800
13
6. Using a hydraulic jack, slightly raise the bracket
(1), remove the circlip (2), recover the half bush-
ings (3) and remove the aforementioned bracket
(1).
27823
14
transmission shaft rear guard.
8. Extract the rear circlip and slide the sleeve (1)

back on the splined shaft.
9. Unscrew the central support bolts and extract the

transmission shaft.
Installation
To re--install the transmission shaft and relative
guards, proceed as follows.
27802
15
WARNING
Always use appropriate tools to align hardware
holes. NEVER USE YOUR FINGERS OR HANDS.
-- Fit the complete transmission shaft and secure in

position.
-- Fit the rear guard and secure in position.
-- Fit the front protective bracket and secure in posi-

tion with the half bushing and relative circlip.
-- Fit the pin and lower staff and secure in position.
-- Fit the left and right--hand guards.
-- Remove the bracket 294078 together with the

bracket 50162.
-- Assemble the front ballast and secure in position.
Op. 23 101 26
TRANSMISSION SHAFTS AND GUARD
(TN55D, TN65D AND TN75D)
Removal
WARNING
To remove, proceed as follows.
1. Unscrew the front, central and rear retaining

bolts and remove the transmission shaft guard
(1).
27801
16
2. Extract the rear circlip and unscrew the sleeve (1)
back on the splined shaft.
3. Unscrew the central support bolts and extract the

transmission shaft.
Installation
To re--fit the transmission shaft and relative guard,
proceed as follows.
WARNING
holes. NEVER USE YOUR FINGERS OR HANDS. 27802
17
-- Fit and secure the transmission shaft in position.
-- Fit and secure the guard.

Op. 23 101 40 -- 23 202 50
DRIVE GEAR HOUSING
Removal
WARNING
1. Carry out operation 23 101 26: Transmission

shafts and guard, only removal (see page 9).
2. Remove the drainage plug and collect the oil in

a suitable container.
25628
18
3. Remove the sensor guard cover (1) on the drive
gear housing (electrohydraulic drive gear).
25980
19
4. Unscrew the retaining bolts (1) on the sensors (2)
and remove from the drive gear housing (electro-
hydraulic drive gear).
5. Detach the drive gear engagement control lever
(mechanical drive gear).
25981
20
6. Unscrew the eight drive gear housing retaining
bolts (1) on the transmission gearbox.
25982
21
7. Remove the drive gear housing (1) from the
transmission gearbox.
Installation
To re--fit the drive gear housing, proceed as follows.
WARNING

page 3. 25983
-- Carefully clean the contact surfaces. 22
-- Apply the sealing compound (approx. 2 mm in

thickness), as shown in Section 27, Chapter 1.
-- Fit the drive gear housing on the transmission

gearbox.
-- Re--fit the two speed sensors, securing in posi-

tion with the two retaining bolts (electrohydraulic
drive gear).
-- Connect the drive gear engagement control lever

(mechanical drive gear).
-- Replace the transmission oil drainage plug.
-- Carry out operation 23 101 26: Transmission

shafts and guard, only installation (see page 10).
-- Refill the rear transmission gearbox (for products

and quantities, see Section 00).
Op. 23 101 42
Disassembly (Mechanical Only)
WARNING
Proceed as follows.

2. Carry out operation 23 101 40: Drive gear hous-

ing, only removal (see page 14).
3. Remove the dust ring (1) and seal (2).

25984
23
4. Remove the circlips and the ball bearings (1)
from the housing.
25985
24
5. Remove the circlip (5) and washer (4), extract the
pin (3) and remove: the external lever (6), the in-
ternal lever (2) and the coupling pad (1).
1
2
6
3
4
27834 5
25
6. Extract the coupling sleeve (1), remove the circlip
(3) and remove: the washer (4), the gear unit (5) 1
and the shaft (2).
2
Assembly (Mechanical Only)
To refit the drive gear housing, proceed as follows. 3
WARNING
holes. NEVER USE YOUR FINGERS OR HANDS. 4
-- Insert the shaft in the housing, then assemble the 27835 5

gear unit, washer and circlip.
26
-- Fit the internal lever, the external lever, the cou-
pling pad, securing in position by means of the
washer and relative circlip.
-- Fit the bearing and relative circlips.
-- Use tool 294098 to fit the seal and dust ring (use
the spacer to fit the dust ring).
-- Carry out operation 23 101 40: Drive gear hous-

ing, only installation (see page 15).

25989
27
Disassembly (Electrohydraulic Only)
WARNING
Proceed as follows.

2. Carry out operation 23 202 50: Drive gear hous-

ing, only removal (see page 12).
3. Remove the dust ring (1) and seal (2).
25984
28
4. Remove the circlips and ball bearings (1) from
the seatings.
25985
29
5. Drive out the spiral roll pin (1) installed on the op-
posite end of the shaft. Simultaneously hold the
gland nut and turn the shaft counterclockwise un-
til the gland nut is free of the shaft. Slide off the
oil delivery pipe.
NOTE: The spiral roll pin prevents rotation of the

gland nut during shaft operation.
25986
30
6. With tool 50141 (see page 5) and an extracting
tool applied to the end of the shaft, remove the
gears, the bearing, the D.D. coupling unit and the
oil delivery manifold.
7. Using a hydraulic press and tool 50161 (see
page 5), compress the spring, manipulating the
washer, extract the retaining ring and remove the
spring.
Move the end of the piston (mobile coupling 16,
fig. 5) to remove it from the housing.
25988
X --
31
Assembly (Electrohydraulic Only)
To refit the drive gear housing, proceed as follows.
WARNING
-- Check all parts and replace if worn.
-- Check the seals and the metal seal segments, re-

placing if necessary.
-- Lubricate all parts. 25989
32
NOTE: The seals (13 and 15, page 4) must be in-
serted in their respective housings as quickly as pos-
sible in order to avoid deformation, using (respective-
ly) tools 294049 and 294050.
-- Insert the piston in the seating.

-- Using a press and tool 50161 fit the spring, wash-
er and retaining ring.
-- Fit the shaft, the oil delivery manifold, the D.D.
coupling assembly and the bearing in the drive
gear housing.
-- Fit the oil delivery union and secure the shaft by
means of the circlip.
-- Fit the bearing and relative circlips.
-- Using tool 294098, fit the seal and dust ring (use
the spacer to fit the dust ring).
-- Carry out operation 23 202 50: Drive gear hous-
ing, only installation (see page 12).
Chapter 2 -- Auto FWD, Calibration and Diagnostics
CONTENTS

Description and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Automatic FWD Fault Codes Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Faults Code Decoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
HH Menu Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
H3 -- System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
H4 -- Software Revision Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
H5 -- Control Switches Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
H8 -- Deleting Data From the Non--Volatile Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
H9 -- Voltmeter Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
HD -- FWD Engagement Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
HF -- Errors Stored in the Non--Volatile Storage of the ECU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
First Start--Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
ECU Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
PTO and FWD Electronic Control Unit Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

AUTOMATIC FWD FAULT CODES
INDICATION
Faults Code Decoding

the indicator (1) identifies the error code in six
phases:
nent transmission of the error code; 26319
2. 2 second pause; 1
3. n... flashes to indicate the first figure of the fault
code;
4. 1 second pause;
fault code;
6. 3 second pause.
The control unit only indicates one code at a time,
giving priority to the most serious faults.
If a higher priority fault occurs while a lower priority
IMPORTANT: If a fault disables the automatic four--

wheel drive function, the corresponding code will
take precedence over other codes that were pre-
viously indicated; these codes will be saved by the
system.
code
second
digit 1
warning
fault
au t code co
composition
pos t o
21
CALIBRATIONS
Calibration unit use
Errors code
fault condition can be displayed while in HH mode.
2
HH MENU ACCESS
1. Turn switch (1) to A (OFF) and connect the CDU
294084 to the diagnosis socket (red connector)
under the right hand console panel.
1
10006109
3
2. By holding down the H MENU key (1) on the CDU,
turn switch (1, fig. 2) to C to start the engine.
3. After a brief pause, the display (2) shows:
HH MENU
H5
4. Release the H MENU key (1) on the CDU).
5. Select the required H menu by pressing the H H
MENU key (1) the correct number of times to dis- MENU
play the relative code on the display (2), e.g.: 1 2 3 4
once to access H1, five times to access H5, etc.
Each time key (1) is pressed, the display (2) MDB0751A
shows the H code obtained, i.e.: H1, H2 etc.
Remember that after the HF MENU, the count re- 4
starts from HH.
After a brief pause (2 seconds) the ECU enters
the procedure of the selected menu.
the following pages.
If the operator presses key (1) while an H menu
is in use, the menu is abandoned and the display
6. Turn switch (1) to A to stop the engine.

The CDU 294084 gives access to the following me-

nus:
H3 --
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
H4 --
SOFTWARE REVISION LEVEL
H5 --
CONTROL SWITCHES DIAGNOSTICS 5
H8 --
DELETE DATA SAVED IN THE NON--VOL-
HD -- FWD ENGAGEMENT POSITION
ATILE MEMORY
NOTE: The tractor can only be used in the H9 menu.
H3 -- System Configuration
This section is used to read or modify ECU configura-
tion. The configuration is saved in the Non--Volatile
Memory (NVM) and is automatically registered the H3
first time the tractor is used.
However, for maintenance purposes, this menu al-
lows the configuration saved in the NVM to be viewed
and manually modified. H
MENU
-- Select the H3 menu, as described on page 3, the
1 2 3 4
display (2) shows the configuration in use.
-- NONE = Only occurs if the module has not yet MDB0751A
been used: after an EEPROM delete operation

(H8). This configuration will never be displayed 6
as a current configuration, as the system starts
with a self--programmed configuration at the first
start--up.
-- FWD = Only FWD present.
-- FWD--PTO = Both FWD and front PTO present.
-- To exit from this menu without modifying the con-
figuration mode, press the H MENU key (1), the
display (2) shows:
HH MENU H3
To change the configuration mode, proceed as fol-
lows.
H
-- Use key (3) to change the mode displayed: each MENU
time the key is pressed, the display (2) changes,
1 2 3 4
passing from the NONE mode to FWD--PTO to
FWD and then to NONE mode once more. MDB0751A
-- When the required mode is displayed, press and 7

hold down key B (4) for at least 5 seconds.
-- Whilst key B (4) is pressed, the display (2) car-
ries out a reverse countdown of the remaining
time, at 1 second pauses, starting from:
STORE 5s
STORE 4s
STORE 3s
STORE 2s
STORE 1s
-- After 5 seconds, the display (2) shows:

STORED
-- Release key (4).
NOTE: If key B (4) is released while the display (2)

is carrying out the reverse countdown, the display re-
turns to the mode selected.
-- Switch off the engine by turning switch (1) to A

(OFF), this allows the new configuration to be
saved.
NOTE: Selecting the NONE mode results in ECU

auto--reconfiguration at the next start up. Follow the
instructions shown on page 28 to ensure correct
configuration.
Even if any of the available modes can be selected,
incorrect mode selection can lead to an illuminated
indicator fault or inefficient tractor operation.
8
H4 -- Software Revision Level
The H4 menu displays the revision level of the soft-
ware installed in the ECU, as follows.

H4
display (2) shows the following information.
-- Product identity NA
-- Software revision level (release) 00.01 H
-- hardware level 02.00 MENU
1 2 3 4
-- menu level HHMENU
MDB0751A
-- The parameters are shown in sequence, dis-
played for two seconds. After the last display, the
module returns to the HH level. 9
The hardware level refers to the ECU hardware ver-

sion and is saved with the ECU boot--loader: a new
functional software download will not modify this val-
ue.
-- Switch off the engine by turning the switch (1,
fig. 8) to A (OFF).
H5 -- Control Switches Diagnosis

This module is requested by the Diagnostics Menu
to check for eventual control module switch and ana-
log input circuit status changes.
A status change, for the analog inputs, means that
a fixed threshold has been exceeded.
The display (2) shows a d and a number each time n. Switch or analog input
a status change occurs.
d20 FWD automatic mode switch
The number indicates on which circuit the status
d21 FWD manual mode switch
change has taken place.
d22 Brake: LH pressure switch
If the same circuit has two consecutive status
changes, the message on the display (2) changes to d23 Brake: RH pressure switch
d0 when the second change occurs.
d24 Front PTO switch
-- Switch off the engine by turning the switch (1, d25 Upward slope switch
fig. 8) to A (OFF).
d26 Steering switch
d27 Downward slope switch
d28 Reverse gear status
d29 Flashing emergency switch
H8 -- Deleting Data From the Non--Volatile
Memory (NVM) (EEPROM)
This menu sets the Non--Volatile Memory values
(NVM) (EEPROM=Electrically Erasable Program-
mable Read Only Memory) on pre--set values. The
H8
NVM is a memory storing application, where configu-
ration parameters and all faults are saved. The
memory is saved even if the module is without a pow- H
er supply, i.e.: the battery is disconnected. MENU
This menu should only be used when a module is
1 2 3 4
transferred from one tractor to another.
MDB0751A
10
ERASE?
-- To interrupt the deleting operation, press the
H MENU key (1).
-- To proceed, press key B (4) and hold down for
5 seconds.
Whilst key B (4) is pressed, the display (2) car-
time, at 1 second pauses.
ERASE 5s
ERASE 4s
ERASE 3s
ERASE 2s
ERASE 1s
ERASED
On completion of the deleting procedure, release key
B (4).
NOTE: If key (4) is released during the reverse

countdown on display (2), the display returns to the
start of the menu, displaying: ERASE?.

(OFF).
NOTE: By deleting the NVM, all the saved configura-

tion information is also deleted, results in ECU auto--
reconfiguration at the next start up. Follow the in-
structions shown in “First start-up” on page 11 to
ensure correct configuration.
11
H9 -- Voltmeter Functions
This menu checks the power supply voltage status,
the frequency and the solenoid valve circuits.
H9
NOTE: FWD can be used in this menu.
The display (2) shows a channel number followed by H

a typical value (a numerical value between 0--1023) MENU
corresponding to the unit of measurement. 1 2 3 4
Example: 9 → 1023
where: MDB0751A
9 channel number.
12
1023 typical value corresponding to a unit of mea-
surement.
-- the display (2) can show up to 24 channels by
pressing key Y (3) or the RH brake pedal, or key
B (4) or the LH brake pedal.
fig. 11) to A (OFF).
Channel Description Unit Value

of measurement
1 Control unit power supply (12VH) Counts (ADC) 423 to 843
2 Front transmission speed frequency (VAA) Hz --
3 Rear transmission speed frequency (VAP) Hz --
4 PTO electromagnetic clutch solenoid frequency Hz --
5 FWD manual engagement switch Counts (ADC) 0 -- 1023
6 FWD automatic engagement switch Counts (ADC) 0 -- 1023
7 Front PTO switch Counts (ADC) 0 -- 1023
8 Fuse F9 Counts (ADC) > 410
9 Left Brake Pedal Switch Counts (ADC) 1023 -- 0
10 Right Brake Pedal Switch Counts (ADC) 1023 -- 0
11 Slope sensor on level Counts (ADC) 102 to 380
11 Slope sensor on upward slope Counts (ADC) 630 to 898
11 Slope sensor on downward slope Counts (ADC) 629 to 381
13 FWD engagement solenoid valve current Counts (ADC) 122 to 766
14 Front PTO engagement solenoid valve current Counts (ADC) 162 to 926
15 Steering sensor Counts (ADC) 197 to 929
16 Engine Speed rpm --
17 Reverse gear status switch Counts (ADC) 0 -- 1023
ADC = Analog/digital converter.
HD -- FWD Engagement Position
The HD menu allows the display (2) to show the posi-

tion and operation of the FWD.
HD
-- Select the HD menu, as described on page 3, the
display (2) shows the position of the FWD en-
gagement synchroniser.
H
-- POS=4ENG FWD engaged. MENU
1 2 3 4
or
MDB0751A
-- POS=4DIS FWD disengaged.
13
-- Press key Y (3) to activate the FWD engage-

ment solenoid valve, in this manner FWD is dis-
engaged and the illuminated indicator (1) is OFF.
-- Press key B (4) to deactivate the FWD engage-
ment solenoid valve, in this manner FWD is en-
gaged and the illuminated indicator (1) is ON.
NOTE: In the event of an FWD engaged switch fault, 3

the indicator (1) is not illuminated.
26319
14

(OFF).
15
HF -- Errors Stored in the Non--Volatile Storage
of the ECU
When a fault is detected it is stored in the ECU non--
volatile memory and signalled by the indicator lamp
(2 fig. 16).
-- Select the HF menu, as described on page 3, the
display (2, fig. 16) shows the last fault saved.
Example: E(9) = 15
E= Fault.
(9) = Progressive memory cell. HF
15 = Fault code.
-- Use key B (4) or Y (3) to display eventual faults

saved in cells 1 to 9. H
MENU
When no faults are saved, the display will show: 1 2 3 4
Example: E(9)=00.
MDB0751A

5 seconds. 16

ERASE 5s
ERASE 4s
ERASE 3s
ERASE 2s
ERASE 1s

ERASED

B (4).
NOTE: If key 4 is released while the display (2) is car-

rying out the reverse countdown, the display returns
to the current cell of the buffer memory.

(OFF).
NOTE: If both brake pedals are pressed during this

operation, or a VAA or VAP sensor signal is detected,
the procedure must be interrupted and normal opera-
tion must be resumed.
17
FIRST START--UP
The first start--up procedure must be carried out in

the following cases.
-- Following ECU replacement.

-- Following manual configuration (see H3 MENU).
1. Turn switch (1) to B (ON) without switching on the
engine. 18
2. Indicators (1, 2 and 3) will be illuminated (non--

flashing), after a while indicator (2) will flash to re-
peat the recognised configuration code -- i.e.:
rapid flashing, followed by:
1 flash Only FWD present.

2 flashes Both FWD and front PTO
are present (not available)
3
3. Turn the key (1, fig. 18) to OFF for a few sec-
onds: the configuration is now saved in the Non--
Volatile memory (NVM).
26319
19
TROUBLESHOOTING
WARNING the H8 MENU function (cancellation of the resi-

Notes to help the operator make diagnosis and prob- dent non--volatile memory); also check that the
lem--solving easier. self--configuration operation at the first start--up
(after ECU replacement) is correct.
Requested calibration operations.
1. The measurements taken to read:
voltage; 6. There are two types of faults:
resistance; FAULT RESET: the fault will no longer be dis-
frequency. played if the cause has been eliminated or re-
must be carried out with a digital tester. paired, even without switching off the tractor, but
the relative code will be saved in the non--volatile
memory (see HF MENU);
NOTE: the resistance values shown are valid for a
NO FAULT RESET: the fault remains on the
temperature of 68 °F (20 °C) (ambient temperature).
With higher or lower tractor temperatures, the rela-
tive resistance values shown in the manual should
vary accordingly.
fault reset”) in the non volatile memory (see HF
MENU.
2. The “short to ground” message refers to a resist- 7. In certain cases the fault may also be indicated
ance value of less than 5 ohm (Ω). by the Front Power Take--off alarm lamp, as the
ECU is common.
of service operations, check that the specific 8. The connection references indicate: the wire di-
connections (ECU, sensors, switches etc.) are mension and colour, and the connection pin
correctly connected. number.
A faulty connection could be the cause of incor- Example: 0.5 HL (15)
rect tractor operation. 0.5 = wire dimension;
HL = wire colour;
4. To facilitate problem solving, consult the ECU (15) = connection pin number.
electrical wiring diagram, shown on page 89.
9. The CN19 on the ECU connection (138) indi-
5. If the ECU needs to be replaced, the following cates the relative pin number.
operations must be carried out:
10. The faults are listed in progressive order.
ECU LOCATION
The ECU (3) is for Four--wheel drive and Front Power
Take--off.
27161
NOTE: In this section, the Auto ECM FWD error

codes are divided into two main pages, which face
each other. One page describes the error code, and
the conditions, causes, tests, effects, recovery, and
other pertinent information of the error code, while
the second page displays a flow chart for trouble-
shooting. Becoming familiar with both the error code
description page and the flow chart page, as well as
using them together when performing diagnostic
testing on the Auto FWD, will improve repair capabili-
ty, and reduce the time spent on troubleshooting. In
addition, a third page identifies the connectors in-
volved with that error code.
FAULT CODES
ERROR CODE 11 – ECM 12 VOLT FUSED (F9) SUPPLY.
Conditions:
• When the ignition switch is on, ECM detects voltage at ECM connector pin 19 (prior to s/n 1232544 pin 35)
drops below 12 volts or not present.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is short to ground or open between Battery and Key Switch. Or between Key Switch
and Fuse F9, or across fuse, or between Fuse F9 and ECM connector, pin 19 (prior to s/n 1232544 pin 35)
• Faulty Fuse.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
Effects:
• FWD stays engaged.
• Front PTO is disengaged.
• FWD control is critically disabled; but can be re-enabled by cycling the Ignition Switch, (shutting off the
tractor).
Recovery:
• Cause must be resolved and error must be cleared using the CDU, HF Menu.
FAULT CODE 11

Remove the control panel and the ECU con-
Open the fusebox and check fuse F9. NO nection (138).
Is the fuse blown? NO
YES Is there a +12V reading between pin CN19
(AN) and ground?
Replace fuse F9.
YES
Replace the ECU.

the open circuit.
ERROR CODE 12 – FWD SOLENOID OR ECM DRIVER SHORT CIRCUIT TO 12 VOLTS.
Conditions:
• When the front axle is engaged, (FWD Solenoid de-energized), the FWD Solenoid becomes energized by
a short to 12 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted to 12 volts between ECM connector, pin 8 (prior to s/n 1232544 pin 27) and
solenoid coil terminal. May also be, across solenoid coil terminals, or between solenoid coil terminal and ECM
connector, pin 7 (prior to s/n 1232544 pin 4).
• Faulty FWD Solenoid Coil.
• Faulty ECM; internal ECM Driver is shorted to 12 volts.
Tests:
Effects:
• FWD control is operational; appears to engage as normal, because the protection driver will be switched off;
therefore not supplying the driver with 12 volts.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 12

Remove the control panel and the ECU
connection (138). Is there a +12V reading between pin CN7
Turn the starter key to the ON position. NO (CL) on connection (138) (wiring side) and NO
Is there a +12V reading between pin CN8 ground?
(CB) on connection (138) and ground? YES
YES
Check the wiring between pin CN7 (CL) on
Check the wiring between pin CN8 (CB) connection (138), pin (A1) (CL) on connec-
on connection (138), pin (C1) (CB) on tion (171) and the Four--wheel drive sole-
connection (171) and the Four--wheel dri- noid valve.
ve solenoid valve coil. Eliminate the cause of the short circuit to
+12V.
Replace the ECU.

FAULT CODE 12
**
PAGE LEFT BLANK

ERROR CODE 13 – FWD SOLENOID CIRCUIT SHORT TO GROUND OR

OPEN CIRCUIT OR ECM DRIVER OPEN.
Conditions / Detection:
• When the front axle is disengaged, (FWD Solenoid energized), the FWD Solenoid has a short to ground or
open circuit.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is short to ground or open between ECM connector, pin 8 (prior to s/n 1232544 pin 27)
and solenoid coil terminal. May also be, across solenoid coil terminals, or between ECM connector, pin 7
(prior to s/n 1232544 pin 4) and the solenoid coil terminal.
• Faulty ECM; internal ECM Driver is shorted to ground or open.
Tests:
Effects:
• FWD control is disabled; FWD Solenoid becomes and stays de-energized, engaging the front axle.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 13
Replace the coil if interrupted.
Connect the connection.

Remove the control panel and the ECU Remove the rear left--hand wheel.
connection (138). NO Is the Four--wheel drive solenoid valve con- NO
Between pins CN8 (CB) and CN7 (CL) on nection connected?
connection (138) (wiring side), is the rea- YES
ding ∼ 8 Ω?
YES Using a digital tester, measure the electrical
resistance of the solenoid valve.
NO
YES

CN8 (CB) on connection (138), pin (C1)
(CB) on connection (171) and the solenoid NO
valve?
YES

CN7 (CL) on connection (138), pin (A1) (CL) NO
on connection (171) and the solenoid valve?
YES
Is one of the two wires (CB) and (CL) in short

NO
to ground?
YES

YES
Replace the ECU.

the open circuit.
FAULT CODE 13
**
PAGE LEFT BLANK

ERROR CODE 14 – FWD SOLENOID COIL SHORT CIRCUIT.
Conditions:
• When the front axle is disengaged, (FWD Solenoid energized), the FWD Solenoid has a short circuit.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted between ECM connector, pin 8 (prior to s/n 1232544 pin 27) and ECM
connector, pin 7 (prior to s/n 1232544 pin 4). May also be, across the two coil terminals.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H9, Channel 13 value is above 10 counts. HD shows engaged state.
Effects:
• FWD control is disabled; FWD Solenoid becomes and stays de-energized, engaging in the front axle.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 14
Replace the Four--wheel drive solenoid val-

ve coil if in short.

Remove the control panel and the ECU Remove the rear left--hand wheel and di-
connection (138). NO sconnect the solenoid valve connection.
Between pins CN8 (CB) and CN7 (CL) on NO
Is the solenoid valve electrical resistance ∼
connection (138) (wiring side), is the rea- 8 Ω?
ding ∼ 8 Ω? YES
YES
Are wires (CB) and (CL) in short? NO
YES
Check the wiring between pin CN8 (CB) on

connection (138), pin (C1) (CB) on connec-
tion (171) and the solenoid valve, or betwe-
en pin CN7 (CL) on connection (138), pin
(A1) (CL) on connection (171) and the sole-
noid valve.
YES
Replace the ECU.

FAULT CODE 14
**
PAGE LEFT BLANK

ERROR CODE 18 – ECM 12 VOLT KEYED (12VH) SUPPLY TOO LOW.
Conditions:
• When ignition switch is on, ECM detects voltage at ECM connector pin 9 (prior to s/n 1232544 pin 26) drops
below 9 volts for more than 1 second.
Causes:
• Faulty Battery.
Tests:
Effects:
• FWD and Front PTO control is critically disabled; but can be re-enabled by cycling the Ignition Switch,
(shutting off the tractor). Voltage was too low and all drivers remained open for longer than 1 minute.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 18

Start the engine and bring it up to a speed of NO Check the recharging system and re-
1200 rpm. place the battery or the alternator.
Is battery voltage ∼ 14V?
YES

Remove the control panel and the ECU connection
(138). NO
Turn the starter key to the ON position. cause of the voltage drop.
Is the voltage between CN9 (MN) on connection
(138) and ground ∼ 10 to 14V?
YES
Replace the ECU.

ERROR CODE 19 – ECM 12 VOLT KEYED (12VH) SUPPLY TOO HIGH.
Conditions:
• When ignition switch is on, ECM detects voltage at ECM connector pin 9 (prior to s/n 1232544 pin 26) is above
volts for more than 1 second.
Causes:
• Faulty Battery.
Tests:
Effects:
• All Indicator Lamps are off and FWD stays engaged.
• FWD and Front PTO control is critically disabled; but can be re-enabled by cycling the Ignition Switch,
(shutting off the tractor). This error will automatically clear when voltage drops below 16 volts.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 19

Start the engine and bring it up to a speed of Check the recharging system and re-
1200 rpm. NO place the alternator if the voltage is
Check the battery voltage, using a digital tester. much higher than +14 V.
Is the voltage ∼ 14V?
YES
27161
ERROR CODE 21 – FRONT (VAA) AXLE SPEED SENSOR VOLTAGE TOO HIGH.
NOTE: The two axle speed sensors are located on the right side of the FWD Drop Box. The Rear (VAP) Axle
Speed Sensor is toward the front of the tractor. The Front (VAA) Axle Speed Sensor is toward the rear of the
tractor. VAP is an abbreviation for Velocity Axle Posterior and VAA is Velocity Axle Anterior.
Conditions:
• ECM detects voltage at ECM connector, pin 20 (prior to s/n 1232544 pin 31) is above 4.5 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted to 12 volts between Front (VAA) Axle Speed Sensor terminal #2 and ECM
connector, pin 20 (prior to s/n 1232544 pin 31). May also be, across Front (VAA) Axle Speed Sensor terminal
#1 to terminal #2.
• Faulty Front (VAA) Axle Speed Sensor.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
Effects:
• The FWD control is modified; automatic mode will not work properly. Only manual mode can be used to
engage and disengage front axle. This error will automatically clear when conditions no longer exist.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 21

Remove the rear right--hand wheel. NO Connect the wire.
Is wire (V) on connection (72) on sensor (VAA) con-
nected?
YES
Remove the control panel and connections: (130)

on the ECU and (72) on sensor (VAA). NO Check the wiring and eliminate the
Is there electrical continuity between pin CN20 (V) cause of the open circuit.
on connection (138), pin (B4) (V) on connection
(171) and pin (2) (V) on connection (72)?
YES
Is there electrical continuity between pin CN6 (B)

on connection (138), pin (B5) (B) on connection NO
(171) and pin (3) (B) on connection (72)?
YES

Is there a +12V reading between pin CN20 (V) on NO Replace the sensor (VAA).
connection (138) (wiring side) and ground? Does the fault persist?
YES
YES
Check the wiring and eliminate the cause of the Replace the ECU.
short to +12V.
1
2 1 CN (1)
1 V (2)
1 B (3)
FAULT CODE 21
**
PAGE LEFT BLANK

ERROR CODE 22 – FRONT (VAA) AXLE SPEED SENSOR VOLTAGE TOO LOW.
Conditions:
• ECM detects voltage at ECM connector, pin 20 (prior to s/n 1232544 pin 31) is below 4.5 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted to ground or open between Front (VAA) Axle Speed Sensor terminal #2 and
ECM connector, pin 20 (prior to s/n 1232544 pin 31). May also be, across Front (VAA) Axle Speed Sensor
terminal #3 to terminal #2.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
Effects:
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 22

Remove the rear right--hand wheel.
Disconnect the connection (72) on sensor (VAA)
pin (2) (V). Replace the sensor (VAA).
NO
Remove the control panel and the ECU connection Does the fault persist?
(138). YES
Is wire (V) pin (2) on connection (72) in short to
ground? Replace the ECU.
YES
Check the wiring between pin CN20 (V) on connec-

tion (138), pin (B4) (V) on connection (171) and pin
(2) (V) on connection (72).
1
2 1 CN (1)
1 V (2)
1 B (3)
FAULT CODE 22
**
PAGE LEFT BLANK

ERROR CODE 23 – REAR (VAP) AXLE SPEED SENSOR VOLTAGE TOO HIGH.
Conditions:
• ECM detects voltage at ECM connector, pin 13 (prior to s/n 1232544 pin 18) is above 4.5 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted to 12 volts between Rear (VAP) Axle Speed Sensor terminal #2 and ECM
connector, pin 13 (prior to s/n 1232544 pin 18). May also be, across Rear (VAP) Axle Speed Sensor terminal
#1 to terminal #2.
• Faulty Rear (VAP) Axle Speed Sensor.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
Effects:
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 23

Remove the rear right--hand wheel. NO Connect the wire.
Is wire (VN) on connection (73) on sensor (VAP)
connected?
YES
Remove the control panel and connections: (138)

on the ECU and (73) on sensor (VAP). NO Check the wiring and eliminate the
Is there electrical continuity between pin CN13 cause of the open circuit.
(VN) on connection (138), pin (A4) (VN) on con-
nection (171) and pin (2) on connection (73)?
YES

on connection (138), pin (B5) (B) on connection NO
(171) and connection (73) on sensor (VAP)?
YES

Is there a +12V reading between pin CN13 (VN) on NO Replace the sensor (VAP).
connection (138) (wiring side) and ground? Does the fault persist?
YES
YES
Check the wiring and eliminate the cause of the Replace the ECU.
short to +12V.
1
2
1 CN (1)
1 VN (2)
1 B (3)
FAULT CODE 23
**
PAGE LEFT BLANK

ERROR CODE 24 – REAR (VAP) AXLE SPEED SENSOR VOLTAGE TOO LOW.
Conditions:
• ECM detects voltage at ECM connector, pin 13 (prior to s/n 1232544 pin 18) is below 4.5 volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted to ground or open between Rear (VAP) Axle Speed Sensor terminal #2 and
ECM connector, pin 13 (prior to s/n 1232544 pin 18). May also be, across Rear (VAP) Axle Speed Sensor
terminal #3 to terminal #2.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
Effects:
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 24

Disconnect the connection (73) on sensor (VAP)
pin (2) (VN). Replace the sensor (VAP).
Remove the control panel and the ECU connection NO
(138). YES
Is wire (VN) (pin 2) on connection (73) on sensor
(VAP) in short to ground? Replace the ECU.
YES
Check the wiring between pin CN13 (VN) on con-

nection (138), pin (A4) (VN) on connection (171)
and pin (2) (VN) on connection (73).
1
2 1 CN (1)
1 VN (2)
1 B (3)
FAULT CODE 24
**
PAGE LEFT BLANK

ERROR CODE 25 – FRONT (VAA) AXLE SPEED SENSOR FREQUENCY TOO HIGH.
Conditions:
• ECM detects frequency at ECM connector, pin 20 (prior to s/n 1232544 pin 31) is above 7500 hertz.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; poor connections, (loose pins) or improper connections at axle speed sensors, (front and rear
reversed).
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
Effects:
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 25

NO Clean the contacts and connect the
Are connection (72) and the wiring on sensor
connection.
(VAA) correctly connected?
YES
Are pins (B4) (V), (C4) (CN) and (B5) (B) on con- NO
nection (171) correctly connected?
YES
Disconnect the control panel.

Is connection (138) on the ECU correctly connec- NO
ted?
YES
Replace the sensor (VAA).

YES
Replace the ECU.
1
2 1 CN (1)
1 V (2)
1 B (3)
FAULT CODE 25
**
PAGE LEFT BLANK

ERROR CODE 26 – REAR (VAP) AXLE SPEED SENSOR FREQUENCY TOO HIGH.
Conditions:
• ECM detects frequency at ECM connector, pin 13 (prior to s/n 1232544 pin 18) is above 7500 hertz.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; poor connections, (loose pins) or improper connections at axle speed sensors, (rear and front
reversed).
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
Effects:
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 26

NO Clean the contacts and connect the
Is connection (73) and the wiring on sensor (VAP)
connection.
YES
Are pins (A4) (VN), (C4) (CN) and (B5) (B) on con- NO
nection (171) correctly connected?
YES

Is connection (138) on the ECU correctly connec- NO
ted?
YES
Replace the sensor (VAP).

YES
Replace the ECU.
1
2 1 CN (1)
1 VN (2)
1 B (3)
FAULT CODE 26
**
PAGE LEFT BLANK

ERROR CODE 27 – FRONT (VAA) AXLE SPEED SENSOR AND REAR (VAP) AXLE SPEED
SENSOR READINGS INCONSISTENT.
Conditions:
• When the front axle is engaged, (FWD Solenoid de-energized), and the following conditions occur
simultaneously: Front (VAA) Axle Speed Sensor frequency is above 5 hertz, Rear (VAP) Axle Speed Sensor
frequency is above 5 hertz, and the Slip Rate is above 50%.
Causes:
• Faulty sensor to drop box gear distance.
• Faulty Front (VAA) or Rear (VAP) Axle Speed Sensors.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H9, Channel 2 and 3.
Effects:
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 27

Connect tool 294084 and select the H9 Turn the starter key to the OFF position.
MENU. Remove the rear right--hand wheel.
NO NO
Start the engine and advance at a speed Is the wiring on the sensor (VAA) disconnec-
of ∼ 10 km/h. ted?
Is there a frequency reading in channel (2) YES
on the H9 MENU?
YES Connect the wiring.
Disconnect the sensor (VAA).

Using a digital tester, measure the voltage
at connection (72) on the sensor between NO
pin (1) (CN) (+) and pin (3) (B) (--).
Is the voltage reading ∼ +12V?
YES
Replace the sensor (VAA).
Check wires (CN) and (B) on connection

(72) as far as the soldered connection, and
eliminate the cause of the open circuit.

Is there a frequency reading in channel (3) Remove the rear right--hand wheel. NO
NO
on the H9 MENU? Is the wiring on the sensor (VAP) disconnec-
YES ted?
YES
Replace the ECU.
Connect the wiring.
Disconnect the sensor (VAP).

at connection (73) on the sensor between NO
pin (1) (CN) (+) and pin (3) (B) (--).
Is the voltage reading ∼ +12V?
YES
Replace the sensor (VAP).
Check wires (CN) and (B) on connection

(73) as far as the soldered connection, and
eliminate the cause of the open circuit.
FAULT CODE 27
1
2
1 CN (1)
1 V (2)
1 B (3)
1 CN (1)
1 VN (2)
1 B (3)
PAGE LEFT BLANK

ERROR CODE 28 – MANUAL AND AUTO MODE SWITCHES CLOSED (ON)

AT THE SAME TIME.
Conditions:
• The ECM detects simultaneous 12 volts at ECM connector, pins 2 and 27 (prior to s/n 1232544 pins 8 and
17).
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted to 12 volts between FWD (Manual / Auto mode) Control Switch and ECM
connector, pins 2 and 27 (prior to s/n 1232544 pins 8 and 17), or across the FWD (Manual / Auto mode)
Control Switch terminals.
• Faulty FWD (Manual / Auto mode) Control Switch.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H9, Channel 5 (Manual) and 6 (Auto) are above 10 counts when FWD (Manual / Auto mode) Control Switch
is off.
• H5, shows incorrect transition between (Auto) d0 to d20 or (Manual) d0 to d21.
Effects:
• The FWD control is modified; ECM will distinguish between which switch mode is shorted and not shorted,
then use that functional mode to engage and disengage the front axle. This error will automatically clear
when conditions no longer exist.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 28

Disconnect the Four--wheel drive switch.
Using a digital tester, check the efficiency of the NO Replace the switch.
switch.
Does it work?
YES

(138).
Are pins CN2 (CN) and CN27 (CL) on connection NO Replace the ECU.
(138) (wiring side) in short circuit?
YES

switch and the ECU.
FAULT CODE 28
140
PAGE LEFT BLANK

ERROR CODE 33 – SLOPE (TILT OR INCLINOMETER) SENSOR VOLTAGE TOO HIGH.
Conditions:
• The ECM detects voltage at the ECM connector, pin 3 (prior to s/n 1232544 pin 14) is above ? volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted to 12 volts between Slope (Tilt or Inclinometer) Sensor and ECM connector,
pin 3 (prior to s/n 1232544 pin 14), or Slope Sensor is not grounded at ECM connector, pin 6 (prior to s/n
1232544 pin 24).
• Faulty Slope (Tilt or Inclinometer) Sensor.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H9, Channel 11 is above 400 counts.
• H5 doesn’t display the correct d0 to d25 and d0 to d27 transition.
Effects:
• The FWD control is modified; during downhill (forward or reverse), in Auto FWD mode, the front axle will not
engage. This error will automatically clear when conditions no longer exist.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 33

Remove the right--hand guard under the da- Connect the connection and/or relati-
NO
shboard to access the tilt sensor. ve wires.
Are the connection and relative wires connected?
YES
Disconnect the connection (149) on the sensor.

(138). NO Check the wiring and eliminate the
Is there electrical continuity between pin CN3 (GV) cause of the open circuit.
on connection (138) and pin (2) (GV) on connec-
tion (149) on the sensor?
YES

on connection (138) and pin (3) (B) on connection NO
(149) on the sensor?
YES

Replace the tilt sensor.
Is there a +12V reading between pin CN3 (GV) on NO
connection (138) and ground?
YES
YES
Replace the ECU.
short to +12V.
FAULT CODE 33
149
0.5 C (1)
0.5 GV (2)
0.5 B (3)
PAGE LEFT BLANK

ERROR CODE 34 – SLOPE (TILT OR INCLINOMETER) SENSOR VOLTAGE TOO LOW.
Conditions:
• The ECM detects voltage at the ECM connector, pin 3 (prior to s/n 1232544 pin 14) is below ? volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted to ground or open between Slope (Tilt or Inclinometer) Sensor and ECM
connector, pin 3 (prior to s/n 1232544 pin 14), or Slope Sensor is not grounded at ECM connector, pin 6 (prior
to s/n 1232544 pin 24).
• Faulty Slope (Tilt or Inclinometer) Sensor.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H9, Channel 11 is below ? counts.
• H5 doesn’t display the correct d0 to d25 and d0 to d27 transition.
Effects:
• The FWD control is modified; during downhill (forward or reverse), in Auto FWD mode, the front axle will not
engage. This error will automatically clear when conditions no longer exist.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 34

Remove the right--hand guard under the da-
shboard to access the tilt sensor.
Disconnect the connection (149) on the sensor. Replace the tilt sensor.
NO
Remove the control panel and the ECU connection Does the fault persist?
(138). YES
Is pin (2) (GV) on connection (149) on the sensor
in short to ground? Replace the ECU.
YES
Check the wiring between pin (2) (GV) on connec-

tion (149) on sensor and pin CN3 (GV) on connec-
tion (138).
FAULT CODE 34
149
0.5 C (1)
0.5 GV (2)
0.5 B (3)
PAGE LEFT BLANK

ERROR CODE 35 – FWD SOLENOID OR ECM PROTECTION DRIVER SHORT CIRCUIT TO 12

VOLTS.
Conditions:
• During power up, (FWD Solenoid energized = front axle disengaged), the ECM detects voltage at the ECM
connector, pin 7 (prior to s/n 1232544 pin 4) is above ? volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted to 12 volts between FWD Solenoid and ECM connector, pin 7 (prior to s/n
1232544 pin 4).
• Faulty ECM; internal ECM Protection Driver is shorted to 12 volts.
Tests:
• H9, Channel 13 is above ? counts.
Effects:
• The FWD control is normal; but protection driver is inoperable, so FWD won’t engage at start up. The FWD
Alarm Lamp will blink.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 35
27161
ERROR CODE 36 – FWD SOLENOID OR ECM PROTECTION DRIVER SHORT CIRCUIT TO

Conditions:
• During power up, (FWD Solenoid energized = front axle disengaged), the ECM detects voltage at the ECM
connector, pin 7 (prior to s/n 1232544 pin 4) is below ? volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted to ground or open between FWD Solenoid and ECM connector, pin 7 (prior
to s/n 1232544 pin 4).
• Faulty ECM; internal ECM Protection Driver is shorted to ground or open.
Tests:
• H9, Channel 13 is below ? counts.
Effects:
• The Protection Driver is inoperable, FWD stays engaged, and FWD Alarm Lamp will blink.
• The FWD control is critically disabled; but can be re-enabled by cycling the Ignition Switch, (shutting off the
tractor).
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 36

Remove the rear left--hand wheel. NO
Connect the connection on the sole-
Is the solenoid valve connection connected? noid valve.
YES
With the solenoid valve connection disconnected,

NO Replace the coil if interrupted.
is the electrical resistance on the coil ∼ 8 Ω?
YES

(138).
NO cause of the open circuit
Is there electrical continuity between pins CN8
(CB), CN7 (CL) on the ECU and the solenoid val-
YES
ve?
YES
Replace the ECU.

ERROR CODE 41 – STEERING ANGLE SENSOR VOLTAGE TOO LOW.
Conditions:
• The ECM detects voltage at the ECM connector, pin 28 (prior to s/n 1232544 pin 12) is below ? volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted to ground or open between Steering Angle Sensor and ECM connector, pin
28 (prior to s/n 1232544 pin 12).
• Faulty Steering Angle Sensor.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H9, Channel 15 has no values.
• H5, doesn’t display the correct transition from d0 to d26.
Effects:
• FWD control is modified; front axle will not be disengaged when turning. This error will automatically clear
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 41

NO Connect the connection.
Is the steering sensor two--way connec-
tion (SB) and (CN) connected?
YES
Disconnect the connection.

When the wheels are straight, is the rea- Check the wiring up to the sensor and elimi-
ding between the two pins, (male) (sensor NO nate the cause of the open circuit.
side) ∼ 500 Ω? Does the fault persist?
YES YES
Replace the Steering sensor.

Is one of the two wires connected to nection (138).
NO NO
ground? Is there electrical continuity between pin
YES CN28 (SB) on connection (138) and the
connection on sensor (SB)?
Is pin CN28 (SB) in short to ground? NO
YES

the open circuit.
Replace the ECU.

FAULT CODE 41
PAGE LEFT BLANK

ERROR CODE 42 – STEERING ANGLE SENSOR VOLTAGE TOO HIGH.
Conditions:
• The ECM detects voltage at the ECM connector, pin 28 (prior to s/n 1232544 pin 12) is above ? volts.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is shorted to 12 volts between Steering Angle Sensor and ECM connector, pin 28 (prior
to s/n 1232544 pin 12).
• Faulty Steering Angle Sensor.
• Faulty ECM.
Tests:
• H9, Channel 15 is above ? counts.
• H5, doesn’t display the correct transition from d0 to d26.
Effects:
• FWD control is modified; front axle will not be disengaged when turning. This error will automatically clear
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 42

Disconnect the two--way connection (SB) and
(CN) the relative steering sensor. NO
With the wheels straight, measure the electrical re- cause of the short circuit.
sistance between the two pins (male) on the con-
nection towards the sensor.
YES

(138).
With the sensor connection disconnected, measu- NO Replace the ECU.
re the voltage between pin CN28 (SB) on connec-
tion (138) and ground.
Is there a +12V reading?
YES
Check the wiring between pin CN28 (SB) on con-

nection (138), pin (C5) (SB) on connection (171)
and the connection on the steering sensor.
FAULT CODE 42
**
PAGE LEFT BLANK

ERROR CODE 48 – FWD SOLENOID COIL OR ECM DRIVER SHORT CIRCUIT TO GROUND
OF OPEN CIRCUIT.
Conditions:
• When the front axle is disengaged, (FWD Solenoid energized), the FWD Solenoid Coil or ECM Driver has
a short to ground or open circuit.
Causes:
• Faulty wiring; circuit is short to ground or open between ECM connector, pin 8 (prior to s/n 1232544 pin 27)
and solenoid coil terminal, or across solenoid coil terminals. May also be between ECM connector, pin 7(prior
to s/n 1232544 pin 4) and the solenoid coil terminal.
• Faulty ECM; internal ECM Driver is shorted to ground or open.
Tests:
Effects:
• FWD control is disabled; FWD Solenoid becomes and stays de-energized, engaging the front axle.
Recovery:
FAULT CODE 48

Disconnect the solenoid valve connec-
tion. NO Is the wire (CB) in short to ground? NO
One of the two wires on the solenoid valve YES
is in short to ground?
YES Check the wiring between the solenoid val-
ve connection, pin (C1) (CB) on connection
Check the wiring and eliminate the cause (171) and pin CN8 (CB) on connection (138)
of the short to ground. on the ECU.
Replace the ECU.

FAULT CODE 48
**
PAGE LEFT BLANK

PTO AND FWD ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT INPUT/OUTPUT
WIRING DIAGRAM
1 Starter switch.
2 FWD in automatic selection ON indicator signal.
3 FWD alarm indicator signal.
4 FWD ON indicator signal.
5 FWD pressure switch sensor ON.
6 FWD solenoid valve.
7 Bodywork ground.
8 Sensors ground.
9 Power ground.
10 Troubleshooting unit 294084 connection.
11 Pushbutton Y.
12 Pushbutton B.
14 Troubleshooting unit 294084.
15 Front wheels speed sensor (VAA).
16 Rear wheels speed sensor (VAP).
17 Slope sensor.
18 Steering sensor.
19 RH brake pressure switch.
20 LH brake pressure switch.
21 To fuse 9 (control unit power supply).
22 Mechanical shuttle in reverse gears sensor switch.
23 FWD switch (automatic).
24 FWD switch (manual).
25 Shuttle reverse gears signal from Power Shuttle control unit.
26 Battery.
FWD ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT INPUT/OUTPUT WIRING DIAGRAM
2
24
1
23 3
4
22
5
26
21
20
25
19
18
17
16 6÷8
15
14
13
11 10 9 8 7
12
MPD2820A
SECTION 25 -- FRONT AXLE (FWD) -- CHAPTER 1 1
Chapter 1 -- Front Axle (Super Steer Axle)
CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
25 102 15 Bevel Drive and Front Axle Differential Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
25 102 20 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
25 104 34 Front Differential Lock Clutch Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Wheel Hub Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2 SECTION 25 -- FRONT AXLE (FWD) -- CHAPTER 1

Planetary Gears (TN55S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Planetary Gears (TN65S, TN70S, TN75S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Wheel Hub Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
25 108 38 Wheel Hub and Steering Knuckle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
SPECIFICATIONS
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . steering, load bearing
structure, pivoting at centre
Vertical pivoting angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11°
Horizontal pivoting angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21°
Bevel drive -- differential
Pinion--ring gear ratio 18.64 mph (30 Km/h):
-- model TN 55D/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/42 = 1:4.66
-- models TN 65D/S, TN 70D/S and TN 75D/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8/30 = 1:3.75
Pinion--ring gear ratio 24.85 mph (40 km/h):
-- model TN 55D/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/40 = 1:3.63
-- models TN 65D/S, TN 70D/S and TN 75D/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. 10/30 = 1:3
Backlash between bevel drive: (mm) 0.0059 to 0.0078 (0.15 to 0.20)
Ratio between front wheel revs and rear wheel bevel drive revs 18.64 mph
(30 Km/h):
-- model TN 55D/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.402 (1) -- 1.33 (3)
-- models TN 65D/S, TN 70D/S and TN 75D/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.378 (1) -- 1.306 (3)
Ratio between front wheel revs and rear wheel bevel drive revs 24.85 mph
(40 km/h):
-- model TN 55D/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.394 (2) -- 1.323 (4)
-- models TN 65D/S, TN 70D/S and TN 75D/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.374 (2) -- 1.303 (4)
Thickness of bevel pinion position adjustment spacer rings
(18, page 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. 0.0984 -- 0.1023 -- 0.1062 -- 0.1102 --
(mm) 0.1141 -- 0.1181 -- 0.1220 -- 0.1259 --
0.1299 -- 0.1338 -- 0.1377 -- 0.1417 --
0.1456 (2.5 -- 2.6 -- 2.7 -- 2.8 -- 2.9 --
3.0 -- 3.1 -- 3.2 -- 3.3 -- 3.4 -- 3.5 -- 3.6 --
3.7)
Thickness of pinion bearing adjustment spacer (17, page 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. 0.0984 -- 0.1003 -- 0.1023 -- 0.1043 --
(mm) 0.1062 -- 0.1082 -- 0.1102 -- 0.1122 --
0.1141 -- 0.1161 -- 0.1181 -- 0.1200 --
0.1220 -- 0.1240 -- 0.1259 -- 0.1279 --
0.1299 -- 0.1318 -- 0.1338 -- 0.1358 --
0.1377 -- 0.1397 -- 0.1417 -- 0.1437 --
0.1456 -- 0.1476 -- 0.1496 -- 0.1515 --
0.1535 -- 0.1555 -- 0.1574 -- 0.1594 --
0.1614 -- 0.1633 -- 0.1653 -- 0.1673 --
0.1692 -- 0.1712 -- 0.1732 -- 0.1751 --
0.1771 -- 0.1791 -- 0.1811 -- 0.1830 --
0.1850 -- 0.1870 -- 0.1889 (2.5 -- 2.55 --
2.6 -- 2.65 -- 2.7 -- 2.75 -- 2.8 -- 2.85 --
2.9 -- 2.95 -- 3.00 -- 3.05 -- 3.1 -- 3.15 --
3.2 -- 3.25 -- 3.3 -- 3.35 -- 3.4 -- 3.45 --
3.5 -- 3.55 -- 3.6 -- 3.65 -- 3.7 -- 3.75 --
3.8 -- 3.85 -- 3.9 -- 3.95 -- 4.00 -- 4.05 --
4.1 -- 4.15 -- 4.2 -- 4.25 -- 4.3 -- 4.35 --
4.4 -- 4.45 -- 4.5 -- 4.55 -- 4.6 -- 4.65 --
4.7 -- 4.75 -- 4.8)
Thickness of ring gear position adjustment spacer (8 page 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. 0.0354 -- 0.0393 -- 0.0433 -- 0.0472 --
(mm) 0.0511 -- 0.0551 -- 0.0590 -- 0.0629 --
0.0669 -- 0.0708 -- 0.0748 -- 0.0787
(0.9 -- 1 -- 1.1 -- 1.2 -- 1.3 -- 1.4 -- 1.5 --
1.6 -- 1.7 -- 1.8 -- 1.9 -- 2)
Backlash between side pinions and side gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. 0.0059 (0.15)
(mm)
Thickness of side pinion thrust washers (2, page 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. 0.0578 to 0.0602 (1.470 to 1.530)
(mm)
Thickness of side gear thrust washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. 0.0590 -- 0.0629 -- 0.0669 -- 0.0708
(mm) (1.5 -- 1.6 -- 1.7 -- 1.8)
(continued)
MAIN DATA
(cont)
Diameter of cross pin (5) for side pinions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.8637 to 0.8645 (21.939 to 21.960)
Diameter of cross pin bore in side pinions (4): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.9031 to 0.8685 (22.040 to 22.061)
Clearance between cross pin and bores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.0031 to 0.0048 (0.080 to 0.122)
Differential lock in. (mm) 0.0031 to 0.0048 (0.080 to 0.122)
Free length of spring (9, page 12): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) ∼75
Spring length under load of 1370 to 1566 N
(307.98 to 352.07 lbs.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) ∼41
Axle shafts and steering knuckles in. (mm)
Diameter of outer axle shafts (10, page 11) in correspondence with bushes
(11): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 1.7706 to 1.7716 (44.975 to 45.000)
Inside diameter of installed bushes (11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 1.7755 to 1.7785 (45.100 to 45.175)(1)
Clearance between axle shafts and bushes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.0039 to 0.0078 (0.100 to 0.200)
Interference fit between bushes and respective bores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.0025 to 0.0050 (0.064 to 0.129)
Thickness of steering knuckle bearing adjusters (14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.0039 -- 0.0059 -- 0.0078 -- 0.0098 --
0.0118 (0.10 -- 0.15 -- 0.20 -- 0.25 --
0.30)
(1) 18.64 mph (30 km/h) normal 4--WD models (TN..D).

(2) 24.85 mph (40 km/h) normal 4--WD models (TN..D).
(3) 18.64 mph (30 km/h) automatic 4--WD models (TN..S).
(4) 24.85 mph (40 km/h) automatic 4--WD models (TN..S).
Epicyclic final drives
Gear ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. 12 : (12 + 60) = 1 : 6

(mm)
Thickness of driven gear shims (12, page 11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. 0.0303 to 0.0327
(mm) (0.77 to 0.83)
Axle pivot
Diameter of front--upper pin (3, page 13) of axle pivot . . . . . . . . . in. 1.5734 to 1.5742
(mm) (39.965 to 39.985)
Inside diameter of front--upper bush (4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. 1.5743 to 1.5762

(mm) (39.988 to 40.037) (1)
Clearance between pin (3) and bush (4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. 0.0001181 to 0.0028346
(mm) (0.003 to 0.072)
Diameter of front--lower pin (7) of axle pivot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. 1.5738 to 1.5747

(mm) (39.975 to 40.000)
Inside diameter of front--lower bush (6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. 1.5911 to 1.5834

(mm) (40.416 to 40.221) (1)
Clearance between pin(7) and bush (6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. 0.005748 to 0.009685

(mm) (0.146 to 0.246)
(1) Measurement to be obtained without reaming

TIGHTENING TORQUES
Tightening torque
PART Thread
Nm ft. lbs.
Front axle
Nut for axle--shaft retaining bolt (C1, page 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 12X1.25 77 to 93 56 to 68
Ring gear to differential gearbox retaining bolt (C2) . . . . . . . . . . . . M 12X1.25 119 to 144 87 to 106
Differential locknut safety tab retaining bolt (C3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 10X1.25 36 to 51 26 to 37
Final drive assembly support to axle casing retaining bolt (C4) . . M 12 X 1.25 119 to 144 87 to 106
Bevel pinion shaft locknut (C5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 35X1.5 294 216
Pipe unions on power control hydraulic cylinders (C6) . . . . . . . . . . -- 44 32
Pipe unions on manifolds for steering control hydraulic cylinders 18 to 19
(C7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 25 to 27
Tie rod ball joint locknuts (C8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 142 104
Tie rod ball joint locknuts (C10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 196 144
Steering knuckle pin retaining bolt (C11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 10X1.25 64 47
Rim to hub retaining bolt (C12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 18X1.5 170 to 206 125 to 151
Epicyclic final drive housing retaining bolt (C13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 10X1.25 55 to 67 40 to 49
Wheel hub bearing locknut (C14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 70 X 2 392 289
Differential lock device retaining bolt (C1 page 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 10X1.25 60 to 70 44 to 52
Differential lock control hydraulic fitting (C2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 73 54
Differential lock control hydraulic fitting (C3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 44 32
Brake control cylinder retaining bolt (C4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 10X1.25 66 to 73 49 to 54
Differential housing support cap bolt (C5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 12X1.25 119 to 144 88 to 106
Upper pivot bearing locknut (C6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 95 X 2 20 15
Upper pivot pin locknut (C7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 35X1.5 290 to 320 214 to 236
Bearing support retaining bolt (C8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 12X1.5 170 to 208 125 to 153
Front pivot support retaining bolt (C9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 14 X 1.5 136 to 165 100 to 122
Lower pivot pin retaining bolt (C10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 14 X 1.5 136 to 165 100 to 122
Axle to engine support retaining bolt (C11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 24 X 2 310 to 380 229 to 280
Rear pivot pin retaining bolt (C12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 18X1.5 417 to 504 308 to 372
Side pinion support to cover retaining bolt (C13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 12X1.25 119 to 144 88 to 106
Rim and cover to hub retaining bolt (C14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 18X1.5 170 to 206 125 to 151
TIGHTENING TORQUES (CONT.)
C5 -- 294 Nm C6 -- 44 Nm
(216 ft. lbs.)
C4 -- 119 to 144 Nm
C7 -- 25 to 27 Nm
(87 -- 106 ft. lbs.)
(18 -- 19 ft. lbs.)
25509
C2 -- 119 to 144 Nm C3 -- 36 to 51 Nm C1 -- 77 to 93 Nm
(87 -- 106 ft. lbs.) (26 -- 37 ft. lbs.) (56 -- 68 ft. lbs.)
C10 -- 196 Nm C13 -- 55 to 67 Nm

(144 ft. lbs.) (40 -- 49 ft. lbs.)
C11 -- 64 Nm
(47 ft. lbs.)
C8 -- 142 Nm (104 ft. lbs.) C12 -- 170 to 206 Nm
(125 -- 151 ft. lbs.)
25510
C14 -- 392 Nm
(289 ft. lbs.)
1
C3 --44 Nm
(32 ft. lbs.)
C2 --73Nm
(53 ft. lbs.)
25512
C4 -- 66 -- 73 Nm
25511 C1 -- 60 -- 70 Nm
(48 -- 53 ft. lbs.)
(44 -- 51 ft. lbs.)
(125 -- 153 ft. lbs.)

(229 -- 280 ft. lbs.)
(.15 ft. lbs.)
(88 -- 106 ft. lbs.) (214 -- 236 ft. lbs.)
(100 -- 122 ft. lbs.)

(100 -- 122 ft. lbs.)
C14 -- 170 -- 206 Nm (308 -- 372 ft. lbs.)

(125 -- 151 ft. lbs.)
C13 -- 119 -- 144 Nm

25515 (88 -- 106 ft. lbs.)
2
SPECIAL TOOLS
293400 Universal gauge for positioning of
Warning -- The operations described in this section front bevel drive pinion.
can only be carried out with ESSENTIAL tools indi- X 293544 Wrench for front differential case bear-
cated by an (X). ing threaded adjustment ring.
To work safely and efficiently and obtain the best re- X 295030 Wrench for front axle wheel hub bear-
sults, it is also necessary to use the recommended ing retaining nut. (55 series tractors
specific tools listed below and certain other tools, may need modification to tool. See
which are to be made according to the drawings in- Figure 7).
X 294149 Wheel hub seal key (fitting without
front brakes).
X 294150 Wheel hub seal key (fitting with front
brakes).
293460 Front axle overhaul stand.
X 293857 Front axle pivot pin removal tool.
X 292161 Front axle pivot bearing outer ring re-
X 294078 Front axle and engine support brack-
moval tool.
et.
X 292220 Tool for measurement of rolling drag
X 294079 Splined wrench for pinions.
torque of front axle bearings.
X 294080 Wrench for pinion nut.
292870 Universal kit for testing oil pressure for
X 293391 Pinion bearing adjustment tool. front axle differential lock engage-
X 293510 Universal gauge for pinion bearing ad- ment.
justment. 294089 Pivot pin unit guide dowel.
Tool to be made for adjustment of bevel drive pinion;

to be used in conjunction with tool 293391 [Mark tool
No. 50118 -- Measurement in mm (in.)].
Construct in UNI C40 material.
(.393)
(1.377)
(1.88)
26135
3
for models. TN 55S, TN 65S, TN 70S and TN 75S [Mark
no. 50162 on the tool -- Measurement in mm (in.)]. (.807)
(.728)

Make 4 spacers.
(1.377)
27821
4
(.196)
(.393)
(3.936)
(.787)
27892
5
Tool to be made for front axle wheel disassembly--assembly [Mark tool with No. 50165 -- Measurement in mm
(in.)]
(.196)
(.393)
(3.936)
(.590)
27893
6
Tool to be made for front axle gear unit cover disassembly--assembly
[Mark tool with No. 50169 -- Measurement in mm (in.)]
(.591)
(4.055)
27919
7
Modification to make to tool 295030 (Measurement in mm (in.)].
SECTIONAL VIEWS
10 11 12 X
G
25517
14 13
15 15
16 17
18
18
X
H4
L X
25216
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8
Cross--sectional view of front axle
G = 0.5 to 1 mm (0.0196 to 0.0393 in.). Gasket (13) 9. Ring gear bearings adjustment nut.
assembly clearance in seat. 10. Axle shaft.
H4 = 95 mm (3.740 in.). Nominal distance between ring 11. Axle shaft bush (10).
gear axis and greater diameter of the pinion. 12. Shims for driven gears of epicyclic.
1. Ring gear bearing adjustment nut. 13. Seal.
2. Side gear thrust washers. 14. Steering knuckle adjustment plates.
3. Side gears. 15. Ball joint.
4. Side pinions. 16. Seal.
5. Cross pin for side pinions. 17. Thickness of bevel pinion bearing adjustment
spacer.
6. Ring gear.
18. Thickness of bevel pinion position adjustment
7. Differential housing.
spacer.
8. Bevel pinion.
NOTE: On assembly apply a bead of sealing compound to the surfaces X as indicated on page 32.
20
G X
13
19 11 12
18 G
17 25518
16
14
25519
15
9
Cross--sectional view of front axle with differential lock
G = 0.5 to 1 mm (0.0196 to 0.0393 in.). Gasket (13) 10. Differential lock control piston.
assembly clearance in seat. 11. Axle shaft.
H4 = 95 mm (3.740 in.). Nominal distance between ring 12. Axle shaft bush (11).
gear axis and greater diameter of the pinion. 13. Shims for driven gears of epicyclic unit.
1. Ring gear bearing adjustment nut. 14. Seal.
2. Side gear thrust washers. 15. Steering knuckle adjustment plates.
3. Side gears. 16. Bevel pinion.
4. Side pinions. 17. Ball joint.
5. Ring gear. 18. Seal.
6. Cross pin for side pinions. 19. Thickness of bevel pinion bearing adjustment
spacer.
7. Differential housing.
20. Thickness of bevel pinion position adjustment
8. Thickness of ring gear bearings adjustment shim.
spacer.
9. Differential lock disengagement spring.
10
Cross--sectional view of front axis pivot
1. Front pivot bearing ring nut. 6. Front lower pivot bush.

2. On assembly the housing must be filled with AM- 7. Front lower pivot pin.
BRA GR 9 grease. 8. Universal joint.
3. Front upper pivot pin. 9. Rear pivot bearing.
4. Front upper pivot bush. 10. Rear pivot pin.
5. Drive shaft bearing support.
1 2 3 4 5
G
25520
7 6 X A
2 3 4 5
GG
25521
7 6
X B
11
Cross--sectional view of wheel hub (fitting with brake)
A. Model TN 55D/S. 3. Brake drive piston.
B. Models TN 65D/S, TN 70S and TN 75D/S. 4. Brake friction disk.
G. = 0.0590 to 0.0787 in. (1.5 to 2 mm). Gasket (6) as- 5. Brake support hub.
sembly clearance in seat. 6. Brake seal.
1. Axle shaft. 7. Steering knuckle adjustment plate.
2. Brake control pipes.

TN 55S, TN 65S, TN 70S and TN 75S tractors are The axle can pivot both vertically 11° and horizontally
supplied with rigid front axles, comprising: bevel 21° because of the front and rear double pivoting ac-
drive differential, stub axles and stub axles and tion.
lateral epicyclic final drives.
OVERHAUL
Op. 25 100 30
FRONT AXLE ASSEMBLY
Removal
DANGER
equipment
lifted.
Proceed as follows:

moval (see Section 10).

shaft and guard, only removal (see Section 23).
3. Disconnect the electrical connection (2) and re-

move the steering cylinder control pipe (1) (on 13
both sides).
4. Unscrew the brake control piping (1) on the axle

from the union (2).
1 2
25543
14
5. Unscrew the differential lock control piping union
(1).
27895
15
6. Loosen the retaining nut and remove the tie rod
(1) from the seat.
16
7. Pass a nylon sling (1) under the axle support, at-
tach to the hoist and allow the hoist to take the
strain. Position a hydraulic jack (2) under the axle
17
8. Remove the grub screw (2) and unscrew the cov-
er (1).
18
9. Remove the securing ring and unscrew the axle
pivot retaining ring nut (1).
19
10. Loosen the universal joint bearing support retain-
ing bolts on the axle.
11. Remove tool 294078 (1) and the relative
spacers.
20
12. Move the axle forwards, remove the universal
joint (1), complete the removal operation and
position a stand (2) under the front axle support.
21
13. Unscrew the retaining bolts (3) on the brackets (1
and 2) and the lower pivot pin (4) retaining bolt, ex-
1 2
tract the pin and remove the brackets (1 and 2).
4 3
25554
22
14. Remove the circlip, loosen the retaining bolts and
extract the pivot pin (1). Unscrew the retaining
1 2
bolt, extract the pivot pin (2) and recover the
steering control cylinder (3). Repeat this opera-
tion on both steering control cylinders.
3
25555
23
15. With the axle attached to the sling and supported
by the hydraulic jack, remove the wheels (1). 1
Installation
To refit the front axle on the tractor, proceed as
follows.
WARNING
-- Refer to the instructions on page 13 for the posi- 25556
tioning of the various parts.

24
page 5.
-- Attach the axle to a hoist and position a hydraulic
jack under the rear part of the axle.
-- Fit the wheels.
-- Fit the two steering control cylinders.
-- Attach the brake control pipes and connect them
to the central union.
-- Connect the pipes to the steering control cylin-
der.
-- Assemble the universal joint, securing in position
with the ring nut.
-- Fit tool 294089 (1) on the pivot pin (2) to facilitate
pin insertion into the bearing seat. 1
-- Fit the universal joint bearing support on the axle
support.
-- Raise the tractor from the front using the hoist
and nylon sling, position the axle and lock in posi-
tion with the relative nut. Fit bracket 294078 to-
gether with the spacers 50162 to prevent pivot- 2
ing.
-- Screw on the bearing cover to the prescribed
torque value and tighten the grub screw. (The
cover must be filled with AMBRA GR 9 grease).
25557
-- Fit the steering control tie rod (on both sides).
-- Connect the front differential lock control pipe. 25
-- Connect the front brake control pipe.
-- Connect the steering sensor electrical connec-
tion and the steering control pipe.
-- Carry out operation 10 406 10: Radiator, only
-- Carry out operation 23 101 26: Transmission shaft
and guard, only installation (see Section 23).
Op. 25 102 15
BEVEL DRIVE AND FRONT AXLE
DIFFERENTIAL HOUSING
Removal
WARNING
fingers between parts. Wear suitable safety clothing 1 2
Proceed as follows.
1. Fit tool 294089 (2) on the pivot pin, attach a chain

(1) to the hoist, place the axle on the stand
3
293460 (4) and secure in position.
2. Loosen the retaining bolts and remove the two 4

track rods (3). 25558
26
3. Remove the plug (1) and drain the oil from the
epicyclic final drive. Drain the oil from the axle
casing.
25559
27
4. Unscrew all of the epicyclic final drive casing re-
taining bolts (1). 1
25560
28
5. Using an extractor (1), fitted on the oil drainage
plug, detach the epicyclic final drive casing (2)
2
and remove.
25561
29
6. Remove the securing ring (1) on the wheel hub
bearing lock ring (2). 2
1
25597
30
7. Remove the wheel hub bearing lock ring using
wrench 295030 (1) recover the final drive fixed 1
gear.
25598
31
8. Detach the wheel hub and steering knuckle (1).
1
25566
32
9. Loosen the axle--shaft retaining bolt (1).
1
25567
33
10. Extract the axle--shaft (1) complete with the uni-
versal joint and bearing housing bush.
1
25568
34
11. Remove the retaining bolts (1) holding the bevel
drive--differential housing to the axle casing, in-
1
serting two guide pins into the bores.
25569
35
12. Connect the bevel drive--differential housing to
the hoist and detach from the axle casing.
Installation
To refit the bevel drive--differential housing to the axle
casing, proceed as follows.
WARNING
-- Refer to the illustrations on pages 11 and 12 for

the positioning of the various parts.
25570
on page 5. 36
-- Before reassembling the bevel drive--differential
housing to the axle casing, carefully clean and
degrease the mating surfaces, then apply seal-
ing compound (approx. 2 mm) along the marked
line shown in the figure.
-- Refit the axle--shafts, locking in position with the

relative bolts.
-- Assemble the wheel hubs, steering knuckles and

carry out adjustment operations as described on
page 47.
-- Fit the final drive fixed gear, locking in position

with the ring nut as described on page 44.
-- Carefully secure the ring nut.
-- Before reassembling the epicyclic final drive cas-

ing, carefully clean and degrease the mating sur-
faces, then apply sealing compound (approx. 2
mm) along the marked line shown in the figure.
-- Fill up the lateral final drives and the axle casing

27157
(for recommended products and quantities see
page 7, section 00).
-- Fit the track rods.
37
Op. 25 102 20
Disassembly
WARNING
fingers between parts. Wear suitable safety clothing 1 2
If the differential lock is installed it must be removed.
Proceed as follows.
1. Unscrew and remove the ring nut (2) stop tab (1).
Using wrench 293544, loosen the ring nut (2).
25576
38
2. Unscrew the differential housing cap bolts (1).

1
25577
39
3. Disassemble the differential (2) recovering the
adjustment shims (1) positioned on the opposite 2
1 3
side from the adjustment ring nut (3).
25578
40
4. Remove the securing ring on the drive pinion lock
ring and unscrew, using the wrench for nut
1 2
294080 (2) and the pinion spline wrench 294079
(1).
25579
41
5. Recover: the grease seal ring (1), the ring nut (2),
the drive pinion ring nut (3) and the dust seal ring
1 2 3 4
(4).
6. Extract the drive pinion shaft (3) together with the

spacer (1) and adjustment shim (2). Remove the
ball joint and bush from the rear. 25587
42
Assembly
To reassemble the front axle bevel drive assembly, 1 2 3
proceed as follows.
WARNING

on page 4.
25588
-- Carry out the adjustments described on pages
43
26 to 32.
-- Fit the drive pinion complete with inner bearing
rings, spacers, adjustment shims, ball joint and
bush, dust seal ring, pinion ring nut, seal ring and
ring nut.
-- Carefully secure the drive pinion ring nut.
-- Fit the crown, complete with adjustment shim
and housing cap.
-- Fit the ring gear bearing adjustment ring nut stop
tab.
-- Assemble the differential lock, as described on
page 33.
Adjustments
7
Adjusting the preloading on the bevel drive shaft

6
bearings
7. Clamp tool 293391 (1) in a vice. Slide tool spacer
50118 (2) onto the tool (see tools 293391). Slide
a bearing (3) from the bevel assembly onto the
tool. Slide the spacer (4) from the bevel assembly
onto the tool. Slide the remaining bearing (5)
from the bevel assembly onto the tool. Slide the
top cone (6) from the tool onto the tool threads.
Tighten the tool nut (7) to 1.2 Nm (10 in. lbs).
44
8. Using a micrometer, measure distance (H1) be-
tween the upper surface of the top cone (6) and
the top of the threaded pin (7) of tool 293391 (1). 7
45
9. Disassemble the parts mentioned above, lubri-
cate the bearings with engine oil and then re-
assemble the parts, excluding the bearing
spacer (3, fig. 44), in the bevel drive--differential
housing, complete with outer bearing races, held
in the vice. H2
10. Fully tighten the nut on the tool 293391 (1) while
turning the tool to ensure that the bearings are
seated correctly.
11. Using the micrometer, measure the distance (H2)
between the upper surface of the top cone (1)
and the top of the threaded pin of tool 293391.
12. The thickness of the adjustment shim (17 or 19)
required is given by: 46
S = H2 -- H1 + 0.05 mm
If necessary, round this value up to the nearest
0.05 mm.
NOTE: -- On completing the adjustment, do not re-

move the adjustment tool from the bevel drive--differ-
ential housing: leave in place for adjustment of the
drive pinion position.
Determining the thickness of the drive pinion
position adjustment shim
Proceed as follows.
13. Install tool 293400 (1 in the bevel drive--differen-
tial housing, complete with outer bearing rings,
differential bearings adjustment shim, circlip and 1 2
differential housing caps.
14. Screw the cones (2) of tool 293400 (1) in or out
in order to position the micrometer shaft in the di-
rection of the inner bearing ring and eliminate
end float between the cones and the outer rings
of the differential bearings.
15. Adjust the micrometer so that the shaft is in con-
tact with the inner bearing ring and measure the
distance (H3) obtained.
25594
47
16. Determine the correct distance (H5) between the
ring gear axis and the large diameter base of the
pinion:
H5 = H4 ± C
where:
H4 = 95 mm
Nominal distance between the ring gear axis and
the large diameter base of the pinion (see pages
10 and 11).
C = correction value stamped on pinion preceded
by a + or -- sign (if other than 0), to be added to
or subtracted from the nominal distance (H4) ac-
cording to the sign.
17. The thickness of the adjustment shim (18, page
10 and 20, page 11) will be given by:
S = H3 -- H5
where:
H3 = the distance measured using the microme-
ter;
H5 = corrected nominal distance between the
pinion.
Example.
-- Distance measured using micrometer H5 = 98 mm.
-- Nominal distance between ring gear axis and
large diameter base of H4 = 95 mm.
-- Correction value C = + 0.2 mm.
-- Corrected nominal distance
H5 = 95 + 0.2 = 95.2 mm
-- Thickness of adjustment shim
-- S = 98 -- 95.2 = 2.8 mm.
-- Correction value C = -- 0.2 mm.
-- Corrected nominal distance
H5 = 95 -- 0.2 = 94.8 mm.
-- S = 98 -- 94.8 = 3.2 mm.
-- Correction value C = 0 mm. 1 2 3
-- Corrected nominal distance H5 = H4 = 95 mm.
-- S = 98 -- 95 = 3 mm.
18. Remove tools 293391 and 293400 from the bev-

el drive housing.
19. Install the drive pinion (3) complete with: inner

bearing rings, spacer (1), adjustment shims of
the previously determined thickness, ball joint 25588
and relative bush . Lubricate all parts before 48

installing
20. Position the wrench 294080 (2) for the pinion nut
and the wrench 294079 (1) for the splined pinion. 1 2
21. Using the torque wrench on wrench 294079 (1)
while holding the pinion in position by means of
wrench 294080 (2) tighten the pinion nut to a
torque value of 382 Nm (281 ft. lbs.) while simul-
taneously rotating the pinion shaft to ensure that
the bearings are seated correctly.
22. With torque wrench 293952 (2) fitted on wrench

2934079 (1), check that the pinion rolling torque,
without oil seal (16, page 10 or 18, page 11) and 25595
relative dust seal, is 0.5 to 1 Nm (4.4 to 8.8 in. lbs.). 49

If the rolling torque is less than the prescribed val-
ue, fit a thinner adjustment shim (17, pages 10 or
18, page11) if the torque is greater than the pre-
scribed value, fit a thicker adjustment shim.
23. Unscrew the nut and fit the oil seal (16, page 10 or
18, page11) and the relative dust seal ring. Tighten
the nut to a torque value of 294 Nm (216 ft. lbs.)
while simultaneously rotating the pinion shaft to en-
sure that the bearings are seated correctly.
24. With torque wrench 293952 (2) fitted on wrench

294079 (1) check that the pinion rolling torque, 2
1
with the oil seal and relative dust seal, is ≤ 0.50
Nm (4.4 in. lbs.).
Finally, carefully secure the nut.
25596
50
Adjustment of the differential bearings and
checking the backlash between the pinion and 2
1
ring gear.
Proceed as follows.
25. Install the differential assembly (2) complete with
bearings, adjustment shim (1) and relative circlip
in the bevel drive--differential housing.
25578
51
26. Install the differential support caps and the ring
nut (2), tighten the relative bolts (1) to a torque 1 2
value of 59 Nm (43 ft. lbs.), then loosen and re--
tighten to a torque of 20 Nm (14 ft. lbs.).
25597
52
27. With the bearings perfectly lubricated, rotate the
ring gear and, at the same time, tighten the ring
nut using wrench 293544 (1) to a torque value of 1
39 to 59 Nm (28 to 43 ft. lbs.) to take up the axial
play between the components.
28. Measure the backlash between pinion and ring

gear, using a 1/100 dial gauge perpendicular to
the outer edge of a tooth on the ring gear (1).
25598
53
29. Repeat the measurement in a further two posi-
tions 120° apart and compare the average of the
three values (Gm) with the prescribed normal
1
backlash: 0.15 to 0.20 mm average value: 0.18
mm (.006 to .008 ins., average value .007 ins.).
If the measured backlash exceeds the pre-
scribed value, fit a thinner adjustment shim (8,
page 11).
The thickness of the adjustment shim (8, page
11) to be fitted in the bevel drive--differential
housing is given by:
25599
54
S = Sp -- {(Gm -- 0.18 ) x 1.35}
where:
Sp = thickness of test shim installed in the bevel

drive--differential housing;
Gm = average backlash measured between the

sides of the teeth of the bevel drive.
If the backlash measured is less than the pre-

scribed value, it will be necessary to fit a thicker
adjustment shim (8, page 11) the value being giv-
en by:
S = Sp + {(0.18 -- Gm) x 1.35}
where:
Sp = thickness of test shim installed in the bevel 1


sides of the teeth of the bevel drive
30. Install a shim (8, page 11) of the calculated thick-

ness and with a 1/100 scale dial gauge posi-
tioned perpendicular to the outside edge of one
of the ring gear teeth, check that the backlash be-
tween the pinion and the ring gear is within the
prescribed tolerance limits 0.15 to 0.20 mm (.006
to .008 ins.). 25598
55
31. Using wrench 293544 (1) turn the adjustment

ring nut and check using torque wrench 293952 2
1
(2), that the rolling resistance torque of the differ-
ential, as measured in the same conditions used
to check only the pinion, is:
A2 = A1 + 1 to 1.5 Nm (8.8 to 13 in. lbs.)
where:
A2 = pinion--differential rolling resistance torque;
A1 = rolling resistance torque of pinion only as

previously measured;
25596
0.1 to 1.5 Nm (8.8 to 13 in. lbs.) = rolling resist- 56

ance torque of differential only measured at the
end of the pinion, using wrench 294079 (1) and
torque wrench 293952 (2).
32. Tighten the cap bolts (1) to a torque value of
119 to 144 Nm (87 to 106 ft. lbs.). 2
1
33. Fit the safety plate, screwing the adjustment ring
nut in or out, to reach the nearest notch.
34. Attach the bevel drive--differential to the axle cas-

ing after having carefully cleaned and degreased
the mating surfaces and apply sealing com-
pound [approx. 2 mm (.078 ins.)] along the
marked line shown in the figure below.
25597
57
Mastic application diagram for assembly of bevel drive

unit and epicyclic final drive unit.
The types of mastic to use are listed on page 1, section 00.
27157
58
Op. 25 102 24
FRONT AXLE DIFFERENTIAL
In case of differential assembly overhaul it is

necessary to adjust the backlash between the teeth
of the planet pinions and the side gears.
Proceed as follows.
1. Thoroughly clean the components of the differ-

ential to remove any traces of oil that would
otherwise prevent accurate backlash measure-
ment.
2. Install the two side gears without thrust washers.
3. Fit the planet pinions complete with thrust wash-

ers and pins and screw down the pin retaining
bolts by a few turns to hold the pins in place.
4. Position a dial gauge on the differential housing.
5. Move the left hand side gear to bring it into full

contact with the planet pinion and then push it up
against the differential housing, reading the end-
float (Gs) on the dial gauge.
24597
59
6. Repeat the above operations to measure the

endfloat on the right hand side gear (Gd).
The normal backlash between the sides of the
side gear and planet pinion teeth is 0.15 mm
(0.0059 in.). Considering that between this value
and the side gear endfloat there is an average ra-
tio value of 1:1.7
The side gear endfloat, corresponding to the nor-
mal backlash between the teeth, will be:
0.15 x 1.7 = 0.25 mm (0.0098 in.).
Therefore the shims to be inserted in the differen-
tial housing are given by:
Ss = Gs -- 0.25 mm (0.0098 in.) for the left hand
24598
side gear;
60
Sd = Gd -- 0.25 mm (0.0098 in.) for the right hand
side gear;
7. Install shims as near as possible to the calculated

value and, using a dial gauge and following the
previously described procedure, check that the
endfloat of the left and right hand side gears is
approximately 0.25 mm (0.0098 in.).
Op. 25 104 34
FRONT DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CLUTCH
ASSEMBLY
1
Disassembly
WARNING
Clamp the differential assembly in the vice, then

proceed as follows.
25571
1. Detach the oil delivery union (1) on the differen- 61
tial lock.
2. Remove the upper (1) and lower (2) bolts of the

external differential lock bell housing (3), and
1
install two bolts (minimum length 70 mm [2.75
in.]) in their place. Gradually unscrew the remain-
ing bell housing (3) bolts so as to allow the gradu-
al extension of the differential lock release
spring.
NOTE: -- It is necessary to install two bolts with a

minimum length of 70 mm (2.75 in.), because the 3
normal bell housing bolts are not long enough to al- 2
low the spring to extend to its full free length. 25572
62
Unscrew the 70 mm (2.75 in.) bolts last of all.
3. Disassemble the clutch bell housing (1), com-

plete with the differential lock release spring and 1
differential lock control piston.
25573
63
4. Remove the differential lock sleeve clip.
1
25574
64
5. Remove the differential lock sleeve (1).
1
25575
65
6. Remove the circlip securing the differential lock
piston, recover the sliding sleeve with the two
thrust washers.
66
7. Gently tap the piston out of the clutch bell hous-
ing.
67
8. Remove the differential lock piston.
Assembly
To refit the differential lock assembly, proceed as
follows.
WARNING
-- Refer to the instructions on page 11 for the posi-

-- Respect the tightening torque values prescribed 68

on page 4.
-- Carefully check the condition of the two O ring

seals installed on the piston.
-- Install the piston, complete with O--ring seals.
-- Install the sliding sleeve and the relative thrust

washers.
-- Assemble the differential lock sleeve and clip.
-- Fit the clutch bell housing complete with spring

and piston, securing in position following the re-
moval instructions on page 33.
-- Refit the oil delivery union.

Op. 25 108 30
FRONT EPICYCLIC FINAL DRIVE WITH
BRAKE
Removal
WARNING
Front epicyclic final drive removal and installation 1 2

can be carried out with the axle detached and
positioned on the stand 293460, or with the axle fitted
on the tractor. If the operation is performed with the
axle fitted on the tractor, a support stand must be
positioned under the engine sump.
Proceed as follows
1. Fit tool 294089 (2) on the pivot pin, attach a chain 3

4
track rods (3) (if fitted). 69
epicyclic final drive.
25559
70
taining bolts (1).
1
25560
71
plug, detach the epicyclic final drive casing (2) 1 2
and remove.
25561
72
6. Remove the circlip (1) and extract the outer brake
disk (2).
73
7. Recover the hub (1) on the brake disk.
1
25563
74
8. Unscrew the retaining bolts and remove the drive
fixed gear (1) using two bolts as extractors.
1
Installation
To refit the front epicyclic final drive, proceed as
follows.
WARNING

the positioning of the various parts. 25562
75
on page 4.
-- Refit the drive fixed gear.
-- Refit the brake disk hub.
-- Fit the outer brake disk and secure in position.

faces, then apply sealing compound (approx. 2
mm) along the marked line shown on page 31.
-- Assemble the epicyclic final drive casing, com-

plete with gears.
-- Fill up the front epicyclic final drive (for recom-

mended products and quantities see page 6,
section 00).
WHEEL HUB SEAL
Removal
WARNING
Proceed as follows
1. Carry out operation 25 108 30 Front epicyclic fi-

nal drive with brake, only removal (see page 36).
2. Remove the hub casing (1).
76
3. Remove the seal and assemble the tool columns

(1) 294149.
77
4. Carefully clean the seat and position the seal (1),
ready for fitting.
NOTE: The external surface on the seal (1), indi-

cated by the arrow, does not require lubrication.
78
5. Fit the seal (2) fully tightening (1) the screws on
tool 294149.
Installation
To refit the wheel hub parts, proceed as follows.
WARNING
-- Remove tool 294149 from the hub.
-- Carry out operation 25 108 30 Front epicyclic fi-

nal drive with brake, only installation (see page
79
37).
Op. 25 108 30
FRONT EPICYCLIC FINAL DRIVE
Removal
WARNING
Front epicyclic final drive removal and installation

positioned on the stand 293460, or with the axle fitted 1 2
Proceed as follows.
1. Fit tool 294089 (2) on the pivot pin, attach a chain

3

track rods (3). 25558
80
epicyclic final drive.
25559
81
taining bolts (1).
1
25560
82
plug, detach the epicyclic final drive casing (2) 1 2
and remove.
25561
83
1
25597
84
7. Remove the lock nut on the wheel hub bearings
using wrench 295030 (1). 1
25598
85
8. Remove the wheel hub (1) together with the final
drive fixed gear (2). Recover all disassembled 1 2
parts.
Installation
follows.
ATTENTION
25599
the positioning of the various parts. 86
PLANETARY GEARS (TN55S)
NOTE: When disassembling planetary carrier as-

sembly, keep all parts for each shaft together to facili-
tate reassembling.
Disassembly
1. From outside of the planetary cover (1), remove 1 2
the three cap screws (2) holding the planetary
gear support.
20030469
87
2. From inside planetary cover (1), remove plane-
tary gear support (2). 1
20030470
88
3. Remove planetary gear (1), the two thrust wash-
ers (2), and the twenty two needle roller bearings
(3). 3
Repeat this procedure for remaining planetary gears.
2 1
20030471
89
4. If necessary to replace planetary pins (1), re-
move pins (1) from the inside out, (see arrows). 1
NOTE: When installing planetary pins, to prevent
scoring, dip pins into liquid nitrogen before assembly.
Inspection
5. Clean all components in a suitable solvent. Allow
parts to dry.
6. Inspect outer tracks inside hub housings. Re-
place as necessary. 20030472
7. Inspect planetary gears, needle roller bearings,
and planetary pins, and replace in sets if worn or 90
damaged.
Assembly
8. Assembly of the planetary carrier follows the dis-
assembly procedures in reverse, observing the
following.
9. Ensure twenty two needle roller bearings are in
each planetary gear.
10. Torque the three cap head screws holding the
planetary gear support to 130 N⋅m (95 ft lbs).
PLANETARY GEARS
(TN65S, TN70S, TN75S) 2
Disassembly 3
1. To remove planetary gear (1), remove planetary
pin (2) from the inside out, (see arrow).
2. Remove the planetary gear (1), the two thrust
washers (3), and the nineteen needle roller bear-
ings inside the gear. Repeat this procedure for
the remaining planetary gears. 1
Inspection 20030473
3. Clean all components in a suitable solvent. Allow 91

parts to dry.
place as necessary.
and planetary pins, and replace in sets if worn or
damaged.
Assembly
following.

7. Ensure nineteen needle roller bearings are in

on page 4.
-- Assemble the wheel hub and the epicyclic final

drive fixed gear.
-- Progressively tighten the ring nut, using the

torque wrench and wrench 295030 (1) to obtain
a torque value of 392 Nm (290 ft. lbs.); at the
same time, rotate the wheel hub to ensure that
the bearings are correctly seated.
Measure the rolling resistance (Rt) of the wheel
hub using the relative torque wrench, or a torque
meter and cord positioned on the base of the
wheel disk flange.
Loosen the ring nut by half a turn and measure
the rolling resistance (R) as described previous-
ly. The difference between the two measure-
ments is the rolling torque value of the wheel hub
bearings (Rc):
Rc = Rt -- R = 5.9 to 14.7 Nm (4.3 to 11 ft. lbs.) or, 92
if measured with a torque meter.
Rc = Rt -- R = 16.53 to 41.33 lbs. (7.5 to 18.75 kg)
(model TN 55S)
Rc = Rt -- R = 10.58 to 26.45 lbs. (4.8 to 12 kg)
(models TN 65S, TN 70S and TN 75S)
If the value is less than 5.9 Nm (0.6 kgm) or with
the torque wrench at 16.53 lbs. (7.5 kg) (for mod-
el TN 55S) or 10.58 lbs. (4.8 kg) (for models TN
65S, TN 70S and TN 75S), replace the parts and
repeat the aforementioned check.


faces, then apply sealing compound [approx.
2 mm (0.078 in.)] along the marked line shown on
page 31.

plete with gears.

Section 00).
-- Fit the track rods.

WHEEL HUB SEAL
Removal
WARNING
Proceed as follows
1. Carry out operation 25 108 30 Front epicyclic fi-
nal drive with brake, only removal (see page 40).
2. Remove the hub casing (1) and the spacer.
93
3. Remove the worn seal, carefully clean the seat
and position the new seal (1) on the seat fitting.
NOTE: The external surface on the seal (1), indi-

cated by the arrow, does not require lubrication.
94
4. Fit tool 294150 (2) on the hub and fit, by a few
mm, the seal (3) using a striker (1).
95
5. Fully fit the seal in position using the ring nut and
wrench 295030 (1).
Installation
To refit the wheel hub parts, proceed as follows.
WARNING
-- Remove tool 294150 from the hub.

-- Carry out operation 25 108 30 Front epicyclic fi-
nal drive with brake, only installation (see page
41).
96
Op. 25 108 38
WHEEL HUBS AND STEERING KNUCKLE 1 2 3
Removal
WARNING
Wheel hub removal can only be carried out after

having disassembled the front epicyclic final drive, as 25564
indicated on pages 40 and 41, proceeding as follows. 97

1. Place the stub axle in a nylon sling (1), remove
the pin and grease fittings (2) retaining bolts (3).
2. Fit tool 293857 (1) on the pin (2) and, using the
screw on the tool, detach the pin. Repeat the op-
1
eration on both pins and recover the adjustment 2
shims.
25565
98
3. Detach the wheel hub and steering knuckle (1)
and separate the two units. 1
Installation
To refit the steering knuckle and wheel hub, proceed
as follows.
WARNING

25566
99
on page 4.
-- Assemble the steering knuckle on the axle body

and adjust the bearings as follows.
4. Apply AMBRA GR 9 grease on the outer races
of the bearings and fit the upper cover, without 1
the adjustment plate, but with tool 292220 (1).
Tighten the retaining bolts to a torque value of 64
Nm (47 ft. lbs.).
5. Fit the lower cover without adjustment plate, lu-

bricate the three retaining bolts with engine oil.
6. Gradually tighten the lower cover bolts in se-

quence, while simultaneously rotating the casing
to allow the excess grease to escape.
25715
100
7. Using a torque wrench and tool 292220 (1),
check that the torque required to rotate the cas- 1
ing is 3.9 to 5.9 Nm (3 to 4.5 ft. lbs.) without con-
sidering the peak starting value. If not, adjust by
way of the lower cover bolts.
8. Measure the gap (H) created between the lower

cover and the casing in correspondence with the
three bolts.
9. Calculate the average of the three values mea-

sured. The total thickness of the adjustment
shims (14, page 10) to be fitted under the lower
cover will be the average obtained, rounded 25716
down to the next 0.05 mm. 101
10. Partially unscrew the lower cover bolts, insert the

shims (14, page 10) and tighten the bolts to a
torque value of 64 Nm (47 ft. lbs.).
11. After having rotated the casing a few times to al-

low the components to bed down, check that the
torque necessary to rotate the casing is 3.9 to 9.8
Nm (3 to 7 ft. lbs.), without considering the initial
peak torque.
12. If the torque value measured is greater than the

prescribed value, increase the thickness of the
shims; if the measured value is less than the pre-
scribed value, reduce the thickness of the shims.
13. Remove tool 292220 and tighten the retaining 102

bolts to a torque value of 64 Nm (47 ft. lbs.).
14. Assemble the grease fittings in the upper and

lower covers and grease the assembly.
15. Refit the front epicyclic final drive (see pages 41,
42 and 43).
Op. 25 108 46 or 25 108 47
STEERING KNUCKLE PINS AND
BEARINGS
Removal
Proceed as follows.
1. Remove the grease nipples and the steering

knuckle pin retaining bolts.
2. Fit the bolts (1) of tool 293857.
3. Fit the plate (2) of the tool and fix it to the three
bolts with nuts (5).
4. Fit the central tie bolt (4), screwing it fully into the
grease nipple bore on the pin (6).
5. Screw in the nut (3) to drive the pin out of its bore.
103
6. Using extractor tool 292161 (1) remove the
steering knuckle bearings.
1
Installation
Re--install the steering knuckle bearings using a
suitable striker.
24599
104
OP. 44 511 80
FRONT DRIVE WHEELS TOE--IN CHECK
When travelling in a straight line, the wheels on four--

wheel drive models must be parallel to the longitudi-
nal axis of the tractor. A slight toe--in of the front
wheels is permissible -- up to a maximum of 6 mm
(0.2362 in.), as measured at the edges of the wheel
rims.
To check the exact value of the toe--in setting of four--

wheel drive tractors, proceed as follows.
1. Inflate the front tyres to the prescribed pressure.
2. Position the steering wheel at the middle of its

travel, with one spoke along the longitudinal axis
of the tractor.
3. Check that the wheels are parallel with the longi-

tudinal axis of the tractor.
4. Measure the distance (1) between the front in-

side edges of the rims.
5. Turn both front wheels through 180o then, at the 1
height of the wheel hub centres, measure the dis-
tance (2) between the rear inside edges of the
wheel rims, checking that the new measurement
is equal to or greater than distance (1) by a maxi- 2
mum of 6 mm (0.2362 in.). The rotation of the
wheels through 180o is required in order to elimi-
nate the effect on the measurement of any even-
tual wear on the rims.
24666
105
6. If wheel toe--in needs to be adjusted, remove nut

(2) and extract the track rod end (1) from the 1
housing.
Loosen lock nut (3) and screw the track rod end
(1) in or out to decrease or increase the distance
(2, fig. 105).
Reposition the track rod end (1) in the housing and
check the toe-in as described in steps 4 and 5.
After having adjusted the toe--in to within the pre-
scribed limits, tighten lock nut (3) to a torque val-
ue of 180 Nm (133 ft. lbs.) and nut (2) to100 Nm
(74 ft. lbs.). 3 2
24667
106
NOTE: Self--locking nut (2) must be replaced each
time it is removed or unscrewed.
Chapter 2 -- Front Axle (FWD)
CONTENT

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Front Axle Hydraulic Differential Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
25 104 34 Front Differential Lock Clutch Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Stub Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Bevel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Bevel Drive Shaft Bearing Preload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Drive Pinion Position Adjustment Shim Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Differential Bearings and Backlash Between Pinion and Ring Gear . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Limited Slip Self--Locking Differential Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
25 102 27 Front Axle Differential with Limited Slip Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Planetary Gears (TN55D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Planetary Gears (TN65D, TN70D, TN75D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Planetary Gears TN55D (with brake) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Planetary Gears TN65D, TN70D, TN75D (with brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
SPECIFICATIONS
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . steering, load bearing structure,
pivoting at centre
Bevel drive -- differential
Pinion--ring gear ratio 18.64 mph (30 Km/h):
-- model TN 55D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/42 = 1:2.14
-- models TN 65D, TN 70D and TN 75D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8/30 = 1:2.66
Pinion--ring gear ratio 24.85 mph (40 km/h):
-- model TN 55D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/40 = 1:2.75
-- model TN 65D, TN 70D and TN 75D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10/30 = 1:3.33
Backlash between bevel drive teeth:
-- models TN 55D TN 65D, TN 70D and TN 75D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.0059 to 0.0078 (0.15 to 0.20)
Thickness of bevel pinion position adjustment spacer (11, page 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.0984 -- 0.0102 -- 0.1062 -- 0.0110
-- 0.0114 -- 0.0118 -- 0.0122 --
0.1259 -- 0.1299 -- 0.1338 -- 0.1377
-- 0.1417 -- 0.1456 (2.5 -- 2.6 -- 2.7 --
2.8 -- 2.9 -- 3.0 -- 3.1 -- 3.2 -- 3.3 --
3.4 -- 3.5 -- 3.6 -- 3.7)
Thickness of pinion bearing adjustment spacer rings (12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.0984 -- 0.1003 -- 0.1023 -- 0.1043
-- 0.1062 -- 0.1082 -- 0.1102 --
0.1122 -- 0.1141 -- 0.1161 -- 0.1181
-- 0.1200 -- 0.1220 -- 0.1240 --
0.1259 -- 0.1279 -- 0.1299 -- 0.1318
-- 0.1338 -- 0.1358 -- 0.1377 --
0.1397 -- 0.1417 -- 0.1437 -- 0.1456
-- 0.1476 -- 0.1496 -- 0.1515 --
0.1535 -- 0.1555 -- 0.1574 -- 0.1594
-- 0.1614 -- 0.1633 -- 0.1653 --
0.1673 -- 0.1692 -- 0.1712 -- 0.1732
-- 0.1751 -- 0.1771 -- 0.1791 --
0.1811 -- 0.1830 -- 0.1850 -- 0.1870
-- 0.1889 (2.5 -- 2.55 -- 2.6 -- 2.65 --
2.7 -- 2.75 -- 2.8 -- 2.85 -- 2.9 -- 2.95
-- 3.00 -- 3.05 -- 3.1 -- 3.15 -- 3.2 --
3.25 -- 3.3 -- 3.35 -- 3.4 -- 3.45 -- 3.5
-- 3.55 -- 3.6 -- 3.65 -- 3.7 -- 3.75 --
3.8 -- 3.85 -- 3.9 -- 3.95 -- 4.00 --
4.05 -- 4.1 -- 4.15 -- 4.2 -- 4.25 -- 4.3
-- 4.35 -- 4.4 -- 4.45 -- 4.5 -- 4.55 --
4.6 -- 4.65 -- 4.7 -- 4.75 -- 4.8)
Thickness of ring gear position adjustment rings (4, page 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.0354 -- 0.0393 -- 0.0433 -- 0.0472
-- 0.0511 -- 0.0551 -- 0.0590 --
0.0629 -- 0.0669 -- 0.0708 -- 0.0748
-- 0.0787 (0.9 -- 1 -- 1.1 -- 1.2 -- 1.3 --
1.4 -- 1.5 -- 1.6 -- 1.7 -- 1.8 -- 1.9 -- 2)
Clearance between sides of side pinion and ring gear teeth in. (mm) 0.0059 (0.15)
Thickness of planet pinion thrust washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.0578 to 0.0602 (1.470 to 1.530)
Thickness of side gear thrust washers (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.0590 -- 0.0629 -- 0.0669 -- 0.0708
(1.5 -- 1.6 -- 1.7 -- 1.8)
Diameter of cross pin (14) for planet pinions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.8637 to 0.8645 (21.939 to 21.960)
Side pinion cross pin bore diameter (3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.9031 to 0.8685 (22.040 to 22.061)
Clearance between cross pin and bores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.0031 to 0.0048 (0.080 to 0.122)
Differential lock
Spring free length (5, page 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) ∼ 2.9527 (∼ 75)
Spring length under load of: 1370 to 1566N (307.98 to 353.07 lbs.) in. (mm) ∼ 1.6141 (∼ 41)
Axle shafts and steering knuckles
Diameter of outer axle shafts (7, page 9) in relation to bushings (8) . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 1.7706 to 1.7716 (44.975 to 45.000)
Inside diameter of installed bushes (8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 1.7755 to 1.7785
(45.100 to 45.175)(1)
Clearance between axle shafts and bushes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.0039 to 0.0078 (0.100 to 0.200)
(continued)
MAIN DATA
(cont.)
Interference fit between bushes and respective bores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.0025 to 0.0050 (0.064 to 0.129)
Thickness of steering knuckle bearing adjuster plates (10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.0039 -- 0.0059 -- 0.0078 -- 0.0098
-- 0.0118 (0.10 -- 0.15 -- 0.20 -- 0.25
-- 0.30)
Epicyclic final drives
Gear ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 : (12 + 60) = 1 : 6
Thickness of driven gears thrust rings (9, page 9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.0303 to 0.0326 (0.77 to 0.83)
Axle pivot
Axle clearance on pivot between body and support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.0118 to 0.0433 (0.3 to 1.1)
Maximum permitted wear clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.0787 (2)
Diameter axle pivot front pin (3, page 10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 2.0729 to 2.0736 (52.652 to 52.671)
Installed front bush internal diameter (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 2.0755 to 2.0783
(52.720 to 52.790)(1)
Clearance between pin (3) and bush (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.0019 to 0.0054 (0.049 to 0.138)
Outside diameter of rear bush (6) installed in the bevel pinion support . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 3.8984 to 3.8996 (99.020 to 99.050)
Inside diameter of rear bush (5) installed in the axle pivot support . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 3.9033 to 3.9063
(99.146 to 99.221)(1)
Assembly clearance between the two bushes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.0037 to 0.0079 (0.096 to 0.201)
Thickness of the front (2) and rear (4) front axle thrust washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. (mm) 0.1948 to 0.1968 (4.95 to 5.00)
(1) Measurement to be obtained without reaming

TIGHTENING TORQUES
Tightening torque
PART Th d
Thread
Nm ft. lbs.
Front axle
Ring gear to differential cage retaining bolt (C1, page 6) . . . . . . . M12x1.25 113 83
Differential lock device retaining bolt (C2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M10x1.25 60 to 70 44 to 52
Bevel pinion shaft lock nut (C3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 35 x 1.5 294 217
Differential bevel drive to axle casing retaining bolt (C4) . . . . . . . M 12 x 1.25 119 to 144 88 to 106
Steering knuckle pin retaining bolt (C5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M10x1.25 55 to 67 40 to 49
Wheel hub bearing lock nut (C6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 70 x 2 392 289
Epicyclic final drive support casing retaining bolt (C7) . . . . . . . . . M10x1.25 55 to 67 40 to 49
Front axle support to engine retaining bolt (C8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 18x1.5 310 to 380 229 to 286
Front axle pivot front and rear supports retaining bolt (C9) . . . . . M 18 x 1.5 370 to 410 273 to 302
Differential casing support caps retaining bolt (C10) . . . . . . . . . . . M12x1.25 119 to 144 88 to 106
Rim to disk retaining bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 18x1.5 170 to 208 125 to 151

C1 -- 113 Nm C2 60 to70Nm
(83 ft. lbs.) (44 -- 52 ft. lbs.)
C5 55to67Nm C6 -- 392 Nm
(40 -- 49 ft. lbs.) (289 ft. lbs.)
26125
C7 55to67Nm
(40 -- 49 ft. lbs.)
C4 119to144Nm C3 -- 294 Nm
26124 (88 -- 106 ft. lbs.) (217 ft. lbs.)
C8 310to380Nm
(273 -- 302 ft. lbs.)
(229 -- 280 ft. lbs.)
C9 370to410Nm
26126
C10 119to144Nm C9 370to410Nm
(88 -- 106 ft. lbs.) (273 -- 302 ft. lbs.)
1
SPECIAL TOOLS
293400 Universal gauge for positioning of

Warning -- The operations described in this section front bevel drive pinion.
can only be carried out with ESSENTIAL tools
indicated by an (X). X 293544 Wrench for front differential case bear-
To work safely and efficiently and obtain the best ing threaded adjustment ring.
results, it is also necessary to use the recommended 294149 Wheel hub seal splining tool (for axle
specific tools listed below and certain other tools, with brake).
which are to be made according to the drawings
included in this manual. 294150 Wheel hub seal splining tool (for axle
without brake).
List of specific tools required for the various X 295030 Wrench for front axle wheel hub bear-
operations described in this section. ing retaining nut (55 series tractors
may need modification to tool).
293460 Front axle overhaul stand.
50169 Pins (M 12 x 1.25) for front axle and
291517 Front differential unit removal--instal-
cover.
lation hook.
50165 Pins (M 16 x 1,25) for front axle wheels
293743 Front axle differential casing overhaul
disassembly/assembly.
support.
X 293857 Front axle pivot pin removal tool.
X 293878 Wrench for front bevel drive pinion ring
nut.
X 292161 Front axle pivot bearing outer ring re-
moval tool.
X 293391 Pinion bearing adjustment tool (with
50118).
X 292220 Tool for measurement of rolling drag
torque of front axle bearings.
X 293510 Universal gauge for pinion bearing ad-
justment. 292870 Universal kit for testing oil pressure for
front axle differential lock engagement
(with 293874 and 291318).
X 292903 Extracting pliers.
X 293782 Front bevel drive pinion retaining

wrench.
Tool to be made for adjustment of bevel drive pinion;

to be used in conjunction with tool 293391 [Mark tool
No. 50118 -- Measurement in mm (in.)].
Construct in UNI C40 material.
(.393)
(1.377)
(1.88)
26135
2
(.196)
(.393)
(3.936)
(.787)
27892
3
Tool to be made for front axle wheel disassembly--assembly [Mark tool with No. 50165 -- Measurement in mm
(in.)]
(.196)
(.393)
(3.936)
(.590)
27893
4
Tool to be made for front axle gear unit cover disassembly--assembly
[Mark tool with No. 50169 -- Measurement in mm (in.)]
SECTIONAL VIEWS
1 2 3 5 6
4
7 8 9
X 10
26128
X
15 11
14 12
13
26127
5
Cross--sectional view of front axle (models TN55D, TN65D, TN 70D and TN75D)
H4 = 3.74 in. (95 mm). Nominal distance between ring 8. Axle shaft bush (7).
gear axis and greater diameter of the pinion. 9. Shims for driven gears of epicyclic.
1. Thickness of side gears thrust washers. 10. Steering knuckle adjustment plates.
2. Differential pinions. 11. Thickness of bevel pinion position adjustment spacer.
3. Side pinions. 12. Thickness of bevel pinion bearing adjustment spacer.
4. Ring gear bearings adjustment nut. 13. Seal.
5. Differential lock disengagement spring. 14. Cross pin for side pinions.
6. Differential lock control piston. 15. Ring gear bearing adjustment nut.
7. Axle shaft.
Note -- On assembly apply a bead of sealing compound to the surfaces X as indicated on page 37.
1 2 3 4 5 6
26131
6
Cross--sectional view of front axis pivot (models TN55D, TN65D, TN 70D and TN75D)
1. Axle pivot front bush. 5. Rear bush installed on axle support.

2. Front thrust washer. 6. Rear bush installed on bevel drive--differential sup-
3. Axle pivot front pin. port.
4. Rear thrust washer.

TN55D, TN65D, TN 70D and TN75D tractors are The differential has two planet pinions; drive is
provided with a centrally pivoting front axle with pivot transmitted to lateral epicyclic final drive units
and drive shaft coaxial to the tractor longitudinal axis. (installed on the wheel hubs) through universal joints
The drive shaft is not fitted with universal joints. which do not require any maintenance.
OVERHAUL
OP. 25 100 30
FRONT AXLE ASSEMBLY
Removal
DANGER
equipment
Make sure that the load is supported by means of
suitable slings and hooks. Make sure that no--one is
standing in the vicinity of the load to be lifted.
Proceed as follows:
Note -- The front axle assembly can be removed from

the tractor either with or without previously removing
the drive shaft. The description below refers to
removal of the front axle with the drive shaft installed
on the tractor. For removal of the drive shaft refer to
section 23.
1. Unscrew the bolts (1) and remove the front mud-

guard supports (2). 1 2
25575
2. Attach a nylon sling to the front ballasting (1), ex-

tract the locking pin; lift the ballasting and remove 1
to a safe position
25577
9
3. Unscrew the bolts (1) and remove the drive shaft
guard (2).
1 2
25576
10
4. Remove the circlip (2), slide the sleeve (1) to-
wards the rear and free the drive shaft from the
1 2
front axle.
25584
11
5. Attach the front axle to a hoist using two nylon
slings
25580
12
6. Raise the tractor and position a fixed stand under
the engine sump.
25581
13
7. Unscrew the front differential lock control unions
(1) and remove the hose (2). 1 2
8. Unscrew the rigid pipes from the power steering
cylinder and disconnect the two hoses.
25579
14
9. Unscrew the retaining bolts and remove the front
wheels.
25582
15
10. Allow the slings on the axle to take the strain and
remove the front axle rear support retaining bolts 1
(1).
25585
16
11. Remove the front axle front support retaining
bolts (1).
1
25586
17
12. Using the hoist and the two nylon slings, detach
the front axle.
Installation
To refit the front axle on the tractor, proceed as
follows.
WARNING
25583
18
-- Position the axle, tighten the front and rear sup-

ports to the relative support.
-- Reconnect the differential lock pipe and the pow-

er steering pipes.
-- Fit the front wheels.
-- Using the hoist, raise the front part of the tractor.
-- Extract the fixed stand.
-- Remove the nylon slings from the axle.
-- Connect the drive shaft and position the guard.
-- Refit the two front mudguards.
-- Attach a nylon sling to the front ballasting, fit and

secure in position with the lock rod.
-- Re--connect the battery negative lead.

on page 5.
Disassembly
WARNING
gloves and shoes.
Note -- Front axle overhaul operations must be

carried out on stand no. 293460.
25587
19
1. Unscrew the plug (1) and drain the oil from the
axle casing.
1
25588
20
2. Unscrew the plug (1) on the left--hand epicyclic
final drive housing; repeat the same operation on 1
the right--hand housing.
25589
21
3. Remove the front axle rear support (1); remove
the front support and washer. 1
25590
22
4. Loosen the two track rod lock nuts (1).
1
25591
23
5. Using an extractor, extract the pins from the
seats on the stub axle housing, recovering the
track rods.
24080
24
6. Remove the circlips (2) from the cylinder rod piv-
ot pins, unscrew the cylinder (1) pins retaining
bolts, extract the pins and remove the two cylin-
1 2
ders.
Remove the four pins, washers, spacers and cyl-
inders, complete with pipes.
25593
25
7. Unscrew the left hand side gear cover (1) retain-
ing bolts. Tighten two pins 50169 (2) and, using 2
1
an extracting tool screwed into the oil drainage
plug hole, remove the cover (1).
25594
26
8. Remove the driving gear stop (2) circlip (1).
1 2
25595
27
9. Remove the driving gear stop (2) circlip (1,
fig. 27).
1
25596
28
1
25597
29
11. Remove the wheel hub bearing lock ring using
wrench 295030 (1).
1
25598
25598
30
12. Remove the wheel hub (1) together with the epi-
cyclic crown (2). Recover all disassembled parts.
1 2
25599
31
13. Unscrew the three stub axle lower pin retaining
bolts (1). Recover the lower pivot pin and the rel-
ative adjusting spacers.
1
25600
32
14. Unscrew the three mudguard support (2) retain-
ing bolts (1).
1 2
25601
33
15. Extract the upper pivot pin (1) and remove the
stub axle (2). Recover all disassembled parts.
2
1
25602
34
16. Unscrew the axle shaft (1) retaining bolt (2).
1 2
25603
35
17. Using a crowbar, remove the axle shaft (1,
fig. 35).
18. To disassemble the right hand side gear unit, ob-

serve the order of operations used for the disas-
sembly of the left hand side gear unit, from opera-
tion No. 7 to operation No. 17.
25604
36
19. Unscrew the bracket (1), loosen the union (3) and
remove the differential lock control rigid pipe (2). 1 2 3
25605
37
20. Unscrew the two bevel drive--differential support
retaining bolts from the axle casing, screw on the
1 2 3
two pins 50169 (1). Remove the remaining bolts
and the bevel drive--differential support, attach a
chain (2) and put the hoist under strain. Remove
the bevel drive--differential support (3) from the
axle casing.
25606
38
21. Fit tool 293743 (1) in the vice on a work bench,
lock the bevel drive--differential support in the 1 2
tool and remove the chain.
22. Unscrew the bolt (2) and recover the ring nut
locking plate (3). Remove the differential lock
control internal pipe. 3
25607
39
23. Remove the differential lock external housing (1)
upper (2) and lower bolts, replacing with 70 mm 1 2
(2.75 in.) (minimum length) bolts. Gradually un-
screw the remaining four differential lock external
housing retaining bolts, thereby slowly releasing
the differential lock release spring.
Note -- It is essential that the minimum length of the

bolts is 70 mm (2.75 in.), as the normal housing
retaining bolts will not allow the differential lock
spring to be fully released.
25608
40
24. Unscrew the two 70 mm (2.75 in.) bolts last of all,
recover the housing (1), the helical spring (2) and 1 2
the differential lock control piston.
25609
41
25. Using a screwdriver, remove the circlip (2) and
detach the differential lock sleeve. 2
1
25610
42
26. Unscrew the bevel drive--differential support cap
(1) retaining bolts (2) and remove. 2
1
25612
43
27. Remove the bevel drive--differential (2) housing
(1). 1 2
25613
44
28. Remove the circlip (1) from the splined shaft (2).
1 2
25614
45
29. Straighten the staking on the splined shaft lock
nut (1). 1
25615
46
30. Unscrew the nut, using wrench 293878 (1), hold-
ing the bevel pinion shaft in position with wrench
1
293782.
25616
47
31. Remove the splined shaft stop ball (1).
1
25617
48
32. Acting on the rear part, extract the bevel pinion
shaft (1) and recover the spacer, adjusting shims
1
and the bearing.
25618
49
33. Using a screwdriver, detach and remove the dust
seal, seal (1) and rear bearing. 1
25619
50
Assembly -- Assemble the differential lock control piston,
To assemble the front axle, proceed as follows: spring, housing and tighten the screws. Fit the
ring nut plate and the differential lock internal
pipe.
WARNING
-- Reconnect the bevel drive--differential support to

the front axle casing and fit the differential lock
external pipe.
-- Refer to the illustrations on pages 9 and 10 for the
positioning of the various parts.
-- Fit the axle shaft and screw.

page 5.
-- Fit the stub axle, the adjusting shims, lower and

upper pivot pins, mudguard support and screws.
-- Carry out the adjustments described on pages 29
to 38.
-- Fit the wheel hub, side gear crown and ring nut
-- Fit the rear bearing, seal, dust seal, adjusting and tighten to the prescribed torque, while rotat-
shims, spacer and bevel pinion shaft, complete ing the hub to settle the bearings.
with front bearing.
-- Fit the circlips, drive gear and side gear cover.

-- Position the stop ball, tighten and secure the bev-
el drive nut, then position the circlip.
-- Fit the pins, washers, spacers and steering con-

trol cylinder.
-- Assemble the bevel drive--differential unit, sup-
port caps and tighten the relative screws.
-- Fit the track rod, front and rear supports and the
oil drainage plug.
-- Assemble the differential lock sleeve and the lock
ring.
OP. 25 104 34
FRONT DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CLUTCH
UNIT
Disassembly
WARNING
Position the differential unit on the support 293743

and proceed as follows.
1. Unscrew the differential lock control internal
pipe. 1 2
2. Remove the differential lock external housing (1)
upper (2) and lower bolts, replacing with 70 mm
(2.75 in.) (minimum length) bolts. Gradually un-
screw the remaining four differential lock external
housing retaining bolts, thereby slowly releasing
the differential lock release spring.
Note -- It is essential that the minimum length of the

bolts is 70 mm (2.75 in.), as the normal housing
retaining bolts will not allow the differential lock
spring to be fully released. 25608
51
3. Unscrew the two 70 mm (2.75 in.) bolts last of all,
recover the housing (1), the helical spring (2) and 1 2
the differential lock control piston.
25609
52
4. Using a screwdriver, remove the circlip (2) and
detach the differential lock sleeve. 2
1
25610
53
5. Remove the circlip securing the differential lock
piston, recover the sliding sleeve with the two
thrust washers.
24093
54
6. Gently tap the piston out of the clutch bell hous-
ing.
24094
55
7. Remove the differential lock piston.
Assembly
To refit the differential lock clutch components, follow
the disassembly operations in reverse order.
Proceed as follows.
24095
56
WARNING
-- Carefully check the condition of the two O ring

seals installed on the piston.
-- Fit the bell housing unit, complete with spring and

control piston, using the two 70 mm (2.75 in.)
bolts used during the disassembly operation.
OP. 25 108 46 or 25 108 47
STEERING KNUCKLE PINS AND
BEARINGS
Removal
WARNING
If steering knuckle pivot pins present problems

during disassembly operations, proceed as follows.
1. Remove the grease nipples and the steering

knuckle pin retaining bolts.
2. Fit the bolts (1) of tool 293857.
3. Fit the plate (2) of the tool and fix it to the three
bolts with nuts (5).
4. Fit the central tie bolt (4), screwing it fully into the
grease nipple bore on the pin (6).
24596
5. Screw in the nut (3) to drive the pin out of its bore.
57
6. Using extractor tool 292161 (1) remove the

steering knuckle bearings.
1
Installation
Re--install the steering knuckle bearings using a
suitable striker.
24599
58
WARNING
-- Carry out the following adjustments.

ADJUSTMENTS
STUB AXLE
Proceed as follows.
WARNING
Do not put your hands or fingers between parts. 1 2
gloves and shoes.
7. Smear AMBRA GR 9 grease on the outer races

of the bearings and fit the upper cover, without
the adjustment plate, but with tool 292220 (2).
Tighten the retaining bolts (C5, page 5) to a
torque value of 55 to 67 Nm (41 to 49 ft. lbs.).
24076
59
8. Fit the lower cover without adjustment plate, lu-
bricate the three retaining bolts with engine oil.
9. Gradually tighten the lower cover bolts in se-

quence, while simultaneously rotating the casing
to allow the excess grease to escape.
24077
60
10. Using a torque wrench and tool 292220 (1),
check that the torque required to rotate the cas- 1
ing is 2.9 Nm (26 in. lbs.) (with a torque increase
of 0.98 Nm (9 in. lbs.) without considering the
peak starting value.
If not, adjust by way of the lower cover bolts.
11. Measure the gap (H) created between the lower

cover and the casing in correspondence with the
three bolts.
24078
61
12. Calculate the average of the three values mea-
sured. The total thickness of the adjustment
plates (10, page 9) to be fitted under the lower
cover will be given by:
S3= H
24079 10
If necessary, round the value down to the next 62
0.05 mm.
13. Partially unscrew the lower cover bolts, insert the

plates(10, page 9) and tighten the bolts (C5, page
5) to a torque value of 55 to 67 Nm (41 to 49 ft.
lbs.).
14. After having rotated the casing a few times to al-

low the components to bed down, check that the
torque necessary to rotate the casing is 2.9 to 7.8
Nm (26 to 69 in. lbs.) without considering the ini-
tial peak torque.
15. If the torque value measured is greater than the

prescribed value, increase the thickness of the
shims; if the measured value is less than the pre-
scribed value, reduce the thickness of the shims.
16. Assemble the grease fittings in the upper and

lower covers and grease the assembly.
BEVEL DRIVE
Bevel Drive Shaft Bearing Preload

ATTENTION
gloves and shoes.
Proceed as follows.
7
1. Clamp tool 293391 (1) in a vice. Slide tool spacer
50118 (2) onto the tool (see tools 293391). Slide 6
a bearing (3) from the bevel assembly onto the
tool. Slide the spacer (4) from the bevel assembly
5
onto the tool. Slide the remaining bearing (5)
from the bevel assembly onto the tool. Slide the
top cone (6) from the tool onto the tool threads.
Tighten the tool nut (7) to 1.2 Nm (10 in. lbs).
63
2. Using a micrometer, measure distance (H1) be-
tween the upper surface of the top cone (6) and
the top of the threaded pin (7) of tool 293391 (1). 7
64
3. Disassemble the parts mentioned above and lu-
bricate the bearings with engine oil.
Reassemble the parts, excluding the spacer (3,
fig. 63), in the bevel drive--differential housing,
using tool 293743, complete with outer bearing
races, held in the vice. H2
4. Fully tighten the nut on the tool 293391 (1) (see
Note above) while turning the tool to ensure that
the bearings are seated correctly.
5. Using the micrometer, measure the distance (H2)

between the upper surface of the top cone (1)
and the top of the threaded pin of tool 293391.
6. The thickness of the adjustment shim (12, 65

page 9) required is given by:
S = H2 -- H1 + 0.00019 in. (0.05 mm)
If necessary, round the adjustment shim (12) value
up to the nearest 0.00019 in. (0.05 mm).
Note -- On completing the adjustment, do not remove

the adjustment tool from the bevel drive--differential
housing: leave in place for adjustment of the bevel
pinion position.
Drive Pinion Position Adjustment Shim

Thickness
Proceed as follows.
7. Fit tool 293400 (1) in the bevel drive--differential
housing, complete with outer bearing rings, dif-
ferential bearings adjustment shim, circlip and
differential housing caps.
8. Screw the cones (3) of tool 293400 (1) in or out

in order to position the micrometer shaft in the di-
rection of the inner bearing ring and eliminate
end float between the cones and the outer rings 1 3
of the differential bearings.
9. Adjust the micrometer so that the shaft is in con-

tact with the inner bearing ring (2) and measure
the distance (H3).
10. Determine the correct distance (H5) between the

pinion:
24588
H5 = H4 ± C
66
where:
H4 = 3.74 in. (95 mm). Nominal distance between

the ring gear axis and the large diameter base of
the pinion (see page 9).
C = correction value stamped on pinion preceded
by a + or -- sign (if other than 0), to be added to
or subtracted from the nominal distance (H4) ac-
cording to the sign.
11. The thickness of the adjustment shim (11,

page 9) will be given by:
S = H3 -- H5
where:
H3 = the distance measured using the microme-

ter;
H5 = corrected nominal distance between the
pinion.
Example
-- Distance measured using micrometer H5 = 98

mm.
-- Nominal distance between ring gear axis and

large diameter base of pinion H4 = 95 mm.
-- Correction value C = + 0.2 mm.
-- Corrected nominal distance H5 = 95 + 0.2 = 95.2

mm
S = 98 -- 95.2 = 2.8 mm.
-- Correction value C = -- 0.2 mm.
-- Corrected nominal distance H5 = 95 -- 0.2 = 94.8

mm.
S = 98 -- 94.8 = 3.2 mm.
-- Correction value C = 0 mm.
-- Corrected nominal distance H5 = H4 = 95 mm.
S = 98 -- 95 = 3 mm.
12. Remove tools 293391 and 293400 from bevel

drive housing. 1
13. Install the drive pinion complete with: inner bear-

ing rings, spacer and adjustment shims (11 and
12) of the previously determined thickness.
14. Fit the O--ring (1) on the bevel pinion shaft.
15. Insert the spacer on the pinion and, after having

carefully greased the outer surface, fit the ant--
rotation ball. 24589
67
16. Fit pinion retaining tool 293782 (2).
17. Insert wrench 293878 on the adjuster ring nut.
2
1
18. Using the torque wrench on the pinion retaining
wrench (2), hold the bevel pinion in position and,
using a torque wrench (positioned as in the fig-
ure) on the ring nut wrench (1), tighten the ring
nut (C3, page 5) to a torque of 294 Nm (217 ft. 24590
lbs.), while simultaneously rotating the pinion
shaft to ensure that the bearings are seated cor- 68
rectly.
19. With torque wrench 293952 (1) fitted on pinion

retaining wrench 293782 (2), check that the pin-
ion rolling torque, without oil seal (13, page 9)
and relative dust seal, is 0.5 to to 1 Nm (4.4 -- 8.8
in. lbs.).
If the rolling torque is less than the prescribed val-

ue, fit a thinner adjustment shim (12, page 9), if
the torque is greater than the prescribed value,
fit a thicker adjustment shim.
20. Unscrew the ring nut and fit the seal (13, page 9)
and the relative dust seal ring. Tighten the nut to
a torque value of 294 Nm (217 ft. lbs.) while si-
multaneously rotating the pinion shaft to ensure
that the bearings are seated correctly.
21. With torque wrench 293952 (1) fitted on pinion

retaining wrench 293782 (2) check that the pin-
ion rolling torque, with the oil seal and relative
dust seal, is ≤ 0.50 Nm (4,.4 in. lbs.).
Finally, secure the ring nut and fit the circlip on
the bevel pinion shaft
24587
69
Differential Bearings and Backlash Between
Pinion and Ring Gear
Proceed as follows.
22. Install the differential assembly complete with
ring gear and inner bearing rings on the differen-
tial bevel drive support.
24112
24112
70
23. Insert the outer rings on the bevel drive--differen-
tial support, install the differential support caps,
tighten the relative bolts to a torque value of 59
Nm (44 ft. lbs.), then loosen and re--tighten to a
24. Fit the adjuster shim (4, page 9) that was pre-
viously removed during the axle overhaul opera-
tion, and the relative circlip.
24591
71
25. With the bearings perfectly lubricated, rotate the
ring gear and, at the same time, tighten the ring
nut using wrench 293544 (1) to a torque value of
39 to 59 Nm (28 to 43 ft. lbs.) to take up the axial
play between the components.
26. Measure the backlash between pinion and ring

gear, using a 1/100 dial gauge perpendicular to 1
the outer edge of a tooth on the ring gear (1,
fig. 73).
24592
72
27. Repeat the measurement in a further two posi-
tions 120° apart and compare the average of the
1
three values (Gm) with the prescribed normal
backlash: 0.18 to 0.23 mm average value 0.20
mm (.007 to .009 ins. average value .008 ins.).
If the measured backlash exceeds the pre-
scribed value, fit a thinner adjustment shim (4,
page 9).
24593
73
Note -- On standard models (fitting without

differential lock) if the clearance value is not within
the prescribed field of tolerance, unscrew one of the
ring nuts, while tightening the other to an equal
amount, so as to reset the prescribed clearance.
The definitive value (4, page 9) to fit on the bevel

drive--differential support will be given by:
S = Sp -- {(Gm -- 0.20 ) x 1.35}
where:
drive--differential support;
If the backlash measured is less than the prescribed
value, it will be necessary to fit a thicker adjustment
shim(4, page 9) the value being given by:
S = Sp + {(0.20 -- Gm ) x 1.35}
where:
28. Install a shim (4, page 9) of the calculated thick-
ness and with a 1/100 scale dial gauge posi-
tioned perpendicular to the outside edge of one
of the ring gear teeth, check that the backlash be-
tween the pinion and the ring gear is within the
prescribed tolerance limits 0.18 to 0.23 mm (.007
to .009 ins.).
29. Using wrench 293544 (1) turn the adjustment
ring nut and:
24592
74
check using torque wrench 293952 (1), that the
rolling resistance torque of the differential, as
measured in the same conditions used to check
only the pinion, is:
A2 = A1 + 1 to 1.5 Nm (8.8 to 13 in. lbs.)
where:
1
A2 = pinion--differential rolling resistance torque;
A1 = rolling resistance torque of pinion only as
previously measured;
24594
75
1 to 1.5 Nm (8.8 to 13 in. lbs.) = rolling resist-
ance torque of differential only measured at the
end of the pinion, using wrench 293782 and
torque wrench 293952.
30. Tighten the cap bolts (C10, page 5) to a torque

value of 119 to 144 Nm (187 to 106 ft. lbs.).
31. Fit the safety plate, screwing the adjustment ring

nut in or out, to reach the nearest notch.
32. Attach the bevel drive--differential to the axle cas-

ing after having carefully cleaned and degreased
the mating surfaces and apply sealing com- 24591
pound (approx. 2 mm) along the marked line
shown in the figure below. 76
Mastic application diagram for assembly of bevel

drive unit and epicyclic final drive unit.
24595
77
OP. 25 102 24
FRONT AXLE DIFFERENTIAL
In case of differential assembly overhaul it is
necessary to adjust the backlash between the teeth
of the planet pinions and the side gears.
Proceed as follows.
1. Thoroughly clean the components of the differ-

ential to remove any traces of oil that would
otherwise prevent accurate backlash measure-
ment.
2. Install the two side gears without thrust washers.
3. Fit the planet pinions complete with thrust wash-

ers and pins and screw down the pin retaining
bolts by a few turns to hold the pins in place.
4. Position a dial gauge on the differential housing.
5. Move the left hand side gear to bring it into full

contact with the planet pinion and then push it up 24597
against the differential housing, reading the end-
float (Gs) on the dial gauge. 78
6. Repeat the above operations to measure the

endfloat on the right hand side gear (Gd).
The side gear endfloat will be: 0.25 mm (0.0098

in.).
Therefore the shims to be inserted in the differen-

tial housing are given by:
Ss = Gs -- 0.25 mm (0.0098 in.) for the left--hand

side gear;
Sd = Gd -- 0.25 mm (0.0098 in.) for the right--

hand side gear.
7. Install shims as near as possible to the calculated
value and, using a dial gauge and following the
previously described procedure, check that the 24598
endfloat of the left and right hand side gears is
approximately 0.25 mm (0.0098 in.). 79
LIMITED SLIP SELF--LOCKING
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
The differential with limited slip locking (LIM -- SLIP)
is of the two planet gear--type, provided with two
multi--disk clutch assemblies fitted between the side
gears and the differential casing.
This differential lock device is totally automatic. It
does not require any type of manual operation and
significantly reduces (but does not completely
eliminate) wheel slipping.
The difference in revolutions, between the side gears
and the differential casing when a wheel begins to
slip as a result of grip loss, is impeded by clutch
assemblies that are compressed by axial thrusts
from the bevel drive torque transmitted to the side
gears by means of the teeth on the two planet.
These torque values may be different, according to
27966
the nature of the ground and the route followed by the
tractor, and may vary in intensity thereby
proportionally determining the axial stress on the
clutches, allowing the side gears to mesh with the
differential casing which, in turn, permits the axle to 80
overcome the unevenness of the ground. LIM--SLIP self--locking differential lock
OP. 25 102 27
FRONT AXLE DIFFERENTIAL WITH
LIMITED SLIP UNIT
Disassembly
WARNING
Do not put your hands or fingers between parts. Wear
suitable safety clothing -- safety goggles, gloves and
shoes.
1. Remove the bevel drive--differential casing as-

sembly from the front axle, attach to support
293743 (4), lock in a vice and proceed with disas-
sembly operations as follows.
2. Remove the bolts (2) and the right--hand (Gd)
and left--hand ring nut lock plates (3).
3. Check that the right and left--hand caps (1) are
clearly marked, so as not to interchange the parts
during assembly operations.
4. Remove the right and left--hand bearing adjust-
ment ring nuts (Gd) from the ring gear.
5. Remove the bolts (C9), caps (1) and separate the
ring gear from the bevel pinion support.
6. If necessary, unscrew the retaining bolts (C1,
page 6) and remove the ring gear.
81
Disassemble the LIM--SLIP self--locking differential
lock as follows.
7. Remove the retaining bolts (1) from the differen-
tial half--casing.
8. Open the differential casing (6).
9. Remove the half--casing (7) the differential pin
(4), complete with the planet gears (3), the thrust
washers (2) and the pins (9).
10. Remove the side gear (5), the friction disk (11),
the metal disks (10) and the friction disks (12).
11. Remove the side gear (5), the friction disk (11),
the metal disks (10) and the friction disks (12)
from the half--casing (8).
12. Check the wear on the metal disks (10) and the
friction disks (11 and 12, see table below), replac-
ing parts that show signs of wear.
27966
Assembly
Proceed with self--locking differential assembly
operations, carrying out the previously described
operations in reverse order, apply LOCTITE 270 to 82
the threads on the screws (1) and tighten to a torque LIM--SLIP self--locking differential lock
value of 50 Nm (37 ft. lbs.).
Refit the ring gear (if previously disassembled) on the

half--casing (8), tightening the bolts (C1, page 6) to a
Check the rolling torque of the bevel pinion, as
indicated on page 34.
Assemble the differential, complete with LIM--SLIP
self--locking differential lock, on the bevel drive
support, remembering to fit the previously marked z
differential bearing support caps in the correct order
and assemble and adjust the differential bearings as 27967
indicated on page 36.
83
Friction parts detail
LIM--SLIP self--locking differential lock friction disks
Thickness Maximum wear per disk

Part no. Description Quantity
mm (in.) mm (in.)
10 Metal disk 10 1.5 (0.0591) --
11 Friction disk 2 2.8 (0.1102) 0.10 (0.0039)
12 Friction disk 8 1.6 (0.0630) 0.15 (0.0059)

OP. 44 511 80
FRONT DRIVE WHEELS TOE--IN CHECK
When travelling in a straight line, the wheels on

four--wheel drive models must be parallel to the
longitudinal axis of the tractor. A slight toe--in of the
front wheels is permissible -- up to a maximum of
0.23 in. (6 mm), as measured at the edges of the
wheel rims.
To check the exact value of the toe--in setting of

four--wheel drive tractors, proceed as follows.
1. Inflate the front tyres to the prescribed pressure.

of the tractor.

4. Measure the distance (1) between the front in-
side edges of the rims.
5. Turn both front wheels through 180° then, at the 1
height of the wheel hub centres, measure the dis-
tance (2) between the rear inside edges of the
wheel rims, checking that the new measurement
is equal to or greater than distance (1) by a maxi- 2
mum of 0.23 in. (6 mm). The rotation of the
wheels through 180° is required in order to elimi-
nate the effect on the measurement of any even-
tual wear on the rims.
24666
84
6. If wheel toe--in needs to be adjusted, remove nut

(2) and extract the track rod end (1) from the 1
housing.
Loosen lock nut (3) and screw the track rod end
(1) in or out to decrease or increase the distance
(2, fig. 84).
Reposition the track rod end (1) in the housing
and check the toe--in as described in points 4 and
5.
After having adjusted the toe--in to within the pre-
scribed limits, tighten lock nut (3) to a torque val-
ue of 180 Nm (133 ft. lbs.) and nut (2) to100 Nm 3 2
(74 ft. lbs.). 24667
85
NOTE: the self--locking nut (2) must be replaced

each time it is removed or unscrewed.
Op. 25 108 30
FRONT EPICYCLIC FINAL DRIVE
Removal
WARNING
gloves and shoes.

can be carried out with the axle detached and posi-
25587
tioned on the stand 293460, or with the axle fitted on
the tractor. 86
If the operation is performed with the axle fitted on the
tractor, a support stand must be positioned under the 1
engine sump.
Proceed as follows.
1. Unscrew the plug (1) and drain oil from the epi-
cyclic final drive casing.
25589
87
2. Unscrew the left--hand side gear cover (1) retain-
1
25594
88
1
25597
89
4. Remove the lock nut on the wheel hub bearings
using wrench 295030 (1).
1
25598
25598
90
5. Remove the wheel hub (1) together with the epi-
cyclic crown (2). Recover all disassembled parts.
1 2
Installation
follows.
25599
91
PLANETARY GEARS (TN55D)

tate reassembling.
Disassembly
1. From outside of the planetary cover (1), remove 2
1
gear support.
20030469
84
20030470
85
(3). 3
2 1
20030471
86
Inspection
parts to dry.
place as necessary. 20030472
damaged.
Assembly
following.
PLANETARY GEARS
(TN65D, TN70D, TN75D) 2
Disassembly 3
Inspection 20030473

parts to dry.
place as necessary.
damaged.
Assembly
Assembly of the planetary carrier follows the
disassembly procedures in reverse, observing the
following.

Ensure nineteen needle roller bearings are in each

planetary gear.
ATTENTION


on page 5.
-- Assemble the wheel hub and the epicyclic final

drive fixed gear.


page 37.

plete with gears.

Section 00).
Op. 25 108 30
FRONT EPICYCLIC FINAL DRIVE WITH
BRAKE
Removal
ATTENTION

positioned on the stand 293460, or with the axle fitted
If the operation is performed with the axle fitted on the

tractor, a support stand must be positioned under the 1
engine sump.
Proceed as follows.
1. Unscrew the plug (1) and drain oil from the epi-
cyclic final drive casing.
25589
92
2. Unscrew the left--hand side gear cover (1) retain-
1
25594
93
3. Remove the circlip (1) and extract the outer brake
disk (2).
94
4. Recover the hub (1) on the brake disk.
1
25563
95
5. Unscrew the retaining bolts and remove the drive
fixed gear (1) using two bolts as extractors.
1
Installation
follows.
25562
96
PLANETARY GEARS TN55D (WITH BRAKE)

tate reassembling.
Disassembly
1. From outside of the planetary cover (1), remove 2
1
gear support.
20030469
89
20030470
90
(3). 3
2 1
20030471
91
Inspection
parts to dry.
place as necessary.
20030472
damaged.
Assembly
following.
PLANETARY GEARS
(TN65D, TN70D, TN75D) 2
Disassembly 3
Inspection 20030473

parts to dry.
place as necessary.
damaged.
Assembly
following.

7. Ensure nineteen needle roller bearings are in

ATTENTION
-- Refer to the instructions on page 14, Chapter 1

for the positioning of the various parts.

on page 5, Chapter 1.
-- Refit the drive fixed gear.
-- Refit the brake disk hub.
-- Fit the outer brake disk and secure in position.

page 37.

plete with gears.

Section 00).
SECTION 27 -- REAR MECHANICAL DRIVE -- CHAPTER 1 1
SECTION 27 -- REAR MECHANICAL DRIVE
Chapter 1 -- Rear Mechanical Transmission
CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Bevel Gear Pair and Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Lateral Final Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Bevel Gear Pair and Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Lateral Final Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Hydraulically Controlled Differential Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
27 106 16 Rear Transmission Gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
27 110 10 Adjusting the Position of Differential Lock Engagement Sleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Bevel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
27 120 10 RH or LH Lateral Final Drive Box Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
27 120 34 Drive Wheel Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
27 120 32 Epicyclic Final Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
2 SECTION 27 -- REAR MECHANICAL DRIVE -- CHAPTER 1
SPECIFICATIONS
BEVEL GEAR PAIR AND DIFFERENTIAL
Bevel gear pair ratio:
-- models TN 55D/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/38 = 1:4.2(1) 11/36 = 1:3.27(2)
-- models TN 65D/S, TN 70D/S, TN 75D/S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9/40 = 1:4.4(1) 11/39 = 1:3.54(2)
Clearance between sides of bevel gear pair teeth . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 0.18 to 0.23 (0.0071 to 0.0090)
Type of differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . with two ring gears
Mechanically controlled differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pedal operated
Electrohydraulically controlled differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . controlled by switch located on
control panel
Side pinion internal seat diameter (5, fig. 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 24.040 to 24.061
(0.9464 to 0.9472)
Side pinion pin diameter (19, fig. 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 23.939 to 23.960
(0.9424 to 0.9433)
Clearance between side pinions and pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 0.080 to 0.122
(0.0031 to 0.0048)
Diameter of ring gear pinion hub seats on differential housing
(3, fig. 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 44.080 to 44.119
(1.7354 to 1.7370)
Diameter of ring gear pinion hubs (17, fig. 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 43.961 to 44.000
(1.7307 to 1.7322)
Clearance between ring gear pinion hubs and seats . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 0.080 to 0.158
(0.0031 to 0.0062)
Bevel gear bearing adjustment and bevel pinion clearance . . see pages 22 to 25
Thickness of bevel gear bearing adjuster rings and bevel
gear coupling clearance (21, fig. 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 0.15 -- 0.20 -- 0.50
(0.0059 -- 0.0079 -- 0.0197 )
Clearance between sides of side pinion and ring gear 0.15
teeth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) (0.0059)
Thickness of differential ring gear shim adjustment rings 1.4 -- 1.5 -- 1.6 -- 1.7 --
(16, fig. 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 1.8 -- 1.9 -- 2.0
(0.0551 -- 0.0590 -- 0.0629 --
0.0669 -- 0.0708 -- 0.0748 --
0.07874)
Thickness of differential side pinion shim adjustment rings mm (in.) 1.470 to 1.530
(4, fig. 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (0.0578 to 0.06024)
Adjustment of clearance between the side pinion and ring
gear teeth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see pages 25 and 26
Adjustment of differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see page 21
Thickness of differential lock control fork adjuster . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 0.5 (0.0196)
Differential lock control fork spring (Mechanical control):
-- spring free length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 220 (8.6614)
-- length of springs under load 177 to 195 N
(39.9 to 43.9 lbs.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 157.5 (6.200)
Differential lock control fork spring (Electrohydraulic control):
-- spring free length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 237 (9.3307)
-- spring length under a load of 304 to 335 N
(31.0 to 34.2 kg) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 159.5 (6.2795)
(1) 18.64 mph (30 km/h) model -- (2) 24.85 mph (40 km/h) model
LATERAL FINAL DRIVES
TN 55D/S TN 65D/S
TN 70D/S
TN 75D/S
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . epicyclic with three side pinions
and spur gear
Gear ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:(13+65)=

1:6
Thickness of side pinion shim rings (8, fig. 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 1 (0.0393)
Adjusting axial clearance of side pinion casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . see page 32
Thickness of axial clearance adjuster rings for side pinion 4.5 -- 4.6 -- 4.7 -- 4.8 -- 4.9 -- 5.0
casing (10, fig. 8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) -- 5.1 -- 5.2 -- 5.3 -- 5.4 -- 5.5 --
5.6 -- 5.7 -- 5.8
(0.1771 -- 0.1811 -- 0,1850 --
0.1889 -- 0.1929 -- 0.1968 --
0.2007 -- 0.2047 -- 0.2086 --
0.2125 -- 0.2165 -- 0.2204 --
0.2244 -- 0.2283)
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Tightening torque
Nm ft. lbs.
Transmission gearbox -- clutch retaining bolts (C1, fig. 1) . . . . . . . -- 117 to 129 86 to 94
Transmission gearbox cover -- PTO retaining bolts (C2) . . . . . . . . -- 20 to 25 14 to 18
PTO driven shaft ring nut (C3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 256 to 309 188 to 228
Transmission gearbox lower cover retaining bolts (C4) . . . . . . . . . -- 43 to 51 32 to 38
Bevel pinion shaft ring nut (C5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 280 to 309 206 to 228
Gear driven shaft bearings retaining bolts (C6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 84 to 93 62 to 69
Crown gear wheel retaining bolts (C7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 131 to 144 96 to 106
Reduction shaft bearings support retaining bolts (C8) . . . . . . . . . . -- 47 to 51 35 to 38
Reduction gearbox -- transmission gearbox retaining bolts (C9) . -- 135 to 149 100 to 110
Drive wheel axle retaining bolts (C10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 285 to 345 210 to 255
Plate disk -- drive wheel hub retaining bolts (C11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 264 to 319 195 to 235
Plate disk -- drive wheel rim ring nut (C12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 217 to 262 159 to 193
C2 -- 20 to 25 Nm
14 to 18 ft. lbs.
C1 -- 117 to 129 Nm
86 to 94 ft. lbs.
Z=43
C6 -- 84 to 93 Nm C5 -- 280 to 309 Nm C4 -- 43 to 51 Nm C3 -- 256 to 309 Nm

62 to 69 ft. lbs. 206 to 228 ft. lbs. 32 to 38 ft. lbs. 188 to 228 ft. lbs.
100 to 110
C9 -- 135 to 149 Nm ft. lbs.
C7 -- 131 to 144 Nm C8 -- 47 to 51 Nm
C10 -- 285 to 345 Nm
96 to 106 ft. lbs. 35 to 38 ft. lbs.
210 to 255 ft. lbs.
C11 -- 264 to 319 Nm

195 to 235 ft. lbs.
C12 -- 217 to 262 Nm

159 to 193 ft. lbs.
25999
1
SPECIAL TOOLS
Warning-- The operations described in this section operations described in this section.
cannot be carried out without the ESSENTIAL tools
marked with an (X). 291517 Clutch casing lift hook.
sults, it is also necessary to use the recommended 290090 Rotating stand for overhaul opera-
specific tools listed below and certain other tools tions.
cluded in this manual. 294088 Grooved wrench for bevel gear.
(1.181)
(1.181)
(.472)
(1.968)
(1.968)
(5.905)
(5.905)
(.787)
(4.133)
(.984)
(11.810)
(9.842)
(1.574)
(.314)
(3.149)
(,787) (11.023) (7.873)
(12.992)
24663
2
Tool to be constructed for removing -- refitting lateral final drives, to be used with tool 50114.
[Stamp number 50091 on the tool -- Measurement in mm (in.)]
Construct in Aq 42 D material.
1. Make 2 rods using C 40 bon material.
(1.574)
(11.810)
(7.873)
(9.842)
(1.968)
(1.574)
26258
(,787) (,787)
3
Tool to be constructed for removing -- refitting lateral final drives, to be used with a part of tool 50091. [Stamp
number 50114 on the tool -- Measurement in mm (in.)]
Construct in Fe 42 C material -- (*) Measurement to be defined according to hoist seat.
(.590)
(2.952)
26260
(5.905)
4
Tool to be constructed for adjusting differential lock sleeve travel
Construct in C40 material.
(23.031)
(5.511)
(3.936)
(5.905)
(5.905)
(4.409)
(3.936) (.393)
(1.968)
(3.936)
(12.795)
(7.873)
(.787)
(.669)
(8.267)
(10.826)
(12.598)
(1.574)
(5.905)
(.708) (3.936)
(.984)
(2.362)
(2.755)
(1.968)
26000
5
Tool to be constructed for securing the transmission gearbox to the rotating stand.
Construct in Aq 42 material -- (1) Rotating stand axle
(.196)
(.393)
(3.936)
(.472)
6
Series of guide pins (no. 2) to be constructed for differential support removing--refitting.
[Stamp number 50164 on the pins -- Measurement in mm (in.)]
Construct in C40 material
SECTIONAL VIEWS
1 2 3 4
11 10 9 8 7 6 5
26001
7
Longitudinal section of gearbox--transmission gearbox
1. Gearbox drive shaft. 7. Low -- mid driven gear shaft.

2. PTO control shaft. 8. Low -- mid -- upper range gear engagement.
3. Gearbox driving gear. 9. Gearbox drive shaft.
4. Bevel gear. 10. 1st and 2nd gear engagement synchroniser.
5. Bevel pinion shaft. 11. 3rd and 4th gear engagement synchroniser.
6. Gearbox low -- mid -- upper range gear engagement
sleeve.
The rear transmission transmits drive from the The lateral final drives are of the epicyclical type and
gearbox to the lateral final drives by means of the are operated by the bevel gear pair output half shafts,
bevel gear pair. The bevel gear pair is of the helical the same shafts that control the service brakes.
tooth type and is supported by taper--roller bearings.
The differential has two side pinions and is fitted with
a mechanically or hydraulically operated differential
lock.
TROUBLESHOOTING
BEVEL GEAR PAIR AND DIFFERENTIAL

Transmission is noisy while the 1. Incorrect adjustment or wear Remove the rear transmission
tractor is moving, even when the of ring gear or side pinion gearbox and replace the worn parts,
gears are in neutral (not due to gears. then correctly adjust the differential
lateral final drives). gears (page 25).
2. Excessive clearance between Remove the rear transmission

half--shaft keyed groove and gearbox and replace the damaged
side pinion gears. parts.
Transmission is noisy when 1. Internal part faulty. Remove the rear transmission
tractor is under or released from gearbox and replace the worn parts,
load. then correctly adjust the differential
gear clearance (page 25).
Transmission is noisy and 1. Insufficient coupling clear- Remove the rear transmission
assembly overheats. ance between the teeth of the gearbox and correctly adjust the ring
pinion and the ring bevel gear. bevel gear bearings (page 22).
LATERAL FINAL DRIVES

Lateral final drives are noisy while 1. Internal part faulty. Remove the lateral final drive housing
the tractor is moving, even when and replace the damaged parts.
the gears are in neutral.
neutral
2. Excessive clearance between Remove the lateral final drive housing
wheel axle shaft spline and and replace the damaged parts.
epicyclic final drives.
HYDRAULICALLY CONTROLLED
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
The differential lock does not 1. Transmission oil level low. Top up oil level.
engage
engage.
2. Oil filter clogged. Replace filter.
3. Hydraulic pump faulty. Overhaul or replace pump.
4. Differential lock switch faulty. Replace switch.
5. No power at solenoid: con- Check electrical connections and

nections loose or damaged, replace defective parts.
contactor defective.
6. Differential lock control valve Overhaul or replace the solenoid

jammed in discharge position. valve.
7. Oil leakage through seals, Replace all defective seals.

leading to drop in pressure:
cylinder piston or feed pipe
seals.
The differential lock does not 1. Differential lock engage/re- Replace switch.
disengage. lease switch faulty.
2. Differential lock control valve Overhaul or replace the solenoid

jammed in delivery position. valve.
3. Disengage spring faulty. Remove the hydraulic lift and replace

the spring.
With the differential lock engaged 1. Differential lock switch (con- Replace switch.
and the control switch in the nected to LIFT--O--MATIC de-
automatic position, the differential vice) faulty.
lock does not disengage when the
lift arms are raised with the
LIFT--O--MATIC device.
With the differential lock engaged, 1. Differential lock switch (con- Replace switch.
it cannot be disengaged by nected to brake pump) faulty.
operating the brake pedals.
OVERHAUL
Op. 27 106 16
REAR TRANSMISSION GEARBOX
Removal
WARNING
To remove the gearbox, proceed as follows.
1. Carry out operation 90 150 10: Cab with platform

unit, only removal (see Section 90, Chapter 1).
2. Carry out operation 21 118 10 or 21 118 12: Rear
transmission--gearbox, only removal (see Sec-
tion 21, Chapter 1).
gearbox, only gearbox removal (see Section 21,
Chapter 1).
4. Carry out operation 31 112 20: Mechanically en-
gaged PTO, only removal (see Section 31, Chap-
ter 1). 26003
5. Remove the pin (1) from the differential lock fork 10

(2).
6. Unscrew the retaining bolts (1) differential lock
rod (2) stop plate.
26004
11
7. Extract the differential lock rod (1) removing the
fork (2) and the return spring (3) from inside the
26005
12
8. Remove the control piston (1) of the differential
lock rod.
26006
13
9. Unscrew the retaining bolts (1) that support the
ring gear (2), removing the supports and adjuster
shims.
26007
14
10. Remove the ring gear (1) from inside the trans-
mission gearbox.
26008
15
11. Extract the two stop pins (1) of the final drive con-
trol.
26009
16
12. Unscrew the rod support retaining bolts (1).
26010
17
13. Extract the retaining pins (1) of the fork and final
drive control nib.
26011
18
14. Remove the two rods (1), the forks and the final
drive control nib (2) with the relative poppet balls
and return spring from the front section of the
26012
19
15. Remove the retaining circlip (1) from the pinion
shaft rear gear (2).
26013
20
16. Remove the pinion shaft rear gear (1).
26014
21
17. Remove the pinion ring nut safety tab pressure
washer (1).
26015
22
18. Rotate the transmission gearbox (3) through
180°.
Fit tool 294088 (1) on the rear of the pinion shaft,
position the 55 mm wrench (2) on the internal ring
nut; using tool 294088 unscrew the ring nut and
take out the pinion shaft from the rear of the
26016
23
19. Remove the gears (1) from inside the transmis-
sion gearbox.
Installation
To refit the various parts in the rear transmission
gearbox, proceed as follows.
WARNING
26017
24
-- With the transmission gearbox facing upwards, -- Position the ring bevel gear inside the transmis-
place the gears and the pinion shaft in the hous- sion gearbox, fit the LH ring bevel gear support
ing, via the opening on the PTO housing. with the 0.5 mm test shim.
-- Insert the 55 mm wrench on the internal ring nut -- Adjust the ring bevel gear bearings and the clear-
and, using a dynamometric wrench and tool ance between the sides of the ring bevel gear
294088, move the end of the pinion so as teeth, as described on pages 22 to 25.
to tighten the ring nut to a torque of 280 to 309 -- Fit the differential lock rod with the fork control
Nm (206 to 228 ft. lbs.) and squeeze the safety piston and return spring.
washer. -- Adjust the position of the differential lock engage-
-- Insert the remaining gears on the pinion shaft. ment sleeve as described on page 21.
-- Carry out operation 31 112 20: Mechanically en-
-- Fit the two rods, forks and final drive nib.
gaged PTO, only installation (see Section 31,
-- Check the rolling torque of the pinion, as de- Chapter 1).
scribed on page 22. -- Carry out operation 21 118 85: Transmission
-- Fit the rods, the pinion shaft sleeve forks and the gearbox, only installation of gearbox in housing
drive shaft sleeve with relative poppet balls and (see Section 21, Chapter 1).
return spring and the rod limit switch pins. -- Carry out operation 21 118 10 or 21 118 12: Rear
transmission--gearbox, only installation (see
-- Before fitting the ring bevel gear, check and (if
Section 21, Chapter 1).
necessary) adjust the clearance between the
side pinion teeth and the ring gears, as described -- Carry out operation 90 150 10: Cab with platform
on page 25. unit, only installation (see Section 90, Chapter 1).
20
27153
27153
SECTION 27 -- REAR MECHANICAL DRIVE -- CHAPTER 1
Diagram for application of sealing compound for rear transmission--gearbox

The types of sealing compound are indicated on page 2, Section 00
Op. 27 110 10
Adjusting the Position of Differential Lock

Engagement Sleeve
WARNING
Proceed as follows.
1. Fit the differential lock release device (mechani-

cally operated model) or the plate (hydraulically
operated model) without the adjuster shim.
2. Insert gauge 50041 (2, see page 7) with the 8.1

to to 8.2 mm (0.3189 to 0.3228 in.) shim between
the sleeve and the differential box, so that it
makes contact with the sliding surfaces of the
sleeve on the box.
3. Using a crowbar, bring the sleeve into contact

with the gauge 50041 and the differential box, ad- 26018
justing the fork (1) to the position of the gauge.
25
4. Using a feeler gauge (1), measure the clearance

between the control pin (2) and the seat on the
rod (3) (mechanically operated model).
26019
26
5. Using a feeler gauge (1), measure the clearance
between the plate (2) and the seat on the rod (3)
(hydraulically operated model).
6. Position the required shim under the differential

release control device (mechanically operated
model) or under the plate (2) (hydraulically oper-
ated model) and secure in position using the
bolts.
26020
27
BEVEL DRIVE
Adjustment
Determining the ring gear bearings and checking
the clearance between the sides of the gear pair
teeth
ATTENTION
Proceed as follows.
1. Fit the pinion, together with the relevant parts,

and tighten the ring nut to a torque of 280 to 309
Nm (206 to 228 ft. lbs.).
2. Check that the pinion rolling torque is .039 to 4.4

Nm, corresponding to a force on the mid--upper
driven gear range of 5.9 to 62.8 N (1.32 to 14.11
lbs.).
3. With the pinion fitted, insert the differential as-

sembly complete with the ring gear. Fit the LH
support (1) on the transmission--gearbox, with a
test shim of 0.5 mm (0.019 in.), tightening the
26021
three bolts at 120°, to a torque value of 59 Nm (44
ft. lbs.). 28
4. Using a micrometer (1), measure the thickness

of the RH support (D1). Fit the support (2), with-
out adjuster rings, on the transmission--gearbox,
using the three lubricated bolts set at 120°.
5. Tighten the bolts gradually and alternately at the

same time, turn the ring gear to allow the bear-
ings to settle, until the pinion reaches a rolling
torque which is the same as that measured for
the single pinion plus the values shown in the
table:
26022
RING AND PINIONS
29
9/40 9/38 11/39 11/36 11/32
0.88 to 1.32 Nm 1.08 to 1.77 Nm 1.31 to 2.1 Nm
7.7 to 11.6 in. lbs. 9.5 to 15.6 in. lbs. 11.5 to 18.5 in. lbs.
Alternately:
This torque can be measured with a spring scale
(1) and cord wrapped around the mid--upper
gear drive and corresponds to a force on the
spring scale for the single pinion, plus the values
shown on the table:
RING AND PINIONS

9/40 9/38 11/39 11/36 11/32
12.7 to 19.6 N 15.7 to 24.5 N 18.6 to 29.4 N
2.87 to 4.41 lbs. 3.53 to 5.51 lbs. 4.19 to 6.61 lbs.
26023
30
6. Use a depth gauge (1) to measure the distance
(D2) between the transmission--gearbox and the
outer face of the RH support, near the two
notches, and calculate the arithmetic mean of the
two measured values.
26024
31
7. Use a depth gauge to measure the distance (D3)
between the transmission--gearbox and the RH
support seat, near the two notches, and calculate
the arithmetic mean of the two measured values.
8. The total thickness of the shims to be inserted un-

der the RH and LH supports is given by:
S = D3 -- D1 -- D2 + 0.05 mm
(S = D3 -- D1 -- D2 + .002 ins.)
where:
26025
S = total thickness to be inserted (excluding the 32

test shim).
D3, D2 and D1 = distances measured.
0.05 mm (0.0019 in.) = oversizing required to re-

duce the preload on the bearings generated by
the support retaining bolts. If necessary, round
up the value (S) to the nearest 0.05 mm (0.0019
in.).
9. Using a dial gauge (1), check the clearance (G)
between the sides of the teeth of the bevel gear
pair (three measurements at 120° and the arith- 1
metic mean of the three readings) and compare
the mean of the three values with the normal pre-
scribed clearance: 0.18 to ÷ 0.23 mm (0.0071 to
0.0091 in.), mean 0.21 mm (0.0083 in.).
To compensate for greater measured clearance,
consider that the ratio between the normal clear-
ance of the teeth and the equivalent axial move-
ment of the ring gear has an average value of 1:
1.4.
26026
The axial movement of the ring (Z) will therefore
be: 33
Z = (G -- 0.21) x 1.4
(Z = [G -- 0.08 ins.]) x 1.4)
where:
G = previously measured clearance between the

sides of the teeth of the bevel gear pair.
10. The sets of adjuster rings (Sd and Ss) to be in-

serted on the RH (2) and LH (1) supports are giv- Ss Sd
en by:
Sd = S -- Z 1 2
Ss = Z + 0.5 (Ss = Z + .109 ins.)
where:
S = Overall value of adjuster rings (excluding the

test shim).
Z = Axial movement of the ring gear previously

calculated. 25930
0.5 (.019 ins.) = Test shim. 34
11. Fit the calculated shims (2) on the supports (1)

and check the rolling torque of the pinion--ring
gear assembly and the clearance between the
sides of the teeth of the bevel gear pair as de-
scribed above.
Example
-- Measurement of rolling torque of the bevel pinion
shaft = 0.39 to 4.4 Nm (3.4 to 58 in. lbs.) (on the
spring scale 5.9 to 62.8 Nm (1.32 to 1.41 lbs.).
-- Measurement of thickness (D1) of the RH sup-
port = 12.05 mm (0.4744 in.).
26027
-- Measurement of rolling torque of the pinion--ring
gear assembly = 3.14 Nm (27.7 in. lbs.), corre- 35
sponding to the force on the spring scale with a
cord wrapped around the mid--upper range
gears of 45.1 N (10.13 lbs.).
-- Measurement of distance (D2) between the
transmission--gearbox and the RH support:
30.05 mm; 30.15 mm (1.1831 to 1.1870 in.).
D2 = mean = (30.05 + 30.15) 2 = 30.10 mm
[(1.183 + 1.187) 2 = 1.1850 in.].
-- Measurement of distance (D3) between the
transmission--gearbox and the RH support seat:
42.80 mm; 43.00 mm (1.685; 1.692 ins.).
D3 = mean = (42.80 + 43.00): 2 = 42.90 mm
[(1.6850 + 1.6929) 2 = 1.6890 in.].
-- Total thickness of the adjustment rings:
S = 42.90 -- 12.05 -- 30.10 + 0.05 = 0.80 mm
(1.6890 -- 0.4744 -- 1.1850 + 0.0020 = 0.3150 in.).
-- Clearance measured between sides: 0.43 mm
(0.0169 in.); 0.45 mm (0.0177 in.); 0.41 mm
(0.0161 in.).
G = mean = (0.43 + 0.45 + 0.41): 3 = 0.43 mm
(.0169 + .0177 + .0161) 3 = 0.0169 in.].
-- Axial movement (Z), corresponding to the set of
shims to be inserted on the LH support:
Z = (0.43 -- 0.21) x 1.4 ≅ 0.30 mm
[(0.0169 -- 0.0083) x 1.4 ≅ 0.0188 in.].
-- Thickness of adjuster rings to be inserted on the
RH support Sd = 0.80 -- 0.30 = 0.50 mm (0.3150
-- 0.0118 = 0.0197 in.). Thickness of adjuster
rings to be inserted on the LH support Ss = 0.30
+ 0.50 = 0.80 mm (0.0118 + 0.0197 = 0.3150 in.).
where:
0.50 (0.20 in.) = test thickness.
1 2 3 4 5
Adjustment of the clearance between the side
pinion and ring gear teeth 6
With the differential disassembled on the bench,

proceed as follows.
7
12. Fit the two ring wheels (2 and 5) without rings (1
and 6) on the differential housing. Insert the plan-
etary gears (3 and 8) complete with fifth wheel 8
ring adjustment and pin (7); turn the retaining bolt
(4) a few times to prevent the pin from sliding out. 25920
36
13. Manipulate the LH ring wheel, so that it comes
into contact with the planet and, using a depth
gauge, measure the distance (H1), taking two di-
ametrically opposed measurements, taking the
arithmetic means of the two values measured.
H1
25921
37
14. Push the side gear so that it touches the differen-
tial and measure the distance (H2).
15. Repeat the same operations for the RH side

gear.
25922
H2
38
16. The axial movement of the side gears (2 and 5)
without adjustment rings is given by: 1 2 3 4 5
Gs or Gd = H1 -- H2
6
where:
Gs = axial movement of LH side gear;
Gd = axial movement of RH side gear; 7

H1 and H2 = are the LH or RH side gear measure- 8
ments.
25920
The normal clearance envisaged between the
sides of the planetary pinion and side gears is 39
0.15 mm (.006 in.).
Therefore, the normal clearance and the equiva-

lent axial movement of the side gears has an av-
erage ratio of 1:1.7.
The axial movement of the side gears corre-

sponding to the normal clearance is:
0.15x1.7 = 0.25 mm
(0.0059 x 0.0669 = 0.0098 in.).
Therefore the adjustment rings (1 and 6) to insert

on the differential housing will be given by:
Ss = Gs -- 0.25 mm (.001 in.) (for LH ring wheel).
Sd = Gd -- 0.25 mm (.001 in.) (for RH ring wheel).
Insert the adjustment rings obtaining a distance

which is as close as the value thus obtained (the
available values are listed on page 3).
Op. 27 120 10 -- 27 120 20
RH OR LH LATERAL FINAL DRIVE BOX
ASSEMBLY
Removal
DANGER
equipment
lifted.
Proceed as follows.
2. Using a hoist (1) raise the rear part of the tractor,

27837
positioning a fixed stand under the towing hook,
then remove the right--hand wheel (2). 40
3. Unscrew the plug (1) and drain off the oil from the
rear transmission gearbox (prescribed quantity:
42 litres [11.09 gals.]).
25628
41
4. Position a wooden block (1) between the cab (2)
and the lift body (3)
27838
42
5. Unscrew the cab retaining bolts (2) and the pin
(1), then remove together with the securing
bracket.
27839
43
6. Unscrew the retaining bolts (1) holding the lateral
stabiliser strut (2). 2 1
27840
44
7. Fit tool 50091 (1) and adapter 50114 (2) to the fi-
nal drive body (3).
27841
45
8. Position a hydraulic jack (2) under the final drive
(1), loosen the retaining bolts and remove the RH
lateral final drive (1) using the jack (2) and recov-
ering the spacers.
27842
46
9. Extract the axle shaft (1) from the brake disk and
differential.
Installation
To refit the lateral final drive housing, proceed as
follows.
WARNING
-- Before refitting the housings, supports and cov- 27843

ers clean and de--grease the mating surfaces
47
and apply sealing compound (approx. 2 mm in di-
ameter) as shown in figure 48.
-- Insert the axle shaft in the brake disk and differ-

ential.
-- Using tools 50091, 50114 and a hydraulic jack,

refit the lateral final drive unit to the rear transmis-
sion gearbox.
-- Fit the lateral stabiliser strut bracket.
-- Fit the pin to the lateral final drive housing.
-- Fit the cab to the pin.
-- Mount the rear RH wheel.
-- Remove the wooden block, remove the fixed

stand from under the towing hook and unhook
the hoist.
-- Screw the plug on the rear transmission gearbox

and fill up with oil (see page 7, section 00 for pre-
scribed products and quantities).
27154
48
Diagram of seal compound application for brake assembly and lateral final drives on the transmission gearbox.
The types of sealing compound are indicated on page 2 section. 00.
Op. 27 120 34
DRIVE WHEEL SHAFT
Removal
WARNING
With the lateral final drive housing removed from the

rear transmission, proceed as follows.
1. Remove the drive wheel shaft lock bolt safety 26030

plate (1).
49
2. Unscrew the bolts securing the driven gear sup-
port (1) on the drive wheel shaft and remove the
safety plate.
26031
50
3. Extract the support (1) from the driven gears and
remove the axial clearance adjuster shim from
the support
26032
51
4. Connect the lateral final drive (1) to a hoist (2)
and raise, checking that the wheel axle (3),
leaves the housing (tap on the end of the driving
gear axle with a rubber mallet to ease it out).
3
26033
52
5. Remove the seal (1).
Installation
To refit the lateral final drive housing, proceed as
follows.
WARNING 1
-- For the positioning of the various parts refer to

figures 7 and 8. 24614
53
page 4.
-- Fit the seal using a suitable striker.
-- Assemble the drive wheel shaft.
-- Fit the driven gear support and the relative ad-

juster shim.
-- Insert the safety plate and tighten the bolt to the

prescribed torque.
-- Adjust the axial clearance of the gear support as

26034
follows.
54
6. Using a dial gauge (1), check that the axial clear-
ance of the support (2) is 0.2 to 0.4 mm (0.0079
to 0.0157 in.); if not, change the adjuster shim
(10, fig. 8).
NOTE: The adjustment shims are listed on page 3.
Op. 27 120 32
EPICYCLIC FINAL DRIVE
Removal
WARNING
3
With the assembly detached from the housing,

proceed as follows.
1. Remove the retaining ring (1).
2. Extract the pins (2), and remove the gears (3),

complete with the roller bearings.
2
Installation 24620
1. Fit all the parts of the epicyclic final drive, revers- 55

ing operations 1 and 2.
SECTION 31 -- MECHANICAL POWER TAKE-OFF -- CHAPTER 1 1
Chapter 1 -- Mechanical Power Take-off
CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Mechanically Engaged PTO Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Servo Assist PTO Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
31 112 20 Mechanical PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
PTO Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
PTO Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2 SECTION 31 -- MECHANICAL POWER TAKE-OFF -- CHAPTER 1
SPECIFICATIONS
540 rpm power take-off TN55D/S TN65D/S

TN70D/S
TN75D/S
Type (two functions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1) independent with respect to
tractor speed
or:
2) synchronised to gearbox
Engagement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mechanical, by means of hand lever
located under the steering wheel
(RH side)
(see pages 10 and 11)
Direction of rotation (from tractor rear) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . clockwise
Engine speed with PTO at 540 rpm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rpm 2196
PTO revolution speed with engine at max. power
of 2300 rpm: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-- PTO 540 rpm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rpm 565
540 rpm, gearbox synchronized, PTO revolution speed rev/

(30 km/h [18.64 mph] model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . wheel 15.23 16.69
rev
540 rpm, gearbox synchronized, PTO revolution speed rev/
(FWD 40 km/h [24.85 mph] model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . wheel 12.14 12.94
rev
Diameter of driven shaft at grooved terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3/8″ (6 grooves)
SPECIAL TOOLS

indicated by an (X).
results, it is also necessary to use the recommended
included in this manual.
X 294145 Striker for PTO driving shaft bearings.
X 294099 Hand grip (with 294145).

TIGHTENING TORQUES
C1 -- 21 N⋅m 15 ft. lbs.
C4 -- 294 N⋅m 217 ft. lbs.
50035600
1
PTO 540 rpm.
Tightening torque
PART Thread
Nm ft lbs
Bearing support retaining bolts (PTO 540/750 and 540/1000 rpm) M 12 x 1.25 98 72
PTO cover retaining bolts (C1, pages 6 and 7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 21 15
Self locking nut for driven gears shaft:
(C4) PTO 540 rpm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 32 x 1.5 294 217
SECTIONAL VIEWS
2 1
12
14
15
16
3
4
11 8
6
13
9
10 A
50035599
Longitudinal sectional diagram of 540 rpm
1. 540 rpm PTO cover. 9. Rear bearings support.

2. Drive shaft bearings. 10. 540 rpm driven gear.
3. Driven shaft bearings. 11. Driven gears shaft lock nut.
4. Seal ring. 12. Driving gear.
5. Ground terminal. 13. PTO speed sensing wheel
6. PTO cover retaining bolt. 14. PTO brake disc
7. Rear transmission housing. 15. Spring
8. Driven gears support bushing. 16. Spacer
PTO
The PTO (1) installed on the tractor transfers motion

to the transported or towed implements. Control is
either directly from the engine clutch or from the
gearbox clutch.
Mechanically engaged/disengaged and Servo Assist

PTO devices are available in one speed, 540 rpm.
MECHANICALLY ENGAGED PTO

CONTROL
Proceed as follows:
-- engage the clutch by moving the control lever, 1,

to the horizontal position, pulling the safety lock 26355
backwards, 2.
When engaged, the PTO grooved terminal rotates

and the relevant lamp on the dashboard illuminates.
4
In these conditions PTO operation is completely
independent from the tractor travel, therefore:
-- the tractor can be stopped without stopping the

PTO;
-- the PTO can be stopped without stopping the

tractor (by disengaging the PTO clutch).
-- Disengage the PTO by moving the control lever,

1, to the vertical position.
26356
5
SERVO ASSIST PTO CONTROL

To operate the power take-off, engage the clutch by
moving the control lever 1 forward to position (A) fig.
6.
In these conditions, operation is totally independent
of the tractor ground speed, and the following
operations can be performed:
-- halt the tractor without stopping the power take-
off;
-- stop the power take-off without halting the tractor
(by disengaging the power take-off clutch).
The shaft rotates in a clockwise direction, viewed
from behind the tractor.
6
To disengage the power take-off, move the lever
backwards to position B.
CAUTION
Always disengage the power take-off and apply
the handbrake before leaving the tractor. If the
operator leaves the driving position without hav-
ing carried out this operation, an alarm is acti-
vated. The alarm will only be interrupted when
the operations have been carried out.
B
WARNING
When the power take-off is not in use, keep the
control lever (1) fig. 7 in the disengaged position
B.
NOTE: When the engine is switched off, the PTO 7

control lever (1) moves automatically to the neutral
position B, even if it has not been disengaged
manually.
OVERHAUL
Op. 31 112 20
MECHANICAL PTO
Removal
WARNING
Handle all parts carefully. Do not put your hands
or fingers between parts. Wear suitable safety
clothing -- safety goggles, gloves and shoes.
1. Carry out operation 90 150 10: Cab with platform

assembly, only removal (see Section 90, Chapter
1).
2. Carry out operation 21 118 10 or 21 118 12: Rear
transmission housing-gearbox, only removal
(See Section 21, Chapter 1).
3. Remove PTO Speed Sensor and shims (1) and
Rear PTO drives shaft cover (2).
2
1
20032936
8
4. Remove securing ring (1), from the drive shaft
end with bearing.
1
20032937
9
5. Extract drive shaft end with bearing (1) from the
housing. A puller is not required.
20032938
10
6. From the same opening, reach in about seven
inches and pull out the rear PTO Driveshaft (1).
It will pull completely out without loosing any
components. The shaft is approximately five-foot
long.
20032939
11
7. Remove the PTO driven shaft lock nut, using the
grooved wrench 50159 (1) and remove the
driven shaft, PTO speed sensing wheel, and
spacer.
12
Installation
To re-assemble the PTO, proceed as follows.
WARNING
• Insert PTO driven shaft, PTO speed sensing

wheel, spacer and lock nut. Tighten the lock nut,
using the grooved wrench 50159. Torque nut to
294 N⋅m (217 ft. lbs.).
• Insert PTO drive shaft into upper hole of casing.

Gently slide drive shaft through a series of
bearings until splines mesh inside clutch
assembly.
• Insert drive shaft end with bearing, making sure

splines mesh together with front drive shaft.
• Insert securing ring into drive shaft end bearing.
• Reinstall rear PTO drive shaft cover, PTO speed

sensor and shims (if used).
• Carry out operation 21 118 10 or 21 118 12: Rear

transmission housing-gearbox, only installation
(see Section 90, Chapter 1).
• Carry out operation 90 150 10:Cab with platform

assembly, only installation (see Section 90,
Chapter 1).
PTO BRAKE
The PTO brake consist of: spring (1), brake disc (2), 1
spacer (3), lock washer and capscrew (4). The brake
disc is a plain steel disk with no brake lining on it, and
it is pushed against the end of the PTO drive shaft.
Ensure the brake disk is flat. Find a flat surface, (ex: 5
block of granite, piece of plate glass, or piece of 1/4″
flat steel stock). With oil for lubrication, lap (sand) the
3 4
disk with 100 grit paper to create flatness. Then lap 2
disk with 220 grit paper for final finish. An uneven
brake disk surface could also cause unwanted PTO
driveline noise.
50035598
13
Remove the rear end cover (5) to inspect the
condition of the brake. When inspecting the brake
also insure that the snap ring (1) is properly installed 1
on the shaft. If not, this would permitted the PTO drive
shaft to move forward which will prevent the brake
from functioning properly.
If this is a complaint or failure and everything above

has been confirmed. Then use substitute spring (part
#47127604).
20032937
14
ADJUSTMENTS
PTO SPEED SENSOR

The following checks should be performed for units
experiencing incorrect PTO RPM speed readings.
1. For tractors built prior to serial #1183194, remove
the speed sensor (1) from its housing and install
two shims (2), part #5178490, replace the speed
sensor into the housing, and check for proper
operation. 2
NOTE: If this check does not correct the problem,
proceed to step 2.
2. Remove the speed sensor from the housing and

insert a screwdriver into the hole and through one 1
of the splines on the speed sensing wheel.
Holding the screwdriver, gently turn the PTO 20032940
shaft.
If the shaft turns easily, remove the PTO assembly 15
from the rear axle. Inspect the speed-sensing wheel
rivets for damage, and replace if necessary. Tighten
the nut securing the speed-sensing wheel in place,
and check for correct operation. Torque nut to 294
N⋅m (217 ft. lbs.).
Effective from serial #1183149 (All Models). The

machining of the speed sensor housing is revised
and the use of shims is eliminated.
Chapter 2 -- PTO Servo-Assist Valve
CONTENTS

Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
PTO Clutch Servo Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Hydraulic PTO Servo Assist Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
PTO Engaged Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
PTO SERVO-ASSIST VALVE engine, provides supply oil to the servo-assist valve.
Models after SN 1269032 have the installation of a The low-pressure system relief valve regulates the
PTO servo-assist valve, located on the right-hand oil pressure at 15 - 17 bar (217 - 246 psi).
side of the clutch housing. The PTO servo-assist
valve engages the PTO clutch when activated. With the PTO Control Lever in the engaged position,
the servo-assist valve spool allows pressurized oil to
A fitting in the steering system exhaust line, mounted engage the PTO clutches.
in front of the firewall on the right-hand side of the
1
Cross--sectional view of PTO servo control
1. Oil outlet pipe. 11. Seal.
2. Oil delivery pipe to piston. 12. Control piston.
3. Pressurised oil piping, from pump. 13. Retaining ring.
4. Dust ring. 14. Control valve lever, connected with cable
5. O ring seal. to lever in cab.
6. Control valve pin. 15. Lever tie-rod (7).
7. PTO clutch lever. 16. Retaining ring.
8. Locknut. 17. O ring seal.
9. Protective boot. 18. Spring.
10. Piston body. 19. Control valve body.
ADJUSTMENTS
PTO CLUTCH SERVO CONTROL 3. Turn the pin on the fork (2) so that the piston (5)
makes contact with the bottom of the cylinder.
Connect the fork (2) to the lever (1).
WARNING
4. Turn the fork (2) by one turn 1.25 mm (0.0492 in.)
Always use appropriate tools to align fixing
so that there is an internal clearance between the
sleeve and the clutch levers.
5. Tighten the locknut (3) and attach the boot (4) to
1. Detach the boot (4) from the pin on the fork (2)
the fork pin (2).
and unscrew the locknut (3).
2. Move the clutch lever (1) upwards.
HYDRAULIC PTO SERVO ASSIST CABLE 5. Slide the threaded end of the PTO Engagement
cable (3) through the mounting hole (4) and
1. Turn the ignition key one position clockwise to the install the adjusting nut (5).
run position.
6. Thread the adjusting nut (5) onto the cable (3)
2. Make sure the PTO Control Lever (1) is in the off until the PTO Indicator Light (6) is illuminated.
position.
7. Raise the PTO Control Lever (1) and remove the
3. Check that the PTO Indicator Light (6) that is 2 mm (0.0787 in.) spacer.
located on the instrument panel is not
illuminated. 8. Position the PTO Control Lever (1) in the off
position and make sure that the PTO Indicator
4. Raise the PTO Control Lever (1) and place a 2 mm Light (6) is not illuminated.
(0.0787 in.) spacer (7) between the lever and the
console stop surface (2). Rest the PTO Control
Lever on top of the spacer, in the off position.
7 2
4
50035584
5
PTO ENGAGED SWITCH console stop surface. Rest the PTO control lever
on top of spacer in the off position.
WARNING 3. Unscrew the screws (1) retaining the PTO en-
Always use appropriate tools to align fixing gaged switch (2) and move away from the control
holes. NEVER USE YOUR FINGERS OR HANDS. valve lever (3).
4. Move the switch (2) towards control valve lever

1. Check that the PTO control lever is disengaged, (3) until the switch clicks into position.
and that the PTO indicator light is not illuminated
on the instrument panel. 5. Secure the switch (2) in this position with the
screws (1).
2. Raise the PTO control lever and place a 2 mm
(0.0787 in.) spacer between the lever and the 6. Raise the PTO control lever and remove the 2
mm (0.0787 in.) spacer.
SECTION 33 -- BRAKING SYSTEM -- CHAPTER 1 1
SECTION 33 -- BRAKING SYSTEM
Chapter 1 -- Braking System
CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
33 202 60 Right or Left Hand Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
33 202 46 Brake Hydraulic Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Service Brakes Control Pedals Stroke (tractors with cabs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
33 202 04 Brake Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Air Bleeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
33 110 40 Parking Brake Disks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
33 110 08 Hand Brake Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Stroke Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2 SECTION 33 -- BRAKING SYSTEM -- CHAPTER 1
SPECIFICATIONS
Type:
-- service brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . with oil bath disk, acting on
differential driveshafts
-- parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . with oil bath disks, engaging a
gear on the bevel pinion shaft
Control:
-- service brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hydrostatic, with independent
(connected by means of a pin)
-- parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mechanical, by means of a
hand lever
Service brake disk material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sintered
Parking brake disk material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . steel
Parking brake mobile sectors material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . sintered
or
organic agglomerate
Disk thickness:
-- service brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 10
(in.) (0.3937)
-- wear tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 8.6
(in.) (0.3386)
-- parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 3.95 to 4.05
(in.) (0.1555 to 0.1594)
Parking brake friction disk thickness (mobile sectors):
-- side sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 3.1 to 3.4

(in.) (0.1220 to 0.1339)
-- intermediate sectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 4.2 to 4.5

(in.) (0.1654 to 0.1772)
Hydrostatic control
Hydraulic pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . with 2 master cylinders

independently operated by brake
pedals
Operating pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bar 17.6
(psi) (255.3)
Control pedal adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see page 15
Bleeding air from brake circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see page 16
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Tightening torque
PART Thread
Nm ft. lbs.
Nut securing final drive to transmission casing (C1) . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 135 to 149 100 to 110
Guide bolts for parking brake mobile sector (C2) (:) . . . . . . . . . . . -- 24 18
(:) Apply 2 drops of LOCTITE 243 thread lock.

C1 --135:149 Nm
(100 to 110 ft. lbs.)
C 2--24 Nm
26057 26058
(18 ft. lbs.)
1
SECTIONAL VIEWS
8 9 1 2
60x95x23
26059
3 X
7
26060
5 4
2
Service brake and parking brake sectional drawings
1. Service brake disk. 6. Parking brake support.
2. Side final drive box shim. 7. Seals.
3. Parking brake disk. 8. Brake control piston.
4. Braking sectors. 9. Guide dowel.
5. Parking brake internal control lever.
1 2
26061
A
1 2
26062
3
Front axle brake diagram
A. Model TN 55D/S. 3. Guide pin.

B. Models TN 65D/S, TN 70D/S and TN 75D/S. 4. Brake disk.
1. Brake control piston. 5. Seals.
2. Brake wear disk.
24664
4
Service brake sectional drawing
1. Spring. 4. Rear seals.

2. Pump body. 5. Central seals.
3. Control piston. 6. Front seals.
SPECIAL TOOLS
Warning -- The operations described in this section included in this manual.
To work safely and efficiently and obtain the best List of specific tools required for the various
results, it is also necessary to use the recommended operations described in this section.
specific tools listed below and certain other tools
(1.18)
(0.472)
(1.96)
(5.905) (1.96)
(.787)
(5.905)
(4.13)
(0.984)
(11.81)
(9.84)
(1.57)
(0.314)
(3.14)
(.787) (11.02) (12.99) (7.87)
24663
5
Tool to be made for disassembly--assembly of the final drives, to be used with 50114.
[Stamp No. 50091 on the tool -- Measurement in mm (in.)]
Construct in Aq 42 D -- 1 material. Make 2 tie--rods in C 40 bon material.
(1.57)
(11.81)
(9.84)
(7.87)
(1.57)
26258
(.787) (.787) (3.54)
6
Tool to be made for removal--installation of the final drives, to be used with a part of 50091.
[Stamp No. 50114 on the tool -- Measurement in mm (in.)]
Construct in Fe 42 C material -- (*) Define measurement according to the hydraulic jack seat.
SERVICE BRAKES drive casing. The disks are splined on the differential
The service brakes are hydraulically operated with oil drive shafts.
bath disks.
The two control pumps (one for each pedal) are
located in the front part of the cab and are connected
to their respective pedals by means of two tie--rods. PARKING BRAKE
These pumps can be operated individually or
together. If operated together, the pedals are The parking brake is mechanically operated, by
connected by a pin. means of an idler gear on the rear bevel pinion shaft,
A connecting pipe between the two pumps ensures and is controlled by a lever located on the left--hand
balanced braking, even when the brake disks are not side of the operator.
equally worn. When the parking brake control lever is applied, the
The two control pumps are fed from a single reservoir tie--rod acts on the external support lever and moves
positioned above the pumps. the braking sectors up against the three brake disks
The brake disks (one for each rear wheel) are located splined to the idler gear, thereby stopping the tractor.
between the rear transmission casing and the final
TROUBLESHOOTING
Brake pedals hard to operate. 1. Corresponding master cylin- Replace the brake control pump.
der seized.
2. Brake control pipes ob- Clean or replace the control pipes.

structed or pinched.
The brakes stick when the pedals 1. Brake control pump pistons Release the piston and, if necessary,
are released. locked. replace the brake control pumps.
2. Master cylinders seized. Replace the brake control pumps.
Noisy brakes. 1. Friction material on brake Replace the brake disks.

disks worn (1, page 4).
Pedal stroke too long. 1. Air in the brake circuit. Bleed air from the brake circuit.
2. Brake control pumps worn. Replace the brake control pumps.
3. Leakage from control pipes. Eliminate the cause of the leakage.
Unbalanced braking. 1. Incorrect tire pressure. Inflate the tires to the correct
pressure.
3. Pump connection pipes ob- Clean or replace the pipes.

4. Brake control pipes ob- Clean or replace the control pipes.

5. Pump control piston seals Replace the brake control pumps.

worn or damaged.
6. Friction material on brake disk Replace the disk.

worn (1, page 4).
(continued)
Inefficient braking. 1. Friction material on brake Replace the brake disks.

disks worn (1, page 4).
3. Air in the brake circuit. Bleed air from the brake circuit.
4. Leakage from control pipes. Eliminate the cause of the leakage.
5. Pump control piston seals Replace the brake control pumps.

worn or damaged.
Parking brake does not lock. 1. Brake control incorrectly ad- Adjust correctly.
justed.
2. Braking sectors worn Replace the braking sectors.

(4, page 4).
The tractor remains braked when 1. Control return stroke ob- Remove obstructions.
the parking brake is disengaged. structed.
2. Braking sectors (4, page 4) se- Release and replace the damaged
ized on brake disks. parts.
OVERHAUL
Op. 33 202 60
RIGHT OR LEFT HAND BRAKE
Removal
DANGER
equipment
lifted. 26063
7
Proceed as follows.
1. Carry out operation 27 120 10 or 27 120 20 Right

or left--hand final drive casing, only removal (see
Section 27, Chapter 1).
2. Remove the brake disk (1) from the seat in the

transmission casing (2) and recover the control
piston.
Installation
To refit the right or left--hand brake, proceed as
follows.
WARNING
-- Check the control piston seals and replace, if

necessary.
-- Fit the control piston (1) in the seat in the rear

26064
transmission casing (2) , using a rubber mallet.
8
-- Fit the brake disk (1, fig. 7).
-- Carry out operation 27 120 10 or 27 120 20: Right

or left--hand final drive casing, only installation
(see Section 27, Chapter 1).
26254
9
Sealing compound application diagram for braking unit and final drives on transmission casing.
The types of sealing compound to be used are shown on page 2 Section 00.
Op. 33 202 46
BRAKE HYDRAULIC PUMP
Removal
WARNING
To remove the hydraulic pump, proceed as follows.
1. Block the wheels using chocks.
2. Carry out operation 90 100 22: Hood removal,

only removal (see Section 90).
3. Carry out operation 90 110 14: Instrument panel 25758
lower guard, only removal (see Section 90). 10

4. Delicately remove the cover bearing the NEW
HOLLAND symbol from the steering wheel, un-
screw the retaining nut and remove the steering
wheel (1).
5. Carry out operation 55 418 10: Multiple indication

panel, only removal (see Section90).
6. Remove the retaining bolts on the dashboard,

detach the electrical connections (1), the light
control switch (2) from their seats, complete with
the dust guard (3).
25761
11
7. Remove the electrical connections (1) con-
nected to the dashboard and remove the dash-
board (2).
25762
12
8. Remove the fuel filter (1).
27845
13
9. Disconnect the two power steering reservoir oil
delivery pipes (1) on the brake pump (2).
14
10. Disconnect the two oil delivery pipes (1) from the
unions on the front part of the cab.
26067
15
11. Disconnect the two oil delivery pipes (1) from the
unions on the brake pump (2).
26068
16
12. Disconnect the PTO clutch control tie--rod (1).
26069
17
13. Remove the two retaining bolts (1) that secure
the electrohydraulic DD disengagement control
unit (2). Move the unit to the left in order to facili-
tate operations.
26070
18
14. Remove the retaining bolts that secure the relay
to the brake pedals support bracket (2), loosen
the brake levers/cab front brake pump retaining
bolts and remove the bracket (1) that supports
the electrohydraulic DD engagement control unit
by unscrewing the bolts (3).
26071
19
15. Remove the three retaining bolts (1) located un-
der the electrohydraulic DD engagement control
unit and remove the pump support bracket (2),
complete with pump and brake pedals.
26072
20
16. Disconnect the two levers on the brake pedals
(1), using the springs to remove the pins. Re-
move the bolts (2) securing the pump to the
bracket (3) and remove the brake pump.
Installation
To refit the brake control hydraulic pump unit,
proceed as follows.
WARNING
26073
21
-- Adjust the brake pedals stroke following the in-
structions on page 16.
-- Fit and secure the pumps, connect to the control

pedals.
-- Fit the brake support bracket and the electrohy-

draulic control unit.
-- Fit the brake levers/cab front brake pump retain-

ing bolts and the relay to the brake pedals sup-
port bracket.
-- Fit the electrohydraulic control unit.
-- Connect the tie--rod to the PTO clutch.
-- Connect the oil delivery pipes to the brake pump

unions on the front part of the cab and the oil de-
livery pipes from the power steering reservoir on
the pump.
-- Position the fuel filter.
-- Carry out operation 55 418 10: Multiple indication

panel, only installation (see Section 90).
-- Fit and secure the steering wheel and cover with

the NEW HOLLAND symbol.
-- Carry out operation 90 110 14: Instrument panel

lower guard, only installation (see Section 90).
-- Carry out operation 90 100 22: Hood removal,

only installation (see Section 90).
-- Bleed the air from the brake circuit, following the

instructions on page 17.
-- Remove the chocks on the wheels.

SERVICE BRAKES CONTROL PEDALS
STROKE (TRACTORS WITH CABS)
Adjustment
WARNING
Proceed as follows.
1. Attach the brake pump unit (1), complete with 27846

bracket, to tool 294146 (2) and place in a vice.
22
2. Press the left--hand pedal (2) fully down and in-
sert the pin (1) of tool 294146.
NOTE: The pin (1) must slot into the hole on the pedal
(2) without forcing.
If not, proceed as follows.
27847
23
3. Detach the spring (3), remove the safety springs
(1) and extract the pin (2); repeat the operation
on the other pump.
27848
24
4. Loosen the locknut (2) and screw or unscrew the
fork (1) until the pin (1, fig. 23) slots freely into the
hole (2, fig. 23), then tighten the locknut.
5. Repeat the operation on the right--hand pedal.
27849
25
6. Check that the pin (1) slots into the holes on the
pedal (2) without forcing.
27850
26
7. Detach the brake pump unit from the tool 294146
(1, fig. 23) and fit in position in the cab, following
the instructions on page 15.
8. When the right--hand pedal (1) is fully pressed

down, check that the clearance (A) between
the pedal and the cab window is at least 10 mm
(.393 ins.).
9. Repeat the operation on the other pedal.
27851
27
Op. 33 202 04
BRAKE HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Air Bleeding
Whenever service operations are carried out on the

brake hydraulic system, air bleeding must be
performed.
Proceed as follows.
1. Remove the cap and thoroughly clean the external

parts of the assemblies near the bleeding screws 26404
and the hydraulic oil reservoir cover. 28

2. Check that the right--hand (2) and the left--hand
(1) brake reservoirs are full, both before and dur-
ing bleeding.
3. Push the left--hand brake pedal down, slowly

and fully, so that the oil is put in pressure.
4. Keep the pedal pressed down, unscrew the
bleeding screw (1) by half a turn, allowing the oil/
air bubble mixture to flow out.
5. Tighten the screw (1) and repeat the operation

until oil without air bubbles flows out.
6. Push the brake pedal down again so that the oil

is put in pressure i.e.: when the brake pedal
stroke returns to normal.
7. Repeat the operation on the right--hand part of

the brake circuit.
24497
8. On completion of the operation, top off the oil lev-
el in the reservoir. 29
9. After having bled the rear brake circuit, thorough-

ly clean the external parts of the assemblies near
the hydraulic oil reservoir cover (2).
10. Check that the right--hand brake reservoir (1) is

full, both before and during bleeding.
26549
30
11. Thoroughly clean the external parts of the as-
semblies near the bleeding screws (1) and (2).
12. Push the left--hand brake pedal down, slowly

and fully, so that the oil is put in pressure.

bleeding screw (1) by half a turn, allowing the oil/
air bubble mixture to flow out.

15. Push the brake pedal down again so that the oil 26605
stroke returns to normal. 31
16. Repeat the operation on the brake circuit screw

(2).
17. On completion of the operation, top off the oil lev-

el in the reservoir.
18. Remove the cap (1).
19. Connect the brake pedals by means of the pin
and push both brake pedals down, slowly and
fully, so that the oil is put in pressure.
26457
32
bleeding screw (1), located inside the front final
drive, by half a turn, allowing the oil/air bubble
mixture to flow out.

22. Push the brake pedal down again so that the oil
stroke returns to normal.
23. Repeat the operation on the right--hand part of

the brake circuit. 26583
24. On completion of the operation, top off the oil lev- 33

el in the reservoir and tighten the caps (1).
NOTE: To align the front brake (1) fig. 33 bleeding

screws with the front final drive (1) fig. 32, position the
final drive vertically.
Op. 33 110 40 -- 33 110 44
PARKING BRAKE DISKS
Removal
WARNING
To remove the parking brake disks, proceed as

25628
follows.
34
1. Unscrew the cap (1) and drain the oil from the
rear transmission casing (the prescribed quantity
is 42 litres).
2. Unscrew the four retaining bolts (1) and remove

the parking brake disks access cover (2).
26078
35
3. Remove the retaining ring (1) from the parking
brake disks (2).
26080
36
4. Recover the retaining ring (1), the brake disks (2)
and the friction disks (3).
Installation
To refit the parking brake disks, proceed as follows.
WARNING
-- Study the illustrations in fig. 2 for the positioning

of the various parts. 26081
-- Insert the brake disks and friction disks in their re- 37

spective seats.
-- Fit the safety ring.
-- Fit the access cover on the transmission casing

and secure with the four bolts.
-- Tighten the cap on the rear transmission casing

and fill up with oil (for products and quantities see
Section 00, page 7).
Op. 33 110 08
HAND BRAKE CONTROL
Stroke Adjustment
The parking brake lever must be adjusted whenever
service operations are carried out on the assembly,
and if the lever is not positioned in the third notch
when the brake is engaged.
Proceed as follows.
1. Turn the adjusting device (1) clockwise if the

parking brake lever has moved more than three
notches when the brake was engaged. 2
2. Check that the parking brake lever moves three
notches on the toothed sector when the brake is
engaged.
3. Lock the adjustment device (1) by positioning the

hexagonal part (2) of the locknut in its seat.
4. Check that the dashboard warning light (parking

brake engaged light) illuminates when the brake
lever is engaged.
26586
38
SECTION 35 -- HYDRAULIC SYSTEM -- CHAPTER 1 1
CONTENTS

Precautionary Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
35 104 High-Pressure System Hydraulic Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
35 110 Mechanically Controlled Hydraulic Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Principles of Draft Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Principles of Position Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Principles of Float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Principles of Draft and Position Control Combined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Lift-O-Matic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Hydraulic Power Lift (HPL) Control Valve Oil Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Lift Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Neutral Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Lower Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Remote Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Simple Self-Centering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Simple Self-Centering with Float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Detent with Auto-Release and Float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Rear Remote Valve Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Rear Remote Valve Stacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Rear Remote Valve Control Levers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Quick-Fit Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Zero Pressure Return Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Mid-Mount Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Mid-Mount Coupler Relocation Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Joystick Control for Mid-Mount Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Switching Between Single and Double-Acting Cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Double-Acting Valve with Automatic Detent Release and Float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Float Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Lift Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Lower Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2 SECTION 35 -- HYDRAULIC SYSTEM -- CHAPTER 1

Double-Acting Valve less Automatic Detent Release and Float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Lift Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Lower Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Single-Acting Valve less Automatic Detent Release and Float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Lift Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Lower Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Hydraulic System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
PRECAUTIONARY STATEMENTS
WARNING WARNING
Never use your hands to locate a leak. Hydraulic Stand clear of all moving parts when starting the
leaks under pressure may penetrate the skin and engine or pressurizing the hydraulic system.
possibly cause severe injury, or death. A piece of
cardboard or a rag usually will sufficiently
identify a leak without risking personal injury. CAUTION
Contamination of the hydraulic oil will lead to
premature failure of components, or catastroph-
WARNING ic failure of the entire system. Use protective
Always turn-off the engine and bleed any closures, and keep work areas clean before,
remaining hydraulic pressure before connecting during and after maintenance on the hydraulic
or disconnecting hydraulically operated equip- system.
ment, components or connectors. Hydraulic oil
under pressure may cause severe injury or
death. CAUTION
Operating the hydraulic system above recom-
mended operating temperature for long periods
WARNING will destroy O-rings and seals, as well as break
Ensure all hydraulic connections remain tight down the lubricating properties of hydraulic oil.
before starting the engine or pressurizing the This will result in internal corrosion or leakage,
hydraulic system. Hydraulic oil under pressure which will lead to component and/or system
may cause severe injury or death. failure.
WARNING
Always stand clear of equipment raised with a
hydraulic system, as a failure, leak or sudden
loss of pressure will cause the equipment to
drop. Severe injury or death may occur from
unexpected falling equipment.

The TN D and S series tractor is equipped with a dual
pump, low-pressure and high-pressure, open-center
hydraulic system. Both systems share a main
hydraulic filter, a main relief valve, and the rear axle
housing as a reservoir. For more detail on the
low-pressure system, refer to Section 35, Chapters
3 and 4.
The high-pressure system supplies oil for the

operation of the hydraulic lift, remote control valves,
and external equipment. In addition, the
high-pressure system in combination with the 3-point
hitch provides accurate and sensitive control of
implements over a wide range of operating
conditions.
The high-pressure system is an open-center type,

which allows for the continuous flow of oil through the
system and back to return. This type of system
reduces wear on the control valve seals, and
prevents damage to components caused by
prolonged static pressure.
A filter assembly (1), located on the right-hand side
of the engine, cleans the oil before it enters the
high-pressure system. A relief valve installed in the
suction line (2) of the filter housing protects the
system from overload conditions.
In the high-pressure system, the rear remote valves

have oil priority over the hydraulic power lift (HPL).
When operating a remote valve(s), oil flows from the
remote valve to the actuated cylinder. Return oil from
the cylinder flows back through the remote valve as-
sembly and into the top of the lift cover, then back to 2
1
sump. The hydraulic lift is not operable during opera-
tion of a remote control valve.
1
An optional variable flow-control valve enables the
operator to control oil flow from the 1st remote valve,
and remaining flow to the 2nd and 3rd valves for op-
eration of other applications, or for operation of the
three-point lift. Installation of the variable flow-control
valve limits the use of rear remote valves to a maxi-
mum of three. If the tractor configuration includes
four remote valves, the variable flow-control valve
takes the place of the second remote valve. The vari-
able flow-control valve equals the size of a remote
section, and therefore requires the same parts as
those for a four-valve stack such as the tie rods, and
the feed tube to the hydraulic power lift. When using a
variable flow-control valve, the first remote is a detent
with float type. The flow-control valve assumes the
second position. The third and fourth positions pri-
marily provide for loader functions.
NOTE: Install a joystick (1) to control the 1 st and 2 nd
remote valves when installing a 3 rd and 4 th remote 1
valve.
NOTE: Install the mid-mount hydraulic coupler

relocation kit on tractors configured with two rear
remote valves. The kit requires removing the 1st and
2nd rear remote couplers, and then relocating the
couplers to a mid-vehicle point. Install 3rd and 4th rear
remote valves with couplers if the need for rear remote
couplers exists after installing the relocation kit.
2
35 104 HIGH-PRESSURE SYSTEM
HYDRAULIC PUMP
The high-pressure system pump mounts on the
right-hand side of the engine. It is a fixed displacement,
open-center, gear type pump driven by the engine
timing gear. The pump supplies oil at a pressure range
of 190--195 bar (2756--2828), at a rate of 47 l/m (12.4
g/m) on models with a mechanical shuttle, or 64 l/m
(16.9 g/m) with a power shuttle transmission.
When operating orbital motors or front-end loaders,
it is desirable to use a factory installed optional 16.9
g/m pump on tractors with a mechanical shuttle
transmission.
The type of hydraulic pump installed in each system
depends on the configuration of the tractor, and the
transmission. Refer to Table 1.
TABLE 1. HYDRAULIC PUMPS BY MODEL

MODEL HIGH-PRESSURE PUMP FLOW RATE
47 l/m (12.4 g/m) [C--42] 64 l/m (16.9 g/m) [BOSCH 25]
TN55S/D, 65S/D, 70S/D Mechanical Shuttle STANDARD OPTIONAL
TN55S/D, 65S/D, 70S/D Power Shuttle STANDARD OPTIONAL
TN75S/D Mechanical or Power Shuttle STANDARD
Refer to Table 2 for the recommended oil of the TN

S and D series tractor hydraulic system.
TABLE 2. HYDRAULIC OIL SPECIFICATION

TYPE SPECIFICATION QUANTITY
AMBRA MULTI G API GL4 42 liters (11 gal)
TRANSMISSION, REAR AXLE ISO 32/46
HYDRAULIC OIL 134D SAE 10W--30
Refer to Table 3 for a listing of the different systems

and components that affect the hydraulic system of
each model tractor. A better understanding of the
configuration of the tractor will greatly ease the
burden of troubleshooting if the need arises. Use
Table 3 as a reference only, with the understanding
that changes do occur.
TABLE 3. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
5 5 6 6 7 7 7 7 5 5 6 6 7 7 7 7
MS = MECHANICAL SHUTTLE TRANSMISSION 5 5 5 5 0 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 0 5 5
PS = POWER SHUTTLE TRANSMISSION S S S S S S S S D D D D D D D D
M P M P M P M P M P M P M P M P
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
SUPERSTEER DELUXE
(CAB or ROPS) (CAB ONLY)
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC FWD ENGAGEMENT X X X X X X X X X X X X
HYDROSTATIC POWER STEERING X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC FRONT DIFF LOCK X X X X X X X X
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC REAR DIFF LOCK X X X X X X X X X X X X
OPEN--CENTER HYDRAULIC SYSTEM X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
LOW--PRESSURE STEERING PUMP 7.4 GPM X X X X X X X X
LOW--PRESSURE STEERING PUMP 9.2 GPM WITH OIL X X X X X X X X
COOLER
HIGH--PRESSURE (LIFT) PUMP 12.4 GPM X X X X X X
HIGH--PRESSURE (LIFT) PUMP 16.9 GPM WITH OIL X X X X
COOLER
(1) OPEN-CENTER REAR REMOTE -- LEVER X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
CONTROLLED
PTO WITH HYDRAULIC SERVO ASSIST ENGAGEMENT X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
(ASN 1269032 MECHANICAL PTO PRIOR TO THIS NUMBER)
ONE POSITION AND ONE DRAFT CONTROL LEVER X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
HPL FAST RAISE/LOWER CONTROL (LIFT-O-MATIC) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
LIFT CAPACITY OF 3962 LBS (SAE) X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
FACTORY INSTALLED OPTIONS
(LESS MID-MOUNT) 2ND REAR REMOTE WITH LEVER X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
(LESS MID-MOUNT) 2ND & 3RD REAR REMOTE WITH LEVER X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
(WITH MID-MOUNT) 2ND REAR REMOTE WITH X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
COUPLERS
16.9 GPM HYDRAULIC PUMP WITH OIL COOLER X X X X X X X X X X X X
DEALER INSTALLED ACCESSORIES
2ND REAR REMOTE WITH JOYSTICK (CONTROLS 1ST & X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
2ND)
2ND REAR REMOTE WITH LEVER CONTROL X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
3RD REAR REMOTE WITH LEVER CONTROL X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
4TH REAR REMOTE WITH LEVER CONTROL X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
MID-MOUNT HYDRAULIC COUPLER RELOCATION KIT X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
2 MID-MOUNT VALVES WITH JOYSTICK CONTROL X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
HYDRAULIC FILTER PROTECTION KIT X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
LOW-PRESSURE DIRECT SUMP RETURN FITTING 5/8--3/4 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
LOW-PRESSURE DIRECT SUMP RETURN FITTING 3/4--3/4 X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
The TN S and D series hydraulic system operates

within a normal temperature range of 140--180° at
85° ambient temperature, and must not exceed a
maximum temperature of 240°.
35 110 MECHANICALLY CONTROLLED

HYDRAULIC LIFT
The Hydraulic Power Lift system contains four
distinct methods of controlling the 3-point linkage
system, which includes:
• Draft Control
• Position Control
• Float
• Draft and Position Control Combined
3
3-POINT LINKAGE SYSTEM
Tractors are available with category I and category II linkages.
1. Adjustable length top link 5. Lower arms

2. Right-hand lift rod adjuster 6. Arm spacer spring
3. Right-hand lift rod 7. Left-hand lift rod
4. Telescopic lateral stabilizer struts 8. Top link support bracket
Selection of a control system depends on the type of
implement in use and the operating conditions that
exist. Selection is accomplished through a position
control lever (1) and a draft selector lever (2) in a
quadrant on the right-hand side of the operator’s
seat.
The lower lift arms and corresponding control rods

connected to the flex bar provide for draft control.
4
Principles of Draft Control
The Draft Control system manages the working
depth of soil engaging implements to maintain an
even pull on the tractor, and to reduce wheel
slippage.
When lowering a soil-engaging implement, e.g. a

plow, into the ground, the draft forces applied to the
implement tend to make the plow pivot at the point
where it attaches to the lower links. The HPL senses
the force on the lower link arms via a torsion bar.
Without the top link, the plow would tip up. Due to the
top link resistance, the plow stays level in the ground.
This demonstrates compressive force acting on the
top link against the tractor. The draft force will alter
according to the depth of work and soil type.
Move the position control lever full forward and set

the implement depth in the ground by gradually
shifting the draft control lever. The depth reached by
the implement is proportional to the traction power
determined by the soil consistency. The lift
automatically maintains drive power required of the
tractor at a constant level.
Principles of Position Control

Position control allows for pre-setting and maintain-
ing the working depth or height of an implement,
relative to the tractor.
Move the draft control lever full forward and set the
position of the implement by shifting the position
control lever forward to lower the implement, and
backwards to raise the implement. Movement of the
implement is proportional to movement of the lever.
In addition to the position control lever, movement of

the implement is possible by using the Lift-O-Matic
buttons to raise and lower the implement.
Principles of Float
The float position enables the lower link arms to
move freely. Shift both the position control lever and
the draft control lever full forward, and only use the
Lift-O-Matic control to raise or lower the implement.
Principles of Draft and Position Control

Combined
In this configuration the lift operates in draft control,
and at the same time prevents the implement from
protruding deep into soil of less resistance, thereby
preventing soil unsuitable for crop growing from
reaching the surface
5
Set the desired draft control of the implement and
gradually shift the position control lever until the
lower link arms rise. Only use the Lift-O-Matic control
to raise or lower the implement in this configuration.
Lift-O-Matic
The Lift-O-Matic allows control of the Hydraulic
Power Lift without using levers. Moving button (1),
rearward raises the arms and releases button (2).
Pressing button (2) lowers the implement to the
pre-set limit of the control lever, and remains
depressed until released by button (1).
HYDRAULIC POWER LIFT (HPL) CONTROL unseats within the check valve (4) installed in the lift
VALVE OIL FLOW cylinder port, (8), allowing pressurized oil to pass
through and act on the surface of the piston (9). The
Lift Phase force of the piston raises the lift arms (10).
Moving the control lever to the Lift position transmits
motion via internal mechanical linkage (Detail A) to During controlled draft operation, the lift command
the control valve block pin (6). The control valve block transmits to the flex bar. This movement then
pin interrupts oil flow to the control valve (7) and the transmits to the control valve block pin (6) by way of
intervention speed-control valve (1). The ball the draft-transmission rod (5).
10
11 6
4
8
A
Discharge oil
Pressurised oil
6
LIFT PHASE
A. Internal Linkage 6. Control Valve Block Pin
1. Intervention Speed Control Valve 7. Control Valve
2. Arm Descent Speed Control Valve 8. Lift Cylinder Port
3. Cylinder Safety Valve 9. Lift Cylinder Piston
4. Check Valve 10. Lift Arm
5. Draft Transmission Rod 11. Return Port
Neutral Phase opens a path for the oil to return to the transmission
After the lift arms (10) reach a predetermined height, casing, instead of the lift cylinder.
the internal mechanical linkage (Detail A) becomes
stationary, which creates a neutral condition. The In the neutral position, supply oil constantly flows
position of the valve block-pin (6) directs oil to the through the control valve and on to the transmission
control valve (7). Oil pressure forces the piston casing, while at the same time, pressure remains
against the spring, overcomes spring resistance, and static at the lift cylinder piston. This keeps the lift arms
in the selected position.
10
11
6
8
5
Static oil
A
Discharge oil
Delivery oil
7
NEUTRAL PHASE
Lower Phase control valve, where it returns to the transmission
Moving the control lever to the lower position casing vice the lift cylinder.
transmits motion via internal mechanical linkage
(Detail A) to the control valve block pin (6). The NOTE: Loosening the adjustable screw on the speed
position of the control valve block pin opens a control valve reduces the orifice between the valve
discharge path (11) for oil returning from the lift and the block, causing the implement to lower more
cylinder piston (9) by way of the arm descend speed slowly. Tightening the adjustable screw increases
control valve (2). The loss of pressure acting on the the size of the orifice and the implement lowers more
lift cylinder piston, aided by the weight of the lift arms rapidly.
(10), allows the lift arms (10) to lower. The
arm-descend speed control valve, which is adjust- During controlled draft operation, the lowering
able, determines how fast the implement lowers by command transmits to the flex bar. This movement
reducing the discharge path. The control valve block then transmits to the control valve block pin (6) by
pin provides a passage for supply oil to flow to the way of the draft transmission-rod (5).
10
11
6
4
8
Discharge oil
A
Delivery oil
8
LOWER PHASE
REMOTE CONTROL VALVES positions. Remote valves with automatic release

contain a mechanical detent, which holds the control
Simple Self-Centering lever in the extended or retracted position. The
automatic release mechanism returns the control
The simple self-centering valve operates within lever to neutral when the cylinder reaches the end of
extend, retract and neutral positions. After releasing travel. For a single-acting valve, the automatic
the control lever, the self-centering valve springs release mechanism only works in the raise position.
back to neutral, and the cylinder remains in the Remote valves with float setting capabilities contain
position selected.
a mechanical detent, which holds the control lever
engaged in position until the operator returns the
Simple Self-Centering with Float lever to the neutral position.
The simple self-centering valve with float operates
within extend, retract, neutral and float positions. CAUTION
Remote valves with float setting capabilities contain
a mechanical detent, which holds the control lever To prevent pump failure due to continuous operation
engaged in position until the operator returns the under high pressure, ensure the remote valve lever
lever to the neutral position. The lever must be returns to the neutral position. When operating cor-
positioned full forward past the neutral position. rectly, the adjustable automatic detent release on the
remote will kick out at app 170--175 bar (2465--2538
psi). If needed, adjust the kick--out pressure by back-
Detent with Auto-release and Float ing out the adjusting screw under the detent cap.
The detent with auto-release and float remote valve
operates within extend, retract, neutral and float
Rear Remote Valve Arrangement
(Prior to SN 1306006) (After SN 1306006)
1st Remote Valve -- Standard Equipment 1st Remote Valve -- Standard Equipment
1. Self-centering 1. Double detent
2. Lever control or Joystick control 2. Lever controlled
NOTE: When ordering two valves from factory, a
joystick is the standard method of control. 2nd Remote Valve -- DIA or FIO
1. Double detent
2nd Remote Valve -- DIA or FIO 2. Float function
1. Self-centering
3. Lever controlled
2. Float function
3. Lever control or Joystick control 3rd Remote Valve -- DIA or FIO
NOTE: When ordering two valves from factory, a 1. Self-centering
joystick is the standard method of control. 2. Float function
3. Cannot be fitted with mid mount
3rd Remote Valve -- DIA or FIO
1. Double-detent
4th Remote Valve -- DIA
2. Float function 1. Self-centering
3. Lever control 2. Cannot be fitted with mid mount
4th Remote Valve -- DIA

1. Self-centering
2. Lever control
Rear Remote Valve Stacking
When adding rear remote valves, separate the 1
original stack, insert the new stack, and secure with
longer threaded rods (3). 2
3
NOTE: Oil leaks between the remote valve stack 4
sections, usually are cause by faulty O-ring seals, 5
excessive oil pressure, excessive torque on through 6
bolts, or improper metallic back-up ring dimensions. 7
NOTE: To prevent leakage between the individual 8

remote valve blocks, the dimensions of the metallic
back-up rings (PN 5166159), were changed from 17
x 18.5 x 2.1 mm to 16 x 18.5 x 2.1 mm (PN 5180283).
Effective from serial number 1242983 on all TN S&D
tractors
9
1. 3/8″ Nut
2. Lock Washer
3. Through Bolt
4. End Cap
5. O-Ring
6. Zero-Pressure Return Port Fitting 11
7. O-Ring
8. Plug 10
9. Rear Remote Valve
10. Flange
11. Plug
20036208
Rear Remote Valve Control Levers 9

Each rear remote valve contains a corresponding
lever (1) on the right-hand side of the operator’s seat,
for operational control via mechanical linkage. For
quick identification, color markings match each lever
with the respective control valve, flow control knob,
and coupling. Depending on the type of remote
valve, the control lever functions within three or four
positions as follows:
Lifting – Pulling the lever rearward extends the
corresponding cylinder to lift or raise the implement.
Neutral – Pushing the lever forward returns the valve

to the neutral position and the deactivated cylinder
stops moving the implement. Rear remote valves,
10
incorporating the detent-releasing feature, will
automatically return the valve to the neutral position
when the cylinder reaches the end of the stroke.
Lowering – Pushing the lever forward past the

neutral position retracts the cylinder and the
implement lowers.
Float – Pushing the lever full forward past the

lowering position selects the float function. This
position allows the cylinder to extend and retract
freely, which permits the implement to follow the
contour of the ground.
TABLE 4. CONTROL LEVER POSITIONS
Operation Performed Control Lever Position Description
Lifting Full Rearward Lifts the Implement
Lowering Forward Lowers the Implement
Neutral In-between Rearward and Forward Stops Lifting or Lowering
Float (where installed) Full Forward Beyond Lowering Implement Follows Terrain Under
Own Weight
Quick-Fit Couplers
NOTE: Before connecting or disconnecting quick-fit
couplers, stop the tractor, and lower any attached
implement.
Each remote control valve contains two 1/2 inch

push-pull type couplers, which provide for easy
installation and removal of external equipment. The
couplers contain plastic caps for the prevention of
contamination when not in use.
11
IMPORTANT: Clean the area around the coupler
before connecting or disconnecting to reduce the
ingestion of contaminants such as dirt into the
hydraulic system.
Zero-Pressure Return Port

Implements that operate independent hydraulic
motors require attachment of the oil return
[discharge] line to the zero-pressure, return port (1)
of the tractor. The port requires a union, which is not
standard equipment. Refer to Table 1 “DEALER
INSTALLED ACCESSORIES”.
12
MID--MOUNT CONTROL VALVES

[OPTIONAL]
Production began on the installation of mid-mount
control valves at factory for TN S and D models, for
the operation of front loaders. At the time of printing
there is insufficient information for publishing.
Mid--Mount Coupler Relocation Kit [optional]

For front loader applications, install a mid-mount
coupler relocation kit. The kit, available through
parts, requires a minimum of two remote valves on
19986535
the tractor. The removal and relocation of the rear
remote couplers to a mid-vehicle location on the 13
tractor is required.
NOTE: Install the mid-mount hydraulic coupler

relocation kit on tractors configured with two rear
remote valves. The kit requires removing the 1st and
2nd rear remote couplers, and then relocating them
at a mid-vehicle point. Install a 3rd and 4th rear
remote valve with couplers if the need for rear remote
couplers exists after installing the relocation kit.
Joystick Control for Mid--Mount Valves
The following configurations require a joystick for
controlling the rear remote valves:
• With more than two remote valves installed, the

joystick controls the 1st and 2nd valves.
• For the 1st and 2nd valves installed at factory.
SWITCHING BETWEEN SINGLE AND

DOUBLE--ACTING CYLINDERS 1 2 3 4
To switch a single-acting cylinder to a double-acting
cylinder, tighten the switching valve adjustment
screw completely. To switch a double-acting cylinder
to a single-acting cylinder, unscrew the adjusting
screw.
25726
14
1. Switching Valve Adjustment Screw
2. Seal
3. Retaining Plug
4. Seal
DOUBLE ACTING VALVE WITH

AUTOMATIC DETENT RELEASE AND
FLOAT
Float Phase
Movement of the control lever full forward transmits
to the auxiliary control valve spool (2) via mechanical
linkage. As the control valve spool shifts, the detent
balls (26) engage right-hand grooves and lock in
place by a support (28) and spring (24). The position
of the spool allows all pump pressure to flow out port
(M) to the lift control valve. In addition, ports (G & H)
connect to ports (L), which allows oil to exhaust from
the upper and lower chambers of the lift cylinder. In
the float position the hydraulic lift will operate,
however, the only force acting on the attached
implement exists from the weight of the implement
itself. Because the auxiliary valve contains no
pressure in this position, the function of automatic
detent release will not take place.
Oil in suction, delivery or exhaust
Static oil
15
FLOAT OPERATION
Lift Phase
Movement of the control lever rearward transmits to
the auxiliary control valve spool (2) via mechanical
balls (26) engage left-hand grooves and lock in place
by a support (28) and spring (24). The position of the
spool allows oil from the upper chamber of the lift
cylinder to enter port (H) and exhaust through port
(L). The pressure in port (E) exits through port (G) by
way of the check valve (3) to the lower chamber of the
lift cylinder.
When the lifting movement stops, oil pressure

increases to 170 - 175 bar (2465 - 2538 psi) within
chamber (Y) and overcomes the resistance of the
needle valve (23). Oil pressure increases inside
chamber (T) and overcomes the resistance of the
support (28) and spring (24). The support moves and
the detent balls (26) drop onto the support to release
the spool. The spring (6) returns the unlocked spool
to the neutral position, which allows all oil from the
pump to flow through port (M) and on to the lift control
valve.
Pressurised oil
Static oil
16
LIFTING
Lower Phase
Movement of the control lever forward transmits to
balls (26) engage central grooves and lock in place
by a support (28) and spring (24). The position of the
spool allows oil from the lower chamber of the lift
cylinder to enter port (G) and exhaust through port
(L). The pressure in port (E) exits through port (H) by
way of the check valve (3) to the upper chamber of
the lift cylinder.
When the lowering movement stops, oil pressure

increases to 170 - 175 bar (2465 - 2538 psi) within
chamber (Y) and overcomes the resistance of the
needle valve (23). Oil pressure increases inside
chamber (T) and overcomes the resistance of the
support (28) and spring (24). The support moves and
the detent balls (26) drop onto the support to release
the spool. The spring (6) returns the unlocked spool
to the neutral position, which allows all oil from the
pump to flow through port (M) and on to the lift control
valve.
Pressurised oil
L H E 3 G L
Static oil
24 28 26 2
6
M
17
LOWERING
DOUBLE--ACTING VALVE LESS

FLOAT
Lift Phase
linkage. The position of the spool allows oil from the
upper chamber of the lift cylinder to enter port (H) and
exhaust through port (L). The pressure in port (E)
exits through port (G) by way of the check valve (3)
to the lower chamber of the lift cylinder. M
Keeping the control lever pulled back extends the 18
cylinder through a full stroke. On releasing the lever, Pressurised oil
the spool return spring automatically returns the
spool to the neutral position, which allows all oil from Oil in suction, delivery or exhaust
the pump to flow through port (M) and on to the lift
control valve. Static oil
Lower Phase
linkage. The position of the spool allows oil from the
upper chamber of the lift cylinder to enter port (G) and
exhaust through port (L). The pressure in port (E)
exits through port (H) by way of the check valve (3)
to the upper chamber of the lift cylinder.
Keeping the control lever pushed forward retracts the

cylinder through a full stroke. On releasing the lever,
the spool return spring automatically returns the
spool to the neutral position, which allows all oil from M
control valve. 19
Pressurised oil
Static oil
SINGLE--ACTING VALVE LESS

FLOAT
Lift Phase
linkage. The position of the spool allows oil pressure
in port (E) to exit through port (G) by way of the check
valve (3) to the lift cylinder. In the single-acting
actuator, exhaust port (H) permanently connects to
port (L) by the open position of the switching valve M
(1). The switching valve converts a single-acting
actuator to a double-acting actuator when neces- 20
sary. Pressurised oil
Keeping the control lever pulled back extends the Oil in suction, delivery or exhaust
cylinder through a full stroke. On releasing the lever,
the spool return spring automatically returns the Static oil
spool to the neutral position, which allows all oil from
control valve.
Lower Phase
linkage. The position of the spool allows oil pressure
in ports (E), (G) and (H) to exit through ports (L). In
the lowering position, the weight of the implement
forces the oil through the control valve.
Keeping the control lever forward retracts extends

the cylinder through a full stroke. On releasing the
lever, the spool return spring automatically returns
the spool to the neutral position, which allows all oil
from the pump to flow through port (M) and on to the M
lift control valve.
21
Pressurised oil
Static oil
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM
50036189
22
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Refer to Figure 22
1. Reservoir [Rear Axle/Transmission Housing] 30. Services Control Valve
2. Main Filter Assembly 31. Oil Cooler for Lubrication Circuit (Power Shuttle
3. High Pressure [Lift] Pump transmissions and larger rated pumps)
4. Main Pressure Relief Valve 32. Oil Cooler By-pass Valve (only with Oil Cooler
5. Mid-mount Valve Stack (optional as factory or DIA installed)
installed) 33. FWD Disengage Solenoid (all TNS models and TND
6. Switching Valve (for Double/Single Acting Cylinders) models with Power Shuttle Transmissions)
7. First Mid-mount Valve Self-centering 34. Differential Lock Solenoid (all TNS models and TND
8. Second Mid-mount Valve Self-centering with Float models with Power Shuttle Transmissions)
9. Rear Remote Valve Stack 35. FWD Mobile Coupling (all TNS models and TND
models with Power Shuttle Transmissions)
10. Switching Valve (for Double/Single Acting Cylinders
36. Rear Differential Lock (all TNS models and TND
11. First Rear Remote Valve
models with Power Shuttle Transmissions)
12. Second Rear Remote Valve
37. Front Differential Lock (all TNS models only)
13. Third Rear Remote Valve
38. Lubrication Circuit Relief Valve
14. Hydraulic Power Lift (HPL) Control Valve
39. Transmission Housing
15. HPL Lift Cylinder
40. Power Shuttle Control Valve (Power Shuttle Trans-
16. Lift Arm missions)
17. Lift Cylinder Safety Valve 41. Dump Solenoid
18. Low Pressure [Steering] Pump 42. Forward Clutch A Pack Piston 2-way Valve
19. Priority Flow Divider (Power Shuttle transmissions) 43. Reverse Clutch B Pack Piston 2-way Valve
20. Check Valve 44. Forward (PWM) Clutch A Solenoid
21. Power Steering Motor Relief Valve 45. Reverse (PWM) Clutch B Solenoid
22. Power Steering Motor 46. Forward Clutch A Pack -- Front Half
23. Steering Cylinder Relief Valves 47. Reverse Clutch B Pack -- Rear Half
24. Steering Cylinder
25. PTO Servo Assist Valve
26. PTO Cylinder NOTE: The TN D/S series tractor consists of one rear
27. Check Valve remote valve as standard, however, as many as four
28. Filter Assembly (Power Shuttle Transmissions only) rear remote valves may be installed without the
29. Pressure Regulating Valve (within Services Control
mid-mount remote valves installed. The diagram in
Valve) Figure 22 represents a three rear remote valve stack.
Chapter 2 -- High Pressure System Overhaul and Adjustment
CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
35 110 40 Mechanically Controlled Lift Internal Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Mechanically Controlled Lift Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Position Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Upper Stroke Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Draft Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Position Control Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Draft Control Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Lift-O-Matic Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Lift Arm Descent Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Lift-O-Matic Device Upper Stroke Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
35 110 42 Arm Shaft and Lift Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
35 114 14 Mechanically Controlled Lift Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
35 114 30 Lift Pressure Relief Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
35 114 32 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
35 104 30 Hydraulic Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
35 204 46 Auxiliary Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Disassembly -- Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
SPECIFICATIONS
MAIN SPECIFICATIONS OF REAR MECHANICAL HYDRAULIC LIFT

Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lever controlled position/draft
with mixed control
Operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two independent levers
Setting speed of lift reaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic, by means of hydraulic
device integral to control valve
LIFT-O-MATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Provides fast lifting/lowering
operations using push buttons,
without using the control levers
Single-acting cylinder:
-- rated diameter and stroke: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 95 x 128
-- capacity: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm3 907
Pressure relief valve setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bar 190 --195 (2756--2828 psi)
Cylinder safety valve setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bar 210 --215
Lift piston diameter: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 94.980 to 95.000
Internal diameter of cylinder liner: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 95.036 to 95.071
Clearance between piston and liner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 0.036 to 0.091
MAIN SPECIFICATIONS OF REAR MECHANICAL HYDRAULIC LIFT

(continued)
Diameter of arm lifting shaft (5, fig. 4) in relation to bushings:

-- right-hand side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 54.970 to 55.000
-- left-hand side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 47.975 to 48.000
Internal diameter of bushings fitted on lift body:
-- right-hand side (4, fig. 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 55.100 to 55.184 (1)
-- left-hand side (6, fig. 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 48.100 to 48.184 (1)
Clearance between lifting arm shaft and relative right-hand side
bushings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 0.100 to 0.214
Clearance between lifting arm shaft and relative left-hand side
bushings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 0.100 to 0.209
Interference between bushings and relative seats ............ mm 0.065 to 0.161
Axial clearance of shaft complete with lifting arms . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 0.2 to 1.4
External diameter of draft control transmission shaft . . . . . . . . . . mm 21.967 to 22.000
Internal diameter of seats in support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 22.020 to 22.072
Clearance between transmission shaft and relative seat . . . . . . . mm 0.020 to 0.105
Diameter of position control transmission shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 13.973 to 14.000
Internal diameter of position control transmission shaft . . . . . . . . mm 14.016 to 14.059
Clearance between draft control transmission shaft and position
control transmission shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 0.016 to 0.086
Clearance between control valve block pin (8, fig. 9) and the
relative seat on the control valve block body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 0.008 to 0.012 (2)
Clearance between lift control valve (9, fig. 9) and the relative
seat on the control valve block body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 0.008 to 0.014 (2)
Check valve return spring (3, fig. 9):

-- free spring length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 25.5
-- spring length under load of 52 to 56 N (5.28 to 5.72 kg) mm 17.5
Control valve block pin return spring (5, fig. 9):
-- spring length under load of 31.7 to 35 N (3.23 to 3.57 kg) . . . mm 34
Control valve return spring (10, fig. 9):
-- free spring length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 44
-- spring length under load of 103 to 114.7 N (10.5 to 11.7 kg) mm 29
Arm descent speed adjustment valve spring (13, fig. 9)
-- free spring length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 34
-- spring length under load of 67 to 73 N (6.86 to 7.46 kg) mm 27
Intervention speed adjustment valve spring (11, fig. 9):
-- spring length under load of 65 to 71 N (1.61 to 1.79 kg) mm 11
(1) Value to be obtained after obtaining interference fit without grinding operations.
(2) During assembly the control valve block pins and control valves are carefully selected so as to obtain the required
clearance.
MAIN SPECIFICATIONS OF IMPLEMENT HITCHING DEVICE

Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three-point linkage
Category: I or II
Draft control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Provided by lower arms with
flex bar
Maximum liftable load from horizontal arm link ends with
three-point linkage connected to upper hole on top link and full
length of lifting stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg 2720
Maximum liftable load with center of gravity 610 mm from the
lower arm link ends for the full length of lifting stroke (with top link
connected to upper hole on support): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg 2055
Flex bar diameter: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 24.867 to 24.900
Axial clearance of flex bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 1.5 to 5.42
MAIN DATA
Remote control valves
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attached to the lift housing,
and stacked to a maximum of
4 valves.
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lever controlled
Pressure relief valve setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 to 195 bar

(2755 to 2828 psi)
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single or double-acting actuators
May contain automatic detent

release, or float control, or float
control with automatic detent
release.
MAIN SPECIFICATIONS OF HYDRAULIC PUMP C 42

Pump
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine driven fixed
displacement gear type with
oil suction from rear
transmission casing
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Right-hand side of engine

Model/construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C 42/NEW HOLLAND
Direction of rotation (as seen from drive side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . clockwise

Engine speed to pump speed ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 : 1.08
Maximum speed of rotation (with engine at maximum power
2300 rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2484
Corresponding rated output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dm3/min (I/min) 47.36
Rated output at 1000 rpm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dm3/min (I/min) 19.06
Diameter of driven and driving gear shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 17.400 to 17.418

Internal diameter of seats in supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 17.450 to 17.475
Clearance between gear shafts and seats on supports . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 0.032 to 0.075
-- maximum clearance due to wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 0.1
Radial clearance of gears in pump body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 0.020 to 0.064

Maximum wear on pump body, suction side,
at position of gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 0.1
Width of gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 30.800 to 30.815

Width of supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 24.490 to 24.510
Radial clearance of gears in pump body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 79.935 to 79.960
maximum wear on pump body, suction side,
at position of gears) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 0.100 to 0.180
MAIN SPECIFICATIONS OF BOSCH 25 HYDRAULIC PUMP

Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine driven fixed
displacement gear type with oil
suction from rear transmission
casing.
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
on right-hand side of engine
Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BOSCH 25
Operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BOSCH
driven by engine shaft
Direction of rotation (as seen from drive side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . clockwise
Maximum speed of rotation (with engine at maximum power
2300 rpm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2484
Corresponding rated output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dm3/min (I/min) 63.84
Rated output at 1000 rpm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . dm3/min (I/min) 25.7
Filter
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Full-flow, with replaceable
paper cartridge
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pump Suction
Tightening torque
PART Thread
N⋅m ft.-lbs.
Pump control coupling hub locknut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/16 20 UNF 29 3

TIGHTENING TORQUES
Tightening torque
Component (Refer to Figure 1) Thread
N⋅m ft. lb.
Lift intervention speed adjustment cap valve (C1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 54 40

Control valve block pin spring cap (C2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 54 40
Bolts securing control valve block to lift (C3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M8 x 1.25 26 19
Bolts securing union to control valve block (C4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 44 33
Check valve return (C5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M24 x 1.5 83 68
Cylinder safety valve (C6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20 x 1.5 83 68
Control valve cap (C7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20 x 1.5 83 66
Lift cylinder retaining bolts:
-- front (C8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M14 x 1.5 157 116
-- upper (C10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M16 x 1.5 260 192
Bolts securing lift to rear transmission housing (C9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . M12 x 1.25 98 72
Control lever quadrant cover stud bolts (C11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 49 36
Nuts for lever quadrant cover stud bolts (C12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M8 x 1.25 25 19
LIFT-O-MATIC control lever quadrant retaining nut (C13) . . . . . . . . -- 54 40
Lifting arm plate retaining bolts (C14) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M14 x 1.5 142 105
Eccentric pin retaining nuts (C15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 49 36
Eccentric pin seat cap (C16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 83 68
LIFT-O-MATIC control lever retaining bolts (C17) . . . . . . -- 54 40
Quadrant with arms control pivot cam retaining bolts (C18) . . . . . . -- 49 36
Internal lever mechanisms support pin (C19) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 54 40
Flex bar gasket support retaining bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 64 47
Lateral stabilizer strut support retaining bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M16 x 1.5 221 163
Pick-up hitch hook support retaining bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M16 x 1.5 221 163
Remote valve stack through bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 21 16
Control valve elements locknut 3/8″ -- 24 UNF 20.4 15
Front and rear cover retaining bolts 1/4″ -- 20 UNC 11 8
Auxiliary control valve retaining bolts M10 x 1.25 59 44
C1 C2 TORQUE SETTINGS C3 C4
C5
25427 25428
C7 C6
1
SPECIAL TOOLS
X 291863 Wrench for lift pressure relief setting

Warning -- The operations described in this section ring nut.
require ESSENTIAL tools indicated by an (X). X 293865 Protection device for installing seal on
To work safely and efficiently and obtain the best re- arm descent speed control pin.
special tools listed below, and other tools which must X 292870 Universal pressure control kit.
be made according to the drawings included in this X 290284 Hand pump for valve calibration.
manual.
X 290828 Union for cylinder safety valve calibra-
tion.
291359 Hydraulic lift, lifting hook.
290090 Rotating stand for overhaul opera- X 290824 Union for lift pressure relief valve cal-
tions. ibration.
X 294081 Ring for installing piston with lift seals. X 293982 Union for checking distributor valve
X 292535 Punch for installing lift arm shaft seal. seal.
X 293839 Punch for installing needle bearings X 293984 Protection device for installing pilot
on control valve block control lever valve seal.
bushing. X 294083 Controlled draft setting tool.
X 293838 Punch for installing needle bearings
X 294082 Position and draft control setting tool.
on lower controlled draft lever.
X 293838 Punch for installing needle bearings 292870 Universal pressure testing kit.
on upper controlled draft lever.
293195 Seal guard for Kontak control valve
X 293838 Punch for installing needle bearings check valve.
on draft control link rod.
X 291862 Wrench for cylinder safety valve set-
ting ring nut.
(*)
26626
2
Bracket for hook 291359 or for overhauling lift to rotating stand (mark tool No. 50155 -- measurements are
millimeters).
Make in Aq 42 material -- (*) Area for fixing bore to rotating stand.
27860
3
Adapter for hook 291359 (mark tool No. 50163 -- measurements are millimeters).
Make in Fe 42 C material
Note* (See tool no. 50155)

SECTIONAL VIEWS
4
Cross-sectional view of lift arms drive shaft
1. Right-hand arm. 8. Left-hand arm thrust washer.
2. Right-hand arm thrust washer. 9. Left-hand arm.
3. Right-hand seal. 10. Internal arm.
4. Right-hand bush shaft support. 11. Eccentric control position.
5. Lift arm control shaft. 12. LIFT-O-MATIC control pin.
6. Left-hand bush shaft support. 13. LIFT-O-MATIC control external gear mechanism.
7. Left-hand seal.
5
Longitudinal cross-sectional view of lift
1. Cylinder sleeve. 3. Lifting piston
2. Control valve block/cylinder connecting pipes.
6
Longitudinal and cross-sectional views of lift
1. Anti-extrusion seal and ring. 6. Lift adjustment rod in operation with controlled posi-
2. Control valve block arm lever pin. tion.
3. Control valve block arm lever. 7. Lever mechanism unit in operation with controlled
4. Draft control transmission shaft. position.
5. Position control transmission shaft.
25438
7
Longitudinal and cross-sectional views of lift
1. Control valve block pin. 4. LIFT-O-MATIC spring device.
2. Control valve block lever pin. 5. LIFT-O-MATIC lever control pin.
3. Contact ball joint between control valve block pin (1) 6. LIFT-O-MATIC external control lever.
and control lever (2).
8
Draft control device cross-sectional views
C1. Spacer ring and lower lift arm retaining bolt. 4. Flex bar.
G= 1.5 to 5.42 mm. Flex bar axial clearance. 5. Spacer.
1. Lever mechanism unit in operation with controlled 6. Seal.
draft. 7. Ball bush.
2. Lift adjustment rod in operation with controlled draft. 8. Draft transmission lever.
3. Draft transmission rod.
14
13 3
4
25443
12 5
6
11
25444
7
10 9 8
9
Hydraulic lift control valve block cross-sectional views
1. Oil infeed union. 8. Control valve block pin.
2. Check valve ball. 9. Control valve.
3. Check valve return spring. 10. Control valve return spring.
4. Cylinder safety valve. 11. Intervention speed adjustment valve spring.
5. Control valve block pin return spring. 12. Intervention speed adjustment valve.
6. Seal and ring. 13. Arm descent speed adjustment valve spring.
7. Control valve block pin seat. 14. Seal and ring.
NOTE: When installing seals 6 and 14, heat the corresponding support disks in oil at a temperature of approxi-
mately 50 °C (122°F).
When installing seal (14) and its support disk, use protection device 293865.
When installing seal (6) and its support disk, use protection device 293984.
A B
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
27 28 29 30 31
26
C
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
25723
10
Auxiliary control valve cross-sectional views (figs. 10 -- 11 -- 12)
A. Auxiliary control valve configured for operation of 12. Seal.
a double-acting cylinder. 13. Spring cup.
B. Auxiliary control valve configured for operation of 14. Spool return spring.
a single-acting cylinder. 15. Cover.
C. Auxiliary control valve configured for operation 16. Spacer.
of a single/double-acting cylinder with float 17. Tapered needle.
control and automatic detent release. 18. Spring.
D. Auxiliary control valve configured for operation 19. Seal.
of a single/double-acting cylinder with auto- 20. Detent balls.
matic detent release.
21. Seal.
E. Auxiliary control valve configured for operation
22. Seal.
of a single/double-acting cylinder with switch-
23. Internal plunger.
ing float control
24. Spring.
1. Single/double-acting operation switching valve.
25. Cover.
2. Seal.
26. Detent release pressure adjuster screw.
3. Valve retaining plug.
27. Spool return spring.
4. Seal.
28. Spring cup.
5. Seal.
29. Seal.
6. Check valve seat.
30. Detent notch body.
7. Check valve.
31. Detent ball support.
8. Seal.
32. Seal.
9. Seal.
10. Control support. 33. Seal.
11. Spool.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
28 29 30 31
27
26
25
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 D
25724
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
30 32 33
28
25
24 20 18 17 E
25725
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Possible Cause Remedy
The lift does not rise. 1. Oil filter clogged. Replace filter.
2. Control valve jammed in dis- Release control valve.

charge position.
The lift moves in jerks. 1. Oil filter clogged. Replace filter.
2. Air in the pump suction line. Check that the unions are airtight
and the seals are efficient. Bleed air
from system.
The lift rises too slowly. 1. Oil filter clogged. Replace filter.
2. Oil leaking past the seals result- Replace all defective seals.
ing in pressure loss: piston
seals or seals on discharge fit-
ting to cylinder.
The lift lowers too slowly. 1. Arm descent speed set incor- Set to desired speed.
rectly.
The lift lowers too quickly. 1. Arm descent speed set incor- Set to desired speed.
rectly.
HYDRAULIC LIFT TROUBLESHOOTING

(cont.)
Problems Possible Cause Remedy
The lift unable to keep the load 1. Faulty seal on check valve. Replace seal.
raised (with the engine running,
the load moves up and down
rhythmically; with the engine 2. Oil leaking past the seals on Replace seals.
turned off, the load lowers). the control valve block pin
seat.
3. Control valve block pin seal Replace seal.

faulty.
4. Oil leaking past the lift piston Replace seals.

seal or the seals on the cylin-
der oil discharge fitting.
5. Defective seal or cylinder safety Replace the valve.

valve seal set to very low value.
The pressure relief valve cuts in 1. Lift arm travel set incorrectly. Set correctly.
when the lift arms reach the
completely raised position.
Lift has poor lifting capacity. 1. The pressure relief valve is set Replace the valve.
incorrectly.
2. Cylinder safety valve set incor- Replace the valve.

rectly.
3. Poor pump efficiency (gene- Overhaul or replace pump.

rally combined with a conside-
rable increase in lift time).
OVERHAUL
OP. 35 110 40
MECHANICALLY CONTROLLED LIFT
INTERNAL CONTROLS
Disassembly
(With the lift removed)
DANGER
shoes.
Proceed as follows.
1
1. Position the lift on a rotating stand 290090 using
bracket 50155. 2
2. Disconnect the connecting pipe (2) between the

auxiliary control valve block (1) and the lift control
valve block, unscrew the retaining bolts and re-
move the auxiliary control valve block (1), recov-
ering the O ring seal.
25453
13
3. Unscrew the retaining bolts and remove the lift
control valve block.
1
4. Rotate the lift, holding the relative arms.
25454
14
5. Using a magnetic flexible tool (1), recover the
control valve block pin contact ball (2), taking
1 2
care that the part does not drop.
25455
15
6. Remove the front bolts, the rear union and recov-
er the oil delivery pipe (1) to the lift cylinder.
1
25456
16
7. Unscrew the retaining bolts and remove the Lift-
O-Matic device spring (1).
1
25457
17
8. Unscrew the retaining bolts (1), loosen and re-
move the pin (2) and bush, then recover the con- 1
trol valve block lever mechanisms (3).
9. Unscrew the retaining bolts and remove the cyl-

inder.
3
25458
18
10. Unscrew the retaining nuts and recover the sup-
port cap (1) and spring.
1
NOTE: Apply pressure on the support (1) to prevent

the spring from pressing it against the retaining nut.
25461
19
11. Unscrew and remove the draft control internal le-
ver pivot eccentric pin (1). 1
25462
20
12. Remove the circlip (4) and recover the washer,
external lever (3), relative clutch disks, Woodruff
1 2
key, and extract the draft and position control in-
ternal levers (1 and 2) and shafts from the inside.
3
4
25463
21
13. Use the striker 293838 (1), to replace the bear-
ings in the internal draft control lever (2). 2
1
14. Use striker 293839, to replace the control valve

block control lever bearings.
26298
22
Assembly
ATTENTION
To re-fit the hydraulic lift internal controls, proceed as

follows.
-- Study the illustrations in figs. 16, 17, 18, 19 and
20 for the positioning of the various parts.
-- Apply the torque settings listed on page 7.
-- Fit the position and draft control internal levers,

complete with: shafts, keys, clutch disks, exter-
nal levers, washers and circlip.
-- Tighten the draft control internal lever pivot ec-

centric pin.
-- Fit the spring and cover on the position and draft

control axis and secure the cover with the lock
nuts.
-- Fit the control valve block control lever unit.
-- Assemble the cylinder.
-- Fit the Lift-O-Matic device spring.
-- Fit the oil delivery pipe to the lift control cylinder.
-- Fit the control valve pin contact ball.
Carry out the adjustments described below.
NOTE: the adjustments must be carried out in the or-

der specified.
-- Carefully clean and degrease the mating sur-

faces, then apply sealing compound
(approx. 2 mm) along the marked line shown in
the drawing.
The types of sealing compound are listed on
page 2, Section 00.
Fit the hydraulic lift on the lift box and secure in
position with the relative retaining bolts.
27156
-- Fit the auxiliary control valve block, the O ring
seals and the connecting pipe to the lift hydraulic 23
control valve block.
ADJUSTMENTS 1
The following adjustments refer to a lift without
hydraulic control valve block and mounted on a
rotating stand.
NOTE: These adjustments must be carried out in the

order specified.
15. Detach the spring (1) in order to exclude the Lift-

O-Matic device.
25470
24
Position Control
16. Move the external position control lever (2) com-
pletely forward against the spacer for the stud
bolt securing the spring retaining bracket, and
the external draft control lever (1) completely
back against the spacer.
17. Turn the arm control shaft so that the internal arm
comes into contact with the lift body.
2
25471
25
18. Position the contact ball (3, fig. 7) in its seat and
attach tool 294082 (1) to the lift body so that it 1
makes contact with the ball.
Rotate the lift through 180° holding the arms.
25472
26
19. Loosen the locknut and totally unscrew the ad-
justment bolt (2), to the end of the lever (1).
1
NOTE: To facilitate this operation, lower the lift arms.

Once the operation has been completed, return the
lift arms to their original position. 2
25473
27
20. Unscrew the locknut (1) and tighten or slacken
the rod (2). 1
25474
28
21. Check that the cap end (2) of the tool 294082 (1)
is at exactly the same external stop face as the
tool.
Tighten the locknut (1, fig. 28)
25475
29
22. Move the external position control (1) and draft
control (2) levers completely backwards against
the spacer.
1
25476
30
23. With the lift arms fully lowered, check that the cap
(2) of tool 294082 (1) is either aligned with or fur- 1
ther inside than the internal reference surface on
the tool (1).
2
25477
31
Upper Stroke Limit
pletely forwards against the spring check bracket
stud bolt spacer, and the external draft control le-
ver (1) fully backwards against the spacer.
25. Turn the arm control shaft so that the internal arm
comes into contact with the lift body.
25471
32
26. Position the contact ball (3, fig. 7) in its seat and
attach tool 294082 (1) to the lift body so that the
tool comes into contact with the ball.
1
Rotate the lift through 180°.
25472
33
27. Tighten the adjustment bolt (2) on the lever (1)
until the cap (2, fig. 35) of tool 294082 (1, fig. 35)
1
is aligned with the internal reference surface of
the tool.
NOTE: To facilitate this adjustment bolt (2) tightening

operation, lower the lift arms, then return the lift arms
to their original position to check the position of the 2
cap (2, fig. 35) on the tool.
Lock in position using the locknut.
25473
34
2
25477
35
Draft Control
Proceed as follows.
1
28. Move the external position control (1) and draft
control (2) levers completely backwards against
the spacer. Turn arm control shaft so that the
internal arm comes into contact with lift body.
2
25476
36
29. Make sure that the milling on the eccentric pin (1)
is in the vertical position.
25478
37
30. Place the tool 294083 (2), complete with the end
section (3) and the draft transmission rod, on a
1
reference plane. Adjust the end section (3) until
the rod on tool (1) is aligned with the tool, provid-
ing a micrometer (1) reading of 0.
25479
38
31. Place the tool (2) on the lift body, secure in posi-
tion with the two bolts and fully tighten the screw
1 2
(1).
25480
39
32. Adjust the draft control rod (3, fig. 39) until the
end of the cap (2, fig. 40) on the tool 294082 (1)
is exactly aligned with, or as near as is possible,
to the external reference surface as the tool.
33. Remove tools 294082 and 294083 from the lift
body, fit the hydraulic control valve block and at-
tach the Lift-O-Matic device spring (1, fig. 24). 1
Fit the lift on the tractor as follows.
25475
40
WARNING -- First position tool 294083 (2) on a

reference surface and use a micrometer depth
gauge (1) to measure the distance (L5) between the
point where the tool rests on the reference surface 1
and the point where the micrometer gauge rests on
the tool.
Mark the measured distance (L5) on the tool. 2
L5
25481
41
34. Fit the complete draft measuring device (3), but
without the flex bar, on the rear transmission
1 2
housing.
35. Rest the transmission lever (3) on the transmis-
sion casing and fit tool 294083 (1) on the hous-
ing.
36. Use a micrometer depth gauge (2) to measure L8
the distance (L8) between the top end of the rod
(3) and the micrometer gauge resting surface on L6
the tool 294083 (1).
3
25482
42
NOTE: The distance (L6) the top end of the rod (3)
protrudes from the transmission casing (with flex bar
removed) is given by:
L6=L5 - L8
where:
L5 and L6 = distance measured with tool 294083

fitted on the reference surface (L5, fig. 41) or on the
transmission housing (L8).
37. Fit the flex bar in the seat on the rear transmis-
sion casing and, using the micrometer depth
1
gauge (2), measure the distance (L9) between
the top end of the rod (3) and the micrometer
gauge resting surface on the tool 294083 (1). 2
L7 L9
NOTE: The distance (L7) the top end of the rod (3) 3
protrudes from the transmission casing (with flex bar
fitted) is given by:
L7 = L5 - L9 4
25483
where: 43
L5 and L9 = distance measured with tool 294083

fitted on the reference surface (L5, fig. 41) or on the
transmission housing (L9)
38. Check that the distance (L7) is at least 5 mm

greater than the distance (L6).
39. Slacken the locknut (4) and adjust the length of

the draft control rod until it protrudes by a new
distance (L7 = 23.4 to 23.6 mm).
40. This distance (L7) can be calculated by subtrac-

tion using tool 294083
L10 = L5 -- L7
where:
L7 = 23.4 to 23.6 mm. Distance the end of the rod

(3) protrudes with respect to the transmission
casing.
L5 = distance measured with tool 294083 fitted

on the reference surface.
L10 = distance to be measured with the mi-

crometer gauge on the tool 294083.
41. Tighten the locknut (4) and fit the lift on the trac-
tor.
Position Control Rod
Proceed as follows.
1. Move the position control lever (1) forward com-

pletely on the quadrant and check that the dis-
tance (L) is 5 to 10 mm.
44
pletely back against the spacer.
1 2
3. Connect the control rod and adjust the length, if
necessary.
4. Secure the rod in position using the locknuts.
25496
45
Draft Control Rod
Test conditions:
-- engine running at medium speed;
-- allow the oil in the system to reach a temperature

of 30 to 40 °C.
Then proceed as follows:
5. Move the position control lever (1) forward com-

pletely on the quadrant and the draft control lever
(2) to a distance (L1) of 5 to 10 mm from the be-
ginning of the slot.
46
6. Move the external draft control lever (2) com-
pletely back against the spacer.
1 2
7. Connect the control rod and adjust the length, if
necessary.
25496
47
8. Move the draft control lever (2) to a distance (L2)
of 103 to 108 mm from the beginning of the slot
and check that in this position the arms start to
rise.
9. If the arms do not rise, adjust the eccentric pin (1,

fig. 37) to restore this distance.
10. Lock the pin in position using the locknut.
48
Lift-O-Matic Device
Proceed as follows.
11. Move the position control lever (1) and the draft
control lever (2) completely forward on the quad-
rant.
49
12. Raise the arms by means of the button (1).
1 2
25499
50
13. Tighten the nut (1) until the arms lower.
14. With the lever (1, fig. 50) still in the same position, 1
unscrew the nut (1) until the arms begin to rise.
15. Unscrew the nut (1) by another 1.5 turns.
16. Using the buttons (1 and 2, fig. 50) lower and

raise the arms a few times to ensure that the de-
vice is operating correctly.
25500
51
Lift Arm Descent Speed
Test conditions: 1 2
-- apply a load of 100 kg to the link ends of the lower
implement attachment arms;
of 50 to 60° C.
Proceed as follows.
1. Fully raise the arms.
2. Loosen the locknut (1).
25501
52
3. Lower the arms and, by means of the screw (2),
adjust the lowering speed to a time of 2 to 2.5
seconds (by tightening the screw the time de-
creases, by unscrewing the screw the time in-
creases).
4. Tighten the locknut (1), making sure that the
screw remains stationary (2).
Upper stroke limit adjustment

Test conditions.
-- apply a load of 100 kg to the link ends of the lower
implement attachment arms;
of 50 to 60° C.
53
Proceed as follows.
1. Move the position and draft control levers (1 and 1
2, fig. 53) completely forwards on the quadrant.
2
2. Raise the arms (1) until the internal arm comes
into contact with the lift body, stamp two corre-
sponding reference marks (2) on the lift body and
the arm.
25503
54
3. Start the engine and, using the position control
lever(1, fig. 53), raise the arms (1) and check that
there is a distance (A) of 2 to 4 mm. 1
25504
55
Lift-O-Matic Device Upper Stroke Limit
ATTENTION
suitable safety clothing - safety goggles, gloves and
shoes.
ATTENTION
NEVER USE YOUR FINGERS OR HANDS. 1
Proceed as follows:
1. Apply a load to the link ends of the lower imple-
ment attachment arms.
2. Start the engine and keep it running at medium
speed.
3. Hold down the push-button (1) until the arms are
in the attachment position (completely lowered).
25505
56
4. Move the levers (1 and 2) completely forward on

the quadrant (completely lowered).
5. Using the position control lever (1) raise the arms
to the desired height.
6. Stop the engine.
7. Press the arms raise LIFT-O-MATIC pushbutton.
57
8. Loosen the lever (1) and turn the mobile sector
(2) clockwise until it touches the needle (3) on the
LIFT-O-MATIC control lever (4).
9. Start the engine and use the LIFT-O-MATIC con- 1
trol buttons to raise and lower the arms a few 2
times to ensure correct operation.
NOTE: The arm upward stroke limit only applies to

the LIFT-O-MATIC device and does not affect the
other functions of the lift. This means that the arms 3
can be raised completely using the control levers (1
and 2, fig. 57).
4
25506
58
OP. 35 110 42
ARM SHAFT AND LIFT CYLINDER
Disassembly
(With the lift removed)
DANGER
shoes.
Proceed as follows.
1. Remove the front bolts, the rear union and recov-

er the oil delivery pipe (1) to the lift cylinder. 1
2. Remove the three lift cylinder retaining bolts.
25456
59
3. Remove the lift control cylinder (1).
1
25460
60
4. Loosen the nut (4) and recover the locking lever
(3) on the lifting stroke limit cam (1), unscrew the
nut (2) and remove the cam (1).
1
4
25464
61
5. Unscrew the retaining bolt (3) and recover the
thrust washer (2) and lift arm (1).
Repeat this operation on both sides.
1
25465 3 2
62
6. Straighten the securing ring and unscrew the re-
taining bolt that secures the ring-cam to the inter- 1
nal arm (1).
25466
63
7. Using a brass drift, strike the end of the shaft (2),
extract the shaft and recover the internal arm (1),
the ring-cam and the seal (3).
1
2
25467
64
8. Use compressed air to remove the piston (2)
from its cylinder (1). 2
1
26297
65
Assembly
WARNING
To refit the arm shaft and lifting cylinder, proceed as

follows.
-- Study the illustrations in figs. 4, 5 and 6 for the
positioning of the various parts.
9. Using tool 294081 (2) insert the piston (1) into its
cylinder (3).
1 2
25634
66
10. Install the lift arm shaft (2), the ring-cam and the
internal arm (1) inside the lift box, matching up 1
the reference marks.
Tighten the bolt that secures the ring-cam to the
internal arm and stake the retaining bolt washer.
2
25468
67
11. To avoid damaging the internal seal lips (2), use
a flexible brass sheet (1) dimensions: 200 x 90
mm and 0.05 to 0.1 mm. Roll up the sheet and in-
1
sert the seal inside. Position the unit on the spline
and push the seal manually into its seat, then re-
move the sheet.
2
26300
68
12. Use the striker 292535 (1), to complete the fitting
of the seals into the relative seats on the arm
1
shaft.
26326
69
13. Install the lift arms (1) on the shaft, matching up
the reference marks. Secure in position with the 1
bolts and washers.
25469
70
14. Install the lifting stroke limit cam (1), nut (2) and
the relative locking lever (1) and the lock nut (4).
1
25464
71
15. Install the control cylinder, securing in position
with the three retaining bolts. 1
16. Install the oil delivery pipe (1) to the control cylin-
der.
25456
72
OP. 35 114 14
CONTROL VALVE
Disassembly
(with control valve removed)
WARNING
shoes.
Proceed as follows.
1. Before disassembly, thoroughly clean the sur- 1 2
faces of the control valve block. Lock the control
valve block in a vice, loosen the screws and re-
move the union (1).
2. Unscrew the locknut (2) and recover the spacer 3
(3).
25484
73
3. Remove the cap (1), complete with speed inter-
vention adjustment valve, seat (3), piston (2) and 1 2 3 4
control valve shutter (4).
25485
74
4. Unscrew the cap (2) and remove the control
valve spring (1).
25486
75
5. Remove the cylinder safety valve (4) and recover
the arm lowering speed adjustment valve (3), the
spring (2) and the pin (1).
1 2 3 4
25709
76
6. Unscrew the cap (1) and remove the spring (2),
the control valve block pin (3) and its seat (4). 1 2 3 4
25487
77
7. Remove the check valve, comprising: ball (1),
spring (2) and union (3).
25488
78
8. Check the wear of the seals on the control valve
block-pin seat. If damaged, replace the seals us-
1
ing protection device 293984 (1) and following
the instructions on page 11.
Check the efficiency of the control valve block pin

as follows.
25714
79
9. Install the control valve block pin (2) complete
with seat (3) on the tool 293982 (1). 1 2 3
25715
80
10. Install the control valve block pin spring (1) and
the cap (2) of tool 293982. Tighten the cap as far
as it will go and check that the control valve block-
1 2
pin slides in its seat.
25716
81
11. Install tool 293982 (2) on the hand pump 290284
(3), supplied with HYDROSYSTEM 68 oil. Con- 1
nect a dial gauge (1), securing in position with the
screw.
2
25717
82
12. Operate the hand pump, whilst tightening the tool
screw (1), until the oil stops flowing out through
the control valve block pin seat outlet.
Zero set the dial gauge.

1
Tighten the screw (1) on the tool further to move
the control valve block pin by 1.8 to 2 mm, using
the dial gauge to read this distance.
25718
83
13. Operate the hand pump until the oil in the system
is at an initial pressure of 3553 psi (245 bar). Us-
ing the pressure gauge, check that it takes more
than six seconds for the pressure to fall 2842 psi
(196 bar) to 1421 psi (98 bar). If it takes less than
this time, replace the control valve block pin.
Bear in mind that this part is supplied together
with the relevant seat.
25719
84
14. Install the cylinder safety valve (1) on the valve
union 290828 (2) and connect to the hand pump 1 2 3
290284 (3).
15. Operate the hand pump (3) and check that the
cylinder safety valve opens at a pressure of
3046 to 3118 psi (210 to 215 bar). If the valve
setting does not correspond with the specified
value, it is advised to change the valve immedi-
ately. If necessary it can be adjusted by turning
the threaded cap using wrench 291862. Tighten
to increase the valve setting value or loosen to re-
duce the value.
Assembly
ATTENTION
To reinstall the hydraulic control valve block, proceed

as follows:

tioning of the various parts;

page 7. 25720
-- Install the complete control valve block pin. 85
-- Install the check valve.
-- Install the cylinder safety valve.
-- Install the control valve.
-- Install the intervention speed adjustment valve.
-- Install the oil infeed union.

OP. 35 114 30
LIFT PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
Proceed as follows.
1. Remove the relief valve (1) and, if faulty, replace.
OP. 35 114 32
Calibration
86
Proceed as follows.
1. Run the engine until the oil in the system reaches 1

a temperature of approximately 122 °F (50 °C).
2. Insert the union 293449 (1) in a quick-fit female

half-coupling and connect it to the 0 to 250 kg/
cm@ scale pressure gauge, supplied with kit
292870.
3. Activate the half-coupling control valve block le-

ver until the pressure relief valve cuts in.
4. With the engine running at medium speed the 25508

pressure gauge must show a pressure of about
2697 to 2770 psi (186 to 191 bar). If the valve 87
setting does not correspond with the specified
value, it is advised to change the valve immedi-
ately. If necessary it can be adjusted by turning
the threaded cap using wrench 291863. Tighten
to increase the valve setting value or loosen to re-
duce the value.
25719
88
Components of pumps C 42, BOSCH 25

1. Nut. 8. Driven and driving gear shafts.
2. Safety washer. 9. Gear support.
3. Circlip. 10. Pump body.
4. Driving shaft seal. 11. Front cover.
5. Control side cover. 12. Safety washer.
6. Cover seals. 13. Bolt.
7. Gear support.
OP. 35 104 30
HYDRAULIC PUMP
Disassembly
WARNING
Do not put your hands or fingers between parts. Wear 2
shoes.
Proceed as follows:
Refer to Figure 88. 25227
89
1. Remove the cover retaining bolts (13) and the WARNING
relative safety washers (12).
2. Remove the nut (1) that secures the sleeve to the NEVER USE YOUR FINGERS OR HANDS.
pump driving shaft and the safety washer (2).
3. Remove the front cover (5), the circlip (3) and the To re-fit the pump carry out operations 1 to 6 in
seal (4). reverse order, referring to fig. 88, proceeding as
4. Mark the parts (7, 8, 9 and 10), in order to re-fit follows:
them in the same position, if in good condition.
-- Always ensure maximum cleanliness to prevent
5. Remove the supports (7 and 9) and gears (8) foreign matter from entering and damaging the
from the front cover (5) and the pump body (10). pump;
6. Recover the seals (6) and the anti-extrusion
rings. -- Install together the previously marked parts (10,
7, 8 and 9), referring to operation 4, in the original
Inspection positions;
7. Check that the gear contact surfaces are flat and -- Mount the gear supports (7 and 9) in the pump
perpendicular to their supports. Interpose a thin body, positioning as shown in fig. 88;
layer of carbon black. Small rough spots can be
removed using extremely fine and adequately lu- -- Insert the plastic anti-extrusion rings on the seals
bricated abrasive paper. (6);
8. Check that the axial play of the gear-support unit
in the pump body is 0.100 to 0.180 mm. The dis- -- Mount the seals (4), on the control side cover (5)
tance (2, fig. 89) must be 0.100 to 0.180 mm less facing towards the inside;
than the distance (1).
If necessary, true the flat surfaces involved using -- Install the covers (5) and (11), position the wash-
lubricated abrasive paper to remove extremely small ers (12) and tighten the retaining bolts (13);
quantities of material.
-- Install the washer (2) and the locknut (1).
Assembly
Clean all constituent parts thoroughly.

Replace the seals (4 and 6).
Lubricate the parts with the same oil used in the
system.
OP. 35 204 46
AUXILIARY CONTROL VALVES
Disassembly -- Assembly
WARNING
Do not put your hands or fingers between parts
Wear suitable safety clothing - safety goggles, gloves
and shoes.
WARNING
Convertible single/double acting remote

control valve
Disassemble the auxiliary control valve into its
component parts, referring to the cross-sectional
views in fig. 10 and the following instructions:
1. Remove the cover (5), recover the spring (4) and

the relative spring cup.
2. Extract the spool (3). 3 4 5
3. Remove the control lever support (1) and recover 1 2
the seal (2).
4. Remove the plug (6) and recover the single/
double action switching valve.
5. Remove the valve housing (8) and recover the 8 7 6
check valve and relative spring.
6. Check the condition of the seals before reas-
sembly.
24452
90
Single/double--acting remote control valve with

float control and automatic detent release 1 2 3 4
Disassemble the auxiliary control valve into its

component parts, referring to the cross-sectional
views in fig. 10 and the following instructions:
1. Unscrew the retaining screws, recover the cover

(4) and the spacer (3).
2. Unscrew the retaining screws, recover the con-

trol lever support (1) and relative seal (2).
24453
91
3. Extract the spool (1).
4. Remove the plug (6, see fig. 90) and recover the
single/double acting switching valve. 1
5. Remove the valve housing and recover the
check valve and spring.
6. Check the condition of the seals before reas-
sembly.
Testing
Diagram showing the installation of the tools and
equipment required for the spool sticking test for
control valves configured for double-acting 24454
operation (fig. 93) and control valves configured
for single-acting operation (fig. 94). 92
Control valve spool sticking test

(figs. 93 and 94)
NOTE: With the test equipment filled with HYDRO-

SYSTEM 66 oil, the following tests must be performed
at a temperature of approx. 60°C and with a flow rate
of 12.5 litres/min, which can be obtained by running the
electric motor at the fastest speed (1450 rpm).
Install the auxiliary control valve assembly and the

test equipment as indicated in the diagrams (figs. 93
and 94) and referring to the following instructions:
93
-- on control valves configured for double-acting op-
eration (fig. 93), the two cylinder delivery ports
must be connected to the ball connector (3) by
way of the pipes (2) and unions (1);
-- on control valves configured for single-acting op-
eration (fig. 94), the return line (2) must be con-
nected, by way of the union (1), to the delivery
port on the control valve (port located opposite to
the switching valve).
After having made the connections as indicated in
the diagram, carry out the test as follows:
94
-- start the hydraulic pump and operate the hand le-
ver to move the spool (in both directions for
double-acting control valves);
-- gradually increase the pressure by turning the
handwheel on the test equipment, checking on
the pressure gauge that the pressure reaches
172 bar (175 kg/cm2). In this condition the control
valve spool should slide normally and return to
the neutral position the moment the hand lever is
released;
-- repeat the test on the other control valves after
making the appropriate connections.
Diagram showing the installation of the tools
and equipment required for the control valve
spool leakage test
Valve leakage test
Install the auxiliary control valve stack and the test

equipment as indicated in the diagram (fig. 95)
bearing in mind that the 3-way union (1) must be
connected to single and double acting control valves
using suitable adapters.
95
After having made the connections indicated in the
diagram, carry out the test as follows:
-- start the hydraulic pump and gradually increase

the pressure by turning the handwheel on the test
equipment until a pressure of 147 bar (150 kg/
cm2) is shown on the pressure gauge;
-- collect the leaked oil flowing from the union (2),

in the burette provided (3) for a period of exactly
one minute. Check that the quantity of oil col-
lected does not exceed 25 cm3/ minute in the
case of a new control valve, or 60 cm3/ minute for
a used valve.
Repeat the test on each control valve, checking

alternately the two delivery lines to the user cylinder.
Adjustment of the automatic detent release

pressure
Connect the control valve to the test equipment.
Start the hydraulic pump and tighten the release

pressure adjuster screw (26, fig. 1) until a pressure
of 170 -- 175 bar (2466 -- 2538 psi) is obtained in font
of the tapered needle (17).
Lock the screw (26) in position by tightening the

locknut.
Chapter 3 -- Low-Pressure System Description and Operation
CONTENTS

35 260 Description and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Low-Pressure, Steering and Lubrication System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Low-Pressure Oil Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Transmission Lubrication System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Steering System Oil Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Electro-Hydraulic Rear Differential Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Electro-Hydraulic Front Differential Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Electro-Hydraulic Four-Wheel Drive (FWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
PTO Servo-Assist Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

35 260 seals, and prevents damage to components from
prolonged static pressure, while continually providing
LOW-PRESSURE, STEERING AND lubrication and cooling for the transmission.
LUBRICATION SYSTEM
The low-pressure system pump mounts on the There is a relief valve installed in the steering control
right-hand side of the engine aft of the high-pressure valve, services control valve, and in the transmis-
pump. It is a fixed displacement, open-center, gear sion, to protect the low-pressure, steering and
type pump driven by the engine timing gear. The lubrication circuits from damage caused by over-
pump supplies oil to the low-pressure system at a pressurization.
rate of 28 l/m (7.4 g/m) on models including a
A filter assembly removes contaminants from the oil
mechanical shuttle transmission or 35 l/m (9.2 g/m)
supplied by the rear axle casing before the oil enters
for models with a power shuttle transmission.
the pump. Tractors configured with a power shuttle
The low-pressure system is an open-center type, transmission will include an additional filter assem-
which allows the constant flow of oil through the system bly, power shuttle control valve and oil cooler as
and back to return. This reduces wear on the valve shown in Figure 1.
Supply
7
1
3
11
4 8
12 6
13 2 5
9
10
50022469
1
Low Pressure System with Power Shuttle Transmission
1. Low-pressure (Steering) Pump 8. Rear Differential Lock

2. Priority Flow Valve 9. Rear Axle Housing
3. Steering System Control Valve 10. Front Differential Lock
4. Steering System Exhaust Line 11. Oil Cooler
5. Power Shuttle Filter 12. Power Steering Cylinders
6. Services Control Valve 13. Main Filter Assembly
7. Power Shuttle Control Valve
The installation of a 64 l/m (16.9 g/m) high-pressure
pump on tractors originally configured with a 47 l/m
(12.4 g/m) pump, will include the installation of the oil
cooler in the lubrication circuit.
The services control valve, Figure 2, located on the

left-hand side of the transmission, redirects the
low-pressure oil as needed to the various low-pres-
sure systems.
The services control valve consists of the following

components:
• FWD Solenoid Valve

(Models with electro-hydraulic FWD)
• Differential Lock Solenoid Valve

(Models with electro-hydraulic differential locks)
• Oil Cooler By-pass Valve

(Models with 64 l/m (16.9 g/m) high-pressure and
47 l/m (12.4 g/m) low-pressure pumps
• Pressure Regulating Valve
• System Test Fittings
The low-pressure regulating valve within the

services control valve maintains oil pressure at 16 -
18 bar (232 - 261 psi).
1 2
6 5
4
3
50023209
2
1. FWD Solenoid 6. Low-pressure regulating valve
2. Differential Lock Solenoid 7. Supply from Steering Pump
3. Oil Outlet to Cooler 8. Supply to Power Shuttle Control Valve
4. Oil Return from Cooler 9. Pressure Switch
5. By-pass Valve
Unlike models with mechanical transmissions, (1), directs oil supplied from the services control
tractors configured with an 8x8 or 16x16 power valve to the forward and reverse clutch assemblies,
shuttle transmission consist of a power shuttle by means of the forward, reverse and dump
control valve. The electro-hydraulic control valve, solenoids.
mounted on the left-hand side of the transmission
50040471
3
8 x 8 Power Shuttle Control Valve on Gearbox
LOW-PRESSURE OIL FLOW The flow-control valve receives oil from the steering
pump and regulates flow at 18 - 22 l/m (4.8 - 5.8 g/m)
to ensure the steering system receives the oil
Tractors With Power Shuttle Transmissions required to steer the tractor. The flow-control valve
In addition to the standard low-pressure hydraulic then directs the remaining flow to the rest of the
system components, models with power shuttle low-pressure system by way of the power shuttle
transmissions include a power shuttle control valve, filter. Unused oil from the steering system combines
power shuttle filter, oil cooler, cooler by-pass valve, with oil from the flow-control valve before entering
and flow-control valve.
the power shuttle filter assembly.
10
11
8 9
7 6
2
3
13
4
5 12
50022470
4
1. Supply from Steering Pump 8. Supply for Power Shuttle Control Valve
2. Pressure Regulating Valve 9. Pressure Switch
3. Oil Cooler By-pass Valve 10. FWD Solenoid
4. Oil Cooler Inlet Line 11. Differential Lock Solenoid
5. Oil Cooler Outlet Line 12. Supply to Front Diff Lock
6. Lubrication to Gearbox 13. Supply to Rear Diff Lock
7. Oil to Disengage FWD
The power shuttle control valve, located on the rear,
left-hand side of the transmission, contains the 4
following components: 1 2
1. [Reverse] Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Clutch
B Solenoid
2. [Forward] Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) Clutch 5
A Solenoid
3. Dump Solenoid Valve
4. Transmission Oil Pressure Switch
5. Transmission Oil Temperature Switch
With the [Forward A] PWM Clutch Solenoid

energized, oil flows to clutch A to drive the
transmission forward.
With the [Reverse B] PWM Clutch Solenoid energized

oil flows to clutch B to drive the transmission in reverse
by way of the reverse idler gear.
When the solenoids de-energize, the oil flows back

to sump.
3
27952
The dump solenoid relieves oil pressure from the
clutch packs when the clutch pedal is depressed, or 5
when the power shuttle control lever is in the neutral
position.
The transmission oil pressure and temperature

switches mounted on the power shuttle control valve,
monitor oil temperature and pressure for proper
operation.
The power shuttle oil filter (1), located on the

right-hand side of the transmission, removes
contaminants from the oil supplied to the power
shuttle control valve.
TRANSMISSION LUBRICATION SYSTEM

6
Models with Power Shuttle Transmission
The pressure regulator within the services control 3
valve maintains oil pressure for the various 1
low-pressure systems, and directs oil to the
lubrication system.
The services control valve contains an oil cooler

by-pass valve, which protects the oil cooler. When 2
pressure in the cooler inlet line reaches a differential
of 2.5 - 3.5 bar (36 - 50 psi) form the cooler outlet line,
the by-pass valve will open, to divert lube oil directly
to the transmission. This ensures a constant flow of
oil to the transmission lube system when the oil 50040468
pressure rises do to a malfunctioning cooler or cold
7
oil when first starting the tractor. Normally, the cooler
by-pass valve remains closed. 8 x 8 and 16 x 16 Mechanical Shuttle Transmission
1. Lubrication Manifold for Upper Shaft
2. Lubrication Pressure Regulating Valve
3. Lubrication Port for Lower Shaft
A pressure-regulator (1), located inside the transmis-
sion housing, maintains lube pressure at 3.5 bar (50
psi). Oil entering the transmission housing flows
through internal tubing to the clutch housing,
lubricates the driven shaft, then lubricates and cools
the clutch packs. When de-energized, oil flow to the
clutch pack stops to prevent piston drag.
STEERING SYSTEM OIL FLOW

For a detailed description of the steering system,
refer to Section 41 “Steering System”. 1
The steering system control valve, located beneath
the steering column inside the console includes the
following components:
• Relief Valve
• Cylinder Safety Valve
• Back Flow Valve
Filtered oil from the steering pump enters the control
50040469
valve. The control valve rotates with the steering
column to direct oil to the cylinders for left and right 8
turning capabilities.
The relief valve opens when pressure exceeds 165
- 170 bar (2390 - 2460 psi) in the control valve to
protect the steering system.
The safety valve opens when pressure exceeds 230
- 240 bar (3335 - 3480 psi) in one of the cylinder
chambers.
The back-flow valve compensates for any loss of
pressure in the opposite chamber, and for
continuous steering corrections, hydraulic system
failure, wheel vibrations, and steering rod distortion.
Exhaust oil from the steering system supplies oil to
the services control valve, power shuttle control
valve (where installed) and the PTO servo-assist
valve for PTO engagement.
NOTE: Starting the engine requires the power
shuttle control lever in the neutral position and the
clutch pedal fully depressed.
ELECTRO--HYDRAULIC REAR
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK A
Only lock the differential in the event that one of the
wheels slips excessively. Keeping the differential B
lock engaged unnecessarily reduces power, may
cause difficulty in steering, or damage to the
C
transmission system due to stress. In addition,
overuse of the differential lock will cause rapid tire
wear.
The differential lock system allows the wheels to 9
rotate at different speeds when turning the tractor.
The differential lock system contains a locking device
operated by a push button switch (1) near the
hydraulic Lift-O-Matic button. Lock the differential
when the following conditions occur:
1. When plowing to prevent the wheel not in the

furrow from slipping.
2. When one of the drive wheels operates on

uneven, muddy or slippery ground and tends to
slip.
When engaged, the differential lock indicator (1)
illuminates on the instrument panel.
Placing the differential lock switch in position (A)
energizes the differential lock solenoid within the
services control valve.
26309
10
This opens a path for oil to flow to chamber (1) in the pressure in chamber (1) allows spring tension to
differential lock. move the fork, piston, rod and sleeve to disengage
the differential lock.
In chamber (1), oil acts on the piston (2) and moves
the piston and fork (3) against the spring (4) until the NOTE: Depressing one of the brake pedals
rod and sleeve (5) engage the differential lock. automatically disengages the differential lock
system.
Placing the switch to position (C), Figure 9,
de-energizes the differential lock solenoid within the
NOTE: The differential push button springs back to
services control valve and opens a return path for the
the neutral (B) position when released after selecting
oil to discharge from chamber (1). The lack of oil
position (A), Figure 9.
Rear differential lock disengaged
1 5
2 3 4
Rear differential lock engaged
Pressurized oil
Discharge oil 50040470
11
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC FRONT
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
CAUTION
Only lock the differential in the event that one of
the wheels slips excessively. Keeping the
differential lock engaged unnecessarily reduces
power, may cause difficulty in steering, or
damage to the transmission system due to
stress. In addition, overuse of the differential
lock will cause rapid tire wear.
The differential lock system allows the wheels to

rotate at different speeds when turning the tractor.
The differential lock system contains a locking device
operated by a push button switch near the hydraulic
Lift-O-Matic button. Lock the differential when the
following conditions occur:
1. When plowing to prevent the wheel not in the
furrow from slipping.
2. When one of the drive wheels operates on
uneven, muddy or slippery ground and tends to
slip.
When engaged, the differential lock indicator (1)
illuminates on the instrument panel.
26309
12
Pressing the push button (1) on the control panel to
position (C), permanently disengages the differential
lock.
Pressing the push button (1), on the control panel to

position (A), engages the differential lock.
A
NOTE: The differential push button springs back to
the neutral (B) position when released after selecting B
position (A).
C
13
When de-energized (disengage) the differential lock the low-pressure system oil to the annular chamber
solenoid in the services control valve opens a path to of the control piston. The oil pressure overcomes the
discharge for the low-pressure oil in the annular resistance of the helical spring, and the teeth of the
chamber of the control piston (1). The helical spring coupling sleeve mesh to engage the lock.
(2) now parts the teeth of the coupling sleeve.
NOTE: Depressing one of the brake pedals
When energized (engaged) the differential lock automatically disengages the differential lock
solenoid in the services control valve opens a path for system.
Front differential
lock released
Front differential
lock engaged
Discharge oil
Pressurized oil
14
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC FOUR-WHEEL
DRIVE (FWD)
Manual Mode
Four-wheel drive increases the grip of the tractor on
the ground when operating on uneven, muddy,
slippery ground, or when plowing in difficult
conditions. Pressing the push button (1), on the
control panel to position (A) permanently engages
the FWD and the FWD indicator (1), Figure 17 lights
on the instrument panel. A B C
15
The FWD solenoid valve (1) within the services
control valve, interrupts oil flow from the low-pres- 1
sure system to the internal chamber of the mobile
coupling. As FWD engages, oil exhausts from the
control system.
The FWD on TN/S model tractors operates within

three modes; engage, disengage, and automatic cut
in.
The TN/D series model incorporating a mechanical

shuttle transmission consists of a mechanically
controlled FWD system. 50023209
16
Pressing the push button on the control panel to
position (A), Figure 15, again will permanently
disengage the FWD and the indicator on the
instrument panel extinguishes (1). The FWD
solenoid valve within the services control valve
allows oil flow from the low-pressure system to the
internal chamber of the mobile coupling, which
disengages four-wheel drive.
When released, the FWD push button on the center

panel springs back to the center (neutral) position
(B), Figure 15.
26319
17
Automatic Mode
CAUTION
Simultaneously pressing both brake pedals
engages the FWD system automatically regard-
less of selection made.
CAUTION
Manual selection of the FWD system while
operating the tractor on the road will rapidly
increase front tire wear. Use of the FWD
automatic mode is highly recommended in this
condition.
Pressing the push button (1) on the control panel to

position (C), engages the FWD system in the
automatic mode.
A B C
18
The FWD-AUTO indicator (1) on the instrument
panel illuminates. In this mode, the FWD system
automatically engages if the wheels slip in the
following conditions:
1. When operating on slippery ground.

2. On downward slopes and on slippery ground.
The FWD system automatically disengages when

the wheels stop slipping, or when exceeding the
pre-set steering angle of the tractor at speeds above
15/25 km/h (9.32/15.53 m/h) when traveling
downhill. 26319
19
Pressing the FWD push button to position (C) again
disengages the automatic mode. The FWD-AUTO
indicator on the instrument panel extinguishes.
NOTE: Use of the FWD automatic mode is highly

recommended.
NOTE: The FWD push button springs back to the

neutral position (B) when released after selecting
position (A) or (C).
PTO SERVO-ASSIST VALVE

Production began on SN 1269032 for the installation of
a PTO servo-assist valve, located on the right-hand
side of the clutch housing. The PTO servo-assist valve
engages the PTO clutch when activated.
A fitting in the steering system exhaust line, mounted

in front of the firewall on the left-hand side of the
engine, provides supply oil to the servo-assist valve.
With the PTO lever in the engage position, the

servo-assist valve spool allows pressurized oil to exit
the pressure/discharge port of the valve, and flow to
the PTO engagement cylinder. The oil pressure
extends the cylinder and the PTO clutch engages.
With the PTO lever in the disengage position, the

servo-assist valve spool blocks pressurized oil from
entering the engagement cylinder, and allows
exhaust oil from the cylinder back to sump through
the pressure/discharge port of the valve. The
cylinder retracts from the loss of pressure, and the
PTO clutch disengages. Discharge oil returns to
sump through a fitting on the right-hand side of the
transmission cover plate, between the transmission
and range gear linkages.
See Section 31 “PTO” for more information.

20
PTO Servo Assist Valve and Piston
1. Oil outlet pipe 11. Seal
2. Oil delivery pipe to piston 12. Control piston
3. Pressurised oil piping, from pump 13. Retaining ring
4. Dust ring 14. Control valve lever, connected with cable to lever
5. O-ring seal 15. Lever tie-rod
6. Control valve pin 16. Retaining ring
7. PTO clutch lever 17. O ring seal
8. Locknut 18. Spring
9. Protective boot 19. Control valve body
10. Piston body
Chapter 4 -- Low-Pressure System Test Fitting Locations
CONTENTS

System Test Fitting Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
SYSTEM TEST FITTING LOCATIONS

Both the services control valve and the power shuttle
control valve contain plugs for testing the hydraulic
system.
1 2 3 4
50022473
1
To test the clutch pack solenoids for proper pressure
to the clutch pack pistons on power shuttle 1
transmissions, use the following fitting:
1. 7/16-20 UNF (#4 SAE), JIC (37° FLARE),

STRAIGHT THREAD, M (MALE) x M10-1 (ISO
6149), STRAIGHT THREAD WITH SEALING
RING, MALE
50022474
2
To test the low-pressure system, use the following
fitting:
2. 7/16-20 UNF (#4 SAE), JIC (37° FLARE),

2
STRAIGHT THREAD, M (MALE) x M12-1.5 (ISO
6149), STRAIGHT THREAD WITH SEALING
RING, M (MALE)
50022475
3
To test that the dump valve correctly relieves
pressure from the PWM clutch pack solenoids with
the clutch pedal depressed, or with the power shuttle
control lever in neutral, use the following fitting: 3
3. 7/16-20 UNF (#4 SAE), JIC (37° FLARE),

STRAIGHT THREAD, M (MALE) x 3/8-18 NPT,
TAPER THREAD M (MALE)
50022474
To test the transmission lubrication system (4a) and

the FWD engagement system (4b), use the following
fitting:
4. 7/16-20 UNF (#4 SAE), JIC (37° FLARE),

STRAIGHT THREAD, M (MALE) x M14-1.5 (ISO
6149), STRAIGHT WITH SEALING RING M 4a
(MALE).
4b
50022475
5
Chapter 5 -- Electronically Controlled Hydraulic Lift
CONTENT

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Electronic Lift Controls Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Control Valve and Sensors Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Electronically Controlled Lift General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Electronically Controlled Hydraulic Lift General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Neutral Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Lifting Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Lowering Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
35 110 30 Electronically Controlled Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
35 110 53 Draft Sensor Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
35 130 30 Electronic Control Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
35 130 36 Lift Arm Potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
35 130 56 Draft Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
35 134 42 Hydraulic Lift Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Cylinder Safety Valve Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
35 138 20 Lift Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
35 138 24 Disassembly -- Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Lift Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Calibration and Diagnostic Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Connecting the Calibration and Diagnostic Unit to the Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Electronically Controlled Lift Fault Code Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Calibrating the Electronic Lift with the CDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
HH Menu Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
H8 -- Cancellation of Data Stored in the Non-Volatile Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
HA -- Rear Hydraulic Lift Arms Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
HF -- Faults Stored in the Non-Volatile Storage of the ECU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
First Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Fault Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
ECU Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
WARNING
Observe the following precautions when carrying out
arc welding on a tractor fitted with an electronic lift.
• Where possible, remove the part or tool that re-
quires arc welding from the tractor.
• Disconnect both battery leads. Isolate the ends
of the leads to prevent then from making contact
with each other, or with the tractor.
• Position the welder ground clamp as near as pos-
sible to the area where welding is taking place.
• Remove the electronic control units located on
the tractor if welding is to be carried out near
these control units.
• The welding leads must not be positioned on,
near or come into contact with any other electric
leads or electronic components whilst welding is
taking place.
SPECIFICATIONS
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . with controlled position/draft and float setting
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . by means of the electronic control unit, located on the left-hand part of the
dashboard, with the controls to the right of the driving position and on the
external mudguards.
1 working depth and draft control knob;
2 Lift-O-Matic arms raise/lower pushbutton;
3 lift internal controls disabled indicator signal;
4 system errors alarm;
5 arms upper maximum limit adjustment knob;
6 arms descent speed adjustment knob;
7 arms lowering limit adjustment knob;
8 position/draft sensitivity adjustment knob;
9 raise/lower external pushbuttons.
Ground position control . . . . . by means of two push buttons fitted on the rear mudguards
8 7 6
1
MAIN SPECIFICATIONS OF ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED HYDRAULIC LIFT
Diameter of arm lifting shaft (5, fig. 5) in relation to bushings:
-- right-hand side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 54.970 to 55.000
-- left-hand side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 47.975 to 48.000
Internal diameter of bushings fitted on lift body:
-- right-hand side (4, fig. 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 55.100 to 55.184 (1)
-- left-hand side (6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 48.100 to 48.184 (1)
Clearance between lifting arm shaft and relative right-hand side

bushings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 0.100 to 0.214
Clearance between lifting arm shaft and relative left-hand side

bushings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 0.100 to 0.209
Interference between bushings and relative seats ............ mm 0.065 to 0.161
Axial clearance of shaft complete with lifting arms . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 0.2 to 1.4
(1) Value to be obtained after obtaining interference fit without grinding operations.
MAIN SPECIFICATIONS OF IMPLEMENT HITCHING DEVICE WITH

ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED LIFT
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . three-point linkage
Category: 1st and 2nd
Draft control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . by means of lower arms with flex

bar and draft sensor
Maximum liftable load from horizontal arm link ends with

three-point linkage connected to upper hole on top link and full
length of lifting stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg 2670
Maximum liftable load with centre of gravity 610 mm from the

lower arm link ends for the full length of lifting stroke (with top link
connected to upper hole on support): . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg 2385
Flex bar diameter: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 24.867 to 24.900
Axial clearance of flex bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 1.5 to 5.42

TIGHTENING TORQUES
Tightening torque
PART Thread
Nm kgm
Lift
Bolts securing control valve cover to lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 8 x 1.25 26 2.7
Cylinder safety valve (C6), page 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 20 x 1.5 83 8.5
Lift cylinder retaining bolts:
-- front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 14 x 1.5 157 16
-- upper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 16 x 1.5 260 26.5
Draft sensor retaining nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M24 x 1.5 20 2.0
Implement hitching device
Flex bar seal support retaining bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 64 6.5
Lateral stabiliser strut support retaining bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M16 x 1.5 221 22.5
Pick-up hitch hook support retaining bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M16 x 1.5 221 22.5
SPECIAL TOOLS
X 291862 Wrench for cylinder safety valve set-

Warning -- The operations described in this section ting ring nut.
To work safely and efficiently and obtain the best X 291863 Wrench for lift pressure relief setting
results, it is also necessary to use the recommended ring nut.
specific tools listed below and certain other tools
which are to be made according to the drawings X 292870 Universal pressure control kit.
291359 Hydraulic lift lifting hook. X 290284 Hand pump for valve calibration.
290090 Rotating stand for overhaul opera-
tions. (con 50155) X 290828 Union for cylinder safety valve calibra-
X 294081 Ring for fitting piston with lift seals. tion.
X 292535 Punch for fitting lift arm shaft seal.

X 290824 Union for lift pressure relief valve cal-
ibration.
X 293838 Punch for fitting needle bearings on
draft control lower lever.
X 294084 Instrument for system diagnostics.
(*)
26626
2
Bracket to be made for overhauling lift to rotating stand
(mark tool No. 50155 -- measurement in mm).
Make in Aq 42 material -- (*) Area for fixing bore to rotating stand.
22
56
145
20372
3
Modification to make to a 36 mm wrench for removing, overhaul and re-fitting the controlled draft sensor (mark
tool No. 50155 -- measurement in mm).
27860
4
Bracket to be made for overhauling lift to rotating stand (mark tool No. 50155 -- measurement in mm).
make in Fe 42C material -- (1) Area for bore, see tool 50155 page 7.
SECTIONAL VIEWS
27158
5
Cross-sectional view of lift arms drive shaft.
1. Right-hand arm. 6. Left-hand bush shaft support (5).
2. Right-hand arm thrust washer. 7. Left-hand seal.
3. Right-hand seal. 8. Left-hand arm thrust washer.
4. Right-hand bush shaft support (5). 9. Left-hand arm.
5. Lift arm control shaft. 10. Internal arm.
6
Longitudinal cross-sectional view of lift.
1. Cylinder sleeve. 3. Lifting piston.
2. Cylinder oil delivery pipes.
27327
Longitudinal and cross-sectional views of lift.
1. Anti-extrusion seal and ring. 3. Cylinder safety valve.

2. Anti-extrusion seal and ring. 4. Cylinder oil delivery union.
1 2 3
27328
Position of controls.
G= 1,5 to 5.42 mm. Flex bar axial clearance. 6. Draft transmission lever.
1. Right-hand arm. 7. Flex bar.
2. Position sensor. 8. Spacer.
3. Position sensor tie rod. 9. Seal.
4. Draft reading sensor. 10. Ball bushing.
5. Draft transmission rod.
A
B
27866
9
ELECTRONIC LIFT CONTROLS 3. Inside controls: operator control console.
LOCATIONS 4. Problem code indicator.
1. External lower/lift switch on both mudguards. 5. Inside controls: working depth, draft and Lift - O Mat-
ic control console.
2. Electronic control unit and connector for trouble-
shooting.
27867
1 3
10
CONTROL VALVE AND SENSORS
LOCATIONS
1. Hydraulic control valve.
2. Position reading sensor.
3. Draft reading sensor.
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED LIFT transmission rod and the draft and position controls
GENERAL DESCRIPTION on the control panel.
One way of obtaining a more constant control of the The input signal is also influenced by ulterior signals
working depth is to take advantage of the fact that the from the arm descent speed and maximum lifting
towing load increases with the depth of the height controls.
implement. If the implement is maintained at a fixed
draft, depending on the type of ground being worked,
the depth of the implement will vary (given that the
tractor speed remains constant). When the control push button is activated to lift or
lower the arms, the processor transmits a signal to
the hydraulic control valve, which accordingly lifts or
lowers the implement.
The electronically controlled hydraulic lift provides a
precise method for controlling the implement draft
and ground penetration depth, independently of
whether the implement is totally or partially carried. Whilst the position of the lift arms changes, the
microprocessor receives a feedback signal from the
arm position sensor potentiometer.
The operating principle of the electronic draft control
lift is the measurement of the implement draft
variation, using a load measuring pin that reads each
load variation by means of a draft transmission rod. When the lift arms reach the selected position, the
A microprocessor converts these variations into control signal from the microprocessor to the
electric signals that activate the hydraulic control hydraulic control valve is deactivated, leaving the lift
valve, lifting or lowering the arms and, therefore, arms in the required position.
maintaining a constant draft on the implement.
The regularity and precision obtained during When draft control is selected, the working depth of
operation give this system a clear advantage over the implement is also controlled by the draft applied
traditional mechanical systems. to the implement by means of the lower arms, and
measured by the flex bar and transmitted to the load
measuring device by the transmission rod.
The electrical signals received by the

microprocessor, to lift or lower the hydraulic lift arms
according to the requests for position and draft If the implement draft increases, exceeding the value
control, are provided by four main sources: the lift selected by the operator, the microprocessor sends
control push button, the lift arm position sensor a signal to the hydraulic control valve, raising the
potentiometer, the load measuring pin on the draft implement so as to maintain the draft at the selected
values.
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED
HYDRAULIC LIFT GENERAL OPERATION
Neutral phase
When in neutral, the electronically controlled
hydraulic lift microprocessor does not send lifting or
lowering signals to the control solenoid valves, and
the elastic force applied, by each spring (17) to each
end of the control valve block pin, maintains the pin
in the central neutral position, preventing the oil from
the pump from arriving at the hydraulic lift.
When the control valve block pin is in the neutral
position, the right-hand end of the lift valve (16) and
the pipe (14, low pressure circuit) are in
communication with the rear transmission casing
discharge. Under these conditions, the hydraulic lift
non-return valve (8) remains closed and the oil in the
hydraulic lift cylinder (1) is stopped, thereby
maintaining the lift arms in a stationary position.
When the hydraulic lift is in the neutral position, the
oil delivery flow from the pump flows through the hole
on the load maintaining valve (3), overcoming the
spring resistance and moving the valve so as to allow
communication between the pump delivery oil
compartment (4) and the discharge (5) in the rear
transmission casing. Under these conditions, the
entire hydraulic pump flow returns to the rear
transmission casing.
11
Electronically controlled lift functional diagram. Neutral phase.
1. Hydraulic lift. 10. Solenoid valve (Lowering).
2. Lift cylinder safety valve. 11. Control valve block pin infeed dosage device.
3. Load maintaining valve. 12. Control valve block pin return to tank dosage device.
4. Hydraulic pump flow. 13. Oil discharge hole.
5. Discharge in transmission casing. 14. Low pressure circuit pilot pressure.
6. Load measuring line. 15. Pilot valve.
7. To the Hydraulic lift. 16. Solenoid valve (Lifting).
8. Non-return valve. 17. Control valve block pin centering spring.
9. Pump flow to hydraulic control valve.
18. Lifting valve.
Pump delivery oil. Pilot oil at a pressure of 16 bar.
Discharge oil. Static oil.

Lifting phase delivery oil, through the pipe (9), to the hydraulic
control valve, and the on to the hydraulic lift (1),
When the lift control push button is activated to lift the through the pipe (7).
hydraulic lift arms (1), the microprocessor identifies
this variation and transmits a signal to the hydraulic
The lifting speed is controlled by the signal from the
control valve lifting solenoid valve (16). The solenoid
lift solenoid valve (16) which, by opening and closing
valve receives the signal and moves the pilot valve
the pilot valve (15), allows the control valve block pin
(15) to the right. This allows the oil in the pipe (14, low
to constantly adjust the volume of oil to be sent to the
pressure circuit), to arrive at the left-hand end of the
hydraulic lift cylinder (1).
control valve block pin.
The control valve block pin moves to the right, When the lift arms (1) reach the desired height, the
allowing the pump delivery oil to flow past the control lift arm position sensor potentiometer resistance is
valve block pin infeed dosage device (11), to arrive equal to the value set with the lift controls. At this
at the non-return valve (8) and the lifting valve (18). point the microprocessor interrupts the signal to the
The lifting valve (18) moves to the left, opening the lifting solenoid valve (16).
pipe (6) and allowing the delivery oil to arrive at the
load maintaining valve (3).
The control valve block pin returns to the neutral
The oil pressure moves the load maintaining valve position and the non-return valve (8) closes, leaving
(3), which closes the discharge (5) and directs all the the oil trapped in the hydraulic lift cylinder (1).
12
Electronically controlled lift functional diagram. Lifting phase.
8. Non-return valve. 17. Control valve block pin centring spring.
9. Pump flow to hydraulic control valve. 18. Lifting valve.
Discharge oil.
Lowering phase The lowering speed is controlled by the signal from
the lowering solenoid valve (10) which, by opening
When the lift control push button is activated to lower and closing the pilot valve, allows the control valve
the hydraulic lift arms (1), the microprocessor block pin to constantly adjust the volume of oil to be
identifies this variation and transmits a signal to the sent to the hydraulic lift cylinder(1).
hydraulic control valve lowering solenoid valve (10).
The solenoid valve receives the signal and moves When the tractor operates with controlled draft, the
the pilot valve (15) to the left. This allows the oil in the microprocessor lowers the hydraulic lift arms, but
pipe (14, low pressure circuit), to arrive at the measures the draft variations transmitted to the
right-hand end of the control valve block pin. implement, by means of the load measuring pin on
the draft transmission rod.
The control valve block pin moves to the left, stopping
the pump delivery oil in the pipe (9). The oil in the pipe If the draft on the implement exceeds the value set by
(14), by means of the control valve block pin, arrives the operator, the microprocessor sends a signal to
at the lifting valve (18), moving it to the right to act on the lifting solenoid valve (16) and gradually raises the
the non-return valve (8) ball. implement until the conditions selected by the
operator are obtained. If, after having lifted the
With the ball moved, the hydraulic control valve oil implement, the draft drops below the set value, the
can flow through the pipe (7) and arrive at the control microprocessor sends a similar signal to increase the
valve, and then, by means of the pipe (13), on to the working depth of the implement.
rear transmission casing.
When the oil is discharged from the lift cylinder, the

arms can lower.
13
Electronically controlled lift functional diagram. Lowering phase.
8. Non-return valve. 17. Control valve block pin centering spring.
9. Pump flow to hydraulic control valve. 18. Lifting valve.
Discharge oil.
OVERHAUL
Op. 35 110 30
Removal
DANGER
equipment. Make sure that assemblies or parts are
supported by means of suitable slings and hooks.
Make sure that no-one is standing in the vicinity of the
load to be lifted.
27837
1. Carry out operation 90 100 22 Hood removal,
only removal (see Section 90).
3. Using a hoist and cable (1) raise the rear part of

the tractor, positioning two fixed stands under the
final drives, then remove the right-hand (2) and
left-hand wheels.
4. Remove the pins and disconnect both vertical

rods (1) on the lift arms.
27876
15
5. Remove the pin and remove the top link of the
third point.
6. Disconnect the auxiliary control valve rods, un-

screw the support plate (2) and pipe (1), then re-
move the rod unit.
27877
16
7. Remove the retaining bolts and remove the stop
bracket (1) on the top link of the third point.
27878
17
8. Remove the PTO revs reading sensor connec-
tion (1).
27879
18
9. Disconnect connections (1 and 3) and the hy-
draulic control valve pipe (2).
27880
19
10. Unscrew and remove the load maintaining pipe
(1).
27881
20
11. Slacken the cab front retaining screws, attach a
nylon sling to a hoist and to tool 295027, posi-
tioned in the cab, and allow the sling to take the
weight. Unscrew and remove the rear bolts, raise
the cab by 50 to 60 mm, check that all parts are
free and insert two wooden blocks (1) under the
rear cab supports.
27882
21
12. Loosen the union (1) to free the pipe.
27883
22
13. Unscrew the union (1), remove any clamps and
extract the oil delivery pipe (2).
27884
23
14. Disconnect the ground lead (1) from the lift body.
27885
24
15. Disconnect the lift arm position potentiometer
connection (1).
27886
25
16. Unscrew all retaining bolts (1) that secure the lift
to the rear transmission casing and, using a le-
ver, detach the lift from the casing.
27887
26
17. Fit tool 50155 (2) (see page 7) and tool 50163 (1)
(see page 8) on the lift.
27888
27
18. Using tool 291359 (1) remove the hydraulic lift,
complete with auxiliary control valves.
Installation
To refit the electronically controlled lift, proceed as
follows.
WARNING
27889
28
-- Before reassembling the hydraulic lift on the rear
transmission casing, carefully clean and de-
grease the mating surfaces, then apply sealing
compound (approx. 2 mm) along the marked line
shown in the drawing.
-- Fit the lift, complete with auxiliary control valves,

using tools 50155, 50163 and 291359.
-- Secure the lift in position by means of the bolts.
-- Connect the lift arm position potentiometer con-

nection.
-- Connect the ground lead (1) to the lift body.
-- Fit and secure the lift feed pipe.
-- Remove the wooden blocks, lower and secure

the cab in position.
-- Fit the load maintaining pipe.
-- Connect the hydraulic control valve connections.
-- Connect the PTO revs reading sensor.
-- Fit the stop bracket on the third point top link.
-- Fit the auxiliary control valve rods.
-- Fit the third point top link.
-- Connect the vertical rods to the lift arms.
-- Fit and secure the rear wheels.
-- Carry out operation 90 100 22 Hood removal,

only installation (see Section 90).
Diagram showing application of sealing compound

when fitting the hydraulic lift on the transmission
casing--gearbox.
27155
29
Op. 35 110 53
DRAFT SENSOR SUPPORT
Removal
WARNING
Do not put your hands or fingers between parts Wear
shoes.
1. Carry out operation 35 110 30 Electronically con-

trolled hydraulic lift, only removal.
2. Carry out operation 35 130 56 Draft sensor, only

removal.
3. Remove the safety stop on the drive transmis- 27144

sion rod pivot pin (1).
30
4. Remove the safety pin on the draft sensor control

lever (1).
Installation
To refit the support on the transmission
casing-gearbox, proceed as follows.
WARNING
-- Insert the safety pin. 27145
-- Fit the safety stop on the drive transmission rod 31

pivot pin.
-- Carry out operation 35 130 56 Draft sensor, only

installation.
-- Carry out operation 35 110 30 Electronically con-

trolled hydraulic lift, only installation.
Op. 35 130 30
ELECTRONIC CONTROL CENTER
Removal
WARNING
shoes.
To remove the control centre, proceed as follows.
1. Carry out operation 55 404 14 Direction indicator

switch, only removal (see Section 55).
2. Disconnect the electrical connections (1) and re-

move the dashboard (2). 25762
32
3. Remove the lift control centre (1) retaining bolts

from the support and disconnect the electrical
connections.
Installation
To refit the control centre, proceed as follows.
WARNING
-- Connect the electrical connections to the control 27161

centre and secure to the support using the bolts.
33
-- Connect the electrical connections to the dash-
board and fit the dashboard.
-- Carry out operation 55 404 14 Direction indicator

switch, only installation (see Section 55).
Op. 35 130 36
LIFT ARM POTENTIOMETER
WARNING
shoes.
Removal
Proceed as follows
27301
1. Turn the switch to position A (OFF).
34
2. Position a support stand under the right-hand
side final drive and remove the wheel.
3. Detach the connector (1).

1
27370
35
4. Remove the connecting rod (1) between the arm
and the sensor.
27319
36
5. Remove the cover retaining bolts (1).
27317
37
6. Remove the circlip (1) from the sensor pin, then
extract the lever.
27316
38
7. Remove the sensor retaining nuts (1).
27193
39
8. Extract the sensor (1) from its seat.
Installation
To refit the potentiometer, proceed as follows.
WARNING
-- Fit the potentiometer and secure in position.

-- Connect the lever, fit the cover and connect the
connections. 27323
-- Fit the wheel and remove the stand. 40

Op. 35 130 56
DRAFT SENSOR
Removal
WARNING
shoes.
27301
Proceed as follows
41
2. Position a support stand under the right-hand

side final drive and remove the wheel.
3. Detach the connector (1).
27307
42
4. Loosen the retaining nut, (1) using wrench 50070
then unscrew and extract the draft sensor.
27303
43
Installation
1. Position the retaining nut on the new sensor at a
distance (A) of 18 to 20 mm.
27306
44
2. Tighten (by hand) the draft sensor (1) into its
seat, bringing the retaining nut into contact 1
against the sensor support.
3. Connect the connector (2) to the draft sensor (1).
4. Make sure that the lower lifting arms are not

loaded.
27368
45
5. Connect the device 294084 to the white diagnos-
tic device connector (1), after having removed
the left-hand dashboard guard, as described on 1
page 44.
27188
46
6. Press and hold down the H MENU key on the de-
vice 294084, turn the switch to position B (ON),
the display will show the message HH MENU.
HH MENU
H
MENU
27365
47
7. Release the H MENU key, then press again and
select H6.
8. The display will show a number, followed by the
% sign.
H6
H
MENU
27329
48
9. Rotate the draft sensor (2), taking care not to ex-
cessively twist the power lead, until the message
0 % is shown on the display (1).
27302
49
10. Tighten the nut (2) to a torque setting of approx.
20 Nm (2 kgm), using wrench 50070.
Check that the 0% value has not changed.
If the value has changed, loosen the nut (1) and
repeat operation 4. 0%
11. Unravel the sensor power lead, if twisted.
H
MENU
27330
50
27333
51
Op. 35 134 42
HYDRAULIC LIFT UNIT
Disassembly
WARNING
gers between parts. Wear suitable safety clothing -
To disassemble the lift, proceed as follows.
1. Position the lift on a rotating stand 290090 using

the bracket 50155 to be made in the workshop
(see page 7).
Remove the control valves support, with the rela-
tive oil delivery to the hydraulic cylinder and the
cylinder safety valve.
27147
52
2. Unscrew the front bolts (1), the rear union (2) and
separate the oil delivery pipe (3) from the lift cylin-
der.
27148
53
3. Unscrew the three lift cylinder retaining bolts.
1
25459
54
4. Remove the lift cylinder (1).
1
25460
55
5. Free the rod (1) that connects the right-hand lift-
ing arm and position sensor.
27319
56
6. Remove the cover retaining nuts, lever circlip,
sensor retaining nut (1) and remove the sensor.
27322
57
7. Unscrew the retaining bolt (3) and recover the
thrust washer (2) and the lifting arm (1).
Repeat this operation on both sides.
1
25465 3 2
58
8. Straighten the securing ring and unscrew the in-
ternal arm (9) ring-cam retaining bolt. 1
25466
59
9. Using a brass drift, strike the end of the shaft (2),
extract the shaft and the internal arm (1), the ring-
cam and the seal (3).
1
2
25467
60
10. Use compressed air to remove the piston (2)
from its cylinder (1). 2
1
26297
61
Assembly
11. Using tool 294081 (2) insert the piston (1) in the 1 2
cylinder (3).
25634
62
12. Fit the lift arm shaft (2), the ring-cam and the in-
ternal arm (1) inside the lift box, matching up the 1
reference marks.
Tighten the bolt that secures the ring-cam to the
internal arm.
2
25468
63
13. To avoid damaging the internal seal lips (2), use
a flexible brass sheet (1) dimensions: 200 x 90
mm and 0.05 to 0.1 mm thick. Roll up the sheet
1
and insert the seal inside. Position the unit on the
spline and push the seal manually into its seat,
then remove the sheet.
2
26300
64
14. Use the striker 292535 (1), to complete the fitting
of the seals into the relative seats on the arm
1
shaft.
26326
65
15. Fit the lift arms (1) on the shaft, matching up the
reference marks. Secure in position with the bolts 1
and washers.
Fit the oil delivery pipe to the control cylinder.
25469
66
CYLINDER SAFETY VALVE CALIBRATION
1 2 3
1. Fit the cylinder safety valve (1) on the valve union
290828 (2) and connect to the hand pump
290284 (3).
2. Operate the hand pump (3) and check that the

cylinder safety valve opens at a pressure of 210
to 215 bar (214 to 219 kg/cm2). If the valve setting
does not correspond with the specified value, it
is advised to change the valve immediately. If
necessary it can be adjusted by turning the
threaded cap using wrench 291862. Tighten to
increase the valve setting value or loosen to re-
duce the value.
3. Assemble the oil delivery union, complete with

the cylinder safety valve.
Fit the position sensor and the rod that connects
the right-hand lifting arm.
Use the striker 203838 to fit the needle bearings
on the lower draft lever.
Fit the draft sensor rod and relative control kine-
matics.
Assemble the support and relative draft sensor.
Assemble the auxiliary control valves, the O ring

seals and the connecting pipe to the lift hydraulic
25720
control valve.
67
1
Complete assembly operations by connecting the
pipes and electrical connections to the various
sensors and solenoid valves.
Op. 35 138 20
LIFT CONTROL VALVE
Removal
WARNING
- safety goggles, gloves and shoes.
Proceed as follows.
27868
1. Lower the hydraulic lift arms.
68
2. Thoroughly clean the area around the control
valve before starting disassembly operations.
3. Disconnect the electrical connections (1 and 4)

and the pipes (2 and 3) on the control valve.
4. Remove the four (2) retaining bolts and detach

the hydraulic control valve (1) from the lift.
Installation
To refit the hydraulic control valve on the lift, proceed
as follows.
WARNING
-- Replace the “O ring” seals and make sure that 27869

they are fitted correctly in their seats.
69
-- Position the control valve on the lift and secure
with the bolts.
-- Connect the pipes and electrical connections.

Op. 35 138 24
Disassembly -- Assembly
Solenoid valve and pilot valve.
WARNING
- safety goggles, gloves and shoes.
1. Mark the lowering (L) and raising (R) solenoid 27196
valves in order to facilitate re-fitting. 70

2. Carry out operation 35 138 20 Hydraulic control
valve, only removal.
3. Remove and, if necessary, disassemble the sole-

noid valves. 1 2 3 4 5
NOTE: The solenoid valve is only supplied as a com- 6

plete unit.
12
7
Exploded view of solenoid valve components
1. Piston.
2. “O ring” seal.
3. Core. 11 10 9 8
4. Piston. TIA35088
6. Plate. 71
7. Cover.
8. Coil.
9. Plate.
11. Cap.
12. Bolts.
4. Remove the pin (1) and the spring (2) from the pi-
lot valve. 2
1
Make sure that the pins move freely when
pushed against the spring.
TIA35164
72
5. Insert a 5/16 UNF screw into the end of the pilot
valve body. Extract the pilot valve from its hous-
ing.
6. Solenoid valve assembly and re-fitting opera-

tions follow the disassembly procedure in re-
verse order, making sure that the bolts are tight-
ened to a torque value of 2 N⋅m.
Do not exceed this value.
TIA35170
73
Control Valve Pin
1 2 3 4
1. Mark the right and left hand regulators (8 and 3)
in relation to the hydraulic control valve body.
NOTE: Do NOT disassemble the regulators (8 and

3).
2. Remove the units from the regulators and extract

the control valve pin, the centring spring and the
seats. 8
Check that the spring and seats remain coupled 7 6 5
with each regulator. TIA35171
IMPORTANT: do not disassemble or zero-set the 74

regulator units. The hydraulic control valve is factory
set. Make sure that the control valve pin is correctly
set for the neutral position.
Control valve pin
1. Seat.
2. Spring.
3. Regulator unit.
4. Valve housing.
5. Control valve pin.
6. Seat.
7. Spring.
8. Regulator unit.
The control valve pin (1) is specially machined near

the neck in order to modulate the differential pressure
between the pump and the load valve circuit, in order
to guarantee operation.
TIA35080
75
Check valve
1. Remove the load non-return valve caps and ex-

tract the components from the valve.
NOTE: The pin (7), is rounded at one end. When re-

fitting the control valve, check that the rounded end 1 2 3 4
is inserted in the head (2).
Check valve.
1. Dowel. 5
2. Piston.
3. Cap and O ring seal.
4. Valve casing.
5. Head. 9
6. Ball. 8 7 6
7. Guide. TIA35163
8. Spring.
76
9. Cap and O ring seal.
1. Wash all parts, apart from the solenoid valves,

with a suitable solvent and check that none of the
components are damaged.
2. Minor imperfections can be corrected using

abrasive cloth or fine abrasive paste. When using
abrasive materials, make sure that all abrasive
particles are removed from the control valve
housing.
3. If deep scoring or pitting are detected, replace

the control valve.
4. To assemble, follow the disassembly operation in

reverse order.
5. Lubricate all components with oil and check that

the pins move freely in the relative seats.
6. Replace the “O ring” seals.
7. Tighten all caps and locknuts to the prescribed

torque value.
8. Whilst installing the solenoid valves, check that

they are assembled correctly in the body and that
the screws are progressively and alternately
tightened to a torque value of 2 Nm. Do not ex-
ceed this value.
LIFT CALIBRATION
The following calibration operations refer to a lift
fitted on a tractor.
Draft measuring sensor (1)

For draft measuring sensor calibration operations,
refer to the “Draft sensor replacement” description
on page 30.
Hydraulic control valve solenoid valve

For hydraulic control valve solenoid valve calibration
operations, refer to the description of the H1 menu 27184
1
(page 48).
77
This procedure calls for the presence of one (or all)
of the following conditions:
-- hydraulic control valve solenoid valve replace-
ment;
-- electronic control unit (ECU) replacement;
-- cancellation of the resident non-volatile storage
in the electronic control unit;
-- installation of a new electronic control unit.

-- cancellation of the resident non-volatile stor-
age data with the H8 menu (page 54).
78
Lift arms
For hydraulic lift arm position calibrations, refer to the
following description.
This procedure calls for the presence of one (or all)
of the following conditions:
-- cancellation of the resident non-volatile storage
in the electronic control unit;
-- installation of a new electronic control unit;
-- cancellation of the resident non-volatile stor-
age data with the H8 menu (page 54);
-- position sensor replacement;
27331
79
Turn the switch (1, fig. 79) to position A (OFF).
Apply a weight of approx. 220,46 lbs. (100 kg) to
the lift arms.
1. Place switch (1, fig. 79) in position (B).
2. Turn switch (1, fig. 79) to C (START), start the en-
gine and bring to a speed of 1200 to 1400 rpm.
3. Turn the knobs on potentiometers (1, 2, 3) fully
clockwise, and the knob on potentiometer (4)
counter-clockwise.
80
4. Turn the knob (1) on the working depth control
potentiometer fully clockwise. The lift arms will
start to raise until they reach the completely
raised position and, after 1 second, the lift locked 4
indicator light (2) will illuminate.
5. Turn the knob (1) on the working depth control

potentiometer fully counter-clockwise. The lift
arms will start to descend and the lift locked indi-
cator light (2) will switch off. When the arms have
reached the fully lowered position, the light will il-
luminate once more.
27332
81
6. Turn the switch (1) to position A (OFF), and wait
for at least 10 seconds to allow the data to be
stored in the ECU).
If calibration has been carried out correctly, when
the engine is started, error code 24 should no lon-
ger be displayed.
27332
82
CALIBRATION AND DIAGNOSTIC UNIT

CONNECTING THE CALIBRATION AND
DIAGNOSTIC UNIT 294084 TO THE
TRACTOR
Connect the instrument to the diagnosis socket as
described below.
1. Turn the switch (1) to position A (OFF).
27333
83
2. Unscrew the bolts (1) and remove the guard on
the left-hand side of the dashboard.
27185
84
3. Connect the diagnostic instrument 294084 to the
white diagnostic connector (1).
27186
85
4. Connect the diagnostic instrument 294084.
27188
86
FAULT CODE INDICATIONS 1
In the event of an electrical or electronic fault, any 4
2
If an error occurs that prevents correct operation of 2
the lift, the lift disabled indicator light (2), will illumi-
nate.
6
0
Faults code decoding
The indicator (1) identifies the error code in six 8
phases: MDB2010A

nent transmission of the error code; 87
2. 2 second pause;
code;
4. 1 second pause;
fault code;
6. 3 second pause.

code
second
seco d digit
dg
1
warning
fault code composition
p
21
CALIBRATING THE ELECTRONIC LIFT WITH THE CDU
Faults code
HH MENU ACCESS
-- Turn the switch (1) to A (OFF) and connect de-
vice (CDU) 294084 to the diagnosis connector.
88
-- By holding down the H MENU key (1) on the
CDU, turn switch (1, fig. 88) to C to start the en-
gine.
-- After a brief pause, the display (2) shows: H5

HH MENU
-- Release the H MENU key (1) on the CDU).

H
-- Select the required H menu by pressing the H MENU
1 2 3 4
once to access H1, five times to access H5, etc. MDB0751A
Each time key (1) is pressed, the display (2)

shows the H code obtained, i.e.: H1, H2 etc. 89
starts from HH.
If the operator presses key (1) whilst an H menu
-- Turn switch (1) to A to stop the engine.


nus:
H1 REAR LIFT RAISING AND LOWERING SOLE-

NOID VALVES CALIBRATION.
H2 REAR LIFT CURRENT CALIBRATION VALUES 90

DISPLAY (EDC).
H3 ECU CONFIGURATION AND MODIFICATION

DISPLAY.
H4 SOFTWARE REVISION AND DISPLAY.
H5 SWITCHES DIAGNOSTICS.
H6 DRAFT SENSORS VALUES AND DISPLAY

(LVDT).
H8 DELETING DATA FROM THE NON-VOLATILE

MEMORY (EEPROM).
H9 VOLTMETER DISPLAY.
HA LIFTING ARMS POSITION DISPLAY.
HB FRONT LIFT POSITION DISPLAY.
HF ACCESS TO FAULTS IN THE NVM.

HA and HB menus.
H1 -- REAR LIFT RAISING AND LOWERING
SOLENOID VALVES CALIBRATION
This procedure calibrates the rear lift control valve
solenoid valves (EDC).
and must be carried out after the following opera-
tions:
-- ECU replacement;
-- raising or lowering solenoid valves replacement;
-- NVM cancellation (H8 menu)
Rear lift raising and lowering solenoid valves

calibration mode access
91
-- Apply a weight of approx. 220.46 lbs. (100 kg) to
the lift arms.
-- The transmission temperature must be

68 to 158 °F (20 to 70 °C). H1
-- Select the H1 menu, as described on page 46.
H
MENU
27334
92
-- The 294084 instrument will display RCV:INIT.
-- Bring the engine revs to 1200 ÷ 1400 rpm;
RCV:INIT
H
MENU
27335
93
-- Move potentiometers (1, 2, 3 and 4) to the follow-
ing positions:
-- Potentiometer (1) to the max. raise position (turn
clockwise);
-- Potentiometer (2) to the arms descent speed
max. position (turn clockwise);
-- Potentiometer (3) to the max. lowered position
(turn clockwise);
-- Potentiometer (4) to the controlled operation
position (turn counter-clockwise).
94
-- By turning knob (1), move the lift to the 75%
raised position (corresponds to approx. posi-
tion 2 on the decal).
4
95
-- During calibration the display on instrument
294084 shows the number of the raise/lower
cycle from 1 to 3.
CYCLE 1
CYCLE 2 CYCLE 1
CYCLE 3
-- A U fault code will appear on the display if a fault
is detected during the calibration sequence.
H
-- Calibrate the solenoid valves again, starting from
cycle 0, if possible, after the fault is displayed.
MENU
27337
96
-- On completion of the calibration sequence, the
display will show “RVC:END”. This means that
the calibration operation has been carried out
successfully and the display will not return to the
HH menu. RVC:END
-- The only possible action is to turn the starter key
to (1, fig. 91) position A (OFF).
H
MENU
27338
97
NOTE: The control knob, the position of the raising

arms and potentiometer adjustments are constantly
checked.
Calibration will not proceed if the tractor is moving.
If an anomalous condition is detected during calibra-
tion, the display will show the relative fault code with
the indicator lamps (1, fig. 87); if the fault concerns
the calibration procedure, the display will show the
relative Uxx code.
The codes are explained in the following table.
U ERROR CODES XX
CODE CAUSE SOLUTION

U 20 Implement connector too low. Raise the arms by turning the working depth
control knob clockwise (1, fig. 95).
U 21 Implement connector too high. Lower the arms by turning the working depth
control knob counter-clockwise
(1, fig. 95).
U 22 Movement detected on the working depth con- Calibration will re-start when system movement
trol. is eliminated.
U 23 Arms incorrectly positioned in relation to set- Calibration will re-start when the arms are sta-
tings. tionary.
U 24 Solenoid valve current absorption too high. Check the wiring and the solenoid valves.
U 25 Arm upper travel limit incorrectly positioned. Turn the knob fully clockwise (1, fig. 94).
U 26 Arm lower travel limit incorrectly positioned. Turn the knob fully clockwise (3, fig. 94).
U 27 Position/draft sensitivity incorrectly positioned. Turn the knob fully counter-clockwise
(4, fig. 94).
U 31 Tractor moving. Stop the tractor by applying the parking brake.
H2 -- REAR LIFT CURRENT CALIBRATION

VALUES DISPLAY (EDC)
-- This function is used to display the rear lift sole-

H2
noid valves calibration values when saved in the
ECU.
H
MENU
27339
98
-- The 294084 device will display the current values
(in mA) of the lifting R, and lowering L solenoid
valves.
-- Example: R= 586 ma
L= 584 ma. R=586 ma
-- To select the raising solenoid valve, press button
Y.
H
-- To select the lowering solenoid valve, press but- MENU
ton B.
27340
99
H3 -- ECU CONFIGURATION AND MODIFI-
CATION DISPLAY
The H3 menu displays the system configuration, or

allows it to be modified manually .
H3
The configuration is stored in the NVM and is auto-
matically registered the first time the tractor is used.
H
For maintenance operations, the stored configura- MENU
1 2 3 4
tion can be accessed and manually modified.
-- Select the H3 menu, as described on page 46; MDB0751A
-- The 294084 device will display the configuration 100

in use;
-- NONE = No configuration, this may occur if the
control unit has never been used or if it is the first
start-up after a memory cancellation operation
(H8 menu);
-- EDC = Rear hydraulic lift and differential lock;
-- EDC--FL = Rear hydraulic lift, front lift and differ-
ential lock;
-- FR--LIFT = Front lift;

figuration, press key (1) and the display will
show:
HH MENU
-- Set the configuration manually by pressing key

Y (3).
-- Save the new configuration with key B, holding
the key down until the display on instrument
294084 shows the following sequence:
STORE 5s
STORE 4s
STORED
STORE 3s
STORE 2s
STORE 1s H
After 5 seconds, the display will show “STORED”.
MENU
STORED;
27343
-- If button B is released whilst the instrument

294084 is carrying out the reverse countdown, 101
the display will return to the selected mode.

NOTE: NONE mode selection results in ECU auto-

configuration at the following start-up, follow the in-
structions shown on page 59 “FIRST START-UP”.
NOTE: Even if any of the available modes can be se-

lected, incorrect mode selection can lead to an illumi-
nated indicator fault or inefficient tractor operation.
The H4 menu allows the software revision level pres-

ent in the control unit to be displayed.
H4
-- Select the H4 menu, as described on page 46,
the display shows the following information.
-- Product identity MB H
MENU
-- Software revision level (release) 00.01 1 2 3 4
-- Hardware level 02.00
MDB0751A
-- Menu level HHMENU
-- The parameters are shown in sequence, dis- 102

module returns to the HH level.
sion and is saved with the ECU boot-loader: a new
ue.

(OFF).
27356
103
H5 -- CONTROL SWITCHES DIAGNOSIS
This module is requested by the Diagnostics Menu to
check for eventual control module switch and analog
input circuit status changes. H5
A status change, for the analog inputs, means that a
fixed threshold has been exceeded.
H
MENU
the display (2) shows the following information. 1 2 3 4
The display (2) shows a d and a number each time
MDB0751A
The number indicates on which circuit the status 104

n. Switch or analog input
If the same circuit has two consecutive status d1 External lowering switch.
changes, the message on the display (2) changes to
d0 when the second change occurs. d2 External raising switch.
This menu also checks compatibility problems on the d3 Rear lift work switch status change.
work, raising, rear lift float and work, front lift raising d4 Rear lift raising switch status change.
switches.
d5 Rear lift float switch status change.
fig. 103) to A (OFF). d6 Front lift work switch status change.
d7 Front lift raising switch status change.
d8 Manual differential lock switch.
d9 Automatic differential lock switch.
d10 LH brake pressure switch.
d11 RH brake pressure switch.
d30 Engine oil pressure switch.
H6 -- DRAFT SENSORS VALUES DISPLAY
(LVDT)
The H6 menu displays the draft sensor adjustment

values.
0%
-- The rear lift (EDC) can be used in this mode. H

MENU
-- The display shows the travel percentage (LVDT)
in relation to the calibrated point, e.g.:
27347
35%
or 105
--15%
-- When there is no force on the implement hitching

device, the display will show a value of
--5% to 5%.
H8 -- CANCELLATION OF THE DATA

STORED IN THE NON-VOLATILE
STORAGE
This menu sets the Non-Volatile Memory values H8
mable Read Only Memory) on pre-set values. The
ration parameters and all faults are saved. The H
memory is saved even if the module is without a pow- MENU
1 2 3 4
er supply, i.e.: the battery is disconnected.
MDB0751A
-- Select the H8 menu, as described on page 46, 106
the display (2) shows the following information.
ERASE?
H MENU key (1).
5 seconds.
ERASE 5s
ERASE 4s
ERASE 3s
ERASE 2s
ERASE 1s
ERASED
B (4, fig. 106).
NOTE: If key (4, fig. 106) is released during the re-

verse countdown, the display returns to the start of
the menu, displaying: ERASE?.

(OFF).
NOTE: By deleting the NVM, all the saved configura- 107

tion information is also deleted, results in ECU auto-
structions shown on page 59 to ensure correct
configuration.
This menu checks the condition of: the potentiome-
ters, the supply voltage, the frequency and the sole-
noid valves circuits. H9
NOTE: the rear lift (EDC) can be used with this menu.
H
MENU
1 2 3 4
The display (2) shows a channel number followed by
a typical value (a numerical value between 0-1023) MDB0751A
corresponding to the unit of measurement.
Example: 6 → 1023 108
where:
6 channel number.
surement.

-- The display (2) can show up to 24 channels by

pressing key Y (3) to increase the channel num-
ber or key B (4) to decrease the number.

Channel Description Unit of Value
measurement
1 Sensors power supply (5V) Counts (ADC) 650 to 720
2 Control unit supply voltage (12VF) Counts (ADC) 380 to 800
3 Control unit supply voltage (12VD) Counts (ADC) 380 to 800
4 Draft sensor supply (8V) Counts (ADC) 750 to 850
5 Front lift raising coil current Counts (ADC) 0 to 1023
6 Front lift lowering coil current Counts (ADC) 0 to 1023
7 Front lift max. raising potentiometer voltage Counts (ADC) 90 to 650
8 Front lift working depth potentiometer voltage Counts (ADC) 90 to 650
9 Differential lock coil current Counts (ADC) 0 to 950
10 Rear lift raising coil current Counts (ADC) 0 to 650
11 Rear lift lowering coil current Counts (ADC) 0 to 650
12 Wheel speed sensor frequency Hz ≥0
13 Raising arms position potentiometer voltage Counts (ADC) 50 to 650
14 Work position setting potentiometer voltage Counts (ADC) 100 to 750
15 Descent speed potentiometer voltage Counts (ADC) 100 to 700
16 Max. raise potentiometer voltage Counts (ADC) 100 to 700
17 Mixed control potentiometer voltage Counts (ADC) 100 to 700
18 Lowering limit potentiometer voltage Counts (ADC) 100 to 750
19 Draft sensor voltage (LVDT) Counts (ADC) 120 to 800
20 Engine Speed rpm 0 to 3000
21 Front lift position potentiometer voltage Counts (ADC) 50 to 650
HA -- REAR HYDRAULIC LIFT ARMS

POSITION
The HA (on the 294084 device) displays the % value

of the pre-defined max. raising limit with the working HA
depth control.
The rear lift (EDC) can be used in this mode.

H
-- Select the HA menu, as described on page 46, MENU
27351
109
-- The 29408 device display will show the value in
% of the arms max. raise position.
Example: 49%.
-- turn the switch to A (OFF). 49%
H
MENU
27352
110
HF -- FAULTS STORED IN THE
NON-VOLATILE STORAGE OF THE ECU
When a fault is detected it is stored in the ECU non-
volatile memory and signalled by the indicator lamp HF
(1 fig. 87).
-- Select the HF menu, as described on page 46,

the display (2) shows the last fault saved. H
MENU
Example: E(9) = 15 1 2 3 4
E= Fault.
MDB0751A
(9) = Progressive memory cell.

111
15= Fault code.

saved in cells 1 to 9.
When no faults are saved, the display will show:

Example: E(9)=00.
5 seconds.

ERASE 5s
ERASE 4s
ERASE 3s
ERASE 2s
ERASE 1s

ERASED
B (4, fig. 111).
NOTE: If key (4, fig. 111) is released while the display

(2) is carrying out the reverse countdown, the display
returns to the current cell of the buffer memory.

(OFF).
NOTE: If a pressure switch signal is detected during

this operation, the procedure must be interrupted
and normal operation must be resumed. 112
FIRST START--UP
The first start-up procedure must be carried out in the

following cases.
-- Following erasure of the Non-Volatile memory

-- Turn switch (1) to B (ON) without switching on the

engine. 113
-- Indicator (1) will be illuminated (non-flashing), af-

ter a while indicator (1) will flash to repeat the re- 1
cognised configuration code - i.e.: rapid flashing,
followed by: 4
2
1 flash Only front lift present.
2
2 flashes Both Rear lift and
differential lock present.
6
0
3 flashes Rear lift, Front lift and
differential lock present. 8
-- Turn the key (1, fig. 113) to OFF for a few sec- MDB2010A
onds: the configuration is now saved in the Non-

Volatile memory (NVM). 114
FAULT DIAGNOSIS
TROUBLESHOOTING self-configuration operation at the first start-up
WARNING
Notes to help the operator make diagnosis and prob-
There are two types of faults:
lem-solving easier.
1. The measurements taken to read: paired, even without switching off the tractor, but
voltage; the relative code will be saved in the non-volatile
resistance; memory (see HF MENU);
must be carried out with a digital tester. alarm lamp when the cause is eliminated or
NOTE: the resistance values shown are valid for a fault reset”) in the non volatile memory (see HF
temperature of 20 °C (ambient temperature). MENU.
With higher or lower tractor temperatures, the rela-
tive resistance values shown in the manual should 6. In certain cases the fault may also be indicated
vary accordingly. by the front lift alarm lamp, as the ECU is com-
mon.
2. The “short to ground” message refers to a resist-
ance value of less than 5 ohm (Ω). 7. The connection references indicate: the wire di-
3. When a fault occurs, before carrying out any kind mension and colour, and the connection pin num-
of service operations, check that the specific con- ber.
nections (ECU, sensors, switches, etc.) are cor- Example: 0.5 S (31)
rectly connected. 0.5 = wire dimension;
A faulty connection could be the cause of incor- S = wire colour;
rect tractor operation. (31) = connection pin number.
4. To facilitate problem solving, consult the ECU 8. CN1--4 or CN2--25 on the ECU connections
electrical wiring diagram, shown on page 149. (135), refer to the smaller connection (18 pin) or
5. If the ECU needs to be replaced, the following op- the bigger connection (36 pin) and the relative pin
erations must be carried out: number.
the H8 MENU function (cancellation of the resi-
dent non-volatile memory); also check that the 9. The faults are listed in progressive order.
ECU LOCATION
The ECU (1) controls the rear and front electronic lift.
27161
FAULT CODES
FAULT CODE 11
Fault on the lifting solenoid valve ECU circuit.
The rear lift (EDC) does not work.
Check the wiring between the fusebox and

the ECU and eliminate the cause of the open
circuit.

Remove the control panel and the connec-
Remove the left-hand guard under the da-
shboard. NO
Turn the starter key to the ON position. NO
Are fuses F14 and/or F16 (Section 55)
Is there a +12V reading on the pins of con-
interrupted?
nection (135) CN2--10 (MV), CN2--34 (MV),
YES
CN1--15 (MV) and CN2--12 (LB)?
Replace the fuses. YES
Is the ground wire under the control panel

NO
YES
Replace the ECU.
Connect the ground wire correctly.

FAULT CODE 11
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 12
The wiring on the arms descent speed potentiometer (2) is disconnected or in short to ground.
The rear lift (EDC) works but the arms descent speed is always set at the maximum value.

Remove the lift control panel. NO Connect the wire.
Is the grey wire (H) connected to the relative con-
nection (94) pin (2)?
YES
Disconnect the lift control panel connection.

Remove the control panel and the connections
(135) on the ECU. NO
Eliminate the cause of the open cir-
Is there electrical continuity between pin CN2--2 cuit.
(H) on connection (135) and pin (2) (H) on connec-
tion (94) on the lift control panel?
YES
Is wire (H), between pin CN2--2 on connection

(135) and pin (2) on connection (94) on the lift con- NO Replace the lift control panel.
trol panel, in short to ground? Does the fault persist?
YES YES
Eliminate the cause of the ground reference.

YES
Replace the ECU.
0.5 AB (1)
0.5 H (2)
0.5 HG (3)
0.5 A (4)
94
0.5 AN (5)
0.5 VB (6)
0.5 N (7)
25583
0.5 GN (8)
FAULT CODE 12
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 13
The wiring on the arms descent speed potentiometer (2) is in short to +12V (power supply).
The rear lift (EDC) works but the arms descent speed is always set at the maximum value.

(135) on the ECU.
Turn the starter key to the ON position. Check the wiring and eliminate the
NO cause of the voltage presence.
Using a digital tester, measure the voltage betwe-
en pin CN2--2 on connection (135) and ground. Does the fault persist?
Is the voltage at 0 V? YES
YES
Replace the ECU.
25583
FAULT CODE 13
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 14
The wiring on the arms maximum raise potentiometer (1) is disconnected or in short to ground.
The rear lift (EDC) does not work, but allows the implement hitch to be caught at the height maximum value.

Remove the lift control panel.
NO Connect the wire.
Is wire (A) connected to the relative connection
(94) pin (4)?
YES

(135) on the ECU. Eliminate the cause of the open cir-
NO
Is there electrical continuity between pin CN2--3 cuit.
(A) (wiring side) on connection (135) and pin (4) (A)
on connection (94) on the lift control panel?
YES
Is wire (A), between pin CN2--3 on connection

(135) (wiring side) and pin (4) on connection (94) NO Replace the lift control panel.
on the lift control panel, in short to ground?
YES

YES
Replace the ECU.
0.5 AB (1)
0.5 H (2)
0.5 HG (3)
0.5 A (4)
94
0.5 AN (5)
0.5 VB (6)
0.5 N (7)
25583
0.5 GN (8)
FAULT CODE 14
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 15
The wiring on the arms maximum raise potentiometer (1) is in short to +12V (power supply).
The rear lift (EDC) does not work, but allows the implement hitch to be caught at the height maximum
value.

(135) on the ECU.
Turn the starter key to the ON position. NO cause of the voltage presence.
en pin CN2--3 (A) on connection (135) (wiring side)
YES
and ground.
Is the voltage at 0 V?
YES
Replace the ECU.
25583
FAULT CODE 15
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 16
The wiring on the draft sensor (1) is disconnected or in short to ground or the sensor is faulty.
The rear lift (EDC) does not work, but allows the implement hitch to be caught by means of the mixed control
potentiometer in “position” control.

Remove the rear right-hand wheel. Disconnect the draft sensor connection.
NO Are pins (2 or 3) on connection (98) of the
Is the draft sensor or wiring and connec- NO
tion damaged or disconnected? draft sensor in short circuit?
YES YES
Connect the connection. Check the wiring and eliminate the cause of
or the short circuit.
repair and/or replace the wiring. Does the fault persist?
YES

Is there electrical continuity on the following
wires between connection (98) and connec-
tion (135) (ECU):
(98) pin (1) (VB) and pin CN2--29 (VB) (135);
(98) pin (2) (ZN) and pin CN2--24 (ZN) (135); NO
(98) pin (3) (Z) and pin CN2--35 (Z) (135)?
YES
Replace the ECU.
YES
Check the wiring, connection (171) and eli-
minate the cause of the open circuit.
98
27184
1
FAULT CODE 16
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
**
FAULT CODE 17
The wiring on the draft sensor (1) is in short to +12V (power supply) or the sensor is faulty.

(135) on the ECU.
NO Replace the ECU.
Is there a +12V reading between pin CN2--24 (ZN)
on connection (135) (wiring side) and ground?
YES
Check the wiring between connection (135), pin

(B7) (ZN) on connection (171) and the draft sensor
to eliminate the cause of the voltage presence wi-
thout the ECU.
YES
27184 1
**
FAULT CODE 17
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 21
The mixed control potentiometer (4) or wiring is disconnected or in short to ground or the potentiometer is faulty.

Remove the lift control panel.
NO Connect the wire.
Is wire (HG) connected to pin (3) on control panel
connection (94)?
YES

(135) on the ECU. Eliminate the cause of the open cir-
cuit.
(HG) on connection (135) (wiring side) and pin (3)
(HG) on connection (94) on the lift control panel?
YES
Is wire (HG), between pin CN2--23 on connection Replace the lift control panel.
(135) and pin (3) on the lift control panel connection NO
(94), in short to ground?
YES
YES

YES
Replace the ECU.
0.5 AB (1)
0.5 H (2)
0.5 HG (3)
0.5 A (4)
94
0.5 AN (5)
0.5 VB (6)
0.5 N (7)
25583
0.5 GN (8)
FAULT CODE 21
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 22
The wiring on the mixed control potentiometer (4) is in short to +12V (power supply).

(135) on the ECU.
Turn the starter key to the ON position. Check the wiring and eliminate the
NO cause of the voltage presence.
en pin CN2--23 (HG) on connection (135) (wiring Does the fault persist?
side) and ground. YES
YES
Replace the ECU.
25583
FAULT CODE 22
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 23
The rear lift control panel (EDC) is disconnected.
The rear lift (EDC) does not work, but can be operated from the external switches on the mudguards.

Remove the lift control panel. Connect the connection and/or wi-
NO
Are the wires and the relative connection connec- res.
ted?
YES
Is there electrical continuity between the following

wires on connection (94) on the lift control panel
and connection (135) on the ECU?
(94) pin (6) (VB) and CN2--29 (VB) (135); Check the wiring and eliminate the
(94) pin (1) (AB) and CN2--20 (AB) (135); NO
(94) pin (3) (HG) and CN2--23 (HG) (135);
(94) pin (5) (AN) and CN2--22 (AN) (135);
(94) pin (4) (A) and CN2--3 (A) (135);
(94) pin (2) (H) and CN2--2 (H) (135).
YES
Replace the lift control panel.

YES
Replace the ECU.
0.5 AB (1)
0.5 H (2)
0.5 HG (3)
0.5 A (4)
94
0.5 AN (5)
0.5 VB (6)
0.5 N (7)
0.5 GN (8)
FAULT CODE 23
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 24
Lift arms calibration must be carried out.
4
FAULT CODE 25
The wiring on the working depth setting potentiometer (1) is disconnected or in short to ground or the potentio-
meter is faulty.

Remove the working depth setting control panel. Connect the wires and/or the connec-
NO
Are the wires and the relative connection connection.
ted?
YES

(135) on the ECU.
wires on working depth control panel connection NO Check the wiring and eliminate the
(28) and connection (135)? cause of the open circuit.
(28) pin (8) (HL) with CN2--28 (HL) (135);
(28) pin (4) (VB) with CN2--29 (VB) (135);
(28) pin (3) (AB) with CN2--20 (AB) (135).
YES
Replace the working depth setting control panel.

YES
Replace the ECU.
The lift arms must be calibrated after this opera-

tion.
0.5 M (1)
0.5 LG (2)
4 0.5 AB (3)
0.5 VB (4)
28
0.5 LN (5)
0.5 N (6)
0.5 GN (7)
0.5 HL (8)
FAULT CODE 25
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 26
The wiring on the working depth setting potentiometer (1) is in short to +12V (power supply).

(135) on the ECU.
en pin CN2--28 (HL) on connection (135) and
ground. YES
YES
Replace the ECU.
4
FAULT CODE 26
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 27
The wiring on the lift arms position potentiometer (2) is disconnected or in short to ground.
Disconnect the lift arms position potentio-

Turn the starter key to the OFF position. meter.
Remove the rear right-hand wheel. Using a digital tester, check the potentiome-
Is the lift arms position potentiometer or NO NO
ter.
relative wiring damaged or disconnected? With the arms fully lowered is the reading
YES between wire (C) and (V) 3 to 4 kΩ?
YES
Connect the connection.
or Is pin (1) (VG) or (2) (AB) (wiring side) on po-
repair or replace the wiring. tentiometer connection (97) in short to
NO
ground?
YES

the ground reference.
Replace the arms position potentiometer.
YES
Remove the control panel and the connec-
wires between connection (97) and connec-
tion (135)?
(97) pin (1) (VG) with CN2--21 (VG) (135);
(97) pin (2) (AB) with CN2--20 (AB) (135); NO
(97) pin (3) (VB) with CN2--29 (VB) (135).
Check the wiring, pins (C6) (VG), (A6) (AB)

and (B6) (VB) on connection (171) and eli-
minate the cause of the open circuit.
YES
Replace the ECU.

FAULT CODE 27
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
**
FAULT CODE 28
The wiring on the lift arms position potentiometer (2) is in short to +12V (power supply).

(135) on the ECU.
NO Replace the ECU.
Between pin CN2--21 (VG) on connection (135)
and ground, is the reading ∼ +12V?
YES
Check the wiring between pin CN2--21 (VG), pin

(C6) (VG) on connection (171) and the lift arms po-
sition potentiometer in order to eliminate the short
circuit to +12V.
YES
FAULT CODE 28
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
**
FAULT CODE 29
The wiring on the rear lift (EDC) control valve (1) solenoid valve is disconnected.

Connect the disconnected connec-
Are connections (100) and (101) on the lift control NO
tions.
solenoid valve connected?
YES
Disconnect connections (100) and (101).

Is the electrical resistance on each solenoid valve NO Replace the faulty solenoid valves.
coil ∼ 7.5 Ω?
YES

Is there electrical continuity between CN1--16 (GV) Check connection (171) pin C8 (GR),
and CN1--4 (4) (GR) on connection (135) and con- B8 (GV), A8 (SG) and B1 (RV), the
nection (100) on the lifting solenoid valve or betwe- NO wiring and eliminate the cause of the
en CN1--17 (RV) and CN1--3 (SG) on connection open circuit.
(135) and connection (101) on the lowering sole- Does the fault persist?
noid valve. YES
YES
Replace the ECU.
When solenoid valves or the hydraulic control val-

ve assembly is replaced the H1 MENU must be ca-
librated.
1 GV
1 GR
1 RV
1 SG
FAULT CODE 29
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
**
FAULT CODE 31
The ECU voltage is too high.
The ECU does not work.
Start the engine and bring to 1200 rpm; is Repair the recharging system is the voltage
NO
the battery voltage ∼ 14V? reading is too high.
YES
27161
FAULT CODE 33
The wiring on the lowering limit potentiometer (3) is in short to +12V (power supply).
The rear lift (EDC) does not work, but allows the implement hitch to be caught by means of the lowering
limit potentiometer at the maximum value.

(135) on the ECU. Check the wiring and eliminate the
Measure the voltage between pin CN2--22 (AN) on Does the fault persist?
connection (135) and ground. YES
YES
Replace the ECU.
25583
FAULT CODE 33
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 34
The wiring on the lowering limit potentiometer (3) is disconnected or in short to ground or the potentiome-
ter is faulty.
The rear lift (EDC) does not work, but allows the implement hitch to be caught by means of the lowering
limit potentiometer at the maximum value

Remove the lift control panel. NO Connect wires or connections.
Are wires and the relative connections connected?
YES

Is there electrical continuity between pin (5) (AN) NO
on connection (94) on the lift control panel and
CN2--22 (AN) on connection (135)?
YES

YES
Replace the ECU.
0.5 AB (1)
0.5 H (2)
0.5 HG (3)
0.5 A (4)
94
0.5 AN (5)
0.5 VB (6)
0.5 N (7)
25583
0.5 GN (8)
FAULT CODE 34
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 35
The maximum raise limit potentiometer (1) is not turned fully clockwise. This fault can be displayed during
lift arms calibration (FAULT 24).
The rear lift (EDC) does not work, therefore the lift arms mechanical stroke cannot be calibrated.
Is the maximum raise limit potentiometer turned Turn the potentiometer fully clockwi-
NO
fully clockwise? se.
YES

YES

YES
Replace the ECU.
25583
FAULT CODE 36
The lowering limit potentiometer (3) is not turned fully clockwise. This fault can be displayed during lift
arms calibration (FAULT 24).
Is the lowering limit potentiometer turned fully Turn the potentiometer fully clockwi-
NO
clockwise? se.
YES

YES

YES
Replace the ECU.
25583
FAULT CODE 37
The mixed control potentiometer (4) is not turned fully clockwise. This fault can be displayed during lift
arms calibration (FAULT 24).
Is the mixed control potentiometer turned fully Turn the mixed control potentiometer
NO
counter-clockwise? fully counter-clockwise.
YES

YES

YES
Replace the ECU.
25583
FAULT CODE 38
The tractor speed sensor (Aa) wiring is in short to ground.
The ECU sets the tractor speed to 0 km/h, therefore any faults on the lift control external switches are not read.
Turn the starter key to the OFF position. (Only for tractors without POWER SHUT-
Lift the engine bonnet and disconnect TLE).
connection (171). Remove the control panel and the connec-
Using a digital tester, measure the electri- NO NO
cal resistance (transmission side) betwe- Is pin CN2--36 (HR) (wiring side) in short to
en pin (B3) (HB) and ground. ground?
Is pin (B3) (HB) in short to ground?
YES
YES
Remove the rear left-hand wheel. the short to ground.
Check the tractor speed sensor wiring and
eliminate the cause of the short to ground
on wire (HB).
Replace the ECU.
FAULT CODE 38
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
**
FAULT CODE 39
The lift external switches (1) are simultaneously pressed in the raising and lowering positions or the rapid
raise/lower (2) (in cab) switch is activated whilst the lift external switches are operating.
The lift external switches will not work until the external switches are released.

Disconnect the lift external switches (1). NO Replace the switches.
Using a digital tester, check the switches.
Do they work?
YES

Are the wires on pin CN2--5 (C) and pin CN2--6 (B)
in short?
YES

short circuit.
B
26590
FAULT CODE 39
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 41
The lift solenoid valve (R) is in short to +12V (power supply) or the ECU is faulty.

Between pin CN1--16 (GV) on connection (135)
and ground, is the reading +12V?
YES
Check the wiring between: CN1--16 (GV), pin (B8)

(GV) on connection (171) and the lifting control so-
lenoid valve (R).
FAULT CODE 41
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
**
FAULT CODE 42
The lowering solenoid valve (L) is in short to +12V (power supply) or the ECU is faulty.

Between pin CN1--17 (RV) on connection (135)
YES
Check the wiring between: CN1--17 (RV), pin (B1)

(RV) on connection (171) and the lowering control
solenoid valve (L).
FAULT CODE 42
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
**
FAULT CODE 43
One of the two lift external switches (1) is in short to +12V (power supply).
This fault can only be displayed when the tractor is moving.
The rear lift (EDC) cannot be operated by means of the external switches.

Disconnect both the lift external switches (1).
Using a digital tester, check the efficiency of the NO Replace the faulty switch.
switches.
Do they work?
YES

Between pin CN2--6 (B) on connection (135) (wi-
ring side) and ground, is the reading +12V?
YES

short to +12V.
B
26590
FAULT CODE 43
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 44
The draft sensor power supply voltage (1) exceeds +8V.
The rear lift (EDC) does not work, but it can be operated by means of the lift external switches.

(135) on the ECU. Turn the starter key to the OFF posi-
Turn the starter key to the ON position. NO tion.
Between pin CN2--35 (Z) on connection (135) (wi- Replace the ECU.
ring side) and ground, is the reading ∼ 12V?
YES

Check the wiring between: CN2--35 (Z), pin (C7)
(Z) on connection (171) and the draft sensor.
27184
1
FAULT CODE 44
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
**
FAULT CODE 45
The draft sensor wiring (1) is in short to ground or the ECU is faulty.

Remove the rear right-hand wheel. NO Replace the draft sensor.
Disconnect connection (98) on the draft sensor.
YES
Is wire (Z) in short to ground?
YES Replace the ECU.
Check the wiring: between the draft sensor, pin
(C7) (Z) on connection (171) and pin CN2--35 (Z)
on connection (135).
98
27184
1
FAULT CODE 45
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
**
FAULT CODE 46
One of the two lowering external switches (1) is in short to +12V (power supply).
This fault can only be displayed when the tractor is moving.
The rear lift (EDC) cannot be operated by means of the external switches.

Disconnect both the lift external switches.
Using a digital tester, check the efficiency of the NO Replace the faulty switch.
switches.
Do they work?
YES

(135) on the ECU.
Between pin CN2--5 (C) on connection (135) and
NO Replace the ECU.
ground, is the reading +12V?
YES

short to +12V.
B
26590
FAULT CODE 46
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 47
The arms descent speed potentiometer (2) is not turned fully clockwise. This fault can be displayed during
lift arms calibration (FAULT 24).
Is the arms descent speed potentiometer turned

NO Turn the potentiometer fully clockwise.
fully clockwise?
YES

YES

YES
Replace the ECU.
25583
FAULT CODE 49
The tractor speed sensor (Aa) is disconnected or the relative wiring is interrupted.
The ECU sets the tractor speed to 0 km/h, therefore any faults on the lift control external switches are
not read.

connection (171). Remove the rear left-hand wheel.
Using a digital tester, measure the electri- NO Is the connection or the tractor speed sen- NO
cal resistance (transmission side) betwe- sor wiring connected?
en pin (B2) (N) and (B3) (HB). YES
YES Disconnect the tractor speed sensor con-
nection. NO
Remove the control panel and the con- Is the electrical resistance on the sensor ∼
nections (135) on the ECU. (Only for trac- 700 Ω?
tors without POWER SHUTTLE). YES
CN2--36 (HR) on connection (135) with NO Check the electrical continuity between the
pin (B3) (HB) on connection (171)? sensor connection and connection (168) on
YES the following wires:
wire (N) with pin (B2) on (171);
Replace the ECU. wire (HB) with pin (B3) on (171).
Check the wiring and eliminate the cause Replace the tractor speed sensor.
of the open circuit.
FAULT CODE 49
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
**
FAULT CODE 53
The power supply voltage on the sensors (+5V) is too high.

Between pin CN2--20 (AB) on connection (135) Replace the ECU.
(wiring side) and ground, is the reading ∼ 12V?
YES

Check the wiring between: pin CN2--20 (AB), pin
(A6) (AB) on connection (171) and the lift arms po-
sition potentiometer.
YES

(3) (AB) on connection (28) on the working depth
potentiometer and pin (1) (AB) on connection (94)
on the lift control panel.
0.5 AB (1) 0.5 M (1)

0.5 H (2) 0.5 LG (2)
0.5 HG (3) 0.5 AB (3)
0.5 A (4) 0.5 VB (4)
28
94
0.5 AN (5) 0.5 LN (5)
0.5 VB (6) 0.5 N (6)
0.5 N (7) 0.5 GN (7)
0.5 GN (8) 0.5 HL (8)
FAULT CODE 53
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
**
FAULT CODE 54
The power supply voltage on the sensors (+5V) is in short to ground.

Is pin CN2--20 (AB) on connection (135) in short Replace the ECU.
circuit to ground?
YES

YES

on the lift control panel.
0.5 AB (1) 0.5 M (1)

0.5 H (2) 0.5 LG (2)
0.5 HG (3) 0.5 AB (3)
0.5 A (4) 0.5 VB (4)
28
94
0.5 AN (5) 0.5 LN (5)
0.5 VB (6) 0.5 N (6)
0.5 N (7) 0.5 GN (7)
0.5 GN (8) 0.5 HL (8)
FAULT CODE 54
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
**
FAULT CODE 63
The arms lowering solenoid valve (L) wiring is disconnected or the solenoid valve coil is faulty, or the wiring
is in short to ground.

Is connection (101) on the lowering con- Connect the wires and/or the connection on
trol solenoid valve (L) (left) and the relati- NO
the lowering solenoid valve.
ve wiring connected?
YES
Disconnect connection (101) on the lowe-

ring control solenoid valve. NO Replace the lowering solenoid valve coil.
Is the coil resistance ∼ 8 Ω ?
YES
Remove the control panel and the con-

nections (135) on the ECU. Is there electrical continuity on the following
Check the connection on the lowering so- wires between the solenoid valve connec-
lenoid valve. NO tion and connection (171): NO
Are wires: (RV) and (SG) connected to wire (RV) and pin (B1) on (171) (RV);
ground? wire (SG) and pin (A8) on (171)(SG)?
YES YES
Check the wiring and eliminate the cause Is there electrical continuity on the following
of the ground reference. wires between connection (171) and con-
nection (135): NO
(171) pin (A8) (SG) and pin CN1--3 (135);
(171) pin (B1) (RV) and pin CN1--17 (135)?
YES
Replace the ECU.

the open circuit.
1 RV
1 SG
FAULT CODE 63
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
**
FAULT CODE 64
The wiring on the lift arms solenoid valve (R) is disconnected or the solenoid valve coil is faulty or the wiring
is in short to ground.

Is connection (100) on the lifting control Connect the wires and/or the connection on
NO
solenoid valve (R) (right) and the relative the lift solenoid valve.
wiring connected?
YES
Disconnect connection (100) on the lifting

control solenoid valve. NO Replace the raising solenoid valve coil.
Is the coil resistance ∼ 8 Ω ?
YES
Remove the control panel and the con-

nections (135) on the ECU. Is there electrical continuity on the following
Check connection (100) on the lift sole- wires between the solenoid valve connec-
noid valve. NO tion and connection (171): NO
Are wires (GV) and (GR) connected to wire (GV) and pin (B8) on (171) (GV);
ground? wire (GR) and pin (C8) on (171) (GR)?
YES YES
Check the wiring and eliminate the cause Is there electrical continuity on the following
of the ground reference. wires between connection (171) and con-
nection (135):
(171) pin (B8) (GV) and pin CN1--16 (135); NO
(171) pin (C8) (GR) and pin CN1--4 (135)?
YES
Replace the ECU.

the open circuit.
1 GV
1 GR
FAULT CODE 64
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
**
FAULT CODE 65
The wiring on the arms lowering solenoid valve (L) is in short or the solenoid valve is faulty.

Disconnect connection (101) on the lowering con-
trol solenoid valve (L) (left). NO
Check the solenoid valve coil and
Using a digital tester, measure the electrical resi- replace if in short.
stance of the coil.
YES
Are wires (SG) and (RV) on connection (101) on Replace the ECU.
NO
the lowering control solenoid valve in short circuit?
YES

solenoid valve, pins (A8) (SG) and (B1) (RV) on
connection (171), pins CN1--3 (SG) and CN1--17
(RV) on connection (135).
YES
1 RV
1 SG
FAULT CODE 65
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
**
FAULT CODE 66
The wiring on the arms lift solenoid valve (R) is in short or the solenoid valve is faulty.

Disconnect connection (100) on the lifting control
solenoid valve (right). Check the solenoid valve coil and
NO
Using a digital tester, measure the electrical resi- replace if in short.
stance of the coil.
YES
Are wires (GV) and (GR) on connection (100) on Replace the ECU.
NO
the lifting control solenoid valve in short circuit?
YES

solenoid valve, pins (B8) (GV) and (C8) (GR) on
connection (171), pins CN1--16 (GV) and CN1--4
(GR) on connection (135).
YES
1 GV
1 GR
FAULT CODE 66
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
**
FAULT CODE 67
The ECU power supply voltage is too low.
Recharge and/or replace the battery

Is the battery voltage ∼ +12V? NO
or check the recharging system.
YES

(135) on the ECU. Check the power supply wiring on the
Turn the starter key to the ON position. NO ECU and eliminate the cause of the
Using a digital tester, measure the voltage on pin drop in voltage.
CN2--10 (MV) on connection (135).
Is the value > 10V?
YES
Replace the ECU.
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 68
The ECU is faulty or there is a power supply failure.

Check the wiring and the power sup-
NO ply connection on the ECU and elimi-
(135) on the ECU.
nate the cause of the failed power
supply.
Between pin CN1--15 on connection (135) (MV)
YES
Replace the ECU.
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 81
(Only pre-modified tractors)
The coil on the solenoid valve of the differential lock is in short circuit to +12V (power supply) or the ECU
is faulty.
The rear lift (EDC) does not work, but the implement hitch can only be caught if the differential lock is in
“automatic” mode.

(135) on the ECU.
Turn the starter key to the ON position. NO Replace the ECU.
Between pin CN1--18 (AR) on connection (135)
YES
Check the wiring up to the solenoid valve and elimi-

nate the short to +12V.
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 82
The coil on the solenoid valve of the differential lock is faulty.

Remove the rear left-hand wheel.
Disconnect the differential lock solenoid valve con-
Check the solenoid valve coil and
nection (62). NO
replace if in short.
Using a digital tester, measure the electrical resi-
stance of the coil.
YES
Is wire (AR) on connection (62) on the solenoid val- Replace the ECU.
NO
ve in short circuit to ground?
YES
Check the wiring and eliminate the ground referen-

ce.
YES
FAULT CODE 83
The wiring on the solenoid valve coil of the differential lock is disconnected or in short circuit to ground or the
ECU is faulty.
The differential lock does not work.

Remove the rear left-hand wheel. Connect the connection on the sole-
NO
Is connection (62) on the differential lock solenoid noid valve.
valve connected?
YES
Disconnect connection (62) on the solenoid valve.

Using a digital tester, measure the electrical resi- Replace the solenoid valve coil if in-
NO
stance of the coil. terrupted.
YES
Is wire (AR) in short to ground? NO Replace the ECU.

YES
Check the wiring and eliminate the ground referen-

ce.
YES
FAULT CODE 84
The differential lock switch (88A) is faulty or the wiring is in short circuit.
The differential lock does not work.

Disconnect the differential lock switch wiring and,
NO Replace switch.
using a digital tester, check the switch.
Does it work?
YES

(135) on the ECU. Are wires: (R) pin CN2--1 (1) and NO Replace the ECU.
(GR) pin CN2--32 on connection (135) in short cir-
cuit.
YES

short circuit.
88A
FAULT CODE 84
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 85
The rapid raise/lower switch (88) on the rear lift (EDC) is faulty or the relative wiring is in short.

Disconnect the wiring on the raise/lower switch Replace switch.
NO
(88) and, using a digital tester, check the switch.
Does it work?
YES

Are wires: (SN) pin CN2--7 and (S) pin CN2--31 on
NO Replace the ECU.
connection (135) both at +12V in relation to
ground?
YES

short circuit.
88
0.5 GN
FAULT CODE 85
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 86

Disconnect the wiring on the raise/lower switch NO Replace switch.
Does it work?
YES

Are wires: (BR) pin CN2--25 and (S) pin CN2--31 on NO Replace the ECU.
connection (135) in short circuit to +12V?
YES

short circuit.
88
0.5 GN
FAULT CODE 86
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 87

Disconnect the wiring on the raise/lower switch NO Replace switch.
Does it work?
YES

Are wires: (BR) pin CN2--25 and (SN) pin CN2--7 NO Replace the ECU.
on connection (135) in short circuit to +12V?
YES

short circuit.
88
0.5 GN
FAULT CODE 87
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 88
The ECU is faulty.
27161
FAULT CODE 91
The rapid raise/lower switch (88) on the rear lift (EDC) is faulty or the relative wiring is disconnected.
The rear lift (EDC) does not work, but the lift can be operated by means of the external switches.

Remove the rapid raise/lower switch (88). NO Connect the wiring.
Is the relative wiring connected?
YES
Turn the starter key to the ON position. Check and/or replace the fuse or
Is there a +12V reading between wire (LG) and NO check the wiring and eliminate the
ground? cause of the open circuit.
YES

Disconnect the rapid raise/lower switch connection NO Replace switch.
Does it work?
YES

(135) on the ECU.
wires on the switch connection (88) and on con- NO Check the wiring and eliminate the
nection (135)? cause of the open circuit.
(88) pin (4) (S) and pin CN2--31 (S) (135);
(88) pin (6) (SN) and pin CN2--7 (SN) (135);
(88) pin (1) (BR) and pin CN2--25 (BR) (135).
YES
Replace the ECU.
88
0.5 GN
FAULT CODE 91
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 95
The raising (R) and lowering (L) solenoid valves are not calibrated.
The rear lift (EDC) works but the fault continues to be displayed.
After use of the H8 MENU (cancelling the data in the memory), ECU replacement and hydraulic control valve
replacement, the solenoid valves must be calibrated.
For calibration operations, see the H1 MENU, pages 48, 49 and 50.
H1
H
MENU
27334
FRONT/REAR ELECTRONIC LIFT ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT
INPUT/OUTPUT WIRING DIAGRAM
1 Starter switch.
2 Engine oil pressure indicator light.
3 Indicator signal: front lift blocked/alarm.
4 Rear lift blocked indicator signal.
5 Rear lift alarm indicator signal.
6 Front lift raising limit.
7 Front lift lowering limit.
8 Front lift arms position sensor potentiometer.
9 Raising control solenoid valve (rear lift).
10 Lowering control solenoid valve (rear lift).
11 Raising control solenoid valve (front lift).
12 Lowering control solenoid valve (front lift).
13 Engine revs counter (from alternator) (to disable the front lift).
14 Speed sensor.
15 Digital control panel speed signal output.
16 Draft sensor.
17 Bodywork ground.
18 Sensor ground.
19 Power ground.
21 Pushbutton Y.
22 Pushbutton B.
25 RH brake pressure switch (to access stored faults).
26 LH brake pressure switch (to access stored faults).
27 Rear lift external controls switches (a. raise -- b. lower).
28 Rear lift raise-lower-float control switch (a. raise -- b. work -- c. float function).
29 Front lift raise-lower control switch (a. raise -- b. work).
30 Engine oil pressure sensor switch (to disable rear lift).
31 Draft-position selection potentiometer.
32 Lift arms descent speed selection potentiometer.
33 Working depth selection potentiometer.
34 Lift arms position sensor potentiometer.
35 Rear lift lowering limit.
36 Rear lift raise limit.
37 Sensors power supply (+5V).
38 Battery.
FRONT/REAR ELECTRONIC LIFT ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT INPUT/OUTPUT WIRING DIAGRAM
37 4
36 5
1
35
34
38
33
6
32
7
31 8
6÷8
9
6÷8
30 10
a
b 6
29 a 11
b
c 6
28
a 12
13
b
27
680
14
15
24 26
16
23 25
21
22 20 19 18 17
MPD2818A
Chapter 6 -- Trailer Brake Control Valves
CONTENTS

Functional Testing and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
33 220 40 Trailer Brake Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
The trailer brake valve, which has priority over both The trailer brakes installed on ITALIA versions have
the auxiliary control valves and the hydraulic lift, is the advantage that they brake the trailer even when
mounted on a support and secured on the front the tractor engine is not running, and also when the
right-hand side of the engine, is controlled by the lift pump is faulty or produces an inadequate oil flow.
control pump. The operation is described on pages 5, 6, 7 and 8.
The hydraulic operation is described on pages 3 and
4.
Cross-sectional view of auxiliary control valve for

trailer braking. (Open-centre circuit).
1. Check valve
2. Pilot valve body.
3. Flow control valve
4. Pilot valve piston.
5. Pressure limiter.
6. Spool.
1
TRAILER BRAKES OFF -- With the trailer brakes off,
the oil from the hydrostatic circuit connected to the
control valve by union (Y) is not pressurised and
therefore the piston (5) of the pilot valve (6) and the
spool (7) are in the rest positions indicated in fig. 2.
The oil from the hydraulic pump arrives at the union

(P1), passing through the diaphragm (1) and the
pressure in the restriction (3) drops, thereby causing
the flow control element (2) to shift to the right.
The majority of the oil flows through the port (N) to the
auxiliary control valves, while the rest of the oil is
discharged to the hydraulic lift through the line (4),
the spool (7) and the port (R).
Pressurised oil
Oil in suction, delivery or return 2
Static oil Trailer brakes off.

N. To the auxiliary control valves.
Tractor brake circuit oil (brakes off)
P1. From the hydraulic pump to the lift circuit.
Pressurised tractor brake circuit oil R. To the lift return line.
Y. From the tractor brakes.
START OF BRAKING -- On operating the tractor

brake pedals, the oil of the hydrostatic circuit in port
(Y) is pressurised and thus shifts the piston (7) to the
left, the pressure limiter (6) and the spool (8) which
closes the passage between the oil return port (R),
trailer brake port (B) and the line (5).
The oil inside the flow control valve (4) is maintained

at a uniform pressure, allowing the valve element,
under the action of the spring, shifts to the left to
assume the position indicated in fig. 3.
Part of the oil from the hydraulic pump in port (P1)

flows to the auxiliary control valves through port (N),
while the remaining part arrives at the tractor braking
element via the diaphragm (2), line (3), check valve
(1) and port (B).
3
As the pressure of the oil in the trailer brake port (B)
Start of braking.
increases, it acts on the active surface (9) of the spool
(8), opposing the pressure applied on piston (7) by B. To the trailer brake.
the oil in the hydrostatic tractor brake circuit. N. To the auxiliary control valves.
P1. From the hydraulic pump to the lift circuit.
R. To the return line in the lift.
BRAKING -- If the driver continues to operate the
tractor brake pedals, the pressure of the oil in the
trailer brake port (B) increase and acts on the active
surface (10) of the spool (9), and overcomes the
resistance of the springs (7) of the pressure limiter
(8), to shift the spool to the right.
When the pressure in the trailer brake circuit

balances the pressure exerted by the springs (7), the
spool (9) stabilises in the position indicated in fig. 4
opening the passage connecting the oil from the
pump with the hydraulic lift return line through port
(P1), the diaphragm (2), restriction (5), line (6) and
the port (R).
The diaphragm (2) and the restriction (5) cause a Braking.

drop in the pressure of the oil circulating in the flow B. To the trailer brake.
control valve (4), thus shifting the valve element to P1. From the hydraulic pump to the lift circuit.
the right to close passage (3) and consequently the
R. To the return line in the lift.
check valve (1).
Further pressure on the tractor brake pedals shifts Pressurised oil

the piston (7, fig. 3), the pressure limiter (8) and the
Oil in suction, delivery or return
spool (2) to the left, thus causing an increase in the
trailer brake circuit pressure, repeating the stages Static oil
described in the paragraph START OF BRAKING.
Pressurised tractor brake circuit oil
If the pressure in the trailer brake circuit increases as

a result of external causes, the spool (9) shifts rapidly
to open the passage connecting the trailer brake port
(B) and the lift return port (R), thus maintaining a
perfect balance between the oil pressure in the
braking circuit and the force exerted by the springs
(7) of the pressure limiter.
On releasing the tractor brake pedals, the pressure

in port (Y) drops and the conditions illustrated in fig.
2 are restored.
Oil in suction or
delivery
Discharge oil
Tractor brake circuit
oil (brakes off)
Oil at trailer brake
release pressure
5
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC OPERATION OF TRAILER BRAKE VALVE (ITALIA VERSION)
Engine running - no action on brake pedals
1. Parking brake lever -- 2. Relay -- parking brake warning light circuit -- 3. Relay -- trailer brake circuit -- 4. Trailer brake control
solenoid valves -- 5a. Delivery solenoid valve (normally open) -- 5b. Return solenoid valve (normally closed) -- 6. Trailer brake
release pressure control valve -- 7. Trailer brake valve (see pages 3 and 4) -- 8. Trailer brake circuit safety switch -- 9. Hydraulic
pump -- 10. Filter -- 11. Service brake lines -- 12. Delivery lines to auxiliary control valve and hydraulic lift -- 13. Service brakes
pump -- 14. Tractor--trailer coupling -- 15. Trailer brake line -- 16. Trailer brake “ON” indicator switch -- 17 and 19. Springs --
18. Trailer brake control spool -- 20. Battery -- 21. Parking brake “ON” indicator switch -- 22. Trailer brake “ON” warning light.
Oil from the hydraulic pump (9) arrives at the trailer brake valve (7), from where the majority is sent through line (12), to the
auxiliary control valves and the hydraulic lift. A small amount of oil reaches valve (6), where it is discharged in order to maintain
the pressure at a level of 11 to 12 bar (11.2 to 12.2 kg/cm2). Oil at the pressure of 11 to 12 bar (11.2 to 12.2 kg/cm2), flows
from the trailer brake valve through solenoid valve (5a), line (15) and coupling (14) to arrive at the trailer brake. This pressure
level is required to overcome the resistance of the spring (19) and move the relative spring cap. At the same time, spring (17)
shifts the piston (18) to prevent any braking action on the trailer.
Warning -- On starting the engine, in order to reduce the length of time required to bring the circuit up to the
pressure required to release the trailer brake, with the parking brake lever lowered, operate the brake pedals
(make sure that they are linked together). Once the trailer brake is released the warning light (22) will be switched
off.
Oil in suction or delivery
Discharge oil
Oil in tractor brake circuit (under pressure)
Oil at tractor brake release pressure
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC OPERATION OF TRAILER BRAKE VALVE

(ITALIA VERSION)
Engine running - brake pedals pressed
A. Line connecting brake pump (13) to trailer brake valve (7) -- 1. Parking brake lever -- 2. Relay -- parking brake
warning light circuit -- 3. Relay -- trailer brake circuit -- 4. Trailer brake control solenoid valves -- 5a. Delivery
solenoid valve (normally open) -- 5b. Return solenoid valve (normally closed) -- 6. Trailer brake release pressure
control valve -- 7. Trailer brake valve (see pages 3 and 4) -- 8. Trailer brake circuit safety switch -- 9. Hydraulic
pump -- 10. Filter -- 11. Service brake lines -- 12. Delivery lines to auxiliary control valve and hydraulic lift -- 13.
Service brakes pump -- 14. Tractor-trailer coupling -- 15. Trailer brake line -- 16. Trailer brake “ON” indicator switch
-- 17 and 19. Springs -- 18. Trailer brake control spool -- 20. Battery -- 21. Parking brake “ON” indicator switch
-- 22. Trailer brake “ON” warning light.
On operating the brake pedals, the pressure generated in line (A), closes the valve (6) return port (R) and
consequently the pressure in the delivery line from the pump (9) increase. The pressurised oil (12 to 150 bar --
12.2 to 153 kg/cm2) flows out of the trailer brake valve (7) through line (B) to solenoid valve (5a), which is open,
and through line (15) to the trailer brake, where it overcomes the resistance of the springs (17 and 19) to shift
the piston (18) and thus brake the trailer.
Discharge oil

(ITALIA VERSION)
Engine either stopped or running but with insufficient flow from hydraulic pump
1. Parking brake lever -- 2. Relay -- parking brake warning light circuit -- 3. Relay -- trailer brake circuit -- 4. Trailer
brake control solenoid valves -- 5a. Delivery solenoid valve (normally open) -- 5b. Return solenoid valve (normally
closed) -- 6. Trailer brake release pressure control valve -- 7. Trailer brake valve (see pages 3 and 4) -- 8. Trailer
brake circuit safety switch -- 9. Hydraulic pump -- 10. Filter -- 11. Service brake lines -- 12. Delivery lines to auxiliary
control valve and hydraulic lift -- 13. Service brakes pump -- 14. Tractor-trailer coupling -- 15. Trailer brake line
-- 16. Trailer brake “ON” indicator switch -- 17 and 19. Springs -- 18. Trailer brake control spool -- 20. Battery --
21. Parking brake “ON” indicator switch -- 22. Trailer brake “ON” warning light.
When the engine is stopped, or running but with insufficient flow from the hydraulic pump (9), the oil pressure
at the trailer brake valve (7) is either too low or non-existent, and this condition causes the safety switch to close
(8). The closure of switch (8) allows electrical current to energise relay (3), which closes the circuit to the solenoid
valves (5a and 5b), thereby closing the former and opening the latter. In this condition, the oil in the trailer brake
and line (15), under the action of spring (19), is discharged through solenoid valve (5b), and the braking action
is obtained mechanically by the pressure of spring (19) on piston (18). The pressure drop caused by the oil
discharging allows switch (16) to close and thereby allow current to reach and illuminate warning light (22) on
the control panel.
Discharge oil

(ITALIA VERSION)
Engine running - with parking brake on
1. Parking brake lever -- 2. Relay -- parking brake warning light circuit -- 3. Relay -- trailer brake circuit -- 4. Trailer
brake control solenoid valves -- 5a. Delivery solenoid valve (normally open) -- 5b. Return solenoid valve (normally
closed) -- 6. Trailer brake release pressure control valve -- 7. Trailer brake valve (see pages 3 and 4) -- 8. Trailer
brake circuit safety switch -- 9. Hydraulic pump -- 10. Filter -- 11. Service brake lines -- 12. Delivery lines to auxiliary
control valve and hydraulic lift -- 13. Service brakes pump -- 14. Tractor-trailer coupling -- 15. Trailer brake line
-- 16. Trailer brake “ON” indicator switch -- 17 and 19. Springs -- 18. Trailer brake control spool -- 20. Battery --
21. Parking brake “ON” indicator switch -- 22. Trailer brake “ON” warning light.
On applying the parking brake (1), switch (21) is closed. This allows electrical current to energise relay (2), which
closes the circuit to the solenoid valves (5a and 5b), thereby closing the former and opening the latter. In this
condition, the oil in the trailer brake and line (15), under the action of spring (19), is discharged through solenoid
valve (5b), and the braking action is obtained mechanically by the pressure of spring (19) on piston (18). The
pressure drop caused by the oil discharging allows switch (16) to close and thereby allow current to reach and
illuminate warning light (22) on the control panel.
Warning -- After applying the parking brake, wait approximately 10 seconds before shutting off the engine, in
order to allow all the oil to be discharged from the trailer brake cylinder and thus obtaining optimum braking.
FUNCTIONAL TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Test conditions
Oil temperature 40o
to 50o
C. Electrical system powered.
Engine speed: 1000 rpm. Parking brake off.
Trailer brake release pressure test
Proceed as follows:
1. Attach coupling 293190 (1) to the trailer brake
and connect to the pressure gauge with scale 0
to 40 kg/cm2 from kit 292870.
2. With the engine running at the prescribed
speed and the oil at the prescribed tempera-
ture, the pressure should be 11 to 12 bar (11.2
to 12.2 kg/cm 2 ).
3. Check that the warning light (22, fig. 8) is not illu-
minated.
4. Apply the parking brake and disconnect the pres-
25751
sure gauge and coupling 293190 (1).
9
TROUBLESHOOTING
Trailer brake release pressure = 0 1. Parking brake (1, fig. 8) on. Release parking brake.
bar (warning light 22, fig. 8
illuminated).
2. Trailer brake release pressure Replace the valve.
control valve (6) incorrectly ad-
justed.
3. Trailer brake circuit safety Replace switch.
switch (8) faulty.
4. Hydraulic pump (9) faulty. Overhaul or replace hydraulic
pump.
5. Delivery line solenoid valve (5a) Free or replace the solenoid valve.
locked in closed position.
6. Discharge line solenoid valve Free or replace the solenoid valve.
(5b) locked in open position.
Trailer brake release pressure 0 1. Trailer brake release pressure Replace the valve.
to 11 bar (0 to 11.2 kg/cm2). control valve (6) incorrectly ad-
justed.
Trailer brake release pressure 1. Trailer brake warning light Replace switch.
correct, but warning light (22) switch (16) faulty.
illuminated.
Trailer brake release pressure 1. Warning light (22) bulb faulty. Replace bulb.
incorrect, but warning light (22)
not illuminated.
2. Trailer brake warning light Replace switch.
switch (16) faulty.
NOTE: The switch (8) can be identified by the red paint mark between the two terminals.
Testing the setting of the trailer brake system pressure control valve incorporated in the trailer brake
control valve
Proceed as follows:
coupling, connect to the pressure gauge with 0 to
250 kg/cm2 from kit 292870.
2. With the engine and the oil in the test conditions de-
scribed at the beginning of the chapter, apply a force
of 30 to 35 daN (29.4 to 34,3 kg/cm2) to the service
brake pedals; the pressure reading on the gauge
should be 135 to 145 bar (138 to 148 to kg/cm2).
25751
10
TROUBLESHOOTING
Pressure above or below 1. Pressure control valve (6, fig. 8) Replace trailer brake control
prescribed range. of trailer brake system faulty. valve.
2. Hydraulic pump (9) faulty. Replace the pump.
Testing the hydraulic system for leakage
Proceed as follows:
coupling, connect to the pressure gauge with
scale 0 to 250 kg/cm2 of kit 292870.
2. With the engine and the oil in the test conditions
described at the beginning of the chapter, apply
a force of 30 to 35 daN (29.4 to 34.3 kg/cm2) to
the service brake pedals; the pressure reading
on the gauge should be 135 to 145 bar (138 to
148 to kg/cm2).
25751
11
TROUBLESHOOTING
on applying the prescribed force 1. Oil leaks in the hydraulic sys- Find and eliminate the leaks.
on the service brake pedals, there tem.
are an excessive number of
pressure peaks over a 10 second
period.
2. Excessive leakage from the Replace solenoid valve.
solenoid valve (5b, fig. 8).
3. Excessive leakage from trailer Replace trailer brake control
brake control valve (7). valve.
Checking that trailer brake release pressure is nullified when the parking brake is applied
Proceed as follows:
2. With the engine and the oil in the test conditions
described at the beginning of the chapter, pull the
parking brake lever (1, fig. 8) fully upwards.
3. Check that the pressure is 0 bar and that warning
light (22, fig. 8) is illuminated.
4. With the parking brake applied, disconnect the
pressure gauge and coupling 293190 (1).
25751
12
TROUBLESHOOTING
When the parking brake is 1. Parking brake switch (21, fig. 8) Replace switch.
applied the trailer brake release faulty.
pressure is not nullified.
2. Parking brake indicator relay Replace the relay.
(2) faulty.
3. Discharge line solenoid valve Free or replace the solenoid valve.
(5b) locked in closed position or
faulty.
Controlling the switches (8 and 16, fig. 8)
Proceed as follows:
2. Without applying the service and parking brakes,
operate the control lever of an auxiliary control
(until the corresponding pressure relief valve is
activated), hold this position for a few seconds
then suddenly release the control lever.
3. Check that the parking brake release pressure
remains at the prescribed level of: 11 to 12 bar
(11.2 to 12.2 kg/cm2).
25751
sure gauge and the coupling 293190 (1). 13
TROUBLESHOOTING
On carrying out the operation 1. Trailer brake circuit safety Replace switch.
described above, the trailer brake switch (8, fig. 8) setting higher
release pressure is nullified than the nominal pressure (3 to
permanently. ± 0.5 bar).
2. Switches (8 and 16) installed in Install the two switches in their
incorrect positions, or electrical correct positions or swap over the
leads connected incorrectly. electrical power leads.
NOTE: Switch (8) can be identified by the red paint mark between the two terminals.
OVERHAUL
OP. 33 220 40
TRAILER BRAKE VALVE
Removal
WARNING
Wear suitable safety clothing - safety goggles, gloves
and shoes.
1. Position a container (3) to collect the oil dis-

charged from the system pipes.
2. Disconnect the pipes (1) connected to the trailer

brake valve.
3. Remove the two trailer brake valve retaining

bolts (2). 27890
14
4. Disconnect the trailer brake valve (1).
Installation
WARNING
27891
15
Proceed as follows.
5. Fit the trailer brake valve (1, fig. 15) and secure
in position with the two retaining bolts (3, fig. 14),
refit the pipes (2) connected to the valve and re-
move the container (1).
Chapter 7 -- Electronic Lift and Front Power Take-Off
CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Front Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Front Power Take-Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Front Lift Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
31 140 30 Front PTO Transmission Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
31 140 34 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
31 140 43 Front Power Take-Off Electromagnetic Coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
31 140 46 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
31 162 52 Front Lift Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Front Power Take-Off Fault Codes and Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Calibrating the Front PTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
HH Menu Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
H8 -- Deleting Data From the Non-Volatile Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
HD -- FWD Engagement Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

First Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Fault Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
ECU Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Calibrating the Front Electronic Lift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Connecting the Calibration and Diagnostic Unit (CDU) to the Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Electronically Controlled Front Lift Fault Code Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
HH Menu Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
H8 -- Cancellation of the Data Stored in the Non-Volatile Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
H9 -- Voltmeter Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
HA -- Rear Lift Arms Position Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
HB -- Front Lift Arms Position Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
First Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Fault Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
ECU Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Front PTO and FWD Electronic Control Unit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Front/Rear Electronic Lift ECU Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
SPECIFICATIONS
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in position control
Lift lowering and raising adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . using the knobs (11) and (12,
fig. 8) located on the
multi-indicator panel
Raising and lowering pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . allows fast lifting/lowering
operations using push buttons,
(3, fig. 8), without using knobs
(11) and (12)
Front lift function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . is controlled by the same ECU
as the rear lift
Single-acting cylinder:
-- rated diameter and stroke: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 55 x 110 (2.16 x 4.33)
-- rod diameter: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 25 (9.84)
-- capacity: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm3 207
Working pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bar (psi) 190 (2755)
Maximum pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bar (psi) 250 (3626)
(continued)
MAIN SPECIFICATIONS OF ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED FRONT LIFT
(cont.)
Diameter of arm lifting shaft (14, fig. 4) in relation to bushings . . . . . . . mm (in.) 34.936 to 34.975
(1.3754 to 1.3769)
Internal diameter of bushings (15) fitted on lift body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 35.140 to 35.180
(1.3834 to 1.3850 )
External diameter of bushings (15) fitted on lift body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 40.060 to 40.090
(1.5771 to 1.5783 )
Clearance between lifting arm shaft (14) and relative bushings . . . . . . . mm (in.) 0.165 to 0.244
(0.0064 to 0.0096)
Bushing seat diameter (15) in support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 40.000 to 40.025
(1.5748 to 1.5757)
Interference between bushings (15) and relative seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 0.035 to 0.090
(0.0013 to 0.0035)
Endfloat between lifting arm shaft and support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 1.8 to 2.2 (0.070 to 0.086)
Power take-off mechanical engagement return spring (10, fig. 7):
-- Spring length under load of 15 N (3.37 lbs.) (1.53 kg) . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 84 (3.30)
-- Spring length under load of 200 N (449.74 lbs.) (20.4 kg) . mm (in.) 139 (5.47)
Splined shaft (1, fig. 6 with 6 splines):
-- External diameter of splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 34.700 to 34.870
(1.366 to 1.372)
-- Internal diameter of splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 27.890 to 28.140
(1.0980 to 1.1078)
Splined shaft (1, fig. 6 with 6 splines):
-- External diameter of two bearings (3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 34.884 to 35.000
(1.3733 to 1.3779)
-- External diameter of flange bearings (7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 29.987 to 30.000
(1.1805 to 1.1811)
Bearing seat diameter on connector flange (4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 71.979 to 72.009
(2.8338 to 2.835)
Bearing seat diameter on flange (7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 61.985 to 62.004
(2.4403 to 2.4411)
Spacer thickness (10, with ± 0.001 in. (0.05 mm) tolerance) for 1.5 - 1.75 - 2.00 - 2.25 - 2.5
assembly clearance (G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) - 2.75 - 3.00
(0.059 - 0.068 - 0.078 -
0.088 - 0.098 - 0.118)
Tapered roller bearing seat (14, fig. 7) diameter on driving shaft . . . . . . mm (in.) 46.520 to 46.535
(1.8314 to 1.8320)
Tapered roller bearing seat (14) diameter on power 25.002 to 25.015
take-off casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) (0.9843 to 0.9848)
Ball bearing seat (6) diameter on driving shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 24.987 to 25.000
(0.9837 to 0.9842)
Ball bearing seat (6) diameter on power take-off casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) 51.979 to 52.009
(2.0464 to 2.0475)
Front ball bearing seat diameter on driven shaft with union (13) . . . . . . mm (in.) 41.961 to 42.000
(1.652 to 1.653)
Rear ball bearing seat diameter on driven shaft with union (13) . . . . . . mm (in.) 30.002 to 30.015
(1.1811 to 1.1816)
Front ball bearing seat diameter on driven shaft with union (13) on 71.979 to 72.009
power take-off casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) (2.8338 to 2.835)
Rear ball bearing seat diameter on driven shaft with union (13) on 62.010 to 62.029
power take-off casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm (in.) (2.4413 to 2.4420)
(continued)
MAIN SPECIFICATIONS OF IMPLEMENT HITCHING DEVICE
(cont.)
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . three-point linkage
Category: 1st
Working depth control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . by means of the knob (11,
fig. 8) located on the
multi-indicator panel
Maximum lift capacity with lifting attachment third point
(1, fig. 15) connected to the upper hole on the lifting attachment
support for the full lifting stroke
at link ends of horizontal lines:
-- arms pivoted in position (A, fig. 16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg (lbs.) 1230 (2711)
-- arms pivoted in position (B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg (lbs.) 1430 (3152)
with centre of gravity at 610 mm. from link ends:
-- arms pivoted in position (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg (lbs.) 1330 (2932)
-- arms pivoted in position (B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg (lbs.) 1500 (3306)
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Tightening torque
N⋅m kgm
Front PTO
Power take-off clutch coupler flange retaining bolts (C1, fig. 1) . . . . . M8 24 2.5
Power take-off guard retaining bolts (C2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M8 24 2.5
Flange/coupler retaining bolts (C3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M8 32 3.3
Guard retaining bolts (C4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M8 24 2.5
Power take-off driving flange retaining bolts (C5) . . . . . . M10 49 5
Upper guard retaining bolts (C6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M8 24 2.5
Power take-off gearbox casing retaining bolts (C7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M8 24 2.5
Gearbox/support retaining bolts (C8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M10 49 5
Electromagnetic clutch/coupler flange retaining bolts (C9) . . . . . . . . . M12 88 9
Electromagnet/coupler flange retaining bolts (C10) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M8 24 2.5
Spring/clutch ring retaining bolts (C11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M8 24 2.5
Electromagnet rotor/coupler flange retaining bolts (C12) . . . . . . . . . . . M8 32 3.3
Lower guard retaining bolts (C13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M8 24 2.5
Front lift implement linkage
Lift arms position sensor support retaining bolts (C1, fig. 2) . . . . . . . . M8 24 2.5
Cylinder pivot front pin retaining bolts (C2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M8 24 2.5
Hydraulic cylinder bolt (C3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M8 24 2.5
Arms pivot pin retaining bolts (C4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M10 31 3.2
Cylinder pivot rear pin retaining bolts (C5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M8 24 2.5
Implement linkage support retaining bolts (C6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M18 304 31
1
MDC0801A
2
SECTIONAL VIEWS
3
Longitudinal and cross-sectional views of implement linkage assembly
7. Implement linkage third point hook. 11. Retaining bolts.
8. Third point top link. 12. Lift arms.
9. Implement linkage assembly. 13. Arms lateral clearance return bolt.
10. Arms longitudinal position pin. 14. Lift arms implement linkage hook.
4
Longitudinal and cross-sectional views of implement linkage assembly
15. Lift arms position sensor. 19. Pin retaining bolt (14).
16. Top link third point pivot pin. 20. Lift arms pivot pin.
17. Lifting hydraulic cylinder. 21. Pin bushings (14).
18. Lift arms/cylinder pivot pin. 22. Grease Fitting.
5
Longitudinal and cross-sectional views of front power take-off
1. Power take-off shaft guard. 5. Constant velocity joint guard.
2. Power take-off shaft. 6. Constant velocity joint.
3. Electromagnetic clutch. 7. PTO gears casing.
4. Electromagnetic clutch bearings. 8. Mechanical power take-off.
6
Longitudinal views of shaft with front power take-off electromagnetic clutch
1. Power take-off shaft. 7. Constant velocity joint coupler flange.
2. Thrust washer with snap ring. 8. Clutch ring/spring retaining bolts.
3. Power take-off electromagnetic clutch bearings. 9. Constant velocity joint.
4. Electromagnetic clutch coupler flange. 10. Clearance adjustment shims G.
5. Power take-off electromagnetic clutch. 11. Power take-off clutch release spring.
6. Clutch ring. 12. Retaining Bolts.
7
Longitudinal views of front power take-off casing
1. Gearbox. 8. Retaining ring.
2. Seal. 9. Thrust washer.
3. Retaining ring. 10. Engagement sleeve release ring.
4. Engagement shaft and sleeve. 11. Power take-off driven gears.
5. Power take-off driving flange. 12. Seal.
6. Ball bearings. 13. Constant velocity joint.
7. Power take-off driving shaft. 14. Roller bearing.
The mechanical lift can operate with the implement raised and lowered without using the previously ad-
in the controlled position, after having adjusted the justed potentiometers (11) and (12).
travel and raising limits with potentiometers (11) and The pushbutton (2) also engages or releases the
(12), located on the panel to the left of the operator. power take-off electromagnet.
Using the pushbutton (3) the implement can be
1
12
11 2
10 3
540E
1000 1500
540
9 2000 1000
4
500
2500
8 O
5
7
MDB1840A
1. Function indicators. 7. Power Shuttle control lever.
2. Front Power take-off control. 8. Flashing hazard warning lights switch.
3. Front lift arms raise switch. 9. Clock adjustment switch.
4. Front wheel drive mode switch. 10. Dashboard electronic mode selection switch
(optional).
5. Rear horizontal arms stabiliser rods adjustment
control switch. 11. Front lift working depth adjustment knob.
6. Light control lever with horn incorporated. 12. Front lifting arms upper limit adjustment knob.
FRONT LIFT
Controls
Two potentiometers (1 and 2 fig. 9) are located on the

left-hand side of the dashboard, allowing the upper
limit and working position to be stabilised.
Switch (1, fig. 10), on the right-hand side, allows the

implement to be raised and lowered.
Adjustments 9
Travel adjustment knob UP
-- turn the knob (1, fig. 9) fully clockwise to totally

raise the lift arms;
-- turn the knob (1) counter-clockwise to gradually

reduce the upward stroke, until it is totally can-
celled.
Working position adjustment knob
-- turn the knob (2) fully clockwise to set the mini-

mum working depth,
-- turn the knob (2) counter-clockwise, to progres-

sively increase the working depth.
Up/Down switch
To raise and lower the implement, use button (1,

fig. 10), which has two positions:
-- A = Down position.
A B
-- B = Up position.
10
FRONT POWER TAKE--OFF
DANGER
Before using the tractor, check that the plastic guard
(1, fig. 11) is in perfect condition and fitted on the
universal joint.
11
DANGER
In order to ensure longer life for the coupling and the
electromagnetic clutch, when the front power
take-off is not being used, select the neutral position
by turning the screw (1, fig. 12) counter-clockwise.
12
Operating system
To engage the power take-off, press pushbutton (1,

fig. 13) and pull the knob (2) upwards).
The clutch is electromagnetically operated (3, fig. 5).
Indicator (1 fig. 14) remains illuminated to indicate
that the PTO is engaged.
To disengage the PTO, press knob (2, fig. 13) down-
wards.
13
In the event of the clutch slipping, as a result of torque
peaks caused by the implement jamming or because
of particularly consistent ground, the control unit au-
tomatically disengages the joint.
Disengagement takes place when the sensor reads
a difference of three revs in 5 seconds between the
driving and driven shaft.
In this event the indicator (1 fig. 14) flashes slowly to
indicate that the coupling is disengaged. To re-en-
gage the power take-off, press knob (2, fig. 13) fully
down to disengage the clutch, and then pull upwards
to re-engage.
MDC0807
14
IMPLEMENT ATTACHMENT AND POWER
TAKE--OFF
1. Adjustable top link third point.
2. Power take-off shaft.
3. Adjustable lower lift arms.
Note - When working with hitched implements,

dampen the cross swing by tightening the screw (4,
fig. 16).
15
LIFT ARMS
B
In order to facilitate implement connection, the lift
arms can be attached to the support in two different
positions, using holes A and B.
It is advised to remove the horizontal arms when us-
ing the tractor without front-hitched implements. Pro- A
ceed as follows:
1. Extract the safety pin (3) and loosen the lock bolt
(4).
2. Extract the safety pin (2), remove the retaining
pin (1) and extract the arms.
16
Grease nipples fitted on lift arm shaft.
17
Grease nipples fitted on PTO shaft.
18
19
Front lift valve body hydraulic diagram
1. Maximum pressure valve. 5. Arms up solenoid valve.
2. Arms down solenoid valve. 6. Arms lifting cylinders.
3. Straight union. 7. Compensated valve for arms descent control.
4. Pressure compensator with by-pass. 8. Check valve.
FRONT LIFT TROUBLESHOOTING
The lift does not rise. 1. Oil filter clogged. Replace filter.
2. Arms up solenoid valve Release the solenoid valve.

(5, fig. 19) locked in discharge
position.
The lift moves in jerks. 1. Oil filter clogged. Replace filter.
2. Air in the pump suction line. Check that the unions are airtight
and the seals are efficient.
The lift raises slowly. 1. Oil filter clogged. Replace filter.
2. Oil leaking past the seals result- Replace all defective seals.
ing in pressure loss: cylinder
seals or delivery union seals.
4. Pressure compensator Disassemble and clean the pressure

(4, fig. 19) faulty. compensator.
5. Max. pressure valve (1) not Carry out calibration on work bench.
calibrated.
The lift lowers too slowly. 1. Pressure compensator Disassemble and clean the pressure
The lift lowers too quickly. 1. Pressure compensator Disassemble and clean the pressure
(continued)
FRONT LIFT TROUBLESHOOTING
(cont.)
The lift is unable to keep the load 1. Faulty seal on check valve Dismantle, check and replace the
raised (with the engine running, (8, fig. 19). parts concerned, if necessary.
the load moves up and down
rhythmically; with the engine tur-
ned off, the load lowers). 2. Oil leakage through solenoid Clean or replace the solenoid valve.
valve (2).
3. Oil leaking past the lift cylinder Replace the seals.

seal or the seals on the cylin-
der oil delivery fitting.
4. Defective seal or maximum Check calibration and adjust or repla-

pressure valve set to very low ce if necessary.
value (1).
The pressure relief valve cuts in 1. Calibration data incompatibil- Carry out lift arm calibration opera-
when the lift arms reach the com- ity of front lift potentiometer. tions correctly.
pletely raised position.
Lift has poor lifting capacity. 1. Maximum pressure valve (1) Replace the valve.
not calibrated.
2. System safety valve on pump Replace the valve.

incorrectly calibrated.
3. Poor pump efficiency (gen- Overhaul or replace pump.

erally combined with a con-
siderable increase in lift time).
The lift arms do not fully raise or 1. Calibration data lost or incor- Repeat the lift arms calibration
lower. rect. operation.
Miscellaneous faults. 1. For various reasons. See faults code.

OVERHAUL
Op. 31 140 30
FRONT PTO TRANSMISSION SHAFT
Removal
DANGER
equipment.
means of suitable slings and hooks. Ensure that no-
Proceed as follows.
2. Loosen the battery securing bolts on the front

side.
3. Using the handles (1), fitted on both ends of the

battery, lift and remove the battery from its hous-
ing.
28003
20
4. Remove the split pin (1), the pin (3) and the top
link of the third point (2).
21
5. Remove the split pin (1), the retaining bolts (2)
and disassemble the lift lower arms (3).
22
6. Remove the retaining bolts (1) and disassemble
the guard (2) on the front power take-off.
23
the upper guard (2) on the front lift.

moval (see Section 10).
24
9. Remove the retaining brackets (1) and the elec-
tric cable clamps (2) that supply the electromag-
netic coupling and the front lift arms position sen-
sor, from the power steering piping.
25
10. Disconnect the electrical connection (1) on the
electromagnetic coupling.
26
11. Remove the retaining bolts, disconnect the elec-
trical connection (1) and remove the front lift
arms position sensor (2).
27
12. Disconnect the front lift cylinders oil supply piping
(1).
28
13. Hitch the lift support (2), using hook (1), to a hoist,
remove the four retaining bolts (3) and disas-
semble the support, complete with hydraulic cyl-
inders and power take-off.
29
14. Unscrew the power take-off lower guard (1) and
power take-off (2) retaining bolts).
30
15. Unscrew the power take-off upper guard (1) re-
taining bolts.
31
16. Remove the retaining nuts (2) from the battery
support (1) and extract the two pins (3) from the
front axle tie rods (4).
32
17. Remove the power take-off lower guard (1).
33
18. Remove the split pin and the drive engagement
shaft (1).
34
19. Position two stands (1) under the cab front sup-
port brackets.
35
20. Hitch the battery support (1) to a hoist, using the
hook and chain (2).
36
21. Unscrew the retaining bolt (3) on the lower pivot
pin, the rest (4), the retaining nuts (1) and the low-
er bracket (2).
37
22. Remove the lower pivot pin (1).
38
23. Remove the retaining bolts and detach the rear
guard (1).
1
25643
39
24. Remove the circlip (2) and move the rear sleeve
forwards (1). 1 2
25646
40
25. Remove the circlip (2) and move the front sleeve
forwards (1).
1 2
25647
41
26. Unscrew the bearing support retaining bolts (1)
from the clutch box and remove the drive shaft 1
and support.
25648
42
27. Remove the upper bracket (1) and stud bolts.
43
28. Unscrew the retaining bolts (1) of the cardan
shaft support (2).
44
29. Disassemble the support (1) and cardan shaft
(2).
45
30. Hitch the battery support (2) to a hoist with a hook
and chain (1), raise the front part of the tractor, so
the front power take-off (3) can be removed (3).
46
Installation -- Assemble the power take-off upper guard and
To refit the front power take-off unit, proceed as tighten the retaining bolts.
follows:
ATTENTION -- Hitch the battery support to a hoist, raise and re-
Always use appropriate tools to align fixing holes. move the two stands from under the cab front
NEVER USE YOUR FINGERS OR HANDS. support brackets.
-- For the correct assembly of the various parts, re- -- Hitch the lift support, complete with hydraulic cyl-
fer to the previous illustrations. inders and power take-off, to a hoist and re-at-
tach to the front axle casing, tightening the four
retaining bolts.
-- Assemble the front lift cylinders oil supply piping.

-- Refit the lower guard and the front power take-off
unit, complete with universal joint, to the battery
support and tighten the four retaining bolts. -- Assemble the electrical connection and the front
lift arms position sensor, tightening the retaining
-- Assemble the lower support and cardan shaft, bolts.
tightening the retaining bolts.
-- Assemble the electromagnetic coupler electrical
-- Assemble the upper bracket with stud bolts. connection.
-- Assemble the lower pivot pin. -- Carry out operation 10 406 10: Radiator, only
-- Assemble the lower bracket, the rest and the re-
taining bolt on the lower pivot pin. -- Assemble the battery.
-- Assemble the drive shaft support and tighten the

retaining bolts. -- Attach the electromagnetic coupler and front lift
arms position sensor electrical power supply
cables, to the power steering piping, using the
-- Move the front sleeve forwards and assemble the bracket and clamp.
circlip.
-- Assemble the front lift upper guard and tighten

-- Move the rear sleeve forwards and assemble the the retaining bolts.
circlip.
-- Assemble the drive shaft guard and tighten the -- Assemble the power take-off guard and tighten
retaining bolts. the retaining bolts.
-- Assemble the drive engage shaft and split pin. -- Assemble the lift lower arms, the retaining bolts
and the split pins.
-- Insert the two front axle tie rods on the tank sup-
port, then tighten the retaining nuts. -- Assemble the third point top link, the pin and split
pin.
OP. 31 140 34 7. To reassemble the front power take-off casing,
proceed as follows:
Disassembly
ATTENTION -- Carefully check all disassembled parts, replac-

ing components that show signs of wear.
shoes. Assembly
-- Refer to figure 47 for correct parts assembly, pro-

ceeding as follows.
ATTENTION
For disassembly operations, refer to figure 47 and

proceed as follows.
-- Fit the seal on the front casing, then the constant
velocity joint, the relative ball bearings and the
power take-off driven gear unit.
1. Remove the plug and drain off the oil from the
gearbox.
-- Fit the thrust washer and bearings snap ring on

the front casing.
2. Remove the retaining bolts and separate the
front and rear casings.
-- Assemble the seal, the ball bearing, the bearing

snap rings, shaft and the roller bearing.
3. Remove the spring (10), shaft and engaging
sleeve (4) from the rear casing.
-- Assemble the return spring, shaft and the engag-

ing sleeve.
4. Remove the snap rings (3) and disassemble the
bearing (6), shaft (7), seal (2) and roller bearing
(14) from the rear casing.
-- Carefully clean the contact surfaces, apply LOC-
TITE 518 (or LOCTITE 5205) and reassemble
the front and rear casings, then tighten the retain-
5. Remove the snap ring (8) and thrust washer (9) ing bolts.
from the front casing.
-- Refit the plug and fill up the gearbox with oil.

6. Disassemble the constant velocity joint (13) and
relative ball bearings, the power take-off driven
gear unit (11) and the seal (12).
47
Longitudinal views of front power take-off casing
1. Gearbox. 8. Retaining snap ring.
2. Seal. 9. Thrust washer.
3. Retaining snap ring. 10. Engagement sleeve release ring.
4. Engagement shaft and sleeve. 11. Power take-off driven gears.
5. Power take-off driving flange. 12. Seal.
6. Ball bearings. 13. Constant velocity joint.
7. Power take-off driving shaft. 14. Roller bearing.
OP. 31 140 43
FRONT POWER TAKE--OFF
ELECTROMAGNETIC COUPLER
Removal
DANGER
equipment.
Proceed as follows.
1. Remove the split pin (1), the pin (3) and the top
link of the third point (2).
48
the power take-off guard (2).
49
the upper guard (2) on the front lift.
50
the right-hand safety grill (2).
51
5. Remove the retaining brackets (1) and the elec-
tric cable clamps (2) that supply the electromag-
netic coupling and the front lift arms position sen-
sor, from the power steering piping.
52
6. Disconnect the electrical connection (1) on the
electromagnetic coupling.
53
7. Unscrew the four retaining bolts and remove the
front power take-off (1) complete with electro-
magnetic coupler (2) and universal joint (3).
54
Installation -- Assemble the electromagnetic coupler and front
To refit the electromagnetic coupler the front power lift arms position sensor electrical cable brackets
take-off, proceed as follows: and clamps from the power steering piping.
ATTENTION
NEVER USE YOUR FINGERS OR HANDS. -- Assemble the right-hand safety grill and the re-
taining bolts.
-- For the correct assembly of the various parts, re-

fer to the previous illustrations.
-- Assemble the front lift upper guard and the re-
taining bolts.
-- Assemble the front power take-off complete with

-- Assemble the power take-off front guard and the
electromagnetic coupler and universal joint on
retaining bolts.
the lift body and tighten the four retaining bolts.
-- Connect the electromagnetic coupler electrical

connection. -- Assemble the third point top link, the pin and split
pin.
OP. 31 140 46
Disassembly
ATTENTION
shoes.
ATTENTION
Proceed as follows.
1. Unscrew the four retaining bolts (2) and the car-

dan shaft (1).
55
2. Remove the circlip (1).
56
3. Remove the two washers (1).
57
4. Using a punch, tap the shaft (1) to release it from
the coupler flange (2).
58
5. Remove the coupler flange (1).
59
6. Remove the snap ring (2) and bearing (3) from
the coupler flange (1).
7. Remove the four clutch disk (5) retaining bolts (4)
from the springs, recovering the retaining nuts
and washers.
8. Remove the four retaining bolts (6) on the cou-
pler flange springs (1), recovering the retaining
bolts and the springs.
60
9. Remove the six retaining bolts (1) on the magnet-
ic rotor (2).
61
10. Using an extractor (1) extract the magnetic rotor
(2).
62
11. Remove the circlip (1) and recover the thrust
washer (2).
63
12. Extract the PTO shaft (1), by tapping the end, as
64
13. Remove the six retaining bolts (1) and remove
the electromagnet (2).
65
Assembly -- Assemble the bearing and the snap ring on the
To assemble the front power take-off universal joint flange.
electromagnetic coupler, proceed as follows:
ATTENTION -- Assemble the universal joint flange springs and
Always use appropriate tools to align fixing holes. tighten the four retaining bolts, after having
NEVER USE YOUR FINGERS OR HANDS. smeared the surfaces with LOCTITE 242 (or
LOCTITE 243).

fer to the previous illustrations. -- Assemble the four clutch disk spring retaining
bolts, complete with washers and nuts, after hav-
ing smeared the surfaces with LOCTITE 242 (or
-- Apply the torque settings listed on page 5. LOCTITE 243).
-- Assemble the electromagnet and tighten the six

retaining bolts, after having smeared the sur- -- Fit the universal joint flange on the shaft.
faces with LOCTITE 242 (or LOCTITE 243).
-- Insert the shaft on the universal joint flange.
-- Install the PTO shaft.
-- Fit the two washers and the snap ring.

-- Fit the ring and the retaining snap ring on the
shaft.
-- Assemble the universal joint and tighten the four
-- Assemble the magnetic rotor on the shaft and retaining bolts on the flange, after having
tighten the six retaining bolts, after having smeared the surfaces with LOCTITE 242 (or
smeared the surfaces with LOCTITE 242 (or LOCTITE 243).
LOCTITE 243).
Op. 31 162 52
FRONT LIFT SUPPORT
Removal
DANGER
equipment.
Proceed as follows.

2. Remove the split pin (1), the retaining bolts (2)
and disassemble the lift lower arms (3).
66
3. Remove the retaining bolts, disconnect the elec-
trical connection (1) and remove the front lift
arms position sensor (2).
67
4. Disconnect the front lift cylinders oil supply piping
(1).
5. Carry out operation 31 140 43 Front PTO electro-

magnetic joint, only removal.
68
6. Hitch the lift support (2), using a sling and hook
(1), to a hoist, remove the four retaining bolts (3)
and disassemble the support and hydraulic cylin-
ders.
69
7. With the lift on a work bench, disassemble the
rear retaining pins (1) on the lift hydraulic cylin-
ders (2), disconnecting the relevant piping.
70
8. Remove the retaining bolts and pins (1) on the
front hydraulic cylinders (2) and the pins (3) on
the lift front arms (4), then remove the hydraulic
cylinders and the lift front arms support.
71
Installation -- Hitch the lift support, using slings and a hook, to
To refit the front lift support, proceed as follows: a hoist, assemble the support. complete with hy-
draulic cylinders and the four retaining bolts.
ATTENTION
NEVER USE YOUR FINGERS OR HANDS. -- Carry out operation 31 140 43 Front PTO electro-
magnetic joint, only refitting and tighten the four
retaining bolts.

fer to the previous illustrations. -- Assemble the front lift cylinders oil supply piping.
-- Apply the torque settings listed on page 5. -- Assemble the front lift arms position sensor, tight-
en the retaining bolts and connect the electric
-- Assemble the lift front arms supports with relative power supply connection.
pins and retaining bolts, then the hydraulic cylin-
ders with relative pins and front and rear retaining -- Assemble the lift lower arms, the retaining bolts
bolts. and the split pins.
FRONT POWER TAKE--OFF FAULT CODES AND SIGNALS
FAULTS CODE DECODING

phases:
nent transmission of the error code;
2. 2 second pause;
code;
4. 1 second pause;
fault code;
6. 3 second pause.
72
IMPORTANT: If a fault disables the automatic four-

wheel drive function, the corresponding code will
take precedence over other codes that were pre-
viously indicated; these codes will be saved by the
system.
-- Example of the interpretation of error code number 11 --
FFFFF pause F pause F pause
code
second digit
1
warning
fault
au code co
composition
pos o
11
CALIBRATING THE FRONT PTO
Faults code
HH MENU ACCESS
1. Turn switch (1) to A (OFF) and connect the CDU
294084 to the diagnosis socket (red connector).
73
2. By holding down the H MENU key (1) on the
gine.
3. After a brief pause, the display (2) shows: H5

HH MENU
4. Release the H MENU key (1) on the CDU).

H
5. Select the required H menu by pressing the H MENU
1 2 3 4

starts from HH.
6. Turn switch (1) to A to stop the engine.


nus:
H3 --
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
H4 --
SOFTWARE REVISION LEVEL
H5 --
CONTROL SWITCHES DIAGNOSTICS 75
H8 --
DELETE DATA SAVED IN THE
NON-VOLATILE MEMORY (EEPROM)
HF -- FAULTS SAVED IN THE ECU
NON-VOLATILE MEMORY
NOTE: The tractor can only be used in the H9 menu.
This section is used to read or modify ECU configura-
tion. The configuration is saved in the Non-Volatile
Memory (NVM) and is automatically registered the H3
first time the tractor is used.
However, for maintenance purposes, this menu al-
lows the configuration saved in the NVM to be viewed
and manually modified. H
MENU
1 2 3 4
the display (2) shows the configuration in use.
MDB0751A
-- NONE = Only occurs if the module has not yet
been used: after an EEPROM delete operation
(H8). This configuration will never be displayed 76
as a current configuration, as the system starts
with a self-programmed configuration at the first
start-up.
-- FWD = Only FWD present.
-- FWD--PTO = Both FWD and front PTO present.
figuration mode, press the H MENU key (1), the
display (2) shows:
HH MENU
HH MENU
To change the configuration mode, proceed as fol-
lows.
-- Use key (3) to change the mode displayed: each H

time the key is pressed, the display (2) changes, MENU
passing from the NONE mode to FWD-PTO to
1 2 3 4
FWD and then to NONEmode once more.
MDB0751A
-- When the required mode is displayed, press and
hold down key B (4) for at least 5 seconds. 77
-- Whilst key B (4) s pressed, the display (2) carries
out a reverse countdown of the remaining time,
at 1 second pauses, starting from:
STORE 5s
STORE 4s
STORE 3s
STORE 2s
STORE 1s
STORED
-- Release key (4)
NOTE: If key B (4) is released whilst the display (2)

is carrying out the reverse countdown, the display re-
turns to the mode selected.

(OFF), this allows the new configuration to be
saved.
NOTE: Selecting the NONE mode results in ECU

auto-reconfiguration at the next start up. Follow the
instructions shown on page 49 to ensure correct con-
figuration.
Even if any of the available modes can be selected,
incorrect mode selection can lead to an illuminated
indicator fault or inefficient tractor operation.
78
The H4 menu displays the revision level of the soft-
ware installed in the ECU, as follows.

H4
-- Product identity NA
-- Software revision level (release) 00.01 H
MENU
-- Hardware level 02.00 1 2 3 4
-- Menu level HHMENU
MDB0751A
-- The parameters are shown in sequence, dis-
79

ue.


input circuit status changes.


The display (2) shows a d and a number each time n. Switch or analog input
d20 FWD automatic mode switch
The number indicates on which circuit the status d21 FWD manual mode switch
d22 Brake: LH pressure switch
If the same circuit has two consecutive status
changes, the message on the display (2) changes to d23 Brake: RH pressure switch
d0 when the second change occurs. d24 Front PTO switch
-- Switch off the engine by turning the switch (1, d25 Upward slope switch
d26 Steering switch
d27 Downward slope switch
d28 Reverse gear status
d29 Flashing emergency switch
H8 -- DELETING DATA FROM THE NON-
VOLATILE MEMORY (NVM) (EEPROM)
This menu sets the Non-Volatile Memory values
(NVM) (EEPROM=Electrically Erasable Program- H8
ration parameters and all faults are saved. The
memory is saved even if the module is without a pow- H
er supply, i.e.: the battery is disconnected. MENU
1 2 3 4
MDB0751A
the display (2) shows the following information. 80
ERASE?
H MENU key (1).
5 seconds.
ERASE 5s
ERASE 4s
ERASE 3s
ERASE 2s
ERASE 1s
ERASED
B (4).
NOTE: If key (4) is released during the reverse

countdown on display (2), the display returns to the
start of the menu, displaying: ERASE?.

(OFF).
NOTE: By deleting the NVM, all the saved configura-

structions shown on page 49, to ensure correct
configuration.
81
This menu checks the power supply voltage status,
the frequency and the solenoid valve circuits.
H9
NOTE: The front power take-off can be used in this
menu.
H
The display (2) shows a channel number followed by MENU
a typical value (a numerical value between 0-1023) 1 2 3 4
Example: 9 → 1023 MDB0751A
where:
82
9 channel number.
surement.
-- the display (2) can show up to 24 channels by
pressing key Y (3) or the RH brake pedal, or key
B (4) or the LH brake pedal.

of measurement
1 Control unit power supply (12VH) Counts (ADC) 423 to 843
2 Front transmission speed frequency (VAA) Hz --
3 Rear transmission speed frequency (VAP) Hz --
4 PTO electromagnetic clutch solenoid frequency Hz --
5 FWD manual engagement switch Counts (ADC) 0 - 1023
6 FWD automatic engagement switch Counts (ADC) 0 - 1023
7 Front PTO switch Counts (ADC) 0 - 1023
8 Fuse F9 Counts (ADC) > 410
9 Left Brake Pedal Switch Counts (ADC) 1023 - 0
10 Right Brake Pedal Switch Counts (ADC) 1023 - 0
11 Slope sensor on level Counts (ADC) 102 to 380
11 Slope sensor on upward slope Counts (ADC) 630 to 898
11 Slope sensor on downward slope Counts (ADC) 629 to 381
13 FWD engagement solenoid valve current Counts (ADC) 122 to 766
14 Front PTO engagement solenoid valve current Counts (ADC) 162 to 926
15 Steering sensor Counts (ADC) 197 to 929
16 Engine Speed rpm --
17 Reverse gear status switch Counts (ADC) 0 - 1023
The HD menu allows the display (2) to show the posi-

tion and operation of the FWD.
HD
-- Select the HD menu, as described on page 41,
the display (2) shows the position of the FWD en-
gagement synchroniser.
H
-- POS=4ENG FWD engaged. MENU
1 2 3 4
or
MDB0751A
-- POS=4DIS FWD disengaged.
83
-- Press key Y (3) to activate the FWD engage-

ment solenoid valve, in this manner FWD is dis-
engaged and the illuminated indicator (1) is OFF.
-- Press key B (4) to deactivate the FWD engage-

ment solenoid valve, in this manner FWD is en-
gaged and the illuminated indicator (1) is ON.
NOTE: In the event of an FWD engaged switch fault, 3

the indicator (1) is not illuminated.
26319
84

(OFF).
85
HF -- ERRORS STORED IN THE
volatile memory and signalled by the indicator lamp
(2 fig. 84).

the display (2, fig. 83) shows the last fault saved.
Example: E(9) = 15
E= Fault.
(9) = Progressive memory cell. HF

15 = Fault code.

saved in cells 1 to 9. H
MENU
When no faults are saved, the display will show: 1 2 3 4
Example: E( 9)=00.
MDB0751A

5 seconds. 86

ERASE 5s
ERASE 4s
ERASE 3s
ERASE 2s
ERASE 1s

ERASED

B (4).
NOTE: If key 4 is released whilst the display (2) is

carrying out the reverse countdown, the display re-
turns to the current cell of the buffer memory.

(OFF).
NOTE: If both brake pedals are pressed during this

operation, or a VAA or VAP sensor signal is detected,
the procedure must be interrupted and normal opera-
tion must be resumed.
87
FIRST START--UP

following cases.

1. Turn switch (1) to B (ON) without switching on the

engine. 88
2. Indicators (1, 2 and 3) will be illuminated (non-

flashing), after a while indicator (2) will flash to re-
peat the recognised configuration code - i.e.: rap-
id flashing, followed by:
1 flash Only FWD present.
2 flashes Both FWD and front PTO

are present (not available)
3
3. Turn the key (1, fig. 88) to OFF for a few seconds:
the configuration is now saved in the Non-Volatile
memory (NVM).
26319
NOTE: Front PTO and FWD electronic control unit in-
89
put/output wiring (see page 130).
FAULT DIAGNOSIS
ATTENTION self-configuration operation at the first start-up

lem-solving easier. Requested calibration operations.
6. There are two types of faults:

1. The measurements taken to read:
voltage;
resistance; paired, even without switching off the tractor, but
frequency. the relative code will be saved in the non-volatile
must be carried out with a digital tester. memory (see HF MENU);
NOTE: the resistance values shown are valid for a alarm lamp when the cause is eliminated or
temperature of 68 °F (20 °C) (ambient temperature). solved. To remove the fault display, stop then re-
With higher or lower tractor temperatures, the rela- start the tractor. The fault will be saved (as a “no
tive resistance values shown in the manual should fault reset”) in the non volatile memory (see HF
vary accordingly. MENU).
7. In certain cases the fault may also be indicated

2. The “short to ground” message refers to a resist- by the FWD alarm lamp, as the ECU is common.
ance value of less than 5 ohm (Ω).
8. The connection references indicate: the wire di-
3. When a fault occurs, before carrying out any kind mension and colour, and the connection pin num-
of service operations, check that the specific con- ber.
nections (ECU, sensors, switches, etc.) are cor- Example: 0.5 HL (15)
rectly connected. 0.5 = wire dimension;
A faulty connection could be the cause of incor- HL = wire colour;
rect tractor operation. (15) = connection pin number.
4. To facilitate problem solving, consult the ECU
9. The CN19 on the ECU connection (138) indi-
electrical wiring diagram, shown on page 130.
cates the relative pin number.
5. If the ECU needs to be replaced, the following op-
erations must be carried out: 10. The faults are listed in progressive order.
dent non-volatile memory); also check that the
ECU LOCATION
The ECU (3) controls the Front Power take-off and
Four-wheel drive.
27161
FAULT CODES
FAULT CODE 11
Fuse F9 or the relative wiring is interrupted.
Four-wheel drive is always engaged and the Front Power Take-off does not work.

Open the fusebox and check fuse F9. nection (138). NO
NO
Is the fuse blown? Turn the starter key to the ON position.
YES Is there a +12V reading between pin CN19
(C) and ground?
Replace fuse F9. YES
Replace the ECU.

the open circuit.
FAULT CODE 15
The front PTO electromagnetic clutch is in short to +12V or the ECU is faulty.
The front PTO does not work.

connection (138).
Turn the starter key to the ON position. Between pin CN25 (A) on connection (138)
NO NO
Is there a +12V reading between pin and ground, is there a +12V reading?
CN17 (AN) on connection (138) and YES
ground?
YES Check the wiring between pin CN25 (A) on
connection (138), pin (12) (A) on connection
Check the wiring between pin CN17 (AN) (182) and the electromagnetic clutch.
on connection (138), pin (13) (AN) on con- Eliminate the cause of the short circuit to
nection (182) and the electromagnetic +12V.
clutch.
+12V.
Replace the ECU.

FAULT CODE 15
FAULT CODE 16
The front PTO electromagnetic clutch is disconnected or in short to ground.

Is the wiring and connection (210) on the Connect the connection and/or the relative
NO
electromagnetic clutch and relative pins pins.
connected?
YES
Disconnect the connection.

between pin (3) (A) and pin (4) (AN) on
connection (210) (clutch side). NO the open circuit.
Is resistance ~ 3 W?
YES
YES
Replace the electromagnetic clutch.

nection (138).
Is one of the two wires (A) and (AN) in Is there electrical continuity between pin
NO NO
short to ground? CN17 (AN) on connection (138), pin (13)
YES (AN) on connection (182) and the connec-
tion (210) on the clutch?
Does the fault persist? Is there electrical continuity between pin
YES CN25 (A) on connection (138), pin (12) (A) NO
on connection (182) and the connection
(210) on the clutch?
YES
Is one of the two wires (A) and (AN) in short

NO
to ground?
YES

Replace the ECU.

FAULT CODE 16
FAULT CODE 17
The electromagnetic clutch coil is in short or the wiring is in short to +12V

Disconnect the connection (210) (under
the hood) on the electromagnetic clutch.
Using a digital tester, measure the electri- Check the wiring and eliminate the cause of
NO the short circuit.
cal resistance between pin (3) (A) and pin
(4) (AN) (clutch side). Does the fault persist?
Is resistance ∼ 3 Ω? YES
YES
connection (138).
Are pins CN17 (AN) and CN25 (A) on con- NO Between pin CN25 (A) on connection (138) NO
nection (138) in short circuit?
and ground, is there a +12V reading?
YES
YES
Check the wiring between pin CN17 (AN)
on connection (138), pin (13) (AN) on con-
the short circuit on pin CN25 (A) on connec-
nection (182) and the connection (210) on
tion (138) to +12V.
the clutch.
YES
Check the wiring between pin CN25 (A)

on connection (138), pin (12) (A) on con-
nection (182) and the connection (210) on Replace the ECU.
the clutch.
FAULT CODE 17
FAULT CODE 18
The ECU power supply voltage is too low.
Recharge and/or replace the battery

Is the battery voltage ∼ +12V? NO
or check the recharging system.
YES

(138). Check the power supply wiring on the
NO ECU and eliminate the cause of the
Using a digital tester, measure the voltage on pin drop in voltage.
CN9 on connection (138).
Is the value > 10V?
YES
Replace the ECU.

FAULT CODE 19
The ECU power supply voltage is too high.
Start the engine and bring it up to a speed of 1200 Check the recharging system and re-
rpm. NO place the alternator if the voltage is
Check the battery voltage, using a digital tester. much higher than +14 V.
Is the voltage ∼ 14V?
YES
27161
FAULT CODE 29
The engine speed signal from the alternator is not read by the ECU.
Connect the wire correctly.
Turn the starter key to the OFF posi-

Start the engine and accelerate to 1200 rpm. tion.
NO NO
Is the alternator recharging lamp ON? Is the alternator socket (W) wire con-
YES nected?
YES
Check and/or repair the recharging system or re- Remove the control panel and the
place the alternator. ECU connection (138).
Is there electrical continuity between NO
pin CN5 (R) on connection (138) and
the socket (W) on the alternator?
YES
Replace the ECU.

FAULT CODE 32
The slip reading coil wiring is disconnected or is in short to +12V or the coil is faulty.

Raise the engine hood. Connect the connection and/or wi-
NO
Is the connection (210) on the electromagnetic ring.
clutch or the relative wiring connected?
YES
Disconnect the connection. Check the wiring between the con-

Using a digital tester, measure the electrical resi- NO nection and the clutch and eliminate
stance between pins (1) and (2) (clutch side). the cause of the open circuit.
Is the resistance ∼ 16 Ω? Does the fault persist?
YES YES

(138)
Is there electrical continuity between pin CN4 (BR) NO Check the wiring and eliminate the
on connection (138), pin (11) (BR) on connection cause of the open circuit.
(182) and the connection (210) on the clutch?
YES

on connection (138), pin (10) (B) on connection
(182) and the connection (210) on the clutch?
YES

Between pin CN4 on connection (138) and ground, NO Replace the ECU.
is there a +12V reading?
YES

short to +12V.
FAULT CODE 32
FAULT CODE 37
The ECU is faulty.
27161
FAULT CODE 38
The ECU is faulty.
27161
CALIBRATING THE FRONT ELECTRONIC LIFT
FRONT ELECTRONIC LIFT CALIBRATION

Front lift arm travel calibration is necessary under the
following conditions.
-- When alarm lamp (1) indicates the fault code 55;
-- Replace the arms potentiometer;
-- Replace one or both potentiometers;
-- Cancellation of the resident non-volatile storage
in the electronic control unit.
26309A
90
Carry out lift arm calibration operations according to
the instructions listed below.
1. Apply a weight of approx. 100 kg to the lift arms.
2. Make sure that the ignition key (1) is in the start-

ing position A (OFF).
91
3. Turn the potentiometer (1) fully clockwise.
4. Turn the potentiometer (2) fully counter-clock-

wise.
92
5. Set switch (1) to the lowering position (A).
6. Start the engine and bring it up to a speed of

1300 rpm.
A B
7. The indicator light (1, fig. 90) should show fault
code 55.
8. Set switch (1) to the raising position (B) and then

to the lowering position (A).
93
9. Turn the potentiometer (2) fully clockwise and
wait until the lift arms are raised to maximum
height.
10. Turn the potentiometer (2) fully counter-clockwise

again, and wait until the lift arms reach the lower
travel limit.
94
11. Turn the starter key in to A (OFF) to save the data
in the electronic control unit.
If calibration has been carried out correctly, when the

engine is started, the fault codes lamp (1, fig. 90) will
remain ON, but no fault will be indicated.
NOTE: If the error is not 55, the cause of the fault

must be found and eliminated; only at this point can
calibration be carried out.
95
NOTE: To force the ECU to carry out calibration at
any time, proceed as follows.
With the starter key (1) in position (B) disconnect one
or both potentiometers (1 and 2, fig. 94).
Turn the starter key (1) to position (A) and connect
the potentiometers.
Turn the starter key (1) to position (B), if the com-
mands are correctly connected, the indicator light (1,
fig. 90) will show fault code 55.
At this point, proceed with calibration.
CONNECTING THE CALIBRATION AND
DIAGNOSTIC UNIT (CDU) 294084 TO THE
TRACTOR
Connect the instrument to the diagnosis socket as
described below.
1. Turn the switch (1) to position A (OFF).
27333
96
2. Unscrew the bolts (1) and remove the guard (2)
on the left-hand side of the dashboard.
2
27185
97
3. Connect the diagnostic instrument 294084 to the
white diagnostic connector (1).
27186
98
4. Connect the diagnostic instrument 294084.
27188
99
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED FRONT
LIFT FAULT CODE INDICATIONS
Faults code decoding

phases:
nent transmission of the error code; 26309A
2. 2 second pause;
100
code;
4. 1 second pause;
fault code;
6. 3 second pause.

-- Example of the interpretation of error code number 45 --
FFFFF pause FFFF pause FFFFF pause
code
second digit
5
warning
fault
au code co
composition
pos o
45
Fault codes
HH MENU ACCESS
-- Turn the switch (1) to A (OFF) and connect the
CDU device 294084 to the diagnosis connector.
101
-- By holding down the H MENU key (1) on the
gine.
-- After a brief pause, the display (2) shows: H5

HH MENU
-- Release the H MENU key (1) on the CDU).

H
-- Select the required H menu by pressing the H MENU
1 2 3 4

starts from HH.
-- Turn switch (1) to A to stop the engine.


nus:

SOLENOID VALVES CALIBRATION.
H2 REAR LIFT CURRENT CALIBRATION VALUES 103

DISPLAY (EDC).
H3 ECU CONFIGURATION AND MODIFICATION

DISPLAY.
H4 SOFTWARE REVISION AND DISPLAY.
H5 CONTROL SWITCHES DIAGNOSIS.
H6 DRAFT SENSORS VALUES AND DISPLAY . .

(LVDT).
H8 DELETING DATA FROM THE NON-VOLATILE

MEMORY (EEPROM).
H9 VOLTMETER DISPLAY.
HA REAR LIFTING ARMS POSITION DISPLAY.
HB FRONT LIFTING ARMS POSITION DISPLAY.
HF ACCESS TO FAULTS IN THE NVM.

HA and HB menus.
SOLENOID VALVES CALIBRATION
This procedure calibrates the rear lift control valve
solenoid valves (EDC).
and must be carried out after the following opera-
tions:
-- ECU replacement;
-- raising or lowering solenoid valves replacement;
-- NVM cancellation (H8 menu)
Rear lift raising and lowering solenoid valves

calibration mode access
104
H1
H
MENU
27334
105
-- The 294084 instrument will display RCV:INIT.
-- Bring the engine revs to 1200 ÷ 1400 rpm;
RCV:INIT
H
MENU
27335
106
-- Move potentiometers (1, 2, 3 and 4) to the follow-
ing positions:
-- Potentiometer (1) to the max. raise position (turn
clockwise);
-- Potentiometer (2) to the arms descent speed
max. position (turn clockwise);
-- Potentiometer (3) to the max. lowered position
(turn clockwise);
-- Potentiometer (4) to the controlled operation
position (turn counter-clockwise).
107
-- By turning knob (1), move the lift to the 75%
raised position (corresponds to approx. posi-
tion 2 on the decal).
4
108
-- During calibration the display on instrument
294084 shows the number of the raise/lower
cycle from 1 to 3.
CYCLE 1
CYCLE 2 CYCLE 1
CYCLE 3
-- A U fault code will appear on the display if a fault
is detected during the calibration sequence.
H
-- Calibrate the solenoid valves again, starting from
cycle 0, if possible, after the fault is displayed.
MENU
27337
109
-- On completion of the calibration sequence, the
display will show “RVC:END”. This means that
the calibration operation has been carried out
successfully and the display will not return to the
HH menu. RVC:END
H
MENU
27338
110
NOTE: The control knob, the position of the raising

arms and potentiometer adjustments are constantly
checked.
Calibration will not proceed if the tractor is moving.
If an anomalous condition is detected during calibra-
tion, the display will show the relative fault code with
the indicator lamps (1, fig. 72); if the fault concerns
the calibration procedure, the display will show the
relative Uxx code.
The codes are explained in the following table.
U ERROR CODES XX
CODE CAUSE SOLUTION

U 20 Implement connector too low. Raise the arms by turning the working depth
control knob clockwise (1, fig. 108).
U 21 Implement connector too high. Lower the arms by turning the working depth
control knob counter-clockwise (1, fig. 108).
U 22 Movement detected on the working depth con- Calibration will re-start when system movement
trol. is eliminated.
U 23 Arms incorrectly positioned in relation to set- Calibration will re-start when the arms are sta-
tings. tionary.
U 24 Solenoid valve current absorption too high. Check the wiring and the solenoid valves.
U 25 Arm upper travel limit incorrectly positioned. Turn the knob fully clockwise (1, fig. 107).
U 26 Arm lower travel limit incorrectly positioned. Turn the knob fully clockwise (3, fig. 107).
U 27 Position/draft sensitivity incorrectly positioned. Turn the knob fully counter-clockwise
(4, fig. 107).
U 31 Tractor moving. Stop the tractor by applying the parking brake.
H2 -- REAR LIFT CURRENT CALIBRATION

VALUES DISPLAY (EDC)
-- This function is used to display the rear lift sole-

H2
noid valves calibration values when saved in the
ECU.
H
MENU
27339
111
-- The 294084 device will display the current values
(in mA) of the raising R, and lowering L solenoid
valves.
-- Example: R= 586 ma
L= 584 ma. R=586 ma
-- To select the raising solenoid valve, press button
Y.
H
-- To select the lowering solenoid valve, press but- MENU
ton B.
27340
112
H3 -- ECU CONFIGURATION AND
MODIFICATION DISPLAY
The H3 menu displays the system configuration, or

allows it to be modified manually.
H3
The configuration is stored in the NVM and is auto-
matically registered the first time the tractor is used.
H
For maintenance operations, the stored configura- MENU
1 2 3 4
tion can be accessed and manually modified.
-- Select the H3 menu, as described on page 69. MDB0751A
-- The 294084 device will display the configuration 113

in use;
-- NONE = No configuration, this may occur if the
control unit has never been used or if it is the first
start-up after a memory cancellation operation
(H8 menu).
-- EDC = Rear hydraulic lift and differential lock;
-- EDC--FL = Rear hydraulic lift, front lift and differ-
ential lock;
-- FR--LIFT = Front lift;

figuration, press key (1) and the display will
show:
HH MENU
-- Set the configuration manually by pressing key

Y (3).
-- Save the new configuration with key B, holding
the key down until the display on instrument
294084 shows the following sequence:
STORE 5s
STORE 4s
STORED
STORE 3s
STORE 2s
STORE 1s H
After 5 seconds, the display will show “STORED”.
MENU
STORED;
27343
-- If button B is released whilst the instrument

294084 is carrying out the reverse countdown, 114
the display will return to the selected mode.

NOTE: NONE mode selection results in ECU auto-

configuration at the following start-up, follow the in-
structions shown on page 82 “FIRST START-UP”.
NOTE: Even if any of the available modes can be se-

lected, incorrect mode selection can lead to an illumi-
nated indicator fault or inefficient tractor operation.
The H4 menu allows the software revision level pres-

ent in the control unit to be displayed.
H4
the display shows the following information.
-- Product identity MB H
MENU
-- Software revision level (release) 00.01 1 2 3 4
-- hardware level 02.00
MDB0751A
-- menu level HHMENU
-- The parameters are shown in sequence, dis- 115

ue.

(OFF).
27356
116
input circuit status changes. H5
H
MENU
the display (2) shows the following information. 1 2 3 4
The display (2) shows a d and a number each time
MDB0751A
The number indicates on which circuit the status 117

n. Switch or analog input
If the same circuit has two consecutive status d1 External lowering switch.
changes, the message on the display (2) changes to
d0 when the second change occurs. d2 External raising switch.
This menu also checks compatibility problems on the d3 Rear lift work switch status change.
work, raising, rear lift float and work, front lift raising d4 Rear lift raising switch status change.
switches.
d5 Rear lift float switch status change.
fig. 78) to A (OFF). d6 Front lift work switch status change.
d7 Front lift raising switch status change.
d8 Manual differential lock switch.
d9 Automatic differential lock switch.
d10 LH brake pressure switch.
d11 RH brake pressure switch.
d30 Engine oil pressure switch.
H6 -- DRAFT SENSORS VALUES DISPLAY
(LVDT)
The H6 menu displays the draft sensor adjustment

values.
0%
-- The rear lift (EDC) can be used in this mode. H

MENU
-- The display shows the travel percentage (LVDT)
in relation to the calibrated point, e.g.:
27347
35%
or 118
--15%
-- When there is no force on the implement hitching

device, the display will show a value of
--5% to 5%.
H8 -- CANCELLATION OF THE DATA

STORED IN THE NON-VOLATILE
STORAGE
This menu sets the Non-Volatile Memory values H8
ration parameters and all faults are saved. The H
memory is saved even if the module is without a pow- MENU
1 2 3 4
er supply, i.e.: the battery is disconnected.
MDB0751A
-- Select the H8 menu, as described on page 69, 119
ERASE?
H MENU key (1).
5 seconds.
ERASE 5s
ERASE 4s
ERASE 3s
ERASE 2s
ERASE 1s
ERASED
B (4, fig. 119).
NOTE: If key (4, fig. 119) is released during the re-

verse countdown, the display (2) returns to the start
of the menu, displaying: ERASE?.

(OFF).
NOTE: By deleting the NVM, all the saved configura- 120

structions shown on page 82, to ensure correct
configuration.
H9 -- VOLTMETER DISPLAY
This menu checks the condition of: the potentiome-
ters, the supply voltage, the frequency and the sole-
noid valves circuits. H9
NOTE: the rear lift (EDC) can be used with this menu.
H
MENU
1 2 3 4
The display (2) shows a channel number followed by
a typical value (a numerical value between 0-1023) MDB0751A
Example: 6 → 1023 121
where:
6 channel number.
surement.

-- The display (2) can show up to 24 channels by

pressing key Y (3) to increase the channel num-
ber or key B (4) to decrease the number.

of measurement
1 Sensors power supply (5V) Counts (ADC) 650 to 720
2 Control unit supply voltage (12VF) Counts (ADC) 380 to 800
3 Control unit supply voltage (12VD) Counts (ADC) 380 to 800
4 Draft sensor supply (8V) Counts (ADC) 750 to 850
5 Front lift raising coil current Counts (ADC) 0 to 1023
6 Front lift lowering coil current Counts (ADC) 0 to 1023
7 Front lift max. raising potentiometer voltage Counts (ADC) 90 to 650
8 Front lift working depth potentiometer voltage Counts (ADC) 90 to 650
9 Differential lock coil current Counts (ADC) 0 to 950
10 Rear lift raising coil current Counts (ADC) 0 to 650
11 Rear lift lowering coil current Counts (ADC) 0 to 650
12 Wheel speed sensor frequency Hz ≥0
13 Raising arms position potentiometer voltage Counts (ADC) 50 to 650
14 Work position setting potentiometer voltage Counts (ADC) 100 to 750
15 Descent speed potentiometer voltage Counts (ADC) 100 to 700
16 Max. raise potentiometer voltage Counts (ADC) 100 to 700
17 Mixed control potentiometer voltage Counts (ADC) 100 to 700
18 Lowering limit potentiometer voltage Counts (ADC) 100 to 750
19 Draft sensor voltage (LVDT) Counts (ADC) 120 to 800
20 Engine Speed rpm 0 to 3000
21 Front lift position potentiometer voltage Counts (ADC) 50 to 650
HA -- REAR LIFT ARMS POSITION

DISPLAY
The HA menu (on the 294084 device) displays the %

value of the pre-defined max. raising limit with the HA
working depth control.
The rear lift (EDC) can be used in this mode.

H
-- Select the HA menu, as described on page 69. MENU
27351
122
-- The 29408 device display will show the value in
% of the arms max. raise position.
Example: 49%.
H
MENU
27352
123
HB -- FRONT LIFT ARMS POSITION

DISPLAY
The HB menu shows the 294084 device display with

the % value of the front lift arms position. HB
In this manner the front lift can be used.
-- Select the HB menu, as described on page 69. H

MENU
27351
124
-- The 294084 device display will show the % value
of the front lift arms position.
example: 70%.
H
MENU
27352
125
HF -- ERRORS STORED IN THE
volatile memory and signalled by the indicator lamp HF
(1 fig. 129).
the display (2) shows the last fault saved. H
Example: E(9) = 15 MENU
1 2 3 4
E= Fault.
(9) = Progressive memory cell. MDB0751A
15= Fault code. 126

saved in cells 1 to 9.
When no faults are saved, the display will show:
Example: E(9)=00.
5 seconds.
ERASE 5s
ERASE 4s
ERASE 3s
ERASE 2s
ERASE 1s
ERASED
B (4, fig. 126).
NOTE: If key (4, fig. 126) is released whilst the dis-

play (2) is carrying out the reverse countdown, the
display returns to the current cell of the buffer
memory.

(OFF).
NOTE: If a pressure switch signal is detected during

this operation, the procedure must be interrupted 127
and normal operation must be resumed.
FIRST START--UP

following cases.

-- Turn switch (1) to B (ON) without switching on the

engine. 128
-- Indicator (1) will be illuminated (non-flashing), af-

ter a while indicator (1) will flash to repeat the re- 1
cognised configuration code - i.e.: rapid flashing,
followed by: 4
2
1 flash Only front lift present.
2
2 flashes Both rear lift and
differential lock present.
6
0
3 flashes Rear lift, front lift and
differential lock present. 8
-- Turn the key (1, fig. 88) to OFF for a few seconds: MDB2010A
the configuration is now saved in the Non-Volatile

memory (NVM). 129
FAULT DIAGNOSIS
ATTENTION self-configuration operation at the first start-up
(after ECU replacement) is correct;
lem-solving easier. calibration: lift arms;
Requested calibration operations.
1. The measurements taken to read: 6. There are two types of faults:
voltage; FAULT RESET: the fault will no longer be dis-
resistance; played if the cause has been eliminated or re-
paired, even without switching off the tractor, but
frequency.
the relative code will be saved in the non-volatile
must be carried out with a digital tester. memory (see HF MENU);
NOTE: the resistance values shown are valid for a alarm lamp when the cause is eliminated or
temperature of 68 °F (20 °C) (ambient temperature). solved. To remove the fault display, stop then re-
With higher or lower tractor temperatures, the rela- start the tractor. The fault will be saved (as a “no
tive resistance values shown in the manual should fault reset”) in the non volatile memory (see HF
vary accordingly. MENU.
7. In certain cases the fault may also be indicated
2. The “short to ground” message refers to a resist- by the rear lift alarm lamp, as the ECU is com-
ance value of less than 5 ohm (Ω). mon.
3. When a fault occurs, before carrying out any kind 8. The connection references indicate: the wire di-
of service operations, check that the specific con- mension and colour, and the connection pin num-
nections (ECU, sensors, switches, etc.) are cor- ber.
rectly connected. Example: 0.5 S (31)
A faulty connection could be the cause of incor- 0.5 = wire dimension;
rect tractor operation. S = wire colour;
4. To facilitate problem solving, consult the ECU (31) = connection pin number.
electrical wiring diagram, shown on page 130. 9. CN1--4 or CN2--25 on the ECU connections
5. If the ECU needs to be replaced, the following op- (135), refer to the smaller connection (18 pin) or
erations must be carried out: the bigger connection (36 pin) and the relative pin
number.
dent non-volatile memory); also check that the 10. The faults are listed in progressive order.
ECU LOCATION
The ECU (1) controls the rear and front electronic lift.
27161
FAULT CODES
FAULT CODE 18
No power supply at an ECU input.
The front lift does not work.
Turn the starter key to the OFF posi-

Turn the starter key to the OFF position. tion.
Remove the left-hand panel under the dashboard. Remove the control panel and the
Turn the starter key to the ON position. connections (135) on the ECU.
NO Between pins CN1--15) (MV),
Are fuses F14 and F16 interrupted?
CN2--10 (MV) and CN2--34 on con-
nection (135) and ground, is the rea-
YES
ding +12V?
Replace the fuses. YES
Replace the ECU.
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 38
The tractor speed sensor (Aa) wiring is in short to ground.
The ECU sets the tractor speed to 0 km/h, therefore any faults on the lift control external switches are not read.
Turn the starter key to the OFF position. (Only for tractors without POWER SHUT-
Lift the engine bonnet and disconnect TLE).
connection (171). Remove the control panel and the connec-
Measure the electrical resistance (tran- NO NO
smission side) between pin (B3) (HB) and Is pin CN2--36 (HR) (wiring side) in short to
ground. ground?
Is pin (B3) (HB) in short to ground?
YES
YES
Remove the rear left-hand wheel. the short to ground.
Check the tractor speed sensor wiring and
eliminate the cause of the short to ground
on wire (HB).
Replace the ECU.
FAULT CODE 38
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
**
FAULT CODE 44
The draft sensor power supply voltage (1) exceeds +8V.

Between pin CN2--35 (Z) on connection (135) (wi- Replace the ECU.
ring side) and ground, is the reading ∼ 12V?
YES

Check the wiring between: pin CN2--35 (Z), pin
(C7) (Z) on connection (171) and the draft sensor.
27184
1
FAULT CODE 44
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
**
FAULT CODE 45
The draft sensor wiring (1) is in short to ground or the ECU is faulty.

Remove the rear right-hand wheel. Replace the draft sensor.
NO
Disconnect connection (98) on the draft sensor. Does the fault persist?
Is wire (Z) in short to ground? YES
YES
Replace the ECU.
Check the wiring between: the draft sensor, pin
(C7) (Z) on connection (171) and pin CN2--35 (Z)
on connection (135) on the ECU.
98
27184
1
FAULT CODE 45
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
**
FAULT CODE 48
Fault on the front lift rapid up/down switch (1) or wiring.

Disconnect connection (205) on the up/down
switch and check, using a digital tester, if the switch NO Replace the switch.
works.
Does it work?
YES

(135) on the ECU.
Turn the starter key to the ON position. NO Replace the ECU.
Between pin CN2--6 (B) or pin CN2--5 (C) on con-
nection (135) and ground, is the reading +12V?
YES
Check the wiring between connection (127) and

the switch and eliminate the cause of the short to
+12V.
A B
FAULT CODE 48
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 49
The tractor speed sensor (Aa) is disconnected or the wiring is interrupted.
The ECU sets the tractor speed to 0 km/h, therefore any faults on the lift control external switches are
not read.

connection (171). Remove the rear left-hand wheel.
Measure the electrical resistance (tran- NO Is the connection or the tractor speed sen- NO
smission side) between pin (B2) (N) and sor wiring connected?
(B3) (HB). YES
YES Disconnect the tractor speed sensor con-
nection. NO
Remove the control panel and the con- Is the electrical resistance on the sensor ∼
nections (135) on the ECU. (Only for trac- 700 Ω?
tors without POWER SHUTTLE). YES
CN2--36 (HR) on connection (135), with Check the electrical continuity between the
pin (B3) (HB) on connections (171)? sensor connection and connection (171) on
YES the following wires?
wire (N) with pin (B2) (N) on (171);
Replace the ECU. wire (HB) with pin (B3) (HB) on (171).
Check the wiring and eliminate the cause Replace the tractor speed sensor.
of the open circuit.
FAULT CODE 49
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
**
FAULT CODE 52
Fault on the ECU lift valve circuit.

Turn the starter key to the ON position. NO
Between pin CN1--15 (MV) on connection (135)
YES
Is the ground wire located under the control panel,

correctly connected? NO Connect the ground wire correctly.
YES
Replace the ECU.
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 53
The power supply voltage on the sensors (+5V) is too high.

Between CN2--20 (AB) (wiring side) and ground, is Replace the ECU.
the reading ∼ 12V?
YES

YES

potentiometer, and pin (1) (AB) on connection (94)
of the lift control panel.
0.5 AB (1) 0.5 M (1)

0.5 H (2) 0.5 LG (2)
0.5 HG (3) 0.5 AB (3)
0.5 A (4) 0.5 VB (4)
28
94
0.5 AN (5) 0.5 LN (5)
0.5 VB (6) 0.5 N (6)
0.5 N (7) 0.5 GN (7)
0.5 GN (8) 0.5 HL (8)
FAULT CODE 53
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
**
FAULT CODE 54
The power supply voltage on the sensors (+5V) is in short to ground.

Is pin CN2--20 (AB) on connection (135) in short Replace the ECU.
circuit to ground?
YES

YES

of the lift control panel.
0.5 AB (1) 0.5 M (1)

0.5 H (2) 0.5 LG (2)
0.5 HG (3) 0.5 AB (3)
0.5 A (4) 0.5 VB (4)
28
94
0.5 AN (5) 0.5 LN (5)
0.5 VB (6) 0.5 N (6)
0.5 N (7) 0.5 GN (7)
0.5 GN (8) 0.5 HL (8)
FAULT CODE 54
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
**
FAULT CODE 55
Front lift arms calibration must be carried out.
A B
FAULT CODE 56
The wiring on position potentiometer (208) of the front lift arms is in short circuit to +12V (power supply).

Is there a +12V reading between pin CN2--4 (V)
YES
Check the wiring between: pin CN2--4 (V) on con-

nection (135), pin (6) (V) on connection (182) and
the potentiometer, to eliminate the cause of the
short circuit to +12V.
YES
FAULT CODE 56
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 57
The wiring on the position potentiometer (208) of the front lift arms is disconnected or in short to ground.
Replace the potentiometer if interrupted.

Using a digital tester, check the potentiome-
Remove the potentiometer support.
ter.
Disconnect connection (208) on the po- NO NO
Is the electrical resistance between pins (1)
tentiometer.
(VB) and (2) (V) 3 to 4 kΩ?
Are the wiring and the potentiometer da-
maged? YES
YES Is wire (VB) on the potentiometer wiring in
NO
Repair or replace the wiring. short to ground?
Replace the potentiometer if damaged. YES
Check the wire on the potentiometer and eli-

minate the cause of the short to ground.
Remove the control panel and connection

(135) on the ECU.
wires between the potentiometer and con-
nection (135): NO
pin (3) (AB) and pin CN2--20 (AB) on (135);
pin (2) (V) and pin CN2--4 (V) on (135);
pin (1) (VB) and pin CN2--29 (VB) on (135)?
YES
Replace the ECU.
Calibration must be carried out after this Check the wire on the potentiometer and eli-
operation. minate the cause of the short to ground.
FAULT CODE 57
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 58
The front lift arms maximum raise position potentiometer (1) wiring is in short to +12V (power supply).

Remove the control panel and the connections Turn the starter key to the OFF posi-
(135) on the ECU. NO tion.
Turn the starter key to the ON position. Replace the ECU.
Between pin CN2--26 (AR) on connection (135)
(wiring side) and ground, is the reading ∼ 12V?
YES

Check the wiring between pin CN2--26 (AR) and
the potentiometer and eliminate the cause of the
short to +12V.
FAULT CODE 58
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 59
The front lift arms maximum raise position potentiometer (1) wiring is disconnected or in short to ground.

NO Connect the wiring.
Is the maximum raise potentiometer con-
nected?
YES
Disconnect connection (135) on the ECU.

Is there electrical continuity between pin Check the wiring and eliminate the cause of
NO
CN2--26 (AR) on the ECU and the connec- the open circuit.
tion on the potentiometer?
YES
Turn the potentiometer fully clockwise and
Is wire (AR) in short to ground? NO disconnect the relative connection (204). NO
YES Is the electrical resistance between wires
(AR) and (VB) ∼ 600 Ω?
Replace the ECU.
YES
Replace the potentiometer, if interrupted.
FAULT CODE 59
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 61
The front lift arms working position potentiometer (2) wiring is in short to +12V (power supply).

Remove the control panel and the connections Turn the starter key to the OFF posi-
(135) on the ECU. NO tion.
Turn the starter key to the ON position. Replace the ECU.
Between pin CN2--27 (AG) on connection (135)
(wiring side) and ground, is the reading ∼ +12V?
YES

Check the wiring between: pin CN2--27 (AG) and
the potentiometer.
FAULT CODE 61
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 62
The front lift working position potentiometer (2) wiring is disconnected or in short to ground.

Disconnect the control panel. NO Connect the wiring.
Is the working position potentiometer wi-
ring connected?
YES
Disconnect connection (135) on the ECU.

Is there electrical continuity between pin Check the wiring and eliminate the cause of
NO
CN2--27 (AG) on connection (135) and the the open circuit.
potentiometer connection?
YES
Turn the potentiometer fully clockwise and
Is wire (AG) in short to ground? NO disconnect the relative connection (204).
YES Is the electrical resistance between wires NO
(AG) and (VB) ∼ 600 Ω?
Replace the ECU.
YES
Replace the potentiometer, if interrupted.
FAULT CODE 62
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 69
The ECU is faulty or there is a power supply failure.

Remove the control panel and the connections Check the wiring and the power sup-
(135) on the ECU. ply connection on the ECU and elimi-
NO
Turn the starter key to the ON position. nate the cause of the failed power
Is there a +12V reading between pin CN1--15 (MV) supply.
and ground?
YES
Replace the ECU.
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 71
The front lift raising solenoid valve coil (206) is in short circuit to +12V (power supply) r the ECU is faulty.

Is there a +12V reading between pin CN1--10 (ZN)
YES
Check the wiring between: pin CN1--10 (ZN) on

connection (135), pin (3) on connection (182) and
the lifting solenoid valve.
YES
FAULT CODE 71
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 72
The front lift lowering solenoid valve coil (207) is in short circuit to +12V (power supply) or the ECU is faulty.

Is there a +12V reading between pin CN1--11 (BN)
YES
Check the wiring between: pin CN1--11 (BN) on

connection (135), pin (4) on connection(182) e the
lowering solenoid valve.
YES
FAULT CODE 72
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 73
The front lift raising solenoid valve coil (206) is in short circuit.

Disconnect connection (206) on the lifting solenoid
NO Replace the solenoid valve coil if in
valve and measure, using a digital tester, the elec-
short.
trical resistance of the solenoid valve coil.
YES
Wiring: are wires (ZN) and (ZB) in short? NO Replace the ECU.
YES
Check the wiring between the solenoid valve con-

nection, pins (2) e (3) on connection (182) and pins
CN1--6 (ZB) and CN1--10 (ZN) on connection (135)
on the ECU.
FAULT CODE 73
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 74
The front lift lowering solenoid valve coil (207) is in short circuit.

Disconnect connection (207) on the front lift lowe-
ring solenoid valve and measure, using a digital te- Replace the solenoid valve coil if in
NO
ster, the electrical resistance of the solenoid valve short.
coil.
YES
Wiring: are wires (BN) and (BG) in short? NO Replace the ECU.
YES
Check the wiring between the solenoid valve con-

nection, pins (4) and (5) on connection (182) and
pins CN1--11 (BN) and CN1--5 (BG) on connection
(135) on the ECU.
FAULT CODE 74
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 75
The front lift lowering solenoid valve (206) wiring is disconnected or in short to ground, or the solenoid valve
or ECU is faulty.

Is the solenoid valve connection connected?
YES
Disconnect the solenoid valve connection and

measure the electrical resistance on the coil. NO Replace the solenoid valve coil if inter-
Is the resistance ∼ 6 Ω? rupted.
YES
Remove the control panel and connection (135) on

the ECU.
Is there electrical continuity between pin CN1--10 NO Check the wiring and eliminate the
(ZN), pin (3) (ZN) on connection (182) and connec- cause of the open circuit.
tion (206) (ZN) on the solenoid valve?
YES

(ZB), pin (2) (ZB) on connection (182) and connec- NO
tion (206) (ZB) on the solenoid valve?
YES
Is one of the two wires (ZN) and (ZB) in short to

NO Replace the ECU.
ground?
YES

short to ground.
FAULT CODE 75
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 76
The front lift lowering solenoid valve (207) wiring is disconnected or in short to ground, or the solenoid valve
or ECU is faulty.

Is the solenoid valve connection connected?
YES
Disconnect the solenoid valve connection and

measure the electrical resistance on the coil. Replace the solenoid valve coil if inter-
NO
Is the resistance ∼ 6 Ω? rupted.
YES
Remove the control panel and connection (135) on

the ECU.
Is there electrical continuity between pin CN1--11 NO Check the wiring and eliminate the
(BN), pin (4) (BN) on connection (182) and connec- cause of the open circuit.
tion (207) (BN) on the solenoid valve?
YES

(BG), pin (5) (BG) on connection (182) and con- NO
nection (207) (BG) on the solenoid valve?
YES
Is one of the two wires (BN) and (BG) in short to

NO Replace the ECU.
ground?
YES

short to ground.
FAULT CODE 76
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FAULT CODE 77
The lift arms maximum raise potentiometer (1) is not turned fully clockwise.
This fault can be displayed during lift arms calibration.
The front lift does not work and the fault prevents the front lift calibration operation.
Turn the starter key to the OFF position. Turn the potentiometer fully clockwi-
Is the lift arms maximum raise potentiometer tur- NO se.
ned fully clockwise? Does the fault persist?
YES

FAULT CODE 79
The engine speed signal from the alternator is not read by the ECU.
This fault is displayed during lift arms calibration, preventing the operation from being carried out.
Increase the engine speed to switch

Start the engine and accelerate to 1200 rpm. off the lamp.
NO
Is the alternator charging lamp OFF? Does the fault persist?
YES YES
Check the wiring and/or replace the

alternator.

Are the wires connected to the alternator socket NO Connect the wires.
W?
YES
Remove the control panel and the connection on

the ECU. Check the wiring and eliminate the
(R) on connection (135) of the ECU the alternator
socket W?
YES
Replace the ECU.

FAULT CODE 79
0.5 HB (11)
1 N (13)
1 N (14)
0.5 R (15)
0.5 HR (36) 1 VG (21)

1 Z (35)
1 ZN (24)
0.5 VB (29)
1 BG (5)
0.5 LG (8)
1 RV (17)
1 GV (16)
FRONT PTO AND FWD ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT
DIAGRAM
1 Starter switch.
2 FWD in automatic selection ON indicator signal.
3 Front PTO/ alarm ON indicator signal.
4 FWD alarm indicator signal.
5 FWD ON indicator signal.
6 FWD ON sensor pressure switch.
7 LH turn indicator ON input signal (for Front PTO logic).
8 RH turn indicator ON input signal (for Front PTO logic).
9 Front PTO electromagnetic clutch.
10 FWD solenoid valve.
11 Engine revs counter (from alternator) (for Front PTO logic).
12 Bodywork ground.
13 Sensors ground.
14 Power ground.
16 Pushbutton Y.
17 Pushbutton B.
20 Front PTO clutch slip reading coil.
21 Front wheels speed sensor (VAA).
22 Rear wheels speed sensor (VAP).
23 Slope sensor.
24 Steering sensor.
25 RH brake pressure switch.
26 LH brake pressure switch.
27 To fuse 9 (control unit power supply).
28 Front PTO switch.
29 Mechanical shuttle in reverse gear sensor switch.
30 FWD switch (automatic engagement).
31 FWD switch (manual engagement).
32 Shuttle in reverse gear signal from Power Shuttle control unit.
33 Battery.
FRONT PTO AND FWD ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT DIAGRAM
2
31
3
1
30 4
5
29
6
33
28
27
7
26
8
32
25
24
9
23
22 6÷8
10
21 11
19
18 20
16 15 14 13 12
17
MPD2820A
FRONT/REAR ELECTRONIC LIFT ECU DIAGRAM
37 4
36 5
1
35
34
38
33
6
32
7
31 8
6÷8
9
6÷8
30 10
a
6
b
29 a 11
b
c 6
28
a 12
13
b
27
680
14
15
24 26
16
23 25
21
22 20 19 18 17
MPD2818A
SECTION 41 -- STEERING -- CHAPTER 1 1
Chapter 1 -- Steering
CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
41 204 10 Hydrostatic Steering Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
41 204 30 Hydrostatic Steering Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
41 204 34 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
41 204 38 Bench Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2 SECTION 41 -- STEERING -- CHAPTER 1
SPECIFICATIONS
HYDROSTATIC STEERING
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . independent hydrostatic control,
Hydraulic circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fed by services hydraulic pump
Oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . paper cartridge on pump intake

side
Control valve , manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DANFOSS
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ORBITROL, with the rotating

valve controlled directly by the
steering column; the steering
continues to function even if the
pump is damaged
Outfit code:
Two and four wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OSPC 80 ON -- 150 N 1058
Pressure relief valve calibration (24, fig. 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bar 165 to 170

(psi) (2394 to 2465)
Cylinder safety valve calibration (26, fig. 3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bar 230 to÷240

(psi) (3335 to 3480)
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Tightening torque
PART Thread
Nm ft. lbs.
Bolt securing cover to hydrostatic steering housing (21, fig. 3) . . . . . . M 8x1 24 to 36 18 to 27
Steering column flange retaining nut (1, fig. 12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 8x1 23 17
Bolt (2, fig. 12) securing hydrostatic steering to tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 10x1.5 44 32
Hydrostatic steering control pump retaining bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 6x1 8 6
Nut for pump housing cover retaining bolt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M10x1.25 39 29
Nut for securing thrust sleeve to pump drive shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/16”--20

UNF--2B 28 21
SPECIAL TOOLS
Warning -- The operations described in this section List of specific tools required for the various
can only be carried out with ESSENTIAL tools indi- operations described in this section.
cated by an (X). X 291182 Steering wheel extractor.
To work safely and efficiently and obtain the best re- X 292870 Universal pressure testing kit.
specific tools listed below and certain other tools X 293955 Tool for fitting hydrostatic steering to-
which are to be made according to the drawings in- roidal seal.
cluded in this manual. 293389 Plug for fitting the hydrostatic steering
rotating valve return springs.
X 293390 Hydrostatic steering rotor retaining le-
ver.
The oil taken in by the rear transmission casing, by The system is totally hydrostatic, without any type of
means of the gear pump (7), passes through the filter mechanical connection between the steering wheel
(8) and is directed to the hydrostatic steering control and the wheels.
valve (3). Neutral position (fig. 2)
By rotating the steering wheel in a clockwise (or With the wheels parallel (as shown in the drawing),
counter--clockwise) direction, the valve (12) is acti- the rotary valve (12) connected to the steering wheel
vated by the steering column. The valve, which ro- is in the neutral position on the sleeve (11).
tates in a clockwise(or counter--clockwise) direction In this position, held by the springs (12, fig. 3), the in-
in relation to the sleeve (11), directs the oil, by means ternal ducts of parts (11 and 12, fig. 1) are aligned
of internal ducts, to the hydraulic cylinder (2) for and direct the oil from the pump (7) to the discharge
steering the tractor to the left or to the right. pipe (9).
Intake oil
Delivery oil
Static rest oil
Oil returning to reservoir
SECTIONAL VIEWS
Hydrostatic steering operation diagram
1
a. Two wheel drive models 7. Pump
1. Equalization valve 8. Filter
2. Steering cylinders 9. Return to rear transmission
3. Hydrostatic steering control valve 10. Pressure relief valve
4. Check valve 11. Valve seat sleeve (12)
5. Non--return valve 12. Rotary valve
6. Anti--cavitation chamber 13. Anti--cavitation valve
Steering to the right (fig. 3) Steering to the right manually
By turning the steering wheel clockwise, the springs If there is a hydrostatic steering pump failure or oil
(12, fig. 3) deform, allowing the valve (12, fig. 1) to pressure loss, steering can also be performed
rotate in relation to the sleeve (11). manually.
Under these conditions, the following takes place: By turning the steering wheel clockwise, the
-- De--synchronisation of the internal ducts with hydrostatic steering control valve (3, fig. 1) performs
parts (11 and 12, fig. 1), that were aligned during the function of a hand pump, directing oil to the
the neutral phase, resulting in interruption of the control cylinder rod side (2), thereby allowing manual
oil flow to the outlet. steering to the right.
-- Alignment with the same number of internal Steering to the left manually
ducts, connected with the rotor compartments on
By turning the steering wheel counter--clockwise, the
intake from the pump (7, fig. 1) and on delivery to
rotor inside the hydrostatic steering control valve is
the steering cylinders (2), thereby allowing steer-
activated and, acting as a hand pump (as previously
ing to the right.
described), it directs oil to the control cylinder piston
Steering to the left side thereby allowing manual steering to the left.
By turning the steering wheel counter--clockwise, the
grooves inside the parts (11 and 12, fig. 1) and
delivery to the steering control cylinders is inverted,
thereby allowing steering to the left.
Hydrostatic steering operation diagram
a Two wheel drive models Delivery oil

A Steering to the right
B Steering to the left Oil delivery to hydraulic cylinder
Intake oil Oil returning to reservoir

2
27852
3
Hydrostatic steering control valve components
1. Dust seal. 15. Rotor and fixed ring for rotor.
2. Control valve body, rotary valve and rotary valve 16. O--ring seals.
seat sleeve. 17. Cover.
3. Non--return valve ball. 18. Washers.
4. Non--return valve threaded plug. 20. Non--return valve seat screw.
5. VARISEAL seal. 21. Cover retaining screws.
7. Thrust bearing components. 24. Pressure relief valve.
8. Retaining ring for springs (12). 25. Pressure relief valve spring.
9. Rotor drive shaft -- sleeve trim pin. 26. Cylinder safety valve.
11. Rotor drive shaft. 27. Backflow valve balls.
12. Springs for returning sleeve to neutral position. 28. Backflow valve springs.
13. O--ring seal. 29. Backflow valve pins.
14. Thrust washer.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Oil leaking from the hydrostatic 1. VARISEAL seals (5, fig. 3) Replace the seal using tool 293955.
steering unit: faulty.
a. Control side.
b. Cover side.
2. Bolts (21) insufficiently tigh- Tighten the bolts to the prescribed
tened (21). torque (24 to 36 Nm
-- 18 to 27 ft. lbs.).
3. Sealing washers (18) or O-- Replace the washers and seals.
ring seals (16) faulty.
Steering wheel excessively stiff. 1. Hydraulic pump faulty. Repair the pump.
2. Non--return valve (3) held Eliminate foreign bodies and clean
open by foreign bodies or due filter; place a new ball in the seat (if
to absence of ball. missing).
3. Pressure relief valve (24) in- Set the valve correctly.
correctly set.
4. Pressure relief valve (24) Eliminate foreign bodies and clean
jammed or held open by filter.
foreign bodies.
5. Steering column stiffens on its Eliminate the causes.
bushing due to rust, seizure,
etc.
Excessive steering wheel play. 1. Excessive play between the Replace the hydrostatic steering
steering column and the control valve.
coupling with the rotary valve
(5, fig. 3).
2. Excessive play in the coupling Replace the hydrostatic steering
between the shaft (11, fig. 3) control valve.
and the trim pin (9).
3. Excessive play in the splined Replace the hydrostatic steering
coupling between the shaft control valve.
(11) and the rotor (15).
4. Combination of excessive Replace the hydrostatic steering
play as described in the previ- control valve.
ous points.
5. Leaf springs (12) damaged or Replace springs.
fatigued.
The steering wheel turns 1. Inadequate control cylinder Replace the seal.
normally, but the steering is: seal.
a. Slow. 2. Cylinder rod broken. Replace the damaged part.
b. Null. 3. Rotor drive shaft (11) or pin (9) Replace the damaged part.
damaged.
With the engine stopped, the 1. Excessive wear between rotor Replace the hydrostatic steering
steering wheel can be turned and fixed ring (15). control valve.
without turning the wheels.
2. Non--return valve damaged. Replace the hydrostatic steering
control valve.
3. Cylinder safety valve (26) held Eliminate foreign bodies and clean
open by foreign bodies or filter or replace the control valve.
damaged.
(continued)
(continued)
Steering wheel jolts, 1. Incorrect synchronisation of Synchronise correctly.

uncontrollable steering, wheels hydrostatic steering.
turning in the opposite direction 2. Pipes to cylinder inverted. Connect correctly.
to that desired.
The wheels do not maintain the 1. Hydraulic cylinder piston seal Replace the seal.
desired alignment and steering worn.
must be continually corrected 2. Cylinder safety valve (26, Eliminate foreign bodies and clean
with the steering wheel. fig. 3) or backflow valves (27, filter or replace the control valve.
28, 29) held open by foreign
bodies or damaged.
3. Control valve mechanical Replace the control valve.
wear.
Neutral phase of hydrostatic 1. Leaf springs (12), for sleeve Replace the leaf springs assembly.
steering unobtainable. (2) return to neutral position,
During manual control, operation damaged or fatigued.
is normal; when stopping manual 2. Sleeve and rotating valve (2) Eliminate foreign bodies and clean
control the steering wheel tends locked in delivery position be- filter.
to move on its own, or remain cause of the presence of
stationary, but steering continues foreign bodies.
slowly in the direction that was 3. Sleeve (2) crushed on the ro- Check the pressure relief valve
initially selected (motoring), tating valve due to excessive calibration (24, fig. 3).
therefore steering must be pressure.
continually corrected with the
steering wheel.
Vibrations on front wheels 1. Air pockets in the hydraulic Bleed the air and eliminate the
(shimmy). cylinder. causes of possible infiltrations.
2. Wear on mechanical joints on Replace the worn parts.
steering rods.
3. Cylinder safety valve (26) or Eliminate foreign bodies and clean
backflow valves (27, 28, 29) filter or replace the control valve.
held open by foreign bodies or
damaged.
Difficulty in steering in general, or 1. Insufficient pressure. Check the hydraulic pump and the
only in one direction. pressure relief valve calibration (24,
fig. 3).
2. Excessive leakage inside the Replace the control valve.
control valve.
3. Cylinder safety valve (26) in- Eliminate foreign bodies and clean
correctly calibrated or soiled filter or replace the control valve.
with deposits that interfere
with the seal of one of the two
valves.
OVERHAUL
OP. 41 204 10
HYDROSTATIC STEERING WHEEL
(Replacement)
Removal
WARNING
gloves and shoes.
27822
Proceed as follows.
1. Using a sharp tool, remove the NEW HOLLAND 4
symbol at the centre of the steering wheel, un-
screw the nut and the central knob (1).
2. Remove the retaining nut and the steering wheel

(1).
Installation
WARNING
Use suitable tools to align hardware holes. NEVER
USE YOUR FINGERS OR HANDS.
25758
Proceed as follows.
1. Position the steering wheel (1, fig. 5) and the re-

taining nut.
2. Fit the central knob (1, fig. 4), the knob retaining
nut and the NEW HOLLAND symbol at the centre
of the steering wheel.
OP. 41 204 30
HYDROSTATIC STEERING CONTROL VALVE
Removal
WARNING
shoes.
To remove the hydrostatic steering control valve,

proceed as follows:
1. Carry out operation 9010022--Hood removal
R.I. (Only removal).
2. For tractors with cabs, it is advised to remove the
door stop pins in order to fully open the door and
improve access during removal operations.
3. Carry out operation 9011014--Instrument
panel lower guard R.I. (Only removal).
4. Carry out operation 4120410--Hydrostatic
steering wheel R.I. (Only removal).
5. Carry out operation 5541810--Multiple indica-
tor panel R.I. (Only removal).
control switch (2) from their seats, complete with 25761
the dust guard (3). 6

7. Remove the electrical connections (1) con-
nected to the dashboard and remove the dash-
board (2).
25762
7
8. Remove the four retaining bolts (1) on the fuse
box (2) support.
25763
8
9. Remove the two retaining bolts (1), disconnect
the electrical connection (2) and remove the
shuttle control lever, complete with the support
(3).
25764
9
10. Remove the retaining bolts and the power take--
off clutch control lever (1).
25765
10
11. Detach the four pipes (1) on the hydrostatic
steering control valve (2).
25766
11
12. Remove the two nuts (1) and the four bolts (2)
that secure the steering column.
25767
12
13. Remove the steering column (1).
25768
13
14. Detach the hydrostatic steering control valve (1).
25769
14
Installation -- Assemble the electrical connections and the light

To re--fit the hydrostatic steering control valve, control switch, complete with dust cover.
proceed as follows:
-- Carry out operation 5541810--Multiple indica-
-- Re--fit the hydrostatic steering control valve. tor panel R.I. (Installation).
-- Re--fit the steering column shaft on the hydrostat-
ic steering control valve and secure with the nuts -- Carry out operation 4120410--Hydrostatic
and bolts. steering wheel R.I. (Installation).
-- Re--connect the hydrostatic steering delivery -- Carry out operation 9011014--Instrument

and return pipes. panel lower guard R.I. (Only installation).
-- Assemble the power take--off clutch control lever.
-- On tractors with cabs, refit the door stop pin.
-- Assemble the electrical connection and the
shuttle control lever. -- Carry out operation 9010022--Hood removal
R.I. (Installation).
-- Assemble the fuse box support.
-- Assemble the dashboard electrical connections

and the dashboard.
OP. 41 204 34
Disassembly
(with control valve removed)

To disassemble the hydrostatic steering control
valve, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the retaining bolts cover.
24701
15
2. Remove the cover by sliding to the side.
24702
16
3. Remove the rotor fixed ring, the rotor and the in-
side spacer.
4. Remove the two O--ring seals on the rotor fixed

ring.
24703
17
5. Extract the rotor drive shaft
24704
18
6. Extract the thrust washer.
24705
19
7. Remove the threaded plug on the non--return
valve seat.
24706
20
8. Extract the O--ring seal from the control valve
body.
24707
21
9. Rotate the control valve body and extract the
non--return valve ball, the two balls with the rela-
tive pins and the backflow valve springs.
27856
22
10. Position the control valve body and the rotor drive
shaft so that the sleeve--control shaft trim pin is
in a horizontal position.
11. Push the rotating valve inwards, so that the

valve, the valve seat sleeve and the thrust bear-
ing can be extracted from the control valve body.
24709
23
12. Extract the thrust bearing from the rotating valve,
complete with the two external rings, and remove
the spring retaining ring from the valve seat
sleeve.
24710
24
13. Extract the valve--sleeve trim pin.
24711
25
Warning -- on assembly, two reference marks were

made on the rotating valve and the sleeve, corre-
sponding to the neutral position maintained by the
springs. Before removing the springs, check that the
marks are clearly visible, otherwise renew them.
24712
26
14. Extract the rotating valve from the valve seat
sleeve.
24713
27
15. Remove the springs from the neutral position,
extracting them from their seats.
24714
28
16. Remove the dust seal and the O--ring seal from
their seats on the control valve body.
20428
29
17. Using a 6 mm Allen wrench, remove the threaded
plugs from the cylinder safety valves.
20429
30
18. Remove the seal washers.
27857
31
19. Using a 6 mm Allen wrench, remove the calibra-
tion adjuster screws on the cylinder safety valve.
27858
32
20. Turn the control valve body over, extract the
springs and the balls from the two cylinder safety
valves.
20432
33
Cylinder safety valves components (order of
disassembly--assembly).
1. Cylinder safety valve ball. 1 2 3 4 5
2. Pressure spring.
3. Calibration adjuster screw.
4. Seal.
5. Plug.
25790
34
21. Using a 6 mm Allen wrench, remove the threaded
plug on the pressure relief valve and extract the
washer.
20434
35
22. Remove the pressure relief valve adjuster screw.
27859
36
23. Turn the control valve body over and complete
disassembly by extracting the spring and the
pressure relief valve piston.
20436
37
Pressure relief valve components (order of
disassembly--assembly)
1. Pressure relief valve. 1 2 3 4 5
2. Pressure spring.
4. Seal.
5. Plug.
27099
38
24. Thoroughly clean all control valve component
parts.
25. Replace the washers and seals.
26. Carefully check all mechanical parts, replacing

components that show signs of wear.
Assembly
Before re--fitting, lubricate the components with
hydraulic oil.
1. Re--fit the rotating valve on the sleeve, checking

that the reference marks indicated in the drawing
coincide.
24712
39
2. Use tool 293389 to insert the flat and curved
springs (12, fig. 3).
Diagram for fitting springs (12, fig. 3 neutral position

for OSPC 80 ON--150N 1058 hydrostatic steering).
24728
40
3. After inserting the springs in the seat, align and
centre (as shown in the drawing).
24729
41
4. Fit the neutral position spring retaining ring on
the valve seat sleeve, remembering that the ring
must rotate freely without being impeded by the
springs.
24730
42
5. Insert the sleeve--rotor drive shaft trim pin.
24731
43
6. Fit the thrust bearing, following the order and in-
dications shown in the drawing below.
24732
44
1. Bearing external ring
1
2. Thrust bearing
3. Bearing internal ring with bevel facing
contact surface of part (5)
2
4. Rotary valve 3
5. Rotary valve seat sleeve.
4
5
24733
45
7. Position the control valve body so that the hous-
ing seat on the rotating valve sleeve is positioned
horizontally.
8. Lubricate the VARISEL seal (3) with grease and

fit on the outer edge of the guide bushing (1) of
tool 293955.
27824
46
9. Position the tool 293955 complete with compo-
nents (1) and (2) and the VARISEL seal (3) on the
hydrostatic steering control valve body (4).
10. Press fully down, whilst simultaneously rotating
the outer bushing (1) on the tool, in order to facili-
tate the entry of the VARISEL seal (3) in the con-
trol valve body seat.
11. Using the bushing (1), press on the shaft (2), in
the direction indicated by the arrow, in order to
overcome the pressure exerted by the inner
spring. Extract the tool from the control valve
body when the tapered part of the shaft (2) is re-
leased from the seal (3). 27825
47
12. Insert the parts that were previously fitted in op-
erations 26 to 31, on the control valve body, hold-
ing the sleeve -- rotor drive shaft trim pin in a hori-
zontal position, to prevent it from slipping out and
jamming in the slots inside the control valve body.
24739
48
13. Press the rotating valve so as to bring the thrust
bearing into contact with the control valve body.
27826
49
14. Rotate the control valve body and insert the non--
return valve ball into the seat indicated by the ar-
row.
24741
50
15. Screw the threaded plug into the non--return
valve seat until the upper surface is below the
coupling surface of the control valve body.
24742
51
16. Insert the non--return valve balls into the two
seats indicated by the arrows.
27861
52
17. Insert the springs on the backflow valve pins
27862
53
18. Position the pins, complete with springs, in the
backflow valve seats.
27863
54
19. Lubricate the O--ring seal and insert in the seat
on the control valve body.
24746
55
20. Fit the thrust washer, so that the holes coincide
with the holes on the control valve body.
24748
56
21. Make a reference mark on the upper part of the
teeth (1), near the seat (2), to indicate the exact 1
position of the valve--sleeve trim pin.
24748
57
22. Fit the rotor drive shaft into the control valve
body, insert tool 293390 for retaining and cen-
tring the rotor drive shaft, between the rotor drive
shaft and the thrust washer, rotating the shaft so
as to facilitate coupling between the seat (2,
fig. 57) and the trim pin installed on the sleeve.
24749
58
23. To re--fit the rotor, proceed as follows:
a) each time the hydrostatic steering is
disassembled, turn the rotor over so as to limit wear
to the splined coupling;
b) in the following drawing, the rotor shaft has been
removed in order to show the timing between the
rotor, rotor drive shaft and the trim pin;
c) fit the rotor on the drive shaft, remembering that
correct timing is obtained by aligning the teeth (1), on 1
the trim pin axis plane (shown in drawing 58) with the
centre line of one compartment on the rotor.
24750
59
24. Lubricate the two O--ring seals (1) with hydraulic
oil and insert them in the rotor fixed ring seat, fix
in position by aligning the retaining holes (2) with
those present on the thrust washer.
24751
60
25. Fit the cover aligning the retaining holes with
those present on the rotor fixed ring.
24753
61
26. Remove retaining tool 293390 and fit the special
screw and washer in the non--return valve seat,
24754
62
27. Fit the other six cover retaining bolts with the wash-
ers and tighten in diagonal sequence to the torque
setting value shown in the table on page 2.
24755
63
28. Turn over the control valve body and insert (see
component details in fig. 38) the pressure relief
valve piston in the seat indicated in the drawing.
24756
64
29. Insert the pressure relief valve spring.
24757
65
30. Using an 8 mm Allen wrench, insert the pressure
relief valve calibration screw.
NOTE: calibration will be carried out on the work-

bench or on the tractor to the values shown in the
table on page 2.
24758
66
Cylinder safety valves components (order of
disassembly--assembly) 1 2 3 4 5
1. Cylinder safety valve ball.
2. Pressure spring.
4. Seal.
5. Plug.
25790
67
31. Tighten the plug (2) with the relative seal, using an
8 mm Allen wrench, and tighten to the prescribed
torque value 40 to 60 Nm (4.1 to 6.1 kgm), after 1
having carried out the calibration operation on the
workbench or on the machine.
32. Insert the two balls (1) into the cylinder safety 2
valve seats, indicated by the arrows (see compo-
nent details in fig. 67).
25789
68
33. Insert the springs (2, fig. 67) in the cylinder safety
valve seats.
27865
69
34. Using a 6 mm Allen wrench, tighten the two cylin-
der safety valve calibration adjuster bolts (3,
fig. 67).
Note -- calibration will be carried out on the

workbench or on the tractor to the values shown in
the table on page 2.
20475
70
35. Tighten the two plugs (5, fig. 67) and the relative
seals (4) using a 6 mm Allen wrench. Once cal-
ibration is completed, tighten to the prescribed
torque value of 30 Nm (3 kgm).
20429
71
36. When the unit has been assembled, insert the
dust seal in the seat on the control valve body.
24764
72
OP. 41 204 38
Bench Testing 1
A -- CHECKING ROTARY VALVE WEAR
1. Make the connections shown in fig. 76 and com-
plete the circuit as in fig. 73. 7
Using the splined drive shaft (1, fig. 74) hold the
hydrostatic steering control valve in the steering 6
position (right or left). 2
2. Using the handwheel (5), increase the circuit
pressure to approach the pressure relief valve
setting (page 2), without allowing the valve to in-
tervene.
3. Apply a torque wrench (2) to the drive shaft (1) and
tighten to a setting of approx. 34 Nm (25 ft. lbs.),
check that the rotating valve takes more than ten
seconds to complete one full rotation. If less than
ten seconds, replace the complete control valve. 5
Test conditions.
Oil type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDRAULICAR AP51
3
Oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SAE 20 W
Oil temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60_C (140_F)
Hydraulic pump capacity . . . . . . . . . . 12 litres/min.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (3.17 gal/min.) 24911 4
Electric motor speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1450 rpm
73
1. Splined drive shaft -- 2. Plug G 1/2” -- 3. To the restriction --
4. Exhaust -- 5. Three--way coupling G 1/2” -- 6. From delivery
line -- 7. Discharge coupling G 1/2”.
1 2
24912
74
Installation diagram of equipment for testing the rotary valve, seals and for pressure relief valve calibration.
1. Splined drive shaft. 4. Restriction
2. Torque wrench 5. Pressure adjustment handwheel
3. Delivery
B -- CHECKING RETURN TO NEUTRAL E -- CYLINDER SAFETY VALVE CALIBRATION
POSITION For steering to the left
In the same test conditions as A, check that the rotary 1. Make the connections as shown in the diagram
valve automatically returns to the neutral position in fig. 74, and complete the circuit as in fig. 75.
when the drive shaft (1, fig. 74), is released after 2. Using the drive shaft (1, fig. 74), simulate a turn
each simulated steering movement. to the left (counter--clockwise rotation) so as to
C -- CHECKING SEAL EFFICIENCY interrupt the oil flow to the discharge.
In the same test conditions as A, hold the rotary valve 3. Gradually increase the circuit by turning the
in the steering position with the drive shaft (1) for handwheel (5), and check on the pressure gauge
approx. three minutes and check the seals for leaks. that the pressure relief valve (26, fig. 3), is acti-
D -- PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE CALIBRATION vated at the pressure shown on page 2.
1. Make the connections as shown in the diagram in If the pressure differs from the prescribed value,
fig. ( 74) and complete the circuit as in fig. ( 73). increase or reduce the valve setting (26, fig. 3), by
2. Using the drive shaft (1, fig. 74) simulate a turn tightening or slackening the adjuster screw.
(to the left or to the right) so as to interrupt the oil For steering to the right
flow to the discharge. Make the connections as shown in the diagram
3. Gradually increase the circuit by turning the hand- fig. 74 and complete the circuit as in fig. 76. Proceed
wheel (5), and check on the pressure gauge that in the same manner as described above, by simply
the pressure relief valve (24, fig. 3) is activated at reversing the direction of rotation of the drive shaft
the pressure shown on page 2, If not, increase or (1).
reduce the pressure relief valve setting by tighten-
ing or slackening the adjuster screw.
1
1
2
2
3 25800
3
25799
75 76
Cylinder safety valve calibration Cylinder safety valve calibration
for steering to the left for steering to the right
1. From delivery line -- 2. To the restriction -- 1. From delivery line -- 2. To the restriction --
3. Return. 3. Return.
CHECKING THE HYDROSTATIC STEERING
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE WITH CONTROL
VALVE INSTALLED ON TRACTOR.
Proceed as follows:
1 2 3 4 5
1. Start the engine and perform a few steering

movements with the tractor, until the oil reaches
a temperature of approx. 50°C (122°F).
2. Switch off the engine and detach the oil delivery

pipe (4) on the hydraulic cylinder (5). 24915
77
1. Pressure gauge supplied with kit 292870
2. Union 293874 (supplied in kit 292870) to be fitted in
the place of the original union
3. Union 291318 (supplied in kit 292870) to be
connected to the pressure gauge (1)
3. Replace the original union with unions (2 and 3), 4. Hydraulic cylinder oil delivery pipes
and connect the pressure gauge (1) with a scale 5. Hydraulic cylinder.
of 0 to 150 bar (0 to 2175 psi) with kit 292870.
4. Start the engine again, bring the speed to me-

dium rpm and apply full steering lock to bring the
hydraulic cylinder to the stroke end position.
In this condition, the pressure relief valve (24, fig. 3)

should intervene, with the pressure gauge showing
the value prescribed on page 2.
5. If the pressure gauge reading deviates signifi-

cantly from the prescribed value, adjust the valve
(24, fig. 3) by means of the adjuster screw.
Chapter 2 -- Open Center Flow Gear Pump
CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Hydraulic Pump -- Mechanical Shuttle Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Hydraulic Pump -- A 31 XRP 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
41 206 20 Hydrostatic Steering Oil Pump (A 31 XRP 2 pump model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SPECIFICATIONS
HYDRAULIC PUMP -- MECHANICAL

SHUTTLE TRANSMISSION
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gear type with oil suction from
.................................................................. rear transmission casing
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on right--hand side of motor

Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A 25
Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NEW HOLLAND
Operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . driven by engine shaft
Direction of rotation (as seen from drive side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . counter--clockwise

Engine speed to pump speed ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1.08
Maximum speed of rotation (with engine at maximum -- 2300 rpm) . . . . . . . . 2484
Corresponding rated output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l/min. (gal./min) 28.19 (7.4)
Rated output at 1000 rpm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l/min. (gal./min) 11.35 (2.9)
Diameter of driven and driving gear shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 17.400 to 17.418
(in.) (0.68503 to 0.68574)
Internal diameter of seats in supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 17.450 to 17.470
(in.) (0.6870 to 0.6877)
Clearance between gear shafts and seats on supports . . . . . . . . mm 0.032 to 0.070
(in.) (0.0012 to 0.0027)
-- maximum clearance due to wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 0.1
(in.) (0.00393)
Radial clearance of gears in pump body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 0.020 to 0.064
(in.) (0.00078 to 0.00251)
Maximum wear on pump body, suction side,
at position of gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 0.1
(in.) (0.00393)
Width of gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 18.323 to 18.348
(in.) (0.721 to 0.772)
Width of supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 19.796 to 19.812
(in.) (0.7793 to 0.7799)
Width of pump body for gear seats and supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 58.072 to 58.122
(in.) (2.286 to 2.288)
Axial clearance of gears complete with supports in pump body
(recondition if necessary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 0.100 to 0.200
(in.) (0.0039 to 0.0078)
HYDRAULIC PUMP A 31 XRP 2

Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gear type with incorporated
regulated output, oil suction
from rear transmission casing.
on right--hand side of engine
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A 31 XRP 2
Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NEW HOLLAND
Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . driven by engine shaft
Operating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direction of rotation (as seen from drive side) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . counter--clockwise

Maximum speed of rotation (with engine at maximum power . . . 2300 rpm) 2484
Corresponding rated output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l/min. (gal./min) 34.77 (9.2)
Rated output at 1000 rpm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l/min. (gal./min) 14 (3.7)
Start of flow control valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rpm 1216
Flow control valve output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l/min. (gal./min) 18 to 22 (4.75 to 5.8)
Diameter of driven and driving gear shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 17.400 to 17.418
(in.) (0.68503 to 0.68574)
Internal diameter of seats in supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 17.450 to 17.470
(in.) (0.6870 to 0.6877)
Clearance between gear shafts and seats on supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 0.032 to 0.070
(in.) (0.0012 to 0.0027)
-- maximum clearance due to wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 0.1
(in.) (0.00393)
Radial clearance of gears in pump body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 0.020 to 0.064
(in.) (0.00078 to 0.00251)
at position of gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 0.1
(in.) (0.00393)
Width of gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 24.000 to 24.015
(in.) (0.9448 to 0.9454)
Width of supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 24.490 to 24.510
(in.) (0.9641 to 0.9649)
Radial clearance of gears in pump body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 73.135 to 73.160
(in.) (2.879 to 2.88)
at position of gears) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 0.100 to 0.180
(in.) (0.0039 to 0.0070)
Filter
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . full--flow, with replaceable
paper cartridge
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . on pump intake
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Tightening torque
PART Thread
Nm ft. lbs.
Pump control coupling hub locknut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/16 20 UNF 29 21

SECTIONAL VIEWS
25719
Components of pumps C 42, BOSCH 25 (Mechanical Shuttle Transmission)

1. Nut. 8. Driven and driving gear shafts.
2. Safety washer. 9. Gear support.
3. Circlip. 10. Pump body.
4. Driving shaft seal. 11. Front cover.
5. Control side cover. 12. Safety washer.
6. Cover seals. 13. Bolt.
7. Gear support.
25720
2
Pump components A 31 XRP 2 (Power Shuttle Transmission)
1. Plug. 14. Seals (13).

2. Seal ring. 15. Spacer.
3. Cursor seat (12). 16. Cover seals.
4. Spring. 17. Pump body.
5. Washer. 18. Gear support.
6. Bolt. 19. Driven and driving gear shafts.
7. Plug. 20. Gear support.
8. Seal ring. 21. Control side cover.
9. Safety ring. 22. Driving shaft seal.
10. Seal ring. 23. Circlip.
11. Fifth wheel 24. Safety washer.
12. Cursor. 25. Nut.
13. Control valve body.

The hydraulic pump is of the gear type with spur The rear hydraulic pump controls the hydrostatic
gears and function with non--stop flow according to steering and various services: front and rear
the engine rpm. differential lock, power take--off and relative brake,
It is fitted on the rear side of the right hand engine four wheel drive engagement, POWER SHUTTLE
support and are driven by a shaft gear unit. gear.
The oil is taken from the rear transmission casing, Supplied with a control valve to reduce the quantity
passing through a filter. of oil sent at high speeds.
OVERHAUL
OP. 41 206 20
HYDROSTATIC STEERING OIL PUMP
(A 31 XRP 2 PUMP MODEL)
(With the pump removed)
Disassembly
ATTENTION 2
shoes.
Proceed as follows:
1. Remove the bolts (6, fig. 2) and the relative safe- 25227
ty washers (5).
2. Remove the nut (25) that secures the sleeve to 3
the pump driving shaft and the safety washer Assembly
(24).
ATTENTION
3. Remove the control side cover (21), the circlip
(23) and the seal (22). Always use appropriate tools to align hardware
4. Mark the parts (17, 18, 19 and 20), in order to re--
fit them in the same position, if in good condition.
13. To re--fit the pump carry out operations. 7 to 1 in
5. Remove the supports (18 and 20), and gears (19) reverse order, referring to fig. 2. Proceed as fol-
from the control side cover (21) and the pump body lows:
(17).
6. Recover the seals (16 and 14) and the anti--ex-
trusion rings. to re--fit the pump carry out operations 7 to 1;
7. Remove the plugs (1 and 7) with the relative always ensure maximum cleanliness to prevent
seals, remove the flow control components from foreign matter from entering and damaging the
the body (13), i.e.: the cursor seat (3), the cursor pump;
(12), the spring (4). fit together the previously marked parts (17, 18, 19
and 20), referring to operation 4, in the original
Once the parts are removed, proceed as positions;
follows:
mount the gear supports (18 and 20) in the pump
8. Check that the gear contact surfaces are flat and body, positioning as shown in fig. 2;
perpendicular to their supports. Interpose a thin
layer of carbon black; small rough spots can be mount the seals (22), on the control side cover
removed using extremely fine and adequately lu- (21), facing towards the inside and insert the cir-
bricated abrasive paper. clip (23).
9. Check that the axial play of the gear--support unit insert the plastic anti--extrusion rings on the seals
in the pump body is 0.100 to 0.180 mm (14 and 16), fitting between parts (13) (15) (17)
(0.0039 to 0.0070 in.) The distance (2, fig. 3) (21), as shown in fig. 2;
must be 0.100 to 0.180 mm (0.0039 to 0.0070
in.) less than the distance (1). Fit the washers (5) and tighten the retaining bolts
(6);
If necessary, true the flat surfaces involved using
lubricated abrasive paper to remove extremely small Fit the washer (24) and the locknut (25).
quantities of material.
10. Clean all constituent parts thoroughly.
11. Replace seals (16 and 22, fig. 2).
12. Lubricate the parts with the same oil used in the
system.
SECTION 44 -- AXLES AND WHEELS -- CHAPTER 1 1
SECTION 44 -- AXLES AND WHEELS
Chapter 1 -- Axles and Wheels
CONTENTS

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Sectional Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
44 101 22 Front Axle Hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
44 101 30 Front Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
44 101 46 Stub Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
44 511 80 Checking the Alignment of the Leading Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2 SECTION 44 -- AXLES AND WHEELS -- CHAPTER 1
SPECIFICATIONS
Type
yp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . upside
p down U,, telescopic
p
oscillating at centre
Wheel angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. 2°, corresponding to approx.
(mm) 0.059 (15)
for 16” rims
Toe--in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in. 0 to 0.019 (0 to 5)
(mm)
Stub axle articulation
Diameter of stub axle pin (7, page 4) at bushings (6) . . . . . . . . . . in. 1.4945 to 1.4960
(mm) (37.961 to 38.000)
Internal diameter of fitted bushings (6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ” 1.4980 to 1.5015
(38.050 to 38.140) (*)
Clearance between stub axle pin and relative bushings . . . . . . . . ” 0.0019 to 0.0070
(0.050 to 0.179)
Axle articulation
Diameter of axle articulation pin (1, page 4) axle articulation . . . . in. 1.4945 to 1.4960
(mm) (37.961 to 38.000)
Internal diameter of fitted bushings (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ” 1.4980 to 1.5015
(38.050 to 38.140) (*)
Clearance between stub axle pin and relative bushings . . . . . . . . ” 0.0019 to 0.0070
(0.050 to 0.179)
(continued)
(*) Value to be obtained without refacing.
(cont.)
Wheel tracks in. (mm)

Models Tires
A B C D E F G
6.0016
6.5--16 53.11 57.04 60.98 64.92 68.85 72.79 76.73

(1349) (1449) (1549) (1649) (1749) (1849) (1949)
6.50--16 F2
7.50--16
53.42 57.36 61.29 65.23 69.17 73.11 77.04
(1357) (1457) (1557) (1657) (1757) (1857) (1957)
7.50--16 F2
TN55D
TN65D
9.15L 15 F2
TN70D
TN75D
27X9.5--15 F2
27X9.5--15 HF
56.33 60.27 64.21 68.14 465.78 76.02 79.96
(1431) (1531) (1631) (1731) (11831) (1931) (2031)
11L--15 I1
11L--15 F3
25/10LLX15 TT
2WD front wheel tracks diagram
A
B
C
D
G
F
E
27460 mm
1
SECTIONAL VIEWS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
18 8
9
17
10
14 13 12 11
16 15
25990
4
2
Sectional views of the stub axle, articulation pin and front axle
1. Axle articulation pin. 10. Bronze thrust ring.

2. Axle articulation bushings. 11. Seal.
3. Steering transverse tie--rod. 12. Wheel hub.
4. Stub axle pin control lever. 13. Tapered roller bearing for wheel.
5. Axle support. 14. Cover for bearing greasing and adjustment.
6. Bushings. 15. Steel thrust ring.
7. Stub axle pin. 16. Grub screw for cap (11) and thrust washer (12).
8. Support ring grub screw (13). 17. Control cylinder fulcrum pin (18).
9. Cap. 18. Control cylinder installation position.
TIGHTENING TORQUES
C1 -- 49 Nm
(36 ft. lbs.)
C2 -- 115 Nm
(85 ft. lbs.)
C6 -- 186 to 206 Nm
(137 to 151 ft. lbs.)
C5 -- 186 to 206 Nm C5 -- 49 to 68.7 Nm C3 -- (*)

(137 to 151 ft. lbs.) (36 to 51 ft. lbs.)
C4 -- 186 to 257.7 Nm
(137 to 190 ft. lbs.)
25991
3
Torque settings -- front axle wheel hub side
C1 Retaining bolt for axle articulation pin. C6 Stub axle pin control lever retaining bolt nut.
C2 Retaining bolt holding the disk to the wheel hub. C7 Nut securing cylinder to fulcrum pin.
C3 Bearings adjuster nut.
C4 Axle end securing nut. (*) See operations 12 and 13, page 14
C5 Cover for bearing greasing.
C8 -- 102 to 123.5 Nm
(75 to 91 ft. lbs.)
C9 -- 125 to 154.5 Nm
(92 to 114 ft. lbs.)
C10 -- 29.4 to 46.4 Nm

25992 (22 to 34 ft. lbs.)
Torque settings front axle steering tie--rod side
C8 Stub head locknut for steering transverse tie--rod. C10Power steering cylinder pipes securing nut.
C9 Locknut for steering transverse tie--rod.
Tightening torque
PART Thread
Nm ft. lbs.
Front axle
Axle articulation pin retaining bolt (C1, page 5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M10x1.25 49 36
Nut (C2) securing leading wheel to hub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 18x1.5 115 85
Nut (C3) for bearing adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20 x 1.5 (*) (*)
Nut (C4) for pin securing end of axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M20 x 1.5 186 to 257.7 137 to 190
Cover (C5) for wheel hub bearing greasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -- 49 to 68.7 36 to 51
Nut (C6) for stub axles left and right--hand levers retaining bolt . . M 14 x 1.5 186 to 206 137 to 151
Nut (C7) securing cylinder to fulcrum pin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 18x1.5 186 to 206 137 to 151
Stub head locknut (C8, page 6) for steering transverse tie--rod . . .

75 to 91
M 16x1.5 102 to 123.5
Locknut (C9) for steering transverse tie--rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 20x1 125 to 154.5 92 to 114
Nut (C10) securing power steering cylinder pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

-- 29.4 to 46.4 22 to 34
(*) See operations 12 and 13, page 14
SPECIAL TOOLS

Warning -- The operations described in this section operations described in this section.
indicated by an (X). 292400 Wheel lifting hook.
results, it is also necessary to use the recommended 290793 Adaptor (M12 x 1.25) for axle articula-
specific tools listed below and certain other tools tion pin (with 292927).
292927 Articulated axle pin extractor M14 x 1.5.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Abnormal tire wear. 1. Incorrect tire pressure. Inflate the tires to the correct
pressure, referring to the
recommended pressures in the Use
and Maintenance handbook, and the
pressures indicated by the tire
manufacturers.
2. Incorrect front wheel toe--in. Correct the toe--in.
Poor tractor stability. 1. Incorrect tire pressure. Inflate the tires to the correct
pressure, following the instructions
given above.
OVERHAUL
Op. 44 101 22
FRONT AXLE HUB
Disassembly
WARNING
gloves and shoes.
The wheel hubs can be removed without removing

the axle from the tractor.
Proceed as follows for each wheel.
1. Lock the rear wheels using suitable chocks. 25993
2. Lift the front part of the tractor. 5
3. Place a mechanical stand (1) under the engine

sump and insert a wooden block between the en-
gine sump and the stand.
25994
6
4. Remove the front wheel retaining bolts (1).
24767
7
5. Remove the cover (1) for wheel hub bearing
greasing.
1
24775
8
6. Remove the wheel hub bearing adjuster nut se-
curing ring (1).
24776
9
7. Using a socket wrench, unscrew the wheel hub
bearing adjuster nut.
24777
10
8. Remove the wheel hub (2) and recover the bear-
ings (1 and 3).
1 2 3
24778
11
9. Replace worn bearings and faulty seals using
suitable extractors and punches.
24780
12
10. Fill the wheel hub with AMBRA GR-9 grease.
1 2 3
Assembly
1. Refit the wheel hub (2), complete with bearings
(1 and 3).
24778
13
2. Using a torque wrench, tighten the nut to a torque
of 98 Nm (72 ft. lbs.), whilst rotating the wheel
hub (1) to settle the bearings.
3. Loosen the nut, then tighten again to a torque of 1
24 to 29 Nm (1.8 to 2.2 ft. lbs.), whilst continuing
to rotate the wheel hub.
NOTE: The nut must be replaced each time the

wheel hub is fitted.
4. Check the rolling torque R, bearing in mind that:

24779
14
R ≤ 0.8 kgm (5.78 pound-force foot)
5. Secure the nut (1) in position.
6. Refit the cover (1, fig. 17) for wheel hub bearing
greasing.
24776
15
Op. 44 101 30
FRONT AXLE
Removal
DANGER
equipment
To totally remove the front axle from the tractor,

proceed as follows.
25993
1. Lock the rear wheels using suitable chocks.

16
2. Lift the front part of the tractor.

25994
17
24767
18
5. Disconnect the power steering cylinder (2) hoses
(1).
25995
19
6. Remove the axle articulation pin retaining bolt
(1).
25996
20
7. Secure the axle by means of a sling (1).
25997
21
8. Take out the axle articulion pin using extractor
with sliding weight (292927), 1, equipped with
adaptor (290793) and extension.
25998
22
9. Remove the complete axle (1).
24772
23
Installation
To refit the complete axle on the tractor, follow the
disassembly procedure in reverse order. Proceed as
follows.
WARNING
1. Using a bronze punch fit the axle articulation pin

(1).
25996
2. Fit the axle articulation pin retaining bolt (1).
24
3. Connect the hoses (1) of the power steering cyl-

inder (2).
4. Fit the front wheels.
5. Remove the support stand.
6. Lower the tractor and remove the sling.
7. Connect the battery negative cable.
25995
25
Op. 44 101 46
STUB AXLE
Disassembly
WARNING
Proceed as follows for each wheel, remembering

that the stub axles can be removed without removing
the axle from the tractor.
1. Lock the rear wheels using suitable chocks.

25993
2. Lift the front part of the tractor.
26

25994
27
24767
28
5. Position a hydraulic jack under the stub axle and
unscrew the bolt (1) securing the control lever (2)
to the stub axle pin.
24782
29
6. Extract the control lever (1) from the stub axle pin
(2).
24783
30
7. Lower the hydraulic jack and remove the stub
axle (1)
1
24784
31
8. Unscrew the bolts securing the axle end (1).
32
9. Remove the axle end (1).
24786
33
10. Clamp the end of the axle in a vice and, using an
extractor tool, extract the stub axle pin articula-
tion bushings (1).
24787
34
Assembly
To refit the stub axle, follow the disassembly
procedure in reverse order, using a striker to fit the
new bushings on the axle ends.
24788
35
11. Fit the axle end (1).
24786
36
12. Refit the cap (9, fig. 2) at the base of the stub
axle, then the shim adjuster rings (1) inserting
them on the stop grub screws (8 and 14, as
shown in figure 2).
24789
37
13. Fit the stub axle on the axle end.
14. Position the control lever (1) on the stub axle pin
(2) then tighten the retaining bolt.
24783
38
ADJUSTMENTS
Op. 44 511 80
CHECKING THE ALIGNMENT OF THE
LEADING WHEELS
WARNING
Handle all parts carefully. Do not put your hands or A
A+X
WARNING
NEVER USE YOUR FINGERS OR HANDS. B+0 to 5 (.197 ins.)
mm
Check the alignment of the leading wheels, bearing in
mind that for driving in a straight line, the wheels must
be at an angle of 2° to the ground, corresponding to
a difference of approximately 15 mm (.590 ins.), for 16” B
rims, between the top and bottom edges of the rim (fig.
a).
8821
When driving in a straight line, the wheels must also
be parallel to longitudinal axis of the tractor, or have
a maximum of 5 mm (.197 ins.) toe--in at the front, as
measured between the edges of the rims.
To check the toe--in exactly, proceed as follows:

39
1. Inflate the front tires to a pressure of 2.5 bar (36
psi).

of the tractor.

4. On the horizontal plane passing between the

centres of the wheels, measure the distance (B)
between the front inside edges of the rims (see
fig. b).
5. On the horizontal plane passing between the

centres of the wheels, measure the distance be-
tween the rear inside edges of the rims, checking
that the distance is equal to (B) or exceeds it by up
to a maximum of 5 mm (.197 ins.).
6. If necessary, correct the toe--in by adjusting the

end of the transverse steering tie--rod.
SECTION 50 -- CAB AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM -- CHAPTER 1 1
Chapter 1 -- Cab Air Conditioning System
CONTENTS

Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Special Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Main Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Sanden SD 5H11 Model Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Filter/Dryer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Thermostatic Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Evaporator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Cab Heating and Ventilation Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Electric Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Temperature Control Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Cab Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Air Conditioning and Temperature Control Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Heating Control Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3-Speed Electric Fan Control Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
50 200 03 Function and Cooling Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Pressure Variations at Different Altitudes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Cab Vents Temperature Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Refrigerant Recovery -- Recycling and Evacuation -- Charging Stations . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Dehydration, Recharging and Refrigeration Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
System Charging Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
2 SECTION 50 -- CAB AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM -- CHAPTER 1

Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Checks and Eventual Elimination of Gas Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Checking for Refrigerant Leaks Using an Electronic Leak Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Compressor Drive Belt Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Cab Air infeed Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Cab Heating/Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Cab Heating Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Evaporator Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Electric Fan Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The refrigerant must be handled with great care in -- freezing of the skin caused by contact with liquid
order to avoid personal injury: always use safety refrigerant may be treated by gradually warming
goggles and gloves. the injured area with cold water, followed by the
application of a greasy cream. Request medical
assistance.
Avoid contact with skin and eyes. Liquid refrigerant
can cause freezing of the skin and serious damage
to the eyes, sometimes resulting in permanent -- the air conditioning system contains a mixture of
blindness. refrigerant and oil under high pressure; under no
circumstances loosen pipe fittings/unions or
work on the pipes without having first evacuated
Keep the refrigerant container away from heat the system.
sources. Heat will cause an increase in pressure of
the refrigerant and could cause the container to
explode.
-- for the same reason, never unscrew the com-
pressor oil level plug when the system is
charged.
If refrigerant comes into contact with a naked flame
or a hot metal surface it produces a toxic gas. If
inhaled, this gas can cause serious poisoning.
-- do not heat the refrigerant container. If the tem-
perature exceeds 50 °C (122 °F) the pressure in-
crease rapidly.
To avoid the possibility of accidents take the simple
precautions described below.
-- keep the air conditioning system away from heat

The operation of emptying and charging the system sources to prevent explosions as a result of an in-
must be carried out in a well--ventilated area, well crease in pressure in the system.
away from any naked flames.
When transferring refrigerant from one container to

During the charging and emptying operations, take another, only use homologated liquid refrigerant
the necessary precautions to protect the face and containers equipped with safety valves.
above all the eyes from accidental contact with
refrigerant.
Never fill liquid refrigerant containers over 80% of
their maximum capacity.
In the event of an accident, proceed as follows:
-- if the refrigerant makes contact with the eyes, Do not modify the settings of safety valves and the
wash immediately with a few drops of mineral oil, control devices.
then continue washing with a solution of boric
acid and water (one spoonful of acid in 1/4 glass
of water). Request medical assistance immedi- Never connect the recovery/recycling and
ately. evacuation/charging stations to electrical power
outlets with voltages other than those specified; do
not leave the stations powered up unless they are to
be used immediately.
ADJUSTMENT
Warning -- The air conditioning system will not func-
tion when the engine is not running, as the engine
drives the compressor.
To obtain correct cab air conditioning, when the
system is in operation keep the recirculation vents
open, while keeping the doors and front and rear
The air conditioning system provides cool or warm windows closed.
dehumidified air.
For maximum cooling, the knob (3, fig. 13) must be

To operate the system, proceed as follows. turned fully to the left in a counter--clockwise
direction.
SWITCHING ON THE AIR CONDITIONING

NOTE: In order to increase the pressure inside the
cab, and prevent foreign bodies entering when work-
Starting the system at low temperatures can damage ing in extremely dusty conditions, it is advised to keep
the compressor. Only operate the air conditioner the recirculation vents closed.
when the engine is hot and the temperature inside
the cab is at least 20 °C (68 °F).
Warning -- Before starting the engine, make sure

that the air conditioning push button (2, fig. 13) is in The conditioner dehumidifying function operates at
the “off” position. all temperatures and can be set by rotating the knob
(3, fig. 13).
In order to create optimum temperature conditions,

Warning -- Before switching on the conditioner, al- after prolonged idle periods in hot sunshine, it is
ways switch on the electric fan. advised to start the tractor moving, switch on the air
When the fan is switched off the air conditioning will conditioning and open the rear window for
not function. approximately one minute, to discharge the heated
air in the cab.
With the engine running and the electric fan on, press
push button (2, fig. 13) to start the air conditioner. SWITCHING OFF THE AIR CONDITIONING
SYSTEM
After a few minutes of operation, the liquid visible in

the sight glass at the top of the filter (3, fig. 2) should
be clear and free of bubbles. Before stopping the engine, always switch off the air
If not, contact the specialized personnel at your conditioner by pressing push button (2, fig. 13), then
dealer. turn the fan control knob (1) to the “off” position.
SPECIAL TOOLS
Warning -- The operations described in this section can only be carried out with ESSENTIAL tools indicated by
an (X).
To work in safety and to obtain the best possible results while saving both time and energy, we recommend that
the other specific tools in the list are also used.
List of specific tools required for the various operations described in this section
X 294030 Evacuation and charging machine
X 294048 Recovery and recycling machine
294044 Flexible hoses for 294030 and for 294048
294043 Tool kit for 294030
294042 Filter/dryer for 294048
294036 Gas leak detector
293826 Thermal tape for expansion valve
X 293831 Combs for cleaning and straightening the fins on the condenser and
evaporator
293825 Oil for station pumps 294030 and 294048
SPECIFICATIONS
SANDEN SD 5H11 Compressor
Number of cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Total displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm3 110
Maximum rotation speed . . . . . rpm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6000
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kg 6.5
(lbs.) (14.5)
Quantity of lubricating oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm3 185
(oz.) (6.25)
Type of lubricating oil (code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PAG SP20
Air conditioning system Gas HRC134a

Quantity of HFC--134a refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gr (oz.) 800 (28.2)
System delivery side pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bar (psi) 10 to 22 (145 to 290)
System suction side pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bar (psi) 0.2 to 2.5 (3 to 36)
Pressure switch setting (high pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bar (psi) 25 (363)
Pressure switch setting (low pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bar (psi) 2 (29)
Temperature of refrigerant fluid
at compressor outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . oC (oF) 60 to 120 (140 to 248)
at condenser outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . oC (oF) 40 to 60 (104 to 140)
at evaporator outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . oC (oF) 0 to 15 (32 to 59)
Maximum capacity of electric centrifugal fan
I, II, III speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m3/min 3.0 to 6.5
The function of the air conditioning system is to As regards air purity, no precise limits have been
create and maintain optimum working conditions defined; however, it is important to remember that the
inside the tractor cab. human organism gradually alters the composition of
the air in the surrounding environment by breathing,
The climate inside the cab essentially depends on increasing the amount of carbon dioxide and
four factors: humidity, and decreasing the amount of oxygen, etc.
-- temperature; These problems can be eliminated by allowing a

small flow of external air to enter the cab. However,
-- humidity; as agricultural tractors are often used in dusty
conditions (dust from the earth, hay, etc.), the
-- speed; installation of dry filters on the external air inlets
provides a simple solution.
-- purity of the air in the cab.
The use of air conditioning in tractors and agricultural
Obviously ”ideal” conditions will vary from person to machinery in general serves to neutralise unpleasant
person, and so it is not possible to specify optimum climatic conditions inside the cab; the air conditioning
values for the above factors; however, we can system controls the temperature and humidity of the
specify a range of values within which the majority of air drawn into and already present in the cab so as to
people will feel most comfortable. maintain a comfortable climate for the operator.
As regards temperature and humidity, we can define

The operating principle of the system is similar to that
a zone, known as the ’comfort zone’, which the
of a domestic refrigerator: heat is removed from the
temperature and humidity combination corresponds
air by means of a physical process (the evaporation
to satisfactory climatic conditions.
of a liquid) which draws heat from the surrounding
environment.
From the diagram it can be seen that humidity should
be within the range of 30% to 70%. Below 30% there
is excessive dehydration of the mucous tissue of the The liquid used in this process(refrigerant) is a
nose and throat, whereas above 70% an product with a high refrigeration coefficient, low
uncomfortable sense of dampness may be toxicity and mixes well with lubricating oils.
perceived. The temperature may therefore vary
between 18 and 28°C (64 and 82°F).
The various components of the system are
connected by pipes in which the refrigerant
The speed of the air flow must not be so great as to
circulates.
cause discomfort; speeds of 0.07 -- 0.25 m/s are
normally acceptable.
Relative humidity %
Simplified psychometric diagram
1. Sensation of unbearable coldness.
2. Sensation of coldness.
3. Comfort zone.
4. Sensation of heat.
25372 Temperature oC
5. Sensation of unbearable heat.
1
MAIN COMPONENTS The refrigerant, in liquid state at high pressure, is
purified by passing through the filter/dryer (3) from
The air conditioning system comprises five main where it flows to the expansion valve (4), which
components: restricts the flow of refrigerant and thus reduces its
pressure.
1. Compressor;
2. Condenser; As it passes through the expansion valve (4), part of
3. Filter/dryer; the refrigerant is transformed into vapour and the low
4. Thermostatic expansion valve; temperature mixture of vapour and liquid thus formed
5. Evaporator. enters the evaporator (5).
To understand the operating cycle of the system,
follow the flow of the refrigerant starting from the Here the electric fan causes a continuous circulation
compressor (1). of the cab air over the fins of the evaporator (5),
helping the refrigerant to absorb heat from the air and
The compressor draws in vaporized refrigerant at a thus change completely from a liquid to vapour.
pressure of 0.2 to 2.5 bar (3 to 36 psi) compressing
it to a pressure of 10 to 22 bar (145 to 190 psi).
The evaporation process removes heat from the air
The refrigerant, heated by compression to 60 to 120 passing over the evaporator (5) and thus reduces
°C (140 to 248 °F), is directed to the condenser coil the temperature inside the cab.
(2) (still in vapour form) located in front of the engine
radiator.
The flow of air over the cold surface of the evaporator
The air flow, produced by the electric fan and the (5) also condenses some of the moisture in the air
forward movement of the tractor, cools the refrigerant and therefore reduces the humidity in the cab.
by means of heat exchange.
This action cools the refrigerant to the point of On leaving the evaporator (5) at 0 to 15 °C (32 to 59
condensation between 40 to 60 °C (104 to 140 °F) °F) the low pressure mixture is taken in by the
depending on the outside temperature, changing the compressor (1) to start a new cycle.
vapour into liquid.
5 4 3 2
25372
2
Schematic diagram of the air conditioning system
1. Compressor. 4. Expansion valve with thermostatic sensor.
2. Condenser. 5. Evaporator.
3. Filter/dryer.
The compressor serves to pressurise the refrigerant
and force it through the system. 1 2 3 4 5
Sanden SD 5H11 Model Compressor
Axial reciprocating piston type, driven from the

engine crankshaft via a vee belt.
The operation of the compressor can be summarized

as follows:
The swashplate (4), on which pivot the ball ends of

the connecting rods of the pistons (2), rests on the 25375
cam rotor (5).
3
As the cam rotor rotates it exerts a continuous thrust Axial flow reciprocating piston compressor
on the swashplate, which is prevented from rotating SANDEN SD 5H11
by the coupling with the fixed gear (3). 1. Combined inlet and discharge valve.
2. Piston with seal ring.
The angle of the swashplate causes the 3. Drive gear.
reciprocating movement of the pistons. 4. Swash plate.
5. Cam rotor.
The reed valve (1) on the cylinder head with five
lobes (one for each piston) controls the inlet and
discharge stages of the cylinders. The following points should also be
remembered:
The valve opening and closing system is automatic,
achieved by preloading of the shutter blades. Never leave the compressor oil container open,
always make sure that it is tightly closed. If left
The rotating parts of the compressor are lubricated exposed the oil will absorb humidity from the air and
by special oil, inserted during assembly, some of may, subsequently, damage the system.
which circulates through the system mixed with the
refrigerant. Do not transfer compressor oil from the original
container to another container.
Do not introduce any additives to the compressor oil.

COMPRESSOR OIL -- TYPE AND Any additional substances could contain elements
QUANTITY which are incompatible with the chemical base of the
refrigerant and thus alter its characteristics.
The tractor is equipped with a SANDEN SD 5H11 Do not use engine oil of any type to lubricate the
compressor for R134a refrigerant. compressor and the system.
After assembly, the compressor is filled with 185 cm3 Warning -- If the system develops significant leaks of
(6.25 oz.) of PAG SP20 lubricating oil. R134a refrigerant, there will also be a significant loss
of PAG SP20 compressor oil. It will therefore be nec-
In case of top up or oil change only use this type of essary to check the compressor oil level, remember-
oil. ing that, on average, only 130 to 135 cm3 (4.25 to 4.5
oz.) of the total quantity of lubricating oil (185 cm3
It is not necessary to check the compressor oil level [6.25 oz.]) will be present in the compressor, as the
unless the system develops significant gas leaks. remaining (50--55 cm3 [1 to 1.5 oz.]) will be in circula-
tion through the various system components. For
problems of this type, we recommend that you seek
assistance from an authorized NEW HOLLAND ser-
vice centre.
Condenser
The condenser (1) is the system component in which

the refrigerant vapour condenses to form a liquid.
The condenser works in similar way to the engine

cooling radiator, allowing the vapour to give up heat
to the external air.
It comprises a series of inner tubes through the 27664

refrigerant flows and a outer shell consisting of a
series of thin aluminium fins which increase the 4
surface area in contact with the cooling air flowing
through the condenser.
The condenser radiator is fitted under the engine

bonnet, in front of the engine radiator. This is the ideal
position to take full advantage of the air flow from the
radiator cooling fan, necessary for heat exchange.
Filter/Dryer
The filter/dryer (1) is fitted under the engine bonnet,

positioned between the condenser and the
expansion valve, performs two basic functions,
acting as a filter to remove solid and liquid particles
from the refrigerant and as a temporary storage
container during variable charge stages.
It is important to eliminate water from the system to

prevent corrosion and consequent damage to the
components.
27663
The filter therefore contains substances capable of
absorbing humidity. 5
Solid particles, such as grit, metal particles produced

by the mechanical wear of the compressor, oxides,
etc., can also damage the system and so the filter
incorporates screens to retain them.
Thermostatic Expansion Valve
1 2
This valve serves to reduce the pressure of the liquid
refrigerant from the condenser so that the refrigerant 3
entering the evaporator can evaporate and thus take
heat from the air which is to be cooled.
4
The expansion valve has two main functions:
7
6 5
-- metering: the calibrated bore (6, fig. 6) inside the 25389
valve body creates a difference in the pressure of
the refrigerant between the inlet (4) (liquid state) 6
and the outlet (7) (mixed liquid/vapour state); the Expansion valve block.
calibrated bore (6) also serves to atomise the re- 1. From the evaporator outlet.
frigerant to facilitate subsequent evaporation; 2. Thermostatic sensor.
3. To compressor suction inlet.
4. From filter/dryer.
-- modulation: inside the valve body a thermostatic 5. Spring.
sensor controls the valve aperture so that the 6. Calibrated bore and ball.
right quantity of refrigerant enters the evaporator 7. To evaporator inlet.
to ensure complete evaporation.
NOTE: In the event of malfunction, replace the valve.

If the thermostatic sensor (2, fig. 6) detects an
increase in the temperature of the refrigerant at the
evaporator outlet, the flow of refrigerant is increased.
If the temperature in the cab drops or the compressor

starts to operate at a higher capacity (due to an
increase in engine speed), the flow rate into the
evaporator is reduced.
The expansion valve is installed on the evaporator

inlet fitting (7), and as the internal refrigerant flow
control system is completely automatic, it requires no
special maintenance.
To perform functional testing, with the system is fully

charged, check that the system operating pressures
are those indicated on page 6.
Evaporator Thermostatic switch (ANTI--FROST)
The cycle is completed inside the evaporator.
The refrigerant at the expansion valve outlet is

mixture of vapour liquid at low temperature and low
pressure.
As it passes through the evaporator it absorbs heat

from the cab air, evaporates, and is then taken in by
the compressor.
27769
7
The operation of the evaporator is controlled by the
expansion valve which regulates the flow of The thermostatic switch (thermostat) is a safety
refrigerant to obtain the required degree of air device, fitted with a sensor (1, fig. 7) inserted on the
cooling. evaporator outlet pipes (2), where it constantly
monitors the temperature.
The evaporator performs the opposite function to the

condenser, but it is constructed in a similar way, the The sensor bulb is filled with a special gas which
only differences being the overall dimensions and the expands or contracts according to the temperature,
internal pipe layout. acting on a membrane connected to a complex
mechanism which opens or closes an electric circuit
connected to the compressor electro--magnetic
The evaporator also has another function: clutch, switching the compressor on or off as
dehumidification of the cab. required.
The air passing over the evaporator contains a The thermostatic sensor (1) therefore prevents
certain quantity of moisture, and this must be kept ice from forming on the evaporator, as a result of
within certain limits for operator comfort. the treatment of extremely damp air, and
obstructing the flow of air into the cab.
Some of the humidity in the air condenses on the fins

For this reason, in the event of replacement or
of the evaporator.
maintenance operations, it is important that the
thermostatic sensor (1) is inserted on the evaporator
outlet pipes (2).
The centrifugal fan draws the ambient air through the
fins of the evaporator (where it is cooled and
dehumidified) and into the cab. Tape the two components together with insulating
tape in order to ensure efficient system operation.
The housing around the evaporator is equipped with NOTE: In the event of malfunction, replace the ther-
a condensate trap from which the condensate is mostatic switch (1).
carried outside the vehicle through discharge tubes.
CAB HEATING AND VENTILATION
CONTROLS 1 2
Ventilation
Turn on the cab ventilation by means of the selector
switch (1, fig. 8) and direct the air flow by positioning
the front vents (2).
Air may be selected from inside or outside the cab by
adjusting the rear side recirculation vents (1, fig. 9)
which can be placed in two positions.
-- vents closed: air is drawn from outside the cab
24023
through the lateral filters.
-- vents open: the greater part of the air is drawn 8
from inside the air through the vents.
Fresh air drawn into the cab from outside is always
filtered.
With the fan in operation and doors, windows, and
recirculation vents closed, the pressure inside the
cab is greater than the external pressure.
Consequently, air can only enter the cab through the
lateral filters, after suitable filtering.
NOTE: To increase the air pressure inside the cab,

use only external air (air recirculation vents 1, fig. 9
closed). 26427
9
Electric Fan
The fan control switch (1, fig. 8 and 10) is powered
1 A B C
up when the ignition switch (1, fig. 12) is in position
B.
A. Low speed.
B. Medium speed.
C. High speed.
Air Filter
DANGER 24025
Remember that the filters of the cab provide no 10

protection against anti--parasitic chemicals in gener-
al. Therefore complete protection against these
products can only be achieved by the adoption of
additional specific safety measures for the individual
product. This applies to all types of filter, for which the
prescriptions for use and maintenance must be fol-
lowed scrupulously. Even the use of active carbon fil-
ters does not exempt the operator from adopting the
personal safety precautions recommended for the
product in question.
HEATING
1 2 3
The heating control knob (1, fig. 11), allows the
operator to regulate the air temperature, by
increasing or decreasing the coolant circulation from
the engine.
The electric fan control switch (2) allows the operator

to regulate the quantity of air entering the cab
through the vents (3, fig. 11) and (1, fig. 9).
24026
Temperature Control Knob (1)
11
-- Turned fully to the left in a counter--clockwise di-
rection = minimum temperature (hot water cir-
culation off).
-- Turned fully to the right in a clockwise direction =

maximum temperature (hot water circulation fully
open).
NOTE: The total capacity of the cooling system for

models TN55S TN55D, TN65S TN65D, TN75S
TN75D, is 10 liters (2.65 gal.) for models without cabs
and 12 liters (3.17 gal.) for models with cabs.
Ignition Switch
To operate the three functions on the switch (1,
fig. 12) turn the key to the following positions:
A. No circuits powered up (key can be removed).

Engine stop: automatic operation of fuel injection
shut--off device.
B. Ready for engine starting. Turn signals and in-

struments operational. Various devices powered
up.
C. Engine start: if released, the key returns auto-

matically to position (B).
27179
12
1 A B C
3 2
24027
13
CAB AIR CONDITIONING CONTROLS
Air Conditioning and Temperature Control

Button
Operational when ignition switch is in the starting

position.
With fan control knob (1) in positions A--B or C, press
push button (2) to switch on the air conditioning.
Heating Control Knob
Turn the knob (3) fully to the right in a clockwise

direction for maximum heating.
Turn the knob (3) fully to the left in a
counter--clockwise direction to shut--off the water
flow to the heater, thereby switching off the heating.
3--Speed Electric Fan Control Knob
Functions when the ignition switch is in the starting

position (B, fig. 12)
A. Low speed.
B. Medium speed.
C. High speed.
NOTE: To pressurise the cab, see the Ventilation

chapter on page 12 in this Section.
OP. 50 200 03 After the system has been in operation for about 15
FUNCTION AND COOLING TESTING minutes, check the following values:
5. Pressure on the suction side of the compressor,
With the pressure gauges connected to the system as indicated by the low pressure gauge.
in the manner described on page 23 and all cocks 6. Pressure on the delivery side of the compressor,
closed, proceed as follows: as indicated by the high pressure gauge.
1. Start the engine and bring it up to a speed of 1500 7. Ambient air temperature.
rpm. 8. Ambient relative humidity.
9. Temperature of air leaving vents inside the cab.
2. Check that the knob (3) is turned fully to the left
(maximum cold), so as to exclude the heating The pressure values will depend on the external
function. ambient conditions and the altitude.
3. Set the cab ventilation fan (1) to maximum The system is to be considered as functioning
speed. correctly if the pressure and temperature readings
are within the value ranges indicated on the table
4. Press the push button (2) to switch on the air con- below.
ditioning.
1 A B C
3 2
24027
14
Air conditioning system Gas HRC134a
Quantity of HFC--134a refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gr (oz.) 800 (28.2)
System delivery side pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bar (psi) 10 to 22 (145 to 290)
System suction side pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bar (psi) 0.2 to 2.5 (3 to 36)
Pressure switch setting (high pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bar (psi) 25 (363)
Pressure switch setting (low pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bar (psi) 2 (29)
at compressor outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . oC (oF) 60 to 120 (140 to 248)
at condenser outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . oC (oF) 40 to 60 (104 to 140)
at evaporator outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . oC (oF) 0 to 15 (32 to 59)
Maximum capacity of electric centrifugal fan
I, II, III speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . m3/min 3.0 to 6.5
PRESSURE VARIATIONS AT DIFFERENT sections of the system, the relative correction value
ALTITUDES must be subtracted from the pressure gauge
reading.
Altitude Absolute Correction

meters (ft.) atmospheric (kg/cm2) Checking the temperature of the air coming out
above sea pressure of the vents inside the cab.
level. (kg/cm2)
0 1.029 0
300 (984) 0.994 -- 0.035
600 (1968) 0.959 -- 0.070
900 (2953) 0.924 -- 0.105
If the temperature of the air measured at the vents is
1200 (3937) 0.889 -- 0.140 within the value range indicated in the table for the
1500 (4921) 0.854 -- 0.175 external ambient air temperatures specified, the
system is functioning efficiently.
1800 (5905) 0.819 -- 0.210
2100 (6890) 0.791 -- 0.238
2400 (7874) 0.763 -- 0.268
It should be remembered that altitude affects If the temperature of the air at the vents exceeds the
pressure, as indicated in the table above. maximum value indicated in the table, refer to the
In order to obtain the pressure value in the various FAULT DIAGNOSIS GUIDE, on the following pages.
CAB VENTS TEMPERATURE TABLE
External ambient temperature 20°C 27°C 28°C 35°C 36°C 43°C

(68°F) (80°F) (82°F) (95°F) (97°F) (109°F)
Temperature of air at vent outlets (inside cab) 4 to 8°C 6 to 12°C 12 to 20°C
(39 to 46°F) (43 to 53°F) (53 to 68°F)
10. Carry out temperature checks on the high and -- all low pressure parts, -- from the expansion valve
low pressure parts of the system: outlet to the suction fitting on compressor --
should be uniformly cold to touch.
There should not be excessive condensation on
the suction line and the compressor low pressure
inlet.
-- all high pressure parts -- from the compressor de- 11. The compressor should not be excessively noisy,
livery fitting to the condenser, expansion valve there should be an audible click when the drive
installed on the evaporator unit -- should be uni- is engaged.
formly hot to touch.
MAINTENANCE 1) COMPRESSOR: check the mountings, the
At the start of the season in which it will be used, tension of the drive belt and the oil level.
check the efficiency and operation of the system. 2) CONDENSER: check mounting and that the fins
If the system has been out of use and charged for a are free of excessive deposits. Straighten any bent
prolonged period, oil may have flowed out of the fins using the comb tool 293831.
compressor to other parts of the system and
consequently this oil must be returned to the
compressor. NOTE: Carry out the same checks on the EVAP-
To carry out this operation, proceed as follows:. ORATOR (9) and the CONDENSER (5).
1. Start the engine and leave it running at 1500 rpm.
2. Make sure that the switch (3, fig. 14) is turned ful- 3) FILTER/DRYER: the sight glass on the
ly to the left, in order to exclude the heating func- receiver--drier can provide useful information about
tion and provide maximum cooling. system operation, as described below. Replace the
3. Adjust the electric fan (1) to maximum speed. receiver--drier after the system has been repaired on
4. Press push button (2) to switch on the air condi- two occasions.
tioning. 4) EXPANSION VALVE: this valve does not require
After the system has been in operation for about 15 maintenance; in the event of malfunction contact
minutes, check the following values: specialized personnel of the NEW HOLLAND
Check that the relative temperatures of the external service network.
ambient air and the air flowing out of the vents inside If the temperature of the air at the vent outlets does
the cab correspond to the values indicated in the not conform to the indications given in the table on
table on page 17. page 16, proceed with the system troubleshooting
If the temperature values are correct, the system is operations described on the following pages.
perfectly efficient and only requires a visual
inspection of the main components:
1 2 3
10 4
9 8 7 6 5
25374
15
Schematic diagram of the air conditioning system.
1. Compressor. 9. Evaporator.
2. Inlet pipe (low pressure). 10. Cool, dehumified air.
3. Outlet pipe (high pressure).
4. Warm air.
5. Condenser.
6. Filter/dryer.
7. Sight glass.
8. Expansion valve with thermostatic sensor.
Also remember that:
When disconnecting the hoses, close the ends with

plastic caps to prevent foreign matter and humidity
from getting inside the hoses.
Handle the thermostatic sensor carefully during
removal operations to avoid damage.
Always use two spanners to unscrew the hose fittings
to avoid twisting the fitting.
25380
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM FAULT
16
DIAGNOSIS SUMMARY
The sight glass on the receiver--drier can provide
useful information about system operation. There are three main ways in which the system can
fail:
The 4 possible conditions of the sight glass are
shown in the figure 16. -- the system does not work at all;
A. Glass clear. -- the system does not provide sufficient cooling;
Indicates that the system is correctly charged, or that -- the compressor operates irregularly.
there is no refrigerant in the system (in the latter of
these cases the cooling action of the evaporator Bearing in mind that insufficient cooling may also be
would be absent). In some cases the glass might be due to external causes, generally a mechanical and
clear but the system might have been charged with visual inspection will provide information on how the
an excessive quantity of refrigerant (in this case the system is operating.
system pressure must be checked).
This information can then be supplemented by
B. Bubbles in the glass. electrical testing.
The formation of vapour or foam bubbles indicates
If the cause of the problem has still not been
that the system contains an insufficient quantity of
identified, it will be necessary to carry out a more
refrigerant or the presence of air in the system.
thorough investigation and test the pressure in the
Bubbles may also be occasionally seen on switching
various sections of the system, as specified
on the system and on disengagement of the
previously.
electro--magnetic clutch.
C. Threads of oil in glass.
Visual inspection of components
Indicates a lack of refrigerant and that the
compressor oil is circulating in the system. All visual inspection should be carried out with the
D. Non--uniform (streaky) fluid in glass. engine stopped and the cab heating and air
conditioning system switched off.
Indicates that the drying agent in the filter has leaked
into the circulating system (as a result of the -- Check that the cab external air intakes are clean.
containment disks breaking). -- Look for visible leaks of liquid refrigerant on
hoses or system fittings.
WARNINGS FOR AIR CONDITIONING -- Check that the engine, condenser and evapora-
SYSTEM REPAIR OPERATIONS tor radiators are clean.
-- Check that the thermostatic sensor makes con-
Warning -- If any of the system components need to tact with the evaporator outlet hoses, using the
be replaced, follow the safety instructions noted in special thermal tape, to ensure efficient system
Section 50 and always follow the recovery, recycling operation.
and charging operations described in op. 5020004 Follow the troubleshooting operations described
on the following pages.
TROUBLESHOOTING
THE AIR CONDITIONING

SYSTEM DOES NOT WORK
1. Check fuses.
2. Check compressor drive belt
tension.
3. Check if the clutch coil is receiv-
ing power.
4. Check that the earth contact is
efficient.
5. Check the system control de-

vices -- relays, wiring, thermo-
stat, etc.
6. Visually check the condition of
all fittings, unions and pipes.
7. Check the clearance between
the front disk and pulley of the
electro--magnetic clutch.
(CONT.)
INSUFFICIENT
COOLING
HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE DISCHARGE PRESSURE LOW DISCHARGE PRESSURE NOR-

AND/OR HIGH SUCTION AND/OR SUCTION PRESSURE MAL AND/OR SUCTION
PRESSURE LOW PRESSURE NORMAL
CHECK THE CHECK THE

SIGHT GLASS (7, fig. 15) SIGHT GLASS (7, fig. 15)
EXCESS REFRIGERANT BUBBLES IN SIGHT GLASS Note: during testing, the low pres-
IN SYSTEM Insufficient refrigerant. Possibly sure gauge reading could fall to
due to small leaks. negative values or remain normal.
1. Check the system for leaks and HUMIDITY IN THE SYSTEM
Note: bubbles could be visible in the
sight glass. Evacuate refrigerant eliminate them. 1. Evacuate the refrigerant from the
until a large number of bubbles ap- 2. Add refrigerant until the bubbles system.
pear in the sight glass, then add re- disappear and both pressure 2. Replace the receiver--drier.
frigerant to the system until the gauges show normal readings. 3. Remove all air from the system
bubbles disappear then proceed with re--charging.
CONDENSER
1. The condenser could be clogged
or it might not be receiving an ad-
equate air flow. Clean condenser
fins.
EXPANSION VALVE
Check the valve, as indicated on
page 10.
1. If the valve fails the test, replace
it.
(CONT.)
INSUFFICIENT
COOLING
HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE DISCHARGE PRESSURE HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE

AND/OR NORMAL SUCTION AND/OR SUCTION PRESSURE NORMAL AND/OR
PRESSURE LOW SUCTION PRESSURE NORMAL/
HIGH
Note: the high pressure gauge read- RESTRICTION ANTI--FROST

ing should be constant and should Water or ice forms downstream of SWITCH
not fall. the restriction (on receiver--drier or With the outside temperature below
on the pipe between the condenser 30_ the electro--magnetic clutch is
AIR outlet and the expansion valve). permanently engaged.
IN SYSTEM 1. Remove the relevant component 1. Check as described on page 11.
1. Recover--recycle the refrigerant and eliminate the restriction or re- 2. Replace the anti--frost switch if it
in the system. place the component. does not function correctly, taking
2. Replace the receiver--drier. care not to crush the capillary tube.
3. Evacuate the system and then Install the new switch in the same
re--charge. position on the evaporator outlet
pipe as the switch that has been re-
placed.
(CONT.)
COMPRESSOR
AND ELECTRO--MAGNETIC
CLUTCH
UNUSUAL NOISE LACK OF ABNORMAL NOISE

WITH CLUTCH ENGAGED COOLING WITH CLUTCH DISENGAGED
OR VIBRATION
1. Check all compressor mount-

ings. 1. Check the electrical power sup-
2. Check engine components in The compressor runs noisily or
the vicinity of the compressor. ply.
does not run at all. 2. Check the clearance between
3. Check whether the clutch slips the front disc and the pulley.
or operates intermittently.
1. Check the condition, pulley align-

ment and tension of the compressor
4. Check the clutch bearing. drive belt.
5. Check that the clutch pulley runs 2. Check the clearance between
freely. the front disk and pulley of the elec-
6. Check the compressor oil level. tro--magnetic clutch.
3. Check the clutch power supply,
the current absorbed, the power
supply wire, the earth connection.
4. Check that the clutch pulley runs

freely.
5. Check that there is sufficient re-
frigerant in the system.
6. Check the compressor for leaks.
7. Check the system for leaks.
WARNING Refrigerant/oil distillation cylinder (4) with heating

element, automatic device for return of oil to the
During these operations, follow the safety instruc-
recovery station compressor and automatic flow
tions and instructions for use described at the start of
control valve for refrigerant entering the station.
Section 50.
Graduated cylinder (19) for recovered refrigerant,
Handle all parts with great care, always use safety
2.2 kg (4.8 lbs.) capacity, with heater and a safety
goggles, gloves and shoes.
valve.
2--way pressure gauge unit, with refrigerant flow
REFRIGERANT RECOVERY--RECYCLING indicator and pressure gauges (1 and 2) controlling
AND EVACUATION--CHARGING STATIONS the pressure in the cylinder and at the inlet.
294053, Humidity indicator (15), for checking the
WARNING decontaminated refrigerant.
Do not use recovery/recycling and system emptying/ Low pressure switch for automatic compressor
charging machines which are designed for use with switch on/off.
a refrigerant type other than that used in the system. Graduated container for discharge of recovered
Different types of refrigerant have different chemical contaminated oil.
compositions and are incompatible. Switch (5) 1--0--2 for recovery and cylinder heating.
Operation indicator lights.
Connecting the piping to the stations 294044 flexible service pipes (11, 12 and 16) with
When connecting the stations to the system service safety cocks.
valves, always connect the low pressure blue pipes Recovery capacity: 200 grams/minute.
(11, fig. 17, or 17, fig. 18) to the service valve on the Power supply requirements: 220V (50 Hz).
suction side of the compressor (S--Suction), and the
high pressure red pipes (12, fig. 17, or 15, fig. 18) to Maintenance
the service valve on the discharge side of the
compressor (D--Discharge). Replacement of refrigerant decontamination
Important: check the seals in the pipe unions (11, filter (3)
12, 16, fig. 17), or (15, 17, 24, fig. 18) and replace Refer to figure, proceed as follows:
if faulty. (kit 294052)
Remember that pipe fittings with seals must be
hand--tightened only without forcing, otherwise Warning -- Replace the filter (3) every 12 months, or
the seal may be damaged. earlier if the humidity indicator (15) becomes yellow
RECOVERY AND RECYCLING STATION (and remains this colour) during the recovery/recir-
(294048) culation phase.
Description (Refer to figure 17)

1. Close all the valves including the yellow service
The machine is designed to recover and recycle the valve (9) installed below the distillation cylinder
refrigerant used in air conditioning systems. (4).
Recovered refrigerant is first subjected to an 2. If refrigerant is present in the circuit set push but-
evaporation process in a special chamber to remove ton (5) to position “1” and carry out the refrigerant
any oil. recovery operation. The compressor will stop au-
In the filter section, the acidity is neutralized, tomatically when the pressure gauge (2) drops to
moisture is absorbed and solid particles are --0.3 bar.
screened out. 3. Remove and replace the contaminated filter (3).
The decontaminated refrigerant is then stored in the 4. Carry out a normal evacuation operation for
metering cylinder. approx. 30 minutes, using the evacuation/charg-
ing system (294030) proceeding as follows:
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
connect the pipe (17, fig. 18) to the service valve
Recovery compressor equipped with oil level sight (14, fig. 17), open the cock on the pipe and cocks
glass, discharge valve and service valve. (4, 9 and 10, fig. 18).
294042 anti--acid decontaminating filter (3), with high On completion of the evacuation operation, close
moisture absorption capacity. cocks (4, 9 and 10), the cock fitted on the pipe
(17) and disconnect pipe (17).
Check filter connections for leaks (3) EVACUATION/CHARGING STATION
(294030)
Refer to figure 17, proceed as follows:
5. To check for leaks at the connections of the pre- Description (Refer to figure 18)
viously replaced filter (3) open the yellow service
cock (9) on the distillation cylinder (4).
6. Carry out a brief recycling operation on the refrig- The machine is designed for emptying and charging
erant contained in the cylinder (19), proceeding air conditioning systems with refrigerant.
as described in operations 18 to 21, and, using
a leak detector, check for leaks at the connec- The emptying stage is necessary to remove any
tions of the new filter. moisture and impurities from the system.
7. Record the operation on the appropriate service
report card. The refrigerant drawn from the system is transferred
to a graduated cylinder, from which it subsequently
Changing the compressor oil in the pumped into the air conditioning system.
recovery/recycling station
Refer to figure, 17 proceed as follows:

Technical characteristics
Warning -- The oil in the recovery/recycling station
compressor should be replaced with new oil (code
293825) every 12 months, in order to maintain sta- Double--acting, ballasted, rotary vacuum pump (21)
tion refrigerant treatment capacity and to protect the in oil bath.
compressor.
Charging cylinder (31) with maximum level indicator
1. Open cock (13), and drain the oil into a container and graduated scale for measurement of quantity of
to be disposed of in accordance with local regula- refrigerant.
tions for waste oil disposal.
5--way pressure gauge manifold with 2 pressure
2. Close cock (13). gauges (5 and 6) and 1 vacuum meter.
3. Remove the caps from the service valves (14) on
the side of the compressor and (13) on the sight 294044 flexible service pipes (15, 17 and 24) with
glass. safety cocks:
Power supply requirements: 220V (50 Hz).
4. Connect the service pipe of evacuation station
(294030) to valve (14) and connect a pick--up
pipe from kit 294043 to valve (13). Maintenance
5. Perform the evacuation operation with the pump
in operation. The new oil can be aspirated from Check level and change oil in pump of
an external container by means of the pick--up evacuation/charging station (periodic check)
pipe.
6. Once the compressor has been filled with correct Refer to figure, 18 proceeding as follows:
quantity of oil (half--way up the sight glass) close
valve (13), disconnect the pick--up pipe, and re- Periodically check the level and condition of the oil.
place the cap on service valve (13). Continue the Drain off the old oil, if necessary, through plug (18).
evacuation for approx. 30 minutes. Used oil must always be disposed of in accordance
with the applicable regulations
7. On conclusion, close the cocks, switch off the
pump, disconnect the service pipe and replace
the cap on service valve (14). Remove cap (13) and fill the vacuum pump (21) with
new oil of the type indicated by the pump
8. Record the operation on the appropriate service manufacturer up to the half--way line on the sight
report card. glass (14).
OP. 50 200 04 8. Connect the red service pipe (12) to the valve on
DEHYDRATION, RECHARGING AND the discharge (high pressure) side of the com-
REFRIGERATION CHECK pressor (marked “D”).
9. Switch on the cab ventilation fan at maximum
Recovery of refrigerant from the cab air speed to assist the transfer of heat between the
conditioning system using the ambient air and the evaporator coil.
recovery/recycling station 294048
10. Open the cocks (10) fitted on pipes (11 and 12).
WARNING 11. Slowly open cock (6--LOW) on the pressure
During operation 5020004, follow the safety instruc- gauge manifold. Pressure gauge (2) will indicate
tions and instructions for use described at the start of the pressure of the refrigerant in the system; if the
Section 50. needle is near “0”, the system is empty.
Handle all parts with great care, always use safety 12. Set switch (5) to position “1” (RECOVERY) --
goggles, gloves and shoes. green indicator light will illuminate. The recovery
unit compressor will start.
During the recovery operation the refrigerant passes

NOTE: The recovery operation can be performed through the distillation chamber (where the oil is
quicker and more completely if the system is pre- separated out), the purification filter (where most of
viously heated. The heat will help the refrigerant to the impurities are filtered out), and then finally arrives
evaporate, facilitating evacuation from the system. at the graduated cylinder.
The compressor stops automatically when the
Refer to figure 17 and proceed as follows: pressure gauge (2) shows --0.3 bar.
1. If possible, operate the air conditioning system
13. Wait a few minutes to allow any pockets of liquid
for a few minutes with the tractor engine running
refrigerant left in the system to evaporate and be
and the hood down, so that the heat produced is
evacuated.
gradually transferred to the various components
in the system, thus allowing any pockets of very 14. Check the pressure (2): if the pressure rises
cold fluid in the system to evaporate. above the previous absolute value of --0.3 bar,
2. Stop the engine. the station will automatically start a second re-
covery operation. If, on the other hand, the pres-
DANGER sure has remained near the value obtained dur-
Refrigerant recovery must only be performed with ing the first recovery operation, this indicates that
the engine stopped. all of the refrigerant has been recovered and the
operation is completed.
3. If the charging cylinder (19) already contains re-
frigerant, check that there is still sufficient free
volume to contain all the refrigerant in the system NOTE: If after 10 minutes of operation the station has
(maximum cylinder capacity is 2 kg [4.4 lbs.]); if not recovered more than 1 kg (2.2 lbs.) of refrigerant,
not, transfer the excess refrigerant to an external check the pressure gauge (1). If the pressure reading
cylinder in the manner described on page 28. is over 10 bar (145 psi) open cock (21) and discharge
4. Connect the station’s supply lead to a power out- air, then check that pressure gauge (1) does not ex-
let. ceed a maximum of 10 bar (145 psi) throughout the
5. Make sure that all cocks are closed except the entire recovery operation.
service cock (9).
6. Remove the caps from the service valves
installed on the suction and discharge lines of the 15. Close all the cocks except cock (9), disconnect
compressor. the service pipes (11 and 12) from the air condi-
tioning system compressor and switch off the
7. Connect the blue service pipe (11) to the valve on station.
the suction (low pressure) side of the compressor
(marked “S”). 16. Switch off the cab ventilation fan.
Recycling of recovered refrigerant 19. Connect the 2 ends of the yellow (16) and blue
(11) pipes with the connector supplied.
On completion of the recovery operation, the
refrigerant must completely purified. 20. Slowly open the cock (18--REF) and the blue
cock (6--LOW) on the pressure gauge manifold,
and the cocks on the two previously connected
WARNING service pipes (16 and 11).
Recovered refrigerant must be completely purified
before it can be re--used. 21. Set switch (5) in position “1” (RECOVERY),
green indicator light on.
The recovery compressor will start to operate
and the refrigerant will pass from the graduated
Proceed as follows:
cylinder to the recovery circuit (distillation, filter
and compressor) and then return to the graduat-
17. All cocks must be closed, with the exception of ed cylinder.
cock (9, fig. 17) and the station must be switched
off -- switch (5) in position “0” and the green indi-
22. Continue the operation until the circular sector of
cator light off.
the humidity indicator (15) becomes green.
18. Connect the end of the yellow service pipe (16) If, after 15 minutes, the circular sector of the indi-
to the free connector (17) located on the left-- cator (15) still has not turned green, replace the
hand side of the pressure gauge manifold. filter (3), as described on page 24.
1 2 3
21 4
20 5
19 6
18 7
9
17
16 15 14 13 12 11 10
25378
17
Refrigerant recovery and recycling station
1. Cylinder pressure gauge. 12. Red service pipe for connection to compressor dis-
2. Recovery control pressure gauge. charge side.
3. Anti--acid and decontamination filter. 13. Recovery compressor oil discharge cock.
4. Recovered refrigerant/oil distillation cylinder. 14. Recovery compressor service valve (suction).
5. Switch. 15. Humidity indicator.
6. Refrigerant inlet control cock (LOW). 16. Yellow service pipe for refrigerant transfer.
7. Recovered oil discharge cock (yellow). 17. Fitting for refrigerant transfer.
8. Recovered oil discharge pipe. 18. Cock (REF) for refrigerant transfer.
9. Oil return to compressor control cock (yellow). 19. Refrigerant cylinder
10. Quick--fit connectors. 20. Safety valve.
11. Blue service pipe for connection to compressor suc- 21. Yellow cylinder discharge cock (gaseous stage).
tion side.
left--hand side of the pressure gauge manifold,
NOTE: The circular sector of the humidity indicator and connect the other end (with the cock) to the
(15, fig. 17) must remain green throughout the re- red connector of the external cylinder.
cycling operation.
If the colour of the circular tends to vary between yel- 29. Set switch (5) to position “2” HEATING CYL-
low and green, or becomes totally yellow, this means INDER to switch on the refrigerant heater fitted
that the filter is saturated with moisture and therefore to the cylinder (19) so as to facilitate the transfer
must be replaced. of the refrigerant from the cylinder to the external
cylinder.
23. On completion of the decontamination operation, 30. Open the yellow cock (18--REF), the yellow cock
close the yellow cock (18--REF) and continue to on the service pipe and red cock on the external
recover the refrigerant. The compressor will stop cylinder.
automatically when the pressure gauge (2)
shows a reading of --0.3 bar. 31. On completion of the transfer, close all cocks and
switch off the station by turning switch (5) to posi-
24. Close the cock (6--LOW), the two cocks on the tion 0.
ends of the yellow (16) and blue (11) service
pipes, disconnect pipes (16 and 11) and switch
Evacuation and charging the cab air
off the station, turning switch (5) to position “0”.
conditioning system using the
evacuation/charging station 294030.
Discharge of recovered oil
On completion of the recovery operation, any NOTE: Operations 32 to 34, must only be carried out
contaminated oil will be visible in the distillation if there is no refrigerant in the graduated cylinder (31,
chamber (4). This oil must be discharged and fig. 18).
disposed of (in accordance with applicable
regulations on the disposal of used oil).
Proceed as follows: Evacuation of the graduated cylinder (31) of the
evacuation/charging station
25. Slowly open the yellow cock (7) and discharge
the recovered oil in the graduated container. Refer to figure 18, proceed as follows:
26. If no refrigerant leaks, whether major or minor, 32. Close cocks (4, 22 and 27).
have ever been detected in the system, on re-
charging, replace the contaminated oil with same 33. Open cocks (3, 9 and 10).
quantity of new oil (see page 30).
34. Start the pump by turning switch (19) to position
“1” to evacuate the cylinder (31). After 5 minutes
Transfer of decontaminated refrigerant from close cocks (3, 9 and 10) and switch off the
cylinder (19) to an external cylinder pump.
If for any reason the decontaminated refrigerant is

not to be put back into the air conditioning system Charging the graduated cylinder (31) of the
immediately, for reasons of safety it must be evacuation/charging station
transferred from cylinder (19) to a homologated
refillable gas container. If the decontaminated refrigerant in the
recovery/recycling station is to be immediately put
Proceed as follows: back into the tractor air conditioning system, it must
be transferred from cylinder (19, fig. 17) to cylinder
(31, fig. 18) of the evacuation/charging station,
27. Check that all the cocks are closed with the ex-
proceeding as follows:
ception of cock (9) and that the station is
switched off. Check that the container (cylinder) 35. Using figure 18 for reference, connect the end
is large enough to contain all the refrigerant to be (without the cock) of the yellow service pipe (24)
transferred without exceeding the permitted to the free connector (28) on the left hand side of
safety level. the evacuation/charging station pressure gauge
manifold.
28. Connect the end of the yellow service pipe (16)
without the cock to the free connector (17) on the
36. Connect the other end (with the cock) to the free 41. On completion of the refrigerant transfer opera-
connector (17, fig. 17) on the left hand side of the tion, close all of the cocks, apart from cock (9,
recovery/recycling station pressure gauge man- fig. 17) and switch off the recovery/recycling sta-
ifold. tion by turning the switch (5) to position “0”.
37. Using figure 18 for reference, check that all the 42. Check the quantity of refrigerant in the graduated
cocks of the recovery/recycling station are cylinder (31, fig. 18).
closed, apart from cocks (9 and 17) and the cock 43. From the total quantity of refrigerant required in
fitted on the pipe (16). the air conditioning system indicated in the note
38. Check that all the evacuation/charging station on the following page, calculate the quantity of
cocks are closed, apart from cock (27, fig. 18). refrigerant that must be added to the cylinder (31)
39. Check that the stations are switched off with to make up the total amount required.
switches (5 and 18) in position “0”. 44. Transfer refrigerant from the external cylinder to
40. Using figure 18 for reference, turn switch (5) to the graduated cylinder (31) proceeding as fol-
position “2” HEATING CYLINDER to switch on lows.
the refrigerant heater installed on the cylinder 45. Connect the yellow pipe (24) to connector (28)
(19), to facilitate the transfer of refrigerant to cyl- and to the external cylinder containing the refrig-
inder (31, fig. 18) of the evacuation/charging sta- erant (upside down if not equipped with an outlet
tion. valve).
46. Open the cock on the external cylinder, the cock
on the charging pipe (24) and cock (27).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9
31
10
30
11
29
12
28
13
27
14
26
25 15
24 23
16
25378 22 21 20 19 18 17
18
Evacuation/charging station.
1. Safety valve. 17. Blue service pipe for connection to suction side of
2. Cylinder pressure gauge. compressor.
3. Refrigerant charging cock. 18. Oil drain plug.
4. Low pressure side cock (LOW). 19. On/Off switch (I), heater (II).
5. Low pressure gauge. 20. Oil meter connector.
6. High pressure gauge (red). 21. Vacuum pump.
7. 5--way pressure gauge manifold. 22. High pressure side cock (HIGH).
8. Vacuum meter. 23. Sight glass.
9. Vacuum test cock (VAC). 24. Yellow service pipe.
10. Vacuum meter test cock. 25. Cylinder heater.
11. Vacuum meter safety valve. 26. External ring.
12. Oil charging cock. 27. Refrigerant transfer cock (REF).
13. Oil filler cap. 28. Refrigerant transfer connector.
14. Sight glass. 29. Glass rod.
15. Red service pipe for connection to discharge side of 30. Outer casing (Plexiglass).
compressor. 31. Refrigerant charging cylinder.
16. Quick--fit cocks.
47. Rotate the outer casing (30) so that pressure val- 56. Pour the oil into the graduated oil meter of kit
ue indicated on the graduated scale corresponds 294043.
with the value shown on pressure gauge (2). 57. Connect the oil meter to the oil meter union (20).
48. When the refrigerant in the cylinder has reached 58. Close cocks (4 and 10).
the required level, as indicated on the glass rod
59. Set switch (19) to position “2” to switch on the re-
(29), close the cock of the external cylinder, the
frigerant heater on cylinder (31).
cock on the charging pipe (24) and cock (27).
60. Open cock (12) and the cock on the graduated oil
meter.
NOTE: If excessive time is required to transfer refrig- 61. Check the quantity of oil flowing from the oil me-
erant from the external cylinder to cylinder (31), ter, and once the required quantity has been
slightly open valve (1) and discharge air from the cyl- reached, close cocks (12) and the cock on the oil
inder (31); the pressure reading on pressure gauge meter, and remove the graduated meter.
(2) should not exceed 5 bar (72.5 psi).
Evacuation of the cab air conditioning system Charging the cab air conditioning system with
(previously discharged using the recovery/recycling refrigerant (after evacuation)
station)
49. Remove the caps from the service valves on the NOTE: The quantity of refrigerant required to be
suction and discharge lines of the compressor. introduced into the system is 800 grams (28.2 oz.)
(R134a refrigerant).
50. Connect the blue service pipe (17) to the valve on
the low pressure side of the compressor marked
“S”. 62. Keep switch (19) in position 2, with the refrigerant
51. Connect the red service pipe (15) to the valve on heater in cylinder (31) on, and heat the refriger-
the high pressure side of the compressor marked ant for approx. 10 to 15 minutes to facilitate trans-
“D”. fer from the cylinder to the tractor air conditioning
52. Open the quick--fit cocks (16). system.
53. Open cocks (4 -- 9 -- 10 -- 22). 63. According to the refrigerant type, rotate the outer
casing (30) so that the graduated scale and the
54. Start the pump by turning switch (19) to position
pressure values correspond with the pressure
“I” and evacuate the system for at least thirty min-
reading on gauge (2).
utes; pressure gauges (5 -- 6 -- 8) should show a
negative reading. If the evacuation operation is 64. Move the external ring (26) along the cylinder
not performed correctly, check all connections. glass to mark the quantity of refrigerant to be
charged.
55. Close cock (9), switch off the pump by turning
switch (19) to position “0” and check the vacuum 65. Open cock (22) and charge from the high pres-
seal for at least five minutes using vacuum meter sure side.
(8). This done, close all cocks. 66. Open cock (3), charge approx. 300 grams (10.5
oz.) of refrigerant, close cock (3) and check for
Charging the cab air conditioning system (after leaks.
evacuation) with new oil 67. If there are no leaks, continue charging up to the
prescribed quantity.
If no refrigerant leaks, whether major or minor, have
ever been found in the system, on recharging, 68. On completion of charging operations, turn
replace the contaminated oil previously recovered in switch (19) to position “0”, close cocks (3 and 22),
operations (25 and 26) with new oil. If, on the disconnect pipes (15 and 17) and replace the
contrary, significant leaks have occurred in the past, caps on the service valves.
proceed with the compressor oil level check
Carry out functional tests with the system set to
procedure described on page 8.
maximum performance levels, as described below.
Refer to figure 18, proceed as follows.
SYSTEM CHARGING OPERATIONS
NOTE: The pressure readings noted below are valid

for an ambient temperature of 25 °C (77 °F).
-- Pressure gauge readings on completion of refrig-

erant recovery and recycling operation.
25381
19
-- Pressure gauge readings with cocks (4 -- 9 -- 10
and 22, fig. 18) open, cylinder (31) with 1100
grams (38.8 oz.) of refrigerant, red and blue ser-
vice pipes connected to the tractor system, cocks
(16) closed and compressor off.
25382
20
(16) open and compressor on (initial evacuation
stage).
25383
21
(16) open and compressor on (final stage of
evacuation after 30 minutes).
25384
22
-- Pressure gauge readings with cocks (4 -- 10 -- 22,
fig. 18) open, cylinder (31) with 1100 grams (38.8
oz.) of refrigerant, red and blue service pipes
connected to the tractor system, cocks (16)
open, compressor off and cock (9) closed (check
on vacuum meter (8) that no pressure drops oc-
cur over a period of five minutes).
25385
23
-- Pressure gauge readings (start of charging -- end
of charging). All previously opened cocks are to
be closed, apart from cocks (3 and 4, fig. 18),
compressor off. The level of refrigerant in the
charging cylinder can be seen to drop; proceed
until only 300 grams (10.5 oz.) of refrigerant re-
main in the charging cylinder (800 grams [28.2
oz.] transferred). The reading of vacuum meter
(8) remains the same from the beginning to the
end of the charging operation.
25386
24
1 A B C
3 2
24027
25
ADJUSTMENTS
OP. 50 200 06 6. Switch on the electronic leak detector.

CHECKS AND EVENTUAL ELIMINATION
OF GAS LEAKS
7. Move the probe around all pipe connections and

Testing for leaks with leak detector 294036 all possible points of leakage:
With the system charged and the pressure gauges -- the presence of refrigerant (i.e.: the leak), is sig-
connected, proceed as follows: nalled by an increase in the frequency of the au-
dible signal.
1. Start the engine.
NOTE: The refrigerant is heavier than air, therefore

it will be easier to detect the leak point from below
2. Check that the knob (3) is turned fully to the left
rather than from above.
(maximum cold), so as to exclude the heating
function.
8. If leaks are found in the pipe connections, tighten
the fittings in order to eliminate the leak. Torque
3. Set the cab ventilation fan (1) to maximum the pipe connections to 36 N⋅m (27 ft. lbs.).
speed.
4. Press the push button (2) to switch on the air con-

ditioning.
Warning -- If any of the system components need to
be replaced, always follow the recovery, recycling
and charging operations described in operation
5. Bring the engine up to a speed of 1500 rpm. 5020004.
CHECKING FOR REFRIGERANT LEAKS Refrigerant gas leak test

USING AN ELECTRONIC LEAK DETECTOR
The detector automatically adjusts its sensitivity in
accordance with the quantity of gas present in air
around the sensor tip when switched on and off.
Leak detector (294036)
In ventilated airs it can be extremely difficult to locate

the source of a gas leak; in this case it will be
The leak detector 294036 is supplied in its own necessary to screen off the area in which the leak is
carrying case which also contains the two power suspected to obtain more accurate readings.
supply batteries, the sensitivity test phial and an ear
plug connection for audible leak indication. In cases where the presence of large leaks masks
smaller leaks, first locate and repair the large leaks
The instrument comprises the main unit and the before attempting to locate the smaller leaks.
flexible probe which contain the sensor at the tip.
Maintenance
To correctly position the flexible probe, slacken off Always make sure that the detector is switched off
(CCW) the thumbscrew located on the bottom before replacing the sensor element. To remove the
left--hand corner of the case. old sensor from the flexible probe.
Do not switch on the detector until the new sensor is

Mounted on the front of the instrument are the on/off screwed firmly on to the end of the flexible probe.
switch, the red on/off LED and the acoustic gas
detection indicator. Be careful to avoid getting grease or grit in the hole
connecting the probe with the sensor element.
The socket for the headset connection is on the rear
of the instrument. The battery compartment also
houses the sensor element and a number of 1 2 3 4
replacement felts
Use
Set the switch to ON: start looking for leaks; the

amplitude of the acoustic signal increases as the
sensor approaches the source of a leak. 25388
26
In the area around the leak, switch the instrument on Leak detector probe
and off again; the instrument will automatically switch 1. Flexible probe.
to a new acoustic level. Carry out the following test 2. Sensing tip.
each time you use the detector: 3. Felt pad.
4. Cover.
Hold the sensor element close to the open sensitivity
test phial; when the detector starts to emit an audible
signal, switch it on and off.
If the amplitude signal continues to increase, switch

the instrument on and off again.
OP. 50 200 10 Checking compressor drive belt tension

COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT
TENSION ADJUSTMENT Only check the tension when the belt is cold (below
40 °C [104 °F]).
Check the tension by applying a load of 78 to 98 N

(17.5 to 22 ft. lb.), to the centre of the belt run,
12to13mm indicated in the figure, the belt should deflect ≅ 12 to
13 mm (1/2 in.).
(1/2 in.)
Periodic checking of drive belt
When checking the tension, also check the amount

of drive belt wear.
23927 The following cases may occur:

27
The condition of the belt transmitting drive from the A. Belt shiny : belt sides worn to a smooth shine,
engine to the compressor is particularly important as can cause slippage.
regards the correct operation of the air conditioning
system. B. Belt cracked : may break suddenly due to splits
This drive belt therefore requires careful attention, on the inner surface caused by excessive flex-
proceed as follows: ure.
1) Fit the belt correctly.
C. Worn sides : with the sides worn or the inner part
2) Check the belt tension. cracked the belt could break at any moment.
3) Check the condition of the belt.
D. Belt impregnated with grease : grease will
cause the belt to wear rapidly.
Installing the compressor drive belt

Take the following action:
When first fitted, the belt must not be forced, pulled
with a screwdriver, or rolled over the edge of the A. If the belt is too slack, tension it correctly; if ex-
pulley, this would cause overstretching of the low cessively hot, replace the belt.
deformation fabric and subsequent breakage of the
other fabrics. B. If the cracks are deep, extending to half the thick-
ness of the belt, replace the belt.
New belts must be fitted at a higher tension than
C. Replace the belt.
normal so as to compensate for the initial stretching
as the belt is run in. This means that the belt must be D. If the belt is excessively hot, replace the belt.
re--checked after 50 hours of operation and adjusted
to the normal tension.
This check is very important as if the belt is left too If the belt squeaks when running, check the ten-
taut, it could damage the pulley bearings and cause sion and adjust if necessary. If the noise contin-
the premature deterioration of the belt itself. ues, replace the belt.
If, on the other hand, the belt is too slack, it will start
to slip and overheat and thus very rapidly deteriorate. If the belt has been over--stretched and can no
longer be tensioned correctly, replace the belt.
OVERHAUL
OP. 50 206 14
CAB AIR INFEED VENTS
Removal
WARNING
Handle all parts with extreme care.
gloves and shoes.
Proceed as follows.
1. Remove the four retaining bolts and the RH side

air infeed vent.
2. Remove the five retaining bolts (1) and the LH

side air infeed vent (2).
Installation
Proceed as follows.
3. Refit the LH side air infeed vent (2) the five retain-
ing bolts (1).
4. Refit the RH side air infeed vent (2) the four re-
taining bolts.
27685
28
OP. 50 206 51
CAB HEATING/AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
Removal
WARNING
gloves and shoes.
Proceed as follows.
1. Using operation 5020004 (Recovery--filter/

drying, recharging and cooling control), carry
out only operation 1 to 31 regarding system cool-
ant recovery, using station 294048.
2. Carry out operation 9016060--Cab ceiling fit-

tings R.I. (Only removal).
3. Disconnect the heater--air conditioner electrical

connections (1).
27688
29
4. Remove the four condensate drainage pipes (1).
27689
30
5. Remove the two air conditioning system pipes (1)
from the compressor, that are connected to the
expansion unit radiator.
27690
31
6. Remove the four retaining bolts (1) on the heater
radiator support of the conditioning unit expan-
sion device (2).
27691
32
7. Remove the clamps (2) and piping (1) connected
to the heater radiator, then remove the support
containing the heater radiator and conditioning
unit expansion device (3).
Installation (Op. 50 206 51)
WARNING
Always use appropriate tools to align hardware holes.
-- Proceed as follows.
27692
-- Fit the two pipes connected to the heater radiator
33
and the two securing clamps.
-- Fit the support, containing the heater radiator -- Using operation 5020004 (Filter/drying, re-
and conditioning unit expansion device, to the charging and cooling control), only carry out
cab ceiling by means of the four screws. operations 32 to 68 with regard to system empty-
ing and charging, using station no. 294030.
-- Connect the two air conditioning pipes from the
-- Reconnect the battery negative lead.
compressor to the expansion unit radiator.
-- Carry out operation 5020003--Air condition-
-- Connect the four condensate drainage pipes. ing system functional testing.
-- Connect the heater--air conditioner unit electrical -- (If necessary), Carry out operation
connections. 5020006--Air conditioning system checks
and eventual elimination of gas leaks.
-- Carry out operation 9016060--Cab ceiling fit-
tings R.I. (Proceed with installation).
OP. 50 206 54
CAB HEATING UNIT
Removal
WARNING
gloves and shoes.
With the unit on the work bench, proceed as follows. 27693
1. Remove the heater -- conditioning unit half--cas- 34

ing (1) retaining screws (2).
2. Remove the half--casing (1).
27694
35
3. Remove the heater radiator (1).
Installation
WARNING
27695
36
4. Fit the heater radiator.
5. Fit the heater -- conditioning unit half--casing.
6. Tighten the heater -- conditioning unit half--cas-

ing, using the screws.
OP. 50 206 56
EVAPORATOR UNIT
Removal
WARNING
gloves and shoes.
With the unit on the work bench, proceed as follows.

1. Remove the heater -- conditioning unit half--cas- 27693
ing (1) retaining screws (2). 37
27694
38
3. Remove the conditioning system evaporator (1).
Installation
WARNING
27696
39
4. Fit the conditioning system evaporator.

OP. 50 206 66
ELECTRIC FAN UNIT
Removal
WARNING
gloves and shoes.
With the unit on the work bench, proceed as follows.

27693
1. Remove the heater -- conditioning unit half--cas-
ing (1) retaining screws (2). 40
27694
41
3. Remove the securing clamps (1) and electric fan
(2) on the heater -- conditioning unit.
Installation
WARNING
27697
42
4. Fit the heater --conditioner unit electric fan, se-

curing in position with the clamps.

SECTION 55 -- ELECTRICAL SYSTEM -- CHAPTER 1 1
Chapter 1 -- All Tractor Serial Numbers
CONTENTS

2 SECTION 55 -- ELECTRICAL SYSTEM -- CHAPTER 1
HOW TO USE THIS SECTION

To look for general information on the Starting Circuit,
see Chapter 2. For detailed information, see the
tractor wiring diagrams for your actual tractor
configuration.
To look for general information on the Charging

System, see Chapter 3. For detailed information, see
the tractor wiring diagrams for your actual tractor
configuration.
To look for general information on the Battery, see

Chapter 4. For detailed information, see the tractor
wiring diagrams for your actual tractor configuration.
To look for general information on the Cab Electrical

Components, see Chapter 5. For detailed information,
see the tractor wiring diagrams for your actual tractor
configuration.
Chapter 2 -- Starting System (All Serial Numbers)
CONTENTS

System Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Starting System Test on Tractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Current Intake in Starter Motor Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Ignition System Circuit Resistance (voltage drop) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Battery Positive Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Starter Motor Ground Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Battery Ground Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
55 201 50 Starter Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Removal and Re-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Starter Motor Removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
55 201 54 Disassembly and Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Armature Shaft End Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Starter Motor Test Without Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Bench Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Bench Test Armature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Field Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Bearing Bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Drive Pinion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
CHARACTERISTICS TYPE OF STARTER MOTOR
Starter motor MARELLI MT68
Power 2.5 kw (3.3 hp)
Maximum current drain without load (A) 60 at 11.7V and 7000 rpm
Rotation direction (pinion side view) clockwise
Minimum switch diameter 45 mm (49.21 in)
Maximum armature shaft end play 0.1 to 0.4 mm (0.1093 to 0.4374 in)
TIGHTENING TORQUES
PART TO BE TORQUED Nm lb ft
Starter motor and engine block

34 25
fastening bolts
Box on starter motor/ground wire

16 12
side
Solenoid valve wire nuts 7 5
Box nuts on starter motor side 10 7.5
Solenoid valve fastening bolts 5 3.5


The starting system installed depends on the type of windings directly from the battery, thus giving full
gearbox fitted on the tractor. All systems consist of an power to the starter motor.
ignition key switch, heavy-duty wiring, a starter motor
with solenoid, a start-up relay and gearbox, At the stage, one end of the pull-in coil is connected
supplementary reduction and PTO control lever to the positive battery pole through the starter switch,
switches. These are the basic circuit components whale the other end is connected to the positive pole
used on versions with mechanical gearbox. More through the solenoid valve contracts. The pull-in coil
sophisticated systems include other components, is thus by-passed, without absorbing power, and the
which ensure the engine can be started only under hold-in coil alone. Keeps the plunger in position.
the proper circumstances.
The starter motor includes a series of contacts and
A 2.5 kW rating starter motor is installed in a two-part solenoid plunger which completely closes
production. It presents four poles, four brushes with the two contacts even if the pinion teeth are not
integrated solenoid and a positive mesh perfectly in line with the rim gear. When this happens,
engagement control. a clutch spring compresses the pinion, forcing it to
connect completely as soon as the starter motor
The solenoid consists of two coils connected in starts turning.
parallel. The low resistance pull-in coil is grounded
via the engine, while the high resistance hold-in coil When the ignition key switch is released, power is
is grounded via the solenoid body. taken from the solenoid and the motor. The solenoid
return spring acting on the adjustable joint
When the ignition switch is closed, with the gear and mechanism frees the driving pinion from the gear and
reducer in neutral and the PTO disengaged, the coils opens the solenoid valve contacts again.
are energised and the plunger is magnetically drawn
inside the solenoid. This movement, transmitted by A roller type clutch is incorporated to the driving
means of an adjustable joint mechanism, makes the pinion group. This prevents the pinion from
driving pinion engage the flywheel rim gear The overspeeding if it stays engaged with the flywheel rim
moment the pinion touches the rim gear the plunger gear after the engine has been started.
closes a series of contacts and powers all four field
26550 25913
1 2
Fuse carrier and relay Starter motor
TROUBLESHOOTlNG
The engine does not run when the ignition key is turned, gear is in neutral and PTO is not engaged.
Charge or change the

Is the battery fully charged? battery. Is the motor
NO
YES revolution direction
correct?
NO
Check the starting circuit wiring.

Are connections tightened?
Is the battery correctly grounded? YES Repair the
Are there any broken or frayed wires which could wiring
cause a short circuit? accordingly.
NO
Has the engine Find the

seized? YES reason for
engine failure.
NO
Turn the ignition key. Are there +12V on the Possibly inefficient
ignition solenoid input wire (red and white coils of brushes or
striped wired)? YES
Can you hear
YES mechanical failure.
the solenoid
NO click?
NO
Probably inefficient starter solenoid.

Remove the starter motor and check.
Check the starter relay. Can you hear
the relay work when you turn the
ignition key? NO
Change the
relay.
YES
Remove the connector from the relay. Are there

+12V at pin 5 (white/red striped wire) when you
turn the ignition key? Replace the
YES
NO
relay.
Check the inverter lever, clutch pedal switch,

reducer and PTO control lever wires. Are the wires NO Reconnect the wire
connected? to the switch.
YES
Do all the switches work? NO

Change the switch.
YES
Does the instrument display light up when the ignition key

is turned? NO Check the main battery power
YES reaches ignition key switch
(ignition key connector pin 30).
Check the ignition key switch. If the wire leading to the
switch is in good condition, change the switch.
SYSTEM TESTS
Starting System Test On Tractor

To troubleshoot starting system easily and fast with
conclusive results, we recommend you to use a
battery/starter tester (high discharge rate tester) and
an incorporated 0--20V voltmeter and 0--500A
ammeter.
When using testing devices, follow test procedures
recommended by manufacturer. If you do not have
test devices, carry out the following procedure and
use a standard 0--20 V and 0--500 A ammeter to
detect the starter motor correct operation without
removing it from the engine.
Before carrying out the test:
• Check the battery is fully charged;
• Check no starting system cables is broken or da-
maged and that there are no loose connectors
• Check engine is not seized.
Current Intake In Starter Motor Circuit (Fig. 3)

1. Disconnect ground (negative) battery cable (3).
5 1
2. Disconnect positive battery cable from the star-
ting solenoid (5). Connect the positive point of an
ammeter (1) to the positive battery terminal
clamp and the negative point to solenoid input 4
clamp (5).
3. Reconnect ground (negative) cable to battery
negative terminal clamp (3).
4. Connect the positive voltmeter point (2) to the
battery terminal clamp and the negative point to 3 2
battery negative terminal clamp.
26630
3
5. Disconnect the injection pump closing solenoid
from wire.
6. Run the engine and note voltmeter and ammeter
readings. Voltage must be constantly around
12 V with an intake in the of 250--300 A.
• current intake corresponds to the readings abo-
ve, starter motor (4) is working correctly. If volta-
ge drops during the test, follow ”Resistance on
starting system circuit procedure” (see relative
paragraph).
• Current intake is higher than technical datum,
check the circuit as shown below. If ignition sy-
stem circuit tests are satisfying, it means that
starter motor is faulty and must be removed to
find out the cause.
• If current intake is lower than technical datum,
starter motor is faulty and must be removed to
find out the cause.
Ignition System Circuit Resistance

(Voltage Drop) (Fig. 4)
If intake current is too high, check the circuit to find
out what has caused voltage drop between each
circuit components.
IMPORTANT: Disconnect the cable of injection
pump fuel stop solenoid valve.
Battery Positive Cable

2 1
1. Connect the positive voltmeter point (1) to the po-
sitive battery clamp (2).
V
2. Connect the negative voltmeter point to the
clamp of starter motor solenoid valve (3).
3. Run the engine and check the readings on the 3
voltmeter. If voltage is higher than 0.2 V, check
and tighten cable connectors. Check voltage
again. If it is still too high fit a new cable.
26631
4
Starter Motor Ground Connections (Fig. 5)
2 1
1. Connect the positive voltmeter point (1) to starter
motor casing (2).
2. Connect the negative voltmeter point to the engi-
ne block (3).
3. Run the engine and check readings on the vol-
tmeter. If it is higher than 0.2 V, check and tighten
ground connections between starter motor flan-
ge and engine rear cover.
26632
3
5
Battery Ground Cable (Fig. 6)

2 1
1. Connect the positive voltmeter point (1) to the en-
gine block (2).
V
2. Connect the negative voltmeter point to the ne-
gative battery terminal clamp (3).
3. Run the engine and check the readings on the
voltmeter. If voltage is higher than 0.2 V, check
and tighten the grounding cable connections.
Check and install a new grounding cable.
3
26633
STARTER MOTOR
Removal and Re-installation (Fig. 7)
Op. 55 201 50
1. Disconnect ground (negative battery cable).
2. Remove the plastic cover (3) from the clamps.
3. Unscrew the nut and remove the power and the
emergency switch clamp (4).
4. Remove the starter motor fastening bolts (2) and
remove the starter motor (1).
5. To re-install the starter motor, reverse the order
of removal. 26633
7
26635
8
Starter motor components
1. Solenoid 7. Field windings and casing

2. Solenoid bolts 8. Brush holder
3. Bolt and stud group 9. Brush plate
4. Control side support 10. Armature
5. Lever 11. Clutch
6. Reducer
OVERHAUL
STARTER MOTOR REMOVED 7. Remove the motor casing from the armature and
Disassembly and Reassembly the control side bracket.
8. Remove the control lever knuckle pin from the
Op. 55 201 54 control side of the casing.
Refer to figure 8. 9. Remove the retaining ring which holds the con-
trol group and the inner plate from the armature
1. Place the starter motor in a vice with padded shaft, by first removing the pressure collar per-
jaws.
pendicularly from the retaining ring support by
2. Disconnect the biggest braided wire which runs means of an appropriately sized tube. Then lever
from the field winding casing to the solenoid. the retaining ring from the groove.
3. Remove the three screws from the front and re- 10. Remove the armature and control group.
move the solenoid. Note that the plunger will re-
main connected to the control lever. Reassembly
4. Remove the solenoid plunger from the control le- 1. Reverse disassembly procedure to refit the star-
ver by holding and lifting it at the front in order to ter motor.
unclip if from the lever.
To reassemble the starter motor, reverse the removal
5. Remove the two nuts from the rear casing and procedure.
the two screws which fasten the rear cover and
brush plate to the casing. Remove C clamp and Before reconnecting, test the armature shafts end
armature shaft end play spacers, leaving the play and test the starter motor without load.
brush gear on the switch side of the armature.
6. At this stage of the procedure, check brushes ARMATURE SHAFT END PLAY
and switch. Check the brushes are not stuck and, 1. Place the starter motor in a vice with padded jaws
if necessary, clean the brushes and the respecti- and connect a dial gauge to the flange on the
ve channels with a rag and solvent. Check the control side of the casing. Position the dial gauge
brushes are not worn. If they are worn and mini- pointer on the end of the armature shaft.
mum length is less than that shown in the techni- 2. Push the armature forward and reset the gauge.
cal information chart, it will be necessary to chan- Push the armature back as far as it will go and no-
ge the starter motor. te the gauge readings.
3. Readings must fall within the limits specified in
NOTE: The brushes cannot be serviced separately. the technical information table. if the value is hi-
There are, in fact, welded to their support and will not gher, check the armature and brush plate are not
be changed for the entire operating life of the starter worn. Change the worn components, as neces-
motor. sary, and check end play again.
STARTER MOTOR TEST WITHOUT LOAD

6 7
(FIG. 9)
NOTE: A fully charged battery and a battery/starting 1

tester (high discharge multitester) with carbon bat-
tery (variable load resistance) are needed to carry
out this test. 5
2
1. Place the starter motor in a vice with padded
jaws.
2. Connect negative battery cable (4) to starter mo- 3
tor flange. 4
26636
3. Bridge solenoid contacts (6) with a short wire (7).
4. Connect the positive voltmeter point (3) to the po- 9
sitive battery terminal clamp (4) and the negative
voltmeter point to the negative battery terminal
clamp. Connect the ammeter positive point (1) to
the positive battery clamp (4) and the negative
point to the battery or to the starter motor terminal
clamp.
5. Place a manual tachometer (5) on the end of the
armature shaft. Check maximum power intake.
This value is specific for each starter motor and
must be included in the range of values in the
TECHNICAL INFORMATION table. Regulate
carbon battery voltage (2) and armature rpm ac-
cording to the information in the technical infor-
mation table.
6. If the starter motor does not work according to the
technical information specifications, then check
if there are grounded field windings, if the arma-
ture scrapes or if the shaft is misshapen.
BENCH TESTS
1
Bench Test Armature (Fig. 10)
1. The switch surface must be clean and not burnt.
If burning stains need to be removed, use fine
sandpaper and not abrasive fabric. Finally, clean
the switch with a rag and petroleum.
2. If the switch needs refacing, check it is not smal-
ler than the minimum value prescribed in the
TECHNICAL INFORMATION table. After refa-
cing, the switch must be polished with sandpaper
and cleaned with a rag and petroleum.
26637
NOTE: Do not cut the armature metal when making 10

insulation slots.
3. Armature insulation can be checked by connec-
ting an ohmmeter (1) between switch segments
and armature shaft. This reading should show in-
finity, i.e. there should be no continuity.
4. To test there are not short circuits, use an appro-
priate testing device. The only alternative is to try
changing the armature.
5. If the armature circumference has obviously be-
en in contact with the pole pieces, the pole bea-
rings are probably too worn. First check the pole
piece are fixed and that the armature spins well
in a lathe. If necessary, change the armature
bearing.
Field Windings (Fig. 11)

1. To test field winding insulation, connect an ohm-
meter to each of the coil brushes in turn and to a
clean and unpainted area of the casing. There
should be no readings, i.e. there should be no
continuity.
2. To test coil continuity, connect an ohmmeter to
each of the coil brushes in turn and to the main
power clamp (biggest braided wire). The reading
should be 1 Ω.
3. If there is a fault in the field windings, change the
whole box and field winding system.
26638
1
Bearing Bushing 11
1. Check if the bushing on the brush plate and the
box on the drive pinion side are worn. Assemble
the armature shaft and note play. Change the
bushing if there is too much play. Check the field
poles to see if there is any signs scraping against
the casing. This could also be caused by a worn
bushing.
Drive Pinion
1. Check roller clutch operation. The pinion must
spin clockwise only. If the pinion is either locked,
or spins in both ways, or if the pinion teeth are
damaged, assemble a new control unit.
If there is clear evidence of damage to pinion teeth,
check flywheel ring gear, as described in section 10.
Chapter 3 -- Charging System (All Serial Numbers)
CONTENTS

Alternator Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Alternator Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
System Testing and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Checking the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Checking the Driving Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Checking the Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Preliminary Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Alternator Wire Connection Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Charging Current and Regulated Voltage Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Charging Circuit Voltage Drop Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Insulated Side Voltage Drop Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Ground Side Voltage Drop Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Maximum Alternator Output Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Alternator Component Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
55 301 10 Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Rotor and Regulator Field Circuit Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Checking The Continuity of Three Stator Windings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Checking The Diodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Excitation Diodes Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Positive Power Diodes Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Negative Power Diodes Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Rotor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Check on Rotor Winding Resistance Measured Between Pins
Connected to Brushes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
55 301 12 Alternator Removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Electronic Voltage Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Inductor Winding Insulation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Check On Inductor (Rotor) Resistance on Slip Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Reassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Re-installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
TYPE OF ALTERNATOR
CHARACTERISTICS MAGNETI MARELLI
AA125R--14V--45A AA125R--14V--65A
Polarity Grounded negative
Revolution direction (pulley side) Clockwise
Rated voltage (V) 14
Maximum revolution rate (rpm) 10,000
Maximum output (A) 45 65
Regulator controlled voltage (V) 13.6 -- 14
Inductor winding resistance (Ω) at 25°C (77°F) 3.0 -- 3.2 2.6 -- 2.8
Voltage regulator RTT119AC
TIGHTENING TORQUES
PARTS TO BE TORQUED Nm ft lbs
Alternator fastening bolts 5.5 4
Pulley fastening nut 70 51
Rectifier fastening screws 4.0 3
Brush box and regulator screws 2.7 2
Terminal nuts 2.7 2

Alternator Description
A Magneti Marelli 45 A or 65 A external cooling fan
alternator is fitted on all models. Stator winding is
ventilated with an air conducting diaphragm in the
support on rectifier bridge side and peripheral
openings in the support on the control side. The
alternator, installed on the left side of the engine, is
operated by a pulley and a V type driving belt.
Alternators are fitted with a built-in take-up regulator.
45 A or 65 A alternator
1. Battery connector (B+ terminal)
2. Terminal protection sheath
28002
3. Alternator charge indicator connection (D+terminal).
4. Socket W 1
5
2
26640
2
Alternator charging circuit
1. Ignition switch B+ :Battery connection

2. Alternator charge warning light D+ :Alternator charge indicator
3. Battery
4. Alternator electronic voltage regulation circuit
5. Alternator
Alternator Operation
When the ignition key is turned, a small current This action causes a constant increase in the rotor
passes from the battery through the rotor field winding magnetic field and a fast increase of current and
wiring. The circuit closes, powering the charge voltage output.
warning light, the alternator D+ terminal, the rotor field As the generated voltage output (reflected by D+
winding, the alternator regulator and ground. terminal) increases, the warning light intensity
At the stage, the warning light comes on and the rotor decreases and when the voltage at the D+ terminal
is partially magnetized. equals that on the battery side of the warning light,
When the engine starts and the rotor, partially the light goes out.
magnetized, turns inside the stator windings and Voltage increases until it reaches the pre-set
generates a three-phase alternating current, a regulated voltage level.
constant quantity of this current is transformed into If the driving belt breaks, there will be no voltage
direct current by three field diodes built into the accumulation in the alternator. The charge warning
rectifier. light will stay on, thus showing there is a fault.
The direct current is then reintroduced into the circuit
to increase current flow through the rotor field
winding.
27374 27375
3 4
Ventilator belt take-up device
Fig. 3 Belt for versions without air conditioning Fig. 4. Belt for versions with air conditioning
1. Alternator 1. Belt take-up fastening nut

2. Belt take-up device 2. Belt
A. Belt tension A. Belt tension
SYSTEM TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING

PRECAUTIONS CHECKING THE BATTERY
To avoid damaging alternator charging system Check all battery elements with a densimeter. The
components, take the following precautions: battery must be at least 70% charged and efficient.
• DO NOT MAKE OR INTERRUPT any charging
circuit conniption, including battery, while the en- CHECKING THE DRIVING BELT
gine is running. Inspect the alternator driving belt and pulley,
• NEVER SHORT--CIRCUIT the alternator posi- checking that they are both clean, with no traces of
tive terminal to check if it is working. oil or lubricant and in good conditions.
• ALWAYS DISCONNECT battery cables when Check the alternator driving belt tension regularly. If
recharging the battery in the tractor with a battery you suspect the belt is not tight, check the belt
charger. take-up device as follows:
• ALWAYS CHECK battery polarity when instal- Belt for version without air conditioning (Fig. 3)
ling a battery or using a supplementary battery to -- slacken the nut (2) which fastens the alterna-
start the engine. tor to the take-up device bracket;
• DO NOT SHORT--CIRCUIT regulator input/out- -- with a lever, move the alternator (1) on the
put terminals when the alternator is working. take-up device bracket to reach correct belt
• CONNECT POSITIVE TO POSITIVE AND tension (A) by 10--11 mm (.475 to .511 in.) of
NEGATIVE TO NEGATIVE. belt (1) and torque the fastening nut (2) at
78--98 Nm (57-72 ft. lbs.).
Preliminary Checks Belt for version with air conditioning (Fig. 4)
Before carrying out these electrical tests, carefully -- slacken the take-up device (1) fastening nut
inspect the charging system and the electrical (2);
system in general. -- hold the take-up device arm (1) and move it
Check continuity in all conductors and connections. on the bracket to reach the correct belt ten-
Check they are all well fastened. sion (A) by 12--13 mm (.475 to .511 in.) of
belt, then torque the fastening nuts (3) at
78--98 Nm (57-72 ft. lbs.).
Correct deflection values, measured by applying the light goes out now, one of the alternator components
following loads to the middle of the belt: is malfunctioning. Carry out the “ALTERNATOR
COMPONENTS TESTS” described in this section.
If the warning light stays on, check there is no
Version grounded short circuit between D+ wire endings and
without cab, Version with warning light.
or with cab cab with air
without air conditioning
conditioning PRELIMINARY TESTS
Load (N) 78 -- 98 78 -- 98 These preliminary tests can be carried out without
removing any components from the tractor charging
Deflection 10 -- 11mm 12 -- 13mm circuit. These tests check:
.393 -- .433 in. .475 -- .511 in. • the alternator wire connections
• the alternator charging current and controlled
voltage
NOTE: If belt is damaged or needs to be frequently • voltage drop in the alternator charging circuit
adjusted, replace it. • maximum alternator output
The following testing devices are required:
CHECKING THE WARNING LIGHT
• 0--30 V mobile coil voltmeter
Turn the ignition key and check the light is completely
lit. • 0--1 V millivoltmeter
If the warning light does not light up completely, • 0--110 A mobile coil ammeter
check the light bulb. If the light bulb has not blown, • 1.5 ohm, 110 A variable load resistance
carry out the alternator wiring connection tests, as
described in the paragraph “PRELIMINARY TESTS” NOTE: Most testing devices on the market today in-
in this section. clude several devices in the same case. When using
If the light is on, start the engine and run it above these devices, follow the manufacturer’s instruc-
idling speed. The warning light should go out. tions.
If the warning light does not go out, stop the engine
and disconnect the D+ terminal wire. If the warning
ALTERNATOR WIRE CONNECTION TEST

See figure 5.
1. Disconnect the battery.
2. Disconnect B+ (2) and D+ (3) alternator termi-
nals.
3. Reconnect the battery and turn the ignition key to
ON without starting the engine. Connect a volt-
meter (4) between each terminals and earth
(ground) (1). There must be voltage at the bat-
tery.
If there is no voltage at the battery, track down and
repair a continuity failure in the external wire circuit. 26643
See circuit diagram in figure 2.

5
4. Connect D+ terminal warning light (red) and
ground. The warning light show come on.
5. Disconnect the battery and reconnect the con-
nection previously disconnected to the alterna-
tor.
NOTE: If the warning light does not light up when the

wire is connected to the alternator; there is a fault ei-
ther in the alternator regulator circuit or in the rotor
circuit. Check D+ terminal is clean and then test the
alternator components as described in this section.
CHARGING CURRENT AND REGULATED

VOLTAGE TEST
See figure 6.
1. Check that all tractor electric devices are
switched off and the ignition key is turned to OFF.
2. Disconnect the negative battery terminal clamp
and the B+ negative alternator terminal (3).
3. Connect an ammeter (1) between the discon-
nected wire (red) (4) and the B+ alternator termi-
nal.
4. Connect a voltmeter (2) between the B+ alterna-
tor terminal and ground. 26644
5. Reconnect the battery. Start the engine and run 6

it at 2000 rpm. Note the reading on the voltmeter
and the ammeter.
6. The voltmeter readings should be higher than the
battery voltage and when the ammeter reading
falls below 10 A, the voltmeter reading should
stabilize at 13.6 -- 14V.
If the voltmeter reading is higher than 14 V, the
alternator regulator must be changed, as described
in this section. (After installing a new regulator, carry
out tests 4 and 5).
If the voltmeter reading is less than 13.6 V, there is
either a faulty component in the alternator or a failure
due to excessive resistance in external charging
system connections.
If the ammeter reads zero A, then one of the
alternator components is faulty. Turn the engine off
and carry out the alternator component test, as
described in this chapter.
CHARGING CIRCUIT VOLTAGE DROP

TESTS
Insulated Side Voltage Drop Test
See figure 7.
Check the ignition key is turned to OFF.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable and the B+
alternator wire (1).
2. Connect a millivoltmeter (5) between the positive
battery terminal clamp and D+ wire (3) (positive
side of the wire).
3. Connect an ammeter (2) between the B+ alterna- 26645
tor terminal and the D+ wire (negative side of the 7

wire).
4. Reconnect the negative battery cable and con-
nect a variable load resistance (4) with cursor in
minimum current intake position (maximum re-
sistance) through the battery terminal clamps.
5. Start the engine and Increase speed to 2000
rpm.
6. Decrease resistance charging load (decreasing
resistance) slowly until the ammeter reads 45 A
or 65 A according to the type of alternator.
7. Note the reading on the millivoltmeter. This must
not be higher than 400 millivolt.
A reading higher than 400 millivolt indicates a fault

due to excessive resistance on external circuits.
If the alternator does not output required power and
the millivoltmeter reading is less than 400 millivolt,
there is a faulty component in the alternator. Carry
out the alternator component tests, as described in
this section.
8. Stop the engine.

Ground Side Voltage Drop Test
See figure 8.
1. Check the Ignition key is turned to OFF.
2. The circuit is the same as that described in the
previous test, except that the millivoltmeter (4) is
now connected between the negative battery ter-
minal clamp and the alternator casing (negative
side of the casing).
NOTE: Check the variable load resistance (3) is in

minimum current intake position (maximum resist-
ance).
26646
3. Start the engine and increase speed to 2000 rpm. 8

4. Increase resistance current load (by decreasing
resistance itself) slowly until the ammeter (2)
reads 45 A and 65 A according to the type of al-
ternator.
5. Note the reading on the voltmeter. This must not
be higher than 200 millivolt.
A reading higher than 200 millivolt indicates faults
due to excessive resistance on external circuits.
If the alternator does not output required power and
the millivoltmeter reading is less than 200 millivolt,
there is a faulty component in the alternator. Carry
out the alternator component tests as described in
the section.
6. Stop the engine.
MAXIMUM ALTERNATOR OUTPUT TEST

See figure 9.
1. Check the ignition key is turned to OFF.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and the B+
alternator wire (4).
3. Connect an ammeter (5) tightly between B+ al-
ternator terminal (4) and D+ wire (1) (negative
side of the wire).
4. Connect a voltmeter (3) between the B+ alterna-
tor terminal (4) and ground.
5. Reconnect the negative battery cable. Start the
engine and increase speed to 2000 rpm.
26647
9
6. Increase resistance current load (2) (by decreas-
ing resistance) slowly until the ammeter reads 45
A and 65 A, according to the type of alternator.
7. Note the reading on the voltmeter. This must not
be less than 13.6 V.
A reading lower than 13.6 V shows there is a faulty
component in the alternator. Carry out the alternator
component tests, as described in this section.
ALTERNATOR COMPONENT TESTS

These alternator tests must be carried out only if the
PRELIMINARY TESTS have shown a faulty
alternator component. These tests check:
• the regulator,
• rotor field winding continuity,
• rotor brushes, springs and contact rings.
NOTE: The previously described component tests

can be carried out with the alternator installed in the
tractor. In order to carry out the other alternator tests,
remove the alternator from the tractor. Refer to the
section “REMOVAL, REASSEMBLY AND SER-
VICING” in this chapter.
ALTERNATOR
Removal
Op. 55 301 10
IMPORTANT: Before disconnecting the alternator
wires, check the ignition key is turned to OFF
1. Lift hood
2. Carry out operation 90 100 80 Protection grid,
right protection removal only (see section 90).
3. Disconnect B+ (1) and D+ (2) from the alternator
(Fig. 11).
26648
4. Loosen and remove the nut and bolt (3) fastening
the alternator to the belt take-up device (4)
10
(Fig. 11).
5. Move the alternator to reduce belt (1) tension and
remove it from the alternator pulley (2) (Fig. 13).
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
26650
10 9
12
Alternator components
1. Pulley fastening nut 6. Stator

2. Pulley 7. Rear support plate
3. Cooling fan 8. Rectifier bridge
4. Front support plate 9. Protection guard
5. Rotor 10. Electric voltage regulator with built-in brushes
Alternator hinging (Fig. 13) 1

1. Belt
2. Pulley 3
3. Alternator fastening bolt 28011
13
Firmly fix the alternator horizontally to an appropriate
holder with internal surfaces padded with soft
material.
Remove the guard (1) by unscrewing the nuts which
fasten it to the alternator (Fig. 14).
Before dismantling the alternator completely, carry
out the operations and tests described on the
following pages.
26651
14
Rotor and Regulator Field Circuit Test
The following testing devices are required:
• 12 volt battery
• multitester
• 2 watt test lamp
See figure 15.
1. Disconnect all alternator wires.
2. Connect a 12 V battery and 2.2 watt test lamp (2)
in series to D+ (1) and alternator casing (negative
side of the casing).
3. The test lamp should light up. 26652
If the test lamp does not light up, then the rotor circuit
is faulty. Check brushes, contact rings and rotor field 15
winding continuity.
If the test shows these components are satisfactory
then the regulator may be faulty.
Checking the Continuity of Three Stator

Windings
Position the points of an ammeter (regulated on W x Ω
1 scale) so that they touch the stator phase ends (a
-- b -- c) in the three possible ways shown in
figures 16, 17, 18. Each three reading should show
the same resistance value.
If resistance is infinite or zero, the measured phase
is either interrupted or short-circuited and the stator
needs to be changed.
26653
16
26654
17
26655
18
Checking the Diodes
Disconnect the terminal wire connector (1) of the
excitation diodes from positive brush pin (Fig. 19).
26656
19
Unweld stator winding terminals (2) from rectifier
bridge (Fig. 20).
26657
20
Excitation Diodes Test
Insert a ohmmeter point in the connector mentioned
above (1) (Fig. 19).
The second point must be put in contact successively

with each of the three terminals (A--B--C). Repeat the
three measurements after inverting the instrument
points (Fig. 21).
26658
21
Positive Power Diodes Test
Put an ohmmeter point in contact with the positive (X)
alternator terminal and the other successively with
each of the three terminals (A--B--C) (Fig. 22).
Repeat the three instrument points after inverting the
instrument point connections.
26659
22
Negative Power Diodes Test
Put an ohmmeter point in contact with the negative
(Y) diode plate and the other successively with each
of the three terminals (A--B--C) (Fig. 23).
Repeat the three measurements after inverting the
instrument point connections.
26660
23
In the three tests described above, the instrument
should show resistance at each terminal (A--B--C).
Inverting the instrument points, there should be no
resistance (Fig. 23). If there is resistance in both
cases, this means the diodes are short circuited.
Otherwise, with an R=0 value (interrupted diode),
change the whole rectifier bridge.
ROTOR
Check on Rotor Winding Resistance Measured

Between Pins Connected to Brushes
Disconnect the excitation diode terminal wire
connector (1) from the pin connected to the positive
brush.
Put both points of an ohmmeter (regulated on W x 1

scale) in contact with the two voltage regulator-brush
holder pins. If resistance reading is different from the
indicated value or if it is infinite (interrupted circuit),
26661
check and, if necessary, change the rotor (Fig. 24).
24
OP. 55 301 12
ALTERNATOR REMOVED
Disassembly
Place a suitable Allen wrench in the hexagonal hole
in the alternator shaft to prevent it from moving. With
another wrench, unscrew the fan and rotor pulley
fastening nut. Draw out the above mentioned parts,
spacing collars and alternator washers (Fig. 25).
26662
25
Disconnect the excitation diode terminal wire
connector (2) from the pin connected to the positive
brush.
Unscrew the screws (3) securing the electronic
voltage regulator (4) complete with brushes to the
rear alternator support.
Unscrew the nuts (5) and remove the screws
fastening the alternator main external parts (Fig. 26).
26663
26
Electronic Voltage Regulator (Fig. 27)
A. Brushes
B. Pins
26664
27
Separate the parts (as shown in figure) bearing in
mind that a considerable degree of pressure on the
rotor shaft is required to free the front support plate
(6) and the rotor (7) (Fig. 28).
If you do not have access to a press, use a brass
planer to avoid damaging the thread.
26665
28
Remove the screws (9) fastening the rectifier bridge
(10) to the rear support plate (8) (Fig. 29).
The rectifier bridge must not be disassembled. This
spare pan is supplied as a whole.
26666
29
Separate the rectifier bridge (10) from the rear
support plate. Unweld the stator winding terminals
(11) (Fig. 30).
26667
30
Separate the stator (12) and the terminals (11) from
the rear support plate (8) (Fig. 31).
26668
31
Inductor Winding Insulation Test
Put both ohmmeter points (set to Ω x 1 scale) in
contact respectively with a slip ring and the rotor
casing (see arrows). The instrument should show
infinite resistance. If this is not the case, change the
rotor (Fig. 32).
26669
32
Check On Inductor (Rotor) Resistance On Slip
Rings
Put both ohmmeter points (set to Ω x 1 scale) in con-
tact respectively with the slip rings (see arrows). The
instrument should show a certain degree of resist-
ance (Fig. 33).
If the instrument reading is different from the pre-
scribed value or shows infinity (interrupted circuit),
change the rotor.
Check the ball bearing moves freely without sticking
or making noise.
26670
Check the collectors have not been dented by the
brushes. If this is the case, change the whole rotor. 33
Reassembly
4
To reassemble, reverse the order of the operations
described above.
2
OVERHAUL
1. Check the rotor and stator poles are not worn. If
they are, either the ball bearings are worn, the
boxes are not in line or the rotor shaft is misshap-
en.
1
NOTE: Alternator ball bearings cannot be serviced 3
separately. When necessary therefore, both must be
26671
changed.
34
2. Remove the screws (1) securing plate (2) that

blocks bearing (3). Remove it from the front sup-
port plate (4) (Fig. 34).
Check if it is worn or damaged. If so, change it.
Before installing the bearing, check front support
plate holder and clean it carefully.
3. Installation of bearing (5) on support plate side is
different from the one described above. A new ro-
tor and bearing assembly must be installed
(Fig. 35).
26672
35
Re-installation
1. Re-install the alternator by reversing the removal
procedure.
During re-installation, remember to:
• check the negative (ground) battery cable is dis-
connected from the battery while re-installing the
alternator.
• regulate the alternator driving belt, as described
previously in this chapter.
Chapter 4 -- Battery (All Serial Numbers)
CONTENTS

55 301 40 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Re-Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Battery Checking and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Relative Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Battery Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Dry Charged Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Charging the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Normal Charging (Top-Up) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Charging Very Flat Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Relative Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Test Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Battery Problems -- Frequent Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
TYPE OF BATTERY
CHARACTERISTICS
All models
Voltage (V) 12
Cold start amperage (DCA) 6800
Capacity (Ah) 100
Number of elements 6
Weight approx. 20 kg (44 lbs.)
Grounding terminal Negative

A “sealed”, maintenance-free battery is installed in all Each element of the battery consists of positive and
models, behind the driver’s seat. negative plates, positioned alternatively one next to
the other. Each positive plate is separated from
NOTE: “Maintenance-free” means that the battery negative plates by means of a porous insulating
electrolyte, in normal conditions of use, does not spacer. If one of the positive plates touches a
leak. It could leak off the battery is loaded over negative plate in the element, the element will
14.4 V This, in fact, cause the liquid to boil due to the short-circuit and be irreparably damaged. The
gas formed as the battery charges up completely. It positive plates are welded to a collecting bar and
can be caused by a fault charging system, by quick form a positive terminal. The negative plates are
recharging or topping-up. welded to a similar collecting bar and form a negative
terminal.
The four main functions of a battery are: Each positive plate consists of a lead grid with lead
• To supply a source of electricity for starting, igni- peroxide pasted to the grid holes. The negative
tion and instrument lighting and operation. plates consists of a lead grid with lead sponge pasted
• To control voltage in the electrical system. to the grid holes.
• To supply electricity when the power required is The plates are covered by electrolyte which consists
higher than that produced by the alternator. of a diluted sulphuric acid solution.
• To support inactive loads from radio and micro- The battery box is made of polypropylene.
processor memory.
BATTERY
Op. 55 301 40
Removal
The 100 Ah battery is installed in front of

engine (Figures 1 and 2).
1. Lift hood
2. Loosen the bolts on both terminals and discon-
nect the positive cable (1) and the negative cable
(2) from the battery. Make sure they do not touch
the battery itself (Fig. 1).
28004
3. Loosen battery fastening bolts on its front side.
1
4. Lift the battery from its housing by the two han-
dles (1) on the battery sides (Fig. 2).
28003
Re-Installation
2
Applicable to all types of battery
1. To reinstall the battery, reverse the removal pro-
cedure, with the following precautions:
• Check the battery is clean, there are no signs of
liquid leak and the breather covers are complete-
ly installed. Spread petrolatum (such as Vase-
line) on terminal clamps. Do not use traditional lu-
bricants as they favour electrolytic corrosion.
• Check the battery housing and bracket. The
clamps should be clean and there should be no
stones or other small objects inside which could
pierce the battery box.
• Check the terminal polarity is correct. Check the
terminal clamp connections are not too tight.
• If a radio is installed, all data stored in memory
will be lost and it will need to be reprogrammed.
Electronic control units and microprocessors --
where relevant -- will not lose stored data as elec-
tronic stress and transmission control calibration
are not involved in this operation.
BATTERY CHECKING AND MAINTENANCE

RELATIVE DENSITY Maximum battery life can be obtained by taking care
The relative density of battery electrolyte shows the of the battery and carrying out regular checks. The
charge level of the battery. When the battery is fully energy capacity output must not be exceeded by
charged, the relative density of the electrolyte at constant and/or excessive overload and charging
25°C (77°F) is at least 1.280. requirements must be respected.
Alternatively, the approximately voltage charge can

be measured by using a digital voltmeter (±0.01 V) BATTERY MAINTENANCE
as follows:
IMPORTANT
less than 10.5V unusable battery *
less than 11.SV flat battery Batteries contain sulphuric acid and generate a high-
less than 12.3V half-charged battery ly explosive hydrogen and oxygen mix during charg-
ing.
more than 12.6 V fully-charged battery
* See notes to paragraph “TESTS” for instructions on • Never use devices producing flames or sparks
how to recuperate a slightly sulphured battery. while inspecting the liquid level.
Battery voltage must be registered on a flat battery • Always protect your hands and your eyes before
considering the following: removing battery caps.
C. the battery must be flat for at least 4 hours. During battery maintenance, follow the steps below:
D. if the vehicle has been used recently, switch the 1. Keep the electrolyte level 17 mm (.675 in.)over
headlights on for 2 minutes. the plates, as recommended. If this is not re-
When a battery is flat, the sulphuric acid in the spected, the acid will reach another concentra-
electrolyte combines chemically with the plates and tion which could damage spacers and deterio-
this decreases the relative density of the solution. rate plate performance.
2. Use distilled or de-mineralized water only. Never
A battery densimeter will define the relative density
use tap water or ram water or water from any oth-
of the electrolyte in an element and the quantity of
er source.
sulphuric acid not used in the solution will show the
degree of charge of that element. 3. Keep the battery charged at least 75% to avoid
plate sulphurisation, performance loss and pos-
Low temperatures require higher battery charge to sible freezing at low temperatures.
operate. For example, a battery with a relative
density of 1.225 at 27°C (80°F) can start the engine 4. Avoid overcharging the battery, as excessive
if the outside temperature is mild but might not do so charge will generate high internal heat causing
if the outside temperature drops, causing lower grid deterioration and water leaks.
battery performance levels. 5. During quick recharging, check the battery tem-
perature does not exceed 50°C, (122°F).
Table 1 shows the effects of temperature on battery
performance. 6. Do not add sulphuric acid to an element unless
some liquid has been split. Before topping up,
Table 1 check the solution has the correct relative densi-
Fully charged battery ty. Slow recharge is the only way to recharge the
Temperature
performance battery completely. You can use a high amperage
25.0°C (77°F) 100% battery charger to charge the battery with high
--4.5°C (68.9°F) 82% current intensity for short periods of time but use
--24.0°C (33.8°F) 64% a slow charge to bring battery to its full capacity.
--27.5°C (27.5°F) 58%
--31.0°C (21.2°F) 50%
--34.5°C (14.9°F) 40%
--37.5°C (9.5°F) 33%
DRY CHARGED BATTERIES 3. Check the electrolyte level in each element again
Dry charged batteries must be prepared as follows: and, if necessary, top up with distilled water to
level.
1. Disconnect the breathing caps from the battery
element. WARNING
2. Fill each element to the recommended level with Explosive gas is formed when a battery is charged.
electrolyte, relative density 1.260. Do not smoke or use naked flames when checking
liquid level and check the battery charger is oft before
NOTE: The electrolyte is sulphuric acid diluted at a connecting and disconnecting it, to avoid sparks
temperature of 21° -- 32° C. which could ignite the gas.
3. After filling, leave the battery to rest for 15 min-

utes. Check level and top up if required.
4. Charge the battery for 4 hours at 5--8 A, checking Charging Very Flat Batteries
all the elements are producing gas freely. To recharge a Pb--Ca maintenance free battery, we
5. Reconnect the breathing caps to the battery ele- recommend a constant voltage battery charger. For
ment. very flat batteries, charge for 48 hours, at 16 V, with
current limitation (50 A for 100 Ah).
This method is self-regulating. High current is

CHARGING THE BATTERY provided at the beginning (when the battery voltage
Before charging a battery: is very low). Current decreases progressively when
1. Clean battery box and element covers carefully the battery is fully charged (and its voltage is high).
with ammonia diluted in warm water and cleans
the terminals. If only constant voltage battery chargers are
available, we recommend using voltage levels and
2. Check the electrolyte level and -- if it is under the timing shown in table 2. These figures refer to very
plate level -- top up with distilled water to cover flat batteries. If the battery is only 50% charged, use
the plates. half the time shown (slow charging programs). For
other conditions, reduce charging time
Normal Charging (Top-Up) proportionally. Where feasible, use the slowest
1. Charge the battery completely with a slow battery charging program to increase battery life.
charger at 3--6 A for the required time. This can
take 36 hours or more if the battery is very flat. A Table 2
severely sulphured battery may not charge at all. Type of battery
When the battery is completely charged, the ele-
ments will produce gas freely and the relative 100 Ah
density will remain constant. Disconnect the bat- (800 DCA)
tery charger after three consecutive densimeter Slow charging 25 hrs at 5A
readings registered every hour showing that rel- programs 12.5 hrs at 10A
ative density has stopped increasing.
Fast charging programs
7 hrs at 10A
2. When using a fast or high ampere charge, follow (emergency use only)
the manufacturer’s instructions carefully. High
charging amperage increases liquid temperature If violent boiling occurs during recharging, due to gas
and, if the battery charger is not equipped with an formation or liquid leakage, or if the battery box is hot
automatic timer or thermostat, it can cause the [50°C (122°F) or higher], temporarily reduce or stop
electrolyte temperature to rise over 50°C battery charging to avoid damaging the battery.
(122°F). This can cause violent boiling in the bat-
tery and damage to internal components.
TESTS
Before carrying out battery tests, check the breathers NOTE: Relative density should not vary more than
are not blocked, there is no rust, the breather caps 0.025 points between cells.
are not open and the box is not cracked.
Required testing equipment: 4. If the relative density is 1.280 or more, the battery
is completely charged and has good functional
• Densimeter conditions.
• Battery starter tester (high amperage multimeter) 5. If the relative density is less than 1.280, charge
• Thermometer the battery and check the charging system to de-
• Battery charger fine the reason for its low charge.
NOTE: If distilled water has been added recently, re-

Relative Density charge the battery for a short time otherwise the
This test shows the charge level of a battery densimeter will not give correct readings.
1. With a float in vertical position, note the reading.
If the battery has been charged under static
2. Adjust the densimeter reading for battery electro- conditions, a thicker electrolyte will accumulate on
lyte temperature variations subtracting 4 points the bottom of the elements. The battery must be
(relative density 0.004) for every 5.5°C (42°F) shaken at regular intervals to mix the electrolyte: by
below the temperature the densimeter is cali- this way, the charging voltage will be better and the
brated at and adding 4 points (relative density densimeter will show a more accurate reading during
0.004) for every 5.5°C (42°F) above this temper- the tests.
ature.
The following examples have been calculated with a Performance Tests
densimeter calibrated at 30.
Performance tests help to understand if the battery
Example 1: can adequately run the engine. Voltage readings
Temperature below 30°C show battery condition. Before carrying out the test,
Battery electrolyte temperature 19°C check the battery liquid level is correct and the open
Densimeter reading 1,270 circuit voltage is 12.5V or more. The battery can be
Subtract 11,0 x 0,004 tested in the tractor or removed.
5,5
1. Switch the battery start tester current control to
Correct relative density= 1,262
OFF (high amperage discharge tester). Calibrate
the voltage selection switch to the rated battery
Example 2: voltage or slightly higher. Connect the positive
Temperature above 30°C tester conductors to the positive battery terminal
Battery electrolyte temperature 40°C and the negative conductors to the negative bat-
Densimeter reading 1,220 tery terminal.
Add 10,0 x 0,004 0,007
2. Turn the current control knob until the ammeter
5,5
reading reaches half the cold start battery am-
Correct relative density = 1,227
perage and note the voltage readings.
3. Use the following table to define charge level. • If the reading shows 9.6 V or higher after 15 sec-
onds, the battery has adequate power output and
orrect Correct car easily be charged following the normal proce-
Average
Charge relative relative dure.
battery
condition density at density at • If the reading is lower than 9.6V the battery is not
voltage
15°C (59°F) 25°C(77°F) satisfactory for use and must be tested as fol-
100% 1.295 1.287 12.66 lows:
75% 1.253 1.246 12.45
50% 1.217 1.210 12.30 WARNING: Do not leave high discharge on the bat-
25% 1.177 1.170 12.00 tery for more than 15 seconds.
Scarica 1.137 1.130 11.84
Test Charging BATTERY PROBLEMS -- FREQUENT
This test is only for those batteries which have not CAUSES
passed the performance test above. 1. Internal open circuit.
2. Internal short-circuit.
1. Connect the positive battery charger tester con-
ductors (high amperage discharge tester) to the 3. Battery liquid leak.
positive battery terminal and the negative con- 4. Grid active material separation.
ductors to the negative battery terminal. 5. Accumulation of sulphate crystals too big to be
2. Connect the positive battery charger conductor dispersed.
to the positive battery terminal and the negative
conductor to the negative battery terminal. These problems are commonly caused by the
3. Tune the battery charger timer to more than 3 following:
minute charge and then back to 3 minute charge. 1. Component failure inside the elements.
4. Se the charging amperage as close as possible 2. Excessive crystal growth which can pierce the
to 40 A. spacers and cause short circuits.
5. After 3 minute fast charge, read the voltmeter. 3. Excessive overload (bad charging system, high
• If the total voltage is higher than 15.5 V the bat- voltage fast charging, high operating tempera-
tery is not satisfactory. It is probably sulphured or tures).
worn and must be changed. 4. Battery electrolyte freezing
A fully charged battery freezes at 65°C, (149°F)
A 50% charged battery freezes at --17°C and
NOTE: A slightly sulphured can renewed using a --27°C. A completely flat battery between --3°C
multiple type battery charger, with upper open circuit and --11°C. Excessively fast charging and boiling
voltage limit of 50 V. A sulphured battery has high re- caused by gas formation cause the separation of
sistance and for this reason set high voltage at the active material from the grids. Separation de-
beginning to overcome resistance due to sulphurisa- stroys the battery chemical function.
tion. At the beginning there may be no visible sign of
5. Crystals are formed when batteries are left flat.
charging. After some minutes of inactivity, a low
High temperature and long periods of time in-
charge will show. This is followed by a fast rise in am-
crease this condition. If a battery is left at room
perage. Amperage must not exceed 14.0 A and the
temperature for a week it can rarely be charged
battery liquid temperature must not exceed 50°C
in the vehicle. Battery recharge requires higher
(122°F). When the amperage stabilizes, set the volt-
constant voltage. After three weeks the battery
age until amperage corresponds to 5 A fixed. Contin-
will be permanently compromised and it will be
ue this amperage until the relative density of battery
necessary to follow the procedure described for
liquid stops increasing [1.275--1.280 at 20°C (68°F)].
very flat batteries.
This should take approximately 48 hours. Let the bat-
tery rest far 24 hours and then carry out the previous- Fully charged batteries have longer life. A
ly described performance test. lead-calcium battery discharges 3% every month.
This means that in 16 months it will reach 50%
charge. In the tractor, inactive load is approximately
• If the total voltage is less than 15.5V check the 50 mA. To forecast discharge on a vehicle not in use
relative density of each element and recharge add approximately 8 Ah a week to this value.
the battery according to the following scale:
It is worth noting that if a battery is weak during
Relative density Fast charge up to: engine start-up, it is best to let the battery rest for two
1.150 or less 60 minutes minutes. This rest time increases as the temperature
decreases.
from 1.151 to 1.175 45 minutes
When two batteries are installed, do not use an old
from 1.176 to 1.200 30 minutes battery with a new one. One battery will always stop
before the other one. One battery will always stop
from 1.200 to 1.225 15 minutes before the other. If one battery has lasted as forecast,
(slow charge only) change both batteries. If one stopped before the
forecast time, due to a defect in production, then
change only one of the batteries.
SECTION 55-- ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Chapter 5 -- Cab Electrical Components (All Serial Numbers)
CONTENTS

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
55 404 14 Direction Indicator Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
55 418 10 Multi-Function Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
55 440 06 Services Electronic Control Centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
55 440 08 Powershuttle Electronic Control Centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
55 510 20 Fuse Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
55 510 22 Fuses -- Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
55 512 34 Loudspeakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
55 514 22 Cab Lamp Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
55 518 52 Windscreen Wiper Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
55 518 82 Rear Windscreen Wiper Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
COMPONENTS
Op. 55 404 14
DIRECTION INDICATOR SWITCH

Removal
WARNING
gloves and shoes.
To remove the hydrostatic steering control valve,

proceed as follows:

panel lower guard R.I. (Only removal)

steering wheel R.I. (Only removal).
3. Carry out operation 5541810--Multi-function

control panel R.I. (Only removal).

control switch (2) from their seats, complete with
the dust guard (3).
25761
Installation
Proceed as follows:
WARNING
5. Reconnect the electrical connections (1) and the

light control switch (2), complete with dust guard
(3), then fit the retaining bolts on the dashboard.
6. Carry out operation 5541810--Multi-function

control panel R.I. (Installation).

steering wheel R.I. (Installation).

panel lower guard R.I. (Installation).
Op. 55 418 10
MULTI--FUNCTION CONTROL PANEL

Removal
WARNING
gloves and shoes.
Proceed as follows: 25759
2
1. Remove the four retaining bolts (1) on the control
panel (2).
2. Disconnect the electrical connections (1) and re-

move the control panel (2).
Remove the rev counter, if fitted.
Installation
WARNING
25760
Proceed as follows.
3. If fitted, reconnect the rev counter, fit the control

panel (2, fig. 3) and the electrical connections
(1).
4. Fit the four control panel retaining bolts (1, fig. 2).
Op. 55 440 06
SERVICES ELECTRONIC CONTROL

CENTRE
Removal
WARNING
gloves and shoes.
To remove the control centre, proceed as follows:
1. Carry out operation 5540414 -- Direction indi-

cator switch R.I. (Only removal).
2. Disconnect the dashboard electrical connections

(1) and the dashboard (2).
25762
3. Remove the services control centre (3) retaining

bolts from the support and disconnect the con-
nections.
Installation
WARNING
27161
Proceed as follows.
4. Connect the control centre connections and se-

cure to the support using the bolts.
5. Connect the dashboard electrical connections

(1, fig. 4) and fit the dashboard (2).

cator switch R.I. (Installation).
Op. 55 440 08
POWER SHUTTLE ELECTRONIC

CONTROL CENTRE
Removal
WARNING
gloves and shoes.
To remove the control centre, proceed as follows:

cator switch R.I. (Only removal).
2. Disconnect the dashboard electrical connections

(1) and the dashboard (2).
25762
6
3. Remove the Power Shuttle control centre (2) re-
taining bolts from the support and disconnect the
electrical connections.
Installation
WARNING
27161
Proceed as follows.
4. Connect the connections to the control centre

and secure to the support using the bolts.
5. Connect the dashboard electrical connections

(1, fig. 6) and fit the dashboard (2).

cator switch R.I. (Installation).
Op. 55 510 20
FUSE BOX
Removal
WARNING
gloves and shoes.
Proceed as follows.

lower fitting (2) on the control panel.
25756
2. Unscrew the retaining bolts (1), remove the fuse

box (2) and disconnect all electrical cables.
3. Remove all faulty relays and fuses in the box and

insert new relays and fuses.
4. Connect all electrical cables on the fuse box.
5. Assemble the fuse box and support bracket.
25763
Installation
WARNING
Proceed as follows.
6. Assemble the control panel lower fitting (2, fig. 8)

and the control panel retaining bolts (1).
Op. 55 510 22
FUSES--RELAYS
Removal
WARNING
gloves and shoes.
25756
10
Proceed as follows.

lower fitting (2) on the control panel.
2. Replace the faulty relay or fuse.
Installation
WARNING
27160
11
Proceed as follows.
3. Assemble the control panel lower fitting (2) and

the control panel retaining bolts (1).
Op. 55 512 34
LOUDSPEAKERS
Removal
WARNING
gloves and shoes.
Proceed as follows.
1. Remove the four retaining bolts (1) on the RH

loudspeaker. 27682
12
2. Disconnect the electrical connection (1) and the

RH loudspeaker (2).
3. Repeat the same operations on the LH loud-

speaker.
Installation
WARNING
27683
13
Proceed as follows.
4. Connect the electrical connection (1, fig. 13) on

the RH loudspeaker (2).
5. Remove the four retaining bolts (1, fig. 12) on the

RH loudspeaker.
6. Repeat the same operations on the LH loud-

speaker.
Op. 55 514 22
CAB LAMP FITTING

Removal
WARNING
gloves and shoes.
Proceed as follows.
1. Remove the overhead lamp plastic cover.
27680
2. Unscrew the two overhead lamp retaining
screws (1). 14
3. Disconnect the electrical connection (1) and the

overhead lamp (2).
Installation
WARNING
27681
15
Proceed as follows.
4. Connect the electrical connection (1, fig. 15) and

the overhead lamp (2).
5. Position the two overhead lamp retaining screws

(1, fig. 14).
6. Assemble the overhead lamp plastic cover.

Op. 55 518 52
WINDSCREEN WIPER MOTOR

Removal
WARNING
gloves and shoes.
Proceed as follows.
1. Unscrew the retaining bolts (1) and remove the 27162
sun shade (2), complete with its support. 16
2. Lift the cap (2), unscrew the nut (1), remove the
blade (3) from the wiper and the seal on the pin.
27163
17
3. Unscrew nuts (1) and (2) from the blade support
pin.
Disconnect the motor connections and remove
the motor from inside the cab.
Installation
WARNING
27164
18
4. Position the windscreen wiper motor on the wind-

shield, connect the electrical connections and
secure in position with the nuts.
5. Fit the seal on the pin, position the blade and se-
cure with the nut.
6. Assemble and secure the sun shade and sup-

port.
Op. 55 518 82
REAR WINDSCREEN WIPER MOTOR

Removal
WARNING
gloves and shoes.
Proceed as follows.
1. Lift the cap (1), unscrew the nut (2), remove the
blade (3) and the seal.
27165
19
2. Unscrew nut (1) and nut (2) from the blade pin
and disconnect the motor connections and re-
move the rear windscreen wiper motor from in-
side the cab.
Installation
WARNING
27166
20
3. Position the motor on the rear window, make the

electrical connections and secure the motor us-
ing the nuts.
4. Fit the seal on the pin, insert the blade and lock
in position with the nut.
Chapter 6 -- All Tractors Before Serial Number 1269072
CONTENTS


Use Chapter 7 for instrument/instrument panel
introduction and location. For detailed information,
see the tractor wiring diagrams (Chapters 10 or 11) for
your actual tractor configuration.
Use Chapter 8 for switches and controls introduction

and location. For detailed information, see the tractor
wiring diagrams (Chapters 10 or 11) for your actual
tractor configuration.
Use Chapter 9 for connector reference and location.

For detailed information, see the tractor wiring
diagrams (Chapters 10 or 11) for your actual tractor
configuration.
Use Chapter 10 wiring diagrams for tractors before

serial number 1232544.
Use Chapter 11 wiring diagrams for tractors between

serial numbers 1232545 and 1269071.
Chapter 7 -- Instruments (Before Serial Number 1269072)
CONTENTS

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Fuel Level Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Proofmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Electronic Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Electronic Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Sector 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Sector 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Sector 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Multiple Indication Instrument Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
ANALOG INSTRUMENTS
INTRODUCTION
26302
1
The analog instrument panel consists of four display sections:
1. Warning and indicator lights; 3. Proofmeter;

2. Fuel level gauge; 4. Engine coolant temperature gauge.
Warning light panel (Fig. 2)
8 12
26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
26303
Refer to the following list to identify the operation conditions expressed by the warning lights shown in figure 2
correctly.
Condition Indicator
1. Left direction indicator Flashing (green)
2. Side/Tail lights Fixed (green)
3. Slow gear range on with Power Shuttle/HI--LO Fixed (yellow)
4. Fast gear range on with Power Shuttle/HI--LO Fixed (green)
5. Low battery charge Fixed (red)
6. Low engine oil pressure Fixed (red)
7. Air cleaner clogged Fixed (yellow)
8. 8+8 and 16+16 gear transmission status Fixed (red)
9. Low brake oil Fixed (red)
10. Differential lock on Fixed (yellow)
11. Right direction indicator Flashing (green)
12. Permanent dual drive alarm Fixed (green)
13. Front lift disabled (where fitted) Fixed (amber)
14. Automatic dual drive on Fixed (green)
15. Permanent dual drive on Fixed (green)
16. Trailer brake on Fixed (yellow)
17. Handbrake on Fixed (red)
18. Synchronised PTO Fixed (yellow)
19. PTO on Fixed (yellow)
20. Front PTO on Fixed (yellow)
21. Low gearbox and/or power steering oil pressure Fixed (red)
22. Power Shuttle/HI--LO alarm (control unit or operation fault) Fixed (red)
23. High-beam headlights on Fixed (blue)
24. Work lights on Fixed (yellow)
25. 1st trailer direction indicators Flashing (green)
26. 2nd trailer direction indicators Flashing (green)
FUEL LEVEL GAUGE

(Fig. 3)
This instrument shows the level of fuel in the tank.
When the tank is full, the hand moves completely to
the right.
When the tank is less than 1/4 full, the hand moves
into the red area.
26312
3
PROOFMETER
(Fig. 4)
Engine speed indicator and chronograph with a six
-figure meter. The figures on black background count
hours of work done and the figure on the red
background (far right) shows tenths of an hour.
The green and blue sectors show the engine speed
which provides optimum power take -off
(respectively 540, 540E and 1000 rpm).
-- Green pointer = power take-off at 540 rpm
-- Blue pointer = power take-off at 540E and 1000
rpm. 26310
4
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
(Fig. 5)
-- Green area = normal temperature.
-- White area = temperature too low.
-- Red area = engine overheating.
In this case, reduce engine revolution rating (without

stopping the engine). If the indication persists, check
the cooling system.
26311
5
TRANSMITTERS, SENSORS AND SWITCHES
28005
6
TRANSMITTERS, SENSORS AND SWITCHES (Cont.)
28006
7
28007
8
28008
9
U R S
28009
10
Y
X
Aa
28010
11

A. TRAILER BRAKE SAFETY PRESSURE SWITCH.
Activates when the trailer brake pressure circuit drops below 3 bar. The warning lamp lights up.
B. ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SWITCH.
Activates when the engine oil pressure drops below 0.68 bar. The warning lamp lights up.
C. ALTERNATOR.
Provides a square wave signal and recharges the battery. The alternator also provides power for the electrical
devices on the tractor.
D. BRAKE LIGHTS SWITCHES.
Activates when the brakes are applied.
E. REAR POWER TAKE-OFF REVS SENSOR.
This sensor is positioned on the rear PTO casing and reads the PTO revs at the different engine rotation speeds.
F. GEARS IN NEUTRAL SWITCH.
Indicates when the gears are in neutral.
G. PARKING BRAKE SWITCH.
The switch closes when the parking brake is applied.
H. CREEPER SWITCH.
Indicates the Creeper position (on/off).
I. DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SWITCH.
Activates when the differential lock is engaged. The warning lamp lights up. Normally open switch.
J. ELECTRONIC LIFT PULL SENSOR.
Indicates the drawbar pull to the lift.
K. AIR FILTER CLOGGED SENSOR.
Activates when the vacuum in the air intake system exceeds a pre-stabilised value. The warning lamp lights up.
L. TRAILER BRAKE INDICATOR SWITCH.
Activates when the trailer brakes are applied. The warning lamp lights up.
M. LIFT ARMS POSITION SENSOR.
Indicates the position and height of the lift arms.
N. STEERING SENSOR.
Indicates the steering angle on the front axle right-hand wheel.
O. FUEL LEVEL TRANSMITTER.
The transmitter potentiometer provides a signal that determines the level in the fuel tank. The level is shown
on the gauge.
P. FRONT AND REAR AXLE SPEED SENSORS.
Respectively indicates front and rear wheel slip.
Q. ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR.
The temperature transmitter resistance varies in proportion to the coolant temperature, generating a modu-
lated voltage signal that is measured by the instrument.
R. 2 SPEED POWER SHIFT MODE POSITION SENSOR.
Indicates the 2 Speed Power Shift hydraulic splitting operation.
S. SHUTTLE MODE SENSOR POSITION.
Indicates forward or reverse movement.
T. 4 WD SWITCH.
Activates when there is no oil pressure in the 4 WD control lines. The warning lamp lights up.
U. TILT SENSOR.
Indicates the tractor tilt.
V. REAR PTO SENSOR.
Activates when the PTO is engaged and enables the PTO to be engaged when it is OFF.
W. G1 GEAR SWITCH.
Indicates the range position.
X. C1 GEAR SWITCH.
Indicates the gear engaged (located in front of the G1 switch).
Y. BRAKE OIL LEVEL SWITCH.
Activates when the brake fluid drops below the minimum level. The warning lamp lights up.
Z. SPEED SENSOR.
Indicates the theoretical tractor ground speed.
Aa. TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR.
Indicates the oil temperature in the transmission unit.
ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTS
INTRODUCTION
26301
12
The digital instrument panel (Fig. 12) consist of four display sections:
1. Warning and indicator lights (see page 2); 4. Engine coolant temperature gauge (see page 4).
2. Fuel level gauge (see page 3);
3. Electronic unit (functions: hour counter, power take-
off revolution counter, clock, electronic, digital
speedometer) ( see page 14);
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT

The digital electronic unit is located inside the control
panel. Its display is divided into three sections.
Sector 1 (Fig. 13)
This sector (1) displays the engine revs as graphic
segments. Each segment corresponds to 100 rpm.
The first segment lights up when the engine is idling
and increases in 100 rpm steps.
Sector 2 (Fig. 13)
This sector (2) displays the following functions in
order:
26313
-- hours of work done;
13
-- engine revs;
-- PTO REVS;
-- Clock.
To access the four functions, press select button CAL
(1, fig. 14) until the required function appear in the
central part of the display (sector 2).
NOTE:
A. “Hours done” function
The number of worked hours since the engine is
started are shown (from 0.0 to 1999.9);
B. “Engine revs” function
This function revs is displayed automatically
when the engine is started. Values are displayed
as numbers and the RPM indicator lights up. 27611
C. “PTO revs” function 14

Press the button (1, fig. 14) to shift from the En-
gine revs function to the PTO revs function. Val-
ues are displayed as numbers and the PTO indi-
cator lights up.
D. “Clock” function
For more details on this function see page 15.
Sector 3 (Fig. 15)

This sector (3) displays the tractor speed:
-- when the engine is started the display reads zero;
-- minimum speed is o.5 kph;
-- to shift from kph to mph and vice versa turn the
key to “key on” and press CAL (1, fig. 16) until the
kph indicator and then the mph indicator flashes.
Reverse the procedure to shift from mph to kph;
-- functions are stored in memory when the tractor
engine is started.
26313
15
Speed Display Calibration
The instrument must be calibrate, compensating the
effects of possible angle variation of the tyres when
laden, in order to measure speed correctly. Proceed
as follows:
-- Draw a 100 m track on the ground;
-- Press select button CAL (1, fig. 16) for 3 seconds
until the CAL indication appears fixed on the dis-
play (sector 3, fig. 15). At the same time, the cur-
rent calibration constant will appear in the central
sector (2, fig. 15). The previously set calibration
will be displayed in sector (3) with the calibration
indicator;
-- Drive a tractor, at a constant speed included be-
tween 4 and 10 kph. At the beginning of the track
press the CAL button (1, fig. 16). The CAL indica-
tion will start flashing and the previously set value
will be reset (sector 2, fig. 15);
-- At the end of the track, press CAL again (1, 27611
fig. 16) to store the new constant in memory; 16

-- Calibration is ended automatically. The speed
displayed in sector 3 (fig. 15) is calculated on the
basis of the new constant. Engine revs will be dis-
played in sector 2 (fig. 15) again.
Clock
The instrument has also a clock function. To display
this function press the CAL button (1, fig. 17) until it
appears on the central sector (2, fig. 15).
NOTE: The clock shows the hour and minutes.

Instead second are pointed out by two flashing verti-
cal bars.
Hour adjustment (Fig. 17)

After setting the clock function on the central display
27623
by CAL button (1), press button (2) until hour flashes.
17
To correct minutes press button (2) on the right side
A. Each time the button is pressed the clock will go
on by one minute. If the button is pressed minutes will
go on rapidly.
To change hours the procedure is the same as the
one used for minutes but it is necessary to press
button (2) from the left side B.
NOTE: When adjusting the hour, hours and minutes

stop flashing.
Once hour adjusting is finished, the numerical value

will start flashing again. Press CAL button again (1)
to store the hour and the electronic control unit will
automatically shift to the “tractor work hours”
function.
MAINTENANCE
MULTIPLE INDICATION INSTRUMENT

INDICATOR
Replacement
To replace indicators proceed as follows:
1. Unscrew the four fixing screws (1) (fig. 18).
2. Move the instrument away from its seating and
disconnect the terminal from the rev counter.
18
3. Rotate the faulty indicator anti-clockwise by 1/4
turn, extract it and replace it with an indicator with
an output of 2W (fig. 19).
19

(Before Serial Number 1269072)
CONTENTS

Component Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Dashboard Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Analog Instrument Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Hazard Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Stalk Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Direction Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Flashing the Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Side/Tail Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Dipped Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Main-Beam Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Clock Setting Button (digital instrument only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Function Selection Button (digital instrument only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Dual Drive Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Permanent Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Cab Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Cab Controls on Cab Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Cab Internal Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Cab Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Air Conditioner Operation and Adjustment Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Heater Control Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Fan Control Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Controls on Right Riser Inside the Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Rotating Light Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Work Lights Control Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Front Windshield Wiper Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Front Windscreen Washer Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Rear Windscreen Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Right-Hand Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Right-Hand Mudguard (lift without electronic control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Electro-Hydraulic Differential Lock Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Central Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Thermostart Control Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Electronic Lift Control Warning Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
55 404 02 Front Headlight Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
55 404 04 Front, Side/Tail Light and Direction Indicator Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Cab Front and Rear Work Light Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
55 404 02 Tractor Work Light Lamps with Safety Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
55 404 04 Tail Light and Direction Indicator Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
55 404 Courtesy and Spot Light Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Courtesy Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Spot Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
INTRODUCTION
The components described in this section are
grouped in controls located inside the cab (in the
specific locations listed below) and in controls
located outside the cab. The groups are:
1. Dashboard controls (central control panel with
analog or digital instrument).
2. Cab controls.
3. Right-hand side controls.
4. Electronic lift controls.
5. Central panel controls.
6. External controls.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
DASHBOARD CONTROLS
The controls on the dashboard (with either an analog
or digital instrument) are:
-- hazard light switch;
-- clock setting button (digital instrument only);
-- function selection button (digital instrument only);
-- dual drive control switch.
For exact control location of controls listed before, see
fig. 1 (analog instrument) or fig. 2 (digital instrument),
accordingly.
ANALOG INSTRUMENT CONTROL PANEL (FIG. 1)
26505
1
The switches and stalk controls are located near the
instrument panel on dashboards with analog
instrument units (fig. 1), as follows:
1. Central analog instrument panel;
2. Automatic dual drive control switch;
3. Spare
4. Hazard lights switch;
5. Spare;
6. Spare.
DIGITAL INSTRUMENT CONTROL PANEL (FIG. 2)
26506
The switches and stalk controls are located near the

instrument panel on dashboards with digital
instrument units (fig. 2), as follows:
1. Central digital instrument panel;
2. Automatic dual drive control switch;
3. Digital instrument function selection button;
4. Clock setting button;
5. Hazard lights switch;
6. Spare;
7. Spare.
HAZARD LIGHTS
(Fig. 3)
Press the red side of switch (1) to turn the hazard
lights on. While the hazard lights are on the switch
and the direction indicators will flash.
3
POWER SHUTTLE TRANSMISSION LEVER
(Fig. 4)
Stick (1) can be used to change the vehicle direction
of motion. it has three positions:
-- forward (forward movement);
-- backward (reverse);
-- central (neutral).
4
STALK CONTROLS
The stalk control operates the direction indicators,
flashes the headlights, switches from main to
dipped--beam headlights and horn.
5
Direction Indicators (Fig. 5)
Push stalk (1) forward to position A to indicate a left
turn.
Push the stalk back to position B to indicate a right
turn. Warning lights (1) or (11) (fig. 2, Chapter 1) flash
accordingly on control panel.
Flashing the Headlights
(Fig. 6) C
When the headlights are off, or when the main--beam
lights are on, shift the stalk up to position C to flash
the headlights. The stalk will automatically shift back
to its original position D when released. D
27674
E
6
Side/Tail Lights (Fig. 7)
Turn knob (5) on stalk 1 (fig. 5) in position D so that 2 3 4 5
index (4) points to symbol (2). The side/tail lights and
the dashboard will light up.
Dipped Headlights (Fig. 7)

Turn knob (5) on stalk 1 (fig. 5) in position D so that
index (4) points to symbol (6).
Main-Beam Headlights (Fig. 6)

When the main beam headlights are on, shift stalk 1 6
(fig. 5) fully down to position E. 27673
7
Horn (Fig. 7)
Press function selection knob (5) as shown in the
illustration.
NOTE: If the index (4) points to symbol (3) all lights

are off. Only direction indicators and horn are operat-
ing.
CLOCK SETTING BUTTON (DIGITAL

INSTRUMENT ONLY)
(Fig. 8)
This button is used to set the clock.
8
FUNCTION SELECTION BUTTON

(DIGITAL INSTRUMENT ONLY)
(Fig. 9)
Press button (1) to access the digital instrument
functions.
9
DUAL DRIVE CONTROL SWITCH
(Fig. 10)
Two dual drive functions can be selected by means
of switch (1):
1. Automatic operation (models TN 55S, TN 65S
and TN 75S only). A B C
2. Permanent release.
3. Permanent operation.
10
Automatic Operation
Press button 1 (fig. 10) in position C. Warning light 2
(fig. 11) will light up to indicate automatic dual drive
has been selected. Warning light 1 (fig. 11) will light
up on the instrument panel to indicate when dual
drive is on. Dual drive is automatically engaged
whenever the wheels skid, i.e.:
-- traction (e.g. while working) on slippery ground;
-- downhill (e.g. while towing a heavy trailer) on
slippery ground.
Dual drive is automatically released when the
skidding condition ceases and/or when a set steering 26319
angle is reached or when driving downhill at speed of
15/25 kph. 11
To release automatic operation, press button 1
(fig. 10) again in position C. This will switch warning
light 2 (fig. 11) off.
Permanent Operation (Fig. 10)

Press button 1 (fig. 10) in position A to permanently
engage dual drive.
To release dual drive press the button in position A
again.
CAB CONTROLS
CAB CONTROLS ON CAB ROOF

(Fig. 12)
12
The following conditioning and lighting controls are
located inside the cab on the roof:
1. Heater knob.
2. Fan control knob.
3. Cab light switch.
4. Air conditioner operation button.
Cab internal lighting

The lighting system consists of a courtesy light (1)
and a spot light (2) which are operated when ignition
switch key is in position (B) (fig. 28).
The internal lighting unit has a three--position control
switch:
Position A = courtesy light (1) on
Central position = lights off
Position B = courtesy light (1) off and spot light (2) on
26601
13
CAB CONDITIONING CONTROLS
27631
14
Air Conditioner Operation and Adjustment Turn knob (3) anti-clockwise fully to the left to close
Button (2) water delivery to heater thus excluding the function.
It is operated when switch key is in ignition position.
With fan knob (1) in position A, B or C, press button Fan Control Knob (1)
(2) to operate air conditioner. It is operated when switch key is in position B (see
fig. 28).
E. Low speed.
Heater Control Knob (3) F. Average speed.
To set maximum heating turn knob (3) clockwise fully
G. High speed.
to the right.
CONTROLS ON RIGHT RISER INSIDE THE

CAB
(Fig. 15)
The following controls are located on the right--hand
riser inside the cab:
-- Six way fuse carrier (1).
-- Rotating headlight switch (2).
-- Windscreen wiper switch (3).
-- Rear window wiper switch (4).
-- Cigar lighter (5).
-- Windscreen washer switch (6).
-- Work lights control button (7). 15
-- Not used (8).
NOTE: All controls can be operated with the ignition

switch key in position (B) fig. 28. The different posi-
tions are shown in fig. 17.
Rotating Light Control Switch (2)

Control switch has two positions:position A =
headlights on;
-- position D = first gear;
-- position E = second gear.
NOTE: The rotating beacon must be used when driv-

ing on the road; to use, plug beacon into power sock-
et (1, fig. 16).
Work Lights Control Button (7)

Control button has three positions:
-- position A = lights OFF;
-- position B = rear lights ON, front lights OFF;
-- position C = front and rear lights ON.
Front Windshield Wiper Switch (3)

Control switch has three positions:
-- position A = OFF;
-- position B = first speed;
-- position C = second speed. 1
28013
16
Front Windscreen Washer Control Switch (6)
To operate windscreen washer press button (2). If the A B C
button is released, it automatically returns to neutral
position.
Rear Windscreen Wiper/Washer (4)

Control switch has three positions:
D E
-- position A = off
-- position B = windscreen wiper on
-- position C = windscreen wiper/washer on. If the
button is released, it automatically returns to
position B. 26736
17
RIGHT-HAND CONTROLS
There are two types of controls on the right--hand
mudguard according to whether the lift device is
electronically controlled or not.
RIGHT-HAND MUDGUARD
(LIFT WITHOUT ELECTRONIC CONTROL)
The following controls are shown in figure 18:
-- electro-hydraulic differential lock switch (2).
28015
18
Electro-Hydraulic Differential Lock Switch

(Fig. 18)
A warning light on the dashboard (1, fig. 19) lights up
when the differential lock is on.
26309
19
The differential lock switch (1, fig. 20) has three
positions:
-- Position A = differential locking off;
-- Position B = differential locking on. The differen-
tial lock is disengaged by pressing one of the two
brake pedals and is automatically re--engaged A
when the pedal is released;
-- Position C = differential locking on. The differen- B
tial lock is disengaged automatically when the
LIFT--O--MATIC control is operated or when one
C
or the two brake pedals is pressed.
27626
NOTE: The differential lock is disengaged when the
tool is lifted and re--engaged when the device is low- 20
ered. The same operation in position B regards the
brakes.
EXTERNAL CONTROLS
(Fig. 21)
The external controls consist of switches (1) for lift
arm movement.
They are located to the rear of the tractor, on both
sides, near the light clusters. Both switches have two
positions:
-- position A = lifting
-- position B = lowering. A
All the control module controls located inside the
driver’s cab on the dashboard are automatically
B
disabled when using the external controls. 26590
21
CENTRAL PANEL CONTROLS

(Fig. 22)
The following controls are present on the central
panel:
-- thermostart control button (2).
-- ignition switch (1);
28014
22
Ignition Switch (Fig. 23)
For switch (1) functions, turn the key to one of the
following positions:
-- Position A = no circuits are powered; the key can
be removed. Engine off; injection delivery device
is automatically stopped.
-- Position B = the engine ignition is prepared.
Warning lights and control devices can be oper-
ated. Several until are powered.
-- Position C = the engine is started; when the key
is released it automatically returns to position B.
26083
23
Thermostart Control Button (Fig. 24)

The thermostart button (1) is used to start the engine.
Its operation is subject to the position of the ignition
switch. Proceed as follows:
1. Turn the ignition key (1, fig. 28) to B;
2. Press the thermostart button (1) as shown by the
arrow for 25 seconds;
3. Turn the ignition key to position C (fig. 28) keep-
ing the thermostart button pressed until the en-
gine is started;
4. When the engine is started, release both button
and key.
24
MAINTENANCE
ELECTRONIC LIFT CONTROL WARNING
LIGHT BULBS
Replacement
To change a faulty warning light, remove the support
plates as described below:
1. Undo fastening screws (1) (fig. 25 and 26).
2. Lift the control support plates.
3. Turn the faulty bulb anti-clockwise by 1/4 of a turn
(fig. 27). Remove it and change it with a bulb with
the same output (1.2W) (fig. 28).
25
26
26618
27
26619
28
OP. 55 404 02
FRONT HEADLIGHT LAMPS 1

Replacement
WARNING: handle halogen lamps only by the part in

metal. If you touch the tube with your fingers, the
lighting power is reduced thus compromising its life.
In case of contact, clean bulb with a clean rag impreg-
nated with alcohol and let it dry.
28016
29
To replace blown lamps proceed as follows:
-- lift hood (1, fig. 29);
-- disconnect connector (1, fig. 30);
-- remove rubber sheath (2, fig. 30);
-- release fixing spring (3, fig. 30) and rotate it anti--
clockwise to extract it.
Replace the lamp with a new halogen one with the
same output (55--60 W).
1 2 3
27636
30
OP. 55 404 04
1
FRONT, SIDE/TAIL LIGHT AND DIRECTION
INDICATOR LAMPS
Replacement (Fig. 31)
Remove the transparent casing (3) and replace
faulty bulbs with new ones with the same output:
-- direction indicator lamp (1) (21W): press the bulb
in, rotate it anti-clockwise and extract it;
-- Side/tail lights (2) (5W): pull bulb out to remove
it and replace it. 3 2
27637
NOTE: Fit the transparent casing with orange colour

31
facing upwards.
CAB FRONT AND REAR WORK LIGHT

LAMPS
Turn headlight, rotate cover (1) and extract it out of
its housing. Extract the lamp by pulling it out.
NOTE: When fitting the new bulb do no touch it with

naked hands but handle it with a rag or use its casing.
32
OP 55 404 02
TRACTOR WORK LIGHT LAMPS WITH

SAFETY CHASSIS
To access the bulb overturn rubber sheath (2) and
remove white transparent casing (1).
Press bulb (3) in, rotate it anti-clockwise and extract
it.
Replace the blown lamp with a new one with the
same output (35W).
33
OP. 55 404 04
TAIL LIGHT AND DIRECTION INDICATOR

LAMPS
Remove transparent casing (1), press bulb in, rotate
in anti--clockwise and extract it. Replace it with a new
one with the same output:
-- Direction indicator lamp (1) 21W;
-- Brake light and side/tail light two--filament lamps
(2) with an output of 21W/5W.
NOTE: Orange--coloured transparent casing is to be

fitted from mudguard external side. 34
OP. 55 404
COURTESY AND SPOT LIGHT LAMPS

Replacement (Fig. 35, 36)
To access the two bulbs proceed as shown below:
-- Lever under transparent casing (1) by a screw-
driver and remove it.
26611
35
Courtesy Light (Fig. 35)
-- Pull pressure-fitted lamp (2) downwards and re-
place it with a new one with the same output
(10W).
Spot Light (Fig. 36)

remove ground cable from battery since lights are
always under voltage;
-- unloose screw (1);
-- turn retaining bracket (2) by a screwdriver and re-
move it;
26212 26613
-- rotate bulb (3) and replace it with a new one with
the same output (5W). 36
Chapter 9 -- Connectors (Before Serial Number 1269072)
CONTENTS

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Electrical Circuit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Main Wiring (version with cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Dashboard – Component Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Main Wiring (version without cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Main Front Wiring (engine and light circuits) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Main Cab Wiring (version with cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Main Platform Wiring (version without cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Rear Main Wiring (transmission circuit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Alarm Circuit Wiring (N.A.S.O. version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Electric Wire Color Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Electrical Wire and Connector Identification Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
COMPONENTS
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT COMPONENTS
1 Battery
2 Steering sensor
3 Air conditioner dehydrating filter
4 Right headlight
5 Right side corner headlight
6 Trailer brake emergency switch
7 Horn
8 Air conditioner compressor (version with cab only)
9 Air conditioner joint connector
10 Starter motor
11 Engine stopping solenoid valve
12 Thermostart
13 Brake light switch
14 Engine compartment ground
15 Brake oil level switch
16 Front right side taillight and indicator
17 POWER SHUTTLE system connector (4 PINS--BLACK)
19 POWER SHUTTLE system connector (8 PINS--RED)
21 Speed signal connector
22 Transmission side system connector
23 Front side system connector (PIN12)
24 Starter motor connector
25 Electric and hydraulic dual drive connector
26 Corner headlight connector
27 Front side light connector
28 Digger depth adjuster control panel and rear electronic lift warning lights
29 Front right auxiliary work light
30 Air conditioner control relay
31 Heater resistance unit
32 Cab ceiling light
33 Cab roof ground
34 Right hand speaker
35 Ventilation-heater unit connector
36 Radio antenna connector
37 Radio connectors
38 Windscreen wiper motor
39 Fan-conditioner control unit
40 Rear right auxiliary work light
41 Rear window wiper motor
42 Front left auxiliary work light
43 Left hand speaker
44 Rear left auxiliary work light
45 Rotating light socket
ELECTRIC CIRCUIT COMPONENTS (CONTINUED)
46 Radio antenna
47 Seven-pole socket
48 Plate light lamp
49 Rear left ground
50 Rear left light
51 Electric lift up-down switch on left mudguard
52 Rear window washer pump
53 Windscreen washer pump
54 Seven-pole socket connector
55 Handbrake sensor switch
56 Front left taillight and direction indicator
57 Trailer brake solenoid valve 2
57A Trailer brake solenoid valve 1
58 Trailer brake engaged sensor switch
59 Fuel level transmitter
60 Shuttle position sensor
61 Speed sensor
62 Differential lock solenoid valve
63 Dual drive solenoid valve
64 Dual drive sensor pressure switch
65 Shuttle position solenoid valve
66 HI clutch control solenoid valve
67 Dump solenoid valve
68 HI--LO control solenoid valve
69 Neutral gear switch
70 G1 gear switch
71 C1 gear switch
72 Front axle speed sensor
73 Rear axle speed sensor
74 Trailer brake system connector
75 4WD system connector
76 Engine oil pressure sensor
77 Overload trip device
78 Alternator
79 Engine coolant temperature sensor
80 Air cleaner clogged sensor
81 Steering sensor connector
82 Battery ground
83 Left corner headlight
84 Front left light
85 Rear electric lift up-down connector (3 PINS)
86 Corner light control switch
87 HI--LO gear control button
88 Rear lift up-down control switch
88A Differential lock sensor switch
89 Corner light control switch connector
90 Cab system connector (6 PINS)
91 Cab system connector (1 PIN)
92 Seat ground
93 8A socket
94 Rear electronic lift up-down control panel
95 Rear right light
96 Electronic lift up-down control switch on right mudguard
97 Arm position sensor
98 Electronic lift up-down pull sensor
99 Rear PTO rev sensor
100 Rear lift up control solenoid valve
101 Rear lift down control solenoid valve
102 Seat connector
103 Rear main ground (transmission)
104 Differential lock control switch
105 Supplementary reduction switch (HI--LO position sensor)
106 LO clutch control solenoid valve
107 Transmission oil temperature sensor
108 Rear electronic lift up-down connector (PIN6)
109 Cigar lighter
110 Rear window wiper-washer control switch
111 Windscreen washer control switch
112 Windscreen wiper control switch
113 Work light control switch
114 Rotating light control switch
115 Auxiliary fuse carrier (cab right pillar)
116 Rear work light relay
117 Conditioner fan relay
118 Front work light relay
119 Ignition switch devices relay
120 Main relay and fuse carrier
121 Clutch pedal switch
122 Auxiliary fuse carrier
123 Clutch pedal position sensor
124 POWER SHUTTLE system diagnostic socket
125 Dual drive diagnostic socket
126 Electronic lift diagnostic socket
127 Speed sensor connector (POWER SHUTTLE control unit)
128 POWER SHUTTLE system connector
129 Thermostart button
130 Control panel ground
131 Ignition relay connector
132 Ignition relay
133 Hazard lights control switch
134 Electronic flasher
135 Front-rear electronic lift control unit
136 Measuring instrument
137 POWER SHUTTLE control unit
138 Permanent dual drive and front PTO control unit
139 Digital instrument circuit connector (2 PINS)
140 Dual drive control switch
142 Digital instrument calibration/selection control switch
143 Digital instrument clock setting control switch
144 Slant sensor connector
145 External light stalk control
146 Front lift system fitting
147 Ignition switch
148 Rear PTO sensor switch
149 Slant sensor
150 Front PTO system fitting
151 POWER SHUTTLE control lever
152 Differential lock control relay and brake lights
153 10A fuse (front lift system)
154 50A power fuse red (cab circuit)
155 LIFT-O-MATIC switch
156 Differential lock automatic control switch (version without cab)
157 Rear work light (version without cab)
158 Rear ground on left mudguard (version without cab)
159 Seat emergency switch (N.A.S.O. version)
160 N.A.S.O. version connector
161 Protection diode (N.A.S.O. version)
162 Horn (N.A.S.O. version)
163 Alarm unit (N.A.S.O. version)
HARNESSES
MAIN WIRING (Version with cab)
A
D
28022
1
H. Front system J. Rear system (transmission circuit)
I. Cab system K. POWER SHUTTLE system
DASHBOARD -- COMPONENT LOCATION
28023
2
MAIN WIRING (Version without cab)
A
D
28025
3
A. Front system C. Rear system (transmission circuit)
B. Platform system D. POWER SHUTTLE system
MAIN FRONT WIRING (ENGINE AND LIGHT CIRCUITS)
28038
4
1 Battery 17 POWER SHUTTLE system connector
2 Steering sensor (4 PINS -- BLACK)
3 Conditioner dehydrating filter 18 POWER SHUTTLE system connector
4 Right headlight (4 PINS -- BLACK)
5 Right corner headlight 19 POWER SHUTTLE system connector
6 Trailer brake emergency switch (8 PINS -- RED)
7 Horn 20 POWER SHUTTLE system connector
(8 PINS -- BLACK)
9 Conditioner joint connector
10 Starter motor
12 Thermostart
25 Electrohydraulic dual drive connector
MAIN FRONT WIRING (Engine and light circuits)
27 Headlight connector 80 Air cleaner clogged sensor

74 Trailer brake system connector 81 Steering sensor connector
75 4WD system connector 82 Battery ground
76 Engine oil pressure switch 83 Left corner headlight
77 Overload trip device 84 Left headlight
78 Alternator 85 Rear electronic lift system connector (PIN3)
79 Engine coolant temperature sensor 108 Rear electronic lift system connector (PIN6)
MAIN CAB WIRING (VERSION WITH CAB)
28051
5
16 Front right side light and direction indicator 41 Rear window wiper motor
28 Digger depth adjuster control panel and 42 Front left auxiliary work light
rear electronic lift warning lights 43 Left speaker
29 Front right auxiliary work light 44 Rear left auxiliary work light
30 Air conditioner control relay 45 Rotating light socket
31 Heater resistance unit 46 Radio antenna
32 Cab ceiling light 47 Seven--pole socket
33 Cab roof ground 48 Number plate light
34 Right speaker 49 Rear left ground
35 Ventilation--heater unit connector 50 Rear left light
36 Radio antenna connector 51 Electronic lift up--down control switch on left
37 Radio connector mudguard
38 Windscreen wiper motor 52 Rear window washer pump
39 Fan--conditioner control unit 53 Windscreen washer pump
MAIN CAB WIRING (version with cab)
54 Seven--pole socket connector 92 Seat ground

55 Handbrake sensor switch 93 8A socket
56 Front left side light and direction indicator 94 Rear electronic lift control panel
86 Corner headlight control switch 95 Rear right light
87 HI--LO gear control button 96 Electronic lift up--down control switch on right
88 Rear lift up--down control switch mudguard
88A Differential lock control switch 98 Electronic lift pull sensor
89 Corner headlight control switch connector 100 Rear lift up control solenoid valve
90 Cab system connector (PIN6) 101 Rear lift down control solenoid valve
91 Cab system connector (PIN1) 102 Seat connector
MAIN PLATFORM WIRING (VERSION WITHOUT CAB)
28052
6
16 Front right side light and direction indicator 156 Differential lock automatic control switch
56 Front left side light and direction indicator (version without cab)
86 Corner headlight control switch 157 Rear work light (version without cab)
92 Seat ground 158 Rear ground on left mudguard
93 8A socket (version without cab)
155 LIFT--O--MATIC switch
REAR MAIN WIRING (TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT)
28066
7
47 Seven-pole socket 68 HI--LO control solenoid valve
49 Rear left ground 69 Neutral gear switch
54 Seven-pole socket connector 70 G1 gear switch
57 Trailer brake solenoid valve 1 71 C1 gear switch
57A Trailer brake solenoid valve 2 72 Front axle speed sensor
58 Trailer brake engaged sensor switch 73 Rear axle speed sensor
59 Fuel level transmitter 97 Arm position sensor
60 Shuttle position sensor 98 Electronic lift pull sensor
61 Speed sensor 99 Rear PTO rev sensor
62 Differential lock solenoid valve 100 Rear lift up solenoid valve
63 Dual drive solenoid valve 101 Rear lift down solenoid valve
64 Dual drive sensor pressure switch 105 Supplementary reduction switch
65 Shuttle position solenoid valve (HI--LO position sensor)
66 HI clutch control solenoid valve 106 LO clutch control solenoid valve
67 Dump solenoid valve 107 Transmission oil temperature sensor
ALARM CIRCUIT WIRING (N.A.S.O. VERSION)
163
162
161 160 159
28110
8
159 Seat emergency switch 161 Protection diode
(N.A.S.O. version) 162 Horn
160 N.A.S.O. fitting connector 163 Alarm unit
ELECTRIC WIRE COLOR CODING
A Light blue HV Grey green

AN Light blue black HG Grey yellow
AG Light blue yellow I Blue
AB Light blue white LB Blue white
AV Light blue green LN Blue black
AR Light blue red LR Blue red
B White M Brown
BR White red MB Brown white
BN White black MN Brown black
BL White blue N Black
BG White yellow NZ Black purple
C Orange NB Black white
CB Orange white NR Black red
CN Orange black R Red
CL Orange blue RG Red yellow
G Yellow RN Red black
GV Yellow green RV Red green
GN Yellow black S Pink
GR Yellow red SN Pink black
GL Yellow blue SG Pink yellow
H Grey V Green
HM Grey brown VN Green black
HR Grey red VB Green white
HN Grey black Z Purple
HB Grey white ZB Purple white
HL Grey blue ZN Purple black
ELECTRICAL WIRE AND CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION CODE
0,5 -- RN -- (3)
WIRE SECTION
WIRE COLOR
CONNECTOR
PIN NUMBER
(where relevant)
CONNECTORS
9
10
11
12
13
* Version with cab

** Version without cab
14
* Version with cab

15
16
17
18
19

20
* Version with cab

21
* Version with cab

22
* Version with cab

23
24
25
26
27
28
* Version with cab

* * Version without cab
29
30
31
32
33
* Version with cab

34
35
* Version with cab

36
37
38
39
40
41
42
* Version with cab

43
44
45
* Version with cab

46
47
* Version with cab

48
49
50
51
52
* Version with cab

53
54
55
SECTION 55 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Chapter 10 - Wiring Diagrams for Tractors Before SN 1232544
CONTENTS

Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
HOW TO USE THE WIRING DIAGRAMS

Each tractor configuration is broken down as follows:
Harness Diagrams
• Each tractor configuration has a page with all
harness flow diagram descriptions.
Configuration Flow Diagram

• Each tractor configuration has a complete flow
diagram showing all wiring harnesses used.
Individual System Diagrams

• Each tractor configuration has a page of all
particular system diagrams.
• Each tractor configuration has a fuse and relay
location chart.
• Each tractor configuration has a list of all the
wiring diagrams needed.
AUTO 4WD / MECHANICAL LIFT / HYDRAULIC DIFF LOCK / LESS CAB
Harness Diagrams
Reference
Diagram Description Number Page
Diagram A Main Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5176375--A 20
Diagram B Engine Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5178464--B 22
Diagram B Head Lamp Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5178464--B 22
Diagram B Corner Lights Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5178464--B 22
Diagram C Seat Safety Circuit Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5178638--C 23
Diagram D Digital Instrument Cluster Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5175848--D 24
Diagram E 25A Socket Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5175305--E 25
Diagram F Naso Socket Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5174646--F 26
Diagram G Auto 4WD Transmission Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5176894--G 27
Diagram G Speed Sensor Harness (without Power Shuttle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5176894--G 27
Diagram G Transmission Side Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5176894--G 27
Diagram H Power Shuttle Dashboard Harness (8 x 8/16 x 16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5176355--H 28
Auto 4WD / Mechanical Lift / Hydraulic Diff Lock / Less Cab
Speed Sensor Harness (with P.

C13 C7
Shuttle (See P. Shuttle Dash-
board Harness)
Diagnostic and
Digital Display Harness (with DC1 P. Shuttle Trans. Harness
Calibration Tool P. Shuttle Dashboard
P. Shuttle) (See P. Shuttle (8x8/16x16)
Dashboard Harness)
Harness (8x8/16x16) (See P. Shuttle Dashboard
5176355-H Diagram H C9
Harness)
Jumper (without P. Shuttle)

(See Main Harness)
Engine Harness Trailer Socket Extension
Alternative
C14 (See Transmission Harness)
5178464-B Diagram B Diff Lock Valve Extension
|
C21
(See Trans. SIde Harness)
C11
C22 C26 C23
C12
C3
Headlamp Harness Trans. Side Harness
C1 C6
5178464-B Diagram B Auto 4WD / Mechanical Lift / Hydraulic 5176894-G Diagram G
C7
Diff Lock Main Harness
5176375-A Diagram A C8
Corner Lights Harness
C20 Speed Sensor Harness C17
5178464-B Diagram B
5176894-G Diagram G
(without P. Shuttle)
C15
C18 C24
Diagnostic and Digital Instrument Neutral Switch Extension

DC2 Cluster
Calibration Tool (Without P. Shuttle)
5175848-D Diagram D (See Trans. Side Harness)
-- Alternative --
C5
Jumper
Auto 4WD Trans. Harness
(with P. Shuttle)
PTO RPM Sensor 5176894-G Diagram G (See Trans. Side Harness)
Extension (See Digital
Instrument Cluster)
Seat Safety Circuit Harness
5178638-C Diagram C
NASO Socket Extension 25A Socket Harness Dual Side Lamp Extension
(Plugged into Fuse 13 directly) C25
5174646-F Diagram F 5175305-E Diagram E (See Main Harness)

Reference
Diagram J Starting and Recharging Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5183463--J 30
Diagram K Position, Driving and Passing Lights Circuit (Generic System Diagram)* . . 5175852--K 31
Diagram L Turn and Hazard Lights Circuit (Generic System Diagram)* . . . . . . . . . . 5175850--L 32
Diagram M Auto 4WD, Diff Lock and Stop Lights Circuit (Generic System Diagram)* . 5184415--M 33
Diagram N Power Shuttle Transmission ECM (8 x 8/16 x 16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5178599--N 34
Diagram O Auto 4WD and Front PTO ECM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5172868--O 35
* See Main Wiring Diagram for actual tractor configuration.

Fuse and Relay Locations
5178241--A
1
Located under left side steering column panel.
2WD (MECHANICAL 4WD) / MECHANICAL LIFT / MECHANICAL DIFF LOCK / WITH CAB
Harness Diagrams
Reference
Diagram U Main Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5176338--U 42
Diagram D Digital Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5175848--D 24
Diagram I Speed Sensor Harness (without Power Shuttle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5176894--I 29
Diagram I Transmission Side Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5176894--I 29
Diagram P Corner Lights Switch Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5183266--P 36
Diagram Q Cab Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5176942--Q 37
2WD (Mechanical 4WD) Mechanical Lift / Mechanical Diff Lock / With Cab
Speed Sensor Harness

C13 C7 (with P. Shuttle) (See P. Shuttle
Dashboard Harness)
Diagnostic and
Digital Display Harness (with DC1 P. Shuttle Dashboard P. Shuttle Trans. Harness
Calibration Tool (8x8/16x16)
P. Shuttle) (See P. Shuttle Harness (8x8/16x16)
Dashboard Harness) 5176355-H Diagram H (See P. Shuttle Dashboard
C9
Harness)
Rotary Beacon Socket

Jumper
C29 Extension
(without P. Shuttle) (See Cab Harness)
Compressor Extension Engine Harness Cab Harness
Alternative
C2 C10
(See Engine Harness) 5178464-B Diagram B C21 5176942-Q Diagram Q
|
Diff Lock Valve Extension
C11
(See Trans. SIde Harness
C22 C26 C23
C12
Headlamp Harness C3
C1
5178464-B Diagram B 2WD (Mechanical 4WD) / Mechanical Trans. Side Harness
C6
Lift / Hydraulic Diff Lock Main Harness 5176894-I Diagram I
C7
5176338-U Diagram U
Corner Lights Harness C8
C20 Speed Sensor Harness C14
5178464-B Diagram B
C19 5176894-I Diagram I
(without P. Shuttle) Trailer Socket Extension
(See Transmission
Harness)
C18 C24
C17 C15
Digital Instrument
Cluster Neutral Switch Extension
5175848-D Diagram D (Without P. Shuttle)
(See Trans. Side Harness)
-- Alternative --
C5
Jumper
PTO RPM Sensor (with P. Shuttle)
Extension (See Digital (See Trans. Side Harness)
Instrument Cluster)
5178638-C Diagram C
Corner Lights Switch 4WD Lamp Switch

C28 Extension Extension (See Trans. Side
5183266-P Diagram P Harness)
25A Socket Harness

NASO Socket Extension
(Plugged into Fuse 13 Directly)
5174646-F Diagram F
5175305-E Diagram E

Reference
Diagram K Position, Driving and Passing Lights Circuit (Generic System Diagram)* 5175852--K 31
Diagram S 2WD (Mechanical 4WD) Diff Lock and Stop Light Circuit
(Generic System Diagram)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5184412--S 39

5177032--A
2
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC 4WD / MECHANICAL LIFT / WITH CAB
Harness Diagrams
Reference
Diagram V Main Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5176336--V 44
Diagram E 25A Socket Harness (without Power Shuttle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5175305--E 25
Diagram R Electro-hydraulic 4WD Transmission Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5176894--R 38
Diagram R Speed Sensor Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5176894--R 38
Diagram R Transmission Side Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5176894--R 38
Electro-Hydraulic 4WD / Mechanical Lift / With Cab

C13 C7
(with P. Shuttle) (See P. Shuttle
Dashboard Harness)
Diagnostic and
Dashboard Harness) Harness (8x8/16x16) (See P. Shuttle Dashboard
5176355-H Diagram H C9
Harness)

Jumper
C29 Extension
(without P. Shuttle) (See Cab Harness)
Alternative
Compressor Extension C2 Engine Harness Cab Harness
C10
|
C11
(See Trans. SIde Harness)
C22 C26 C23
C12
Headlamp Harness C3
C1
5178464-B Diagram B Electro--hydraulic 4WD / Trans. Side Harness
C6
Mechanical Lift Main Harness 5176894-R Diagram R
C7
5176336-V Diagram V
C20 C14
5178464-B Diagram B Speed Sensor Harness
C19
5176894-R Diagram R
Trailer Socket Extension
(See Transmission
C18 C24 Harness)
C17 C15
Digital Instrument
5175848-D Diagram D (Without P. Shuttle)
-- Alternative --
C5
Jumper
Extension (See Digital (See Trans SIde Harness)
Instrument Cluster) Electro-hydraulic 4WD
Seat Safety Circuit Harness Trans. Harness
5178638-C Diagram C 5176894-R Diagram R
Corner Lights Switch

C28 4WD Lamp Switch Extension
Extension
5183266-P Diagram P
25A Socket Harness NASO Socket

(Plugged into Fuse 13 Directly) Extension
5175305-E Diagram E 5174846-F Diagram F

Reference
Diagram Y Electro-hydraulic 4WD Diff Lock and Stop Light Circuit
(Generic System Diagram)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5184416--Y 46

5177019
3
AUTO 4WD / MECHANICAL LIFT / HYDRAULIC DIFF LOCK / WITH CAB
Harness Diagrams
Reference
Diagram Z Main Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5176295--Z 48
Diagram T Auto 4WD Transmission Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5176894--T 40
Diagram T Speed Sensor Harness (without Power Shuttle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5176894--T 40
Diagram T Transmission Side Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5176894--T 40
Auto 4WD / Mechanical Lift / Hydraulic Diff Lock / With Cab

C13 C7
(with P. Shuttle) (See P. Shuttle
Dashboard Harness)
Diagnostic and
Dashboard Harness) Harness (8x8/16x16) (See P. Shuttle Dashboard
C9
5176355-H Diagram H Harness)

Jumper
C29 Extension
(See Cab Harness)
Compressor Extension Engine Harness Cab Harness
Alternative
C2 C10
C11
(See Trans. SIde Harness
C22 C26 C23
C12
Headlamp Harness C3
C1
5178464-B Diagram B Auto 4WD / Mechanical Lift / Trans. Side Harness
C6
Hydraulic Diff. Lock Main Harness 5176894-T Diagram T
C7
5176295-Z Diagram Z
Corner Lights Harness C8
C20 C14
5178464-B Diagram B Speed Sensor Harness
5176894-T Diagram T
(without P. Shuttle Trailer Socket Extension
(See Transmission
Diagnostic and
DC2 C18 C24 Harness)
Calibration Tool
Digital Instrument C17 C15
Auto 4WD Trans. Harness (Without P. Shuttle)
5175848-D Diagram D
5176894-T Diagram T (See Trans. Side Harness)
-- Alternative --
C5
Jumper
Extension (See Digital (See Trans. Side Harness)
Instrument Cluster)
5178638-C Diagram C
Corner Lights Switch 4WD Lamp Switch

C28 Extension Extension
5183266-P Diagram P (See Trans. Side Harness)
25A Socket Harness NASO Socket

(Plugged into Fuse 13 Directly) Extension
5175305-E Diagram E 5174646-F Diagram F

Reference
Diagram M Auto 4WD Diff Lock and Stop Light Circuit (Generic System Diagram)* . . . 5184415--M 33
Diagram O Front PTO and Auto 4WD (ECM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5172868--O 35

5177001
4
SYMBOLS USED IN ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
Speaker
Starter switch
Diode
Connection
Battery
Connection
Fuse
Motor Thermostarter
Lights
Horn
and warning indicators
Switch relay
Variable resistor
Switch relay Cigar lighter
Pressure switch/Sensor
Power socket
Indicator switch Control switch
MPD2703A
SYMBOLS USED IN ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS (continued)
Switch Solenoid valve
Inductive sensor Solenoid valve
Sensor Flasher
MPD2704A
WIRE COLOR CODING
A Light Blue HV Grey/green

AN Light blue/black HG Grey/yellow
AG Light blue/yellow I Blue
AB Light blue/white LB Blue/white
AV Light blue/green LN Blue/black
AR Light blue/red LR Blue/red
B White M Brown
BR White/red MB Brown/white
BN White/black MN Brown/black
BL White/blue N Black
BG White/yellow NZ Black/purple
C Orange NB Black/white
CB Orange/white NR Black/red
CN Orange/black R Red
CL Orange/blue RG Red/yellow
G Amber RN Red/black
GV Yellow/green RV Red/green
GN Yellow/black S Pink
GR Yellow/red SN Pink/black
GL Yellow/blue SG Pink/yellow
H Grey V Green
HM Grey/brown VN Green/black
HR Grey/red VB Green/white
HN Grey/black Z Purple
HB Grey/white ZB Purple/white
HL Grey/blue ZN Purple/black
WIRING AND CONNECTIONS IDENTIFICATION CODE
0.5 -- RN -- (3)
WIRE SECTION
WIRE COLOUR
No. PIN
ON CONNECTION
(where relevant)
DIAGRAMS
DIAGRAM A--1 AUTO 4WD / MECHANICAL LIFT / HYDRAULIC DIFF LOCK / LESS CAB
5176375--A--1
5
DIAGRAM A--2 AUTO 4WD / MECHANICAL LIFT / HYDRAULIC DIFF LOCK / LESS CAB
5176375--A--2
6
DIAGRAM B ENGINE / HEADLAMP AND CORNER LIGHTS HARNESS
5178464--B
7
DIAGRAM C SEAT SAFETY CIRCUIT HARNESS
5178638--C
8
DIAGRAM D DIGITAL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER HARNESS
5175848--D
9
DIAGRAM E 25A SOCKET HARNESS
5175305--E
10
DIAGRAM F NASO SOCKET EXTENSION
47126182--F
11
DIAGRAM G AUTO 4WD TRANSMISSION HARNESS / TRANSMISSION SIDE HARNESS LESS CAB / SPEED SENSOR HARNESS (WITHOUT POWER SHUTTLE)
5176894--G
12
DIAGRAM H POWER SHUTTLE DASHBOARD HARNESS (8 X 8 / 16 X 16)
5176355--H
13
DIAGRAM I 2WD (MECHANICAL 4WD) TRANSMISSION SIDE HARNESS WITH CAB / SPEED SENSOR HARNESS (WITHOUT POWER SHUTTLE)
5176894--I
14
DIAGRAM J STARTING AND RECHARGING CIRCUIT
5183463--J
15
DIAGRAM K POSITION, DRIVING AND PASSING LIGHTS CIRCUIT (GENERIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM)*
5175852--K
16
DIAGRAM L TURN AND HAZARD LIGHT CIRCUIT (GENERIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM)*
5175850--L
17
DIAGRAM M AUTO 4WD DIFF LOCK AND STOP LIGHT CIRCUIT (GENERIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM)*
5184415--M
18
DIAGRAM N POWER SHUTTLE TRANSMISSION ECM (8 X 8 / 16 X 16)
5178599--N
19
DIAGRAM O AUTO 4WD AND FRONT PTO ECM
5172868--O
20
DIAGRAM P CORNER LIGHTS SWITCH EXTENSION
5183266--P
21
DIAGRAM Q CAB HARNESS
5176942--Q
22
DIAGRAM R ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC 4WD TRANSMISSION HARNESS / TRANSMISSION SIDE HARNESS WITH CAB / SPEED SENSOR HARNESS (WITHOUT POWER SHUTTLE)
5176894--R
23
DIAGRAM S 2WD (MECHANICAL 4WD) DIFF LOCK AND STOP LIGHTS CIRCUIT (GENERIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM)*
5184412--S
24
DIAGRAM T AUTO 4WD TRANSMISSION HARNESS / TRANSMISSION SIDE HARNESS WITH CAB / SPEED SENSOR (WITHOUT POWER SHUTTLE)
5176894--T
25
PAGE LEFT BLANK

DIAGRAM U--1 2WD (MECHANICAL 4WD) / MECHANICAL LIFT / MECHANICAL DIFF LOCK / WITH CAB
5176338--U--1
26
DIAGRAM U--2 2WD (MECHANICAL 4WD) / MECHANICAL LIFT / MECHANICAL DIFF LOCK / WITH CAB
5176338--U--2
27
DIAGRAM V--1 ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC 4WD / MECHANICAL LIFT / WITH CAB
5176336--V--1
28
DIAGRAM V--2 ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC 4WD / MECHANICAL LIFT / WITH CAB
5176336--V--2
29
DIAGRAM Y ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC 4WD DIFF LOCK AND STOP LIGHTS CIRCUIT (GENERIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM)*
5184416--Y
30
PAGE LEFT BLANK

DIAGRAM Z--1 AUTO 4WD / MECHANICAL LIFT / HYDRAULIC DIFF LOCK / WITH CAB
5176295--Z--1
31
DIAGRAM Z--2 AUTO 4WD / MECHANICAL LIFT / HYDRAULIC DIFF LOCK / WITH CAB
5176295--Z--2
32
Chapter 11 - Wiring Diagrams for Tractors with a Serial Number

Between 1232545 and 1269071
CONTENTS

Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Harness Diagrams


location chart.
Harness Diagrams
Reference
Diagram NN Main Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5191343--NN 34
Diagram B Head Lamp and Corner Lights Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5191475--B 20
Diagram B Engine Side Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5191475--B 20
Diagram C Operator Safety Circuit Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5187861--C 21
Diagram E Power Shuttle Dashboard Harness (8 x 8/16 x 16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5191059--E 23
Diagram F Auto 4WD Transmission Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5190957--F 24
Headlamp --
C25 Dual Side Lamp Extension Trailer Socket Extension
(See Main Harness) (See Transmission Harness)
5191475-B Diagram B
C12 C8 C14
Platform to Frame Ground
Harness
C1--A
Auto 4WD Transmission

Auto 4WD / Mechanical Lift / Hydraulic C6--A Harness
Engine Side Harness C1--A Diff Lock Main Harness 5190957-F Diagram F
5191475-B Diagram B C1--B 5191343-NN Diagram NN
Diagnostic and C4
DC2
Calibration Tool C15
C18 C24 C11 C21
Jumper Neutral Switch Extension

(without P. Shuttle) 40A Socket Harness (Without P. Shuttle)
(See Main Harness) (See Main Harness) (See Transmission Harness)
Operator Safety Circuit
Alternate
Alternate
Harness
P. Shuttle Dashboard P. Shuttle Trans, Harness Jumper
5187861-C Diagram C
Transmission Harness C9 (8x8/16x16) (with P. Shuttle)
(8 x 8 / 16 x 16) (See P. Shuttle Dashboard (See Transmission Harness)
5191059-E Diagram E Harness)
Alternate
Digital Instrument Cluster

5189741-D Diagram D
Jumper
DC1
Diagnostic and
(See Main Harness)
Calibration Tool

Reference
Diagram H Starting and Recharging Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5190692--H 25
Diagram PP Position, Driving and Passing Lights Circuit (Generic System Diagram)* . . 5190693--PP 36
Diagram TT Auto 4WD Diff Lock and Stop Lights Circuit (Generic System Diagram)* 5190696--TT 41
Diagram L Power Shuttle Transmission ECM (8 x 8/16 x 16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5178599--L 27
Diagram M Auto 4WD and Front PTO ECM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5192275--M 28

5191034--A 5191034--C1
1 2
Located under left side steering column panel. Located under left side steering column panel.
5191034--C
3
5191034--G
4
Harness Diagrams
Reference
Diagram RR Main Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5190964--RR 38
Diagram O Compressor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5192248--O 29
Diagram E Power Shuttle Dashboard Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5191059--E 23
Diagram Q 2WD / Mechanical 4WD Transmission Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5190959--Q 31
Diagram SS Cab Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5191653--SS 40
2WD (Mechanical 4WD) / Mechanical Lift / Mechanical Diff Lock / With Cab
Cab Harness Rotary Beacon Socket Ext

C29
5191653-SS Diagram SS (See Cab Harness)
Front Headlamp and

(See Transmission Harness)
5191475-B Diagram B
C12 C2--A C2--B C8

Cab to Frame
Ground Harness
C5
2WD (Mechanical 4WD) /

C14
Mechanical Lift / Mechanical Diff. Lock 2WD / Mechanical 4WD
Engine Side Harness C1--A
Main Harness C6--B Transmission Harness
5191475-B Diagram B C1--B 5190964-RR Diagram RR 4WD Circuit Extension
5190959-Q Diagram Q C17
C6--C (See Transmission Harness)
C10
Compressor Extension Neutral Switch Extension

5192248-O Diagram O (Without P. Shuttle)
C18 C24 C11 C21 C28 C4 (See Transmission Harness)
Alternative
Extension
5191649-P Diagram P Jumper
C15 (with P. Shuttle)
Operator Safety Circuit (See Transmission Harness)
Harness
Jumper
5187861-C Diagram C
(without P. Shuttle 40A Socket Harness
(See Main Harness) (See Main Harness)
Alternative

5189741-D Diagram D P. Shuttle Dashboard
Harness (8x8/16x16) C9 P. Shuttle Trans. Harness
5191059-E Diagram E (See P. Shuttle Dashboard
Harness)
Alternative
Jumper
(without P. Shuttle) Diagnostic and
(See Main Harness) DC1
Calibration Tool

Reference
Diagram PP Position, Driving and Passing Lights (Generic System Diagram)* . . . . . . 5190693--PP 36
Diagram UU 2WD (Mechanical 4WD) Diff Lock and Stop Lights Circuit
(Generic System Diagram)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5190699--UU 42
Diagram V Cab Work Lights Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5190691--V 32

5191034--A 5191034--B
5 6
Located under left side steering column panel. Located under right side cab pillar panel.
5191034--C
7
5191034--H
9
5191034--C2
8
Harness Diagrams
Reference
Diagram VV Main Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5190963--VV 44
Diagram B Head Lamps and Corner Lights Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5191475--B 20
Diagram X Electro-Hydraulic 4WD Transmission Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5190958--X 33
Electro-hydraulic 4WD / Mechanical Lift / With Cab

5191653-SS Diagram SS C29
(See Cab Harness)
Headlamp --
5191475-B Diagram B
C12 C2--A C2--B C8

Cab to Frame
Ground Harness
C5
Electro-hydraulic 4WD / C14

Engine Side Harness C1--A Mechanical Lift Main Harness Electro-hydraulic 4WD
5191475-B Diagram B 5190963-W Diagram VV C6--B Transmission Harness C17 4WD Circuit Extension
C1--B
C6--C
5190958-X Diagram X (See Transmission Harness)
C10
Compressor Extension
5192248-O Diagram O C18 C24 C11 C21 C28 C4
Extension
5191649-P Diagram P
Operator Safety Circuit C15
Harness
Jumper
5187861-C Diagram C
(without P. Shuttle) 40A Socket Harness Neutral Switch Extension
(See Main Harness) (Without P. Shuttle)
(See Main Harness)
Alternative
Alternative
Harness (8x8/16x16) C9 P. Shuttle Trans. Harness Jumper
5191059-E Diagram E (See P. Shuttle Dashboard (with P. Shuttle)
Harness) (See Transmission Harness)
Alternative
Jumper
(See Main Harness) DC1 Diagnostic and
Calibration Tool

Reference
Diagram XX Electro-hydraulic 4WD Diff Lock and Stop Lights Circuit
(Generic System Diagram)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5192695--XX 46

5191034--A 5191034--B
10 11
5191034--C
12
5191034--J
14
5191034--C2
13
Harness Diagrams
Reference
Diagram YY Main Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5190961--YY 48
Diagram F Auto 4WD Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5190957--F 24
Cab Harness C29

Rotary Beacon Socket Ext
5191653-SS Diagram SS (See Cab Harness)
Headlamp --
5191475-B Diagram B
C12 C2--A C2--B C8

Cab to Frame
Ground Harness
C5
Auto 4WD) / Mechanical Lift / C14

C1--A Hydraulic Diff. Lock Main Harness Auto 4WD
Engine Side Harness
5190961-YY Diagram YY C6--A Transmission Harness
5191475-B Diagram B C1--B 5190957-F Diagram F
Diagnostic and
C10 DC2
Calibration Tool
C18 C24 C11 C21 C28 C4
Compressor Extension Extension
5192248-O Diagram O 5191649-P Diagram P
C15
Jumper
(without P. Shuttle) 40A Socket Harness Neutral Switch Extension
(See Main Harness) (Without P. Shuttle)
(See Main Harness)
Alternative
Alternative
Operator Safety Circuit P. Shuttle Dashboard
Harness Harness (8x8/16x16) C9 P. Shuttle Trans. Harness Jumper
5187861-C Diagram C 5191059-E Diagram E (See P. Shuttle Dashboard (with P. Shuttle)
Harness) (See Transmission Harness)
Alternative
Jumper
5189741-D Diagram D DC1 Diagnostic and
(See Main Harness)
Calibration Tool

Reference
Diagram TT Auto 4WD Diff Lock and Stop Lights Circuit (Generic System Diagram)* . . 5190696--TT 41

5191034--A 5191034--B
15 16
5191034--C
17
5191034--L
19
Located under right side cab pillar panel.
5191034--C2
18
Speaker
Starter switch
Diode
Connection
Battery
Connection
Fuse
Motor Thermostarter
Lights
Horn
Switch relay
Variable resistor
Power socket
MPD2703A
Sensor Flasher
MPD2704A
WIRE COLOR CODING

B White M Brown
H Grey V Green
0.5 -- RN -- (3)
WIRE SECTION
WIRE COLOUR
No. PIN
ON CONNECTION
(where relevant)
DIAGRAMS
DIAGRAM B ENGINE, HEAD LAMP AND CORNER LIGHTS HARNESS
5191475--B
20
DIAGRAM C OPERATOR SAFETY CIRCUIT HARNESS
5187861--C
21
5189741--D
22
DIAGRAM E POWER SHUTTLE DASHBOARD HARNESS
5191059--E
23
DIAGRAM F AUTO 4WD TRANSMISSION HARNESS
5190957--F
24
DIAGRAM H STARTING AND RECHARGING CIRCUIT
5190692--H
25
DIAGRAM K AUTO 4WD DIFF LOCK AND STOP LIGHTS CIRCUIT (GENERIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM)*
5198439--K
26
DIAGRAM L POWER SHUTTLE TRANSMISSION ECM (8 X 8 / 16 X 16)
5178599--L
27
DIAGRAM M AUTO 4WD AND FRONT PTO ECM
5192275--M
28
DIAGRAM O COMPRESSOR EXTENSION
5192248--O
29
5191649--P
30
DIAGRAM Q 2WD (MECHANICAL 4WD) TRANSMISSION HARNESS
5190959--2--Q
31
DIAGRAM V CAB WORK LIGHTS CIRCUIT
5190691--V
32
DIAGRAM X ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC 4WD TRANSMISSION HARNESS
5190959--X
33
DIAGRAM NN--1 AUTO 4WD / MECHANICAL LIFT / HYDRAULIC DIFF LOCK / LESS CAB
5191343--NN--1
34
DIAGRAM NN--2 AUTO 4WD / MECHANICAL LIFT / HYDRAULIC DIFF LOCK / LESS CAB
5191343--NN--2
35
DIAGRAM PP POSITION, DRIVING AND PASSING LIGHTS CIRCUIT (GENERIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM)*
5190693--PP
36
PAGE LEFT BLANK

DIAGRAM RR--1 2WD (MECHANICAL 4WD) / MECHANICAL LIFT / MECHANICAL DIFF LOCK / WITH CAB
5190964--RR--1
37
DIAGRAM RR--2 2WD (MECHANICAL 4WD) / MECHANICAL LIFT / MECHANICAL DIFF LOCK / WITH CAB
5190964--RR--2
38
DIAGRAM SS CAB HARNESS
5191653--SS
39
DIAGRAM TT AUTO 4WD DIFF LOCK AND STOP LIGHTS CIRCUIT (GENERIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM)*
5190696--TT
40
DIAGRAM UU 2WD (MECHANICAL 4WD) DIFF LOCK AND STOP LIGHTS CIRCUIT (GENERIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM)*
5190699--UU
41
PAGE LEFT BLANK

DIAGRAM VV--1 ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC 4WD / MECHANICAL LIFT / WITH CAB
5190963--VV--1
42
DIAGRAM VV--2 ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC 4WD / MECHANICAL LIFT / WITH CAB
5190963--VV--2
43
DIAGRAM XX ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC 4WD DIFF LOCK AND STOP LIGHTS CIRCUIT (GENERIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM)*
5192695--XX
44
PAGE LEFT BLANK

DIAGRAM YY--1 AUTO 4WD / MECHANICAL LIFT / HYDRAULIC DIFF LOCK / WITH CAB
5190961--YY--1
45
DIAGRAM YY--2 AUTO 4WD / MECHANICAL LIFT / HYDRAULIC DIFF LOCK / WITH CAB
5190961--YY--2
46
Chapter 12 -- Tractor After Serial Number 1269071
CONTENTS


Use Chapter 13 for instrument/instrument panel
see the tractor wiring diagrams (Chapters 16 or 17)
for your actual tractor configuration.
Use Chapter 14 for switches and controls

see the tractor wiring diagrams (Chapters 16 or 17)
for your actual tractor configuration.
Use Chapter 15 for connector reference and

location. For detailed information, see the tractor
wiring diagrams (Chapters 16 or 17) for your actual
tractor configuration.
Use Chapter 16 wiring diagrams for tractors between

serial numbers 1269072 and 1297484.
Use Chapter 17 wiring diagrams for tractors after

serial number 1297485.
Chapter 13 -- Instruments (After Serial Number 1269071)
CONTENTS

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Fuel Level Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Proofmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Electronic Module Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Electronic Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Sector 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Sector 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Sector 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Adjusting the Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
ANALOG INSTRUMENTS
INTRODUCTION
26302
1
The analog instrument panel is composed of four display sections:
1. Alarm and on/off indicator light panel 3. Speedometer/tachometer

2. Fuel gauge 4. Engine coolant temperature.
Indicator light panel (Fig. 2)
8 12
26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
26303
Refer to the following list to identify the operation conditions shown by the indicator lights in fig. 2, see the list
below.
Condition Indicator
1. Flashing left-hand turn indicator Flashing (green)
2. Side/tail lights ON Non-flashing (green)
3. Low gear range ON with Power–Shuttle/2 Speed Power Shift Non-flashing (yellow)
4. High gear range ON with Power–Shuttle/2 Speed Power Shift Non-flashing (green)
5. Battery charging system malfunction Non-flashing (red)
6. Low engine oil pressure indicator Non-flashing (red)
7. Dry air filter clogged Non-flashing (yellow)
8. 8+8 and 16+16 transmission status Non-flashing (yellow)
9. Low brake fluid level Non-flashing (red)
10. Differential lock ON Non-flashing (yellow)
11. Flashing right-hand turn indicator Flashing (green)
12. Permanent four-wheel drive alarm Non-flashing (red)
13. Front lift locked Non-flashing (yellow)
14. Automatic four-wheel drive ON Non-flashing (green)
15. Permanent four-wheel drive ON Non-flashing (green)
16. Trailer brake ON Non-flashing (yellow)
17. Handbrake ON Non-flashing (red)
18. Power take-off synchronised Non-flashing (yellow)
19. Rear PTO ON Non-flashing (yellow)
20. Front Power take-off ON Non-flashing (yellow)
21. Low transmission and/or power steering oil pressure Non-flashing (red)
22. Power Shuttle/2 Speed Power Shift alarm (control unit or operating system fault) Non-flashing (red)
23. Work lights ON Non-flashing (yellow)
24. Full beam headlamps ON Non-flashing (blue)
25. 1st trailer flashing direction indicator Flashing (green)
26. 2nd trailer flashing direction indicator Flashing (green)
FUEL LEVEL GAUGE

(Fig. 3)
This instrument shows the level of fuel in the tank.
When the tank is full, the hand moves completely to
the right.
When the tank is less than 1/4 full, the hand moves
into the red area.
26312
3
PROOFMETER
(Fig. 4)
Engine speed indicator and chronograph with a six
-figure meter. The figures on black background count
hours of work done and the figure on the red
background (far right) shows tenths of an hour.
The green and blue sectors show the engine speed
which provides optimum power take -off
(respectively 540, 540E and 1000 rpm).
-- Green pointer = power take-off at 540 rpm
-- Blue pointer = power take-off at 540E and 1000
rpm. 26310
4
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
(Fig. 5)
-- Green area = normal temperature.
-- White area = temperature too low.
-- Red area = engine overheating.
In this case, reduce engine revolution rating (without
stopping the engine). If the indication persists, check
the cooling system.
26311
5
C
MPD2705A
6
MPD2706A
7
28007
8
28008
9
U R S
28009
10
Y
X
Aa
28010
11
A. TRAILER BRAKE SAFETY PRESSURE SWITCH

Activates when the trailer brake pressure circuit drops below 43.51 psi (3 bar). The warning lamp lights up.
B. ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Activates when the engine oil pressure drops below 9.86 psi (0.68 bar). The warning lamp lights up.
C. ALTERNATOR
Provides a square wave signal and recharges the battery. The alternator also provides power for the electrical
devices on the tractor.
D. BRAKE LIGHTS SWITCHES
Activates when the brakes are applied.
E. REAR POWER TAKE-OFF REVS SENSOR
This sensor is positioned on the rear PTO casing and reads the PTO revs at the different engine rotation
speeds.
F. GEARS IN NEUTRAL SWITCH

Indicates when the gears are in neutral.
G. PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

The switch closes when the parking brake is applied.
H. CREEPER SWITCH
Indicates the Creeper position (on/off).
I. DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SWITCH

Activates when the differential lock is engaged. The warning lamp lights up. Normally open switch.
J. ELECTRONIC LIFT PULL SENSOR

Indicates the drawbar pull to the lift.
K. AIR FILTER CLOGGED SENSOR

Activates when the vacuum in the air intake system exceeds a pre-stabilized value. The warning lamp lights
up.
L. TRAILER BRAKE INDICATOR SWITCH

Activates when the trailer brakes are applied. The warning lamp lights up.
M. LIFT ARMS POSITION SENSOR
Indicates the position and height of the lift arms.
N. STEERING SENSOR
Indicates the steering angle on the front axle right-hand wheel.
O. FUEL LEVEL TRANSMITTER

The signal from the variable resistance determines the fuel level shown on the instrument. When the tank
is empty the resistance is approx. 250 Ω; when half-full, the value is 140 Ω; when full, the value is approx.
30 Ω.
P. FRONT AND REAR AXLE SPEED SENSORS

Respectively indicates front and rear wheel slip.
Q. ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The temperature transmitter resistance varies proportionally to the coolant temperature, generating a signal
modulated voltage that is measured by the instrument. With the temperature at ∼ 149 ûF (∼ 65 ûC) the value
of the resistance is between 337 and 481 Ω; with the temperature at 230 ûF (110 ûC), the resistance of the
value is between 90 and 112 Ω.
R. 2 SPEED POWER SHIFT MODE POSITION SENSOR

Indicates the 2 Speed Power Shift hydraulic splitting operation.
S. SHUTTLE MODE SENSOR POSITION

Indicates forward or reverse movement.
T. 4WD INDICATOR SWITCH

Activates when there is no oil pressure in the 4 WD control lines. The warning lamp lights up.
U. TILT SENSOR
Indicates the tractor tilt.
V. REAR PTO INDICATOR SWITCH

Activates when the PTO is engaged and enables the PTO to be engaged when it is OFF.
W. G1 GEAR SWITCH
Indicates the range position.
X. C1 GEAR SWITCH
Indicates the gear engaged (located in front of the G1 switch).
Y. BRAKE OIL LEVEL SWITCH

Activates when the brake fluid drops below the minimum level. The warning lamp lights up.
Z. SPEED SENSOR
Indicates the theoretical tractor ground speed.
Aa. TRANSMISSION OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Indicates the oil temperature in the transmission unit.
ELECTRONIC MODULE INSTRUMENTS

INTRODUCTION
26301
12
The digital instrument panel (Fig. 12) is composed of the four display sections noted below:
1. Indicator light panel 4. Engine coolant temperature.
2. Fuel gauge
3. Electronic module (functions: hourmeter, power
take-off rev counter, clock and digital electronic
speedometer)
ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODULE

The digital electronic control module is located on the
instrument control panel, and is divided into three
sectors.
Sector 1 (Fig. 13)

Sector (1) shows the engine rpm in graphic seg-
ments. Each segment corresponds to 100 rpm of the
engine. The first segment lights up when the engine
is idling, with the following segments lighting up for
each 100 rpm.
26313
Sector 2 (Fig. 13)
13
Sector (2) displays the following functions in the or-
der in which they are listed:
-- hours worked;
-- engine rpm;
-- power take-off rpm;
-- clock.
To select one of the four functions mentioned above,
press the CAL (1,fig. 14) selection pushbutton until
the required function appears on the central display
(sector 2).
NOTE:
A. “hours worked” function:
the number of hours worked is displayed when
the engine is started (from 0.0 to 1999.9);
B. “engine rpm” function:
engine rpm is shown automatically in numerical
form when the engine is started. The RPM indica-
MDC0532A
tion illuminates;
C. PTO revs “function”: 14
when reading engine rpm, press pushbutton (1,
fig. 14) PTO is shown in numerical form, and the
PTO indication illuminates;
D. “clock” function:
for the clock function, see page 26.
Sector 3 (Fig. 15)

Sector (3) shows the tractor speed:
-- When the engine is started, the value displayed
is zero;
-- minimum speed is 0.31 mph (0.5 km/h);
-- to switch from km/h to mph and vice versa, turn
the key to “key on” whilst holding down the CAL
key, (1 fig. 14), so that the message km/h, fol-
lowed by mph, starts flashing. Use the same pro-
cedure to switch from mph to km/h;
-- These functions are saved when the tractor is
started. 26313
15
Speed Display Calibration
In order to measure speed correctly, the instrument
must be calibrated to compensate for possible varia-
tions in the radius of the tyres under load. Proceed as
follows:
-- mark out a distance of 109.36 yd (100 meters) on
the ground;
-- press the CAL, (1, fig. 16) switch for 3 seconds
until CAL appears on sector (3, fig. 15), at the
same time, on the central sector (2) in fig. 15, the
calibration constant current value will be shown.
Sector (3) will continue to show the CAL mes-
sage, together with the previously set unit of
measurement;
-- set a steady tractor speed between 4 and 10
km/h and press the CAL pushbutton (1, fig. 16),
at the beginning of the marked 100 meter dis-
tance. Simultaneously, the CAL pushbutton will
start to flash and the previously set value will be
zero-set in sector (2, fig. 15);
-- at the end of the marked distance press the CAL
MDC0532A
(1, fig. 16) button again to store the new calibra-
tion constant; 16
-- this automatically terminates the calibration pro-
cedure and sector (3, fig. 15) will show the speed
calculated according to the new constant, whilst
sector (2, fig. 15) will show the engine rpm.
Clock
The instrument is also fitted with a clock function. To
display the time, press the CAL (1, fig. 17) pushbut-
ton, until it appears on the central display, sector (2)
in fig. 15.
NOTE: The clock shows the hour and minutes,

whereas two vertical flashing bars indicate the sec-
onds.
Adjusting the Time (Fig. 17)

After having called up the clock function on the central
display, by pressing the CAL (2), pushbutton, keep the MDC0536A
button (1) held down until the time starts flashing.
17
To correct the minutes, press pushbutton (1) on the
right-hand side A; each press will move the time for-
ward by one minute. By holding the push button
down, the minutes will advance rapidly.
To correct the hours, follow the same procedure used
to change the minutes, press pushbutton (1) on the
left-hand side B.
NOTE: During time adjustment operations, the hours

and minutes will stop flashing.
At the end of time adjustment operations, the numeri-

cal value will start flashing once more; press the CAL
(1) pushbutton again to store the time. The electronic
module will automatically switch to the “hours
worked” function.
Chapter 14 -- SWITCHES AND CONTROLS

(After Serial Number 1269071)
CONTENTS

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Description of Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Central Console Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Control Panel with Analog Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Hazard Light Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Lights/Horn Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Direction Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Flashing the Front Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Side Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Dipped Beam Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Full Beam Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Clock Adjustment Pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Function Selection Pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4WD Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Permanent Engagement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Front Lift Raise/Lower Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Front Lift Function Selection Potentiometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Travel Adjustment Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Working Position Adjustment Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Anti-Swing Arms Adjustment Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Front PTO Control Pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Controls on Right-hand Upright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Controls on Left-hand Cab Upright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Controls on Right-hand Cab Upright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Rotating Beacon Light On/Off Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Work Light Control Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Front Windscreen Washer Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Front Windscreen Washer Control Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Rear Screen Washer/Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Controls On Left-hand Cab Upright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Electro-hydraulic Differential Lock Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Right-hand Side Operating Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Controls on Right-hand Mudguard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Electro-hydraulic Differential Lock Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
INTRODUCTION
The components described in this section are
grouped in controls located inside the cab (in the
specific locations listed below) and in controls
positioned on the outside of the tractor:
1. Instrument panel controls (central control panel
with analog or digital instruments).
2. Cab controls.
3. Operating controls, right-hand side.
4. Electronic lift controls.
5. Central console controls.
6. External controls.
DESCRIPTION OF COMPONENTS
CENTRAL CONSOLE PANEL
The controls on the central console panel (with either
an analog or digital control panel) are as follows:
-- hazard warning light switch; For the location of the controls listed above
-- clock adjustment pushbutton (only with digital (according to the different types of instrument), refer
control panel); to fig. 1 (analog instruments) or fig. 2 (digital
instruments).
-- function select pushbutton (only with digital con-
trol panel);
-- function select pushbutton (only with digital con-
trol panel);
-- four-wheel drive switch.
CONTROL PANEL WITH ANALOGUE INSTRUMENT (Fig. 1)
1
12
11 2
10 3
540E
1000 1500
540
9 2000 1000
4
500
2500
8 O
5
7
MPD2707A
The instruments and switches on the analog control 7. Power Shuttle control lever;
panel (Fig. 1), are as follows: 8. Flashing hazard warning lights switch;
1. Panel with central analog instrument; 9. Clock adjustment switch (only for models with digital
2. Front power take-off control button; instrument control panel);
3. Front arms raise control button; 10. Digital instrument function select switch (only for
4. Automatic four wheel drive mode switch; models with digital instrument control panel);
5. Not used; 11. Front electronic lift working depth adjustment knob;
6. Light control lever with direction indicators and horn 12. Front electronic lift lifting arms upper limit adjustment
incorporated; knob.
DIGITAL INSTRUMENT CONTROL PANEL (Fig. 2)
1
12
11 2
10 3
9 4
8
5
7
MPD2708A
The digital instrument panel (Fig. 2), includes, 6. Light control lever with direction indicators and horn
together with the instrument panel, the following incorporated;
switches and levers: 7. Power Shuttle control lever;
1. Panel with central digital instrument; 8. Flashing hazard warning lights switch;
2. Front power take-off control button; 9. Clock adjustment switch;
3. Front lift arms raise switch; 10. Digital instrument function select switch;
4. Automatic four wheel drive mode switch; 11. Front electronic lift working depth adjustment knob;
5. Not used; 12. Front electronic lifting arms upper limit adjustment
knob.
HAZARD LIGHTS SWITCH

(Fig. 3)
The hazard lights are activated by pressing the red
part of switch (1); the switch will flash together with
the direction indicators.
3
POWER SHUTTLE TRANSMISSION LEVER
This lever (1) inverts the direction of travel and has
three positions:
-- forward (forward drive);
-- back (reverse drive);
-- central (neutral).
4
LIGHTS/HORN SWITCH
The light control lever controls the direction
indicators, headlight full beam flasher and the switch
from full beam to dipped headlights on the tractor
front lights.
Direction Indicator Lights

To indicate a left-hand turn, push the lever (1)
forwards to position A. To indicate a right-hand turn,
pull the lever back to
position B. When the direction indicators are ON,
indicator lights (1) or (11) in fig. 2 (Chapter. 1) flash
accordingly on the control panel.
5
Flashing the Front Headlights (Fig. 6)
With the lights OFF or dipped, push the lever C
upwards to position C to flash the full beam
headlights. When released, the lever will
automatically return to the original position D. 1
NOTE: The light selector knob (5, fig. 7) operates D
with the starter switch in position B.
E
MCS0605A
6
Side Lights (Fig. 7)
2 3 4 5
With lever (1, fig. 6) in position D, turn the index mark
(4) on knob (5) until it coincides with the symbol (2).
The side/tail lights and the control panel will
illuminate.
Dipped Beam Headlights (Fig. 7)

With lever (1, fig. 6) in position D, turn the index mark
(4) on knob (5) until it coincides with the symbol (6).
Full Beam Headlights (Fig. 6)

6
With the dipped lights ON, push the lever (1, fig. 6)
down to position E until the lever stops.
7
Horn (Fig. 7)
Press the horn button (5), as indicated in the drawing.
CLOCK ADJUSTMENT PUSHBUTTON

(ONLY WITH DIGITAL CONTROL
INSTRUMENT)
(Fig. 8).
This pushbutton is used to adjust the clock.
NOTE: For further details, see Chapter 1, page 26.
8
FUNCTION SELECTION PUSHBUTTON
(ONLY WITH DIGITAL CONTROL PANEL)
(Fig. 9)
Pressing this button (1) selects the various functions
of the digital instrument.
NOTE: For further details, see Chapter 1, page 26.
9
4WD CONTROL SWITCH (FIG. 10)
Three different four-wheel drive functions can be
selected with this switch (1):
-- automatic cut-in;
-- permanent disengagement
-- permanent four-wheel drive.
Automatic Operation
Press pushbutton (1, in fig. 11) in to position (C),
indicator light (2, fig. 12) will light up to indicate
automatic 4WD mode has been selected.
Four--wheel drive engagement will be signalled by
indicator (1, fig. 12) on the instrument panel. This 10
system will automatically engage four--wheel drive if
the wheels slip in the following conditions:
-- during traction, (e.g. when working) on slippery
ground;
-- on downward slopes, (e.g. when towing a heavy
trailer) on slippery ground.
Four--wheel drive is automatically disengaged when
the wheels stop slipping and/or when a pre--set
steering angle is exceeded and with speed above
16.40/27.34 mph (15/25 km/h) when travelling
downhill.
Permanent Engagement (Fig. 11)

4WD engagement is obtained by pressing 11
pushbutton (1, fig. 11) to position A. In this position,
front--wheel drive will be permanently engaged.
To disengage, press the switch to position A once
more.
26319
12
ATTENTION
Four-wheel drive is engaged automatically when the
brake pedals are pressed simultaneously, regard-
less of the selection made.
ATTENTION
Do not use the manual four--wheel drive setting when
driving on roads as, unlike the automatic setting, this
increases wear on the front tyres.
FRONT LIFT RAISE/LOWER CONTROL

SWITCH (FIG. 14)
13
The switch (1) is only used to lower or raise the
implement at each headland.
To enable the controls, proceed as follows:
-- with the engine running, check that the alternator
pilot lamp is OFF;
-- Press switch (1) first to the UP position B and A B
then to DOWN position A;
-- turn the work position potentiometer (1) fig.
clockwise, then counter--clockwise until the indi-
cator (1, fig. 16) switches off. 15).
If there is a lift malfunction, as a result of a
sensors/actuators fault, the control unit transmits a
signal to the indicator (1, fig. 15).
The type of flash identifies the malfunction error
14
code.
NOTE: The front lift function is controlled by the same

ECU as the rear lift.
For safety reasons, the front lift controls are disabled
when the tractor is started. The disabled controls
mode is indicated by the indicator lamp (1, fig. 15).
26309A
15
FRONT LIFT FUNCTION SELECTION

POTENTIOMETER (FIG. 16)
1. Lift arms upper limit adjustment control.
2. Working depth adjustment potentiometer
Travel Adjustment Knob

-- turn the knob (1) fully clockwise for lift arms maxi-
mum upper limit;
-- turn the knob (1) counter--clockwise to gradually
reduce the upward stroke, until it is totally can-
celled.
Working Position Adjustment Knob 16

-- turn the knob (2) fully clockwise to set the mini-
mum working depth;
-- turn the knob (2) counter--clockwise, to progres-
sively increase the working depth.
ANTI-SWING ARMS ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

(FIG. 17)
When the switch (1) is ON, the rear lift arms
cross--swing movement is totally eliminated.
NOTE: To totally dampen swing on the arms, after

having carried out adjustment with lever, press push-
button (1, fig. 18) to position A. To deactivate the
function, press the pushbutton to position B.
CAUTION: With pushbutton (1, fig. 18) in position A 17

do not operate the control levers. When the horizon-
tal arms need to be varied, switch (1, fig. 18) must be
switched off and returned to position B.
18
FRONT PTO CONTROL PUSHBUTTON

(FIG. 19)
The pushbutton (1) engages and disengages the
Power take-off
-- ON = pushbutton pulled upwards;
-- OFF = pushbutton pressed down.
19
To engage the power take-off, press pushbutton (1,
fig. 20) and pull the knob upwards (2, fig. 20).
Engagement is controlled by an electromagnetic
clutch. Indicator (1, fig. 21) remains illuminated to
indicate that the PTO is engaged. To disengage the
PTO, press knob (2, fig. 20) downwards.
When starting the engine with pushbutton (2) ON, a
warning light (1, fig. 21) informs the operator that the
pushbutton must be released. If the engine switches
off with the power take-off engaged, a warning light
(1, fig. 21) informs the operator that the command
must be disabled.
MDC0342A
20
NOTE: When a fault occurs, indicated by signal (1,

fig. 21), flashing, the system shuts down.
The fault must be eliminated before returning to nor-
mal operation.
NOTE: For safety reasons, and to avoid pointless

skidding, engagement cannot be carried out when
the engine exceeds 1500 rpm. If the power take--off
is inadvertently engaged with the motor running at
over 1500 rpm, the indicator (1, fig. 21) will flash rap-
idly to warn that the motor revs must be reduced.
21
CONTROLS ON RIGHT-HAND CAB UPRIGHT

(FIG. 22) 1
The following controls are located on the right--hand 2
cab upright:
3
-- Six-way fuse box (1). 4
-- Rotating beacon light ON/OFF switch (2).
5
-- Work light switch (3).
6
-- Windscreen wiper switch (4).
-- Front windscreen washer switch (5). 7
-- Rear windscreen wiper/washer switch (6). 8
-- Electrohydraulic differential lock switch (7). MPD2710A
-- Not used (8). 22
NOTE: All controls are operational when the starter

key is in position (B).
CONTROLS ON LEFT-HAND CAB UPRIGHT

(FIG. 23)
1
The following controls are located on the left--hand
cab upright:
-- Cigar lighter (1). 2
-- Suspended axle switch (2).
MPD2709A
23
CONTROLS ON RIGHT-HAND CAB UPRIGHT
Rotating Beacon Light ON/OFF Switch (2)

The switch has two positions:
-- position D = rotating beacon ON;
-- position E = rotating beacon OFF.
NOTE: The rotating beacon must be used when driv-

ing on the public highway. Plug the beacon into the
power socket (1, fig. 24).
Work Light Control Button (3)

The pushbutton has three positions:
-- position A = lights OFF;
-- position B = rear lights ON, front lights OFF;
1
-- position C = rear and front lights ON.
28013
Front Windscreen Washer Switch (4)

24
The switch has three positions:
-- position B = speed 1;
-- position C = speed 2.
Front Windscreen Washer Control Button (5)
To start the washer, press switch (2). A B C
When released, the switch will automatically return to
the neutral position.
Rear Screen Washer/Wiper (6)

The switch has three positions:
D E
-- position B = wipers ON;
-- position C = wiper and washer on; when released
the switch returns automatically to position B.
26736
25
CONTROLS ON LEFT-HAND CAB UPRIGHT

Electrohydraulic Differential Lock Switch (7)
(only for version with cab)
The electrohydraulic differential lock switch (1,
fig. 26) has three positions:
-- position A = differential lock disengaged;
-- position B = differential lock ON: to disengage the
differential lock, press one of the two brake ped-
als; it re--engages automatically when the pedal
is released;
-- position C = differential lock engaged: disen-
gages automatically when you use the LIFT-- MPD2711A
O--MATIC control or one of the two brake pedals. 26
NOTE: With the differential lock ON, by lifting an im-

plement the differential will disengage; by lowering
the implement the differential will re--engage. the
same system as for position B is maintained with re-
gard to the brakes.
Electrohydraulic differential lock switch engagement

will be signalled by the illumination of an indicator on
the dashboard (1, fig. 27).
26309
27
RIGHT-HAND SIDE OPERATING CONTROLS
There are two types of controls on the right-hand
mudguard according to whether the lift device is
electronically controlled or not.
CONTROLS ON RIGHT-HAND MUDGUARD

(VERSION WITH ELECTRONICALLY
CONTROLLED LIFT)
Electrohydraulic Differential Lock Control Switch
(Fig. 28)
(only for models without a cab)
The electrohydraulic differential lock switch (1) is 26321
shown in the figure. 28
For switch positions A, B and C (Fig. 29), see page
30 which describes the switch functions (models with
cab).
26321
29
Electrohydraulic differential lock switch engagement
will be signalled by the illumination of an indicator on
the dashboard (1, fig. 30).
26309
30
EXTERNAL CONTROLS (FIG. 31)
The external controls consist of switches (1) for lift
arms up/down movement.
The switches are located at the rear of the tractor, on
both sides, next to the taillights. Both switches have
two positions:
-- position A = raising;
-- position B = lowering.
By using the external controls, all the control unit A
commands, located on the cab dashboard, are
automatically disabled.
26590
B
31
Chapter 15 -- Connectors (After Serial Number 1269071)
CONTENTS

Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Electrical Circuit Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Ground Location Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Ground Points Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Component / Connector Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Electric Wire Color Coding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Electrical Wire and Connector Identification Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
COMPONENTS
1 Battery
2 Steering sensor
3 Air conditioner dehydrating filter
4 Right headlight
5 Right side corner headlight
6 Trailer brake emergency switch
7 Horn
9 Air conditioner joint connector
10 Starter motor
12 Thermostart
16 Front right side taillight and indicator
19 POWER SHUTTLE system connector (8 PINS--RED)
25 Electric and hydraulic dual drive connector
27 Front side light connector
28 Digger depth adjuster control panel and rear electronic lift warning lights
29 Front right auxiliary work light
30 Air conditioner control relay
31 Heater resistance unit
32 Cab ceiling light
33 Cab roof ground
34 Right hand speaker
35 Ventilation-heater unit connector
36 Radio antenna connector
37 Radio connectors
38 Windscreen wiper motor
39 Fan-conditioner control unit
41 Rear window wiper motor
42 Front left auxiliary work light
43 Left hand speaker
44 Rear left auxiliary work light

45 Rotating light socket
46 Radio antenna
47 Seven-pole socket
48 Plate light lamp
49 Rear left ground
50 Rear left light
51 Electric lift up-down switch on left mudguard
52 Rear window washer pump
53 Windscreen washer pump
54 Seven-pole socket connector
55 Handbrake sensor switch
56 Front left taillight and direction indicator
57 Trailer brake solenoid valve 2
57A Trailer brake solenoid valve 1
58 Trailer brake engaged sensor switch
59 Fuel level transmitter
60 Shuttle position sensor
61 Speed sensor
62 Differential lock solenoid valve
63 Dual drive solenoid valve
64 Dual drive sensor pressure switch
65 Shuttle position solenoid valve
66 HI clutch control solenoid valve
67 Dump solenoid valve
68 HI--LO control solenoid valve
69 Neutral gear switch
70 G1 gear switch
71 C1 gear switch
72 Front axle speed sensor
73 Rear axle speed sensor
74 Trailer brake system connector
75 4WD system connector
76 Engine oil pressure sensor
77 Overload trip device
78 Alternator
79 Engine coolant temperature sensor
80 Air cleaner clogged sensor
81 Steering sensor connector
82 Battery ground
83 Left corner headlight
84 Front left light
85 Rear electric lift up-down connector (3 PINS)
86 Corner light control switch
87 HI--LO gear control button
88 Rear lift up-down control switch
88A Differential lock sensor switch
89 Corner light control switch connector

90 Cab system connector (6 PINS)
91 Cab system connector (1 PIN)
92 Seat ground
93 8A socket
94 Rear electronic lift up-down control panel
95 Rear right light
96 Electronic lift up-down control switch on right mudguard
97 Arm position sensor
98 Electronic lift up-down pull sensor
99 Rear PTO rev sensor
100 Rear lift up control solenoid valve
101 Rear lift down control solenoid valve
102 Seat connector
103 Rear main ground (transmission)
104 Differential lock control switch
105 Supplementary reduction switch (HI--LO position sensor)
106 LO clutch control solenoid valve
107 Transmission oil temperature sensor
108 Rear electronic lift up-down connector (PIN6)
109 Cigar lighter
110 Rear window wiper-washer control switch
111 Windscreen washer control switch
112 Windscreen wiper control switch
113 Work light control switch
114 Rotating light control switch
115 Auxiliary fuse carrier (cab right pillar)
116 Rear work light relay
117 Conditioner fan relay
118 Front work light relay
119 Ignition switch devices relay
120 Main relay and fuse carrier
121 Clutch pedal switch
122 Auxiliary fuse carrier
123 Clutch pedal position sensor
124 POWER SHUTTLE system diagnostic socket
125 Dual drive diagnostic socket
126 Electronic lift diagnostic socket
127 Speed sensor connector (POWER SHUTTLE control unit)
128 POWER SHUTTLE system connector
129 Thermostart button
130 Control panel ground
131 Ignition relay connector
132 Ignition relay
133 Hazard lights control switch
134 Electronic flasher
135 Front-rear electronic lift control unit
136 Measuring instrument

137 POWER SHUTTLE control unit
138 Permanent dual drive and front PTO control unit
140 Dual drive control switch
142 Digital instrument calibration/selection control switch
143 Digital instrument clock setting control switch
144 Slant sensor connector
145 External light stalk control
146 Front lift system fitting
147 Ignition switch
148 Rear PTO sensor switch
149 Slant sensor
150 Front PTO system fitting
151 POWER SHUTTLE control lever
152 Differential lock control relay and brake lights
153 10A fuse (front lift system)
154 50A power fuse red (cab circuit)
155 LIFT-O-MATIC switch
156 Differential lock automatic control switch (version without cab)
157 Rear work light (version without cab)
158 Rear ground on left mudguard (version without cab)
159 Seat emergency switch (N.A.S.O. version)
160 N.A.S.O. version connector
161 Protection diode (N.A.S.O. version)
162 Horn (N.A.S.O. version)
163 Alarm unit (N.A.S.O. version)
145 Turn switch

164 Front side connection -- engine (10 PIN)
165 Front side connection -- engine (1 PIN)
166 Cab system connection (8 PIN)
167 Cab system connection (1 PIN)
168 Trailer brake system connection (6 PIN)
169 Power socket connection 25/40 A
170 Front lights connection
171 Transmission side connection (24 PIN) (Auto 4WD only)
172 Transmission side connection (18 PIN)
175 Transmission side connection (2 PIN) (not used Auto 4WD)
176 Trailer brake system intermediate connection
177 Power--shuttle system connection (24 PIN)
178 Air--conditioner connector connection
180 PTO and front lift system connection (14 PIN)
183 Seven pole power socket connection (6 PIN)
184 Gear neutral switch connection (2 PIN)
185 Intermediate connection for 4WD system (4 PIN)
186 Operator safety system connection (8 PIN)
188 Digital instrument connection (8 PIN)
189 Rear lights connection (6 PIN) (less cab only)
190 Rear lights connection (2 PIN) (less cab only)
191 Swivel position lights connection (4 PIN) (with cab only)
192 Rotating beacon socket connection (2 PIN)
193 Suspended axle system connection
194 Suspended axle electronic control unit
195 Suspended axle circuit switch
196 Solenoid valve 1 suspended axle
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT COMPONENTS (CONTINUED)
199 Suspended axle angle position sensor

200 Pressure sensor 1 suspended axle
201 Pressure sensor 2 suspended axle
203 Front PTO control switch
204 Front lift control panel
205 Front lift up/down control switch
206 Front lift raise solenoid valve (black)
207 Front lift lower solenoid valve (grey)
208 Front lift arms position sensor
209 Front PTO electromagnetic clutch
210 Front PTO sensor
211 Side lights relay (Version with electrohydraulic 4WD)
212 Trailer brake relay
213 Trailer brake relay
214 Starter relay
215 Operator safety circuit buzzer timer
217 Extra LH indicator tail light
218 Extra RH indicator tail light
219 Shuttle lever switch
220 Heater/conditioner unit fan control switch
221 Resistor
222 Fan motor
223 Fan control unit lamp
224 Fan unit relay
225 Conditioning system control switch
226 Thermostat
227 Creeper switch
228 Power socket 25A (ISO) /40 A (NASO)
229 Power fuse 30/40 A
230 Transmission oil pressure switch
231 Battery isolator connection and jumper
GROUND LOCATION POINTS

A. Control panel ground.
B. Engine compartment ground.
C. Cab roof ground.
D. Seat ground.
E. Main rear ground (transmission)
F. Battery ground.
GROUND POINTS LAYOUT
MPD2847A
1
COMPONENT / CONNECTOR LOCATIONS
MPD2669A
2
MPD2670A
3
MPD2671A
4
MPD2673A
5
MPD2674A
6
MPD2675A
7
MPD2676A
8
MPD2677A
9
MPD2678A
10
MPD2680A
11
MPD2681A
12
13
14
ELECTRIC WIRE COLOR CODING
A Light blue HV Grey green

AN Light blue black HG Grey yellow
AG Light blue yellow I Blue
AB Light blue white LB Blue white
AV Light blue green LN Blue black
AR Light blue red LR Blue red
B White M Brown
BR White red MB Brown white
BN White black MN Brown black
BL White blue N Black
BG White yellow NZ Black purple
C Orange NB Black white
CB Orange white NR Black red
CN Orange black R Red
CL Orange blue RG Red yellow
G Yellow RN Red black
GV Yellow green RV Red green
GN Yellow black S Pink
GR Yellow red SN Pink black
GL Yellow blue SG Pink yellow
H Grey V Green
HM Grey brown VN Green black
HR Grey red VB Green white
HN Grey black Z Purple
HB Grey white ZB Purple white
HL Grey blue ZN Purple black
ELECTRICAL WIRE AND CONNECTOR IDENTIFICATION CODE
0,5 -- RN -- (3)
WIRE SECTION
WIRE COLOR
CONNECTOR
PIN NUMBER
(where relevant)
CONNECTORS
15
16
17
18
19
* Version with cab

20
* Version with cab

21
22
23
24
25

26
* Version with cab

27
* Version with cab

28
* Version with cab

29
30
31
32
33
34
* Version with cab

* * Version without cab
35
36
37
38
39
* Version with cab

40
41
**
* Version with cab

42
43
44
45
46
47
48
* Version with cab

49
50
51
* Version with cab

52
53
* Version with cab

54
55
56
57
149
0.5 C (1)
0.5 GV (2)
0.5 B (3)
58
* Version with cab

59
60
61
1
2
**
MPD2765A
* Version with electrohydraulic 4WD

** Version with Auto-4WD
3
4
5
6
7
8
**
* Version with cab

9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Chapter 16 - Wiring Diagrams for Tractors with a Serial Number

Between 1269072 and 1297484
CONTENTS

Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Harness Diagrams


location chart.
Harness Diagrams
Reference
Diagram LL Main Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5198307--LL 52
Diagram E Power Shuttle Dashboard Harness (8 x 8/16 x 16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5191059--E 27
Headlamp -- Corner Lights

Harness
5191475-B Diagram B
C12 C8 C14
Platform to Frame
Ground Harness
C5

Auto 4WD / Mechanical Lift / C6--A Harness
Engine Side Harness C1--A Hydraulic Diff Lock Main Harness 5190957-F Diagram F
5191475-B Diagram B C1--B 5198307-A Diagram A
Diagnostic and C4
DC2
C18 C24 C11 C21

40A Socket Harness
(without P. Shuttle) (Without P. Shuttle)
Alternate
Alternate
Harness
P. Shuttle Dashboard P. Shuttle Trans. Harness Jumper
5187861-C Diagram C Harness (8 x 8 / 16 x 16) C9 (8x8/16x16) (with P. Shuttle)
5191059-E Diagram E (See P. Shuttle Dashboard (See Transmission Harness)
Harness)
Alternate

5189741-D Diagram D Jumper
Calibration Tool

Reference
Diagram I Position, Driving and Passing Lights Circuit (Generic System Diagram)* . . 5199463--I 30
Diagram J Turn and Hazard Lights Circuit (Generic System Diagram)* . . . . . . . . . . . 5199609--J 31
Diagram K Auto 4WD, Diff Lock and Stop Lights Circuit (Generic System Diagram)* . 5198439--K 32

5199077--F
2
5199077--A
5199077--F2
1
Located under left side steering column panel. 3
5199077--C
4
Harness Diagrams
Reference
Diagram EE Main Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5198303--EE 44
Diagram FF Cab Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5198340--FF 46

C29
5198340-FF Diagram FF (See Cab Harness)

Harness
5191475-B Diagram B
C12 C2--A C2--B C8

Cab to Frame
Ground Harness
C5

C14
Mechanical Lift / Mechanical Diff. Lock 2WD (Mechanical 4WD)
Engine Side Harness C1--A
Main Harness C6--B Transmission Harness C17
5191475-B Diagram B C1--B 5198303-EE Diagram EE 4WD Circuit Extension
5190959-Q Diagram Q
C6--C (See Transmission Harness)
C10
C15
Corner Lights Switch Neutral Switch Extension

Extension (Without P. Shuttle)
5191649-P Diagram P (See Transmission Harness)
Alternative
Harness
Jumper Jumper
5187861-C Diagram C (with P. Shuttle)
(without P. Shuttle) 40A Socket Harness
Alternative

Harness (8x8/16x16) C9 P. Shuttle Trans. Harness
Harness)
Alternative
Jumper
Calibration Tool

Reference
Diagram T Turn and Hazard Lights Circuit (Generic System Diagram)* . . . . . . . . . . . 5198440--T 38
Diagram U 2WD (Mechanical 4WD) Diff Lock and Stop Lights Circuit
(Generic System Diagram)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5198437--U 39

5199077--A 5199077--B
5 6
5199077--C
7
5199077--F2 5199077--G
8 9
Harness Diagrams
Reference
Diagram HH Main Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5198271--HH 48
Electro-hydraulic 4WD / Mechanical Lift / With Cab

C29

Harness
5191475-B Diagram B
C12 C2--A C2--B C8

Cab to Frame
Ground Harness
C5
Electro-hydraulic 4WD / Mechanical Lift C6--B Electro-hydraulic 4WD C14

Engine Side Harness C1--A Main Harness Transmission Harness
C6--C C17
5191475-B Diagram B C1--B 5198271-HH Diagram HH 5190958-X Diagram X 4WD Circuit Extension
C10
C15

Alternative
Harness
Jumper Jumper
5187861-C Diagram C
(without P. Shuttle) 40A Socket Harness (with P. Shuttle)
Alternative

5189741-D Diagram D P. Shuttle Dashboard P. Shuttle Trans. Harness
Harness (8x8/16x16) C9 (8x8/16x16)
Harness)
Alternative
Jumper
Calibration Tool

Reference
Diagram Z Electro-hydraulic 4WD Diff Lock and Stop Lights Circuit
(Generic System Diagram)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5198438--Z 42

5199077--A 5199077--B
10 11
5199077--C
12
5199077--F2 5199077--H
13 14
Harness Diagrams
Reference
Diagram JJ Main Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5198257--JJ 50

C29

Harness
5191475-B Diagram B
C12 C2--A C2--B C8

Cab to Frame
Ground Harness
C5
Auto 4WD / Mechanical Lift /

Auto 4WD C14
Hydraulic Diff. Lock /
Engine Side Harness C1--A C6--A Transmission Harness
Main Harness / With Cab
5191475-B Diagram B 5190957-F Diagram F
C1--B 5198257-JJ Diagram JJ
C10
C15

Diagnostic and
DC2
Calibration Tool
Alternative
Jumper Jumper
Alternative
Operator Safety Circuit P. Shuttle Dashboard P. Shuttle Trans. Harness

Harness Harness (8x8/16x16) C9 (8x8/16x16)
5187861-C Diagram C 5191059-E Diagram E (See P. Shuttle Dashboard
Harness)
Alternative
Jumper
Digital Instrument Cluster (without P. Shuttle)
5189741-D Diagram D (See Main Harness) DC1 Diagnostic and
Calibration Tool

Reference
Diagram K Auto 4WD Diff Lock and Stop Lights Circuit (Generic System Diagram)* . . 5198439--K 32

5199077--A 5199077--B
15 16
5199077--C
17
5199077--F2 5199077--K
18 19
Speaker
Starter switch
Diode
Connection
Battery
Connection
Fuse
Motor Thermostarter
Lights
Horn
Switch relay
Variable resistor
Power socket
MPD2703A
Sensor Flasher
MPD2704A
WIRE COLOR CODING

B White M Brown
H Grey V Green
0.5 -- RN -- (3)
WIRE SECTION
WIRE COLOUR
No. PIN
ON CONNECTION
(where relevant)
DIAGRAMS
5191475--B
20
5187861--C
21
5189741--D
22
5191059--E
23
5190957--F
24
5190692--H
25
DIAGRAM I POSITION, DRIVING, AND PASSING LIGHTS CIRCUIT (GENERIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM)*
5199463--I
26
DIAGRAM J TURN AND HAZARD LIGHTS CIRCUIT (GENERIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM)*
5199609--J
27
5198439--K
28
5178599--L
29
5192275--M
30
5192248--O
31
5191649--P
32
5190959--2--Q
33
DIAGRAM T TURN AND HAZARD LIGHTS CIRCUIT (GENERIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM)*
5198440--T
34
DIAGRAM U 2WD (MECHANICAL 4WD) DIFF LOCK AND STOP LIGHTS (GENERIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM)*
5198437--U
35
5190691--V
36
5190959--X
37
DIAGRAM Z ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC 4WD DIFF LOCK AND STOP LIGHTS CIRCUIT (GENERIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM)*
5198438--Z
38
PAGE LEFT BLANK

DIAGRAM EE--1 2WD (MECHANICAL 4WD) / MECHANICAL LIFT / MECHANICAL DIFF LOCK / WITH CAB
5198303--EE--1
39
DIAGRAM EE--2 2WD (MECHANICAL 4WD) / MECHANICAL LIFT / MECHANICAL DIFF LOCK / WITH CAB
5198303--EE--2
40
DIAGRAM FF CAB HARNESS
5198340--FF
41
PAGE LEFT BLANK

DIAGRAM HH--1 ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC 4WD / MECHANICAL LIFT / WITH CAB
5198271--HH--1
42
DIAGRAM HH--2 ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC 4WD / MECHANICAL LIFT / WITH CAB
5198271--HH--2
43
DIAGRAM JJ--1 AUTO 4WD / MECHANICAL LIFT / HYDRAULIC DIFF LOCK / WITH CAB
5198257--JJ--1
44
DIAGRAM JJ--2 AUTO 4WD / MECHANICAL LIFT / HYDRAULIC DIFF LOCK / WITH CAB
5198257--JJ--2
45
DIAGRAM LL--1 AUTO 4WD / MECHANICAL LIFT / HYDRAULIC DIFF LOCK / LESS CAB
5198307--LL--1
46
DIAGRAM LL--2 AUTO 4WD / MECHANICAL LIFT / HYDRAULIC DIFF LOCK / LESS CAB
5198307--LL--2
47
Chapter 17 - Wiring Diagrams for Tractors After Serial Number 1297485
CONTENTS

Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Harness diagrams
Configuration flow diagram

Individual system diagrams

location chart.
Harness Diagrams
Reference
Diagram A Main Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47131452--A 24
Auto 4WD / Mechanical Lift / Hydraulic Diff Lock / Less Cab Configuration

Harness
5191475-B Diagram B
C12 C8 C14
Platform to Frame Ground
Harness
C5

Auto 4WD / Mechanical Lift / Hydraulic C6--A Harness
Engine Side Harness C1--A Diff Lock / Main Harness / Less Cab 5190957-F Diagram F
5191475-B Diagram B C1--B 47131452-A Diagram A
Diagnostic and C4
DC2
C18 C24 C11 C21

40A Socket Harness
(without P. Shuttle) (Without P. Shuttle)
(See Main Harness)
Alternate
Alternate
Harness P. Shuttle Dashboard P. Shuttle Trans, Harness Jumper
5187861-C Diagram C Harness (8 x 8 / 16 x 16) C9 (8x8/16x16) (with P. Shuttle)
5191059-E Diagram E (See P. Shuttle Dashboard (See Transmission Harness)
Harness)
Alternate

5189741-D Diagram D Jumper
DC1 Diagnostic and
(See Main Harness)
Calibration Tool

Reference
Diagram I Position, Driving and Passing Lights Circuit (Generic System Diagram)* 5199463--I 32
Diagram J Turn and Hazard Lights Circuit (Generic System Diagram)* . . . . . . . . . . . 5199609--J 33

5199077--F
2
5199077--A 5199077--F1
1 3
5199077--C
4
Harness Diagrams
Reference
Diagram N Main Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47131433--N 38
Diagram R Cab Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47131481--R 43
Cab Harness C29

Rotary Beacon Socket Ext
47131481-R Diagram R (See Cab Harness)

Harness
5191475-B Diagram B
C30 C2--A C2--B C12 C8

Cab to Frame
Ground Harness
C5

2WD / Mechanical 4WD C14
Mechanical Lift / Mechanical Diff. Lock / C6--B
Engine Side Harness C1--A Transmission Harness C17
Main Harness / With Cab C6--C
5191475-B Diagram B 5190959-Q Diagram Q 4WD Circuit Extension
C1--B 47131433-N Diagram N (See Transmission Harness)
C10 C31
C15
Alternative
Harness
Jumper Jumper
5187861-C Diagram C
(without P. Shuttle 40A Socket Harness (with P. Shuttle)
Alternative

Harness (8x8/16x16) C9 (8x8/16x16)
Harness)
Alternative
Jumper
Calibration Tool

Reference
Diagram I Position, Driving and Passing Lights (Generic System Diagram)* . . . . . . 5199463--I 32
Diagram U 2WD (Mechanical 4WD) Diff Lock and Stop Lights Circuit
(Generic System Diagram)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5198437--U 45

5199077--G
6
5199077--A 5199077--F2
5 7
5199077--C
8
5199077--B
9
Harness Diagrams
Reference
Diagram W Main Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47131435--W 48
Electro-hydraulic 4WD / Mechanical Lift / Cab Configuration

C29

Harness
5191475-B Diagram B
C12 C2--A C2--B C30 C8

Cab to Frame
Ground Harness
C5
Electro-hydraulic 4WD / Mechanical Lift Electro-hydraulic 4WD C14

C6--B
Engine Side Harness C1--A Main Harness / With Cab Transmission Harness C17
C6--C 5190958-X Diagram X 4WD Circuit Extension
5191475-B Diagram B C1--B 47131435-W Diagram W
C10
C31 Jumper
Compressor Extension (See Main Harness)
C15

Alternative
Harness
Jumper Jumper
5187861-C Diagram C
Alternative

Harness (8x8/16x16) C9 (8x8/16x16)
Harness)
Alternative
Jumper
Calibration Tool

Reference
Diagram Z Electro-hydraulic Diff Lock and Stop Lights Circuit
(Generic System Diagram)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5198438--Z 51

5199077--H
11
5199077--A 5199077--F2
10 12
5199077--C
13
5199077--B
14
Harness Diagrams
Reference
Diagram AA Main Harness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47131439--AA 52

C29

Harness
5191475-B Diagram B
C30 C2--A C2--B C12 C8

Cab to Frame
Ground Harness
C5
Auto 4WD / Mechanical Lift /

Auto 4WD C14
Hydraulic Diff Lock /
Engine Side Harness C1--A C6--A Transmission Harness
Main Harness / With Cab
5191475-B Diagram B 5190957-BB Diagram BB
C1--B 47131439-AA Diagram AA
C10
C31 Jumper
Compressor Extension (See Main Harness)
C15

Diagnostic and
DC2
Calibration Tool
Alternative
Jumper Jumper
(without P. Shuttle 40A Socket Harness (with P. Shuttle)
Alternative
Operator Safety Circuit P. Shuttle Dashboard P. Shuttle Trans. Harness

Harness Harness (8x8/16x16) C9 (8x8/16x16)
5187861-C Diagram C 5191059-E Diagram E (See P. Shuttle Dashboard
Harness)
Alternative
Jumper
(without P. Shuttle
5189741-D Diagram D DC1 Diagnostic and
(See Main Harness)
Calibration Tool

Reference

5199077--A 5199077--B
15 16
5199077--C
17
5199077--K 5199077--F2
18 19
Speaker
Starter switch
Diode
Connection
Battery
Connection
Fuse
Motor Thermostarter
Lights
Horn
Switch relay
Variable resistor
Power socket
MPD2703A
Sensor Flasher
MPD2704A
WIRE COLOR CODING

B White M Brown
H Grey V Green
0.5 -- RN -- (3)
WIRE SECTION
WIRE COLOUR
No. PIN
ON CONNECTION
(where relevant)
DIAGRAMS
DIAGRAM A--1 AUTO 4WD / MECHANICAL LIFT / HYDRAULIC DIFF LOCK / LESS CAB MAIN HARNESS
47131452--A--1
20
DIAGRAM A--2 AUTO 4WD / MECHANICAL LIFT / HYDRAULIC DIFF LOCK / LESS CAB MAIN HARNESS
47131452--A--2
21
5191475--B
22
5187861--C
23
5189741--D
24
5191059--E
25
5190957--F
26
5190692--H
27
DIAGRAM I POSITION, DRIVING, AND PASSING LIGHTS CIRCUIT (GENERIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM)*
5199463--I
28
DIAGRAM J TURN AND HAZARD LIGHTS CIRCUIT (GENERIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM)*
5199609--J
29
5198439--K
30
5178599--L
31
5192275--M
32
PAGE LEFT BLANK

DIAGRAM N--1 2WD (MECHANICAL 4WD) / MECHANICAL LIFT / MECHANICAL DIFF LOCK / WITH CAB
47131433--N--1
33
DIAGRAM N--2 2WD (MECHANICAL 4WD) / MECHANICAL LIFT / MECHANICAL DIFF LOCK / WITH CAB
47131433--N--2
34
5192248--O
35
5191649--P
36
5190959--2--Q
37
DIAGRAM R CAB HARNESS
47131481--R
38
DIAGRAM T TURN AND HAZARD LIGHTS CIRCUIT (GENERIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM)*
5198440--T
39
DIAGRAM U 2WD (MECHANICAL 4WD) DIFF LOCK AND STOP LIGHTS (GENERIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM)*
5198437--U
40
5190691--V
41
PAGE LEFT BLANK

DIAGRAM W--1 ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC 4WD / MECHANICAL LIFT / WITH CAB
47131435--W--1
42
DIAGRAM W--2 ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC 4WD / MECHANICAL LIFT / WITH CAB
47131435--W--2
43
5190959--X
44
DIAGRAM Z ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC 4WD DIFF LOCK AND STOP LIGHTS CIRCUIT (GENERIC SYSTEM DIAGRAM)*
5198438--Z
45
DIAGRAM AA--1 AUTO 4WD / MECHANICAL LIFT / HYDRAULIC DIFF LOCK / WITH CAB
47131439--AA--1
46
DIAGRAM AA--2 AUTO 4WD / MECHANICAL LIFT / HYDRAULIC DIFF LOCK / WITH CAB
47131439--AA--2
47
SECTION 90 -- CAB -- CHAPTER 1 1
SECTION 90 -- CAB
Chapter 1 -- Cab
CONTENTS

Overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
90 100 22 Hood Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
90 100 80 Protective Grill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
90 100 84 Hood Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
90 110 14 Instrument Panel Lower Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
90 110 36 Platform Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
90 114 10 Safety Frame Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
90 150 10 Cab Assembly with Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
90 150 10 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
90 156 14 Cab Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
90 160 16 Right or Left-Hand Upright Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
90 160 60 Cab Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
90 160 60 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Sun Shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
88 120 10 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2 SECTION 90 -- CAB -- CHAPTER 1
OVERHAUL
OP. 90 100 22
HOOD OPENING
Removal
WARNING
gloves and shoes.
Proceed as follows:
1. Disconnect the electrical connections of the front

headlamps.
2. Remove the two retaining bolts (2) holding the

pivot bracket (1) to the base support.
27640
1
3. Remove the retaining spring and shock absorber
(1) from the upper pivot and remove the hood.
Installation
Proceed as follows:
WARNING
27641
4. Position the hood on the relative bracket, insert 2

the shock absorber (1, fig. 2) and retaining spring
on the upper pivot.
5. Fit the pivot bracket (1, fig. 1) on the base support

and tighten the two retaining bolts (2).
6. Connect the electrical connections of the front

headlamps.
OP. 90 100 80
PROTECTIVE GRILL
Removal
WARNING
gloves and shoes.
Proceed as follows.
1. Remove the three retaining bolts (2), washers

and the LH lateral grill (1).
27642
3
2. Remove the three retaining bolts (1), washers
and the RH lateral grill (2).
Installation
WARNING
Proceed as follows.
27643
3. Fit the RH lateral grill (2, fig. 4), washers and the
three retaining bolts (1).
4. Fit the LH lateral grill (1, fig. 3), washers and the
three retaining bolts (2).
OP. 90 100 84
HOOD GUARD
Removal
WARNING
gloves and shoes.
Proceed as follows.
1. Remove the two hood guard retaining bolts and

washers.
2. Remove the hood guard (1) located behind the

exhaust silencer.
Installation
WARNING
27661
3. Fit the hood guard (1) located behind the exhaust

silencer.
4. Fit the two hood guard retaining washers and

bolts.
OP. 90 110 14
INSTRUMENT PANEL LOWER GUARD
Removal
WARNING
gloves and shoes.
27648
6
Proceed as follows.
1. Remove the three retaining bolts (1) and the in-

strument panel lower LH side guard (2).
2. Remove the three retaining bolts (2) and the in-

strument panel lower RH side guard (1).
27649
Installation 7
WARNING
Proceed as follows.
3. Fit the instrument panel lower RH side guard (1,

fig. 7) and the three retaining bolts (2).
4. Fit the instrument panel lower LH side guard (2,

fig. 6) and the three retaining bolts (1).
OP. 90 110 36
PLATFORM ASSEMBLY
DANGER
equipment
lifted.
WARNING
gloves and shoes.
Removal
Proceed as follows.
1. Carry out operation 9010022--Hood opening

2. Carry out operation 9011410--Safety frame

roof R.I. (Only removal).
3. If the exhaust pipe is horizontally fitted, Carry out

operation 1025444--Exhaust pipe R.I. (Only re-
moval).
4. Carry out operation 2113011--Range gear

control hand lever R.I. (Only removal).
5. Carry out operation 2113010--Gear control
hand lever R.I. (Only removal).
6. Carry out operation 2113052--Creeper/shuttle

7. Remove the clips (1), disconnect the fork control

rods (2), remove the two retaining bolts (3).
27811
8
8. Note: if an electronic lift is fitted, disconnect the
oil delivery piping (1) on the electronic lift.
27812
9
9. Remove the bracket (1), complete with control
rods, from the control valve housing.
27813
10
10. Remove the accelerator control cable (1) from
the injection pump.
27660
11
11. Remove the four retaining bolts and the hood
rear support (1).
27666
12
12. Disconnect the electrical connections (1) con-
nected to the platform, the two electrical connec-
tions connected to the brake block pressure
switches, the thermostarter connection and the
brake fluid tank connection.

27124
13
14. Loosen the nut (1) and remove the PTO clutch
control cable (2).
Note: for models with mechanical gears, remove
the clutch control cable.
27650
14
15. Carry out operation 9010084--Hood guard R.I.
(Only removal).
16. Detach the four hoses (1) on the steering circuit

pipes.
27662
15
control pipes (2) from the block (1).
27125
16
19. Note: if an analogue control panel is fitted, dis-

connect the rev counter control rod.
27126
17
20. Note: if the differential lock is mechanically oper-
ated, disconnect the relative lever on the trans-
mission gearbox .
21. Note: if an electronic lift is fitted, remove the

springs (2) and detach the lift control lever rods
(1).
27814
18
22. Note: if a mechanical lift is fitted, remove the seal
ring and detach the LIFT--O--MATIC control rods
(1).
27659
19
23. Working from the lower LH side of the transmis-
sion gearbox, disconnect the handbrake return
rod (2) and the PTO control rod synchronized
with the gear (1).
Note: the tank is not shown in the photo in order
to highlight the two parts in question
27652
20
24. Position a hydraulic jack (1) under the front part
of the fuel tank, remove the retaining bolt (3) and
the front clamp (2).
27815
21
25. Lower the hydraulic jack (1) by 7--8 cm (2 to 3
ins.) and unscrew the platform LH front retaining
bolts (2) then, from the opposite side, remove the
platform RH front retaining bolt.
27816
22
26. Fit the front RH eyebolt (1) to the platform sur-
face.
Carry out the same operation on the LH side.
27817
23
27. Fit the lifting bracket (1) on the platform RH rear
mudguard support bracket (2).
27818
24
28. Remove the two rods (1) and the LH rear bracket
(2) that secures the final drive housing to the plat-
form.
Carry out the same operation on the RH side.
27819
25
29. Connect the hoist (1) and the nylon sling (2) to the
two front eyebolts (3).
30. Connect the hoist (1) and the chains (4) to the two
rear eyebolts, adjusting the chains so that the
platform is raised on the level.
Note: Carefully raise the platform, making sure

that all interconnecting parts are disconnected,
and position the platform on the ground.
27820
26
Installation (Op. 90 110 36 ) -- Refit the PTO clutch control cable and tighten the
lock nut.
To refit the platform, proceed as follows.
-- Note: for models with mechanical gears, recon-
WARNING nect the gear clutch control cable.
USE YOUR FINGERS OR HANDS. -- Carry out operation 9011014--Instrument pan-
el lower guard R.I. (Only installation).
-- Proceed as follows. -- Connect the electrical connections connected to

the platform, the two electrical connections con-
-- Using a hoist, nylon sling and chains, position the nected to the brake block pressure switches, the
cab on the tractor, checking that the gear and thermostarter connection and the brake fluid tank
PTO clutch control rods are correctly inserted in connection.
the respective holes on the platform.
-- Fit the hood rear support and the four retaining
-- Fit the two front bolts and the four rear tie--rods
bolts.
that hold the platform in position.
-- Position a hydraulic jack under the front part of -- Reconnect the accelerator cable to the injection
the fuel tank, raise the tank and fit the front secur- pump.
ing clamps.
-- Fit the bracket, complete with control rods, on the
-- Working from the lower LH side of the transmis- control valve housing.
sion gearbox, connect the handbrake return rod
and the PTO control rod synchronized with the -- Fit the two bracket retaining bolts and the control
gear. rods to the forks, then position the clips.
-- Note: if a mechanical lift is fitted, refit the LIFT-- -- Note: if an electronic lift is fitted, reconnect the oil
O--MATIC control rods by inserting the seal ring. delivery line to the electronic lift control valve.
-- Note: if a mechanical lift is fitted, refit the lift con- -- Carry out operation 2113052--Creeper/shuttle
trol lever rods and the securing springs. control hand lever R.I. (Only installation).
-- Note: if the differential lock is mechanically oper- -- Carry out operation 2113010--Gear control
ated, refit the relative lever on the transmission hand lever R.I. (Only installation).
gearbox .
-- Carry out operation 2113011--Range gear con-
-- Note: if an analogue control panel is fitted, refit trol hand lever R.I. (Only installation).
the rev counter control rod.
-- Carry out operation 1025444--Exhaust pipe
-- Connect the brake pump feed pipes to the tank, R.I. (Only installation).
connect the brake control pipes to the relative
block, top up the oil level in the tank and proceed
-- Carry out operation 9011410--Safety frame
with bleeding operations.
roof R.I. (Only installation).
-- Refit the four hoses to the steering circuit pipes.
-- Carry out operation 9010022--Hood opening
R.I. (Only installation).
-- Carry out operation 9010084--Hood guard R.I.
(Only installation).
OP. 90 114 10
SAFETY FRAME ROOF
Removal
WARNING
gloves and shoes.
Proceed as follows.
1. Remove the six retaining bolts (1) and the roof (2)
from the frame (3).
Installation 27810
27
WARNING
Proceed as follows.
2. Fit the roof (2) on the frame (3), and tighten the
six retaining bolts (1).
OP. 90 150 10
CAB ASSEMBLY WITH PLATFORM
DANGER
equipment
lifted.
WARNING
gloves and shoes.
Removal
Proceed as follows.
1. Carry out operation 9010022--Hood opening

2. Carry out operation 9010080--Protective grill

3. Remove the plug (1) and drain off the engine

cooling system refrigerant.
4. Carry out operation 1025444--Exhaust pipe

R.I. (Only removal). 27644
28
5. Loosen the clamp retaining bolts (1) and detach
the red and black pipes (2) of the cab heating sys-
tem.

27647
29
7. Loosen the nut (1) and disconnect the PTO
clutch control cable (2).
Note: for models with mechanical gears, detach
the gear clutch control cable.
8. Carry out operation 2113052--Creeper/shuttle

27650
30
9. Working from the lower LH side of the transmis-
sion gearbox, disconnect the handbrake return
rod (2) and the PTO control rod synchronized
with the gear (1).
Note: the tank is not shown in the photo in order
to highlight the two parts in question
10. Carry out operation 2113011--Range gear

27652
31
11. Carry out operation 2113010--Gear control

hand lever R.I. (Only removal).
12. Remove the clips (1), disconnect the fork control

rods (2) and remove the two retaining bolts (3).
27655
32
13. Note: if an electronic lift is fitted, reconnect the oil
delivery line to the electronic lift control valve.
27656
33
14. Remove the bracket (1), complete with control
rods, on the control valve housing.
27657
34
15. Note: if an electronic lift is fitted, remove the
springs (2) and detach the lift control lever rods
(1).
27658
35
16. Note: if a mechanical lift is fitted, remove the seal
ring and detach the LIFT--O--MATIC control rods.
27659
36
17. Note: if the differential lock is mechanically oper-
ated, disconnect the relative lever on the trans-
mission gearbox.
18. Remove the accelerator control cable (1) from

the injection pump.
19. Note: if an analogue control panel is fitted, dis-

connect the rev counter control rod
27660
37
20. Carry out operation 9010084--Hood guard R.I.
(Only removal).
21. Remove the four hoses (1) from the steering cir-
cuit pipes.
22. Remove the conditioning system pipe retaining

clamps.
27662
38
23. Disconnect the electrical connection, remove the
retaining bolts, remove the air conditioning com-
pressor (1) without disconnecting the piping, and
place in the cab.
27123
39
24. Remove the retaining bolt, remove the filter/dryer
(1) without disconnecting the piping, and place in
the cab.
27663
40
25. Remove the retaining wing nut, extract the condi-
tioning system condenser (1) from the bracket on
the engine radiator, without disconnecting the
piping.
NOTE: If necessary, also remove the bracket fitted

on the radiator.
27664
41
26. Position the condenser (1) on the cab floor, to-
gether with the other conditioning system com-
ponents that were disassembled in operations
23 and 24.
Secure to the brake pedals in order to avoid dam-
age during the cab lifting operation.
NOTE: The pipes are not disconnected so as to avoid

re--charging the system.
27665
42
control pipes (2) from the block (1).
27125
43
27126
44
29. Remove the four retaining bolts and the hood
rear support (1).
27666
45
30. Disconnect all electrical connections (1) con-
nected to the cab, the two electrical connections
connected to the brake block pressure switches
and the thermostarter connection.
27124
46
31. Disconnect the electrical connection (1) from the
window washer spray tank / multiple connector.
27667
47
32. Position a hydraulic jack (1) under the front part
of the fuel tank, remove the retaining bolt (3) and
the front clamp (2).
27668
48
33. Lower the hydraulic jack (1) by 7--8 cm (2 to 3
ins.) and unscrew the platform LH front retaining
bolt (2) then, from the opposite side, remove the
cab RH front retaining bolt.
27669
49
34. Remove the cab rear RH retaining bolt (1).
27670
50
35. Remove the spring clip, detach the cab RH door
shock absorber (1), so as to leave the door com-
pletely open.
27671
51
36. Position tool 295027 (1) inside the cab -- 18--20
centimeters from the central upright (cab centre
line) and, by means of a hoist and nylon sling (1),
lift the cab, making sure that all parts are discon-
nected. Check that the doors are locked in the
open position, to prevent contact between the
windows and the tool 295027.
37. Position the cab on a suitable support.

27672
52
Installation (Op. 90 150 10 ) -- Note: if a mechanical lift is fitted, refit the LIFT--
38. To re--fit the cab, proceed as follows. O--MATIC control rods by inserting the seal ring.
WARNING -- Note: if the differential lock is mechanically oper-
ated, reconnect the relative lever on the trans-
Use suitable tools to align hardware holes. NEVER mission gearbox .
-- Note: if a mechanical lift is fitted, refit the lift con-
trol lever rods and the securing springs.
-- Using a hoist, nylon sling and tool 295027 posi- -- Fit the bracket, complete with control rods, on the
tion the cab on the tractor. control valve housing.
-- Fit the front retaining bolts and the rear RH and -- Note: if an electronic lift is fitted, reconnect the oil
LH cab retaining bolts. delivery line to the electronic lift control valve.
-- Fit the shock absorbers on the RH and LH cab -- Fit the two bracket retaining bolts and the control
doors and insert the relative spring clips. rods to the forks, then position the clips.
-- Position a hydraulic jack under the front part of -- Carry out operation 2113010--Gear control
the fuel tank, raise the tank and fit the front secur- hand lever R.I. (Only installation).
ing clamp. -- Carry out operation 2113011--Range gear
-- Connect the electrical connection (1) from the control hand lever R.I. (Only installation).
window washer spray tank / multiple connector. -- Working from the lower LH side of the transmis-
-- Connect all electrical connections connected to sion gearbox, connect the handbrake return rod
the cab, the two electrical connections con- and the PTO control rod synchronized with the
nected to the brake block pressure switches and gear.
the thermostarter connection. -- Carry out operation 2113052--Creeper/shuttle
-- Fit the hood rear support and the four retaining control hand lever R.I. (Only installation).
bolts. -- Refit the PTO clutch control cable and tighten the
-- Connect the brake pump feed pipes to the rela- lock nut.
tive tank. -- Note: for models with mechanical gears, recon-
-- Connect the brake control pipes to the block. nect the gear clutch control cable.
-- If previously disassembled, fit the bracket on the -- Carry out operation 9011014--Instrument
engine radiator, then position the condenser, panel lower guard R.I. (Only installation).
complete with the relative piping, and lock in -- Refit the cab heating system red and black pipes
position with the wing nut. and tighten the clamp retaining bolts.
-- Fit the filter/dryer, complete with the relative pip- -- Carry out operation 1025444--Exhaust pipe
ing and tighten the retaining bolt. R.I. (Only installation).
-- Fit the conditioning system compressor, com- -- Carry out operation 9010080--Protective grill
plete with the relative piping, fit the retaining bolts R.I. (Only installation).
and connect the electrical connection.
-- Carry out operation 9010022--Hood opening
-- Refit the four hoses to the steering circuit pipes.
R.I. (Only installation).
-- Fit new retaining clamps on the conditioning sys-
-- Screw on the plug and fill up the engine cooling
tem pipes.
system with refrigerant.
-- Carry out operation 9010084--Hood guard R.I.
-- Fill up the brake fluid tank and reposition the clos-
(Only installation).
ing plug.
-- Reconnect the accelerator control cable to the in-
jection pump. -- Bleed the air from the brake system and carry out
the conditioning system functional tests.
-- Note: if an analogue control panel is fitted, recon-
nect the rev counter control rod.
OP. 90 156 14 -- 90 156 28
CAB WINDOWS
Replacement of glued cab windows
Removal
WARNING
gloves and shoes.
Proceed as follows.
1. If fitted (and if possible), remove any window sup-

port blocks present.
2. Thread the cutting wire (1, fig. 53) into the tool
and lock in position.
3. From inside the cab push the cutting wire (1,

fig. 53) through the adhesive (2) between the
27870
window and its surround.
53
4. Secure the wire (1, fig. 54) to the handgrip (2).
27871
54
5. Lock the tool on the adhesive (see fig. A). Keep
the wire close to the window and pull on the hand-
grip (2,fig. 55).
6. Repeat this operation until the window is com-

pletely detached. Make long cuts on straight sec-
tions and short cuts around corners to prevent
the window from breaking.
7. Using suction cups, remove the window and

place on a suitable surface to avoid damage.
27872
55
8. Level the remaining adhesive on the window sur-
round, leaving a layer of 1 to 2 mm (1/16 in.).
9. Remove the adhesive from the window as de-

scribed in the previous operation.
NOTE: When replacing a broken window: remove

any fragments still attached to the cab and carry out
operations 1 -- 8.
10. Clean the window surround using a suitable sol-

vent. 27873
56
Installation
Proceed as follows.
1. Make sure that the contact area between the win-

dow and its surround is perfectly clean.
2. Apply the glass activator VP 04604 GURIT ES-

SEX on the edge of the window (contact area
with the adhesive) using the applicator supplied
(see fig. 57) and leave to dry thoroughly
(approx.15 minutes).
27874
57
3. Apply the glass primer Betaprime 5100 GURIT 60
ESSEX on the edge of the window (contact area (2.36 in.)
with the adhesive) using the applicator supplied
and leave to dry thoroughly (approx.15 minutes).
65
(2.55 in.)
4. Apply the metal plate primer Beta Wipe 4000
GURIT ESSEX on the window surround (contact 7.0
area with the adhesive) using the applicator sup- (2.75 in.)
plied (see fig. 30) and leave to dry thoroughly 3.0 (.118 in.)
(approx.15 minutes).
27875
5. Cut the spout on the adhesive dispenser as 58

shown in fig. 58 to obtain a triangular cross--sec-
tion bead.
6. Apply a bead of polyurethane based Betaseal

1703 Sprint GURIT ESSEX on the window (the
cross--section of the bead must be triangular,
with a base of 10 mm [.393 in.] and a height of 10
mm [.393 in.] ).
NOTE: Make sure that there are no areas where

adhesive is missing, otherwise water may penetrate.
7. Insert the window support blocks (if fitted).
8. Using suction cups, position the window and its

surround and use clamps to apply uniform pres-
sure, providing a 4 mm (.157 in.) thickness of
adhesive and to ensure perfect adhesion.
NOTE: Leave the clamps in place for 4 hours until the

adhesive has completely polymerized. To ensure ef-
ficient bonding, do not move the cab or tractor during
this period.
OP. 90 160 16
RIGHT OR LEFT--HAND UPRIGHT SEALS
Removal
WARNING
gloves and shoes.
Proceed as follows.
1. Remove the six retaining plugs (1) and the LH lat-

eral seal (2).
27675
59
2. Remove the six retaining plugs (1) and the RH

lateral seal (2), without disconnecting the switch
electrical connections.
Installation
WARNING
27676
60
Proceed as follows.
3. Fit the RH lateral seal (2, fig. 60) and the six new
retaining plugs (1).
4. Fit the LH lateral seal (2, fig. 59) and the six new
retaining plugs (1).
OP. 90 160 60
CAB CEILING
Removal
WARNING
gloves and shoes.
Proceed as follows.
1. Carry out operation 9016016--Right or left--

hand upright seals R.I. (Only removal).
2. Carry out operation 8812010--Sun shade R.I.

(Only removal).
3. Remove the three retaining bolts (1) and the out-

er frame (2) of the cab air conditioning control
unit.
4. Carry out operation 5551422--Cab lighting

support R.I. (Only removal).
27679
61
5. Carry out operation 5551234--Loudspeakers

6. Remove two retaining screws (1) and the bracket

on the cab radio (2).
27684
62
7. Carry out operation 5020614--Cab air inlet
vents R.I. (Only removal).
8. Remove the 19 plastic screws (1) and the two re-

taining screws (2) that retain the cab ceiling fit-
ting.
27686
63
9. Remove the cab ceiling fitting (1) through the rear

window.
Installation (Op. 90 160 60)
WARNING
USE YOUR FINGERS OR HANDS. 27687
64
-- Proceed as follows. -- Carry out operation 5551234--Loudspeakers

R.I. (Installation).
-- Fit the cab ceiling, inserting through the rear win-

dow. -- Carry out operation 5551422--Cab lighting
support R.I. (Installation).
-- Fit the 19 plastic screws and the two retaining

screws of the cab ceiling. -- Fit the outer frame of the cab air conditioning con-
trol unit and the three retaining bolts .
-- Carry out operation 5020614--Cab air inlet

vents R.I. (Installation). -- Carry out operation 8812010--Sun shade R.I.
(Installation).
-- Fit the two retaining screws and the bracket on

the cab radio. -- Carry out operation 9016016--Right or left--
hand upright seals R.I. (Installation).
OP. 88 120 10
SUN SHADE
Removal
CAUTION
gloves and shoes.
Proceed as follows.
1. Remove the two screws (3) and the three plastic

caps (1) that secure the sunshade in position, 27677
complete with the support (2).
65
2. Remove the sun shade, complete with the sup-

port (1).
Installation
WARNING
27678
66
Proceed as follows.
3. Fit the sun shade, complete with the support (1,

fig. 66).
4. Secure the sun shade, complete with the sup-

port(1, fig. 65), using the three plastic caps (2)
and the two screws (3).

Manual Tractor New Hollan NT75D PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Manual Tractor New Hollan NT75D PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

TN55D, TN55S, TN65D, TN65S,

TN70D, TN70S, TN75D, TN75S

SECTION 23 - FWD TRANSFER BOX AND AUTO FWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

SECTION 25 - FRONT AXLE (FWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

SECTION 27 - REAR MECHANICAL DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

SECTION 31 - MECHANICAL POWER TAKE-OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

SECTION 33 - BRAKING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

SECTION 35 - HYDRAULIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

SECTION 44 - AXLES AND WHEELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

SECTION 50 - CAB AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

SECTION 55 - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

© 2005 CNH America LLC 87059388 3/05

Section Description Page

Section Description Page

Chapter 1 -- Engine (Continued)

Section Description Page

Section Description Page

Chapter 1 -- Mechanical Transmission (8 x 8) and (16 x 16)

Section Description Page

Chapter 2 -- Power Shuttle Transmission (8 x 8 and 16 x 16 versions)

Section Description Page

Chapter 3 -- Power Shuttle Transmission Calibration,

Section Description Page

Chapter 3 -- Power Shuttle Transmission Calibration,

Section Description Page

Chapter 1 -- FWD Transfer Box

Section Description Page

Chapter 2 -- Auto FWD, Calibration and Diagnostics

Section Description Page

Chapter 1 -- Front Axle (Super Steer Axle)

Section Description Page

Chapter 1 -- Front Axle (Super Steer Axle) (Continued)

Section Description Page

Chapter 2 -- Front Axle (FWD)

Section Description Page

Chapter 2 -- Front Axle (FWD) (Continued)

Section Description Page

Chapter 1 -- Rear Mechanical Transmission

Section Description Page

Chapter 1 -- Mechanical Power Take-off

Section Description Page

SECTION 31 -- MECHANICAL POWER TAKE-OFF

Chapter 2 -- PTO Servo-Assist Valve

Section Description Page

Chapter 1 -- Braking System

Section Description Page

Chapter 1 -- High Pressure System Description and Operation

Operation Description Page

Chapter 1 -- High Pressure System Description and Operation

Operation Description Page

Chapter 2 -- High Pressure System Overhaul and Adjustment

Operation Description Page

Chapter 3 -- Low-Pressure System Description and Operation

Operation Description Page

SECTION 35 -- HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Chapter 4 -- Low-Pressure System Test Fitting Locations

Operation Description Page

Chapter 5 -- Electronically Controlled Hydraulic Lift

Section Description Page

Chapter 5 -- Electronically Controlled Hydraulic Lift (Continued)

Section Description Page

Chapter 6 -- Trailer Brake Control Valves

Operation Description Page